Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924012536243 
 

 DATE 
 
 DUE 
 
 
 i'^'nm'-,!!! -■- 
 
 
 
 ^m 
 
 ^W^ 
 
 
 
 { 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JAN 2 
 
 ! 2007 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 GAYLORD 
 
 
 
 PRINTED IN U.S.A. 
 
 i >t i ft i< WB i« rti»r i » MJiaiafe^.a^ -i^ 
 
 Cornell University Library 
 PA 258.B46 
 
 Beginner's Greek book, 
 
 3 1924 012 536 243 
 
A B r A t 2 )~\ & I K J\ 
 
 f ^ k fir 
 
Z'^Croos YpiG-los d^^ oZ 
 
 U f oc, 
 
 do I q P 
 
 
 FRAGILE DOES NOT 
 CIRCULATE 
 
GREEK SERIES FOR COLLEGES AND SCHOOLS 
 
 EDITED 
 UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF 
 
 HERBERT WEIR SMYTH, Ph.D. 
 
 ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY 
 
VOLUMES OF THE SERIES 
 
 GREEK GRAMMAR. By the Editor. 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. Prof. Allen R. Benner, Phillips Academy, An- 
 
 dover; and the Editor. $i.!i5. 
 BRIEF GREEK SYNTAX. Prof. Louis Bcvier, Jr., Rutgers College. $0.90. 
 GREEK PROSE READER. Prof. F. E. Woodruff, Bowdoin College, and Prof. J. 
 
 W. Hewitt, Wesleyan University. 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION FOR SCHOOLS. Clarence W. Gleason, 
 
 Volkmann School, Boston. $0.80. 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION FOR COLLEGES. Prof. Edward H. 
 
 Spieker, Johns Hopkins University. $1.30. 
 AESCHYLUS. Agamemnon. Prof Paul Shorey, University of Chicago. 
 AESCHYLUS. Prometheus. Prof J. E. Harry, University of Cincinnati. $1.50. 
 ARISTOPHANES. Clouds. Dr. L. L. Forman, Cornell University. 
 DEMOSTHENES. On the Crown. Prof Milton W. Humphreys, University 
 
 of Virginia. 
 EURIPIDES. IpHIGENIA in TaURIS. Prof William N. Bates, University of 
 
 Pennsylvania. $1.25. 
 EURIPIDES. Medea. Prof Mortimer Lamson Earle, Columbia University. $1.25. 
 HERODOTUS. Books VII.-VIII. Prof Charles Forster Smith and Prof Arthur 
 
 Gordon Laird, University of Wisconsin. $1.75. 
 HOMER. Iliad. Prof J. R. S. Stcrrett, Cornell University. 
 
 Books L-III. and Selections. $1.60. Books I.-HI. $1.20. 
 HOMER. Odyssey. Prof Charles B. Gulick, Harvard University. 
 LYSIAS. Prof Charles D. Adams, Dartmouth College. $t.5o. 
 
 PLATO. Apology AND CrITO. Prof Isaac Flagg, University of California. $1.40. 
 PLATO. EuTHYPHRO. Prof William A. Heidel, Wesleyan University. $1.00. 
 THEOCRITUS. Prof Henry R. Fairclough and Prof Augustus T. Murray, Leland 
 
 Stanford Jr. University. 
 THUCYDIDES. Books II.-III. Prof W. A. Lamberton, University of Penn- 
 sylvania. $1.75. 
 THUCYDIDES. Books VI.-VII. Prof E. D. Perry, Columbia University. 
 XENOPHON. Anabasis. Books I.-IV. Dr. M. W. Mather, late Instructor in 
 
 Harvard University, and Prof J. W. Hewitt, Wesleyan University. $1.50. 
 XENOPHON. Hellenica (Selections). Prof Carleton L. Brownson, College of 
 
 the City of New York. $1.65. 
 XENOPHON. Memorabilia. Prof. W. W. Baker, Haverford College. 
 GREEK ARCHAEOLOGY. Prof Harold N. Fowler, Western Reserve University, 
 
 and Prof. James R. Wheeler, Columbia University. $2.00. 
 GREEK LITERATURE. Dr. Wilmer Cave Wright, Bryn Mawr College. $1.50. 
 GREEK PUBLIC LIFE. Prof Henry A. Sill, Cornell University. 
 GREEK RELIGION. Arthur Fairbanks, Ph.D., Litt.D., Director of the Boston 
 
 Museum of Fine Arts. $1.50. 
 GREEK SCULPTURE. Prof Rufus B. Richardson, formerly Director of the Ameri- 
 can School of Classical Studies, Athens. $1.50. 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE GREEK DRAMA. William Fenwick Harris, 
 
 late Assistant Professor in Harvard University. 
 
 BEGINNER'S NEW TESTAMENT GREEK BOOK. Prof William H. 
 P. Hatch, General Theological Seminary, New York. 
 
 Others to be announced later. 
 
VOLUMES OF THE SERIES 
 GREEK GRAMMAR. By the Editor. 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. Prof. Allen R. Benner, Phillips Academy, An- 
 
 dover; and the Editor. $1.25. 
 BRIEF GREEK SYNTAX. Prof. Louis Bevier, Jr., Rutgers College. $0.90. 
 GREEK PROSE READER. Prof. F. E. Woodruff, Bowdoin College, and Prof. J. 
 
 W. Hewitt, Wesleyan University. 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION FOR SCHOOLS. Clarence W. Glcason, 
 
 Volkmann School, Boston. $0.80. 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION FOR COLLEGES. Prof. Edward H. 
 
 Spieker, Johns Hopkins University. $1.30. 
 AESCHYLUS. Agamemnon. Prof Paul Shorey, University of Chicago. 
 AESCHYLUS. Prometheus. Prof J. E. Harry, University of Cincinnati. $1.50. 
 ARISTOPHANES. Clouds. Dr. L. L. Forman, Cornell University. 
 DEMOSTHENES. On the Crown. Prof Milton W. Humphreys, University 
 
 of Virginia. 
 EURIPIDES. IpHIGENIA in TaURIS. Prof. William N. Bates, University of 
 
 Pennsylvania. $1.25. 
 EURIPIDES. Medea. Prof Mortimer Lamson Earle, Columbia University. $i.2S. 
 HERODOTUS. Books VII.-VIII. Prof Charles Forster Smith and Prof Arthur 
 
 Gordon Laird, University of Wisconsin. $r.7S. 
 HOMER. Iliad. Prof. J. R. S. Sterrett, Cornell University. 
 
 Books L-III. and Selections. $1.60. Books I.-IIL $1.20. 
 HOMER. Odyssey. Prof. Charles B. Gulick, Harvard University. 
 LYSIAS. Prof Charles D. Adams, Dartmouth College. $1.50. 
 
 PLATO. Apology AND CrITO. Prof. Isaac Flagg, University of California. $1.40. 
 PLATO. EUTHYPHRO. Prof. William A. Heidel, Wesleyan University. $1.00. 
 THEOCRITUS. Prof Henry R. Fairclough and Prof Augustus T. Murray, Leland 
 
 Stanford Jr. University. 
 THUCYDIDES. Books II.-III. Prof. W. A. Lamberton, University of Penn- 
 sylvania. $r.75. 
 THUCYDIDES. Books VI.-VII. Prof E. D. Perry, Columbia University. 
 
 XENOPHON. Anabasis. Books I.-IV. Dr. M. W. Mather, late Instructor in 
 Harvard University, and Prof J. W. Hewitt, Wesleyan University. $1.50. 
 
 XENOPHON. Hellenica (Selections). Prof Carleton L. Brownson, College of 
 the City of New York. $1.65. 
 
 XENOPHON. Memorabilia. Prof W. W. Baker, Haverford College. 
 
 GREEK ARCHAEOLOGY. Prof Harold N. Fowler, Western Reserve University, 
 and Prof. James R. Wheeler, Columbia University. $2.00. 
 
 GREEK LITERATURE. Dr. Wilmer Cave Wright, Bryn Mawr College. $1.50. 
 
 GREEK PUBLIC LIFE. Prof Henry A. Sill, Cornell University. 
 
 GREEK RELIGION. Arthur Fairbanks, Ph.D., Litt D., Director of the Boston 
 Museum of Fine Arts. $1,50. 
 
 GREEK SCULFrURE. Prof Rufus B. Richardson, formerly Director of the Ameri- 
 can School of Classical Studies, Athens. $r.5o, 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE GREEK DRAMA. William Fenwick Harris, 
 late Assistant Professor in Harvard University. 
 
 BEGINNER'S NEW TESTAMENT GREEK BOOK. Prof William H. 
 P. Hatch, General Theological Seminary, New York. 
 
 Others to be announced later. 
 
] 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 BY 
 ALLEN ROGERS BENNER 
 
 PROFESSOR OF GREEK IN PHILLIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVER 
 AND 
 
 HERBERT WEIR SMYTH, Ph.D. 
 
 ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY 
 
 o!»{o 
 
 NEW YORK . CINCINNATI • CHICAGO 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 

 
 fi 
 
 
 Copyright, 1906, by 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY- 
 
 beginner's greek book, 
 w. p. 7 
 
PREFATORY SUGGESTIONS 
 
 This book contains all the grammar that is needed 
 by beginners in the first year of Greek. It is not at all 
 designed, however, to restrict or to replace the use of a 
 larger Greek Grammar in connection with the study of 
 the Anabasis and of Homer. Experience has shown that 
 the systematic (but not merely mechanical) study of gram- 
 mar is indispensable throughout the preparatory course if 
 the student is to deal successfully with the authors com- 
 monly read at a more advanced stage of his education. 
 With the view, therefore, that the larger grammar will be 
 used by the student after his first year, the makers of this 
 book have felt free to limit its contents to the strict essen- 
 tials of the language. The result has been to eliminate 
 some matters that are usually found in books intended 
 for beginners. 
 
 It has been found possible, and in fact advisable, to 
 omit altogether the paradigms of certain infrequent words. 
 Such are nouns and adjectives of the " Attic second de- 
 clension," rare contract nouns like 6<ttovv, and, in particu- 
 lar, the adjectives ;^a/3i«? and /j,eXa^. While adjectives in 
 -ew, -ea-aa, -ev are usual in Homer, ■x^apCei'i alone is rela- 
 tively common in standard Attic prose, but even there the 
 form x'^P^'^'^"' (and not y^apierra) shows that the word was 
 poetic in character. Of X"'P^'-^ there is but one occurrence 
 in the Anabasis (iii. 5- 12). A similar case is presented by 
 tie\a<i, which occurs twice in the same work (iv, 5. 13, iv. 
 5. 15). The only other adjective which is declined like 
 
 S 
 
6 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 /Lie'Xa?, namely the poetic rdXai;, does not occur in the 
 Anabasis at all. It is obviously inadvisable to impede the 
 beginner's progress by requiring him to memorize para- 
 digms of these and similar words. 
 
 In the case of some words which are generally required 
 of beginners, opinions may justly differ. Such words, if 
 omitted from the Lessons of this book, are printed in the 
 Summary of Forms (after the Lessons), out of deference 
 to the opinion of teachers who may wish to use them. 
 The list includes vaw, omitted from the Lessons with some 
 hesitation; also Kepa^, 'IipaKl\.rj<;, Zev^, the verb KdOrifiai, 
 and one word not found in the Anabasis, vedvldi (for which 
 Hewd? is substituted in the paradigms of Lesson XII). 
 
 The retention of the dual number in the paradigms may 
 be thought inconsistent with the design of a simple book, 
 particularly as first-rate books, like Kaegi's Kurzgefasste 
 grieckische Schulgrammatik, regularly omit the dual from 
 the paradigms proper. In this book the dual has been 
 retained out of respect to a widespread opinion among 
 American teachers, that since the dual is needed for the 
 study of Homer, it is most economically memorized at 
 the outset. Those teachers, however, who prefer to omit 
 the forms of the dual may readily do so, inasmuch as no 
 instances of its use have been introduced into the exercises. 
 
 Regarding the development of the forms of the verb, 
 special attention is called to the fact that the most fre- 
 quent tenses as well as the tenses adapted to initial study 
 are the present (and imperfect), future, and aorist. Only 
 after these have been in some degree mastered are the 
 perfect tenses introduced in the Lessons.^ And the per- 
 
 ^ Regard to the symmetrical development of the subject has caused the 
 introduction of the comparatively uncommon future passive before the perfect 
 is taken up. 
 
PREFATORY SUGGESTIONS 7 
 
 feet itself is much simplified by the omission of some 
 forms which are commonly given in the Grammars {e.g. 
 ~K£KvKw, \ekvKoifii), but which rarely occur in the reading 
 of most students. Attention is also called to the early 
 introduction of infinitives and participles and of compound 
 verbs. In the first fifty Lessons the prefix of a compound 
 verb is regularly separated from the verb proper by a 
 hyphen. 
 
 In matters of syntax the rule of the Editors has been to 
 give early preference to the most common idioms as far 
 as is possible in a book where precedence must obviously 
 be given to the development of forms. In determining 
 questions of the relative frequency of syntactical usages, 
 the exhaustive work of Joost {Sprachgebrauch Xenophons 
 in der Atiabasis) has been of great assistance, and the 
 placing of several usages has been settled by it. The 
 Editors wish also to make mention of Bennett and Bris- 
 tol's manual on The Teaching of Latin and Greek in the 
 Secondary School, which they have found suggestive as to 
 the presentation of both forms and syntax. 
 
 Certain constructions that are shown by Joost to be 
 comparatively rare in the Anabasis are omitted from the 
 Lessons. <))0dva) with the participle will serve as an ex- 
 ample, a construction regularly set before beginners and 
 invariably difficult to them. Yet this construction occurs 
 but four times in the seven books of the Anabasis, and in 
 the first four books only twice (i. 3. 14, iii. 4. 49). Fur- 
 ther, these instances are regularly explained, where they 
 occur, in the notes of our best American editions. 
 
 A glance at the Table of Contents will show the early 
 prominence given to certain important constructions. 
 
 It is suggested that the teacher should not assign the 
 Avbole Introduction at the outset, but only such parts of 
 
8 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 it as are immediately necessary, particularly the alphabet 
 and the subjects of pronunciation and accent. The ar- 
 rangement in Lessons or Chapters is solely for conven- 
 ience, to mark divisions of the subject where exercises 
 may properly be introduced. One class may do a whole 
 Chapter, another class may do no more than half a Chap- 
 ter, for a day's lesson. The ability of the class will there- 
 fore determine the length of the lessons, which should be 
 assigned by the numbered sections. 
 
 The vocabularies contain only such words as are used 
 by Xenophon, with preference given to the commoner 
 words of the Anabasis. 
 
 The exercises for translation from English into Greek 
 have been made short designedly. For it is desirable that 
 the teacher should have the class turn the English render- 
 ing of the Greek sentences themselves back into Greek 
 without the aid of the book, — an unexcelled method of 
 teaching this part of the subject. Teachers who so desire 
 may omit some sentences if time fails for all. Lessons 
 L to LX have been specially arranged so that the second 
 division of each exercise may be omitted altogether, or 
 may be taken up in connection with review work. 
 
 On the completion of the sixty Lessons, the student 
 should be able to translate, without much difficulty, simple 
 Attic prose. Many students will be found competent to 
 begin at once the first Book of Xenophon's Anabasis. 
 But if, in the judgment of the teacher, the class is not 
 ripe for this work, a simplified text of the Anabasis will 
 make the transition from the Beginner's Book easier. 
 
 • For the use of such teachers and classes there have 
 been provided the simplified Selections from the Anabasis 
 which follow the Greek Lessons in this book. It is hoped 
 that they are so remote from the introductory chapters of 
 
PREFATORY SUGGESTIONS 9 
 
 the Anabasis as not utterly to spoil the freshness of Xeno- 
 phon's narrative when the student takes up the original 
 work. On the other hand, they are passages that will 
 well stand re-reading when the student meets them again. 
 All the new words that occur in the Selections will be 
 found in the Vocabulary. 
 
 The directions about Greek pronunciation in §§ i and 
 22 are for practical use. As a matter of fact, they are not 
 designed to reproduce, in every particular, the pronuncia- 
 tion of Greek current in the fifth and fourth centuries B.C., 
 — partly becivse we do not know how every letter was 
 then sounded, and partly because some of the known 
 sounds are too difficult for beginners. Pedantry in pro- 
 nunciation is an abomination ; but every teacher should be 
 at least familiar with the fact that, while most of the pro- 
 nunciations recommended in this book are approximately 
 those of the period from Pericles to Demosthenes, certain 
 others are distinctly later and concessions to established 
 usage. 
 
 Thus a divergence between the ancient and the modern 
 practice of pronunciation is illustrated by the sounds ^, %, 
 and Q. These letters were anciently pronounced respec- 
 tively as ph in 'u/^eaval,' kh in ' bat/c'/iand,' and th in 
 ' ho/'^ouse ' ; in Greek, however, both sounds occur in the 
 same syllable. When two aspirates (<^, %, Q) came together, 
 probably only one h (the second) was heard ; thus, Sicf>0oy- 
 70? was pronounced Siirdoyyo'; (^Bnrr6jyo<s). Probably not 
 until after 300 a.d. were </>, %, and 6 pronounced as in 
 '/"^iHp,' German ' a.c/t,' and '///eater.' The latter are the 
 sounds in modern Greek. ^ was probably sounded sd, 
 though there is some evidence that it was sounded as dj ; 
 in HeHenistic times it certainly was equivalent to z in 
 '^•eal,' and is so sounded in modern Greek. 
 
10 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Short a, I, V differed in sound from the long a, i, v only 
 in being less prolonged. The vowel e was evidently 
 sounded like French /, as in dont/. eo was not diph- 
 thongal like English o (i.e. o with a vanishing u sound), 
 but rather like o in the French encore. Greek o was 
 sounded like o in French mot. 
 
 The teacher is urged to make every effort to preserve 
 the proper quantity, which is often disregarded in Ameri- 
 can pronunciation of Greek; special care is required to 
 prevent an accented vowel from being sounded as long 
 when it is short ; e.g. 0t'\o? may easily be mispronounced 
 felos, instead of filos. 
 
 These Lessons are the result of considerable experience 
 in teaching Greek to beginners ; and each section has been 
 tested in the class room before it was incorporated in this 
 book. 
 
 The Editors gratefully acknowledge the criticisms which 
 they have received from Mr. Horace M. Poynter of Phil- 
 lips Academy and Mr. Louis E. Lord of Oberlin College, 
 who have read the proof sheets of the Lessons. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 Introduction: the alphabet of Attic Greek; pronunciation; accent; 
 Greek words in English; classification of consonants (mutes and 
 liquids); elision; crasis; aspiration; -v movable; punctuation 
 marks; number; gender; case; voice; mood; tense . . -17 
 
 LESSON 
 
 I. Present indicative and infinitive of u-verbs in the active voice. 
 
 Recessive accent 29 
 
 II. Declension of o-stems. Common constructions. Article as pos- 
 sessive pronoun . . . 31 
 
 III. Declension of o-stems {continued') ..... 34 
 
 IV. Declension of o-stems {^continued and reviewed'). Nouns and 
 
 adjectives declined together. Attributive position. Predi- 
 cate position. Attributive phrases. Agreement of verb 
 with neuter plural subject. Position ofpossessive genitive . 37 
 V. Imperfect indicative of u-verbs in the active voice. Augment. 
 Second aorist indicative and infinitive of w-verbs in the active 
 voice. Article with name of person ..... 40 
 VI. Declension of a-stems. Nominatives in -1;. Infinitive used as 
 
 object of verbs meaning wish, command, etc. ... 45 
 VII. Present indicative and infinitive of djiX I am. Enclitics. Sim- 
 ple conditions. Predicate substantive without article . . 48 
 VIII. Simple sentences in indirect discourse after verbs of saying 
 
 (<p'r)<rl and e<pri) and thinking. Dative with adjectives . 51 
 
 IX. Declension of o-stems («»^j«««if). Nominatives in -a. Review 
 of adjectives of the 0- and a-declensions. Adjectives of two 
 endings in -os, -ok. Dative of possession .... 54 
 X. Some pronouns : atfris, meanings and uses; iJXXos, Ss. Posses^ 
 sive adjectives. Compound verbs. Rules of euphony (ap 
 plying to aiv and ^i" in composition). Agreement of relative 
 
 Dative with compounds 58 
 
 XI. Declension of o-stems {continued). Nominatives in -a. In 
 strumental dative {means and manner). Accusative of 
 extent of time or space. Article with name of country . 63 
 II 
 
BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 LESSON 
 
 XII. Declension of a-stems (co«ft«««(/). Masculines in -7;s and -os. 
 Clauses of result 
 
 XIII. Future indicative and infinitive of u-verbs in the active voice. 
 
 Rules of writing and euphony (applying to mute themes) : 
 mutes before sigma. Genitive of time. Future infinitive 
 in indirect discourse and after fiiWui . . . • 
 
 XIV. First aorist indicative and infinitive of w-verbs in the active 
 
 voice, iirel and iireiSii meaning when with imperfect or 
 
 aorist indicative 
 
 XV. The demonstrative pronouns. Uses of the demonstratives. 
 Predicate position of the demonstratives. Name of river in 
 attributive position. Partitive genitive. Dative of time 
 Cognate accusative ..... . 
 
 XVI. General review. Summary of previous vocabularies. Alpha 
 privative ......... 
 
 XVII. Consonant declension. Stems ending in a mute (palatal or 
 labial), fiia-os in predicate position .... 
 
 XVIII. Consonant declension {continued). Stems ending in a mute 
 (lingual). Genitive of separation .... 
 
 XIX. Declension of present, future, and aorist active participles of 
 the u-verb. Declension of &v. Attributive participles, 
 Substantive participles. Circumstantial participles of time, 
 cause, etc. Supplementary participles v\ith rvyxdva . 
 XX. Consonant declension {eontinued) . Stems ending in a liquid 
 Declension of adjectives in -wj/, -ov. Infinitive with Set, 
 Xpi5, e^eariv, etc. . ... 
 
 XXI. Pronouns {contimied). The interrogative ris. The indefinite 
 Tis. The indefinite relative Strris. The predicate genitive, 
 Infinitive with o.vi.'yKi] and ffipa ..... 
 XXII. The subjunctive (present and aorist) active of u-verbs. Tenses 
 of the subjunctive. More vivid future conditions. Warning 
 future conditions. Purpose clauses. Hortatory subjunc 
 tive ......... 
 
 XXIII. Present subjunctive of d\x,l. Uses of the subjunctive {contin 
 
 tied). Conditional relative sentences : more vivid future 
 
 XXIV. The optative (present, future, and aorist) active of u-verbs. 
 
 Tenses of the optative. Simple sentences in indirect dis' 
 course after verbs that take dfri or us that . 
 XXV. Present optative of ilid. Uses of the optative {continued') 
 Potential optative. Less vivid future conditions. Purpose 
 clauses in the secondary sequence . . . . 
 
 66 
 
 69 
 72 
 
 75 
 80 
 
 83 
 87 
 
 91 
 
 105 
 
 "3 
 
 118 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 13 
 
 LESSON 
 
 XXVI. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 XXVIII. 
 
 XXIX. 
 
 XXX. 
 
 XXXI. 
 XXXII. 
 
 XXXIII. 
 XXXIV. 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 XXXVI. 
 
 XXXVII. 
 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 XXXIX. 
 
 Consonant declension (^continued'). Stems ending in 
 Sigma. Adjectives of two endings with stems in -eir. 
 Potential optative in indirect discourse. Genitive of 
 measure. Accusative of specification . . . . 1 20 
 
 Declension of stems ending in iota or upsilon (included 
 under the consonant declension). Adverbial accusative. 
 Attraction of the relative . . . . . .126 
 
 Adjectives of the consonant declension and o-declension 
 combined. Declension of ^5i)s and ttSs. Nouns with 
 stems in -ev or -ov. Omission of the copula. pa<ri\eis 
 without the article. ttSs in predicate position, etc. . 129 
 
 The imperative active of u-verbs. Imperative of ei/il. 
 Tenses of the imperative. Declension of iyd and ffi. 
 Uses of personal pronouns. Accent of successive en- 
 clitics. Predicate position of the possessive genitive of 
 personal pronouns. Prohibitions, iirel and 8ti causal 133 
 
 The present middle system of u-verbs. Meanings of the 
 middle voice. Deponent verbs. Dative of associa- 
 tion 138 
 
 Syncopated nouns. Dative of respect .... 142 
 
 The second aorist middle and the future middle systems of 
 w-verbs. Future system of el/il. Future participle ex- 
 pressing purpose. &JS with future participle. Infinitive 
 with adjectives ol fitness and ability .... 145 
 
 Consonant declension (continued). Some important irregu- 
 lar nouns, fieyas and woXis . . . . . .150 
 
 The first aorist middle system of w-verbs. Indirect ques- 
 tions introduced by the interrogative tIs, the indefinite 
 relative Sa-ris, and other interrogative words . . . 153 
 
 Comparison of adjectives. Declension of comparatives in 
 ■av. Genitive of comparison. Accusative of the way 
 by which. Superlative translated by very . . -157 
 
 Comparison of adjectives {continued'). Irregular compari- 
 son. Double questions 161 
 
 Formation and comparison of adverbs. Irregular adverbs. 
 
 Genitive after adverbs of place 164 
 
 Reflexive pronouns. The reciprocal pronoun. The indi- 
 rect reflexive dl. Attributive position of the possessive 
 genitive of reflexive pronouns 168 
 
 The passive voice of u-verbs. First aorist passive system. 
 Euphonic laws of mutes before mutes. Declension of 
 
14 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 participles in -eis. Deponent passives. Agent expressed by 
 uTri and genitive. Construction after passive of X^w jay 172 
 XL. The first future passive system. Present general conditions. 
 Conditional relative protasis in present time. Genitive 
 absolute. Genitive of value. Dative of cause . . .177 
 XLI. The second aorist passive system. Dative of degree of 
 
 difference 181 
 
 XLII. The second future passive system. Past general conditions. 
 Conditional relative protasis in past time. Imperfect in- 
 dicative in protasis of past general relative condition . 184 
 
 XLIII. Numerals. Declension of numerals. Article with " round " 
 
 numbers. Emphatic negations . . . . .188 
 
 XLIV. The first perfect and first pluperfect in the active voice. Re- 
 duplication. Declension of the perfect participle. Object 
 clauses after verbs oi fearing. Supplementary participle 
 after verbs of beginning, etc. ; after verbs of perception. 
 Supplementary participle in indirect discourse . . . 192 
 XLV. The second perfect and the second pluperfect active. Attic 
 reduplication. Reduplication vfith il-. Supplementary 
 participle with 5^X6! kanv, etc. ..... 199 
 
 XLVI. The perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of vowel 
 themes. Infinitive with yn^yitcTj/iai remember how, etc. 
 Dative of agent ........ 202 
 
 XLVII. Perfect middle and passive of mute themes. Euphonic rules : 
 mutes before p.. Sigma dropped between two con- 
 sonants .......... 206 
 
 XLVIII. The future perfect middle and passive. Meaning of future 
 perfect. Verbal adjectives in -Th% and -t^os. Dative of 
 agent with verbals in -t^os . . . . . .211 
 
 XLIX. Synopsis of the co-verb. Principal parts of typical verbs. 
 
 Some common suffixes of nouns and adjectives . . . 215 
 L. Contract nouns of the d-declension and of the o-declension. 
 Contract adjectives. The infinitive with the article used 
 as a noun .......... 221 
 
 LI. Contract verbs. Present system of voUu. Dissyllabic verbs 
 in -4(ii. Two accusatives after verbs of making, appoint- 
 ing; asking, depriving. Construction of Sok^u . . 224 
 LII. Present system of Ti/tdto. Irregular contract verbs in -dw. 
 Infinitive after verbs oi promising, hoping, and swearing. 
 Clauses introduced by conjunctions meaning while, until, 
 and before 228 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 IS 
 
 LESSON PAGE 
 
 LIU. Present system of SijXiw. Complex sentences in indirect 
 
 discourse .......... 233 
 
 LIV. Declension of contract participles. Object clauses introduced 
 
 by Sttws. Various idioms . . . . . 237 
 
 LV. The future and aorist of liquid themes. Some other verbs 
 that contract in the future, including verbs in -l^a. Un- 
 real suppositions . . ..... 240 
 
 LVI. The inflection of /ii-verbs : tarrifu, iirpiinriv, ^/Sijx, iir-4Spav, 
 
 Meanings of the tenses and voices of tariifu . . 244 
 
 LVII. The inflection of ;Ui-verbs {^continued) : rlBriiu, trifu. Delib- 
 erative subjunctive. Accusative absolute . . . 249 
 LVIII. The inflection of jiii-verbs (^continued) : SlSia/u, ii\uiv or 
 
 ^\wp, ^yvojv ......... 253 
 
 LIX. The inflection of /u-verbs {continued^ : deiKrv/u, ^Svv, KeT/juu. 
 
 Wishes 257 
 
 LX. Irregular ^u-verbs : el/jii, 4>r)ii.l, olSa, and el/il {completed and 
 
 reviewed') ......... 260 
 
 Selections from the Anabasis ......... 263 
 
 Summary of Forms . ._ 280 
 
 Summary of Syntax 328 
 
 Important Lists 337 
 
 Abbreviations 340 
 
 English-Greek Vocabulary ......... 34' 
 
 Greek-English Vocabulary and Index to the Lessons .... 357 
 
 English Index 391 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 THE ALPHABET OF ATTIC GREEK 
 
 Name 
 
 Form 
 
 Sound as in 
 
 Latin 
 
 Capitals 
 
 Letters 
 
 
 Equivalent 
 
 I. alpha 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 f (a) father \ 
 .(a) haha' , 
 
 a 
 
 beta 
 
 B 
 
 a 
 
 boy 
 
 b 
 
 gamma 
 
 r 
 
 7 
 
 gvc\ 
 
 g 
 
 delta 
 
 A 
 
 S 
 
 ddiy 
 
 d 
 
 epsilon 
 
 E 
 
 6 
 
 m^t 
 
 e 
 
 zeta 
 
 Z 
 
 f 
 
 ^eal, da^^e 
 
 z 
 
 eta 
 
 H 
 
 V 
 
 f/te 
 
 e 
 
 theta 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 //zeater 
 
 th 
 
 iota 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 ' (<) machme 1 . 
 (I) the first .? in Vernal J 
 
 kappa 
 
 K 
 
 K 
 
 /^eep _, 
 
 c 
 
 lambdn 
 
 A 
 
 X 
 
 /ed 
 
 1 
 
 mii 
 
 M 
 
 H' 
 
 w«an 
 
 m 
 
 nil 
 
 N 
 
 V 
 
 «ow 
 
 n 
 
 xi 
 
 H 
 
 1 
 
 2iX 
 
 X 
 
 omicron 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 omit 
 
 o 
 
 Pi- 
 
 ri 
 
 TT 
 
 pin 
 
 P 
 
 rho 
 
 p 
 
 P 
 
 run 
 
 r 
 
 sigma 
 
 2 
 
 0-? 
 
 Jit 
 
 s 
 
 tau 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 rin 
 
 t 
 
 iipsilon 
 
 T 
 
 V 
 
 Ger. T«r, Fr. tu'^ 
 
 y 
 
 phi 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 PhiWp 
 
 ph 
 
 chi 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 Ger. Sich, Scotch loch 
 
 ch 
 
 psi 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 topsy 
 
 ps 
 
 omega 
 
 €i 
 
 (O 
 
 vote 
 
 o 
 
 ^ The short vowel («) is less prolonged in sound than the long vowel (v). 
 
 beginner's GK. BK. — 2 1 7 
 
i8 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 2. The form ? is used at the end of a word ; in other 
 places o- is used. 
 
 The capital letters are used as initials of proper names. 
 In current practice they are not used at the beginning of 
 a sentence unless the sentence begins a paragraph or a 
 quotation. 
 
 3. There is no separate letter to represent English h. 
 But many Greek words begin with this sound, which is 
 indicated by writing a sign called the rough breathing over 
 the initial vowel of a word ; as opi^av horizon. If an initial 
 vowel is not pronounced with h, a smooth breathing is writ- 
 ten over it ; as avTiQeavi antithesis. These breathings are 
 not written over capital letters, but in front of them; as 
 'Opi^wv, 'AvTiffecni;. 
 
 4. Initial p regularly has the rough breathing {p = rfi); 
 as prjTwp rhetor. 
 
 ' 5. The letter 7 is pronounced ng when it comes before 
 «. 7. X) or ^. It is then called gamma nasal. Thus a^Kvpa 
 anchor, a-c}>iy^ sphinx, 
 
 6. Double consonants, so called because they unite two 
 sounds in one character, are f, which equals Sf^ dz ; 
 f, which equals ks (i.e. x); and -«|r, which equals ps. 
 
 7. The vowels are A E H I O T fl ; in small letters, 
 aerjiovQ). H (or rj) is the long form of E (or e); 
 li (or 0)) is the long form of O (or o). So this Hst 
 corresponds to the English: aeiou. The long and 
 short forms of o, t, and v are not distinguished by sepa- 
 rate characters ; but it is usual in grammars to mark 
 these vowels when longj^ thus: a, t, v. This is the prac- 
 tice in this book. 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 19 
 
 8. Each Greek word has as many syllables as it has 
 separate vowels or diphthongs (§ 22). This rule is the 
 same in Latin also. 
 
 g. In dividing .a word into syllables a consonant is 
 regularly written after the hyphen; and if there are two 
 or three consonants, they too are written after the hyphen, 
 provided they represent a combination which may begin 
 a Greek word. For illustrations see § 11. 
 
 a. A group formed of a mute (§ 27) and fx, or v, or iiv, 
 belongs after the hyphen ; as irpa-rfiia thing. 
 
 10. Greek words may end only in a vowel or in one of 
 these consonants : v, p, <; with | and y^. 
 
 EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION 
 
 II. Pronounce aloud the following words, referring to 
 the . table under § i for the equivalent English sounds. 
 The English transliterations in the second column may be 
 pronounced like Latin words (except in respect to accent) 
 after the Roman method ; U is the Latin y. 
 
 
 To BE ACCENTED THUS 
 
 Meaning 
 
 ve-KTap 
 
 n^-ktar 
 
 nectar 
 
 Se-a'7r6-T7]<; 
 
 de-spo'-tes 
 
 despot 
 
 TTO-TO-flOV 
 
 po-ta-mos' 
 
 river 
 
 \o-j^a-7o'? 
 
 lo-cha-gos' 
 
 captain 
 
 ^co-pi-ov 
 
 cko-ri'-on 
 
 stronghold 
 
 (j)(-Xoi 
 
 phi'-los 
 
 friend 
 
 ee-tk 
 
 the-os' 
 
 god 
 
 K^-flt) 
 
 ko'-me 
 
 village 
 
 0d-\aT-ra 
 
 tka'-lat-ta 
 
 sea 
 
 6 a-vrjp 
 
 ho a-ner' 
 
 the man 
 
 f) r^v-vq 
 
 he gii-ne' 
 
 the woman 
 
20 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 To BE ACCENTED THUS MEANING 
 
 ^-jxe-pa ke-me'-ra day 
 
 {/-■yjrrj-Xo? hii-pse-lo^ lofty 
 
 (f)d-\ar^^ pha!-langks phalanx 
 6-7n-ado-(f)v-\a^ o-pi-stho-phii -laks -Tear-guard 
 
 776-^09 pesos' afoot 
 
 Tu-TTTQ) til' -p to I strike 
 
 a-arpov a'-stron star 
 
 Ba-^v-Xmv Ba-bu-lot^ Babylon 
 
 ACCENT 
 
 12. Most Greek words are written with accents. The 
 acute accent is illustrated by the words in the preceding 
 exercise (§ ii). On inspection it will be seen that this 
 accent stands sometimes on the last syllable of a word, 
 sometimes on the last but one, and again on the last 
 but two. 
 
 13. When a word having the acute accent on its final 
 syllable is immediately followed by another word, without 
 any intervening mark of punctuation, the accent of the 
 first word is written thus, ' ; this is called the grave accent. 
 Thus ir^r]\6v 'x^copiov a lofty stronghold. The grave accent 
 is written on the last syllable only, and only under the 
 conditions just stated. 
 
 14. There is a third common mark of accentuation, 
 called the circumflex ("). It may stand on the last syl- 
 lable of a word, or on the last but one. It may not stand 
 on the last but two, as the acute may. And, what is very 
 important, it may stand only on a long vowel or a diph- 
 thong (§ 22). Hence, if a vowel has the circumflex accent, 
 no other mark to indicate its quantity is needed or used. 
 Thus o-t-T09 food. 
 

 INTRODUCTION 21 
 
 15. The last syllable of a word is called the ultima; 
 the last but one, the penult ; and the one before the 
 penult, the antepenult. 
 
 f. l6- The acute accent may stand on the ultima or the 
 penult or the antepenult. The circumflex accent may 
 stand on the ultima or the penult. The grave accent 
 stands on the ultima only. 
 
 /^ 17. There are three important rules of accent that must 
 / be magtered at the outset, in addition to the principles 
 I already stated. 
 
 I. The acute accent cannot stand on the antepenult 
 J when the ultima is long. 
 ^ 2. The circumflex accent cannot stand on the penult 
 when the ultima is long. 
 
 3. When the ultima is short, an accented penult has 
 the circumflex if it contains a long vowel or a diph- 
 thong (§ 14). 
 
 Illustrations of these rules are provided in §§ 11 and 24. 
 a. What accent a word has and where it stands must 
 be learned with the letters that spell the word itself. 
 
 18. Accent means to us a stress of the voice, i.e. force 
 of utterance. This is also what an accent mark means to 
 the native Greeks of to-day. So far as pronunciation goes, 
 we make no distinction between the acute, the grave, and 
 the circumflex accent. When originally invented and intro- 
 duced, however, the accent marks interpreted to foreigners 
 the tone ox pitch of the voice in pronouncing syllables. The 
 acute indicated a higher pitch ; the grave, a loiver pitch ; 
 and the circumflex, a higher followed by a lower pitch of 
 the voice on the same syllable. The spoken language was J 
 therefore melodious. 
 
2 2 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 19. When marks of both accent and breathing (§ 3) 
 belong to the same vowel, the accent mark, if acute, fol- 
 lows, the breathing ; if circumflex, is written directly over 
 the breathing. The accent, Uke the breathing, is writ- 
 ten in front of a capital letter, but over a small one. 
 Thus e^a outside ; r^aav they were ; ^IpK Iris. In the 
 case of a diphthong, both the accent and the breathing 
 must be written over the second vowel. Thus olvo<i wine. 
 
 a. The mark of diaeresis ( " ) indicates a separate pronunciation 
 of two successive vowels. Thus lyBvl to ox for a fish. 
 
 20. Not all Greek words have accents. There is one 
 small class of monosyllables, called proclitics, that are pro- 
 nounced with the words that follow them and so lack 
 accents of their own. Thus and f) of § 11. 
 
 21. There is another class of words, called enclitics, that 
 are pronounced with the words that precede them. These, 
 too, usually have no accents of their own. This subject is 
 taken up in §§ 103, 104, 105, 305. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS 
 
 22. The diphthongs are : 
 
 English Value. English Value 
 
 at ««'sle jjw t (f/te) -f 00 (m(7cn), 
 
 €1 Nei\ pronounced in close 
 
 ot oi\ succession 
 
 av hw^se ov xcioovi 
 
 €v e (m^) + 00 {moan), vc French huit, Enghsh 
 
 pronounced in close we 
 
 succession 
 a like simple d 
 V " " V 
 
 0) " " CO 
 
 This iota, which is written beneath the 
 other vowel and not pronounced, is 
 called iota subscript. 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 23 
 
 With capitals iota subscript is written in the same line, 
 but not pronounced. Thus "AtS»;s {i.e. q^Brji) Hades. 
 
 23. In quantity all diphthongs are long. But final -01 
 and -at are reckoned short in influencing the accent of a 
 penult or antepenult, — thus avOpwiroi, men, and oXvoi wines, 
 — except the adverb oXkoi at home and certain verb forms 
 (§ 2S3> 
 
 EXERCISE IN PRONUNCIATION 
 
 24. Pronounce aloud the following words, referring to 
 the tables under §§ i and 22 for the equivalent English 
 sounds : 
 
 /Sa-fft-Xew? 
 
 king 
 
 iJ-Z^et? 
 
 we 
 
 Zev? 
 
 Zeus 
 
 k-av-Tov 
 
 of himself 
 
 aTpd-Tev-jxa 
 
 army 
 
 iraC-w 
 
 I strike 
 
 ■k\oI-ov 
 
 boat 
 
 Si-Kai-co^ 
 
 justly 
 
 TTO-peC-d 
 
 journey 
 
 "Ke-Xv-Kvl-a 
 
 having loosed 
 
 X^^P 
 
 hand 
 
 7ro-Ta-/Lio) 
 
 to or for a river 
 
 ol-vo<i 
 
 wine 
 
 KW-fJ/Tj 
 
 to or for a village 
 
 0S-T09 
 
 this 
 
 rj-ixe-pa 
 
 to or for a day 
 
 OU-TO? 
 
 self, same 
 
 Xv-ov-criv 
 
 they loose 
 
 GREEK WORDS IN ENGLISH 
 
 25. I. Some scholars prefer to transliterate Greek proper 
 names directly into English. Thus AtV;\;u\o? Aischylos ; 
 @0VKvSiSr)^ Thoukydides ; K\eapxo<; Klearchos ; 'A\Kaio<; 
 Alkaios ; 6 Botwrto? ike Boiotian. 
 
 2. Others prefer to follow the fashion of the Romans 
 of the Augustan age, and to interpret the Greek names 
 through the Latin equivalents. This has been a long 
 prevailing custom. The table of Latin equivalents for 
 the Greek letters has already been given (§ i). It must 
 
24 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 be supplemented, however, by calling attention to the 
 following letters or combinations: 
 
 7 nasal (§ 5) = « 
 ai = ae 
 01 = oe 
 
 but final -01 = I 
 ov = ii 
 ei = f or ^ 
 
 final -OS = us 
 " -ov = um 
 " -po<; = er 
 
 a. At the present time ei is often transliterated ei, 
 pronounced like i in mine. Words in -eiov are best 
 transliterated -eum ; as ©rjaelov Theseum. 
 
 26. ILLUSTRATIONS OF TRANSLITERATION THROUGH 
 LATIN INTO ENGLISH 
 
 Kv/jo? 
 
 = Cyrus 
 
 Ala'^v\o<; 
 
 = Aeschylus 
 
 YJ\.eap')(p'i 
 
 = Clearchus 
 
 ©ovKvSiSri'; 
 
 = Thucydides 
 
 AlveCdf; 
 
 = Aeneas (an- 
 
 'A\Kalo<i 
 
 = Alcaeus 
 
 
 glicized) 
 
 TeuK/jo? 
 
 = Teucer 
 
 Adpelo'; 
 
 = Darius (an- 
 
 'AXe^avBpo'i 
 
 = Alexander 
 
 
 glicized) 
 
 '^irep'x^eio'i 
 
 — Spercheius (or 
 
 'ApTa^ep^r]<! 
 
 = Artaxerxes 
 
 
 Spercheus) 
 
 HapvcraTL^ 
 
 = Parysatis 
 
 'Pj)(TO? 
 
 = Rhesus 
 
 'Ikoviov 
 
 = Iconium 
 
 Ae\<f>oi 
 
 = Delphi 
 
 6 BotCOTtO? 
 
 = the Boeotian 
 
 ^ayyapio'; 
 
 = Sangarius 
 
 LIQUIDS AND MUTES (OR STOPS) 
 
 27. The following classification of consonants is impor- 
 tant, and should be committed to memory : 
 
 Liquids, so called from their smoothly 
 
 "flowing" sounds, are \ p. v p 
 
 Mutes (or stops) are so called because they are formed 
 by a position of the organs of the mouth which stops the 
 
Classes 
 OF Mutes 
 
 INTRODUCTION 25 
 
 passage of the breath, no sound being heard while the 
 closure of these organs continues. 
 
 Labial mutes, i.e. stops made with 
 
 the lips {labium) ir fi <f> 
 
 Palatal mutes, i.e. stops made with 
 
 the soft palate (palatum)- * 7 X 
 
 Lingual or dental mutes, i.e. stops 
 made with the tongue {lingua) 
 or teeth {dens) t S 6 
 
 28. Another important classification of these mutes is 
 the following : 
 
 p. f Smooth mutes (not aspirated) ir k r 
 
 \ Middle mutes B ^i I 
 
 OF Mutes K^ , / . ,s , ^ 
 
 \ Rough mutes (aspirated) 9 X " 
 
 It will be observed that this table is only another arrange, 
 ment of the preceding one, the first column of which (§ 27) 
 represents the "smooth" mutes, the second the "middle," 
 and the third the "rough." 
 
 ELISION 
 
 29. The loss of a final short vowel is called elision; it 
 occurs only before a word beginning with a vowel, and is 
 marked by the apostrophe. Thus aXX' 6 avr]p but the man 
 (for aXKa), r) B' fjfiepd but the day (for M). 
 
 a. Elision is often omitted. 
 
 b. When a preposition or conjunction suffers elision of 
 the accented vowel, the accent is also lost. 
 
 CRASIS 
 
 30. Crasis {icpaa-K mingling) is the contraction of a vowel 
 or diphthong at the end of a word with a vowel or diphthong 
 
26 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 beginning the following word. Over the syllable resulting 
 from crasis is placed a ', as k&v for Kal av and if ; 
 TaTTiT'qBei.a for rh eTriTrjSeia the provisions. 
 
 ASPIRATION 
 
 31. A smooth 'mute (§ 28) is roughened before the 
 rough breathing (§ 3). Thus #' mirov on horseback for 
 e7r(t) 'mirov ; KadrjKoa come doivn for KaTO. + ^«(b. 
 
 -N MOVABLE 
 
 32. The letter v may be annexed to all- words ending 
 xS^ai, to the third person singular of verbs when this ends 
 in e, and to ecrTt is. In modern practice this -v (called 
 -V movable) is used only when the next word begins with a 
 vowel, or at the end of a sentence. 
 
 PUNCTUATION MARKS 
 
 33. The Greek uses the comma and the period like the 
 English. But the Greek question mark is like the English 
 semicolon (;). For the c^olon (or semicolon) the Greek 
 uses a point set at the top of the line, thus : Kvpo? • 
 
 The English question mark (?) is not used in Greek. 
 
 Marks of quotation (" ") are commonly introduced into 
 modern Greek texts. But editors often prefer not to use 
 this modern device ; and instead, they begin the first word 
 of the Greek quotation with a capital letter. This is the 
 practice of the translators of the English Bible. 
 
 NUMBER 
 
 34. The Greek has three numbers : singular and plural, 
 as in Latin and English ; and dual, to indicate two. In 
 
INTRODUCTION 27 
 
 the oldest Greek (Homer) the dual was common; but it 
 was comparatively little used in the Greek of the fifth and 
 fourth centuries b.c. It will not be used at all in the exer- 
 cises of this book. 
 
 GENDER 
 
 35. The Greek has three genders : mascuUne, feminine, 
 and neuter. Like Latin, Greek makes a formal distinction 
 of gender among objects without life ; thus TroTa/nd? river is 
 masculine (o), and rffiepd day is feminine (J)). 
 
 CASE 
 
 36. The Greek has five cases : nominative, genitive, 
 dative, accusative, and vocative. These ca^es are used 
 like the corresponding cases in Latin. The Greek has 
 no ablative ; and the functions of the Latin ablative are 
 performed in Greek partly by the genitive (of separation) 
 and partly by the dative (locative and instrumental). 
 
 VOICE 
 
 37. The Greek verb has three voiceS : active, middle, 
 and passive. The active and passive voices are used as 
 in Latin and English. The uses of the middle voice 
 are explained in §§ 315, 316. 
 
 MOOD 
 
 38. The Greek verb has four moods, — indicative, sub- 
 junctive, optative, imperative, — besides the infinitive and 
 participle. The uses of these moods are explained and 
 illustrated as they are introduced in the lessons. 
 
28 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 TENSE 
 
 39. The Greek verb has the following tenses : 
 
 Primary 
 Present : / loose or / ajn loosing 
 
 Perfect : / have loosed 
 
 Future : / shall loose 
 
 Future Perfect : / shall have loosed 
 
 SECONpARY 
 
 Imperfect : / loosed or T was loosing 
 
 Aorist : / loosed 
 
 Pluperfect : / had loosed 
 
 Fig. I.— Winged Victory inscribing a trophy of armor. 
 
PRESENT INDICATIVE OF Il-VERBS 29 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE OF iJ-VERBS IN 
 THE ACTIVE VOICE. RECESSIVE ACCENT 
 
 40. The stem or theme of a Greek verb is the part 
 which carries the permanent meaning; to this stem are 
 joined various suffixes and prefixes to express person, 
 number, tense, mood, and voice. - 
 
 41. The stem of Xvco I loose is Xv- (in some tenses \u-). 
 The endings that express different persons, as /, you, he, 
 are joined to this stem in some tenses by means of a 
 thematic vowel. In the indicative mood this vowel is 
 before endings that begin with ^ or v, and e before other 
 letters. It is distinctly seen in the following paradigm 
 (§ 45) in the dual, and first and second persons plural. In 
 other forms of the present indicative the thematic vowel 
 has suffered modification or has coalesced with the per- 
 sonal ending. 
 
 42. The theme Xv-\-% forms the present tense-stem. , 
 
 43. The original personal endings (cp.§ 639) in the singular 
 of the present indicative are no longer apparent in the forms 
 of the to-verb. But they will be seen later in the inflection of 
 the /Ill-verb. In the third person plural Xv-buo-t is for an original 
 
 Xu-O-Wt (}M-OrV(TC). 
 
 44. Verbs are regularly accented as far from the end 
 as the laws of accent permit (§§ 12-17). Such accent is 
 known as recessive accent. 
 
30 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 45. PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF \6o 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1 . \v-a I loose 1 Xi)-o-|iEv we loose 
 
 2. \i-f.\.% you loose \«-e-Tov \i-i-^i you loose 
 \ij-« he looses Xd-e-rov \v-0Dcri(v) 2 they loose 
 
 Present infinitive \v-eiv to loose 
 
 3- 
 
 46. VOCABULARY 1 
 
 3.70) : lead. XcCirio : /«aw«. 
 
 dpirdEo) : seize, make booty of, plun- Xvu : loose, break, destroy. 
 
 der. Harpy. ireCBto : persuade. 
 
 e^a : have, hold. ■aif.sa : send. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR PRONUNCIATION AND TRANSLATION 
 
 47. I. ireLdei. XetVco. apird^ofjiev. ayeuv. XeiVet. 
 e^eis- dyovcnv. e)(oiJLev. Treidovcri. ^X^' o.pTra- 
 tfiTe.. neCdeLv. XeiVoucrt. ayei. Tret^o/xet'. apirdtfii. 
 TrejJiTTovcrip. TrefnreTe. ayets- XeiTreiv. TTeWw. ayere. 
 d/37ra^et?. ■n-e)u-7ret. ex^^^- ^^'t-TTOfjiev. Tre/xTret?. 
 
 II. You ^ leave. I send. He has. We send. I lead. 
 To send. You ^ persuade. You * persuade. They seize. 
 He seizes. They have. You* leave. We lead. To seize. 
 To have. 
 
 1 Or / am loosing, you are loosing, etc. ' PI. 
 
 '^ Cp. § 32. 1 Sing. 
 
 Fig. 2. — Spearhead (of iron) from Dodonn. 
 
DECLENSION OF O-STEMS 
 
 31 
 
 II 
 
 DECLENSION OF O-STEMS. COMMON CONSTRUCTIONS. 
 ARTICLE AS POSSESSIVE PRONOUN 
 
 48. Sing. N. 
 
 6 4>(\os the friend 
 
 6 tinros /A* ^orj* 
 
 G. 
 
 ToO (|>(Xov of the friend , 
 
 tirirou 
 
 D. 
 
 T§ <|)C\(j) to ax for the friend 
 
 Viririji 
 
 A. 
 
 Tov <|>C\ov the friend 
 
 lirirov 
 
 V. 
 
 — f|)C\« friend 
 
 tTTire 
 
 Dual N. A.i 
 
 TW 4>C\(» 
 
 tiriro) 
 
 G.D. 
 
 TOIV <|>CXoi,v 
 
 tirirotv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 01 <|>t\oi the friends 
 
 tiriroi 
 
 G. 
 
 TMv <|>(\cov of the friends 
 
 I'lriruv 
 
 D. 
 
 Tois <|>t\ois to or for the friends 
 
 tipirois 
 
 A. 
 
 Toiis <|>C\ovs the friends 
 
 tiriro«s 
 
 V. 
 
 — <{)C\oi friends 
 
 tiriroi 
 
 49. Sing. N. 
 
 TO ircSCov the plain 
 
 TO ep-yov M« wor,4 
 
 G. 
 
 TOV tteSCov of the plain 
 
 epYOv 
 
 D. 
 
 T§ tiihiia to ox for the plain 
 
 ^PV? 
 
 A. 
 
 TO ireSCov the plain 
 
 cpYov 
 
 V. 
 
 — ircSCov plain 
 
 8p70v 
 
 Dual N. A.i 
 
 TO) iteSCu 
 
 ?PV<» 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Totv irfSCoiv 
 
 Spvoiv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 Td ireSJa the plains 
 
 epva 
 
 G. 
 
 Twv ir«S((ov of the plains 
 
 Sp^fflv \ 
 
 D. 
 
 Tots T-eStois to ox for the plains 
 
 ilp70is 
 
 A. 
 
 Td ireSCo ^,4« plains 
 
 «PV0 
 
 V. 
 
 — ircSIa plains 
 
 «p<yo 
 
 ^ There is no vocative case of the definite article 6 the; but, nouns have the 
 nominative, accusative, and vocative dual alike. Thus <|)£\<i) is nominative, 
 accusative, and vocative dual. 
 
32 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 50. ^/\o? and t'TTTro? are masculine in gender, and are 
 accordingly accompanied by the masculine form of the 
 article the ; jreSiov and epyov are neuter, and therefore 
 the neuter article to the is used with them. 
 
 51. All neuter nouns have the nominative, accusative, 
 and vocative cases alike, in the three numbers. 
 
 52. For the grave accent seen in tov ^i\ov, etc., see § i3- 
 
 COMMON CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 These fundamental rules, most of which the student will have already 
 learned in Latin, are sufficiently illustrated, without special examples, in 
 the exercises of this book. 
 
 53. a. The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative 
 
 case. 
 
 b. The direct object of a transitive verb is in the 
 
 accusative case. 
 
 c. The indirect object of a verb is regularly in the 
 
 dative case {to or for dative). 
 
 d. The dative is often used to indicate the person 
 
 interested (to or for dative, sometimes denoting 
 advantage or disadvantage). 
 
 e. But after a verb of motion, to is generally ex- 
 
 pressed by a preposition virith the accusative 
 (not by the dative), as Tr/ad? to with the accusa- 
 tive. See § 55. 6. Cp. Latin ad. 
 
 f. The genitive case denotes of relations. It may 
 
 be "subjective" (fiiga hostium the flight of 
 the enemy) or "objective" {amor patriae love 
 of fatherland) in Greek as in Latin. It often 
 denotes possession. 
 
 g. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative 
 
 case. 
 
DECLENSION OF 0-STEMS 33 
 
 h. A finite verb agrees with its subject in person 
 and number. 
 
 i. Adjectives and participles agree in gender, num- 
 ber, and case with the nouns that they modify. 
 
 j. A noun in apposition to another noun agrees with 
 it in case. 
 
 k. A noun or adjective in the predicate, denoting 
 the same person or thing as the subject, agrees 
 with the subject in case. Adjectives agree 
 also in gender and number. 
 
 54- VOCABULARY II 
 
 hi, prep, with dat. only : in • as to monly pi. &ir\a, tA : arms of 
 
 accent, proclitic (§ 20). war. See p. 28, Fig. i. 
 
 epYov, ov, TO : work. iteSCov, ov, t6 : ^lain. 
 
 Wiros, o«, 6 : 'horse. irpis, prep, with ace. : to, toward, 
 \6xos, ov, 6 : company of soldiers. against. 
 
 8ir\ov, on, t6. : implement; com- (|>CXos, ov, o : friend. 
 
 6, gen. too), masc. art. : the ; t<5, gen. tov, neut. art. : the. 
 The forms 6 (nom. sing.) and oi (nom. pi. masc.) are pro- 
 clitic (§ 20). — The forms of the definite article are often 
 used for possessive pronouns of the first, second, or third 
 person, either singular or plural, as suggested by the con- 
 text, i.e. for my, your (sing, or pL), his, her, our, their. — In 
 the Vocabulary d, to (and the fem. tj), placed after a noun, 
 indicate its gender. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 S5' I- !• TOWS ITTTTOUS XioVCTlV. 2. ttyCt TOV \6^0V. 
 
 3. TtuQo^^v Toix; ^ (J)lXov?. 4. XeiTrere ^ to epyov ; 
 
 1 our. 2 are you leatiing. 
 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 3 
 
34 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 5. apirdlei tov<s InTTOVi. 6. W/atto) to. oirXa irpo^ 
 Tous <f)iXov?. 7. iv To2<; TreSiots exovcri, tous Linrov<;. 
 8. 77/)o? TO epyou dyovcn tows Xoxovs- 9. TTejxnei 
 Toiis ^(,'A.ous Trpos to epyov. lO. Xdet tTTTTOUs twi' 
 (j)iXQ)v. II. 01 (^t\ot ayovo-t tous Ittttovs tt^os to, 
 ireSia. 1 2. ex^ts (^'iXovi ; 
 
 II. In turning English into Greek, first compose each 
 sentence aloud in Greek ; next write it down, taking care 
 to observe the accent and, where necessary, the breathing 
 of each word. Always write the accent of a word before 
 passing to the next word. 
 
 Vocabulary for oral practice : friends ^ ; we have ; horses ^ ; 
 the horses ^ ; he looses ; we leave ; to ^ the plain ^ ; in the 
 plain*; to ^ the friends ; he leads; we lead; of the friends ; 
 he persuades ; the company.^ 
 
 ^ I. We have friends. 2. He-is-loosing^ the horses. 3. We 
 leave our^ horses in the plain. 4. He leads horses to^ his^ 
 friends. 5. We lead horses of our^ friends. 6. He per- 
 suades his friends. 7. He leads his company. 
 
 Ill 
 
 DECLENSION OF 0-STEMS {Continued^ 
 
 56- 
 
 Sing. 
 
 :n. 
 
 iroTa)i,6s, 
 
 6, river 
 
 avSpuiros, 0, man 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 TTOTaiJLOV 
 
 
 dvSpiSirou 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 iroTa[i§ 
 
 
 dv6p<&ir<j> 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 oroTaiidv 
 
 
 &v6p(iiirov 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 iroTa|U 
 
 
 avSpUTTE 
 
 1 Ace. 
 
 
 
 8 Two ^ 
 
 words only. 
 
 '• = looses. 
 
 2 Or for. 
 
 
 
 * kv with dat. 
 
 ' = the. 
 
 
 
 
 Sirpis. 
 
 
 
DualN. 
 
 A.V. 
 
 iroTa|jui 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 irorafioiv 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N.V. 
 
 irOTafiol 
 
 
 G. 
 
 iroTaiiuv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 irorajiois 
 
 
 A. 
 
 voTa|jiov$ 
 
 DECLENSION OF 0-STEMS 35 
 
 dvOpiiiro) 
 av6puiroiv 
 
 avSpuirbi 
 dvBpiiiruv 
 dvfipiiTTois 
 dv6pciirovs 
 
 57. The accent of the nominative case must be learned 
 by observation (§ 17. a). 
 
 58. A long ultima (§ 15) in the genitive or dative case, 
 if accented, receives the circumflex accent. Thus iroTafiov. 
 
 59. In the declension of a noun the accent is kept, if 
 possible, on the syllable on which it rests in the nomi- 
 native case ; but if in the nominative the acute accent 
 rests on the antepenult, as in dvOpcoTrov, a long ultima in 
 other cases draws the accent forward (§ 17. i) one syllable. 
 Thus dvOpmirov. 
 
 For the short ultima of dv0pairoi see § 23. 
 
 60. Sing. N. ofvos, 6, wine irXotov, t6, 6oa( 
 
 irXoIov 
 
 irKotov 
 uXoiov 
 
 ^XoCbl 
 
 irXoCoiv 
 
 irXota 
 irXoCoiv 
 irXoCois 
 irXoia 
 
 61. While the tendency of the accent is to remain the 
 same as in the nominative case, a circumflex accent on 
 the penult of the nominative must be changed to the acute 
 on the penult of those cases that have the ultima long 
 (§ 17. 2). Thus olvo<;, o'ivov. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 ofvos, 6, tame 
 
 G. 
 
 ohiov 
 
 D. 
 
 olvip 
 
 A. 
 
 otvov 
 
 V. 
 
 otvE 
 
 lal N. A. V. 
 
 oiva 
 
 G.D. 
 
 otvoiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 otvoi 
 
 G. 
 
 otvaiv 
 
 D. 
 
 otvois 
 
 A. 
 
 otvovs 
 
36 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 62. 
 
 VOCABULARY III 
 
 a-ya96s (declined like iroraiids), 
 
 masc. adj., neut. d-yaedv (de- 
 clined like irXoiov, except the 
 accent) : good, brave. 
 
 avSpioiros, 01), 6 : man. Phil- 
 anthropy (<|>(\os). 
 
 airopos (declined like avOpwiros), 
 masc. and fem. adj., neut. 
 airopov : impassable. 
 
 j]v, 3 sing. impf. : he (she or it) was. 
 
 ijo-av, 3 pi. impf. : they were. 
 
 Kat, conj. : and, also. Kat . . . KOt: 
 both . . ■ and. 
 
 otvos, ov, 6 : wine. 
 
 irXoiov, 01), TO : boat. 
 
 ■iroTa|ji6s, OV, 6: river. Hippo- 
 potamus (iiriros). 
 
 o-Tpanryds, ov, 6 J general. 
 
 <riv, prep, with/ dat. only : with, 
 with the aid of. 
 
 \ 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 63. I. I. ayeiTou iTTTTov Trpo<; Tov TTOTafJiOi'. 2. 6 tto- 
 TajLtos apTrdtfii tol onXa. 3. I^et kol TrXota Kal oiuov. 
 4. irefiTTei olfov Tta (f>C\co} 5. TreWofx.ev tovs dvdpca- 
 irovs. 6. Xdei ittttous T(t)v dvdpdncov. 7. criiv rots 
 <j)i\oi,s dpTrd^et tov's Ittttovs kol to. OTrXa. 8. 6 <^tXos 
 •^v dyaOo's. 9. 6 7roTaju,os ^v eiTropos. lO. Xeiirere 
 
 1 The dative is sometimes used with iT^p.ir<i> instead of irpos with the accu- 
 sative, when there is the further idea of advantage — for his friend, § 53. </. 
 
DECLENSION OF 0-STEMS 37 
 
 TO. irXota ; 1 1 . ei' rots wXotots rjcrav ol crTpa.T'qyoL 
 12. ej^eis oXvov rots avOpmnOLs ; 
 
 II. I. The men have boats and horses. 2. He has 
 wine in his^ boat. 3. Are you unhitching 2 the horses 
 for your friends ? 4. Thicy have good horses. 5. The men 
 were brave. 6. The company ^ was brave. 7. They lead 
 the men to the river. 
 
 IV 
 
 DECLENSION OF 0-STEMS (^Continued and Reviewed'). 
 NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES DECLINED TOGETHER. 
 ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION. PREDICATE POSITION. 
 ATTRIBUTIVE PHRASES. AGREEMENT OF VERB 
 WITH NEUTER PLURAL SUBJECT. POSITION OF 
 POSSESSIVE GENITIVE 
 
 64. Sing. N. 6 d'yaSos X0X076S the brave captain 
 
 G. ToB d-yaSoS \0xa70v of the brave captain 
 
 D. Tu d^aS^ \0xa7u to or for the brave captain 
 
 A. Tov d7a6ov XoxoYov the brave captain 
 
 V. a d7o6e XoxaYE O brave captain 
 
 % 
 
 Plur. N. 01 d^aOol \0xa70C the brave captains 
 
 G. Twv d^aOuv \0xa7uv of the brave captains 
 
 D. Tots tt^aOoIs \0xa701s to ox for the brave captains 
 
 A. Tois 07060115 X0X070VS the brave captains 
 
 V. « 070801 \0xa70C O brave captains 
 
 The dual need not be included in these paradigms for 
 practice. 
 
 1 = the. ^ i.e. loosing. s of soldiers. 
 
38 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 65. Sing. N. iroTajjios airopos an impassable river 
 
 G. irOTOiioS diripoD 
 
 D. irorap.^ oiropfp 
 
 A. iroTa|j.ov airopov 
 
 V. iroTO|i6 airopc 
 
 PI. N. V. iroTO(iol oiropoi 
 
 G. iroToiJLwv dirtSpwv 
 
 D. iroraiiois dirdpois 
 
 A. iroTa|ioiis dirdpovs 
 
 66. Sing. N. A. V. x"?'"*' o.'t'^'^ttKTov an unguarded stronghold 
 
 G. X'^P^^^ d<)>u\dKTOv 
 D. x^P^'P d<j>v\dKTca 
 
 Plur. N. A. V. x"?'* dij>ii\aKTo 
 G. x''P'<*'' d<|>uXdKTtiiv 
 D. x'^p'o^s d4>v\dKToi.s 
 
 Decline also to cKpvXaKrov ■^wpiov the unguarded strong- 
 hold. 
 
 67. Attributive position of adjectives. — When an adjec- 
 tive is used with the definite article and a noun, as in the 
 expression the brave captain, the adjective commonly stands 
 between the article and the noun in Greek as in English 
 (cp. the paradigm, § 64). But it may follow the noun, in 
 which case the article must be repeated before it : o Xo;y;d7o? 
 6 k'^aQo'i the brave captain. 
 
 a. Least frequently of all, the first article is omitted : 
 Xo'x,dryo<; 6 ayad6<; the brave captain. 
 
 68. Predicate position of adjectives. — If the adjective 
 precedes the article, or follows the article and the noun 
 without repetition of the article, it stands in a predicate 
 relation to the noun which it modifies ; i.e. a verb is ex- 
 pressed or understood between the noun and the adjective. 
 
ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION — PREDICATE POSITION 39 
 69- Summary with Examples 
 
 Attributive position 
 
 d7a66s Xoxa^ds, 
 less frequently 
 
 6 \0xa76s 6 d-yaOds, 
 least frequently 
 
 Xoxa^os 6 d-yaSos, 
 
 the brave captain 
 
 Predicate position j T'^ ° '^"^^^^^ ^''^^ 1^"^ ^^' "'^*''''' 
 [ 6 \0xa76s d7a96s the captain \is\ brave 
 
 70. Attributive phrases. — A prepositional phrase or an 
 adverb may be used like an adjective in the attributive 
 position : 
 
 ot Iv TO) x^P^V o-vOpt^TToi, the men in the stronghold. 
 
 a. In this phrase the word for men may be omitted 
 without affecting the sense : 
 
 01 iv T<S x'"P^f tl'S nien (or those) in the stronghold. 
 
 i>. Similarly the noun is omitted in other phrases : 
 
 ot <7vv Kvpa the men with Cyrus ; 
 TO, Kvpov the affairs of Cyrus. 
 
 71. Agreement of verb with neuter plural subject. — A sub- 
 ject in the neuter plural commonly takes a singular verb : 
 
 irXaiia rjv there were boats. 
 
 72. Positioiv'f possessive genitive. — The genitive denot- 
 ing possession commonly stands in the attributive position : 
 
 01 Kvpov XoxdyoL the captains of Cyrus. 
 
 73. VOCABULARY IV 
 
 d-<|>iiXaKros (declined like avBpuiros o-tros, ov, 6 : grain, food. In the 
 and airopos), masc. and fem. adj., pi. the declension irregularly 
 
 neut. d<|><)\aKTOv : unguarded. changes to neut. to o-ito. 
 
 KCpoSj ou, 6 : Cyrtts. \apiov, ov, rt : place, stronghold. 
 
 XoxaY^s, ov, 6 : captain (cp. X^xos w, interj. : O, often preceding the 
 and oLyw). vocative case. 
 
40 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 74. I. I. ToxapLovriv a<^v\aKTov. 2. oicrvvKvpca 
 dyovcTi TOP avOpctiiTov Trpos TTora^LOv airbpov. 3- '''* ^^ 
 Tw X^P^V (tItol Tjv''' dyadd. 4. TrijXTTOfiev olvov dyaoov 
 TTp6<; Kvpov. 5. ol TTOTap-oX rjaav anopoL. 6. /cat ra 
 TrXoia '^i' d(j)vkaKTa. 7. XeLirovcrL tol trKoia d(f)vXaKTa. 
 8. w dya^oi cfTpariqyoi, -rre/jiiTeTe irXola ; 9. ei' tw a^u- 
 XaKTCO xwpua rjcrav dvffpcoiTOL dyadoL lO. Kai 01 Kvpgv 
 Xo^dyoi rjaav iu tw TreStw. II. dpird^ovcn to acpv- 
 KaKTOv ^j^wyoioi". 1 2. ixpiLev Xaxpyi dyaOov?. 
 
 II. I. The river was impassable. 2. The good men 
 are-sending* food. 3. The men with Cyrus were brave. 
 4. And the boats were unguarded. 5. We leave the boats 
 unguarded. 6. We have good wine. 
 
 V 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF fi-VERBS IN THE ACTIVE 
 VOICE. AUGMENT. SECOND AORIST INDICA- 
 TIVE AND INFINITIVE. ARTICLE WITH NAME 
 OF PERSON • 
 
 75. The inflection of the imperfect tense of verbs whose 
 themes end in a vowel (as Xw-w) shows distinctly the theme 
 or stem {e.g. \v), the thematic vowel (o or e), and the per- 
 sonal endings {-v, -?, etc.) throughout (see § 41). But there 
 is no personal ending in the third singular ; this applies to 
 all secondary tenses (§ 39). 
 
 ^ See § 70. b. ' Not the unguarded boats, but the boats unguarded, 
 
 2 See § 71. * = sen4. 
 
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF B-VERBS 41 
 
 76. The imperfect tense stem of Xvoa, like the present, 
 is \0%. 
 
 77- The imperfect, in common with the other secondary 
 tenses of the indicative mood, has a prefix or increase at 
 the beginning of the theme, known as the augment. 
 
 1. Syllabic augment. — If the theme begins with a con- 
 sonant, the vowel epsilon (e) is commonly prefixed to the 
 secondary tenses. 
 
 2. Temporal augment. — But if the theme begins with a 
 vowel, that vowel is lengthened in the secondary tenses thus : 
 
 a becomes 7; ot becomes 17 
 
 € 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 (0 
 
 I 
 
 tt 
 
 I 
 
 V 
 
 ft 
 
 V 
 
 ? 
 
 
 V 
 
 av 
 
 tt 
 
 rjv 
 
 OL 
 
 tt 
 
 V 
 
 78. «i> becomes r\v or remains (v; ti becomes ■^ or remains «i. 
 A verb beginning with a long vowel or veith ov is not augmented. 
 
 79- A verb beginning with p doubles this letter after the augment. Thus 
 Ittma hurl, impf. Sppiirrov. 
 
 80. The imperfect indicative of e;i^&) is u')(pv I had, with 
 apparently irregular augment. 
 
 81. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF \ia 
 
 Sing. I . €-Xu-o-v / mas loosing or / loosed 
 
 2. ?-\v-€-s you were loosing or you loosed 
 
 3. S-Xv-6(v) 1 he was loosing or he loosed 
 
 Dual 2. 4-Xv-6-Tov 
 3 . l-Xu-^-niv 
 
 Plur. I . l-\«-o-|j[.«v we were loosing or we loosed 
 
 2. l-Xd-«-T« you were loosing or you loosed 
 
 3. e-Xv-o-v they were loosing or they loosed 
 
 1 Cp. § 32. 
 
42 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 82. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF aY« 
 
 Sing. I . ■q-y-o-v / was leading or / led 
 
 2. 'HY-t-s you were leading or you led 
 
 3. r\y-i{vy he was leading or he led 
 
 Dual 2. ■fJ7-€-Tov 
 
 3. Tl-V-^T1)V 
 
 Plur. I . i]-y-o-nev we were leading or we led 
 
 2. TJ-y-e-Te you were leading or you led 
 
 3. ■^7-o-v they were leading or /^^y led 
 
 SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE OF HVERBS IN THE 
 ACTIVE VOICE = 
 
 83. It has already been shown (§ 76) that the imper- 
 fect is formed on the same stem as the present tense. 
 There is another tense, belonging to some verbs, which 
 is inilected exactly like the imperfect, and differs in 
 the form of the theme only. This is called the second 
 aorist. It usually exhibits the theme of the verb in its 
 simplest form. Thus \e.Lir<o leave, imperfect e-\enr-ov, has 
 a second aorist e-\i7r-ov, inflected in § 85. Xva has no 
 second aorist. 
 
 84. Meaning of the aorist indicative and infinitive. — The 
 
 aorist indicative expresses a simple act {i.e. not continued 
 or repeated) in past time. 
 
 a. The aorist infinitive, like the aorist indicative, denotes 
 a simple act {i.e. not continued or repeated) ; but unlike the 
 
 'Cp. §32. 
 
 2 The second aorist is so called in distinction from the first aorist, which 
 is to be learned in Lesson XIV. The second aorist is introduced here on 
 account of its similarity in inflection to the imperfect, as well as on account 
 of its frequent use. 
 
SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE OF O-VERBS 43 
 
 aorist indicative, the aorist infinitive does not necessarily 
 refer to past time.^ It differs from the present infinitive 
 in the kind oi action only (cp. § 85). 
 
 85. SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF Xchru 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1 . ?-\iir-o-v / left l-\tir-o-|ji6v we left 
 
 2. t-Xvn-i-i you left l-XCir-e-rov i-Xlit-i-n you left 
 
 3. ?-\iir-e(v) he left l-\iir-^-TT|v ?-\iir-o-v they left 
 
 Second aorist infinitive \nr-«tv to leave, the simple act; wliile the 
 present infinitive XeCireiv may mean to be leaving or to keep leaving as 
 well as to leave. 
 
 a. The accent of the second aorist infinitive is not 
 recessive (§ 44), but placed irregularly on the ultima. 
 
 b. The infinitive is not augmented (cp. § "jf). 
 
 86. The verb a^ca, which shows the theme in its sim- 
 plest form in the present, has a peculiar reduplicated 
 second aorist, with augment (§ 87). 
 
 87. SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF five* 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1. liY-OY-o-v T led riY-dY-o-iuv 
 
 2. liv-o-y-t-s iJY-AY-e-Tov TJ7-4Y-e-T« 
 
 3. T]Y-a7-t(v) TJY-07-^-Tr]v iJY-OY-o-v 
 
 Second aorist infinitive dY-oY-etv to lead, the simple act 
 
 88. The second aorist indicative of ex<o is 'iaypv I got, 
 infinitive ffp^eti*. 
 
 89. The name of a person may take the article if the 
 person is well known or has been previously mentioned. 
 It is usually not to be translated : 
 
 o KC/oos Cyrus. 
 
 1 Except in the construction of indirect discourse, to be studied later (§ no). 
 
44 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 90. VOCABULARY V 
 
 AXXA, conj.: but; sometimes in «k, proclitic prep, with gen. only: 
 
 an address, well! Final a out of, from; before a vowel, 4J. 
 
 may be elided before a vowel, KX^opxos, on, 6 : Clearchus. 
 
 thus 4XX'. Xaiipdvu (theme Xap-, lengthened 
 
 84, postpositive! conj. :• and, but, in pres. and impf.), impf. eXdji- 
 
 weaker than dXXa. Final t Pavov, 2 aor. tka^ov, take, re- 
 
 may be elided before a vowel, ceive, enlist. 
 
 thus 8*. iroX.Tdv, ov, t6 : javelin. 
 
 els, proclitic prep, with ace. only : ^ti-^a, impf. €4>e«70v, 2 aor. ^<|>vyov : 
 
 into, to. Cp. irpds^<'. flee, flee from, avoid, shun. Cp. 
 
 Lat. fiigio. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 91. I. rjpnai,e<;, r]pT!-ai,ov, iXeinere, iXiirere, iireinro- 
 fitv, eTT€i9e, eT;^e,^ ecr^ei'/ ■^yctyere, -iyyef, eXvou, ineC- 
 dojxev, eTreytATre?, i\aix/3oivo[ji,ev, (jivyeiv, e<pevye, iXa^ere. 
 
 II. He was leading. He led. We were plundering. 
 You* left. He had. He was fleeing. He fled. You 
 took.^ They persuaded. They were sending. We 
 loosed. To flee.^ 
 
 92. I. I. iTTefj.TTOfjbev tows ayadov<; d.vdpcjTrov<; eis to 
 irehiov. 2. iKeiirop.ev tovs a.i>dp(6Trov<; iv rw TreStoj. 
 3. riyofxeu tov? aiip Kvpco trpos to TreSiov. 4. d\X', 
 w Kvpe, neiJi-iTeL? to. crua ; 5. 6 Kvpo'S itreiOe tov<; 
 (^iXous. 6. 6 Se Kvpos rjyaye tov<; ittitovs ets t ttc- 
 8iov. 7. KXeapxos eXiTre tom Ittttov koX eXaySe ra 
 
 1 A postpositive word cannot begin a sentence, but must follow one or 
 more words. 
 
 2 § 80. « PL 6 Aor. or impf. 
 
 ° § 88. « Use both pres. and 2 aor. 
 
DECLENSION OF A-STEMS 
 
 45 
 
 iraXra. 8. ol avv KXeap^o) e(j)vyov e/c tou xmpiov. 
 9. 01 8e Xo^^dyol ■^crav dyaOoC. 
 
 II. I. But the captain was brave. 2. We took the 
 grain from the stronghold. 3. He fled into the plain. 
 4. Cyrus used-to-send 1 wine to his friends.^ S- They 
 kept-taking 1 the strongholds. 
 
 VI 
 
 DECLENSION OF A-STEMS. INFINITIVE USED AS OBJECT 
 OF VERBS MEANING tV/S//, COMMAND, ETC. 
 
 NOMINATIVES IN -t) 
 
 93. Sing.N. 
 
 T] (loxT] the battle 
 
 t| dpx<i the beginning^ 
 
 G. 
 
 Tfis (i^xis of the battle 
 
 apxfls ^ 
 
 D. 
 
 Txi |iaxTI lo 0"^ for the battle 
 
 apxS 
 
 A. 
 
 rkfi |idxT)v the battle 
 
 dpX^iv 
 
 V. 
 
 — (i^X'H battle 
 
 «PX4 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 — * l^^xa 
 
 dpxcE 
 
 G.D. 
 
 — ^yfixv 
 
 dpxoiv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 at )idxai the battles 
 
 dpxot 
 
 G. 
 
 Twv (ittxiov of the battles 
 
 dpx^v 
 
 D. 
 
 rats (i^xO'i'S to or for the 
 battles 
 
 dpxats 
 
 A. 
 
 t\% (idxSs the battles 
 
 dpx^s 
 
 V. 
 
 — )idxai battles 
 
 dpxot 
 
 94. See the rules for accent in §§ 57, 58. 
 
 1 = impf. ^ § 63. 1. 4. ' Or province, empire. 
 
 * There are no separate feminine dual forms of the article; the masculina 
 forms (t<S, Totv) are used instead. 
 
46 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 95. A special rule of accent that belongs to all words of 
 the a-declension is this: The genitive plural is always 
 accented with the circumflex on the ultima. 
 
 96. Sing. N. V. K<6(j.T) Ko\^ a beautiful village 
 
 G. K(i|ji.i]S KaXfjs 
 D. K(&|it| KaXfj 
 
 A. K(S)1T|V KoX'/jV 
 
 Dual N. A. V. Kc6|jia KoXd 
 
 G. D. K(S)i.aiv KaXatv 
 
 Plur. N. V. KU|jiai KaXaC 
 
 G. KCOflfidV KaXuv 
 D. K<i|j.ais KaXais 
 A. K(&|j.a$ KoXas 
 
 97. For the short final -ai as in K&nai, see § 23, and 
 compare olvoi, (§ 60). 
 
 98. The infinitive, with or without a subject accusative, 
 is used as the object of verbs meaning wisk, command, 
 hinder, persuade, and the like. The negative with the 
 infinitive is ^t-r) : 
 
 Tovi Koxd-yov's KeXevei /xr] <l>vyeiv he commands the captains not to 
 flee. 
 
 99. VOCABULARY VI 
 
 »PX^> fls, T] : beginning, rule, prov- tence. t) may mean she, but 
 
 ince, empire. only with jiev and H. 
 
 &(ka, impf. TJecXov : wish, desire. KaKos, masc. adj., fem. kok^j, neut. 
 
 4vTav6a, adv. ; there. KaKov : bad, cowardly. 
 
 T|, fem. art. : the; proclitic (§ 20) KaXds, masc. adj., fem. KaX^j, neut. 
 in nom. sing, and nom. pi. ai. KaXiv : beautiful, handsome, no- 
 
 Cp. 6 and t6. t) %k : and she, ble, honorable. 
 
 but she, indicating a change of keXcvu, impf. iKcXeuov : command 
 subject from the preceding sen- bid, order. 
 
DECLENSION OF A-STEMS 47 
 
 K(fi)tT|, T]s, T| : village. lurrds, masc. adj., fem. v^<TTi\, 
 ("■^Xli IS1 *) : battle, fight. neut. yiartiv : full, with gen. 
 
 (i^v, postpositive particle, used with (i.'/i, neg. adv. : not, with inf. and 
 a word or clause that is con- in other uses to be described 
 
 trasted with a following word later. 
 
 (in another clause) or a sec- 6 8^ : and he, but he, indicating a 
 ond clause. The second word change of subject from the pre- 
 
 or clause often has 8^, which is ceding sentence. 6 may mean 
 
 sometimes replaced by another he, but only with jUv and 8^. 
 
 conjunction. |iiv sometimes ov, proclitic neg. adv. : «o/ ; before 
 means on the one hand; but a vowel with smooth breathing, 
 
 more often it is to be omitted written o«k ; before a rough 
 
 in translation, d |iiv . . . 6 84 : breathing, o4x- At the end of 
 
 the one . . . the other ; 01 n^v a sentence, 01!. 
 
 . . . 01 84 : some , . . others. o-ktiv^, <is, t] : tent. 
 
 See 84 (§ 90). ()>v\aK'fi, fls, t| : guard, garrison. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 100. I. I. TTeiMTreL Kvpov ets ttju ap-^rjv. 2. 6 Se 
 KXeap^os ovk eL)(e (j)vXaKy]u. 3. ov)( apird^ei, ras 
 Kokh's /fw/ids. 4. irpo? Tas crKrjva? e(f>vyov. ^. 6 8e 
 OVK 7]6e\e XeCireLv tov Ittttov. 6. at Se Kw/xai icr^^ov 
 criTa. 7- ei'Tav^a rja-av KWfiai jnecrTai crirov Kai olvov, 
 8. /cai rows crTpaTTjyoix; iKekevev dyayelv tous Xo;)(d- 
 yous CIS Trjv crKTjvrjv. 9. 01 KaXoi /cat dya^ot' rjcrav 
 iv rfj fioixV- ^*-^' "V ^' e^wy^'' c'5 ''■^^ KaXiji/ Kcop^rjv. 
 II. eneiOov Tovq Xo^ctyov? /xi) XetTreiv a(f)v\aKTov to 
 XcopCov. 1 2. 01 jLiev dya^ol Xo^dyoi ^crav iv ry p-ciXV' 
 01 8e Kaf ot iv ra ^i^wptft). 
 
 II. I. In the battle were noble and brave men. 2. Cyrus 
 ordered his generals to enlist^ brave men. 3. We do not 
 
 1 Understand men. ^ = to take. 
 
48 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 wish our friends to flee out of the fight. 4. The gen- 
 erals ^ were brave, but the captains were cowardly. 5- He 
 orders the men with Cyrus ^ not to flee. 
 
 VII 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE OF elfii T am. 
 ENCLITICS. SIMPLE CONDITIONS. PREDICATE SUB- 
 STANTIVE WITHOUT ARTICLE 
 
 101. PRESENT INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE OF Afi I am 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1. tl^i I am kv^v we are 
 
 2. A you are lo-rdv iiTi you are 
 
 3. lirTC(v) 5 he is €o-t6v €l(rC(v) ' they are 
 
 Infinitive elvoi to be 
 a. All these forms except el and tlvai are enclitic (§ 21). 
 
 102. 'iariiy) is thus accented when it means is, i.e. exists, 
 or is possible ; at the beginning of a sentence ; and after 
 Kai, aXKd, ovk, /xij, and el {if). 
 
 HOW THE ENCLITIC AFFECTS THE ACCENT OF THE 
 PRECEDING WORD 
 
 103. I. If the preceding word naturally has an acute 
 on the ultima, that accent is retained, and any enclitic 
 loses its accent: 
 
 KoXos T£ Kot ayaBo's both handsome and good (for re see the vocabu- 
 lary of this lesson) ; 
 dyaflos ecTTtv he is good. 
 
 1 Ol lltV O-TpOTTl-VOC (Cp. I. 12). 2 g yo_ /,_ 3 Cp_ | j^. 
 
ENCLITICS 49 
 
 2. If the preceding word has an acute on the penult, its 
 accent is not affected in any way. Then a monosyllabic 
 enclitic, as usual, loses its accent ; but a dissyllabic enclitic 
 retains its accent : 
 
 jTcSia T£ Kol TTorafioL both plains and rivers ; 
 
 TO, TTtSm €crTt KaXd the plains are beautiful (for the singular verb 
 see § 71). 
 
 3. If the preceding word has an acute on the antepenult, 
 it receives an additional acute on its ultima from the follow- 
 ing enclitic, which loses its accent : 
 
 arropoi T€ kw. dSict/SaTos both pathless and impassable ; 
 o avOpatiro's icTTi KaKOi the man is cowardly. 
 
 4. If the preceding word has a circumflex on the ultima, 
 its accent is not affected in any way, and any enclitic 
 loses its accent (cp. i): 
 
 Kokuiv re Ktti ayaOSiv ia-riv it is [the part] of noble and brave men. 
 
 5. If the preceding word has a circumflex on the penult, 
 it receives an additional accent — the acute on its ultima — 
 from the following enclitic, which loses its accent (cp. 3): 
 
 Km/jiai T£ Kol TTcSia both villages and plains ; 
 Km/juu da-iv iv T<S TreStoi villages are in the plain. 
 
 104. Observe that the monosyllabic enclitic regularly 
 loses its accent. The dissyllabic enclitic retains its accent 
 only under condition 2 above. 
 
 105. A proclitic (§ 20) followed by an enclitic receives 
 an acute accent : 
 
 01 T£ a-TpaTtiyot /cat 01 Ao;(dyoi both the generals and the captains. 
 
 106. Simple conditions. — A supposition that assumes 
 a fact without in any way implying its truth or falsity is 
 expressed by el if and the appropriate tense of the indica- 
 
 BEGINNER'S GR. BK. — 4 
 
so BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 tive mood. This is commonly called the Simple Present 
 Co7tdition, or, if in past time, the Simple Past Condition. 
 The conclusion may be any verb form whatsoever that is 
 required by the sense. 
 
 a. The if clause is called the protasis ; the conclusion 
 is called the apodosis. 
 
 b. The negative, if required with the protasis, is /i??; 
 with the apodosis, ov. 
 
 ei cl)€vyei, ovk ecmv a'ya66<; if he is fleeing, he is not brave 
 is a simple present condition. 
 
 el €(f>v'yev, ovk fjv ayado'i if he fled, he was not brave is a 
 simple past condition. 
 
 107. A predicate substantive (§ S3- '^) usually lacks the 
 
 article : 
 
 CTTpaTT^yos %v 6 'Kvpos Cyrus was general. 
 
 108. VOCABULARY VII 
 
 dSiiipaTos, masc. and fem., neut. o4 (ovk, o4x), used in interrogative 
 
 dSicipaTov : not to be crossed, sentence : not ; expects the an- 
 
 ivipassable. swer yes. Cp. Lat. nonne. 
 
 el, proclitic conj. : if. irejis, fem. ire?'*], neut. irejov : 
 
 Et|jiC : lam. €(rTi(v); it is possible. afoot, on foot; 01 xe^oC: the 
 
 TJv : // was possible. infantry. 
 
 @(6i, ov, 6: god ; r\: goddess. Theol- rt, enclitic conj.: and. re . . . 
 
 ogy (\6yos discourse). KaC: both . . . and. 
 
 KcuXvci), irapf. eKi4\\iov : hinder. <t>'Pos, ov, 6 : fear. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 109. I. I. ai KOJiMaC eicTL /otecrrai crirov koL otvov. 
 2. rj S' a-pX!l ^<TTi jxeaTr) KaXcov re Kal aya^wi' avdpct- 
 TToiv. 3. ol TTOTafiOL elcTiP dSictSaroi, ei rts^ KcoXvet. 
 4. rjdekov^ Tohs dv9pei)T70v<; elvau KaXov^ re koI dya- 
 
 1 anybody, enclitic. ^ Either i sing, or 3 pi. 
 
INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 51 
 
 dov<s. 5- ^KeXevofiev tous (xvv Kvpca firj XiTreif tows 
 iTTTTou?. 6. ei fir) Tjyaye tous ittttov?, ovk icmi' dyaffo's 
 av6poiTro<i. 7. OVK inefiTreTe rous Xo^dyous tt/sos Kupov ; 
 
 8. e>c tS)u Kcoju.aii' d/37ra^oife-i ra o-trct re /cat toi' olvov, 
 
 9. /caXoi re /cai dyadoi ia-fxev. 10. et ^ye rou? Tre^ous 
 CIS T^V /xd'^rfv, dyad6<; (TTpaTriy6<s rjv. II. e^^^ofiev (f>6fiov 
 ueav T€ Kal dvdpcjiTcov. 
 
 II. I. The generals were both noble and brave. 2. The 
 general fled on foot ^ to a stronghold. 3. The plains were 
 both beautiful and full of wine. 4. He desired his men to 
 be brave in battle. 5. If anybody hindered,^ it was not 
 possible to flee out of the village. 
 
 VIII 
 
 SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER 
 VERBS OF SAVING AND THINKING. DATIVE 
 WITH ADJECTIVES 
 
 110. a. When a statement is quoted after a verb of 
 saying (as ^j\<tI he says) or thinking, its main verb is 
 changed to the same tense of the infinitive. 
 
 b. Since there is no separate form for the imperfect 
 infinitive, an imperfect indicative of direct discourse neces- 
 sarily becomes present infinitive in indirect discourse. 
 
 c. The subject of this "infinitive in indirect discourse" 
 is omitted when it is the same as that of the main verb of 
 saying (<}>ria-{) or thinking. But it is regularly expressed 
 when it is different from that of the main verb. 
 
 1 'irc^os must agree with the general. 2 q^^ j_ ^ 
 
52 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 d. The subject of an infinitive, when expressed, is in 
 the accusative case. But a modifier of an omitted subject 
 agrees with the subject of the main verb when it indicates 
 the same person or thing. 
 
 e. The negative of the direct discourse is regularly re- 
 tained in indirect. That is, the negative with the infinitive 
 of indirect discourse is usually ov, not /^^j (cp. § 98). 
 
 Examples 
 
 Original statement : irin.-rrui ejno-roAijv I send a letter. 
 
 Quoted statements : (i) KC/ods 4'-qo-i ire/x7rav eirto-ToXi/i' Cyrus says 
 he is sending a letter ; 
 
 (2) vofjiLldi Kvpov irefiTTuv iwiaToXrjv I think Cyrus is sending 
 a letter. 
 
 Original statement: o aTpar-qyo^ in.a-Ta. eXajSe the general took 
 pledges. 
 
 Quoted statement : ecjirj tov aTpaTrj-ybvina-Ta. Xafieiv he said the gen- 
 eral took ' pledges. 
 
 Original statement : KCpos ^px^ "^"^ f^^^XV^ Cyrus began the battle. 
 
 Quoted statement : ecjyrj Kvpov apx^i-v i"^s f-<'^XV^ he said Cyrus began 
 the battle, (apx^i-v might also represent an apxe' of the original 
 statement. The context of a narrative determines this matter.) 
 
 Original statement : KSpds ei/xi I am Cyrus. 
 
 Quoted statement : i4>rj KCpos uvai he said he was Cyrus. (Ob- 
 serve that in English a quoted tense is secondary if the leadins^ 
 verb is secondary. Such a change from present to past is irregu- 
 lar in Greek. Cp. the Latin dixit se Cyrum esse.) 
 
 III. Dative with adjectives. — The to or for dative is 
 used with many adjectives that express friendliness, hos- 
 tility, association, fitness, and other ideas : 
 
 <^i\os Kvpw friendly to Cyrus ; 
 
 TJv Trio-Tos T<S aSeXcjxS he was faithful to his brother. 
 
 ^ Lit. io have taken (cp. § 84. a) . 
 
INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 
 S3 
 
 112. 
 
 VOCABULARY VIII 
 
 dSc\i|>65, ov, 6: brother. Phila- 
 delphia ((t>(Xos). 
 
 ii.pX<<>, impf. r\pxov : begin, rule, 
 command, with gen. • Cp. ApX'']- 
 
 pdppapos, ov, 6 : foreigner, barba- 
 rian. 
 
 7dp, postpositive conj. ; for. 
 
 tirC {kit before a smooth breathing, 
 iif before a rough breathing, 
 §31), prep. : with gen. on, in the 
 time of; with DAT. on, upon, at, 
 in the power of, for ; with acc. 
 against (often with idea of hos- 
 tility), to, upon. 
 
 lirio-ToX'^, fjs, r) : letter. Epistle. 
 
 E(t>a(rav, 3 pi. impf. : they said. 
 
 '6<|>i], 3 sing. impf. : he said. 
 
 X^Yos, o«, 6 : word, speech. 
 
 voiiljw, impf. 4v6)u^ov1 think. 
 
 ovi8^ (o4 + 8^) : nor, not even ; hat. 
 ne . . . quidem. 
 
 oiire . . . oiire (o4 + t«) : neither 
 . . . nor. 
 
 irio-TiSs, fern. irio-T^j, neut. irio-Tdv: 
 trustworthy, faithful. irio-Td, 
 uv, rd, neut. pi. subst. : pledges. 
 
 <|)o<rt(v), enclitic verb, 3 pi. pres. : 
 they say. 
 
 <|>T]<r£(v), enclitic verb, 3 sing, 
 pres. : he says. 
 
 tt)C\os, fern. <|>(\i), neut. (|>'^°*'' 
 friendly. The masc. ()>(\os has 
 been learned before in its sub- 
 stantive use {friend), § 48. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 113. I. I. TreWai tov Kvpov ciSe\<f)6v. 2. 6 8e (fyrjcri. 
 ireidew TOV Kvpov dSe\<f>6v. 3. ideXat XaySeiv irXoTa. 
 4. e<f>ri iOeXeiv XajSelv TrXoia. 5- e^o.cai' iOeXeiv TrtcrTct 
 Xa/Seiv. 6. ovre 6 Xo-^d-y6<; ovre 6 arTpaTiqyo^ eTrep^Trev 
 iiTKTToX'qv, 7. ouS' TjOtXe KXeap^o? dp^eiv t^s pd- 
 XV^' ^' O' ^^ fidpfiapoi ov KaXot re koI dyadoi elcriv. 
 9. uopt^o) Tou? ^ap/Sdpov? ovk eluat KaXovs Te fcat 
 dyaffov?. lO. vopit,opev tou Kvpov ovk elvai inl^ tw 
 dSeX<f>a. II. Kvpov ^dcTL XiTreu/ rd nXola. 12. rovs 
 Kvpov Xoyous /caXous vopit,ere elvai ; 1 3. Kvpco yap 
 €<f)T] irtoTTos eti/at. 14. 'i? K(6pr) ovk ■^v Kvpoi <^iXy). 
 
 ' !« 2(5* power of. 
 
54 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 II. I. Cyrus is not in the power of his brother. 2. He 
 thought Cyrus was^ not in the power of his brother. 3. The 
 generals ftpd^ on ^ the boats. 4. He said that the generals 
 [had] fled ^ on the boats. 
 
 IX 
 
 DECLENSION OF A-STEMS {Continued). REVIEW OF 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE O- AND A-DECLENSIONS. 
 ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS IN -09, -ov. DATIVE 
 OF POSSESSION 
 
 NOMINATIVES IN -a 
 
 114. Nouns of the a-declension have a and not r\ in the 
 singular when this vowel is preceded by e, t, or p. 
 
 Sing. N. V. a-rfa.T\A, r\, army Plur. N. V. o-Tpariot 
 
 G. cTTpaTias 
 D. o-Tpariq. 
 A. o-rpaTi^v 
 
 Dual N. A. V. o-rparid 
 G. D. (TTpaTiatv 
 
 For the accent see §§ 57, 58, 59, 95. 
 
 G. (TTpaTtSv 
 
 D. o-Tparials 
 A. o-rparids 
 
 115. Sing. N.V. y^&fo. ■KoKt^iS. a hos- 
 tile country 
 
 G. x^P^^ iroXe|itas 
 
 D. X'^P?' iroXeiiCi;, 
 
 A. x(6pav iroXe|j,Cav 
 
 Plur. N. V. X'^PO''' iroX(([i,ioi 
 
 G. x<'P'°v iro\c)i,Cov 
 
 D. X'^P'''''^ iroX(|i.Cais 
 
 A. X'^P^^ iroXc|i.(&$ 
 
 N. T| 6p6(a 686s the steep 
 
 road 
 
 G. TTis opStas 6S0V 
 
 D. T^ 0P6C91 68^ 
 
 A. TT)v opBtav 686v 
 
 V. — opeCa 48^ 
 
 N. at SpSiai 6S0C 
 
 G. Tuv op6((i>v 68uv 
 
 D. Tots opSCais 68o£s 
 
 A. Tcis 6p6(as oSovs 
 
 V. — £peiai 680C 
 
 ' Originally is. 
 
 ' lirC with gen. 
 
ADJECTIVES OF THE O- AND A-DECLENSIONS 55 
 
 a. 6B69 belongs to the group of o-stems that are femi- 
 nine, although most of the o-stems are masculine or neuter. 
 
 6. For the accent of iroXe/jLiai, iroXeniav and op&iai, 
 opdicov see below, § 117. a. 
 
 REVIEW OF ADJECTIVES OF THE O- AND A-DECLENSIONS 
 
 Adjectives in -os, -% -ov 
 
 116. a'yado'i good, brave is declined in the masculine like 
 TTora^id?, in the feminine like a/a^^, and in the neuter like 
 traXrov. 
 
 l/\,TOV. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 d-yaeds 
 
 d^aB^ 
 
 d7a6dv 
 
 G. 
 
 d-yaSoS 
 
 d7aei)s 
 
 dYaSofi 
 
 D. 
 
 d'yaO^ 
 
 ttvae^ 
 
 d7a6$ 
 
 A. 
 
 dyaOov 
 
 d^oe^v 
 
 d^aOdv 
 
 V. 
 
 d-yaO^ 
 
 dyaS^ 
 
 dvaOov 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 dYaOcG 
 
 d7a6^ 
 
 i).^<^^x%& 
 
 G.D. 
 
 dYaSotv 
 
 d7a6alv 
 
 d7a6otv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 dYaSoC 
 
 d^aeaC 
 
 d-yaSd 
 
 G. 
 
 dYaSuv 
 
 dYaSuv 
 
 dyaSuv 
 
 D. 
 
 dYaSoIs 
 
 dyaOats 
 
 dvaSots 
 
 A. 
 
 ayaSoii 
 
 dYaS^s 
 
 d^aSd 
 
 
 Adjectives in 
 
 -OS, -a, -ov 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. , 
 
 117. Sing. N. 
 
 iraXcpLios hostile 
 
 TToXciiCa 
 
 iroX^liiov 
 
 G. 
 
 iroXE|j[,Cov 
 
 iroXc|j.(as 
 
 iroXc|j[,Cov 
 
 D. 
 
 iroXcfiCo) 
 
 iroXc|i(^ 
 
 ircXEitCu 
 
 A. 
 
 iro\^)iiov 
 
 iroXc|j.Cav 
 
 ToX4|i.i.av 
 
 V. 
 
 iroX^fiie 
 
 iroXEfiCa 
 
 iroX^fxiov 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 iroXefiCu 
 
 iroXc|iCa 
 
 iroXc|i((i) 
 
 G.D. 
 
 iroXcjiCoiv 
 
 iroXeiiCaiv 
 
 iroXcjj.Coiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 iroX^fiiai 
 
 iroX^fuai 
 
 iroXI|ua 
 
 G. 
 
 iroXEpiCaiv 
 
 iroXe|jilaiv 
 
 iroXc)J,Ca>v 
 
 D. 
 
 iro\e)j,(oi.s 
 
 iroXciiCais 
 
 iroXcjiCois 
 
 A. 
 
 iroX€|i,Cov$ 
 
 iroX£|JiCa$ 
 
 iroX^liia 
 
56 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 a. While the preceding paradigm shows the regular 
 endings of the o- and a-declensions, there are two forms 
 that depart from the rules of accent of the a-declension 
 (§§ 59> 95)- The nominative and genitive plural feminine 
 follow the masculine in accent: iroKejxiai and not iroKefiiai; 
 TToXeiiCav and not iroX'^fMav. This applies to all adjectives 
 and participles in -09, -rj (or -a), -ov. 
 
 Adjectives of Two Endings in -os, -ov 
 
 118. There are many adjectives in -0? that have one 
 form for both masculine and feminine genders, and distinct 
 forms for the neuter in a few cases, as shown in the 
 following paradigm. They are declined like avdpeo'rro<; and 
 ttXoIop in respect to case endings. Their accent is regu- 
 larly recessive (§ 44). 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 Sing. N. airopos iinpassable 
 
 G. 
 
 
 airdpov 
 
 D. 
 
 
 dirdpu 
 
 A. 
 
 
 airopov 
 
 V. 
 
 airopE 
 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 
 dirbpu 
 
 G. D. 
 
 
 airdpoiv 
 
 Plur. N.V. 
 
 airopoi 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 diropuv 
 
 D. 
 
 
 dirdpois 
 
 A. 
 
 4ir<ipovs 
 
 
 Neut. 
 airopov 
 
 airopov 
 
 airopa 
 
 airopa 
 
 So, too, is declined d^vXa/cro? (§ 73). 
 
 119. Dative of possession {to or /(?r dative). — The dative 
 case may be used with the verb to be to denote the possessor : 
 
 Kwpw a.pyj) i<xTLv Cyrus has a province (a province is to Cyrus) . 
 
DECLENSION OF A-STEMS 57 
 
 120. VOCABULARY IX 
 
 dYopd, OS, T| : market-place, market. irdpoSos, ou, t| (irapd + 686s) : road 
 SCki)^ tis, T) : justice, deserts. by or past, passage, pass. 
 
 ^TO.%i, adv. : between, Ti^th^en. iroX^nios, a, ov (•ir6Xe|ios war) : of 
 686s, oO, i\: way, road. Hodo- war, hostile, ot iroX^niot, subst. 
 
 voRitx {fArfov measure). s.^].: the enemy. Polemic. 
 
 6p6ios, a, ov : steep. o-irovS^, fis, t| : libation ; pi. truce. 
 KpKos, ov, 6 : oath. Spondee, 
 
 irapd (before a vowel irap"), prep. ; o-tsvos, <i, ov : narrow. Steno- 
 
 with GEN. from the side of; graphy (-ypdclxo write). 
 
 vifith DAT. by the side of, after o-t6\os, ov, 6: expedition, 
 
 verbs of rest ; with acc. to the o-rparid, as, t| : army. 
 
 side of, after verbs of motion ; Td(j>pos, ov, t| : ditch. 
 
 contrary to. X^9°-> »s, r\ : country, land, 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 121. I. I. TW 8e Kd/3ft) r^v crrpaTih dyaO'q. 2. vo/xt- 
 ^oj^ev ok Tov (TTokov inl tov<; voXefjuCov? elvat, 3. -^u 
 yap rj ndpo8o<; arevi]. 4. '^v 8e TrapoSos (rrev^ [xeTa^ii 
 TOV TTOTafJiov Kal Trj's Ta,(f>pov. 5. •^ye 8e ttjv (TTpaTiav 
 irapa ttjv Kvpov crKrjVTJv. 6. KXeap^o? Se iirl roijs 
 TToXefiCovs ovK rjyev. 7. et KXeap^o? irapa, ^ tovs opKov<; 
 IXve^ Tas CTTToi/Sa?, ttji' Blktjv l^et. 8. 17 8' dyoph r)v 
 iv Trj tS)v jSap^dpcjv X^P'i" 9' ^'Pv '''W ^^^v elvat, 
 eis x^P^^ Kakyjv. lO. 7] 8' oSos ^v dvopo?, et rts^ 
 
 iK(o\v€V. 
 
 II. I. He led the men f rom-the-side-of * Cyrus to the 
 market-place. 2. The road to the market-place^ was 
 steep. 3. We think the country is beautiful. 4. Cyrus's 
 expedition is against his brother. 
 
 ' contrary to. ^ broke. ^ Enclitic, anybody, cp. § 105. 
 
 * irapd. ' Put to the market-^lace in the attributive position. 
 
S8 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 SOME PRONOUNS: avro^, MEANINGS AND USES; a\Xo9, 
 6'?. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 RULES OF EUPHONY APPLYING TO (tvv AND ev 
 IN COMPOSITION. AGREEMENT OF RELATIVE. 
 DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS 
 
 DECLENSION OF air6s, self, same 
 
 122. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 . Sing. N. 
 
 avTos 
 
 oir^j 
 
 oiri 
 
 G. 
 
 avTOv 
 
 avTfls 
 
 oArov 
 
 D. 
 
 air^ 
 
 o4t^ 
 
 ain^ 
 
 A. 
 
 o4t6v 
 
 oArifi 
 
 aird 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 avTci 
 
 avTcL 
 
 a,iiT& 
 
 G. D. 
 
 OUTOIV 
 
 avratv 
 
 airotv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 avToC 
 
 airaC 
 
 oirA 
 
 G. 
 
 oiroov 
 
 airuv 
 
 airwv 
 
 D. 
 
 avToIs 
 
 airats 
 
 airots 
 
 A. 
 
 airovis 
 
 airds 
 
 aird 
 
 MEANING AND USES OF airds 
 
 123. I. As an intensive pronoun avTo^ means self^ 
 himself, etc. : 
 
 6 KCpos airos f ^ Kvpos aurds Cyrus himself. 
 
 2. When placed between the article and the noun, that 
 is, when used in the attributive position, avro^ means same : 
 
 6 avTos crrpaTiyyos the same general. 
 
 3. In the genitive, dative, and accusative cases (the 
 " oblique " cases), this word is the common personal pro- 
 
 ' Cp. auto-graph (■vpd(|>(i> write). 
 
PRONOUNS 
 
 S9 
 
 noun of the third person. This use does not belong to 
 the nominative case, however : 
 
 riyov avTovq (or fem. airds) I or they led them. 
 
 See below, § 127. 
 
 &XXos, other, another ; the other, the rest of (if preceded by the article) 
 
 124. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 FEM. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 axxos 
 
 &XXr| 
 
 &XXo 
 
 G. 
 
 oXXov 
 
 iiXXris 
 
 aXXov 
 
 D. 
 
 a\Xti> 
 
 a\X][| 
 &XXt|iI 
 
 &XX(!> 
 
 A. 
 
 &XXov 
 
 &XXo 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 a\\a> 
 
 axxo 
 
 axxu 
 
 G. D. 
 
 aXXoiv 
 
 aXXaiv 
 
 axoiv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 aXXoi 
 
 aXXai 
 
 &XXa 
 
 G. 
 
 aXXitfv 
 
 aXXuv 
 
 axxoiv 
 
 D. 
 
 aXXois 
 
 &XXais 
 
 aXXois 
 
 A. 
 
 oXXovs 
 
 &XXas 
 
 &XXa 
 
 THE RELATIVE 8s, t], o, wJio, which, that 
 
 125. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 as 
 
 ^ 
 
 8 
 
 G. 
 
 ov 
 
 'IS 
 
 ov' 
 
 D. 
 
 
 V 
 
 4 
 
 A. 
 
 •6v 
 
 v 
 
 8 
 
 Dual N. A.. 
 
 S> 
 
 & 
 
 & 
 
 G.D. 
 
 otv 
 
 olv 
 
 olv 
 
 i^ur. N. 
 
 oS 
 
 at 
 
 & 
 
 G. 
 
 <Sv 
 
 <Sv 
 
 <Sv 
 
 D. 
 
 ots 
 
 als 
 
 ots 
 
 A. 
 
 06s 
 
 £« 
 
 & 
 
 POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES 
 
 126. Possessive adjectives are ifim, efirj, ifi6v, my, mine; 
 a6<!, ari, aov, yotir (sing.), yours; ■^//.erepo';, ^/j,eT€pd, '^fiere- 
 
6o BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 pov, our, ours ; v/xeVe/aoy, vfjt^Tepd, vfx.erepoi', j/our (ph), yours. 
 They are declined regularly. These pronouns are regularly 
 accompanied by the article and stand in the attributive posi- 
 tion when denoting a particular person or thing : 
 
 6 €/a6s dSeA^os my brother. 
 
 a8eX0o9 e'/io? means a brother of mine. 
 
 127. We have already learned (§ 54) that his, her, their, 
 etc., may be expressed by the article in agreement with its 
 noun. The possessive genitive of avT6<i may also be used, 
 and always in the predicate position (§§ 68, 69): 
 
 ■fj (TKrjvri avTov his tent ; 
 
 7j xoi/oa avrHv their country. 
 
 a. In this use avrov is equivalent in meaning to the Latin 
 eius, and is not reflexive. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS 
 
 128. Prepositions, which originally were adverbs, are 
 very frequently prefixed to verbs, and modify the verbal 
 idea accordingly : 
 
 i^-dyu) lead out ; eicr-ayo) lead in ; e/c-TreftTrco send forth ; trvix-Triiinrta 
 {a-vfi- for a-vv- before tt for the sake of euphony) send with ; 
 i-TTi-IBovXevu) plot against. 
 
 129. When a final vowel of the preposition comes before 
 an initial vowel of the verb, the final vowel of the prepo- 
 sition is regularly dropped : 
 
 d7r-ayo> (aTrd + ayw) lead off ; atji-apTrd^o} (aTro + dpTra^oj, tt being 
 changed to 4, before the rough breathing, § 31) snatch away, 
 seize. 
 
COMPOUND VERBS 6i 
 
 130. Compound verbs are regularly augmented after 
 the prefix. A final vowel of the prepositional prefix is like- 
 wise dropped before the augment : 
 
 e^iyyayov they led out ; e^-cVe/xTrov they sent out ; 6.Tr-i.<^vr^ov they 
 fled away ; e7r-e/8oijA.eve he plotted against. 
 
 131- The accent of a compound verb can never recede 
 back of the augment : 
 
 ef-^yov, not ii-rjyov- 
 
 132. A compound verb is divided between the prefix and the verb 
 proper, if a hyphen must be used, as at the end of a line : 
 
 aTr-i<^vyov, not a.-TrL<j>vyov (cp. § 9). 
 
 RULES OF EUPHONY: v BEFORE OTHER CONSONANTS 
 
 133. If the prefix of a compound verb is trw or ev, the 
 nasal (v) undergoes euphonic changes before certain con- 
 sonants, conformably to the following laws : 
 
 1. Before a labial mute (§ 27) v becomes im : 
 
 (TVftrTreiJiTra) send with. 
 
 2. Before a palatal mute (§ 27) v becomes 7 nasal (§ 5) : 
 
 iy-ypdcfxi) inscribe (if + ypa.<f>io write). 
 
 3. Before a liquid (§ 27) v is assimilated to the liquid : 
 
 avX-Xafi^avui arrest. 
 
 4. Before cr, v is dropped : 
 
 av-tnpoxEiu) take the field with. 
 
 134. But the prefix always resumes its original form 
 before the syllabic augment : 
 
 <TVV-i\a/3oV, (TW-iTTtflTrOV- 
 
62 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 135. The relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in 
 person, gender, and number, but its case is determined by 
 its construction in its own clause : ^ 
 
 irap-eo-Tir 6 avOptawoq ov «7r£/x7rer the man whom he sent is here. 
 
 136. Verbs compounded with iv, <niv, and eVi commonly 
 take the dative case, if the object is dependent on the 
 prepositional idea : 
 
 Tois 8' oXXots iTn-PmiXcvovaiv and they are plotting against the others. 
 
 137. VOCABULARY X 
 
 For the meanings of o4t6s, oXXos, os, e^os, T|(i^Tepos, cr6s, wjU^pos, 
 see the preceding articles (§§ 123-127). 
 
 diro (dir' before smooth breatliing, iiKti), impf. rfKov ; come, have come ; 
 
 a.^' before rough breathing, pres. with pf. meaning. 
 
 § 31), prep, with gen. only : 0^, irdXiv, adv. . back, again. 
 
 from, away from. Cp. Lat. ab. irdp-ei|jii., impf. (3 sing.) irap-fiv, 
 
 diro-Bvu'o-Ka), impf. dir-46v[|o-Kov, 2 (3 pi.) irap-fjo-av : be by, be at 
 
 aor. dir-i6avov : die off, die, hand, be present, attend, with 
 
 ferish, be slain. . dat. 
 
 diro-ir^(i.irci), impf. dir-^irenirov : send <rv\-\a|i.pdv<a (o-iiv + Xa|i.pdv(i>) , 
 
 off or away, dismiss. impf. <ruv-cXdp,payov, 2 aor. 
 
 ttro, adv. : then, thereupon. iruv-diaPov : take together, seize, 
 
 IJ-d7<o, impf. «S-fi7ov, 2 aor. ^- arrest. Cp. Lat. comprehendo. 
 
 ■/JYOVOv: lead out. <rv|ji-7r^|ji.irci> (orvv + irep.'TrM), impf. 
 
 ciri-^ovXeio), impf. Iit-ePovXevov : o-vv-^ircijiirov : send a person (in 
 
 plot against, vii'Ca daS.. (Pou- ace), wz//^ a person (in dat.). 
 
 Xevci) plan.) 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 138. I. I. 6 8e aSeX<^os avrov eTrei^ei^. 2. elra S' 
 ii-rjyov avTov. 3. 6 auro? cttoXo? icrrl K6pw Kal rots 
 <^iXois avTOv. 4. Kupos Se trdp-eaTi avv rois ^apBd- 
 
 1 Except as is later explained in § 285. 
 
DECLENSION OF A-STEMS 63 
 
 POL'S 01 avT^ etcrt ttlcttoL 5. 6 auros ^6/3o<; nap-rju 
 TOis riix.eripoL'i crjpaTrjyoL^. 6. Kupos Se 17/cet aTTo ttjs 
 apX^5. 7. 17 8e ^ dno-TrefiTTec avrov ttoXlv itrl rrjv cipx>jvi 
 8. Ki^pos CTTt-ySouXevet r^ dSeX<^^. 9. 6 Se dSeX^o? 
 crv\-Xafi^dveL Kvpov. 10. auros Se (rvv-eXa^e tous 
 aXXous OTjOaTTjyous. 11. a-vfi-Trefnrei. Se Xo^oi/ auTOis. 
 12. KiJ/3os Se auTos dir-e'l9avei'. , 
 
 II. I. We do not plot against our friends. 2. They 
 have the same fear. 3. The other brothers of the general 
 were slain. 4. He himself was not present in the fight. 
 
 XI 
 
 DECLENSION OF A-STEMS {Continued). INSTRUMENTAL 
 DATIVE. ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT OF TIME OR 
 SPACE. ARTICLE WITH NAME OF COUNTRY 
 
 NOMINATIVES IN -et 
 
 139. Hitherto there have been introduced only such 
 nouns of the a-declension as have a or »; in the nominative 
 singular. There are, however, some nouns of the a-declen- 
 sion that have a in the nominative singular. They usually 
 have recessive accent (cp. § 44). In the genitive and dative 
 endings a appears if this vowel is preceded by e, t, or p 
 (cp. § 1 14), otherwise ri is found. The accusative and voca- 
 tive singular have the vowel (a) and accent of the nomina- 
 tive singular. In the dual and plural all nouns of the a- 
 declension are .inflected alike. 
 
 1 and she. 
 
64 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 140. Sing. N. V. edXaxTa, t], sea -y^+vpo, tj, bridge &.^a.%a., tj, wag<»t 
 
 G. 
 
 ea\dTTT]S 
 
 Y6<j>vpas 
 
 d|xd|iis 
 
 D. 
 
 flaXdrxD 
 
 •y«+«Pif- 
 
 d(idgT] 
 
 A. 
 
 9dXaTTOV 
 
 'Y^(|>vpav 
 
 &p,a£av 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 BaXdrra 
 
 ■yc<|>vpa 
 
 d|j.d|d 
 
 G.D. 
 
 OaXdrraiv 
 
 'YCfj'vpciiv 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 OdXarrai 
 
 'YE<t>upai 
 
 dp,a|ai 
 
 G. 
 
 OaXaTTuv 
 
 -ycifjvpuv 
 
 d|jia|aiv 
 
 D. 
 
 SoXdrrais 
 
 7€(|>vpais 
 
 d|j.d£ais 
 
 A. 
 
 OaXdrrcis 
 
 ■y€<t>vpas 
 
 d|jid^as 
 
 141. The instrumental dative is used to denote means 
 and manner : 
 
 ytcjivpa 8ta-/3ati/£i Tov TroTa/ioi^ he crosses the river by a bridge. 
 
 142. The accusative may denote extent of time or space, 
 answering the question Aow long? or how far? 
 
 ii-eXavvcL SeVa araOfjiov'; he marches ten days' journey. 
 
 143. The name of a country may take the article, which 
 is not to be translated (cp. § 89) : 
 
 17 KiXiKid Cilicia. 
 
 144. 
 
 VOCABULARY XI 
 
 duo^tt, r)s, T) : carriage, wagon. 
 Y^(|>Upa, as, T) : bridge. 
 8^Ktt, indecl. : ten. Lat. 
 
 Deca-gon (ywvCo angle). 
 8id (81' before a vowel), prep. : 
 
 with GEN. through; with acc. 
 
 on account of, by means of. 
 
 Dia-meter (n^rpov measure). 
 Sia-PaCvdi, impf Si-e^aivov : go 
 
 across, cross. (PaCva go.) 
 
 €8pa|j.ov, 2 aor. : ran. (Usually 
 
 referred to rp^x" run.) 
 €VT6B8£V, adv.: thence; of time, 
 
 then. 
 eg-eXaivu, impf E|-'^Xauvov: drive 
 
 out; inarch out or forth. 
 
 (IXavvd) drive, ride, march.'^ 
 0dXaTTa, T)s, t) : sea. 
 KiXikCS, OS, T) : Cilicia. 
 KCXio-cra, T)s, T| : Cilician woman. 
 
DECLENSION OF A-STEMS 65 
 
 Xi+os, ov, 6 : hill. prize ; with DAT. (not common 
 vtKT), T|s, k\ : victory. .in prose), around, about ; with 
 irap-cXavvu, impf. irap-'^iXavvov : ACC. around, about, near. Peri- 
 drive past or by ; march past, meter (ne'Tpov measure) . 
 rtde past, arTa6)ids, ov, 6 : dafs journey, 
 mpC (never suffers elision of the stage ; halting place (first mean- 
 final vowel), prep. : with gen. ing, but less common). 
 about, concerning, for, as a 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 145. I. I. oj Se KiXicrcra etfivyev inl rrj's ct/naf'jys. 
 
 2. kvova-i Tcts 'ye<f>vpd<;. 3. /cwjutat Se vepl tov TTora- 
 fiou Tjcrav. 4. kol eSpa/xov irepX vIkt]^. 5. ecTTL^ Se 
 iv Ty X^P^ X6(f>o^ eK daXdTT7)<; eis OdkaTTav. ^ 6. \6<f>ov 
 Se (jidcriv elvaL eV t^ X'^P'^ ^'^ 9a\dTrq<; eis OaXaTTav. 
 7. ivrevOev Kupos T171/ KlKLcra-av ets t'^j' KtXiKicti' dn-o- 
 TreiMirei. 8. Kat crvv-iirefjiTrev avrrj rous Xd^ovs ou? 
 K\eapxo<; efj^e Kai KXiapxav avTov. 9. 17 Se KiXicrcra 
 TTapr^Xavpev i<f>' d/x,afijs.^ lO. ivrevdev e£-eXawei Std 
 TTjs x^P^'' ^^5 KiXicro-ijs (TTadfLov'i Se'/fa. 11. Si-e^atvov 
 TTTjv yd^vpav. 1 2. tov Se irorafiov Si-ejSaive •ye^d/j(f . 
 
 II. I. He sent away the company (of soldiers)* to the 
 sea. 2. Cyrus marched through (Alicia ten days' journey. 
 
 3. They cross the river by a bridge. 4. Cyrus sent to the 
 CiHcian woman a wagon which he had. 5. We destroyed 
 the bridges which we crossed. 
 
 1 § 102. ' from sea to sea. ^ For l^' see § 31. * Omit. 
 
 beginner's gr. bk.- 
 
66 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XII 
 
 DECLENSION OF A-STEMS {Continued^. 
 RESULT 
 
 CLAUSES OF 
 
 MASCULINES IN -iis AND -as 
 
 .6. Sing. N. 
 
 o-TpaTi,i6Tt)s, 6, soldier 
 
 ■n-eXroo-T^s, 6, peliast 
 
 G. 
 
 CTTpaTtt&TOV 
 
 ireXTOo-Tov 
 
 D. 
 
 O-TpttTlliTt) 
 
 
 A. 
 
 <rTpaTn5Tr]v 
 
 treXTao-T^v 
 
 V. 
 
 0-TpaTiei)Ta 
 
 ■m\Taa-T&, 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 o-TpaTLcSra 
 
 ireXTacTTa 
 
 G.D. 
 
 o-TpaTiioTaiv 
 
 ireXTatTTatv 
 
 Plur N. V. 
 
 o-Tpaxiwrai 
 
 ■ir€XTa(rTa£ 
 
 G. 
 
 O-TpOTlWTMV 
 
 ireXrao-Twv 
 
 D. 
 
 o-TpaTuSrais 
 
 ireXTOO-Tots 
 
 A. 
 
 o-TpaTKiras 
 
 ireXTOo-TOS 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 To|6Tr)s, 6, bowman 
 
 gevCas, 6, Xenias 
 
 G. 
 
 TO^OTOU 
 
 HevCow 
 
 D. 
 
 ToifiT^ 
 
 HtvCcj 
 
 A. 
 
 ToJoTtlV 
 
 H«vCov 
 
 V. 
 
 T0|6Ta 
 
 BevCa 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 To|6Ta 
 
 
 G D. 
 
 TOJOTOIV 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 To^drair 
 
 
 G. 
 
 TO|OTWV 
 
 
 D. 
 
 To^dTais 
 
 
 A. 
 
 To|6Tas 
 
 
 a. Masculines in -tt;? have vocatives singular in -a. 
 
 b. It is to be noted once more that all nouns of the a- 
 declension are inflected alike in the dual and plural. 
 
 147. Result is expressed by ftjcrre so that with the indica- 
 tive or infinitive. The indicative usually denotes the actual 
 
DECLENSION OF A-STEMS 
 
 67 
 
 result ; the infinitive, the natural result. With the indica- 
 tive the negative is ou ; with the infinitive, /*^ : 
 
 exyf. TrXoia tLcTTt eXaySev avrovi he had boats SO that he captured them ; 
 tlx^ TrXoux mrre Xa/Sdv avTovi he had boats SO as to capture them. 
 
 148. 
 
 VOCABULARY XII 
 
 airo-()>cv7<a, impf. dm-i^iv^ov, 2 aor. 
 d.ir-^c|>«Yov : _/?«£ away, escape. 
 
 Sp6|ios, ov, 6 : a run. Spijiiji: on 
 the run. Cp. 'e-Spo|i-ov. Hippo- 
 drome (tiriros). 
 
 QevCSs, ov, 6 : Xenias. 
 
 oirXfrris, ou, 6 : a heavy-armed 
 soldier, hoplite. See p. 139, 
 Fig. 18. Cp. SirXov. 
 
 iraCcB, impf. Siraiov : strike, smite. 
 
 irtXTaoT-^s, oB, 6 : a light-armed 
 soldier, peltast. 
 
 nio-(8ai, uv, ol: Pisidians, na- 
 tives of Pisidia. 
 
 <rTpaTuiTT)5, 01), 6 : soldier. Cp. 
 orrpaTi^. 
 
 oTiv-d^m, impf. oTiv-fl7ov, 2 aor. o-uv- 
 ^707ov : lead together, collect. 
 
 To^dTTis, o«, 6: bowman. 
 
 <i>n^, f|s, Tj: fiight. ^vyi: in 
 flight. Cp. ^ii-<iia. 
 
 XeI'PCo-o(|>o5, ov, : Cheirisophus. 
 
 &a-rt, conj. . so that, so as, there- 
 fore (§ 147). 
 
 Fig. 4. — HeXraffTi^s (cp. p. 117, Fig. 14), 
 
68 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 149. I. I. Qevias Se dx^v ottXetcI?. 2. o-vv-Tjyaye 
 8e Tous cTTpaTiwrds. 3. ol 8' e/c roS TreStov TJ-eXracrrai 
 Spofjicp^ e(j)vyov. 4. 01 8' aXX.01 orpariwrai Traiovai 
 TOP avOpoiiTov. 5. eVeXeve tous TreXracrTas rjKeiv. 
 6. Kal 6 Xei,pi<T0(j)0? (Tvp.-Trip.Trei avrS rous vreXra- 
 crrd?. 7. ot Se 'aei'iov crrpaTiuTab y^Kovcriv. 8. ot 
 8e Toforat (f>vyfj ^ XeCnovcrL top \6<^ov. _ 9- '"' "^ iroXe- 
 IXLOi ovK a.Tro-<^evyov<Tiv • e^oi yap TrXota oxjTe Xafielv 
 aurous. 10. dXX' ou/c ■^yes tous TreXraoTas ; li. wcrTe 
 ou/c ideXo) airo-TTefiveLV rows crT/oaTiwrd? avTcov. 12. evo- 
 jLii^e 8e 701^ crroXoi/ eti'ai et? T0115 nrcri8d?. 
 
 II. I. He ordered the general to dismiss the soldiers. 
 2. He collected his soldiers and said that the expedition 
 was^ against Cilicia. 3. Therefore they did not wish to 
 come with him. 
 
 1 Dat. of manner; cp. § 141. 
 
 ' Originally is. 
 
 Fig. 5. — To|At9)s. 
 
FUTURE INDICATIVE OF O-VERBS 69 
 
 XIII . 
 
 FUTURE INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE OF O-VERBS IN 
 THE ACTIVE VOICE. RULES OF WRITING AND 
 EUPHONY APPLYING TO MUTE THEMES: MUTES 
 BEFORE SIGMA. GENITIVE OF TIME. FUTURE 
 INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE AND AFTER 
 
 Review the statements about the formation of the pres- 
 ent tense (§§ 41-43)- 
 
 150. The future indicative active is formed from the 
 verb theme, to which are added the future tense suffix and 
 the personal endings. The future suffix is ao before /^ 
 and V, (7€ before other letters. The personal endings are 
 like the present. 
 
 151. FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF \ia 
 
 Sing. I. \v-(r<i) /shall or will loose 
 
 2. Xu-o-eis you shall or will loose 
 
 3. Xv-o-et he shall or will loose 
 
 Dual 2. X\i-<r«-Tov 
 3. Xw-cre-Tov 
 
 Plur. I. \v-a-o-yjtv we shall or will loose 
 
 2. XS(-o-6-T6 yoti shall or will loose 
 
 3. Xv-crou-o-i(v) they shall or will loose 
 
 Future infinitive Xu-o-eiv 
 
 152. Verbs with themes ending in a vowel, e.g. KeKevay, 
 regularly form the future like Xvca. These are called 
 vowel themes. 
 
 Ver.bs with themes ending in a mute (§ 27), e.g. •n-^fiirm, 
 are called mute themes. 
 
70 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 RULES OF WRITING AND EUPHONY APPLYING TO MUTE 
 THEMES: MUTES BEFORE SIGMA 
 
 153: I. A labial mute (§ 27) unites with a following 
 sigma and makes •</^ (= tt?). 
 
 2. A palatal mute (§ 27) unites with a following sigma 
 and makes ^ (= «?). 
 
 3. A lingual mute (§ 27) is dropped before a following 
 sigma. 
 
 These rules are illustrated, for example, in the formation 
 of the future of verbs with themes ending in a mute. Thus 
 the future 
 
 of Tre/ttTTQ) is Trefi-^a) (Trefnr-cra)), of XeiTrco is Xeiyjra) (XeiTT-aco) ; 
 of aya is d^o) {ay-aw), of e;y;(B is e^a> (ey^^a-co) ; 
 of apird^co ^ is apirdcra) {dpTraB-crca). 
 
 154. The change of breathing in the future of e)(^co (e^Q>) 
 is to be noted as unusual; there is also another future of 
 
 155. The genitive case may be used to denote time 
 within which : 
 
 oi^ i?^^' SfKa ^ficpZv he will not come within ten days. 
 
 156. The future infinitive is used as follows : 
 
 I. In indirect discourse when it represents the future 
 indicative of direct discourse (cp. § no. a); this is its 
 principal use : 
 
 oiip( rj^ojjjcv we shall not come {direct discourse) ; 
 
 ov (pda-Lv rj^uv they say they will not come {indirect discourse). 
 
 1 The theme of apirdjca is apiraS-, not apira^-. This verb and similar 
 verbs have for the present tense suffix y% instead of simple %. ' So the 
 ending -Ja is for •%ya. 
 
FUTURE INDICATIVE OF O-VERBS 71 
 
 a. Observe that the Greek prefers to place the negative 
 before ^dal. Compare Latin nego for died non. 
 
 2. After (leWw be about, intend; but fi^Wco also permits 
 the present and the aorist infinitive :" 
 
 fieXXova-iv -qieiv they are about to come. 
 
 157. VOCABULARY XIII 
 
 &}M, adv. ; at the same time, to- ^SKKa, impf. e)uXXov, fut. |ieX- 
 
 gether with, with dat. &|ia t^ X'fjo-u (irreg.) : be about, in- 
 
 T||i.^pq, : at the same time with tend ; delay, 
 
 the day, at daybreak. Cp. Lat. olKta, as, i) : house, 
 
 simul. Hama-dryad (8p€s/r«?). irap-^x"; ™pf- •"■"■p-'^XO", fut. irop- 
 
 firiTljScios, o, ov : suitable, neces- k^a (or iropo-irx^jo-u), 2 aor. 
 
 sary.- rd. liriT'fjSeitt (neut. pi. irap-iayfiv: hold beside, furnish, 
 
 subst.) : provisions, supplies. provide, supply. 
 
 ti9ii, adv. : straightway, at once. itivrt, indecl. : five. Penta-gon 
 
 T||Upa, as, % : day. Eph-emeral («<|>-). (7<iiv£a angle) . 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 158. Give the meanings of Xei'xjrere, a^'^crovai, a^o- 
 fiev, apirdaei, 7re/ii|rets, ireicrei, Xeiyjrovai, KeKevaei, dp^ofiev, 
 Kfokuaere. 
 
 159. I. I. i^ofiev TO. iTTLTtjSei.a} 2. vofiL£,ov(nu i^eiv 
 TO. eiriTifSeta. 3. jj^ovaiv ets Kcofjid<; pjs 7roA,e/*ids x^ 
 jods. 4- ivofJLitpv Se rj^eiv ets Kcu/ids T17S iroXe/irids 
 Xapo.'S. 5. crTpaTr]yov<; 8e ^^pvaiv 0% avTov<s a^ovaiv. 
 6. dyopoLv 8e irap-e^ofMev. 7. ev6v<; d7ro-77-e)u,t/>ei avrov 
 ei? T^v oIklolv. 8. dfia Se t^ VH-^P^ °' iroXefiLou rj^ov- 
 (jiv. 9. dXXa TTaCa-oixev tous TroXe/Atou?. 10. d^ei. 
 avTOVS trivTe. rjfj^epcoy eis ^WjOtoi". 1 1 . dyophv Se cure 
 Kt)/)os oure KXeap^os nap-eieiv ifieWev. 
 
 1 Sometimes rairiT'/iBeta by crasis, § 30. 
 
72 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 II. I. Within ten days they will come to the river. 
 
 2. At daybreak we shall supply provisions to the soldiers.^ 
 
 3. We are about to destroy the bridges. 4. They say 
 they will not destroy fhe bridges. 5- He will send men 
 who will destroy the bridges. 
 
 XIV 
 
 FIRST AORIST INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE OF O-VERBS 
 IN THE ACTIVE VOICE, e-rrei AND eireihrj when WITH 
 IMPERFECT OR AORIST INDICATIVE 
 
 160. The first aorist indicative, as a secondary tense 
 (§ 39), has the augment (§ Jj). To the augmented 
 theme are added the first aorist tense suffix (ra and 
 the personal endings. The suffix era becomes fr^ in 
 the third person singular. Reference should be made 
 to the personal endings already learned for the other 
 secondary tenses, imperfect and second aorist (§§ 81, 
 82, 85). 
 
 a. Personal endings are wanting in both the first and 
 the third persons singular of the first aorist indicative. 
 
 b. The first aorist stem is the theme of the verb plus <Ta, 
 as the future stem is the theme plus 0-% (§ 150). 
 
 161. The first aorist indicative, like the second aorist 
 (cp. § 84), expresses a simple act in past time. The first and 
 the second aorist may often be translated with the auxiliary 
 had; this is regularly true when the aorist is introduced 
 by the conjunction cTreC or eTreihrj when. 
 
 1 Pat. of indir. obj. 
 
FIRST AORIST INDICATIVE OF O-VERBS 73 
 
 162. FIRST AORIST INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF \dw 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1. i-Xv-tra / loosed i-\ia-a-\uv we loosed 
 
 2. ?-\u-cro-s you loosed l-\«-<ro-TOv 4-\ii-<ro-T4 you loosed 
 
 3. 'i-\v-<ri(v)^ ke loosed i-\v-ir6.-rriv 'i-Xv-a-a-v t/iey loosed 
 First aor. infin. \{icrai to loose ^ ; in indir. disc, io have loosed, etc. (§110). 
 
 163. Verbs with themes ending in a vowel regularly 
 form the first aorist like \v(o. 
 
 164. Verbs with themes ending in a mute (§ 27) form 
 the first aorist in conformity to the euphonic laws men- 
 tioned in the last lesson (§153): 
 
 ■n-efiiro) {ireixir-), first aorist eTrefi-sjra 
 
 apxco (apx-), " " vP^a 
 
 ireidw {iruO-), " " 'iireiaa 
 
 dpTrd^co (dpTraS-), " " ripiracra 
 
 a. Xewro), ajm, exo>, and many other verbs have no first 
 aorists ; but their second aorists (§§ 85, 87, 88) do not differ 
 in meaning from first aorists. 
 
 165. The first aorist of eXavvco drive, ride, march, which 
 has been seen in the compounds i^-eXavvco march out or 
 forth and irap-eXawm drive or march past, is r\Ka(7a. 
 
 166. The first aorist active infinitive is always accented 
 on the penult. Thus a-vp^^ovXevaai, not av/ji^^ovXeva-ai. 
 
 167- ^irei and IttciSt) meaning when and referring to a defi- 
 nite act in past time take the imperfect or aorist indicative : 
 
 cTTEt T^i/ Kut/iriv hi-ripTrcuTav, l^vyov when they had sacked the town, 
 they fled. 
 
 1 Cp. § 32. 2 The simple act (cp. § 84. a). 
 
74 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 l68. VOCABULARY XIV 
 
 'ApTol^plHS, ov, 6 : Artaxerxes. Ilpi^vos, ov, 6 : Proxenus. 
 
 BoiiiTios, o, ov : Boeotian. o-ii\-\e-y<o (o-«v+X^7«^a/.4«r),impf. 
 
 Si-opwASo) (8id + dpirdju), impf. o-uv-eXevov, fut. <n)X-\«|w, aor. 
 
 Si-fjpirajov, fut. 8i-apird(rco, aor. crvv-^Xtitt : gather together, col- 
 
 Si-'^pirao-a : tear in pieces, plun- lect. 
 
 der utterly or thoroughly, sack. o-uii-PovXeuw (o-iiv + PouXeiu) , impf. 
 
 4ircC and Iitsi-Sti, temporal conj. : o-uv-ePoiXevov, fut. o-u(j.-PoDXeiira>, 
 
 ■ze/^^w, after. aor. o-w-EPovXevcra : //aw with, 
 
 eaup.d£<u (theme 9au|j.a8-), impf. advise, vi\\\\ 6sX. 
 
 ieai|ia£ov, fut. to be learned Tp^irw, impf. erpeirov, fut. tfii/a, 
 
 later, aor. l9ai?|iao-tt : wonder, aor. crpEij/a : /2<r«. Tpe'iru els 
 
 wonder at, adttiire, with ace. ((hiytjv : /«/ to flight. 
 
 o«v, postpositive particle : there- xpiJ<r£ov, ov, to : gold. Chrys-an- 
 
 fore, accordingly, at any rate. themmn (a,\^i^ov flower) . 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 169. Give the meanings of ecryov, eKoKvaav, fjp^ev, iae- 
 "kevaare, eXlirov, eTreicra'i, iTre'fi-yjrafiev, -ijiyaye, rjpiracra. 
 
 170. I. I . Tipo^evov 8e tov Boiturtot' iKeXevcrev rjKeiv. 
 2. 17 8e KtXtcrcra idavfjuacrev. 3. Kai Kvyoos (TW-eTrefjiAJiev 
 avTrj rows crr/aartwrds. 4- '^*'' Toi)^ (TTpaTijyovs iKe- 
 Xevaev oirXrrd? ayayeiv.^ 5. ei5 <f)vyrjv eTpe\lje rows 
 
 jTTpaTKiiTas. 6. CTrel Se KXeap^os eXafie to -^pvcriov, 
 (XT par LOOT a? crvv-iXe^ev. 7. Kal tSs a/xafds ot o-ut" 
 'ApTa^ep^Yj Si-ijpTTacrav. 8. eVeiSi^ 8e KOpos tou? 
 CTTpariwrds Trap-yjXacreu, cTTefixpev avdpoiTTOv tticttov 
 TTapa Toil? <rTpaTrjyov<s. 9. crwv-e/SouXeucrev oSi" avTois 
 ju,i) Xvcrat T'^v ye(j)vpav. lO. ec^ij Se Kupov eVi- 
 ySouXeCcrat t&) dSeX^w 'Apra^ep^r). 11. KXeia/a^of Se 
 KcXeuovcri irepAJjai ^vXaKrjv irapa TrjV yei^vpav. 
 
 i§§87,98. 
 
THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 7S 
 
 II. I. The men with Cyrus had thoroughly plundered 
 the land. 2. When the Cilician woman had ridden past 
 the soldiers, she admired them. 3. We put^ the enemy to 
 flight. 
 
 XV 
 
 THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. USES OF THE DE- 
 MONSTRATIVES. PREDICATE POSITION OF THE 
 DEMONSTRATIVES. NAME OF RIVER IN ATTRIBU- 
 TIVE POSITION. PARTITIVE GENITIVE. DATIVE 
 OF TIME. COGNATE ACCUSATIVE 
 
 DECLENSION OF outos this, 886 this, AND iKttvos that 
 
 Neut. 
 
 TOIJTO 
 
 TOUTOV 
 
 T0VT4J) 
 
 toBto 
 •ttyinia 
 
 TOiiTOlV 
 
 TOVTa 
 
 TOIITWV 
 
 TOVTOIS 
 
 TaSra 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 171. Sing. N. 
 
 ovTos this 
 
 avTi) 
 
 G. 
 
 TOUTOV 
 
 TaiJTTis 
 
 D. 
 
 TOVTIJ 
 
 ToiT^I 
 
 A. 
 
 toOtov 
 
 Tairtiv 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 ToiTO) 
 
 TO«T» 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Toiroiv 
 
 TOVTOIV 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 OVTOl 
 
 avrai 
 
 G. 
 
 TOisTWI 
 
 ToilTUV 
 
 D. 
 
 TOVTOIS 
 
 Tavrais 
 
 A. 
 
 TOUTOVS 
 
 Tairas 
 
 172. Note. — The declension of ovtos, oxTtj, toSto may be remem- 
 bered thus : (i) forms with initial t occur in all cases in which the article 
 6, ly, TO has initial t, and not otherwise ; thus tovtov (toS), oSrot (01). 
 (2) The penult has ov when the ultima contains the o sound (o or co); 
 otherwise the penult has av. 
 
^6 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 173. oSe is simply the definite article 
 
 enclitic -Se. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Sing. N. S8e iAis 
 G. TovSe 
 
 D. T§8€ 
 
 A. Tdv8e 
 
 Dual N. A. TiJSe 
 
 G. D. Toiv8« 
 
 Plur. N. otU 
 
 G. Twv8e 
 
 D. Toi<r8« 
 
 A. Toiirie 
 
 Fem. 
 i]8e 
 
 rgSe 
 ti&8e 
 
 T0tv8E 
 
 at8c 
 
 Twv8t 
 
 TattrSc 
 rdcrSe 
 
 ;, )5, TO, + an 
 
 Neut. 
 
 T68e 
 
 TovSe 
 
 T^8€ 
 
 TO 8c 
 
 T1&&C 
 
 ToivSe 
 
 rdSc 
 Tuv8c 
 Toto-St 
 To8e 
 
 174. For the declension of i/celvoi that (Lat. ille), cp. 
 aXko<i, § 124. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Sing. N. Ikcivos 
 
 G. IkcCvov 
 
 D. CKCCV(>> 
 
 A. IkcIvov 
 
 Dual N. A. cKcCvci) 
 
 G. D. iKetvoiv 
 
 Plur. N. Iksivoi 
 
 G. ImCvuv 
 
 D. EKeCvois 
 
 A. cKcCvovs 
 
 Fem. 
 
 IkeCvt) 
 
 Ike(vt]s 
 
 eKeCvg 
 
 ekeCvi^v 
 
 EKcCvu 
 
 CKclvOlV 
 
 EKElVai 
 EKcCvuV 
 
 EKcCvais 
 CKcCvas 
 
 Neut. 
 IkeIvo 
 ckeCvov 
 ekeCvu 
 
 EKEIVO 
 
 ekeCvu 
 
 EKctvOlV 
 EKElVa 
 
 Ike(vuv 
 
 EKEf.VOlS 
 
 ^KEtva 
 
 USES OF THE DEMONSTRATIVES 
 
 175. While ovTO'; and oSe both mean this, this man, etc., 
 oCto? often refers to what has preceded, and oSe to what is 
 to follow : 
 
 ovSe to5to E(^rj he admitted not even this (something that has been 
 
 mentioned) ; 
 avv-t^ov\e.v<je.v atirois TaS; he advised them as follows. 
 
THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 77 
 
 a. eKelvo<i means that, that man, etc., much like the Latin 
 ille. 
 
 b. All three of the words may be used as pronouns, he, 
 she, it, etc., just like the Latin hlc, iste, and ille. 
 
 176. When used as demonstrative adjectives meaning 
 this and that, ovTo<i, oSe, and e/cetJ/o? must have the predi- 
 cate position (§ 68) : 
 
 ovTos o avOpoiTTOi this man. 
 
 177. The Greek often prefers the plural ravra these 
 things, when in English we properly use the singular this : 
 
 TaBra criJi'-cjSouXcucrev he advised this. 
 
 178. The name of a river regularly stands between the 
 article and the noun : 
 
 6 Ev<t>poi.T7ii TTora/ids the Euphrates river (cp. the Hudson river). 
 
 179. The genitive is often used to denote the whole, of 
 which a part is taken (partitive genitive) : 
 
 aAAos tS)v (TTpaTimTtiv another of the soldiers. 
 
 a. The partitive genitive usually has the predicate posi- 
 tion : 
 ot aya^ot rlov XoxaySv the good men among {/it. of) the captains. 
 
 180. The dative (locative) is used to denote time when : 
 
 eKeivr) Trj ■q/J.ipa ^Kev on that day he came. 
 
 Compare the genitive of time within which (§ 155) and 
 the. accusative of time how long{\ 142). 
 
78 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 a. Sometimes the preposition eV is used with the 
 dative of time : 
 
 iv rrjSe ry rjl'.ipa on this day. 
 
 i8i. Cognate accusative or accusative of the inner 
 object. — The direct object of a verb may repeat in the 
 form of a noun (or adjective or pronoun) a meaning similar 
 to that of the verb : 
 
 4>vXaKo.s ^uXaTTctv to do guard duty (/zV. to guard guardings) ; 
 (Tvv-£/3ovX£va-e TaSe he advised as follows, t'.d. he advised these [pieces 
 of advice]. 
 
 182. VOCABULARY XV 
 
 For the meanings and uses of IkcEvos, o8t, and outos, see §§ 1 75-1 77. 
 
 a-yopdju (theme dYopaS-), impf. )i^vtoi, postpositive particle : /low- 
 
 T|-y6pa5ov, fut. d7opdo-u, aor. ever, yet. 
 
 T|Y6pao-a : buy. Cp. d7opd. nerd (before smooth breathing 
 
 Si^Xos, T), ov : plain, clear, evi- (ict, before rough breathing 
 
 dent. (itO', § 31), prep. . with gen. 
 
 Silo, generally used indeclinably : with, in company with ; with 
 
 two. Cp. Lat. dtw. Acc. into the midst of, after. 
 
 JKarov, indecl. : hundred. iropao-d^-yTis, ow, 6 : parasang, a 
 
 tXavvw (for IXa-vD-<o, theme «Xa-), Persian measure of distance, 
 
 impf. TiXauvov, fut. to be learned about 3.3 English miles. Cp. 
 
 later, aor. i]Xa<ra (cp. § 165): owe league (3 miles). 
 
 drive, ride, jnarch. Much less vo-Tcpatos, o, ov : later, following. 
 
 common than its compounds. rfj vo-TtpaCi;^ (supply rin^pe},) : on 
 
 Ev(t>pdTTis, ou, 6: Euphrates. the following day (§ 180). 
 
 Kal 7dp: and in fact; or for <|>vXdTT(ii, impf. eijivXaTTov, fut. <|>u- 
 
 also, for even. Sometimes may Xdga, aor. e(tiiiXa|a : ^arrf. Cp. 
 
 be rendered /^j', /or. (j>vXaKfj. 
 
 Note. — The present of <^v\a.TTu> is formed from the theme <^vXaK- 
 plus the present suffix y%, k + j/ by a euphonic law becoming tt. Cp, 
 § 153, footnote. 
 
THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 79 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 183. I. I. fiera raCra Kupos i$-ekavvei, irrl tov Ev- 
 (ppaTTjv TTOTafiov. 2. Tov<; 8e aTpaT7jyov<; rjya-ye Sta 
 TauTTjs TTjs ^copds- 3. e/c Tovrrfi ttJs Kmjx'q'i ot crTpa- 
 TLCiiTai '^yopa^ov to, eTTtrr^'Seta. 4. raynqv rrjv inLO-TO- 
 \rjv o Kvpo<s eXa/3ei'. 5. Sei'ias fievroL tovtov tc!)v 
 (jTpaTLOiTcov rip-^ev. 6. ouS' aXX.os twj' crTparioiTSiv e/f 
 rauTTjs T';7s jua^Tjs ^(^vyev. 7. /cai ydp arpanqyoi koX 
 Xo'^dyoi ii^'vKaTTOv eKeivov. 8. toutoi' tw olvov tois 
 ^iXois Kt)/3os eveixxjjei/. 9. rows fJievrov dyaOov^ rav 
 Trekraa-Tcov crvv-eXe^ev. 10. SiJXoi' 8e rouro tjj vore- 
 paia ^i^. 1 1 . Sia rovrou tov weBiov yjXaae crTadp^ov^ 
 ovo TTapacrdyyd'i^ SeKa. 12. '^crav S' ovu ovtou eKarov 
 OTrXtrat. 13. ot Te crrpaTrjyol Kal ol Xo^dyot crw- 
 e^ovXevcrav aurois rctSe. 
 
 II. I. Thence he marched five days' journey to the 
 Euphrates river. 2. These soldiers were not slain ^ on 
 that day. 3. The soldiers do guard duty. 4. He came 
 with^ his friends. 5. This wine he will send to his friends. 
 
 ^ § 142. ^ 2 aor. of diro-flvTi'o-KO). ^ Use [Utvl with the proper case. 
 
 Fig. 6. — Ap6iMs. 
 
8o BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XVI 
 GENERAL REVIEW 
 
 184. A thorough review of the past lessons is now most 
 advisable. Of first importance is the vocabulary ; and all 
 the words hitherto given are here collected in alphabetical 
 order (§ 186). They should be committed to memory from 
 English into Greek as well as from Greek into English. 
 The student should make a list of the English meanings 
 and then write the Greek equivalents opposite. The same 
 plan of review should be frequently followed later. 
 
 This list of words must be thoroughly mastered. It is 
 a help to the memory to associate words that show the 
 same stems and roots (^e.g. %o)pa with ')((opiov, Xop^a^o? with 
 \6')(p'; and a'yw) and to recall similar stems in English {e.g. 
 philanthropy from 0tXo? and avOpairo'^). See the special 
 vocabularies for suggestions of this sort. 
 
 When verbs occur in the following list, the first persons 
 singular of the imperfect, future, and aorist (first or sec- 
 ond) are also given. In a few instances, however, cer- 
 tain verb forms have had to be postponed to a more 
 advanced period of study. They may always be found in 
 the general Vocabulary. 
 
 Hereafter the imperfect will not be given, unless it shows 
 an irregularity. 
 
 Typical words from the following list should be inflected 
 both in written work and orally. 
 
 185- A common negative prefix is a{v)-; it is equivalent 
 to Latin in- and English un-. It is known as alpha priva- 
 tive. Cp. a-Bid^aTO';, a-<j)v\aKTO'!. 
 
REVIEW OF VOCABULARIES 
 
 8i 
 
 i86. 
 
 a,ya,96i 
 
 cL^opd^o) (cp. i,yofi&), T|7ipa£ov, d^o- 
 
 pdo-u, TJ'y6pa(ra 
 0.7(1), fj^ov, d£(i>, TJ^aYOv 
 dSe\<t>6s 
 
 dSidparo; (d- priv. 4- 8ia-PaCva>) 
 dXXd (cp. aX\o$) 
 dWos 
 
 ctjia, &p.a T'Q 'r||Ji^pf 
 &|j,a$a 
 avSpuiros 
 dird 
 diro-Svga-KO), dir-^6vx|(rKov, fut. to be 
 
 learned later, dir-^6avov 
 diro-ire|i,ir(i>, d7r-^ir6|iirov, diro-irc|i(|ni), 
 
 dir-^irc|i.i(ra 
 airopos 
 diro-<|>Ei)Y(D, dir-^i|)6V70v, fut. to be 
 
 learned later, dir-^<j>«7ov 
 dpird^w, ijpira^ov, dpirdcu, Jipiroira 
 
 »PX^ (apX") 
 
 »PX<»! »iPXov, ap|o>, TJpga 
 
 avT6s 
 
 d<f>u\aKTOs (cp. 4>u\aK<i) 
 
 PdpPapos 
 
 BoL(&Tl05 
 
 7dp 
 
 7l4>''P<'' 
 
 8^ 
 
 S^Ka 
 
 8id 
 
 Sia-PaCv(D, Si-E^aivov, fut. and aor. 
 
 to be learned later 
 Si-apird^<ii, 8i-'^p7ra^ov, Si-apirdiru, 
 
 81-^p'irao-a 
 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 6 
 
 8(kii 
 
 8p6)i.os (c8pa|u>v) 
 
 8vo 
 
 eSpap,ov 
 
 cBe'Xw, ijSeXov, eSeX'/jo-u, TiB^XTiira 
 
 et 
 
 cl|i(, l(rT((v), i<m(y), ilvtu, 
 
 cts 
 
 clra 
 
 iKardv 
 Ik€ivos 
 
 cXavvu), ijXavvov, fut. to be learned 
 later, ijXao-a 
 
 ivravSa, 
 
 4vTev6ev 
 
 ^-6,ya, ^-fJYov, ^^-d^u, 4i-<i707ev 
 
 E|-c\auv(i), l|-^XaiJvov, fut. to be 
 
 learned l^ter, tJ-^Xoo-a 
 lircC 
 
 eirC 
 
 liri-PovXev(D, cir-cPovXevov, eiri- 
 
 PovXevo-ci), iir-tfioiXevira, 
 eirMTToX^ 
 citit^Seios, rd liriT^Seia 
 
 EP70V 
 
 EvOvs 
 
 £ji(j>paTi]s 
 
 cijiao-av, E(|>T| 
 
 ^X"*! '^Xov, iSgu or axf\<ra, ?<rxov 
 
 Tl, 1)8^ 
 
 ilKO), i|kov, ligw (these are all the 
 
 tenses) 
 T||i^pa 
 
 TIpiTEpOS 
 
82 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 T|irttv 
 
 OdXarra 
 
 eav|id£(ii, 4eav|i.a^ov, fut. to be 
 
 learned later, I9oii|i.aora 
 ecds 
 tiriros 
 
 KaC, Ka( . . . i<aC, Kal y&p 
 KaK6s 
 Ka\6s 
 
 Kc\cv(i>, Ik^Xcvov, KcXciiiru, iK^Xevo-a 
 KiXikCS 
 
 KCXio-o-a (cp. KiXikCS) 
 KX^apxos 
 Kvpos 
 KuXvu, IkuXuov, K(i)Xv(r(i>, iKiaXvo-a 
 
 KUflt) 
 
 Xafi^dvu, £Xoi(i,pavov, fiit. to be 
 
 learned later, cXaPov 
 \flTrio, eXciirov, XeCi|>o>, (Xiirov 
 X6'Y0s 
 X6(|>os 
 
 Xo\a7<Ss (X6xos, a^yw) 
 X6xos 
 Xvu, eXvov, Xvo-cd, eXvcra 
 
 |i.^XX(i>, cficXXov, neXX^cro), 4|j.^XXT|o-a 
 |jLev 
 
 |Jl^VTOl 
 
 |ji6Ta 
 
 (ura^i (cp. nerd) 
 
 vtKt) 
 
 vo|i,(£(D, ivdjiijov, fut. to be learned 
 
 later, iv6]ua-a 
 Qcvtas 
 o, 6 S^, i ]Uv ... 6 84 
 
 6Sis 
 
 ol |MV . Ol it 
 
 oivos 
 
 AirXtTus (iiirXo) 
 iiirXov, ftirXa 
 fipSios 
 
 SpKOS 
 
 iis 
 
 OV, OVK, O^X 
 Ov8^ 
 
 ovv 
 
 oiire- . . . o6t€ 
 
 OUTOS 
 
 waCd), eiraiov, iroCcrw, cirdi(ra 
 
 irdXiv 
 
 iraXTiv 
 
 irapd 
 
 irapao'd'y7r]S 
 
 irdp-Ei|i,i, irap-Tjv, fut. to be learned 
 
 later, no aor. 
 irap-eXavvci), irap-ijXavvov, fut. to be 
 
 learned later, irap-^Xoo-a 
 irap-exw, irop-etxov, irop-^lo) oriropo- 
 
 o^-^o-w, irap-^o-xov 
 irdpoSos (irapd -|- 686s) 
 ir«8tov 
 
 Tresis (cp. ireStov), ol ir£^o{ 
 iteISco, eiTEiSov, iteCo-ci), ^£iira 
 ttcXtoo-t'^s 
 ir^fiirii), (VEfitrov, 7r^|i,i|f(D, «rE|it|>a 
 
 TT^VTE 
 
 ircpC 
 
 Hio-CSai 
 
 irio-ris (cp. iretOd)), rd irnrrd 
 
 irXotov 
 
 iro\4p.ios, ol iroX^|uoi 
 
 iroTa|jLds 
 
 IIpi|Evc$ 
 
 irpis 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION 
 
 83 
 
 o-tros 
 
 <rKii\vi\ 
 
 (r6s 
 
 o-irovSf], irirovSaC 
 
 <rTa8)i,ds 
 
 o-T«v6s 
 
 <rT6Xos (cp. liri-o-To\^) 
 
 <rTpaTTi7<Ss (cp. o-Tpari^ and li,ya) 
 
 (rrparid 
 
 <rTpoTi<4Tiis (cp. o-Tpartd) 
 
 <rvX-Xa|ipdva>, o-vv-E\dp,pavav, fut. to 
 
 be learned later, o-vv-^apov 
 <ruX-X47(i>, o-vv-^\eyov, (rv\-Xd|(i>, a-vv- 
 
 <ru|i,-PovXcvu, <rvv-cPoAXcvov, <rv(i- 
 
 PovXevo-cD, o-vv-EPovXcvo-a 
 (rv)i-ir^|xiru, <ruv-<ire|i,'irov, <rv|i,-ir^|i,i|f(i>, 
 
 triv 
 
 o-uv-d'Y<i), (Tvv-fl'YOv, o-uv-dju, <rvv- 
 
 ■iiyayov 
 rdi^pos 
 
 TC, Tt . . . KaC 
 
 t6 
 
 To£dT1]S 
 
 Tp^TTw, ^Tpcirov, Tp^t|/<i>, tirpt^a 
 
 VfUTEpOS 
 
 vcTTEpaios, rfj wTcpati^ 
 
 <j)acrC(v) 
 
 <t>6»i7u, ti^ivyov, fut. to be learned 
 
 later, S<|>uyov 
 <|>T]o-t(v) 
 (|>(Xos 
 (|>dpas 
 
 <|>ii'V<i (cp. <|>c<iYu) 
 <{>vXaKyj 
 <|>uXdTTa>, l<t>uXaTTOv, i|>vXd|a>, l^v- 
 
 Xa|o (cp. <t>uXaK'^) 
 XEi.p[<ra<t>os 
 XP«<rCov 
 X<4pa 
 
 \aplov (cp. X'^P^) 
 <i) 
 
 XVII 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION: STEMS ENDING IN A MUTE 
 (PALATAL OR LABIAL). fiea^ov IN PREDICATE 
 POSITION 
 
 STEMS ENDING IN A PALATAL 
 
 OR 
 
 LABIAL MUTE 
 
 187. Sing. N. V. Kflpvg, 6, Aeraid 
 
 
 ijidXa'yl, T|, phalanx 
 
 G. K^pVK-OS 
 
 
 <j)d\a'y7-os 
 
 D. K^lpUK-l 
 
 
 4id\a77-i 
 
 A. K^piiK-a 
 
 
 <|>dXaY7-a 
 
 Dual N. A. V. K^piiK-£ 
 
 
 ^iXa.yy-1 
 
 G. D. KT|pi)K-OlV 
 
 
 i|>aXdYY-oi.v 
 
84 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 K^pVK-€$ 
 
 <t>dXa77-es 
 
 G. 
 
 KT)p«K-tl>V 
 
 <|)a\d7'v-<i>v 
 
 D. 
 
 K^pvSl(v)l 
 
 4>a.a7gi(v)i 
 
 A. 
 
 K'^pvK-as 
 
 <j>d\a77-a$ 
 
 Sing.N.V. 
 
 8i»pv|, T), trench 
 
 kXiSi|/, 6, ^/^/ij/^ 
 
 G. 
 
 8iiipvx-os 
 
 KXii>ir-6s 
 
 D. 
 
 Sl(ipUX-l 
 
 K\ci)ir-C 
 
 A. 
 
 Siupux-a 
 
 KXuir-a 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 SlwpDX"' 
 
 kXutt-e 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Sicop^X-oiv 
 
 KXuir-otv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 8i(&pvx.-ES 
 
 KXwir-es 
 
 G. 
 
 8i(i>pvx-uv 
 
 kXcott-uv 
 
 D. 
 
 8twpv|L(v) ^ 
 
 kX<«i1»£(v)1 
 
 A. 
 
 8icopvx-as 
 
 KXd)ir-a$ 
 
 i88. The stem of a noun of the consonant declension 
 is seen when the ending -o? is dropped from the genitive 
 singular. Thus the stems of the preceding nouns are 
 respectively KripvK-, (fiaXayy-, BLcopv^-, kKwtt-. 
 
 189. The accent of the paradigms of Krjpv^, <f>aXa'y^, and 
 Si&pv^ comes under laws already learned (§§ 57, 59). But 
 K\(oy]r, a word of one syllable, comes under a new law, peculiar 
 to the consonant declension : Monosyllables of the conso- 
 nant declension are accented on the ultima in the genitive 
 and dative of all numbers/- — with the circumflex, if the ultima 
 has a long vowel or diphthong, otherwise with the acute. 
 
 190. The nominative singular of the preceding nouns 
 ends in sigma ; the dative plural in -<Tt. With k, y, or x> 
 sigma unites to form ^, as has already been explained 
 (§ 153. 2); with IT, /S, or (f),szgma unites to form yjr(^ 153. i). 
 
 191. -as of the accusative plural is short in the conso- 
 nant declension, but long in the a-declension (§ 93). 
 
 ' Cp. § 32. 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION 
 
 85 
 
 192. |i,e(ros in the predicate position has a partitive 
 sense, meaning middle of: 
 
 ^ <l>a.Xay^ liia-q or jueVi; ij <j>a\ayi the middle of the phalanx ; 
 
 but ^ iMea-Tj (})d\ay^ means t/ie middle phalanx, i.e. between 
 two others. 
 
 193- 
 
 VOCABULARY XVII 
 
 olKoiw, fut. to be learned later, 
 i^Kouo-a: hear, hear of, listen. 
 With object in gen. or ace. 
 Acoustic. 
 
 &|i4i( (may be elided, tt(i(|>', before 
 a vowel), prep. : with gen. con- 
 cerning, about (but in prose 
 ir«p£ is generally used in this 
 sense) ; with acc. about. 61 
 d|i,<|>V Kvpov : Cyrus and his 
 men (lit. those [the men] 
 about Cyrus) . Amphi-bious 
 (ptos life), amphi-theater (6^5- 
 Tpov) . 
 
 Si-^X*' (fo'' other forms, see ex«) : 
 be apart, be separated. 
 
 SkSku, Sui^o), iS(c>i|a : pursue. 
 
 Siupvf, vxos, T) : trench, canal. 
 
 0p$|, @pfKds, 6: a Thracian, 
 Thracian. 
 
 6(ipa|, Skos, o: breastplate. See 
 p. 86, Fig. 7. Thorax. 
 
 Kf)pv|, iiKos, o : herald. 
 
 KX(&<|r, KXa>ir6s, o : thief. Klepto- 
 mania (piavCa madness) . 
 
 ji^o-os, t], ov : middle, middle of. 4v 
 (Uo-o) : in the midst, between (with 
 gen .) . |j.E'<ros in predicate posi- 
 tion means middle of {% 192). 
 Meso-potamia (iroToiiis) . 
 
 '6\os, 1), ov : whole, entire, all. 
 Holo-caust (kooi bur?t). 
 
 oiK-in, adv. : no longer, no mx)re. 
 
 irfl, enclitic adv. ; anywhere. 
 
 ■irp6 (like irept, never suffers elision 
 of the final vowel), prep, with 
 gen. only : before, in front of. 
 Lat. pro. 
 
 crdXiri'Yl, 'VYos, 'H : trumpet. 
 
 <rT(i8iov, 01), ti : stadium (race 
 course) ; then a measure of dis- 
 tance, stade, 600 Greek feet. 
 PI. both o-rdSioi, 01, and o-tA- 
 Sia, tA. See p. 95, Fig. 9. 
 
 11)01X071, a-y7oj, r| : line of battle. 
 Phalanx. 
 
 it>vXa|, ttKos, 6 : guard, sentinel. 
 Cp. i)>vXaK^. 
 
 xtXioi, ai, a: thousand. Kilo- 
 meter ((Urpov measure). 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 194. I. I. Kii]pvKa<; Se eTTefjbxIie Trepl cnrovoav. 2. vap- 
 €<TTi 8' 6 Krjpv^. 3. Tovs Se K^WTras iXa^ov. 4. Kai 
 
86 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 K\eapxo<i etx^" OTrXErds X'^'<"^5 koL TreXracrTas @pq.Kai. 
 5. ol Se d)Li(^i Sei'iav rjKovcrav ttJ^ crd\inyyo<s. 6. Kvjoos 
 Se Ktti ot crrpartwrat aurou elxoi' OcopaKas. 1- kou ov- 
 K€Tt 8vo crraSta^ St-er^o'' "■^ ^aXayyes. 8. ot Se /3oip/3cL- 
 poi yja-av iv fiecrcp tov irora/ioO /cai ri^S Stwpuxo^- 9. Trpo 
 T'^s (fxiXayyo'; jneicrij? ■^v Ku^oos. lO. ot oe ttoXc/xioi 
 auTot e^ovcri, ^vXa/cas. 11. el Se ttyj tovto rjv^ ttj oXiy 
 (jxiXayyi kukov 'rjv. 12. 01 Se ^uXa/ce? ihtoi^av tous 
 /cXwira?. 
 
 II. I. We shall send heralds to Cyrus. 2. We think 
 we shall send heralds to Cyrus. 3. Between the canal and 
 the river are the guards of the enemy. 4. Our soldiers 
 no longer heard the trumpet. 5. Clearchus and his men 
 ran into the middle of the river. 
 
 1 Cp. § 142. 
 
 * = happened. 
 
 Fig. 7. — eii/o5f 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION 
 
 87 
 
 XVIII 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION (Continued). STEMS ENDING 
 IN A MUTE (LINGUAL). GENITIVE OF SEPARATION 
 
 STEMS ENDING IN A LINGUAL MUTE 
 
 195. Sing.N.V. 
 
 «t<rir£s, T), shield 
 
 iroils, Ojfoot 
 
 vi\, 4], night 
 
 G. 
 
 d<rirt8-os 
 
 iroS-ds 
 
 VVKT-dS 
 
 D. 
 
 do-irCS-i 
 
 iroS-C 
 
 VUKT-C 
 
 A. 
 
 do-irCS-a 
 
 •ir68-tt 
 
 viKT-a 
 
 DuaIN.A.V. 
 
 do-irCS-e 
 
 ird8-e 
 
 viKT-4 
 
 G.D. 
 
 do-irCS-oiv 
 
 iroS-otv 
 
 VVKT-otV 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 do-irCS-6S 
 
 ir68-«s 
 
 V1PKT-£S 
 
 G. 
 
 d<rirCS-ci)v 
 
 iro8-uv 
 
 Vl)KT-WV 
 
 D. 
 
 do-irt-(ri,(v)^ 
 
 iro-o-C(v) 1 
 
 v«5C(v)i 
 
 A. 
 
 dtrirCS-as 
 
 ir68-os 
 
 viKT-OS 
 
 Sing.N.V. 
 
 apxuv, 6, ruler 
 
 Xiipis, r|, grace, gratitude 
 
 G. 
 
 apXOVT-os 
 
 XilpiT-os 
 
 
 D. 
 
 opxovT-i 
 
 xApiT-i 
 
 
 A. 
 
 opxovT-a 
 
 Xdpt-v 
 
 
 DuaIN.A.V. 
 
 8,pXOVT-« 
 
 XApiT-£ 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 dpx6vT-oiv 
 
 XaptT-oiv 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 opxovT-ts 
 
 XapiT-Es 
 
 
 G. 
 
 dpx<SvT-<i)v 
 
 XapCr-tDv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 apxov-o-i(v)i 
 
 X<ipi-cri(v)l 
 
 
 A. 
 
 apxovT-os 
 
 xApiT-os 
 
 
 Sing.N.A.V. 
 
 o-rpdrcvpia, t6, army 
 
 
 G. 
 
 (TTpaTSVllOT-OS 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 irrpaT6^|jiaT-i 
 
 
 
 DuaIN.A.V. 
 
 (rTpdT6il(iaT-£ - 
 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 CrTpOT«V(J,liT-0lV 
 
 
 
 ■- Plur.N.A.V. 
 
 crTpaTEv|iaT-a 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 (rTpaT6i)|xdT-wv 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 <rTpoTe<(jia-cri(v) • 
 
 [ 
 
 
 ^ Cp. § 32. 
 
88 • BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 do-wfs, irovs, vil, X^P'* 
 
 196. Four nouns of this group form the nominative 
 singular by adding sigma to the stem. The stem of acyirk 
 is ao-TTtS- (§ 188). In the nominative singular and in the 
 dative plural, before sigma, the lingual mute is dropped 
 (§ I S3- 3)- So with TTOi;? (stem iroh-), vv^ (vvkt-), and %a/3« 
 (xaptT-). A lengthening of to otf occurs when ttoS? 
 becomes ttow ; this is irregular. Since t drops before a; 
 wf is for w«:[t]? ; ;)(;a/>t?, for xa/3t[T]s ; wft (dative plural) 
 is for vvK[T'](n. 
 
 197. The accusative singular of %aj0t9 is X"'P''^> ^'^^ 
 xdpira. The ending -iv or -vv, in the accusative singular, 
 belongs to almost all nouns with stems in unaccented c or v 
 followed by a lingual mute. It does not belong to aairk, 
 for -iS- is accented. 
 
 198. For the accent of the monosyllables irov'; and vv^, 
 see § 189. 
 
 ap\(i>v, (rTpdTcv|i,a 
 
 199. The remaining two nouns of the group form nomi- 
 natives singular from the mere stem, without any ending. 
 The stem of apj(mv is ap^ovT- ; of a-Tpdrev/ia, crTpareviiar-. 
 In both instances, final t of the stem is dropped, for a 
 Greek word cannot end in t (§ 10). dpxtov, having o 
 lengthened to « in the nominative singular, is typical of all 
 present active masculine participles of <o-verbs, e.g. Xvmv 
 loosing and ex^v having; as well as of such second aorist 
 participles as Xiirmv having left (observe that the latter 
 differs in accent). 
 
 a. a-Tpdrevfia is typical of a very large number of neuters 
 of this declension. 
 
 200. apxov(n(v), the dative plural of dpxmv, is for apxovr- 
 o-t(i'). In compensation for the loss of both v and r (for v 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION 
 
 89 
 
 must also be dropped before sigma, § 133. 4), o is length- 
 ened to ov. 
 
 201. Genitive of separation. — Besides the of genitive 
 (§ 53-/)) there is also 21. from genitive, which is used with 
 verbs (and adjectives and adverbs) to express separation, 
 source, and similar ideas. It corresponds to the Latin 
 "ablative of separation": 
 
 dTr-e'xetj/ tijs 'EWaSos to be distant from Greece. 
 The measure of distance, if added, is in the accusative 
 (§ 142). 
 
 202. 
 
 VOCABULARY XVlll 
 
 oir-^XO) : be distant, be away, with 
 gen. of person or place, and ace. 
 of extent of space. 
 
 clpXiiv, ovTos, 6 : ruler, commander. 
 Really the pres. masc. partic. 
 of apxo). Archon. 
 
 d(rir(s, tSos, T| : shield. See p. 97. 
 
 AapEios, ov, 6 : Darius. 
 
 'EWds, dSos, T| : Hellas, the name 
 given by the Hellenes to their 
 own country. From the Ro- 
 mans they received the appella- 
 tion Greeks and their land was 
 called Greece (Lat. Graeci, 
 Graecid). 
 
 ^\6ov 2 aor. . I or they came or 
 went ; inflected like eXiirov ; 
 inf. ^\9eiv. 
 
 kX^tttcii (theme kXctt-), kX^iJ/w, 
 ckX£i)'°''= steal. Cp. kX(S»|/. 
 
 Kvr)jits, tSos, T) : greave. See p. loi. 
 
 AaKESai|j.6vios, o, ov : belonging 
 to AaKe8o((j,o)v (Lacedaemon'), 
 l^acedaeinonian. Spartan. 
 
 v«|, vuKTos, T|: night. (i^o-ai yi- 
 KTts : midnight (middle watches 
 of the night) . Lat. nox. 
 
 Spvts, iflos, 6 and t) : bird. Ornitho- 
 logy (X670S account) . 
 
 ori,rt\.3.div.:when,atthetimewhen, 
 commonly with impf. indie. 
 
 iraCs, iraiBds, 6 and t| : child, boy, girl. 
 The gen. and dat. dual is excep- 
 tionally accented iratSoiv, and 
 the gen. pi. iratSmv. The voc. 
 sing, isirai. Ped-agogue (d^w). 
 
 irovs, iroSds, 6 : foot. Also the 
 Greek unit of length. Lat. 
 pes. Tri-pod (rpets, rpia three) . 
 
 o-TpdTeu|ia, aros, to (cp. o-TpOTia) : 
 army. 
 
 T6$ev|i,a, aros, ri (cp. To|<Tr]s) : 
 arrow. 
 
 (fivyds, dSos, 6 (cp. <])£i7») : fti^' 
 live, exile. 
 
 xdpis, tTos, T): grace, favor, grati- 
 tude. x'i^P"' '^X'^*" '■ fi^l thank- 
 ful, with dat. 
 
90 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 203. I. I. KXeap^o^ AaKeSaufiovio'S (l)vya,<; ■^v. 2. tov; 
 Se cf)vyoiSa^ eKekevcre Trap-euvac. 3. e/ceA.evcre Se top 
 crTparrjyov diTo-TTe[j.ipaL 6 et^^e crTpdrtvpua} 4. 01 8e 
 CTT/aartwrai eT^oi- KviqpA.ha'; Kal dcrTriSa?. 5. ei* Se rats 
 oiKiai<i rjcrav opvlde?. 6. Kal toIs twi' TToXefiuov dp- 
 XovcTLv ovK iiT-efiovkevev. 7. dir-er;)(ov Se r-^s 'EWdSo? 
 ^jA^ta oTctSia. 8. eVi Se rd oTrXd ovk rj'kdov ravrriv 
 Trjv vvKTa.^ 9. ore Se ravra ^v, /xeirat rjaav vvKxes. 
 10. d/cou&j Tovs Aa/ceSai/Aoj/tovs eu^us e'/c TratSojf^ /cXe- 
 •nreii'.* II. /fai \ap.^dvovcnv avTov Kal tous TraiSa? 
 /cai Toirs iWovs. 12. rd Se rofeu/iara ^\^e Std rwi' 
 dcTTTiScDi' Kal Std Tcut- OoipaLKOiv. 13. AdpeCw Se ■^o-af 
 TraiSes Svo, 'ApTa^ep^7]<; Kal Kupos. 14. rots oSi/ 
 ^eots X"/''^ exo/^ei/. 15. idavfiacrav Se rd 77/30^ 
 
 TToSftJl'. 
 
 II. I. The soldiers have beautiful shields. 2. They are 
 distant from Greece a hundred parasangs. 3. I hear that 
 the commanders are« brave. 4. I hear the soldiers took 
 the shields. 
 
 1 /.e. t6 <rTpdT«u(j,a o etx*. * § 1 10. a. 
 
 2 during- this night, § 142. S the things before, 
 from boyhood. • Cp. sentence 10 above. 
 
 Fig. 8. — Sii\7ri7f 
 
DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 
 
 91 
 
 XIX 
 
 DECLENSION OF PRESENT, FUTURE, AND AORIST AC- 
 TIVE PARTICIPLES OF THE O-VERB. DECLENSION 
 OF mv. ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLES. SUBSTANTIVE 
 PARTICIPLES. CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLES OF 
 TIME, CAUSE, ETC. SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLES 
 WITH TV'^')(av(o 
 
 DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES IN -wv, -owo, -ov 
 
 204. Participles in -wv (with stems in -ovt-) are declined, 
 in the masculine, like ap^x^av (§ 195). The neuter nomina- 
 tive and accusative singular consists of the mere stem, 
 which drops t, since this letter cannot end a Greek word 
 (§ 10). The neuter nominative and accusative plural ends 
 in -a. Otherwise the neuter forms are like the masculine. 
 The feminine of these participles, ending in -ovaa, is 
 declined like ddXarra (§ 140). 
 
 wv ieing-, Present Participle of ctjiC (§ loi) 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 ;. Sing.N.V. 
 
 &v 
 
 oi(ra 
 
 6v 
 
 G. 
 
 SvTOS 
 
 o<i(rT)S 
 
 fivTOS 
 
 D. 
 
 OVTL 
 
 oCoTi 
 
 fiVTl 
 
 A. 
 
 6'vTa 
 
 ovo-av 
 
 6v 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 6vT6 
 
 oWa 
 
 SvTt 
 
 G.D. 
 
 fivTOlV 
 
 o{S(raiv 
 
 fivTOlV 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 fivTiS 
 
 QwrOiit 
 
 6vra 
 
 G. 
 
 Svrav 
 
 oiv&v 
 
 SvTWV 
 
 D. 
 
 ot<n(y) 
 
 o<!o-ai« 
 
 oim(y) 
 
 A. 
 
 6Vtos 
 
 o{!(ras 
 
 Svra 
 
 a. The accent of wv in the genitive and dative, mascu- 
 line and neuter, of all numbers is exceptional (§ 189). 
 
92 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 KuXtfwv hindering, Present Participle of 
 
 KCi>\v(i> 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 206. Sing.N.V. 
 
 kcdXvcdv 
 
 KuXvotio-a 
 
 kcdXvov 
 
 G. 
 
 k<d\«ovtos 
 
 Ka>\vov(rr]S 
 
 kojXvovtos 
 
 D. 
 
 KtuXvOVTl 
 
 Ka>\uovo']3 
 
 KuXvOVTl 
 
 A. 
 
 K(i)\uOVTa 
 
 K<i)\vou(rav 
 
 KUXSOV 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 KCdXuovTe 
 
 K(i>\voii(ra 
 
 KUXVOVTE 
 
 G.D. 
 
 KbiXvOVTOlV 
 
 K(i>\vou<raiv 
 
 K(l>Xv6vT0lV 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 K(l>\V0VTES 
 
 K(i>\vovo-ai 
 
 KwXvovTa 
 
 G. 
 
 KWXUOVTWV 
 
 KcoXvovcruv 
 
 KuXvbvToiv 
 
 D. 
 
 K<D\iJou<ri(v) 
 
 KcoXvovcrais 
 
 KcoXvovo'i^v) 
 
 A. 
 
 KciiXvovras 
 
 KuXvovo-as 
 
 KOlXvOVTa 
 
 a. KolXvav is used in the paradigm, instead of Xvaiv, 
 \vov(Ta, Xvov, loosing, in order to show the accent in the 
 neuter kcoXvov (not recessive). The two words are de- 
 clined alike. 
 
 207. Xvcraiv, \vaovaa, \vcrov, about to loose, future par- 
 ticiple of \vu>, is declined like the present participle \vmv 
 or KwKvwv. 
 
 SECOND AORIST PARTICIPLES IN -<Sv, -o«o-o, -iSv 
 Xiir<iv having left, Second Aorist Active Participle of XcCiru 
 
 208. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 1. Sing. N. V. 
 
 XiiriSv 
 
 \iirovo*a 
 
 XimJv 
 
 G. 
 
 XiirivTos 
 
 XiTTOira'Tjs 
 
 XfirdvTos 
 
 D. 
 
 Xiir6vTi 
 
 XiiroiiTfi 
 
 XiirdVTi 
 
 A. 
 
 XtirdvTO 
 
 XiTTOtia-av 
 
 Xiir6v 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 Xnr6vT« 
 
 Xiirovcra 
 
 XiirovTe 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Xiir6vT0iv 
 
 Xiiroio-aiv 
 
 XnrivToiv 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 XiirivTes 
 
 Xiirovo-ai 
 
 XiirivTa 
 
 G. 
 
 XiirivTwv 
 
 Xiirovo-uv 
 
 XiuivToiv 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Xi'iro€(ri(v) 
 XiiriVTas 
 
 Xiiroio-ats 
 Xiirovo-as 
 
 Xiirofio-i(v) 
 XiirdvTa 
 
 a. Observe that Xtircov is accented like aiv (§ 205). 
 
DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 93 
 
 FIRST AORIST ACTIVE PARTICIPLES IN -os, -a<ra, -ov 
 
 a.Ko\ia''S.'i having heard, First Aorist Active Participle of 
 dKovu (Stem dKovo-ovT-) 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 1. Sing.N.V. 
 
 A,Koia-as 
 
 dKOvo-acra 
 
 dKovo-av 
 
 G. 
 
 OKoio-avTos 
 
 dKotiir^(rr|s 
 
 dKoio-avTos 
 
 D. 
 
 dKovo-avTi 
 
 dKovirdcrxi 
 
 dKoiia-avTi 
 
 A. 
 
 dKOvcravra 
 
 dKOvcra(rav 
 
 dKoSo-av 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 dKOV(ravT£ 
 
 dKOvo-do-a 
 
 dKovo-avn 
 
 G.D. 
 
 dKovo-dvToiv 
 
 dKOiia-do-aiv 
 
 dKOvo-dvTOiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 dKOuo-avTcs 
 
 dKoOo-aorai 
 
 dKOvcravra 
 
 G. 
 
 dKouo-dvTwv 
 
 dKOuo-oo-fiv 
 
 dKovo-dvToiv 
 
 D. 
 
 dKOi)(rao-i(v) 
 
 dKouo-do-ais 
 
 dKOVCaCTL (v) 
 
 A. 
 
 dKOvo-avTas 
 
 dKovordcras 
 
 dKOvo-avra 
 
 a. aKoxxTOfs is for aKOvcravr<; ; the loss of vt before sigma 
 in both nominative singular and dative plural is compensated 
 by the lengthening of a to a (cp. § 200). 
 
 b. Xvcras having loosed is declined like aKova-an. 
 
 210. For the agreement of the participle with its noun, 
 see § 53. i. 
 
 211. The participle is often used as an attributive 
 adjective: 
 
 Tov PauiKevovTa ^ 'kpra^ip^rfv the reigning Artax^xes. 
 
 a. The participle may of course take one of the other 
 attributive positions (§§ 6y, 69). 
 
 212. The participle is very often used as a substantive, 
 when it may be translated by a relative clause or by a noun ; 
 
 ol irap-di/Tes those who are present ; 
 o KeXevmv the man who commands ; 
 
 1 Pres. partic. of Pao-iXcvo) he king, , 
 
94 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 ol KoyXiaovres those who will hinder ; 
 
 01 i6i\ovT€<; <j>vyrj's apxetv those that wish to begin flight ; 
 
 6 <t>tvyu]v the fugitive, the exile ; 
 
 6 ap\(ov the ruler ; 
 
 6 op^ds the man who had (or has) ruled. 
 
 213. Circumstantial participle. — The participle is very 
 often used without the article, in agreement with a noun, 
 to define the circumstances of an action. This, the cir- 
 cumstantial participle, is most often equivalent to a clause 
 expressing time or cause : 
 
 (Of time) KXmpxos 8e Xa^Suv TO ■xpvo'iov CTTpoLTevfjM. crvv-eX.£$€V and 
 when Clearchus had received the gold, he collected an army ; 
 
 (^0/ cause) Trjv j((0(Ddv 8i-^p7racrei' <i)s 7roA.€/xtav oixrav he laid waste the 
 country, since, as- he-alleged (= As), it was hostile. 
 
 a. The word «? is not essential to the latter construc- 
 tion; but its force (lit. as) must be observed when it is 
 used. 
 
 d. Particularly to be noticed is the use of exfov and 
 Xa^mv in the sense of with, expressing an attendant cir- 
 cumstance : 
 
 KoX fjKi KA.eapxos ex""' ott^tws and Clearchus came with hoplites. 
 
 c. The circumstantial participle may also express condi- 
 tion (if), concession (although), manner, and means. 
 
 214. The time of the participle is commonly relative to 
 that of the main verb. That is, the present participle 
 indicates the same time with the finite verb, the aorist par- 
 ticiple prior time, and the future participle subsequent 
 time. But these distinctions do not always hold, particu- 
 larly in case of the present and aorist participles. 
 
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE 
 
 95 
 
 215. Supplementary participle. — The participle is often 
 used to complete the idea expressed by the main verb. 
 This is known as the supplementary participle. Of the 
 important constructions under this head, only one is intro- 
 duced in the present lesson : the participle with rvyy^dvco 
 happen, chance: 
 
 o §£ 7rap-(ov eVvyxave and he happened to be present, or and he was 
 present, as it happened. 
 
 216. The negative with the participle is regularly oh; 
 but the conditional participle takes /*^. 
 
 Fig. 9. — Ground Plan of the Stadium at Athens. 
 
96 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 217. VOCABULARY XIX 
 
 dir-ii\flov, 2 aor. indie. : I or they l^vos, ok, 6 : guest-friend. 
 
 went away. Inf. dif-e\9«Iv, irevTaKdcrioi, ai, o: Jive hundred. 
 
 partic. air-c\eiov. Cp. irevre. 
 
 'ApCo-Tiiriros, ou, 6 : Aristippus. irp^TTw (theme irpa7-), irpagu, 
 |3ao-C\€i.os, ov : of a king, royal, to eirpo|a: accomplish, effect, do. 
 
 Pao-C\€ia (neut. pi. subst.) : M^ SupCo, os, t] : Syria. 
 
 royal buildings, the palace. Tv^yjaia (theme tuX")! ^^''- t° 
 Pao-iXetiu, Poo-iXetio-w, ipairCXeuo-a : be learned later, 2 aor. Wa- 
 
 be king, rule as king. X"" ■ f^^t (with gen.) ; happen, 
 
 «I8ov, 2 aor. indie. : / or they saw, chance (with supplementary 
 
 Inf. tSeiv, partic. t8i6v. partic.). 
 
 Kiv8vV£va>, Kiv8iiv€V(riD, eKivSvvEV(ra : XP^K''^; aros, to : a thing of use ; 
 
 z««^r danger, run a risk. commonly pi., possessions, 
 
 \a)i,irpdTr)s, utos, t| : splendor, bril- money. 
 
 liancy. 
 
 218. Note. — The present of TrpoiTTw is formed from the theme 
 irpay + present suffix y% ; y + y hy a. euphonic law becoming tt. 
 Cp. (^vXaTTO), § 182, Note. 
 
 The present of rvyxdvw is formed from the theme rv^ + present 
 suffix av%. V, taking the form y nasal by § 133. 2, is inserted in the 
 theme proper before x- A similar formation is seen in Xa;ny8avo) (theme 
 AajS-). In the last verb, v inserted before /8 becomes ;u. (§ 133. l). 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 219. I. 1.0 8' aTT-rjXde KivBvvevcrd?. 2. 17 8e 
 KiXicrcra IBovcra tyjv XafjLTrporrjTa tov crTparev/iaTos 
 idavixaa-ev. 3. 6 8e \al3(bv to ^pvcriov (TTpaTevfia 
 avv-eXe^ev dno ^ tovtcdv tcov ^p-qiidTOiv. 4. Ilpd^ei'os 
 Se Trap-yjv e^av ottXitos ets ^ rrevTaKocriovi koX ')(l\iov<s. 
 
 5. ol 8e (TTpaTtmTai raCra a.KovcravTe's dw-^XOov. 
 
 6. dyado? etrriv o KeXevav rd -rrXola Xa^eiv. 7. iv- 
 
 1 /.<. wia the aid of. 2 to the number of. 
 
DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 97 
 
 Tavda ^v TO, AdpcLov ^acriXeia tov %vpCa.<s ap^avros- 
 8. Kol (Tvu rois Trap-ov(TL toiv mcTTCiiv ^ ■^K'ev i\avp(ov els 
 TO p,4aov? 9. 01 Se TavTa eirpa^aV, dyctyovres ^rX-tovs 
 OTTAErds. 10^ Kai Ihoiv ra? Kct)jU,ds, ■ijKei' iXavvcDv irpos 
 Tovs OTrXird'S' II. 'ApicmmTos Se ^ivos oiv irvyxa- 
 vev a.\nw? 12. Taura enpd^e aiiv tw ^acriKevovTi 
 'Apra^epill. 
 
 II. I. Aristippus happened to see the gold. 2. After 
 the generals had led soldiers to the number of a thousand 
 into the village, they went away. 3. Since Proxenus was 
 not present, he did not see those that were* in the house. 
 
 1 Subst. adj. masc. in part. gen. (§ 179), of/iis trusty men. 
 
 2 Subst. the midst. * Dat. of possession, §119. * that were = being. 
 
 Fig. 10. — ' kairiia. 
 
 beginner's gr. bk. ■ 
 
98 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XX 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION {Continued). STEMS ENDING 
 IN A LIQUID. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES IN 
 -0)1', -ov. INFINITIVE WITH Set, x/"?. e^effTiv, ETC. 
 
 STEMS ENDING IN A 
 
 LIQUID 
 
 220. Sing. N.V. 
 
 d7c6v, 6, contest 
 
 't|7E)uiv, 6, guide 
 
 G. 
 
 d-yuv-os 
 
 T|7£)l,6v-OS 
 
 D. 
 
 oySv-v 
 
 r|7e|ji6v-i 
 
 A. 
 
 dYuv-a 
 
 r)7e|i,dv-a 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 d-ywv-6 
 
 ti7«(u5v-£ 
 
 G.D. 
 
 d7<&v-oiv 
 
 T|7E|l.dv-OlV 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 d'yfiv-es 
 
 Ti7eii6v-6S 
 
 G. 
 
 d^cov-wv 
 
 T|7C|idv-(i)v 
 
 D. 
 
 d-yM-(ri,(v) 
 
 T17«(i.(5-<ri(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 dyuv-as 
 
 T|7c|ii(Sv-as 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 (i<)v, 0, month 
 
 Xift^v, 6, harbor 
 
 G. 
 
 |iTiv-<is 
 
 \l|i4v-0$ 
 
 D. 
 
 (iilv-C 
 
 \i|Uv-i 
 
 A. 
 
 lifjv-a 
 
 Xi.|j,4v-a 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 (if|v-e 
 
 Xl|L^V-C 
 
 G.D. 
 
 |X1)V-0tV 
 
 Xi|ji^v-oiv 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 Hflv-es 
 
 Xi|i^v-cs 
 
 G. 
 
 y.t\v-S>v 
 
 Xl|l,^V-UV 
 
 D. 
 
 |j.Ti-o-C(v) 
 
 Xi(i.^-<ri(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 Hflv-as 
 
 Xi,|jiiv-as 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 ■yeCTwv, 6, neighbor 
 
 KpoT^ip, 6, mixing-bowl 
 
 G. 
 
 YtCrov-os 
 
 Kparflp-os 
 
 D. 
 
 ■ytCTov-i 
 
 Kpariip-i 
 
 A. 
 
 7etTov-o 
 
 KpaTTJp-a 
 
 V. 
 
 7etTov 
 
 Kpar^p 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 7€CT0V-t 
 
 Kparfip-c 
 
 G.D. 
 
 7€it6v-oiv 
 
 KpaT'^p-oiv 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION 
 
 99 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 7(Ctov-c5 
 ytn6v-av 
 7€CT0-(ri(v) 
 YcCrov-as 
 
 Kparflp-is 
 Kpar^p-ov 
 KpaTflp-<ri(v) 
 KpaT{)p-a« 
 
 a. The nominative singular in the preceding paradigms is 
 the stem without any case-ending ; the vowel before final -v 
 or -p of the stem is always long in the nominative singular. 
 
 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES IN -»v, -ov 
 
 221. Adjectives in -tov with stems in -ov are declined 
 like ye(Tcov (§ 220). There are separate forms for the 
 neuter in the nominative and accusative, singular and plu- 
 ral. The feminine is like the masculine. The accent is 
 recessive (cp. § 44). 
 
 Masc. and Fem. Neut. 
 
 222. Sing. N. tiiat.ii.av prosperous E<!Sai|tov 
 
 ci8aC|Aov-os 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 ei8aC|i,ov-a 
 
 ciSaCfiov-cs 
 
 ciSa(|iov-as 
 
 cv8a()uiv-i 
 
 c{jSaip.ov 
 
 cv8aC|iov-c 
 
 ci8ai|uiv-oiv 
 
 ci8ai|i6v-uv 
 tiSakl\u>-<ri(y) 
 
 eliSaijiov 
 
 EiSaC|M>v-a 
 
 «v8aC)u>v-a 
 
 223. The infinitive may be used as the apparent subject 
 of Bel or XPV ^^ "" necessary, ea-Tiiy) it is possible (§ 102), 
 e^-ecrri(v) it is possible or permitted, koKov eariiv) it is hon- 
 orable, and many similar expressions, particularly imper- 
 sonal verbs : 
 
 Sei (or ypii) a-urous efvoi dyoSous it is necessary for them to be brave ; 
 Txp cu/cTos wjK t(TTiv IhAv TO. TTpo TToSdv in the Hight it is not possible 
 to see the things before one's feet ; 
 
lOO 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 e^-eo-Tii/ auToTs ttutto. Xa/Seti/ it is possible for them to receive pledges ; 
 ov KoXov icTTi KXeiTTCLv it is not honorable to steal. 
 
 a. The infinitive is neuter in gender, as the last example 
 shows. 
 
 i>. With eaTi{v) and e^eaTi(v) the dative is the normal 
 case (as avroif above), if any noun or pronoun is needed. 
 
 c. The negative with the infinitive, when not in indirect 
 discourse, is fji^ij (cp. § 98). 
 
 224. 
 
 VOCABULARY XX 
 
 d7wv, mvos, 6: gathering, contest, 
 games. Agony (d^wvCa). 
 
 ■yeiTwv, ovos, 6 : neighbor. 
 
 8«i (contracted from St'ei), fut. SeVj- 
 trei, aor. c8E't)o-£, impers. verb : 
 it is necessary. 
 
 "EXXijv, T]vos, 6 : a Greek. Cp. 
 •EXUs. 
 
 «5-€<rTi(v), 3 sing, of 6j-€i|j.i: it is 
 possible or permitted. 
 
 en, adv. : still, yet, besides, longer, 
 again. 
 
 cvSa()i(i>v, ov : fortunate, pros- 
 perous. 
 
 TiYEjiuv, ivos, 6 : leader, guide, com- 
 mander. 
 
 Kaxd (Kar and KaB', § 31), prep. . 
 with GEN. down from; with 
 AGO. down over, down along, 
 
 along, opposite, against,, by, in 
 a local .sense ; according to ; by 
 in a distributive sense, as Kara 
 (jiiiva : by the month, monthly. 
 Cata-strophe (o-Tpo<|>ifi turning). 
 
 KpaT^p, Tjpos, 6 : mixing-bowl, 
 hzt. cratera. Crater. Seep. 109. 
 
 XiU'^v, e'vos, 6 : harbor. 
 
 (i^v, (i.T]v6s, 6 : month. Lat. mensis. 
 
 fiio-Sos, ov, 6 : pay, 
 
 vOv, adv. : now (of time) . Lat. 
 nunc. 
 
 irpocr-cXavva) : drive Up, ride up, 
 draw near. 
 
 o-ii)Ti)pCa, as, T| : safety. 
 
 Xp^ (Io-tC is understood, never 
 expressed) : there is need, it 
 behooves, it is necessary; one 
 must. Inf xp^vai. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 225. I. I . ck: rauTTjs r^? X'^P^' ° apy^cnv tois 'EXXt;- 
 a-w riyefiova neixTrei. 2. 6 8' e(f>evye /caret tyjv oSov. 
 3. ol Be orpanwrai XajX^dvova-L tov Kara firjva ixia-dov. 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION 
 
 lOI 
 
 4. €<j}r] Se rj^av eis Xiyuiva. 5. vvv 8e Trepl tijs Vixeri- 
 pd^ <T0iT7}pLdL<s 6 dyciv i(TTLv. 6. Koi yetTWu ei/At t^s 
 'E\Xa8os. 7. ■^i> Se oTi/os iv Kpa.Trjpo'iv. 8. tuore 
 e^-ecTTLv iSeiv tov dycova. 9. ];^/3r) fiivTOi Zia-^aivew 
 Tov ^v<^p6.Triv TTOTCLfiov. lO. Sfii GUI' KXeap-^ov neCdeuu 
 Tous CTTpaTtwrds. 1 1 . fcal rows to)!/ 'EXXtJvwv cTTparr)- 
 ■yovs eKeXeva-ev OTrXirds dyaycti'. 12. 6 8' ei^ij eii'ai 
 avTois x^pdv KoKrjv kol evBaifiova. 1 3. eru^^e ydp en 
 TT/JOor-eXawwi'. 1 4. olh^ riy€ix.6v€^ ov^ ^)(op.^v ov ^a.(Tiv^ 
 elvai dX\r)u oBov. 
 
 II. I. It is not possible to obtain 2 provisions. 2. These 
 are brave leaders. 3. The Greeks must cross the Euphra- 
 tes river. 4. It behooves the captains to be brave. 
 
 1 § 156. 1, a. 
 
 2 = iaie. 
 
 Fig. II. — Kmiiiis. 
 
I02 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XXI 
 
 PRONOUNS {Continued). THE INTERROGATIVE tw. THE 
 INDEFINITE t«. THE INDEFINITE RELATIVE oari'i. 
 THE PREDICATE GENITIVE. INFINITIVE WITH 
 avdiyKri AND wpd 
 
 THE INTERROGATIVE tJs, t£, a;^^? which f whatf 
 
 226. The interrogative never changes its acute accent to 
 
 the grave. 
 
 "'■"" '"" """' Neut. 
 
 T( 
 
 . — 
 
 Masc, 
 
 . AND 
 
 Fem. 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 
 t£s 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 
 tCvos, toO 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 
 tCvi, t^ 
 
 A. 
 
 
 rCva 
 
 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 
 
 
 t(v( 
 
 G.D. 
 
 
 
 
 tCvoiv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 
 t£v«s 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 
 tIvuv 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 
 rCvas 
 
 
 t(o-i(v) 
 
 T(va 
 
 rfva 
 
 THE INDEFINITE tis, ti, any, some, anybody, somebody, anything, 
 something; a certain 
 
 ■2.1*]. The indefinite is always enclitic (§§ 21, 103, 104). 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 TlS 
 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Tl 
 
 G. 
 
 
 TIV6S, TOU 
 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 TtvA 
 
 TlvC, tff 
 
 n 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 
 TlW 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 
 TlVOtv 
 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 
 nvfc 
 
 TtvAv 
 
 nvd 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 TlvAs 
 
 TlO-e(v) 
 
 .....c 
 
PRONOUNS 
 
 103 
 
 THE INDEFINITE RELATIVE So-tis, riris, S ti, whoever OR whichever, 
 
 whatever 
 
 228. The indefinite relative is formed of the relative o?, 
 ^, (§ 125), and the indefinite rw, rt (§ 227), both parts 
 being declined. The combination is treated as two words 
 with reference to accent. So the circumflex appears to 
 rest on the antepenult of oiitivo<;, which is accented as if 
 o5 Tivo<;. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 00-TlS 
 
 ■ilTis 
 
 8 Ti (or 8,Ti) 
 
 G. 
 
 ouTivos, 8tou 
 
 ■qO-TlVOS 
 
 ovTivos, orov 
 
 D. 
 
 (urivi, oT(j> 
 
 iJtivi 
 
 CpTlVl, OTIj) 
 
 A. 
 
 BvTivo 
 
 ■ijvTiva 
 
 8 TI (or 8,Ti) 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 anvf 
 
 &Tive 
 
 &TIV« 
 
 G. D. 
 
 otvTlVOlV 
 
 OIVTIVOLV 
 
 olvrivoiv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 oJrives 
 
 a?TlV€S 
 
 &Tiva 
 
 G. 
 
 UVTIVUV 
 
 UVTIVOIV 
 
 UVTIVWV 
 
 D. 
 
 ol<rTi<ri(v) 
 
 ot<m<ri(v) 
 
 ot(rTi(ri(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 ovo-Tivas 
 
 ao-Tivas 
 
 &Tiva 
 
 229. Predicate genitive. — The genitive in any of its 
 relations (possessive, partitive, etc.) may stand after the 
 verb, as a part of the predicate : 
 
 al 81 K&fjuu Kvpov ^a-av the villages belonged to Cyrus (poss. gen.) ; 
 ^v 8' avTwv Upoiivoi and among them was Proxenus (part. gen.). 
 
 230. With avdyKT] [_ea-Tl{vy] it is necessary, &pd [ecrTi(i')] 
 it is the proper time, and similar expressions, the infinitive 
 is used to complete the meaning. The brackets indicate 
 that ia-T{(v) may be omitted : 
 
 AvdyKri avTois (or avrov^) XxL/x/Sdvav to. k-mT-qhtia it is necessary for 
 
 them to get provisions ; 
 ttjpd avTois riK€iv it is high time for them to arrive. 
 
I04 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 231. 
 
 'A6i)vatos, a, ov : 
 
 dvdYKi], Tis, t| : necessity. With or 
 without l<rTC(v) : it is neces- 
 sary. Inf. dv<i7KT|v stvai. 
 
 7V|j[,v^s, flTOs, 6 : light-armed war- 
 rior, javelin-hurler, bowman, or 
 slinger. 
 
 8^1, postpositive particle, empha- 
 sizing the preceding word. %i\ 
 is difficult to render adequately, 
 but is sometimes translated by 
 now, then, accordingly, very, 
 in truth, indeed. 
 
 el<r-fjX9ov, 2 aor. : / or they came in, 
 entered. Inf. elir-eXSetv, partic. 
 «lo--eX9<iv. 
 
 KaCu or Kaci), Kaviru, cKavca : burn, 
 light, kindle. Caustic. 
 
 veavlo-Kos, ov, 6 : young man. 
 
 VOCABULARY XXI 
 
 8a-Tis, iiTis, 8 Ti (or 8,Ti) : whO' 
 
 ever or whichever, whatever; 
 who, which, what; often with 
 conditional force, if anybody 
 (= el Tis), if anything (= et 
 Ti) ; see § 228. 
 
 <r<|>(v86vT], T]s, T| : sling. See 
 p. 112, Fig. 13. 
 
 tCs, tC : who ? which ? what f see 
 § 226. t£: what? often as 
 adv. why? 
 
 TIS, Ti : any, some, anybody, some- 
 body, anything, something; a 
 certain ; see § .327. 
 
 XtX6s, ov, 6 : grass, green fodder. 
 
 XP^cifios, 1], ov, and os, ov : useful. 
 
 upa, as, T) : season, hour, fit or 
 proper time. See § 230. Lat. 
 hora. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 232. I. \. "qv 8e Ti? h> Ty (TTpaTia (TTpaTTjyo^ 'Adyj- 
 valo<;. 2. Tipa^ Se XPV <f>vXaKa<; elvai ; 3. ovtol 8^ 
 eKaov Koi 'xl\ov Kal et tl ^ aWo ^pijcnfiov '^v. 4. etcr- 
 yjXffov Se Trap' avTov 01 re cn-paTTjyot Kal twv oXXcdv 
 'FiWtJvcov TLve<;. 5* '^'^'' ^vravOd rii^es aTT-idavov tmv 
 (IT paT ion Siv. 6. Tildes iaTe ; 7. ti ovk ■^ye? tows 
 TreXracrreCs ; 8. 01 yap yvp-v^rei; eXa^ou Ttva's Toyv 
 kXcottcov. 9. Tii'es exovai (r</)et'Soj'ds ; 10. ravra to. 
 epya icrTiu diropwu^ oiTive; iOdXovcn irpaTTeiv kolkov 
 
 1 tt Ti (= whatsoever) might be replaced by 8 ti, as in sentence 14. 
 
 * characteristic of men without resources, predicate gen. akin to possessive. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE OF fl-VERBS 105 
 
 TU II. eTV)(e Se e<^' lttttov^ iXavucav. 12. vedvCcrKO's 
 8e TL<; T(t)v TTapovTCiiv (Tvv-eftovXevcre ToiSe. 13. ovx a>pd 
 icTTt, f/,eX\eLv. 14. dvayKt] Se Tipo^ivca o-u/t-ySouXeScrat 
 auTois o Tt KaXoi' ecrrtv. 15. to. yap 077\a Kdpou 171^. 
 
 II. I. Who was riding on his horse? 2. Some of the 
 arms belong to Cyrus. 3. He must do whatever is ^ hon- 
 orable. 4. Proxenus came in with some of his friends. 
 
 XXII 
 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE (PRESENT AND AORIST) ACTIVE 
 OF n-VERBS. TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 MORE VIVID FUTURE CONDITIONS. WARNING 
 FUTURE CONDITIONS. PURPOSE CLAUSES. HOR- 
 TATORY SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 233. The thematic vowel of the subjunctive is a> before 
 fjL and V, otherwise ??. This is also the present tense sufHx 
 of Xvm and similar verbs. The first aorist tense suffix is aw 
 before /.t and v, otherwise cr-q. The primary personal end- 
 ings, as seen in the present indicative, are used in all 
 subjunctive tenses. 
 
 234. The imperfect tense belongs only to the indicative 
 mood. And there is no future tense in the subjunctive. 
 
 235. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE OF \va 
 Sing. . Dual Plur. 
 
 1. Xu-(i) Xu-a)-|«v 
 
 2. Xd-us Xv-r|-TOv X«-r|-Te 
 
 3. X1J-II XU-T|-T0V Xv-(ii-o-i(v) 
 
 1 on horseback. ^ In sense of delay. ^ Use pres. indie. 
 
io6 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 FIRST AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1. k6-ira \v-<ra-[Ltv 
 
 2. Xd-o-fls \tf-(n)-Tov X\i-o-r|-T6 
 
 3. \<)-0T] X«-o-t)-Tov X«-<ro)-eri(v) 
 
 a. The aorist subjunctive is not augmented. Augment 
 belongs to the secondary tenses of the indicative only (§ 77). 
 
 236. Like the present subjunctive of 'Kvco are inflected 
 the present subjunctives of all the other a>-verbs hitherto 
 studied. In the formation of the first aorist subjunctive 
 of verbs with mute themes, however, the same euphonic 
 changes are observed at the end of the theme as in the 
 first aorist indicative (§ 164). Thus the first aorist sub- 
 junctive of irefjLTroa is Trefiyjrco, Treytti/rj;?, etc.; of dpird^o) : 
 apirdaco, apTrdar]<;, etc. ; of Treidco : Treurco, ireiarp, etc. 
 
 237- Verbs like dr^w and Xehray, which have no first 
 aorist indicative, have no first aorist subjunctive. But 
 they have a second aorist subjunctive which does not 
 differ in time or use from the first aorist. The inflec- 
 tion is the same as that of the present subjunctive. 
 
 238. SECOND AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE OF XtCirw 
 {Cp. the second aorist indicative eXiirov, § 85) 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 I. 
 
 Xtir-w 
 
 
 XCir-(i>-|uv 
 
 2. 
 
 XCir-Tis 
 
 Xlw-n-Tov 
 
 XCir-Ti-Te 
 
 3- 
 
 Xtir-xi 
 
 XCir-i]-Tov 
 
 X(ir-u-o-i(v) 
 
 239. The second aorist subjunctive of oEyw is ajdr^-oi, 
 aydy-rj'i, etc. 
 
 240. Tenses of the subjunctive. — While the subjunctive 
 has no future tense, both the present and the aorist may 
 
CONDITIONS — PURPOSE CLAUSES 107 
 
 refer to future time, as will be evident from a study of 
 the constructions in the following lessons. The difference 
 between the two tenses is this : the present denotes con- 
 tinued or repeated action ; the aorist denotes a simple 
 occurrence of an action. 
 
 241. More vivid future conditions. — idp (or ■^v or dv) 
 if may introduce the subjunctive (present or aorist) to 
 express a vivid future condition. The conclusion is ex- 
 pressed by the future indicative, or by the imperative, 
 or by any other forms that may imply future time, such 
 as XP'^' e^eo-Tt(j'), etc. : 
 
 lav 6 (TTpaTTjyoi KeXevrj, rj^ti if the general orders, he will come. 
 
 a. The negative of the protasis is always /ti;; of the 
 apodosis, oi. Cp. § 106. a and d. 
 
 242. To express something unpleasant, like a warning 
 or a threat,, the protasis may have el and the future 
 indicative : 
 
 £t KXa/rct; Ti, TrpayfuiTa e^ets if you Steal anything, you will have 
 trouble. 
 
 Observe that el cannot introduce the subjunctive. Nor 
 can edv introduce the indicative. 
 
 243. Purpose clauses. — "va, ottw?, and w?, all meaning 
 in order that, may introduce the subjunctive (present or 
 aorist) to express a purpose. The subjunctive is the 
 regular construction when the verb of the main clause, 
 on which the purpose depends, is a primary tense (§ 39). 
 The construction after secondary tenses will be stated 
 later (§ 268). The negative is jt*^ : 
 
 o cTTpaTij-yos rjKu, Xvx Trtiar) tov? (TTpaTiiitTa.^ the general has come 
 that he may {i.e. to) persuade the soldiers. 
 
io8 BEGINNER'S GRELsK BOOK 
 
 244. Hortatory subjunctive. — The subjunctive is used 
 alone to express an exhortation in the first person. The 
 negative is firj : 
 
 Ka\uiq awo-OvrjaKmfjiei' let US die honorably. 
 
 245- 
 
 ov (et + av) = letv: if, conj. with 
 subjv. 
 
 Sap£iK6s, ov, 6 : daric, a Persian 
 gold coin, worth about $5.40. 
 
 lov (tt + ov), conj. with subjv. : if. 
 
 ?Koo-Tos, 11, ov : each ; used in predi- 
 cate position to modify a noun 
 with the article ; used also with- 
 out the article. 
 
 €\6(i) : subjv. of TiXOov. 
 
 f\v (et + ov) = eav : z/", conj. with 
 subjv. 
 
 iSiD : subjv. of etSov. 
 
 ivo, conj. expressing purpose : in 
 order that, that, § 243. 
 
 KoXus, adv. (cp. Ko\6s) : beauti- 
 fully, nobly, honorably. 
 
 (loWov, comp. adv. : more, better, 
 rather. 
 
 VOCABULARY XXII 
 
 otKoSe, adv. : homeward, home. 
 Cp. oIkCo. 
 
 oTTus, conj. ; z« order that, that, 
 with purpose clause (§ 243). 
 
 irocrxw, fut. to be learned later, 
 2 aor. CTToBov : suffer, irdo-xoi 
 Ti (§ 181) : suffer something, 
 euphemism for be hurt or be 
 killed. Sym-pathy (o-w-). 
 
 irpoYna, otos, to : something done 
 (cp. irpoTTu), business, deed, 
 matter, difficulty; pi. sometimes 
 circumstances, often trouble. 
 Pragmatic. 
 
 Toxv, adv. : quickly. 
 
 (is, rel. adv. ; as, as if, with causal 
 partic. (§ 213. a) ; conj. : in 
 order that, that, with purpose 
 clause (§ 243). 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 I. I. /xi? fieXXcDfiev. 2. tjv Se ti firj nddcofjiev, 
 
 246 
 
 ecTTtv otKaSe ■^kclv. 3. dv Tiva iScofjiei>, ovk ecmv aiiTW 
 a-rTO-(f)vyeLV. 4. TrpdyfjiaTa 8' efo/^ev, ikv Kara dakaT- 
 Tav ikOcoi^^ev. 5. dXXci KacDfiev ttjv -^^capav. 6. Sei 
 oSf ex"" (f>vXaKd<s ni-as iVa /xr) ot 7roXe)u,iot eXdcocn ttJ? 
 WKTOs. 7. a|^M cTTpaTtcoTds Kol iTTTTous oVws, av Ttva 
 Twi' Tro\ep,L(jov IScofiev, pjr) d7To-(j>vyri. 8. Iva, Se p.aXKov 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE OF fl-VERBS 109 
 
 0avfjida'r)T€, irefjiApcD SapeuKov iiktOov^ iKOLCTTm orpa- 
 Tiarr-Q. 9. raxv yap, av iOiXrjs, ri^oi. lO. ei Kwucrei^ 
 TTjV ')(mpd.v, Trpayp.aTa efets. II. ioLv 01 ijjOterepoi ttcu- 
 oes KaXcils dno-dvycrKaxriv ivrauTrj ry pd-^rj, XP^ X** '^ 
 e)(eii/ Tois ^eois. 12. 6 8' i^/cei ws Kavcry ttju ■^cjpdv 
 (US^ TTokepioLV ovcrav. 
 
 II. I. He will have trouble, if he leads his soldiers 
 down the steep road. 2. Let us not take provisions from 
 the hostile country. 3. He will pursue the enemy quickly 
 in order that they may not escape. 
 
 1 as pay. * Cp. § 213. a. 
 
 Fig. 12. — KpaT:}p. 
 
no BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XXIII 
 
 PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE OF eifiL USES OF THE SUB- 
 JUNCTIVE {Continued). CONDITIONAL RELATIVE 
 SENTENCES: MORE VIVID FUTURE 
 
 247. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE OF ctjiC I am 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 I , u S>yAV 
 
 1. 'DS iJTOv riTe 
 
 3. ■g tItov u(ri(v) 
 
 248. More vivid future conditional relative sentences. — 
 I. In place of d + av {i.e. idv) a relative pronoun like 
 3?, 00-T19, whoever, or a relative adverb like oitqv wherever, 
 always with av, may introduce the subjunctive (present or 
 aorist). This use of the subjunctive is known as a con- 
 ditional relative protasis. The future indicative or an 
 equivalent is used in the conclusion. Thus oo-rt? av = 
 kav Tt9 if anybody ; ottov av = eav irov if anywhere ; ottoi 
 av = eav Trot if anywhither. 
 
 irpaio) a Tiva av av/ji-fiouXevayii I will do whatever you advise {or 
 
 shall advise) ; 
 a^ei a-Tpdrcuija ottoi av ideXy he will lead an army whithersoever 
 
 he pleases. 
 
 a. In this use the antecedent of the relative is always indefinite. 
 The relative with a definite antecedent has the construction of an 
 independent sentence, — commonly the indicative, as already has been 
 illustrated (§§ 138. I. 4, 145. I. 8, etc.). But not all relatives with 
 the indicative have definite antecedents (cp. § 232. I. 14). 
 
 2. eVei, eiretS^, ore (all meaning when), and similar 
 words, when they introduce future time, take the sub- 
 junctive with av. 
 
TEMPORAL CLAUSES IN FUTURE TIME rit 
 
 a. It is to be noted that eVei -\- dv = iirrjv or eirav 
 (when) ] eVetSjj -{■ dv = iiretSdv (when) ; Sre -{- dv = orav 
 {when); of these words, iirethdv (or iirdv) meaning w/ien 
 or «/if^r, when used with the aorist subjunctive, may 
 introduce completed future time : 
 
 tTreiSav iXOrj to. Trkota, tot£ l^o/i£v to. iwiTi^Seia when the boats 
 arrive {or after the boats have arrived), then we shall 
 have provisions. 
 
 249. Note on av. — The particle av has no adequate equivalent in 
 English. Its uses in Greek, however, are most important. It appeared 
 in this book first in §§ 241, 245, as a part of the word eav or ^v or dv- 
 It makes no difference whatsoever in the translation of a subjunctive, 
 which it accompanies in a protasis. Its force with other moods will be 
 studied later. 
 
 The particle av must not be confused with the conjunction dv if 
 (= £t + av, i-e. edv). Notice the difference in the quantity of the alpha. 
 
 250. VOCABULARY XXIII 
 
 Wxi, subjv. of Set, impers. verb : it side, with the gen. hi t$ 
 
 is necessary. Cp. § 224. irfpttv: on the other side or 
 
 cTEiSdv (Iir«i8^ + oLv), conj. with bank. 
 
 subjv. : when, after. irpuTos, n, ov : first. Adv. irpS- 
 
 9du, 6u(r(a, e8ii(ro : sacrifice, offer. tov : first. 
 
 Biroi, rel. adv. : whithersoever, rdXavrov, ov, ri : talent, an amount 
 
 whither, where. of money = about f 1080. 
 
 8iroD, rel. adv. : wherever, where. Tplx") 2 aor. cSpajiov (Vocabu- 
 
 ir^pav, adv. : across, on the other lary XI) : run. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 251. I. I. r\v avdyKri y, (TTpa.Tev[jia d^ofiev eU ttjv 
 TTokiiLiay ycapdv. 2. rw Oea Tovrqt O^aofjiev onov av 
 irpoyTOv CIS Kokov ireSiov rJKcafiei'. 3. X€ipL(ro<f>o? oe 
 KcKevei tous TreXracrT^S irpdrreiv o tl av 6 Xo^dyos 
 
112 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 idekrj. 4. eVeiSdi' Se hpdjXMaiv ol iroXefxtoi,, Set tou? 
 rjfieT€pov<; aTpaTi,a)Td<; hia-^aivuv rov noTajxau. 5. o? 
 av irpcoTos iv tw Tripav tov iroTafiov fj, ovtos egei fiL- 
 crdov TakavTov. 6. Sfi Se Tpe)(e.tv, eirtihav 6 cTTpaT-qyo^ 
 KeXevcrrj. 7. tous dvdpcovovi tovtovs ^v\d^op,€.v, ottws 
 rjyefjiove? wanv ottol av Sey iXdelv. 8. dvdyKiq oe Trpagai 
 a' ai' (rvfj.-^QvXevcT'rj's. 9. tovtco Trapa-tr^T^creTe o rt av 
 
 II. I. When you come home, you shall have a talent as 
 pay. 2. Whoever is first on the other bank shall lead the 
 soldiers. 3. We shall do whatever the general commands. 
 
 1 Cognate obj. (§ l8l); the antecedent Taira is understood. 
 
 Fig. 13. — Slinger (ff^evSonjTijs^. 
 
OPTATIVE OF fl-VERBS 113 
 
 XXIV 
 
 THE OPTATIVE (PRESENT, FUTURE, AND AORIST) 
 ACTIVE OF n-VERBS. TENSES OF THE OPTATIVE. 
 SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 AFTER VERBS THAT TAKE on OR ax; that 
 
 252. The thematic vowel (§ 41) in the present and 
 second aorist optative is in all numbers and persons. 
 The tense sign of the future optative is ao ; of the first 
 aorist, (ra. There is added to these vowels, in each tense, 
 the mood sign of the optative,^ which is t ; in the third 
 person plural the mood sign is te. Then follow the per- 
 sonal endings, which are mostly the same as in the imper- 
 fect indicative (secondary endings). But the first person 
 singular ends in -/it. 
 
 253. Final -01 and -at are long in the optative (cp. § 23). 
 
 254. PRESENT OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF \ta 
 
 ' Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1. Xll-Ol-f» Xv-Ol-|iEV 
 
 2. X«-Ol-S Xu-Ol-TOV Xv-Ol-TE 
 
 3. Xv-oi, Xv-oC-Tnv Xu-OM-V 
 
 FUTURE OPTATIVE ACTIVE 
 
 1 . Xv-(roi.-|j,i Xv-a-oi-|iev 
 
 2. Xw-o-oi-s Xu-crot-TOv Xd-troi-Te 
 
 3. Xv-coi Xb-o-oC-tiiv Xu-<roM-v 
 
 FIRST AORIST OPTATIVE ACTIVE 
 
 1 . Xv-(rai.-)i,i Xv-(rai-|i.cv 
 
 2. X«-<7at-s, -o-eios ^ Xk-ctoi-tov X«-o-oi-t£ 
 
 3. X«-crai, -o-«ie(v)^ Xv-o-oC-thv Xu-crate-v, -creiov ^ 
 
 1 No account is made here of the sign nj, which will be seen later in the book- 
 ^ The regular Attic Greek ending. 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 8 
 
ti4 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 255. Like the present optative of \vca are inflected the 
 present optatives of all the other (o-verbs hitherto studied. 
 In the formation of the future and first aorist optative of 
 vetbs with mute themes, however, the same euphonic laws 
 are observed as in the future and first aorist indicative 
 (§§ 153, 164): 
 
 Tre/jL-yjroifii, (f ut. opt. of •Trefi-Tro)), irifii^aiiii (aor. opt.) ; 
 
 XeC^oilu (fut. opt. of XetTTft)); 
 
 a^ot/M (fut. opt. of d'yto) ; 
 
 Treia-oi/it (fut. opt. of TreCOca), ireiaaifjii (aor. opt.); 
 
 apTrdaoifii (fut. opt. of dpTrd^m), apirda-aifii (aor. opt.). 
 
 256. Verbs like a<y(o and Xeiirco, which have no first aorist 
 indicative or subjunctive, have no first aorist optative (cp. 
 §§ 237, 238); but they have a second aorist optative which 
 does not differ in time or use from the first aorist. The 
 inflection is the same as that of the present optative. 
 
 257. SECOND AORIST OPTATIVE ACTIVE OF Xttiru 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1. XCir-oi-|ti \Cir-oi-)i,Ev 
 
 2. \Cir-oi-s Xtir-oi-Tov \£ir-oi-Te 
 
 3. \(ir-oi Xiir-oC-TT|v XCir-oiE-v 
 
 258. The second aorist optative active of aytD is a^d 
 yoifii, aydyot'}, etc. 
 
 259. Tenses of the optative. — The distinction between 
 the present and aorist optative (when not in indirect dis- 
 course) is not one of time, which is determined by the 
 context. It is rather this: the present denotes contin- 
 ued or repeated action, while the aorist denotes a simple 
 occurrence of an action. Compare the distinction between 
 the present and aorist subjunctive (§ 240). 
 
INDIP.ECT DISCOURSE 115 
 
 a. The tenses of the optative in indirect discourse, how- 
 ever, denote exact time, i.e. present, past, or future. 
 
 b. The future optative is regularly found only in indi- 
 rect discourse, when it represents the future indicative of 
 direct discourse. 
 
 SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE AFTER VERBS 
 THAT TAKE Sri thai OR us that 
 
 260. While ^rjai, e^rj, and the other forms of this verb 
 {<f>r]fji,L) are followed by the infinitive in indirect discourse 
 (§ no), the common verb Xe-y<o say takes on or m? t/ia( 
 and a finite mood. The original mood and tense of the 
 quoted verb are always retained after a primary tense 
 (§ 39) of \e7Q); but after a secondary tense of Xeym the 
 mood of the quoted verb maj/ be changed to the optative. 
 The tense is regularly kept unchanged. 
 
 a. The imperfect indicative is usually retained. 
 
 261. When direct statements are made indirect, neces- 
 sary changes in person are made as in English. The 
 negative of the direct discourse is retained. 
 
 262. Like \e7ft) say are used Atrov, 2 aor., I said, ukovo} 
 hear, fiavddvm learn (and several other frequent verbs that 
 will be introduced later). 
 
 a. aKoveo hear permits more than one construction ; for 
 example, it takes the infinitive also (cp. § 203. I. 10). 
 
 Examples 
 
 I. Original statement : ovk txpfiw ra. tTriTi^SEia we have no pro- 
 visions. 
 Quoted statement in primary sequence : Xiyov(Tiv oti (or ok) 
 OVK ixovcri TO. eTTiTiJSeia they say that they have no provisions. 
 
ii6 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Quoted statement in secondary sequence : iXeyov on (or As) 
 ovK i-)(oi.(.v TO €TTLTrihew. they said that they had no provisions. 
 The original iBood and tense i-)((yv(n might have been 
 retained. 
 Original statement : KaT-eihofjAv a-Kriva^ we observed tents. 
 Quoted statement : cAeyov oTt KaT-iSoiej' crKiyvds they said that they 
 (had) observed tents. 
 
 The original mood and tense /caT-etSor might have been 
 retained. 
 Original statement : avro^ ravra Trpa^u) I myself will do this. 
 Quoted statement ; chrev on airos ravra irpa^oi, he said that he 
 himself would do this. 
 
 The original mood and tense wpdiei might have been 
 retained. 
 
 263. VOCABULARY XXIV 
 
 'eYpa<|/a : write. |j.av6olv(i> (theme |io6- ; on the for- 
 mation of the present cp. Xo(i- 
 pdv« and TUYx^vw, § 218), fut. 
 to be learned later, 2 aor. ejio- 
 Bov : learn. 
 
 |i\ov, ou, to: wood; pi. hewn or 
 split wood; timbers. Xylo- 
 phone ((|>o)vTJ voice'). 
 
 oTi, conj., introducing a quotation : 
 that. 
 
 n^po-T]s, ou, 6 : a Persian. 
 
 nepo-iKos, ^, 6v (Ilepo-ns) : Per- 
 sian. 
 
 <raTpain]s, ov, 6: satrap, Persian 
 name for a provincial governor 
 appointed by the king. 
 
 .TiT€, adv. of time : then, at that 
 time. 
 
 iiroiJ/Ca, as, i] : suspicion. 
 
 MS, conj., introducing a quotation : 
 Cp. also Vocabulary 
 
 7poL<|>(ii, 'ypdil>(i>, 
 Graphic. 
 
 Si-TjXflov, 2 aor. \ I or they went 
 through ; spread with X6-yos 
 (word or report) as subject ; 
 subjv. 8i-4X9w, opt. Si.-e\6oi.|j.i, 
 inf Si-eX6etv, partic. 8i-6\6(4v. 
 
 etirov, 2 aor. : / or they said ; 
 subjv. et-irtii, opt. £i!iroi|j.i,, inf. 
 etirelv, partic. etiriSv. 
 
 tvBev, rel. adv. . whence, from 
 which, where. 
 
 KapSoiixoi., mv, 01 : the Carduchi, 
 a mountain people on the left 
 bank of the Tigris. 
 
 Kar-eiSov, 2 aor. . / or they looked 
 down on, descried, observed; 
 subjv. Kar-CSm, opt. KaT-(8oi|jii, 
 inf. KaT-i8eiv, partic. Kar-iBiiv. 
 
 \tr^ii>, yJ&yi, eXe^tt: say (to be dis- 
 tinguished from -Xc'-yco of <riiX- 
 X^Yw collect) . 
 
 that. 
 XXII. 
 
OPTATIVE OF n-ViERBS 117 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 264- I. I. eXeyov otl davfid^oteu. 2. u7roi//id ■^v^ 
 OTL Kupos ayoL vrpos 'Apra^ep^rjv. 3. 01 8e eXeyov 
 OTL rj 6S0S ets K.ap8ov)(ov? dyoL. 4. Koi Tore eXeyov oti 
 TvyxdvoLCv ^vXa avX-XeyovTes. 5. iXeyov ws Kar- 
 iSotev TratSa? Koi vea,vi(jKov<;. 6. 6 8e Hepcrrjs OLKOvcrd? 
 OTL XeLpLcro<jio<; ttolXlv 'q^oL rjXdev eis ttjv Kcoprjv. 7. 6 S' 
 eiTrev ort olkovol rous /SapySctpous evri tw ^v<f>pdTr) tto- 
 rapw exva-L? 8. Si-'^X^e Xoyo? ort StwKiet avTous Kvpo?. 
 
 9. 01 8' eTTrof OTL 6 craTpaLTrrj^ dn-e^eL TTapaadyyy)v. 
 
 10. 6 8e ypd^ei inLCTToXrjv otl i^fei. II. ep-adev otl 
 'ApTa^ep^r)<S exot to fjLeaov tov UepcrLKOv crTpaTevjjLa- 
 TO<s. 12. eXeyot' 8e otl rJKOLev rjyep^ova'; e^oi/res 01 
 aurqus d^ovcTLv ivdeu e^ovaL to, iirLTyjSeia. 
 
 II. I. They said they would come into the village. 
 2. On the next day a man came saying that he had 
 observed the tents of the enemy. 3. They heard that^ 
 the enemy were^ at the Euphrates river. 
 
 1 Here was a smpicion. ^%\lo.a. * Use the inf. 
 
 Fig. 14. — Shield {ji\Ti)) carried by the ireKTaaT^s (cp. Fig. 4). 
 
BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XXV 
 
 PRESENT OPTATIVE OF eifil. USES OF THE OPTA- 
 TIVE {Continued). POTENTIAL OPTATIVE. LESS 
 VIVID FUTURE CONDITIONS. PURPOSE CLAUSES 
 IN THE SECONDARY SEQUENCE 
 
 265. PRESENT OPTATIVE OF eljit I am 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 1 . ctrjv c(t||UV or tljuv 
 
 2. etit|s tlrjTov or tXrov €iit|Te or etre 
 
 3. ctt) e^TTiv or etrriv rft|<rav or tlev 
 
 Several of these forms show the longer optative mood 
 sign it;. Cp. § 252. 
 
 266. Potential optative. — The present or aorist opta- 
 tive is used with av (an untranslatable particle, § 249) to 
 indicate that something may or might happen. The degree 
 of probability varies according to the context. The nega- 
 tive is ov : 
 
 rovTo ovK av iii} ayaOov this would not be a good thing. 
 
 a. The adverb av never stands first in its sentence or 
 clause, but follows an emphatic word, especially a negative 
 or a verb. 
 
 267. Less vivid future conditions. — el if may introduce 
 the optative (present or aorist) to express a less vivid (cp. 
 § 241) future condition. The conclusion is expressed by 
 the optative with av. The negative of the protasis is amJ ; 
 of the apodosis, ov : 
 
 et Ihoiftx airovs, tXOoifu av Trpoi avrou's if I should see them, I should 
 go to them. 
 
PURPOSE CLAUSES 119 
 
 268. Purpose clauses in the secondary sequence. — ICva, 
 oirays, and w?, all meaning in order that, may introduce the 
 optative (present or aorist) to express a purpose. The 
 optative is found only when the verb of the main clause is 
 secondary in tense ; and even then the subjunctive (§ 243) 
 is sometimes found. The negative is ii't) : 
 
 KSpos -likOex Iva. tSot Toiis o-TpaTtoiTds Cyrus came in order that he 
 might (i.e. to) see his soldiers. 
 
 269.- VOCABULARY XXV 
 
 "Apiotos, ov, 6 : ^«'a««j, a Persian. less. Ceno-taph (ri+os fer^A 
 
 SUaios, a, ov (cp. S£ki]) : just. place). 
 
 SiKalas, adv. : justly. M^vwv, «vos, 6 : Menon. 
 
 i£-f|\eov, 2 aor. : / or they went oii-irorc : never. 
 
 forth. Cp. Si-f|\eov, § 263. Tox^as, adv. : quickly, swiftly, rap- 
 Ktvds, \, 6v : empty ; vain, ground- idly ; = ra.\<i. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 270. I. I . ouTot eXeyop on 'A/jtatos iv tw (rTadfia ^ 
 eiTj fiera tS)v dWcav ^ap^dpcov. 2. ■^ye Ta;j^eiws cSotc 
 BtJXov 'qv^ OTL TrpaLyfiaTa e.Lrj. 3. ip,adov Se 01 crTpa- 
 TLcoTau OTL /cevos o (f>6j3<K eiTj. 4. ovSe touto dv tis 
 eiTToi. 5, ^dpiv auTois av e)^0LiJ.€v St/caiw?. 6. ovk 
 av 0avfjid^oLp.L el ol iroXefiLoi (f)evyouv. "]■ ri av rtd- 
 a-\OLev 01 avdpoiTTOL ; 8. tis avTcov iariv oort? dyado^ 
 idekoL av eTvaL ; 9. Mevcov S' rjdeXev dp^etv ottojs 
 XpTJfidTa Xa/x^dvoL. lO. t^v Se -^(opdv St-apirda-at, 
 ovTTore av idiXoifxev. Ii. e/c rauTTj?* tJj? X'^pd^ o 
 apxoi^' Tots "EWi^crii' -f^yefjuova eirefixjiev, Iva Sia rrjs 
 
 1 halting place. 2 ^y ^^j evident. 
 
I20 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 TToXc/itids x^P°^'^ ^y°'' «^^o"5. 1 2. fiera raCra i^-rj\de.v 
 OTTtas ix.adoi ra^ irepl Upo^euov. 
 
 II. I. If Menon should seize the possessions, I should 
 not be surprised. 2. It was evident that Cyrus was^ his 
 friend. 3. Cyrus marched rapidly, in order to take the 
 enemy while they were ^ unguarded. 
 
 XXVI 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION {Continued'). STEMS ENDING 
 IN SIGMA. ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS WITH 
 STEMS IN -€0-. POTENTIAL OPTATIVE IN INDIRECT 
 DISCOURSE. GENITIVE OF MEASURE. ACCUSA- 
 TIVE OF SPECIFICATION 
 
 STEMS ENDING IN SIGMA 
 
 271. The nominative singular of stems ending in a- is the 
 mere stem, without any ca^e-ending. Neuter stems in -ea 
 change e to in forming this nominative. Thus opecr- forms 
 the nominative singular 6po^. In cases where a comes be- 
 tween two vowels, it is dropped and contraction occurs. One 
 ff of the dative plural -eo- + ai is also dropped. In the fol- 
 lowing paradigms the original forms are given in brackets. 
 
 a. Rules of Contraction 
 
 e + a = 'j; e-l-o=ou 
 
 e + e = et e + 01 ■= 01 
 
 6+1= « e + (o = a 
 
 b. The syllable resulting from contraction receives an 
 accent if either one of the component syllables, in the 
 
 1 the fate of Proxenus (§ 70. b"). ^ jn (ji[._ (jjg(,_ i^, 8 g^y i,gi„g_ 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION 121 
 
 uncontracted form, had an accent; it receives a circum- 
 flex if the first vowel had the acute (but it receives an 
 acute if the second vowel had the acute). 
 
 272. Sing. N. A. V. opos, t6, mountain (stem opto--) 
 
 G. Spous [o/D£(j-os] 
 D. SpEi [opecr-t] 
 
 Dual N. A. V. Spei \ppe.u-{\ 
 
 G. D. opotv \opia-ow\ 
 
 Plur. N. A. V. opT| [opeo-a] 
 
 G. op^wv or opwv \opk<j-wiv\ 
 D. op€<ri(v) [op£o--crt(v)] 
 
 273- Declension of SuKparris (Stem SuKparso--) 
 
 Sing. N. ScDKpdT'qs, 6, Socrates 
 
 G. SwKpaTous [S(DK(Oareo--os] 
 
 D. SuKparei. [2(0KpaTeo--i] 
 
 A. SuKpdri] [2(«KpaTecr-a] 
 
 V. SwKparcs 
 
 a. For the accusative liCOKparrj, a form "EcoKpdrrjv after 
 the analogy of the a-declension is often found. 
 
 d. Xenophon declines T i,<TCTa^epvri^ : gen. TL(Tcra^epvov<;, 
 dat. Ticra-a(f>epvei, acc. Ticrcra(l>epvr]V (cp. 'EooKpaTrjv), voc. 
 Ticrcracpepvr]. ^ 
 
 f. In the nominative singular final -eo- of the stem of 
 these nouns is changed to -•»??. 
 
 274. So too the nominative singular of rpi^prj'} is formed 
 from the stem rpirjpecr-. 
 
 Declension of rpi'l\(n\i (Stem rpir\pe<r-) 
 
 Sing. N. Tpt'^pris, T|, trireme 
 
 G. Tpi^jpODS [TpH^peCT-os] 
 
 D. Tpi'fipei. [Tpij;pe(r-t] 
 
 A. Tpi<)pi] \rpiy]pe.<y-a\ 
 
 V. Tpifjpes 
 
122 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Dual N. A. V. rpii\(Ki [rptiypccr-e] 
 
 G. D. Tpi<ipoiv [Tpirjplar-ow] 
 
 Plur. N. V. Tpf<ip£is [Tp«7peo--£s] 
 
 G. Tpi^puv [TptTjpecr-mv] 
 
 D. Tpi<ipe<ri(v) [Tpt);p£0--(n(v)] 
 
 A. Tpi^ptis 
 
 a. The accusative plural copies the nominative plural 
 form. 
 
 d. Tpirjpoiv and rpiripav have recessive accent (§ 44). 
 
 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS WITH 
 STEMS IN -eo- 
 
 Masc. and Fem. Neut. 
 
 275. Sing. N. do-(|>aX'f|s safe o<r<|>oXfe 
 
 G. do-(|)oXoOs [-c'cr-os] 
 
 D. d<r<|)oXet [-e'tr-t] 
 
 A. d<r(|)oX<i [-eV-a] d<r<|>aXfe 
 
 V. dir^aX^s 
 
 Dual N. A. V. d<r<j)a)iei [-e'cr-e] 
 
 G. D. d<r(|>aXoiv [-e(T-0[v] 
 
 Plur. N. V. da-i|>aXcis [-e<T-£s] d<r4>aX*| [-OT-a] 
 
 G. tt<r(|)aXiov [-ea-o)!/] 
 
 D. d<r<|>oX4iri(v) [-E'(7-(7t(v)] 
 
 A. do-()>aXcIs do-<|>o\<i [-e'tr-a] 
 
 a. It is to be observed that the masculine and feminine 
 a<T^a\r)'i is declined exactly like Tpirjp-q'i except as regards 
 the accent. The neuter nominative, accusative, and voca- 
 tive singular is the mere stem. The neuter nominative 
 and accusative plural a<T<l>aXrj (for a<T<^aX4<r-a) is formed 
 like opt) (for opecr-a), 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITH "AN 123 
 
 POTENTIAL OPTATIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 
 276. When a potential optative (§ 266) is quoted after 
 a verb that takes on, or a»s (§§ 260, 262), it is unchanged, 
 except possibly in person ; and av is retained : 
 
 Original form : fkoi/u av airous I should capture them. 
 Quoted after oti / outos Ki5jo<p etirev oti avrmi% av c\oi this man said 
 to Cyrus that he should capture them. 
 
 277. When a potential optative is quoted after a verb 
 that requires the infinitive (§ 1 10. a), the optative is changed 
 to the same tense of the infinitive, and av is retained. If 
 the subject of the infinitive is different from that of the 
 leading verb, it must be expressed (in the accusative) ; but 
 it is not expressed if it is the same (review also § wo. c,d,e): 
 
 Original form : cXdot/ui av rpv^pws €x<"v I should come with triremes. 
 Quoted form : voii,iZ,ti> iK&tiv ac [or vo/xi^to av eX^etv] rpn^pas txiav 
 I think I should come with triremes. 
 
 278. The genitive modifying a noun may express 
 measure : 
 
 T£i;^os SeW TToSoiv a wall of ten feet. 
 
 279. The accusative may express a specification {in 
 respect to something): 
 
 kvreuBfv c^-tXawet eirt tov Tr^napxiv, ovra to evpos irevre oraStW thence 
 he marches to the river, which is {lit. being) of five stades in 
 width (= five stades wide). 
 
 araBCcov is a predicate genitive (§ 229) of measure limit- 
 ing TTOTapLov; while to evpoi, accusative of specification, 
 limits TTeWe araSiav. 
 
124 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 280. 
 
 VOCABULARY XXVI 
 
 dvd (elided, oiv), prep, with ace. 
 only : tip, up along, up through. 
 (In composition also back.) 
 Ana-tomy (TO|i'^ a cutting). 
 
 dva-Pa(vu (other tenses except 
 impf. dv-epaivov to be learned 
 later) : go up ; go inland (" up " 
 from the coast). Cp. 810-PaCvw. 
 
 d(r<|>a\.'rjs, ^s : secure, safe. Iv 
 da-(j>a\Ei : in safety. 
 
 d<|>aviris, €s : invisible, out of sight. 
 
 'Axaids, ov, 6 : an Achaean, in- 
 habitant of Achaea. 
 
 El'KO(ri(v), indecl. : twenty. 
 
 tlXov, 2 aor. ; / or they took, seized; 
 siibjv. SXw, opt. ?X.oi|ii, inf. IXetv, 
 partic. tK&v. 
 
 cBpos, o-us, TO : breadth, width. 
 
 Kafl-^Ko) (Kara + 7]kci), cp. § 31) : 
 cotne down, reach doivn, extend. 
 
 KaTa-XECrrw (cp. XsCirw) : leave be- 
 hind, leave, abandon. 
 
 d'pos, ous, TO : mountain. 
 
 TaiiD, irotio'CD, ciravo-a : make to 
 stop, stop (trans.), put an end 
 to. Pause. 
 
 irpdo-esv, 3idY.: forward (of space) ; 
 before, former {oi ^Sxa€). Cp. 
 irpos. T) irp<So-6ev (§ 70) vilj : the 
 night before. 
 
 ZwKpdTTis, ovs, 6 : Socrates. 
 
 Tcixos, ous, TO : wall ; fortress. 
 
 Ti.o-o-o(|>^pviis, ous, 6 : Tissapher- 
 nes, a Persian satrap. See 
 § 273. b. 
 
 Tpi'fjpTis, ous, T| : trireme. 
 
 is, adv., introducing a compari- 
 son : as ; with numerals : about. 
 See also Vocabularies XXII and 
 XXIV. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 281. I. I. Kupo? ovv av-efiaLvev im to. oprj. 2. ■^u 
 Se TrapoSos a-Tevrj fji€Ta^v rov troTafJiOv koX Tr]<s rdifipov 
 ojs eLKocTi TToBwv TO evpo<;} 3. TYjv 8e irpocrdeu vvktu^ 
 rja-av iwl toS opovs. 4. eVei 8' ■^aav df^aveis, Si-^X^e 
 X6-yo<; 071 SiwKot avrous Kupos TpitjpecrLv. 5. Koi to. 
 TeiXT] rjv eis Ty)v dakarTav KaO-rjKovTa? 6. dva-fiatvei 
 ow 6 Kvpo? \a/3o)p TL(r(ra(j>€pvrjv o)?* (jiCXov. 7. 6 
 'ApTaiep^r)<; Srj rfKova-e Ttcrcra<^e/3!^oi;? ^ rof Yivpov ctto- 
 
 1 Abstract nouns may have the article. 
 
 ' § 142. 
 
 S3- 1. 
 
 ^ from Tissaphernes, gen. of source, § 201. 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION 
 
 125 
 
 \ov. 8. 01 6e aXXoi Xo^dyot '^aav iu dcr^aXei. 9. e^o) 
 yap rpnjpeLs Qjcrre eXeiv to eKeCvcov ttXovov. lO. i^rj 
 8' av TTavcrai, rau/ds ras u7roi//ids. 1 1. 08' ovk av e^Tj 
 i^-ayayelv aurous. 12, eXeyev on ovnoTe av Kara- 
 XeiTTOi auTOus. 13. Kal "ZwKpaTrjv top 'A^aidv, feVoi' 
 wra/ iKekevaev iX0eiv. 14. rourou? Se €<f>acrai' KoLetv 
 Th<s Kco[Jid<s tSs^ ai'a to, o/jtj. 
 
 II. I. Thence he marched to a river ten stades in width. 
 2. I think it would be safe ^ to cross. 3. He thought he 
 should never come home. 4. We heard from Tissaphernes 
 of the expedition of Cyrus. 
 
 1 Translate by a relative clause. 
 * Use neuter adj., § 223. a.- 
 
 = Cp. § 67. 
 
 Fig. 15. — Waist of a War Ship (rpi^jtnjs), from a Relief found at Athens. 
 
126 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XXVII 
 
 DECLENSION OF STEMS ENDING IN IOTA OR UPSILON 
 (INCLUDED UNDER THE CONSONANT DECLENSION). 
 ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE. ATTRACTION OF THE 
 RELATIVE 
 
 STEMS ENDING IN i OR v 
 
 282. Stems in I or V present several irregularities, of 
 which the explanations can best be sought in the gram- 
 mars, if the instructor thinks such explanations desirable 
 at the outset. It is to be observed that the accusative 
 singular ends in -v, and not in -a ; and the accusative plural 
 follows the nominative plural. 
 
 Sings N. iroXi-s, t), city •""HX""'; °> forearm, ctibit 
 
 G. irdXe-us Tri]X€-<i)S 
 
 D. iriXci [for TToXe-i] -aifffy. [for 7nJ;^e-t] 
 
 A irdXi-v irij^D-v 
 
 V. irdXi ■f^X" 
 
 Dual N. A. V. iriXei [for iro\e-e] '"^ix"' [for '"yX^'O 
 G. D. iroX^-oiv mjx^-otv 
 
 Plur. N. V. iroXeis [for iroXe-es] ir^x^'S [for 7n;x£-«] 
 
 G. irdXe-wv Tci\y^-iAv 
 
 D. •ir6X6-<ri(v) ir<ixe-<ri(v) 
 
 A. irbXcis TT^X^i'S 
 
 Sing. N. A. V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 ao-Tu, T<, town 
 
 oo-Te-ws 
 
 oo-Tci [for ao-T£-t] 
 
 DuaIN.A.V. 
 G.D. 
 
 cl<rT€i [for oo-tc-e] 
 ao-T^oiv 
 
 Plur. N. A.V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 o<rTt| [for acrT£-a] 
 
 &crT«-(i)v 
 
 0(rTe-a-i(v) 
 
STEMS IN IOTA OR UPSILON 127 
 
 a. The accent of the preceding nouns (tt6\i<;, 7r?)%u?, and 
 ao-Tv)is irregular in the genitive, singular and plural (§ 17. i). 
 
 283. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 \.X^U,i>,fish 
 
 G. 
 
 IxBi-os 
 
 D. 
 
 ixe«-i 
 
 A. 
 
 ixed-» 
 
 V. 
 
 ixesS 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 ixeo-t 
 
 G.D. 
 
 lx84-oiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 txeii-£s 
 
 G. 
 
 lx9v-ii>v 
 
 D. 
 
 lxe6-o-i(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 txess 
 
 284. Adverbial accusative. — The accusative in some 
 expressions has the force of an adverb : 
 
 TrpcoTov at first, first (§ 250); tL why (§ 231)? WXos finally; to 
 koiirov thereafter, in the future. 
 
 285. Attraction of the relative to the case of its ante- 
 cedent. — The relative pronoun may be attracted from the 
 accusative case to the case of its antecedent, if this is a 
 genitive or dative : 
 
 e/c trji ayopas 17s [for -^v] ovroi Trap-ciypv from the market which 
 
 these supplied ; 
 avv Tots ottAois ots [for aj ixofLtv with the arms which we have. 
 
 286. VOCABULARY XXVII 
 
 MpolXju (theme o9poiS- ; cp. dpxatos, a, ov (dpx^i beginning) : 
 
 dpird^u), d9po((r(i>, i]6poi(ra: primitive, old, of old, ancient, 
 
 gather together, collect, assemble to d.pxatov (adv. ace.) : of old, 
 
 (trans.). formerly. Archaic. 
 
128 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 oo-Tu, £ii)s, TO : town. 
 Sao-pios, oB, 6 : tribute, tax. 
 8vva|jiis, ems, t) : /or£«, strength. 
 
 Dynamic, dynamite. 
 'EXX.T]viKds, T|, 6v ("EWtjv) : J%/- 
 
 /(?7ZzV, Greek. 
 txflus, lios, 6: y?.f/^. Ichthyo-logy 
 
 (\6-yos account) . 
 'luviKos, ■i\, 6v ('lajvCa) : of Ionia, 
 
 Ionian . 
 AaK€8aC)i(ov, ovos, T) : Lacedaenion. 
 Xoiir6s, i\, <Sv (cp. XeCir-w) : left, rest 
 
 of, remaining, to Xoiiriv (adv. 
 
 ace.) : thereafter, in the futiire. 
 T7evT£-Kai-8cKa indecl. : five and 
 
 ten, fifteen. 
 
 irfjx«s, €<i>s, o : forearm ; cubit, 
 
 \\ Greek feet. 
 irXe'flpov, o«, to: plethrum, loo 
 
 Greek feet. 
 irXTipiis, es : full. Cp. haX. ple-nus. 
 iriXis, «ci)s, T] : city. Politic, polity, 
 
 etc. 
 trpiirPtis, £iov, 01 : ambassadors. 
 
 The nom. sing, is irpeo-pevT'^s, 
 
 ov, 6. 
 SdpSets, ewv, al : Sardis, a city in 
 
 Lydia. 
 T«Xos, oDs, TO : end. As adv. ace. . 
 
 finally. 
 XdXos, ou, 6 : Chains, a river in 
 
 Syria. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 287. I. I. Sei'tas §17 Toiis CK TOiv TrdXewv^ Xafiav 
 vap-rjv el? XapSei?. 2. ttjv Se 'EX\iji'tfci)j/ Bvvajxiv 
 rjOpoL^ev. 3. ^v Se ret^o? 019 Trei^re/caiSe/ca TTyj)(eo)v^ to 
 eu/Jos. 4. Tt Set Xdeti' avTov? t^v ye^vpav ; 5. /cai 
 yap TjcroLv at 'Iwi'iKat 7roXei5 licrcra^ipvovi ® to ap')(auov. 
 6. 01 8' e/c ToC aorews * eis t^i/ dyopav ^\dov. 7. et? 
 AaKeSaCfiova eirepLTrov TrpeicrySeig. 8. ivrevdev i^-ekavvet 
 (7Ta9p,ov<; Swo TTapaaa,yyd<; TrefTe/caiSeffa eis ttoXiv eu- 
 Sai/Aova. 9. Kv/3os S' aTT-eTre/ATre rows 8acr/A0U5 e^ rwv 
 TrdXeojt' ait-® iTvy\a.vev e\(av. lO. reXos S' 0,73^X^01'. 
 II. /cat TO XoiTTOi/ 6 K\eap)(o<; rfp-^ev. 12. ef-eXaut'ei 
 eVi Tov XdXov TTorafiov, ovTa to eSpos TrkWpov,^ 77X17/317 
 
 o' V)(dvU)V. 
 
 ^ § 7°- a- 
 = § 278. 
 
 ' § 229. 
 * § 70. a. 
 
 6 For OS, § 285. 
 « §§ 278, 279. 
 
ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION 129 
 
 II. I. The cities are prosperous. 2. And thereafter 
 Cyrus sent the tributes from the cities to his brother. 
 3. We bought provisions from the market which the bar- 
 barians supplied. 4. The river is full of beautiful fish. 
 
 XXVIII 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION AND 
 A-DECLENSION COMBINED. DECLENSION OF jjSu? 
 AND Tra?. NOUNS WITH STEMS ' IN -ev OR -ov. 
 OMISSION OF THE COPULA. ^aaiXev<; WITHOUT 
 THE ARTICLE, iral IN PREDICATE POSITION, ETC. 
 
 DECLENSION OF i|8iis sweei 
 
 288. Compare the masculine ^Sik with 7r^%u? (§ 282) and 
 observe that the endings differ in the genitive singular only. 
 Compare the neuter ijSv with aarv (§ 282) and observe that 
 the endings differ in the genitive singular and the nomi- 
 native (= accusative and vocative) plural. The feminine 
 7]hda is declined like ye^vpa, except as regards the accent. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 ifiii 
 
 T|Sc!a 
 
 ifii 
 
 G. 
 
 ifilos 
 
 {|8ECas 
 
 <,8fos 
 
 D. 
 
 T|8et 
 
 {,8e£» 
 
 ifiil 
 
 A. 
 
 ifiiv 
 
 T|8ciav 
 
 rfii 
 
 V. 
 
 ifii 
 
 T|8Eta 
 
 ffii 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 ifiil 
 
 f|8c(a 
 
 ifiit 
 
 G.D. 
 
 {|8^oiv 
 
 T|8cCaiv 
 
 T|8&IV 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 *|8£tS 
 
 ifitiai 
 
 ifiia 
 
 G. 
 
 ifiiav 
 
 ifitrnv 
 
 hUav ' 
 
 D. 
 
 ilUo-i(v) 
 
 f|8ECais 
 
 ^S^<ri(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 f|8eEs 
 
 f|8<(as 
 
 {|8^a 
 
 beginner's ge. bk. — 9 
 
 
 
130 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 DECLENSION OF iros a//, every 
 
 289. Compare ^s paradigm with aKovaaf; (§ 209). The 
 accent of^he genitive plural travrav and dative" plural ira- 
 <n{v) is irregular (cp. § 189). 
 
 
 MASC. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 iras 
 
 ircto-a 
 
 irav 
 
 G. 
 
 iravrds 
 
 ir^CTTIS 
 
 irovrds 
 
 D. 
 
 ttovtC 
 
 irooTj 
 
 iravrC 
 
 A. 
 
 irAvra 
 
 iroo-ov 
 
 irav 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 irivTCS 
 
 trclirai 
 
 irAvra 
 
 G. 
 
 iravT*>v 
 
 iroo-Sv 
 
 irdvTWV 
 
 D. 
 
 'ira<ri(v) 
 
 ir^crais 
 
 ■irdo-i(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 iriivTas 
 
 irao-as 
 
 irAvTa 
 
 NOUNS WITH STEMS ENDING IN A DIPHTHONG -€v OR -ou 
 
 290. Sing.N. 
 
 Pao-iXcv-s, 
 
 h, king 
 
 PoB-s, 6, T|, ox, ccmi 
 
 G. 
 
 Pao-iXi-us 
 
 
 Po-6s 
 
 D. 
 
 Pao-iXcI 
 
 
 po-t 
 
 A. 
 
 Pao-iX^a 
 
 
 Pov-v 
 
 V. 
 
 Pao-iXev 
 
 
 Poii 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 Pa(ri\{) 
 
 
 p<-e 
 
 G.D. 
 
 pao'iX^-oiv 
 
 
 Po-otv 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 Pao-iXcis (older -fls) 
 
 P6-« 
 
 G. 
 
 ^iur\Xi-a>v 
 
 
 Po-cov 
 
 D. 
 
 Pao-iXeO-o-i 
 
 •(v) 
 
 Po\i-<rC(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 Pao-iX^-as 
 
 
 PoSs 
 
 For the accent of the monosyllable jSoO? see § 189. 
 
 291. The verb lari (and pi. elai), commonly known as 
 the copula, may be omitted where it can be readily sup- 
 plied, as in proverbial expressions. See also § 230. 
 
 a.yaBo% 6 0£os God is good ; 
 a.yj.601 01 dtoi the gods are good. 
 
ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION 131 
 
 292. The article is commonly omitted with ^aaiXeis 
 when this word means tke king of Persia, the great king. 
 
 293. irds, when modifying a noun, usually has the 
 predicate position (§§ 68, 69). The difference in mean- 
 ing between the predicate and attributive use is as follows : 
 
 Predicate : Tracra rj ttoXis all the city. 
 Attributive : ij ■TrSa-a 7ro\ts the whole city. 
 
 Sometimes the article is wanting : 
 
 Tracra iroXis every city ; 
 jravres avOptoiroL all men. 
 
 Compare oXof (Vocabulary XVII), which is similarly used. 
 
 294. 
 
 VOCABULARY XXVIII 
 
 &-iros, o<ra, av : ail together, all. 
 
 Pa(riX«iis, ia%, 6 : Iting. Basil. 
 
 poOs, Pods, 6, T| : ox, cow. Cp. Lat. 
 bos. 
 
 Sao-iis, eta, <) : thickly grown, 
 thickly wooded; with dat. (in- 
 strumental). Cp. Lat. densus. 
 
 SevSpov, ou, Td : tree. Dat. pi. 
 S^vSpois and SsvSpeo-i (from to 
 SevSpos). Rhodo-dendron (p68ov 
 rose) . 
 
 T], conj. : or; than (after com- 
 parative ideas) . ij . . . tj : 
 either . . . or. 
 
 T|Svs, €ia, ii : sweet. 
 
 i])i.ia-vs, eia, v : half, to tkiioti 
 (with o-TpoT«Tl|iaTos) : the half. 
 jjlJLianis takes the gender and the 
 number of its part. gen. Cp. 
 Lat. semi-, Eng. hemi-. 
 
 iirireis, i<s>%, h (Viriros) : horseman ; 
 
 pi. cavalry. 
 \d6pi;i, adv. : secretly. With gen. : 
 
 without the knowledge of. 
 iras, iroo-a, irav : every (in sing.), 
 
 all, whole. See § 293. Pan- 
 
 hellenic ("EUiiv). 
 iroxis, eto, i : thick in diameter. 
 
 Pachy-derm (Sepjia hide) . 
 iniKvds, ■^, 6v : closely set, closely 
 
 standing, closely planted. 
 o-KdTos, o«s, t6 : darkness. Also 
 
 6 o-KdTos, gen. 01). 
 (r<l(i,-|iaxos, ou, 6 (naxt)) : fellow- 
 fighter, ally. 
 us, prep, with ace. : to ; used only 
 
 with names of persons and 
 
 Pao-iXea king of Persia. Cp. 
 
 Vocabularies XXII, XXIV, 
 
 XXVI. 
 
13a 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK" BOOK 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 295. I. I. Trdvra^ 8' dir-eire/Airef. 2. ol 8' avT^ M«^" 
 \ov (f)LkoL rjcrav rj ySacriXet. 3. <j)dalv ovv 8ao-ea ra 
 opt] TavTa elvaL. 4. olvov rjSiiv ^i-X^v. 5. 6 Xcipt- 
 cro<j)o? B(,-e/3aivev l^^tui' to rjfiLO-v tov crTpaTev^aTos.^ 
 6. ^i" 8c ouros 6 \6(f)o<s Sacrvs SevSpecn, Tra^ecrt /acj' ou, 
 TTUKyots 8e. 7. ovSe l-mred crvixfjiaxov^ exofJ'^v. 8. a)u,a, 
 Se TTj rjixepa elhov LTnred'i Trepdu tov TTora/AoO. 9. e^u- 
 (rav 8e ^ ^ous -^ vttttovs. IO. t^i* 8e 'EXXr^i/iff^i/ 8wa- 
 jjivv Kvjoos XdOpq, rfdpoit.ev, ottws d,(f>v\aKT0V Xdfiot 
 fiacnXed. II. Ticrcrac^epi'Tj? 8e '^X^ei' a>9 ^aaiKid, Itt- 
 Treds Ixwv ws irevTaKocTiOv;. 12. Tracra 17 680s 8id 
 cTKOTous ia'TLv. 13. ttSs 8e TroTap.bs aTTo/ao?.* 14. at 
 CTTTOi'Sai elcTLV dnacnv. 
 
 II. I. On the following day they all came to a river full 
 of fish. 2. He says that this river is thickly grown with 
 trees. 3. All the satraps sent sweet wine to the king. 
 
 § 179- 
 
 199- 
 
 53- > 
 
 * Supply ftrrlv. 
 
 Fig. 16. — Prow of » War Ship. 
 
IMPERATIVE OF 0-VERBS 133 
 
 XXIX 
 
 THE IMPERATIVE ACTIVE OF O-VERBS. IMPERATIVE OF 
 €t>l'. TENSES OF THE IMPERATIVE. DECLENSION 
 OF €700 AND av. USES OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 ACCENT OF SUCCESSIVE ENCLITICS. PREDICATE 
 POSITION OF THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE OF 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. PROHIBITIONS, kird AND 
 OTi CAUSAL 
 
 296. The thematic vowel (§ 41) and tense suffix of the 
 present imperative and the tense suffix {era) of the first 
 aorist imperative are the same as in the indicative mood. 
 The imperative has special personal endings, however; 
 and the second person singular of the first aorist has a 
 peculiar ending, -aov. 
 
 
 297. PRESENT IMPERATIVE ACTIVE OF XSu 
 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 2. 
 
 X0-€ loose Xd-e-TOv X«-«-T£ loose 
 
 3- 
 
 Xii-^-T(i> let Mm loose Xij-^-ruv Xii-6-vto>v let them loose 
 
 
 FIRST AORIST IMPERATIVE ACTIVE 
 
 2. 
 
 XC-orov loose Xw-o-a-Tov X€-(ro-T€ loose 
 
 3- 
 
 X\i-<rd-T(i> let him loose Xu-o-A-twv Xv-o-o-vtov let them loose 
 
 298. Like the present imperative of \v(o are inflected 
 the present imperatives of all the other co-verbs hitherto 
 studied. 
 
 299. In the formation of the first aorist imperative of 
 verbs with mute themes, the same euphonic laws are ob- 
 served as in the first aorist indicative, subjunctive, and 
 
134 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 optative (§§ 153, 164). Thus irefi-^ov {irejiirw), irelaov 
 {ireiOo)), apiracrov (dpird^a), <f,v\a^ov ((jsvXdTTO)). 
 
 300. Verbs which, like XetVw, lack a first aorist indica- 
 tive, also lack a first aorist imperative (and all other first 
 aorist forms). They have, instead, a second aorist impera- 
 tive, with the inflection of the present. 
 
 301. SECOND AORIST IMPERATIVE ACTIVE OF \«tir<» 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 2. \lir-t leave ^. Xtir-e-^ov XJir-t-re leave 
 
 3. Xiir-^-Tci) let him leave Xiir-^-rmv Xitt-o-vtwv let them leave 
 
 a. Some second aorist imperatives are irregularly ac- 
 cented on the ultima (instead of the penult) in the second 
 person singular : thus emi say} 
 
 302. PRESENT IMPERATIVE OF «t|iC I am 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 2. IjT-iy, be thou eV-TOv 'i<r-Tt be ye 
 
 3 . 'etr-Tco let him be ^cr-rwv So--t(i)v ^ let them be 
 
 303. Tenses of the imperative. — The distinction between 
 the present and aorist imperative is the same as that between 
 the present and aorist subjunctive (§ 240). The present de- 
 notes a continued or repeated act ; the aorist a single act. 
 
 a. The aorist imperative refers to future time, and is 
 therefore regarded as a primary tense. 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS i-i& /"AND <ri you 
 
 304. Sing. N. iyi> / N. V. <tv you {thou) 
 
 G. I)i.o0, |tov (ro{), (Tov 
 
 D. l)ioC, |j.oi <roC, o-oi 
 
 A. kyi, (IE iri, <r« 
 
 1 So, too, i\ii come, ivpi find (EvpCo-Ku), 18^ see, behold, \a.^i seize, 
 ^ Also it<r-T<i>-o-av and ovtuv. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS 135 
 
 ^liwis we N. V. «(i«t« j/oa 
 
 T|)Jlfiv V|I.UV 
 
 T|)l,tV v|i.tv 
 
 '^|ia$ Vfias 
 
 (7. Enclitic f^tis (§ 21) are /nou, ^ot, /ie, orou, o-ot, tre; 
 emphatic forms, ^t enclitic, are i/jioO, ifioi, i/xe, aov, aol, tre. 
 After prepositions the accented forms are regularly used. 
 
 Review the rules about enclitics (§§ 103-105). 
 
 305. If two or more enclitics occur In succession, each has 
 an acute accent except the last, which remains unaccented : 
 
 £1 Tts Tt /not <f>ri<riv if anybody says anything to me. 
 
 306. A personal pronoun as subject nominative is ex- 
 pressed only for emphasis : 
 
 TaSra rJKovcra iyu> it was I who heard this. 
 
 307. The personal pronoun of the third person is avrov 
 of him, ahrrf; of her, avrov of it (§ 123. 3). The nomi- 
 native, when required to be expressed, may be o he (§ 99), 
 ■t] 8e (§ 99), iiceivo';, ot/TO'i, oBe (§§ 175—177)- 
 
 308. avTov, fiov, aov, etc., when denoting possession, 
 have the predicate positioji (cp. § 127): 
 
 6 aSe\<l>6s IJ.0V my brother (cp. § 126). 
 
 309. A prohibition is expressed by : 
 
 1. /t^ with the present imperative (§ 303): 
 
 fxri Oavfid^ere don't wonder (i.e. keep from wondering or cease to 
 wonder) . 
 
 2. fiT^ with the second person of the aorist subjunc- 
 tive (§ 240): 
 
 /jiT] dav/ma-Tfre don't be astonished {/or once'). 
 
136 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 310. ^irei and 8ti causal, since, are followed by tenses of 
 the indicative. The negative is ov. Other causal con- 
 junctions take the same construction : 
 
 Tre/ii/fare Ilpo^ej/ov, kird (TTpaT-qyoi ia-TLV send ProxeniM^ince he is a 
 general. 
 
 311. VOCABULARY XXIX 
 
 a-^aros, ov (a- priv. and stem Pa-, otov = &rtM av (§ 248. 2), conj. 
 cp. 8ia-Pa£v<o) : not to be trod- with su^v. : wAen. 
 
 den on, impassable. 
 
 o^e, imv. of 0.7(0 used as an inter- 
 jection : come ! ayi (or o^ere) 
 Si\ : come now ! 
 
 pXiiria, fut. to be learned later, 
 £pXe<|/a: look. 
 
 7viS|ji.T), Tis, T| : opinion, judgment ; 
 plan, proposition ; understand- 
 ing. Gnome. 
 
 47<4 : /, § 304. Lat. ego. 
 
 Jiret, conj. . since. Strengthened, 
 eTTst-irep : since indeed. Cp. 
 Vocabulary XIV. 
 
 i5o--irtp, Ti-ircp, o-ir£p (strengthened 
 8s) : the very one which, the 
 very thing which. 
 
 irarpCs, C8os, r\ : fatherland. 
 
 xp6s, prep. : with gen. from the 
 side of, from; toward; irpos 
 (tmv) 6ewv : before the gods, in 
 the sight of the gods ; with DAT. 
 near, beside, in addition to; with 
 ACC. to, toward, against. Cp. 
 Vocabulary II. 
 
 o-Tpard-ireSov, ou, ri : camp. Cp. 
 O'Tpd.TEVp.a, o-TpOTia. 
 
 0-4 : you (sing.), § 304. 
 
 o-vvStifia, ttTos, t6 : ag 
 
 watchword. 
 yntif, prep. : with GEN. over, above ; 
 
 on behalf of; with acc. over, 
 
 beyond. Hyper-bole (PoX't) a 
 
 throw). 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 312. I. I. rJKeTe eis to [lecrov tov (TTpaToireBov koI 
 TOWS apxovTa<5 ayeTe. 2. diro-TTeixne Se rj i^/xas rj av- 
 TOV?. 3. vofjiilo) yap tfias ifiol ^ elvai Kal vaTpCSa koI 
 ^iXovs Kal crvixixdxov?. 4. d/couo-aTe ovu p.ov trpo'? 
 deav. 5. TO, 8e eTTtTTjSeia Xapi/Sdi^eTe e/c tcov iv ra 
 ireSioj^ Koijiwu. 6. crii 8e, S "ZcoKpaTeis, i\6ci)v^ etire on 
 
 § "9- 
 
 i§70. 
 
 ' Freely : go and say. 
 
IMPERATIVE OF O-VERBS 
 
 137 
 
 eyo) (?e7»w(o aurous KaTa-h-irelv to, owXa. 7. orai' Se 
 raurds r^n-dXeis ^x^jre, fir) an-ikd-qTe. 8. aye St;, w 
 Apiate, e7r^»p 6 avros cttoXos eoriv 0/*?!' ^ koI rjfuv, 
 elm TTjv (rrjvJ^i'cojxrjv. 9. Xe^ov Se waai, ol TLpo^epe, 
 airep ike^asviffu^ trpo? rjfxa's. 10. fiXeijJov tt/oos tcL 
 OjOTj Kat loe CDS apara Tratra eamv. 11. ei oe rts 
 ciWos irdp-ecTTt, Xe^arca. 12. avfi-TrefiifjaTe p.4vT0L jjloi 
 TLvas, oiTive? Kol* Xe^ovcnv virep ifiov Koi npd^ova-tv. 
 1 3. TTap-iaTOi S' ')7ju.rj/ Kat ^ 6 KTjpv^. 1 4. touto ecrTO) 
 TO avvdrip.a. » 
 
 II. I. But do you^ send others to the mountains. 
 
 2. Do not take^ supplies from the villages in the plain. 
 
 3. Let the herald attend me, when I come '' to the camp. 
 
 ^ /.«. you and your followers. 
 * both. « Sing. 
 
 '■ also. 
 
 ' Single act. 
 
 ' how. 
 
 ' Aor. subjv. 
 
 Fig. 17. — War Ship. 
 
138 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XXX 
 
 ^^BS. M 
 
 THE PRESENT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF O-VFRBS. MEAN- 
 INGS OF THE MIDDLE VOICE. DEPONENT VERBS. 
 DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION • 
 
 313. In the inflection of the present and imperfect 
 middle (§ 37) there are to be seen the same thematic vowel, 
 mood signs, and augment (in the imperfect indicative) as 
 in the corresponding active tenses. Only a new series of 
 personal endings has to be learned. The primary endings 
 are seen in the present indicative and the subjunctive ; 
 the secondary endings, in the imperfect indicative and the 
 optative. The ending of the second person singular, pri- 
 mary -a-M and secondary -ao, does not, however, appear 
 intact in any of these forms. 
 
 314. PRESENT MIDDLE SYSTEM OF Xuu 
 
 SING. Dual 
 
 \v-o-|jiai / loose for myself, I ransom 
 
 Indie. I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Subjv. I. \v-ci)-|jiai 
 Xu-n 
 
 Xv-^i or X«-«i 
 
 Xv-€-TOl 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 Opt. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 Imv. 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Xv-T]-TOl 
 
 Xii-oC-|i,i)v 
 Xv-oi-0 
 
 Xv-Ol-TO 
 
 Xv-ov 
 Xu-f-o-Bw 
 
 Xv-c-cSov 
 Xv-«-<r6ov 
 
 Xu-T]-<r9ov 
 Xu-11-orOov 
 
 Xv-oi-o*Oov 
 Xv-ot-o-Btjv 
 
 Xu-6-<r9ov 
 Xv-^-o-Suv 
 
 PLUR. 
 
 Xv-d-|i.E6a 
 Xw-e-o-9e 
 
 Xw-O-VTOl 
 
 X\i-u-|j.E6a 
 
 Xv-r)-o-6e 
 
 Xu-w-vrai 
 
 Xv-o(-|i,E6a 
 Xu-ot-irBe 
 
 Xv-Ol-VTO 
 
 Xv-E-o-Bc 
 Xv-4-(r6»v 
 
 Inf. X^u-E-cBai 
 
 Partic. Xv-(S-|itvos, r), ov (declined like AvaB6s, but with accent like 
 TToX^lxios, §§ 11 6, 117) 
 
139 
 
140 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 The imperfect indicative belongs to the present system : 
 
 Sing. Dual Plu^^ 
 
 Impf. I. l-\v-6-f.j\v / loosed for myself ,/ ransomed lAu-i-jIeBo 
 
 Indie. 2. l-Xu-ot) l-Xu-e-<r9ov 4-\i)-«-<r9e 
 
 3. i-Xij-6-TO i-Xv-^-(r6T)v , 4-\i)-o-vto 
 
 Review the present active system of \vw, i.e. the present 
 and imperfect indicative, the present subjunctive, optative, 
 imperative, infinitive, and participle (§§ 45, 81, 206. a, 235, 
 254, 297). 
 
 MEANINGS OF THE MIDDLE VOICE 
 
 315. The middle voice of the Greek verb represents the 
 subject 
 
 I. As acting directly on himself {direct middle) : 
 
 ot 'EXXijves 7rap-€crKeva^ovTo the Greeks made themselves ready ; 
 iropewvrai they make themselves go, they proceed ; 
 6BpoLt,ovrox they gather themselves together, they muster ; 
 cfivXaTTovTM they guard themselves, they are on their guard [against] ; 
 cTftj^ovrai they save themselves. 
 
 II. As acting for himself or for his own interests in 
 some way {indirect middle') : 
 
 Tot's ajuolds 'Trapa-a-Ktvd^cTai he prepares the wagons for himself; 
 Kvpov ju.£Ta-7re/i7r£Tai he sends for Cyrus to come to himself; 
 
 It is often impossible to translate the middle, in this use, 
 differently from the active. 
 
 a. There is also a reciprocal use of the middle voice, 
 which represents the subjects as acting mutually. Thus 
 Bia-\eyovTai they converse, fid'x^ovTai {iid')(if) they fight, a.'^avi- 
 %QVTai {h'^mv) they struggle. 
 
 316. Many verbs are found in the middle voice only, 
 either in some or in all of their tenses. They are com- 
 monly known as deponent verbs. Thus oixofJ-ai be gone. 
 
 ^* 
 
PRESENT MIDDLE OF O-VERBS 141 
 
 317. Converse with and fight with somebody are ex- 
 pressed by the dative without a preposition. The dative 
 so used with these and similar verbs is included under the 
 dative of association : 
 
 8ta-A.£-yovTai tois uTpaTrp/ol^ they converse with the generals. 
 
 318. VOCABULARY XXX 
 
 0L6poCJo|jiai, mid. of dSpoC^u (Vocab- irapo-o-KtwaJu (theme o-KtuaS-), 
 
 ulary XXVII): gather (intr.), irapa-o-Kcvdo-u, irap-co-Kcvao-a : 
 
 muster, with «ls and ace. prepare, equip ; mid. make 
 
 Pav\op,ai : wish. oneself ready, prepare oneself; 
 
 Sia-X^70|j.ai (cp. X^'yu say) : con- prepare something for oneself. 
 
 verse, with dat. Dialect. \ irope«o|jioi : go, proceed. Cp. 
 
 Ep|iii)vevs, ia%, 6 : interpreter. Her- ii-iropos. 
 
 meneutics. irpo-ir^p.ir<i) (cp. ir^liiro)) : send for- 
 
 c'pXo)i.at,-2 aor. riXOov (Vocabulary ward or ahead. 
 
 •^VIII) : come,g6. <r(j'S« (themes cri»8- and cro)-), 
 
 p.eTa-ir^p.'iro|j,ai (cp. ir6(jiir(ii) : send <r(S<r(i>, e<rci>o-a: save; mid. save 
 
 after to come to oneself, sum- oneself. 
 
 tnon. <|>D\dTToiioi, mid. of <t>«XdTTO) (Vo- 
 
 otxo|iai: be gone, have gone (pres. cabulary XV): guard oneself, 
 
 with pf. meaning). Often with be on one'' s guard {against, with 
 
 supplementary partic. ; cp. § 215. ace). 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 319. I. I. 6 Se Adpeio? i^ovXero Toix; iraiSas nap- 
 eivai. 2. 01 8e cnpciTiaTai ets to Trehiov adpoitflvrai. 
 3. 'ApLO-TLTTTTO^ e/aj^cTai Trpos Tov Kvpov. 4. TTOpeverai 
 8e ws ^aa-iXed. 5. /actci ravTa i^-rjXOov ^vXaTTOfievoi 
 crTpaTtjyol twv 'EXXrjvav. 6. Sei Se i7ju,as napa-aKeva- 
 ^ea-dai ottojs (Tw^wfieda. 7. ol Se '^Opoi^ov t^s TpLtj- 
 peig, (US eV rats rpirjpea-L (Twt,oivTO. 8. ei Se e'^eX.ets, 
 wopevov eVl to o/oos. 9. irapa-a-xwoii avrw o ti ai/ 
 
142 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 ^ov\y)TaL. lO. ol he aTpaTiSyrai eXeyov cos 6 Xoxa.709 
 otxoii-o. II. Kol 7Tpo-TTefx,\pd<; ipiJ,y)ved elitev otu fiov- 
 \oLTo Sia-Xeyea-dav rots dpxovcnv. 12. 6 8' ipfirjveixs 
 elnev on irapa ^acnXeo)? TropevovraL Trpo'S rov aa- 
 TpcLTTrjv. 13. Kupos Se fjieT-enefjiTreTo tov KXeapxov. 
 14. Kol /3ao-tX.evs S17 eVel riKovae TLcra-a^epvov? top 
 Kvpov aToXov, '7Tap-ea-Kevdt,eT0. 15. /cat ets to Trpo- 
 crdev^ oi\ovTaL StwKot'res. 
 
 II. I. Cyrus summoned the generals (to come to him). 
 2. The leaders said that they wished to converse with 
 us. 3. Guarding ourselves, we proceeded through the 
 night. 4. Take whatever you wish. 
 
 XXXI 
 
 SYNCOPATED NOUNS. DATIVE OF RESPECT 
 
 320. Some frequently occurring nouns of the consonant 
 declension, with stems in ep-, drop e before p in the geni- 
 tive and dative singular and the dative plural : irarrjp 
 (Trarep-) father, p^rfrip (fMijTep-) mother, 9v<ydTr]p {OvyaTep-) 
 daughter. One noun, avr\p (avep-) man, drops e before p in 
 all its cases except the nominative and vocative singular ; 
 8 is inserted where e is dropped from forms of avrjp. The 
 dative plural of all these nouns has the auxiliary sound a 
 added to the stem before the case ending. 
 
 The accent is to be carefully noted. It is recessive in 
 the vocative singular. 
 
 ^ io the front. 
 
SYNCOPATED NOUNS 
 
 143 
 
 (i^TTjp, r|, mother 
 UriTp-is [for /itr/Tep-os] 
 |jLT]Tp-l [for /xijTep-t] 
 )i,r|T^p-a 
 
 lifJTCp 
 
 (ITlWp-t 
 |M)T^p-aiV 
 
 |ilT|T^p-CS 
 
 (iriT^p-wv 
 
 |iHTp<i-o-i(v) 
 
 |jii|T4p-as 
 
 av^p, 6, man 
 dv8p-6s [for di/ep-os] 
 dvSp-C etc. 
 
 avSp-a 
 avep 
 
 av8p-€ 
 dvSp-otv 
 
 av8p-es 
 dv8p-uv 
 dvSpd-cri(v^ 
 av8p-as 
 
 322. Dative of respect. — The instrumental dative (§ 141) 
 may indicate in respect to what an expression is used : 
 
 ■yc'vei irpofT-rjKwv jiaaiXu in respect to birth related to the king. 
 
 a. Tlie accusative of specification (§ 279) is far more 
 commonly used. 
 
 321. Sing.N. 
 
 iroT^p, 6, father 
 
 G. 
 
 iroTp-ds [for Trarep-oi' 
 
 D. 
 
 iroTp-C [for iraTcp-t] 
 
 A. 
 
 irar^p-a 
 
 V. 
 
 irdrep 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 irar^p-E 
 
 G.D. 
 
 •iroT^p-otv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 irar^p-ts 
 
 G. 
 
 irar^p-wv 
 
 D. 
 
 'iroTpd-o-i(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 iraT^p-os 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 flwydTTip, ■f), daughter 
 
 G. 
 
 9D7aTp-<Ss 
 
 D. 
 
 OuYarp-C 
 
 A. 
 
 OvYttT^p-a 
 
 V. 
 
 6ipYOT«p 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 6ll70Tlp-€ 
 
 G.D. 
 
 BuYar^p-oiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 6«70T^p-6S 
 
 G. 
 
 6u7aT^p-(i)v 
 
 D. 
 
 6vyaTptt-iri(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 SvYar^p-as 
 
 323- 
 
 VOCABULARY XXXI 
 
 'AppoKd|i,as, a (Doric gen., for ov), 
 
 6 : Abrocomas. 
 dv^p, dvSp6s, 6 : man ; husband. 
 
 a avSpcs (TTpaTiuTai, (or'EWi]-- 
 
 ves ) : fettow soldiers ( or 
 Greeks). 
 yivoi, ODS, TO : kinship, family, 
 birth. Lat. genus, gens. 
 
144 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 8(i-8eKa (8vo + S^Ka), indecl. : sia, and mother of Artaxerxes II 
 
 twelve. Dodeca-gon (7«i)vCa and Cyrus the Younger. 
 
 angle). iroT'/ip, iroTpds, 6; father. Lat. 
 
 i^Spiis, 4 6v: hostile. iy^fii 
 
 (subst.) oB, 6 : personal enemy. •Kfo<T-i\<s.a : come to, reach to, per- 
 
 To be distinguished from tain to; pres. partic. related, 
 
 iroX^liios and oi iroX^iiioi the with dat. 
 
 enemy in war. o-TpoTtvu, <rTpoT«vio-cii, «irTpdT€«o-o : 
 
 etrydTiip, evyarpds, t| : daughter. make an expedition ; dep. mid. 
 
 |i^TT|p, p.'HTpds, Ti: mother. Lat. takethe field, serve in war. Cp. 
 
 mater. o-Tpdrev-jia, etc. 
 
 'Opovras, a (Doric gen., for ou), 6 : o-v-o-Tpareilo) (<rvv + <rTpaTev<i),§ 133. 
 
 Orontas. 4), usually dep. mid. o-K-o-rpo- 
 
 IlapvcraTis, i8os, t) : Pary satis, Tivo^a,\: takethe field with, serve 
 
 wife of Darius II, king of Per- in war with, with dat. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 324. I. I. eyw, w dv^pe? "EXk'qves, yeiTwv elfu rrj 
 'EXXctSi. 2. 01 8' ikeyov ori dvSpeq vepl cnrovScov 
 yJKOLev. 3. dyaOol 87) <^tXoi elcrlv xprjaLfioL avSpt} 
 4. Kupos ovu dva-^aivei napa tov Trarepa. 5- °^ ^^ 
 (TTpaTLcoTav Kar-4\nrov Trarepas koX jxrjTepai; iirel (tvv- 
 ecrTparevovTo Kvpco. 6. ivrevdev iiropevovTO eis tSs 
 na/)ua'ari8os Kcofid'? T'^s Kvpou /cai /SacriXeco? jinjT/ads. 
 
 7. 'Opdirds 8" rjyeTO^ t^v dvyarepa rrjv^ /SatrtXews. 
 
 8. 17 Se jUT^TTj/D avTov dtTOriri^Trei ttoKiv iirl ttjv dp- 
 ■^■qv. 9. eKcXeucre 8e tous Xo^dyous Xa/A/Scti^etv* dvSpas. 
 10. eXe^e ya/) on aKouot ' A.^poK6p,dv, i^dpov dvSpa, 
 6771 Tci> Eu<^paTi7 voTafi^ eii'ai, dir-ej^oi'Ta ScuSe^a crra- 
 dp.ov^. 1 1 . TTpos toBtoi' ouv e<^77 jSovXea-Oai a-rpa- 
 
 ■^ § III. ^ 07a) in mid. sometimes means marry. 
 
 3 §§ 67, 69. * iaie = enlist. 
 
SECOND AORIST AND FUTURE MIDDLE 145 
 
 TSvecrOai. 12. 'OpovTas Se, liepcrr)'; dvTJp, yeua re 
 irpocr-yJKcov /3a<Ti.\el,^ im-fiovXeveL Kvpco. 
 
 II. I. I advise you to abandon this man. 2. Men have 
 come 2 with reference to^ a truce. 3. The father sum- 
 moned his daughters (to his side).* 4. Cyrus ordered 
 his generals to enlist men, in order that they might take 
 the field with him against the king. 
 
 XXXII 
 
 THE SECOND AORIST MIDDLE AND THE FUTURE 
 MIDDLE SYSTEMS OF O-VERBS. FUTURE SYSTEM 
 OF elfii. FUTURE PARTICIPLE EXPRESSING PUR- 
 POSE, ft)? WITH FUTURE PARTICIPLE. INFINI- 
 TIVE WITH ADJECTIVES OF FITNESS AND 
 ABILITY 
 
 325. The second aorist middle of 'Keiirm and similar 
 verbs (§§ 83-88) differs from the second aorist active in 
 the personal endings only. The second aorist indicative 
 is inflected with the endings of the imperfect; while the 
 second aorist subjunctive, optative, and imperative have 
 the endings of the present tense in these moods. 
 
 The second person singular of the second aorist middle 
 imperative in -ov always has the circumflex on the ultima ; 
 and the second aorist middle infinitive is always accented 
 on the penult. 
 
 i§iii. 2{jn„_ ''about. * Omit. 
 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 10 
 
146 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 326. SECOND AORIST SYSTEM OF XtCiru IN THE 
 MIDDLE VOICE 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 PLUR. 
 
 Indie. I . 
 
 l-\iir-6-|jniv 
 
 
 4-Xix-6-ne9a 
 
 2. 
 
 e-\Cir-ou 
 
 e-Xhr-e-o-Bov 
 
 l-XCir-«-cr6e 
 
 3- 
 
 t-XCir-e-TO 
 
 l-Xiir-e'-o-flTiv 
 
 l-XCir-o-vTO 
 
 Subjv. 1. 
 
 Xtir-u-iioi 
 
 
 Xiir-c&-)ic9a 
 
 2. 
 
 Xtir-x| 
 
 XCir-i)-(r9ov 
 
 XCir-i]-<r9£ 
 
 3- 
 
 XCir-ij-Tai 
 
 Xtir-ti-o-Oov 
 
 XCir-u-vToi 
 
 Opt. I. 
 
 Xnr-o£-(j.T]v 
 
 
 Xiir-ot-(ie6a 
 
 2. 
 
 X£ir-oi-o 
 
 Xtir-oi-(r9ov 
 
 X£ir-oi-<r9e 
 
 3- 
 
 XCir-oi-TO 
 
 Xiir-oC-(r9T)v 
 
 Xtir-oi-VTO 
 
 Imv. 2. 
 
 Xtir-oB 
 
 Xlir-e-cr6ov 
 
 XCir-£-o-9e 
 
 3- 
 
 Xnr-e-<r6a> 
 
 \nr-l-ir6av 
 
 \iir-i-a-6ov 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Xwr-6-(r9ai 
 
 
 
 Partic. 
 
 Xiir-d-nevos, t], 
 
 ov 
 
 
 Review the second aorist active system of XeiTrca, i.e. the 
 second aorist indicative, subjunctive, optative, imperative, 
 infinitive, and participle (§§ 85, 208, 238, 257, 301). 
 
 327. The future middle differs from the future active in 
 personal endings only. The subjunctive and imperative 
 have no future tense in any voice. 
 
 328. The future middle of mute themes is formed with 
 the same euphonic changes at the end of the theme as the 
 future active (§ 153). Thus /xeTa-Trefnrofiai summon, fut. 
 fieTa-Tren-KJrofiai, Be')(ofiaL receive, fut. Be^ofiM, dpird^^co plun- 
 der, fut. mid. dpTrdcro/jLai. 
 
 329. FUTURE SYSTEM OF Xuu IN THE MIDDLE VOICE 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 '' shall loose for myself 
 
 IndlC. I . Xu-cro-iioi {,■,,, 
 
 y I shall ransom 
 
 2. Xv-cTfl, Xv-<r€i X«-(r€-«r9ov 
 
 3. X\i-(r€-Tai Xv-(re-<r9ov 
 
 Xv-o-6-|i,c9a 
 
 Xv-a-£-(r9e 
 Xv-o-o-vrai 
 
SECOND AORIST AND FUTURE MIDDLE 147 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 Opt. I , \iJ-(ro£-(iTiv Xv-(roC-|u6a 
 
 2. Xu-o-oi-o Xv-o-oi-o-Sov XiS-o-oi-o-Be 
 
 3. Xu-troi-TO \v-(roC-(r6i]v \v-<roi.-VTO 
 Inf. XiS-<re-<r6oi 
 
 Partic. X.v-<r(i-|i«vos, r\, ov 
 
 Review the future active system of \va, i.e. the future in- 
 dicative, optative, infinitive, and participle (§§ 1 5 1, 207, 254). 
 
 FUTURE SYSTEM OF A^i T am 
 
 330. The future of et'/u.' is ea-ofiai I shall be, inflected like 
 Xv-ao-fiai except in the third person singular of the indica- 
 tive, which irregularly lacks the thematic vowel (e). 
 
 Sing. 
 Indie. I. la-o|j,ai 
 
 2. ca"r|, eo-ci 
 
 3. ciTTai 
 Opt. I. c<roC|i,i)v 
 
 2 . €0*010 
 
 3. OTOITO 
 
 Inf. co-Eo-Sai 
 Partic. €o-6(i,evos, tj, ov 
 
 331. The circumstantial participle may be used in the 
 future to express a purpose (cp. § 213) : 
 
 avSpa Tre/ji.Trei Kekevcrovra kt\. he sends a man to command, etc. 
 
 332. m often accompanies the participle of purpose as 
 well as the causal participle (§213. a). It sometimes means 
 as, as if, etc., and sometimes it can hardly be translated : 
 
 KeAevei Tov<i ircXTao-Tcis ■Kopax.uBo.i ets rov Trorafwv o)s 8io-/8);(ro;u.ej'oi;s ^ 
 he orders the peltasts to proceed into the river as if to cross 
 (i.e. as if with the purpose of crossing) ; 
 
 /cat v/jixii 'Trapa-dKevd^ecrOe is dva-^rjo-o/xevoi^ and do you make your- 
 selves ready in order to go inland. 
 
 1 Fut. of Sia-^aCvo), § 144. ^ Fut. of ava-Palva, § 280. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 eo-6|iiE6a 
 
 €o-eo-6ov 
 
 EO-eo-Se 
 
 co-Eo-Sov 
 
 cVovrai 
 
 
 4(ro(|u6a 
 
 k'o-oia-Oov 
 
 co-oio-Se 
 
 £a-oCo-6T|v 
 
 eo-oivro 
 
148 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 333. The infinitive is used to complete the meaning of 
 certain adjectives, especially such as denote ^iness, ability, 
 and the like : 
 
 iKovoi TOM aKpoTToXas ^uXotTTEti/ sufficient [troops]] to guard the 
 citadels ; 
 
 a.p\av 8e koA.coi' kox ayaOlov Ikovos ^v he was able to govern hon- 
 orable and brave men. 
 
 334- 
 
 VOCABULARY XXXII 
 
 dKp6-iro\is, ews, t| : high part of a 
 city, citadel. Acropolis. 
 
 &Kpos, o, ov : top of, highest point 
 of; TO uKpov (subst.) : the 
 height. Cp. Lat. acus, aciltus, 
 acies. 
 
 BaPv\<6v, uvos, T] : Babylon. 
 
 PovXcvu, Pov\EV(r(D, ipovXcvira : 
 plan, devise; but the simple 
 verb is commonly dep. mid. 
 Pov\Evo|ji.ai : take counsel with 
 oneself, plan. Cp. ciri-PovXevu 
 and (ru|i,-PovXEvci>. 
 
 7('yvo|i,ai. (for 7i-7«v-o-ii.ai, theme 
 yev-), fUt. YEvfj(ro|i.ai (the in- 
 crease of the theme to 76V11- is to 
 be noted), 2 aor. h{iv6^t\v : be- 
 come, be born, be ; happen, arise, 
 take place, turn out. Cp. y^vos. 
 Genesis. 
 
 S^XOF^O''') S^gopitti, aor. to be learned 
 later: receive, accept. 
 
 8ia-P'fja-o|iai, fut. of 8ia-|3aCv(i) (Vo- 
 cabulary XI), theme Pa-: shall 
 go across, shall cross. 
 
 v.\6^tf>, 2 aor. mid. of etXov (Vo- 
 cabulary XXVI) : / took for 
 
 myself, I chose. Subjv. '^uijiai, 
 opt. cXo()i,i)v, imv. IXoO, in£ eX«- 
 (rSai, partic. eXopLcvos, •% ov. 
 
 stirov (Vocabulary XXIV), mean- 
 ing commanded, proposed, 
 urged, is followed by the inf. 
 Cp. § 98. 
 
 iKavos, i\, 6v : sufficient, able. 
 
 KaTa-Xa|ipdvH (cp. Xa|iPdv(i), \\- 
 i|fO|iai, eXaPov) : seize, occupy, ^ 
 overtake, come 7ipon, with ace. 
 
 X<ii|«>(jioi (theme Xtj^-), fut. of Xon- 
 pdvw (Vocabulary V) : shall 
 take or receive. 
 
 irapa-Yt-yvopiai (cp. Y(7vo|iai) : come 
 {to) ; be at hand, be present. 
 Cp. irdp-Ei|u. 
 
 iravoiiai, mid. of iroiiw (Vocabulary 
 XXVI) : stop oneself, cease. 
 
 ireCo-Ojiai : either (l) fut. of irdaxa) 
 suffer (Vocabulary XXII), or 
 (2) fut. mid. of irtCOo) (Vocabu- 
 lary I) in mid. meaning obey 
 (with dat.). 
 
 ■"^■y^j fls, T) ; spring of water ; gen- 
 erally pi. source. 
 
 p^Sios, a, ov : easy. 
 
SECOND AORIST AND F.UTURE MIDDLE ' 149 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 335- I- I- rjv 8e <f>v'yy, tJ/acis Trpos^ ravra /SovXevcro- 
 fieda. 2. Koi Kvpo<s eXeyev on 17 686? etroiTo 77/365 
 ^ao-tXe'd ets Bay8u\(Sj/a. 3. Ad/)etou ^ koI Ila/ouo-aTtSos ^ 
 yiyvovTai iratSes Suo. 4. ras wr^yas roC TTorafiov, 
 ^v ^ovXcovTav, hia-jBrjo-ovTai. 5. ovk etfti] irava-eadaL. 
 6. eXeye o otl fiuadou rdXavTov XtJxIjoivto. 7. dw- 
 eXdelv paSiov ia-Tai, rjp ySouXw/Ae^a. 8. oi "EXXrjve? 
 TTap-ea-Kcvd^ovTo w? Sefd/^ei'ot fiacnXed. 9. irdvTe<; 
 ovTOL 01 fiap0apoi, TroXe/iiot Ty/tii' eaovTat. 10. ou 
 ya/) i/cavoi '^crav 01 eV tt} aKponoXei crxeiv ^ tous w- 
 Sj0a9. II. Upoievov Se efceXeucre Xa^ovra dvSpas 
 irapa.-y&icrd ai, &>?* eis IltcriSds ^ovXap-evo^ aTpareue- 
 crdai. 12. Hei'tds 817 tous ck tcDj/ TroXeajf Xafiwv irap- 
 eyevero ei? Sap8ets. 13. ivofiLcrev ehat, iKavo?^ 
 ap^cLV. 14. cri>i' o^iv o ri ai/ Se'?/ weCa-ofiai.^ 1 5. t&j 
 di'S/31 01" ai' eXr)a-de ireicropLai? 16. (TTpaTicoTT]^ 8e Tis 
 eiTTCi' iXeaOai aXXous crTpaTr)yov<;, koi TrepApaL dvSpas 
 KaTa-Xr]\jjopeuov^ ^ to, aKpa, 
 
 II. I. Clearchus proposed to choose leaders, and to send 
 them with soldiers to occupy the mountains. 2. He will 
 not be able to control ^ bad men. 
 
 1 wiiA reference to. ^ from gen., § 201. 
 
 ' In sense of restrain, § 88. * § 213. a, 
 
 ' § no. (/. ' Fut. of irdox«>. 
 
 ' Fut. mid. of irc£9«. » § 331. « <ipx«"'- 
 
ISO 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XXXIII 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION {Continued). SOME IMPOR- 
 TANT IRREGULAR NOUNS. /neV? AND ttoXu? 
 
 336- 
 
 IRREGULAR NOUNS 
 
 Sing. N. 7uv<i, T], woman 
 
 G. 7«voiK-6s 
 
 D. ■yuvoiK-t 
 
 A. 7«voiK-a 
 
 V. *yiivai 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. D. 
 
 'YvvaiK-otv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 7uvaiK-es 
 
 G. ■yuvaiK-«v 
 
 D. ■yuvai|t(v) 
 
 A. 7vvoiK-as 
 
 Xt'p, Ti, hand 
 X«ip-<5s 
 X"P-' 
 X«tp-a 
 
 x«tp 
 
 XeIp-« 
 
 Xep-otv and x^^p-oiv 
 
 X«Ip-«s 
 X«ip-wv 
 Xtp-o-C(v) 
 X«tp-os 
 
 3. Sing. N. A. V. ■iTvp,T6,^re 4 
 
 G. injp-ds 
 
 D. 17Up-C 
 
 Plur. N. A. V. inip-d, to (o-decl.), watch fires 
 
 G. TTVp-WV 
 
 ,D. irvp-ots 
 
 fiSiop, Td, water 
 uSuT-os 
 liSoT-i * 
 
 uSttT-a , 
 
 vSdx-wv 
 
 \i8a-(ri(v) 
 
 5 . Sing. N. A. V. Sipi), ti, spear 
 fljT G. Sopar-os 
 
 ^ Sdpar-i 
 
 D. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 8dpaT-« 
 
 G. D. Sopdr-oiv 
 
 Plur. N. A. V. 86paT-a 
 
 G. Sopdr-oiv 
 
 D. Sipa-(ri(v) 
 
 6. 76W, TO, knee 
 7(ivoT-os 
 ^iSvaT-i 
 
 76vaT-e 
 'yovdT-oiv 
 
 ■ydvaT-a 
 
 -yOVUT-UV 
 
 76vo-<ri(v) 
 
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES 
 
 151 
 
 337- 
 
 TWO 
 
 IMPORTANT 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 (i^vos great 
 
 |ie-ydXr| 
 
 |1€70 
 
 G. 
 
 |i.67<i\av 
 
 |U7dXT|s 
 
 |ji€7dXov 
 
 D. 
 
 (UYaXcji 
 
 (levAXti 
 
 (ic^dXi)) 
 
 A. 
 
 fi-^av 
 
 |tC7dXT|v 
 
 liiya 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 (iCYclXoi 
 
 |ji£7dXai 
 
 |U-ydXa 
 
 G. 
 
 lic-ydXuv 
 
 Itc^dXuv 
 
 )ie7dX(iiv 
 
 D. 
 
 jie^dXais 
 
 (XE^dXais 
 
 |ic7dXois 
 
 A. 
 
 (icydXcvs 
 
 {ic-ydXas 
 
 (jLE^dXa 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 TToXvs much 
 
 iroXX'^i 
 
 iroXii 
 
 G. 
 
 iroWoO 
 
 iroXXfis 
 
 iroXXoO 
 
 D. 
 
 voWlf 
 
 iroXXfl 
 
 iroXX$ 
 
 A. 
 
 iToXvv 
 
 iroXX'^iv 
 
 iroXi 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 iroXXoC 
 
 iroXXaC 
 
 iroXXd 
 
 G. 
 
 iroXXuv 
 
 ^oXXiov 
 
 iroXXuv 
 
 D. 
 
 iroXXots 
 
 iroXXats 
 
 iroXXois 
 
 A. 
 
 iroXXovs 
 
 iroXXds 
 
 voXXd 
 
 338. 
 
 VOCABULARY XXXIII 
 
 diro-Xa)j.pdv<i> (cp. XapiPdvcD, X'/^ij/o- 
 [lai, cXaPov) : take or receive 
 back ; take off, cut off. 
 
 ■yovw, 76VOTOS, TO : knee. Lat. 
 genu. 
 
 Yuv/j, YwaiKis, ij : woman, wife. 
 
 Sdpv, S6paTos, TO : spear. 
 
 ■i)8ti, adv. : now, already, straight- 
 way. 
 
 KeXaivaC, uv, at: Celaenae, a city 
 in Phrygia. 
 
 |ji^7as, |i.£7dXi), (1^70 : great, large. 
 Mega-phone {<^avi\ voice"). 
 
 viiKTup, adv. (cp. vig) : by night. 
 
 iroXiis, iroXX'<i, iroX-u : much, many ; 
 extensive, large, ol iroXXoC : the 
 many, the most. 01 iroXXol tmv 
 
 'EXXif|v<i)v : the most of the 
 Greeks, to iroXv toO o'TpaT€ii- 
 (xaTOs : the most of the army. 
 Poly-, poly-gon (yavla angle), 
 poly-technic (Ti\vx\ art), etc. 
 
 irOp, inip6s, t6 : fre. irupd, Td : 
 watch fires. Cp. pyre, pyro- 
 technic (tsxvt] art), etc. 
 
 Tapo-ot, uv, 01 : Tarsus, the chief 
 city of Cilicia. 
 
 t6|ov, ov, Td : bow. Cp. ToJdTus, 
 Td|cv|ia. 
 
 XeCp, x«^P*s, T| : hand. Chiro- 
 graphy (7pd(|)w). 
 
 uSwp, vSaTos, Td : water; rain. 
 Hydro-, hydro-phobia (<|i6Pos), 
 etc. 
 
152 BEGINNER^S GREEK BOOK 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 339. I. I. eo-n 8e jxeyaXov ySatriXetus /SatriXeia iv 
 KeXdivais. 2. ^v yap ttoXws crtTos et" rdis Kcofj-ais. 
 3. fieyaKoL Se ra rd^a ra TLepcnKo. ^ iaTiv. 4. oj 0' 
 d7ro-X'>jt/»oi'Tat Kai TraiSas koX yvvcuKa?. 5. eV t^ X^'/" 
 KXeayo^os et^e to Sojou 6. eVi tw Trvpi KaT-eXafiov 
 (jivXaKTiv Trj<; vvkto^? 7. ikeyov TLve<s ori KaT-ihoiev 
 
 VVKTCop TToXXo. TTVpd. 8. Kai uSwp 77oXu '^V.^ Q. €9(01' 
 
 Se Sdpu ais TrevTeKaiBeKa irqy^iiiv^ lO. tw oe oopaTi^ 
 iraCei avrov Kara to yovv. 1 1 . Sta toutou toO Treoiou 
 ■i^Xao-e (TTaOp.ov'i ttcttc Trapacrayyds Suo Kai clkoctlv eis 
 TayDcrou?, tiJs KtXtKtds TrdXiv p.eyaX'qv koX evhaipLOva. 
 12. ouros S' 6 iroTa/AOS •^v /caXog jneV, //.eyas 8' ov • ' 
 Kwp^ai 8e iroXXai Trepl avrov rjcrav. 13. Ttcrcra^e/)- 
 vr;5 Kttl 6 TTjs jSacnXeco'; yvvaLKo^ aSeX^os '^817 7ra/3- 
 ■ijcrav. 14. evdix; 8' eXa/8e to, TraXra ei? Tfis j^eipas. 
 
 II. I. The wife of the king of Cilicia arrived'' at* the 
 camp. 2. On coming up^ they kindled a fire. 3. The 
 general marched five days' journey to Celaenae, a large 
 and prosperous city. 4. The most of the barbarians had 
 spears in their hands. 
 
 ^ §§ 67, 69. 2 I ijj, s (^gyg ^as. 
 
 * §§ 278, 282. 6 I 141. 6 § 99. 
 
 ' Use proper tense of irapa-Yf'yvop.ai. ^ cts, 
 ' Use aor. pavtic. and omit on. 
 
 Fig. 19. — Greek Spears. 
 
FIRST AORIST MIDDLE OF fl-VERBS 153 
 
 XXXIV 
 
 THE FIRST AORIST MIDDLE SYSTEM OF O-VERBS. 
 INDIRECT QUESTIONS .INTRODUCED BY THE IN- 
 TERROGATIVE Tt9, THE INDEFINITE RELATIVE 
 0<7Tt9, AND OTHER INTERROGATIVE WORDS 
 
 340. The first aorist middle differs from the first aorist 
 active (§ 160) only in the personal endings. The personal 
 endings of the first aorist indicative middle are the same as 
 in the imperfect middle ; in the second person singular of 
 the first aorist indicative, -aa + [cr]o contracts to -era). The 
 other moods "liave in the first aorist middle the same per- 
 sonal endings as in the pi^esent middle. But the second 
 person singular of the middle imperative in -aat (\va-ai) is 
 peculiar in form, as is the second person singular of the 
 active imperative in -aov (\va-ov). 
 
 341. A verb of three syllables naturally has recessive 
 accent in the second person singular of the first aorist 
 middle imperative. Thus a-vfi-^ovXevcrai consult. From 
 this form must be carefully distinguished the first aorist 
 infinitive active cru/i-/3ou\evo-ai to advise (§ 166); and the 
 third person singular of the first aorist optative active 
 avfi-^ovKeva-ai (or -o-ete), final -at being long in the opta- 
 tive mood (§ 253). 
 
 342. FIRST AORIST MIDDLE SYSTEM OF Xtf« 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 Indie. I. i-\v-ir6.-^i[v /loosed for myself , I ransomed l-Xv-o-A-iiefla 
 
 2. l-Xw-o-u l-\S!-o-a-ir8ov €-XD-<ra-(r9« 
 
 3. l-\«-<ra-TO 4-Xv-<rd-o-9Tjv l-X«-q-o-VTO 
 
IS4 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Subjv. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Xv-o-(i)-|iai 
 
 Xu-o-g 
 
 X«-<nr)-Tai 
 
 \v-(ri\-<riov 
 Xv-o"T]-(r0ov 
 
 Xv-a-ii-ficSa 
 
 X«-<rT]-(r66 
 
 Xv-crw-vTai 
 
 Opt. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 Xii-<raC-(«)v 
 X«-<rai-o 
 
 X«-<roi-cr6ov 
 
 Xv-o-aC-|u6a 
 Xv-o-oi-o-Bc 
 
 3- 
 
 X«-(rai-TO 
 
 Xii-<ra£-ir87iv 
 
 Xv-(rai-VTO 
 
 Imv. 2. 
 
 Xv-o-oi 
 
 Xu-o-a-erBov 
 
 Xv-(ra-o-6c 
 
 3- 
 
 Xv-o'd-o-Ow 
 
 Xv-(rd-<r6(i)V 
 
 Xv-o-d-orOuv 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Xd-o-a-o-flai 
 
 
 
 Partic. 
 
 X5-(rd-|ji€vos, T), ov 
 
 
 
 Review the first aorist active system of Xvco, i.e. the first 
 aorist indicative, subjunctive, optative, imperative, infinitive, 
 and participle (§§ 162, 209. b, 235, 254, 297)., 
 
 INDIRECT QUESTIONS 
 
 343. The same words that introduce direct questions 
 may also introduce indirect questions. Thus ti? who ? tl 
 what {irov where? etc.). Or the corresponding indefinite 
 relative pronoun (or adverb) may be used. Thus ocrfi? 
 for TtV (and ottou for ttov, etc.). Examples are provided 
 under §§ 344, 345. 
 
 a. el after an interrogative verb may mean whether. 
 
 344. An indirect question after a primary tense of the 
 verb of aji^/»^ keeps its original mood and tense unchanged: 
 
 8ia-A.e'yoD Kox [idOe (§ 303. a) TtVes tlcriv [or oi' Tiii>t uuff] converse 
 (with them) and learn who they are. 
 
 345. After a secondary tense of the verb of asking the 
 verb of the indirect question may be changed to the, opta- 
 tive. The tense used in the direct question must be re- 
 tained, but the change of mood is optional: 
 
 ijipcTo o Tl [or Tt ] ii-q TO (TvvOritia he asked what the watchword was, 
 /« the direct form : tL ian to (rvvOrj/ui ; what is the watchword ? 
 
FIRST AORIST MIDDLE OF O-VERBS 
 
 155 
 
 The original verb earC might have been retained in the 
 indirect question. 
 
 346- 
 
 VOCABULARY XXXIV 
 
 dXtiOyjs, h : trtte, 
 
 ap\o|xai, ap|o|j,ai, T|p|d|ii)v (mid. of 
 
 apx«, Vocabulary VIII) : begin, 
 
 with gen. or inf. 
 Sia-irpaTro|xai (cp. irpOTTia), 8ia- 
 
 irpd|o|i,ai, Si-cirpa^diJLiiv : carry 
 
 through to the end, bring aioui, 
 
 accomplish, effect (for oneself) ; 
 
 manage that (with ace. and 
 
 inf.). 
 Svvaros, i\, <5v: able, strong. Cp. 
 
 el, after an interr. verb : whether. 
 
 TJpd|jiT]v, 2 aor. : /aj^^^ (a question) 
 or inquired; subjv. epci>|i,ai, opt. 
 cpoC|jiT|v, imv. Ipov, inf. Ip^o-Sai, 
 partic. Ipdiuyos. 
 
 6vo|i.ai, 6v(ro|i.ai, c8v<rd|ii)v (mid. of 
 ewo), Vocabulary XXIII) : sac- 
 rifice, offer for oneself or from 
 one's own resources. 
 
 Kara-PaCvo), Kara-pyjo-oiiai : go 
 
 down, descend. Cp. dva-^aCvM 
 (Vocabulary XXVI). 
 
 (TK^iTTOiiat, irK€i|/0|iai, i(rK€i|/d|ir|v, 
 dep. mid. : view, observe, con- 
 sider. The pres. and impf. are 
 rare in Attic. Skeptic. 
 
 <rv-o-K€vd£(D (<riv + o-KEud^u, cp. 
 irapa-irKevd^u) , o-u-(rK«ud(rci>, crvv- 
 co-Kcvao-a : make ready (by get- 
 ting things together, «niv-), 
 pack up, with ace. ; mid. pack 
 up one's own baggage, pack 
 up. 
 
 Xapt£ap.ai (theme xopiS-), fut. to 
 be learned later, t-%o^\.<T&.^rfi, 
 dep. mid. . show a favor to 
 somebody (dat.), gratify, grant 
 something (ace.) to somebody 
 (dat.) as a favor. ,Cp. xdpis. 
 
 XifSv, dvos, T| : snow. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 347. I. I. Il/odfei'os aurw ixeT-eirefiypaTO, ^evo<; u>v 
 dp^aio?. 2. TavTa S' eiiTMV iiravcraTo. 3. cttI tov- 
 Tots^ iOvcravTO. 4. tovtov? e/ceXeue crKe\jja(r6aL Ti ei?; 
 TO KcaXvov.^ 5. Tjp^auTo 8e KaTa-fiaiveiv oltto tov kofjiov 
 Trpos Tous aXXous. 6. oi Be TToXefiioi ovk iZi^avTO 
 auTovs. 7. auTos Se hvvaTo<;^ rjv Trapa.-cfKe.vda-aadai 
 
 ' upon this, thereupon. 
 
 2 the hindrance (§ 212). 
 
 ' § 333- 
 
iS6 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XtKov. 8. Xeyero) tl eorat rots orparifuTai?/ iav avTw 
 TavTa TO. owXa ^^apCcrcavraL. 9. crvv-eke^a o^nas oVtas 
 fiovkevcraLixeOa o rt ^^017 iTpaTTew. lo. cru-cr/ceuacra- 
 li€V0L 8' evdi)^ inopevovTO Slo, ^twos ttoW^s, ijyeyotoi'as 
 e^ovTcs TToXXou?. 1 1 . /cat ras afji^d^d.';, a? Trap-ecrKevd- 
 craro Kvpo?, ol <tvv ySacrtXei hi-rjpiTacrav. 12. 6 8e 
 KXea/3;^09 Si-eirpd^aTo nevTe jxlv crrpaTrjyoifs rjKeiu, 
 etKocri, Se Xo^dyov?. 13. raCra Se Bia-Trpd^dfievoi, ol 
 /3dp/3apoL TjKov em \6(^ov. 14. yjpeTO top dvdpoiTTOv ei 
 ahqOrj ravT eh}. 
 
 II. I. Cyrus wondered what the watchword was. 2. We 
 asked why they had taken the field against the king. 
 3. The barbarians plundered all the wagons, full of wine 
 and grain, which Cyrus had prepared. 
 
 i§ 119. 
 
 F13. 20. — Helmet with Movable Cheek Pieces. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 157 
 
 XXXV 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. DECLENSION OF COM- 
 PARATIVES IN -wv. GENITIVE OF COMPARISON. 
 XCUSATIVE OF THE PVAV BY WHICH. SUPER- 
 LATIVE TRANSLATED BY VERY 
 
 348. The comparative degree of an adjective in -0? is 
 commonly formed by adding -repo'i to the stem of the 
 adjective as seen in the positive degree. Thus Sixaiot 
 just; com.'pa.ra.tive BiKai,6-Tepo<; {d, ov) more just. Similarly 
 the superlative degree is commonly formed by the suffix 
 -Tf^TO?. Thus 8iKai6-Taro<; (j), ov) most just. 
 
 a. All comparatives and superlatives have recessive 
 accent. 
 
 349. If the penult of the adjective is short in the posi- 
 tive degree, the o of the stem is lengthened to a> before the 
 comparative and superlative suffixes. Thus a^io'i worthy, 
 comparative a^wa-Te/ao?, superlative a^tci-TaTo?. 
 
 350. A penult is counted long, although its vowel is 
 short, if its vowel is followed by two consonants or a double 
 consonant (§ 6). Thus the penult of TrtcrToV faithful is 
 long, and the comparative and superlative are therefore 
 
 irUTTO-TepOl, TTtCTTo'-TaTO?. 
 
 351. AN ILLUSTRATIVE LIST OF ADJECTIVES COMPARED 
 
 Positive Comparative Superlative 
 
 a. SCKaios, a, ov, just SiKOiirepos, o, ov SiKaidraros, t], ov 
 
 (o-xvp<is, a, 6v, strong lo-x«p<ST«pos, a, ov Urxvp<iTaTOS, 11, ov 
 
 piaKpos, a, dv, long iiaKpirepos, a, ov (xaKpiTaros, i), ov 
 
 irio-Tds, i\, 6v, faithful -irio-TdTepos, a, ov irioTdTaTOS, r], ov 
 
iS8 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Positive Comparative 
 
 ojios, a, ov, worthy ogKirepos, a, ov 
 
 <tioPcpas, t, ov, fearful <|>oP«piiTepos, a, ov 
 Xo\6ir6s, ^, 6v, hard, x"^*'"^"?"*! *> o" 
 
 difficult, harsh, severe 
 
 Similarly are compared : 
 
 Ppaxis, eta, v, short Ppax-urepos, a, ov 
 
 [irpeo-pvs, poetic, old '] irpco-piTepos, a, ov, 
 
 older, elder 
 
 d\n0^o--Tepos, a, ov 
 do-<j>a\E(r-TEpo5, o, ov 
 
 d. aXifS'^js, &, true 
 d(r<|>a\'^s, es, safe 
 
 Superlative 
 
 aliiiraros, i), ov 
 (|>oPcpi&TaTOS, 1], ov 
 XaXeircSraTOS, f\, ov 
 
 Ppax^TOTos, T], ov 
 irpeo-pvTaTOs, t|, ov 
 
 d\i)6^<r-TOT0S, T], ov 
 do-4>aX^o--TaTos, t], ov 
 
 e. ev8aC|i(Dv, ov, prosperous «vSoi|i.ov-4(r-T6pos, a, ov e48ai.(i,ov-^o-^aTos, i], ov 
 
 352. The following are compared by the suffixes -tmv, 
 lov, comparative, and -to-ro?, y\, ov, superlative : 
 
 Comparative Superlative 
 
 t|St(i>v, i)8iov ilSio-Tos, 1], ov 
 
 Taxvs, €io, V, swift, [rax-ioiv =] eoTTWv, rdxto-TOS, i], ov 
 
 quick OdxTov 
 
 b. aUrxpis, ^, iv, shameful ato-xtwv, ato-xiov al^xio-Tos, 11, ov 
 
 Ix^pos, ^, <5v, hostile «x*^"''; 'X^iov £x9io-tos, t|, ov 
 
 These drop -/jo? and add -twv, -iaTO<i. 
 
 Positive 
 a. riSvs, «Ia, u, jw««^ -^ 
 
 DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES IN -uv, 
 GENITIVE -ovos 
 
 353. Comparatives in -mv, neut. -ov, gen. -ow?, are de- 
 clined like evhai^hav (§ 222), with these exceptions : the 
 accusative singular masculine and feminine and the nomi- 
 native, accusative, and vocative plural, masculine and 
 feminine, may contract. The contracted accusative plural 
 masculine and feminine copies the nominative plural. 
 The nominative, accusative, and vocative neuter plural 
 may be similarly contracted. 
 
 iCp.pl. irp^o-peis, Vocabulary XXVII. 
 
DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES IN -ON 159 
 
 a. The contracted forms come from stems in -oa, as 
 r\Uo(T-a, riBtocr-€<; ; sigma dropping between two vowels, 
 o -^ a = m, and o + ^=ov. 
 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 
 Neut. 
 
 \. Sing. N. 
 
 T|Sfii>v sweeter 
 
 
 iiSiov 
 
 G. 
 
 
 TiSfovos 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 T|Siovi 
 
 
 A. 
 
 T|8fova or tiStw 
 
 
 {i8iov 
 
 V. 
 
 
 ■iiSiov 
 
 
 lual N. A. V. 
 
 
 {(Stove 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 
 T|8l6vOlV 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 TiStovEs or tiStovs 
 
 
 T|8tovo or T|8f(i) 
 
 G. 
 
 
 T|8l6v<IIV 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 ■{l8fo<ri(v) 
 
 
 A. 
 
 T|Stovas or T|Sious 
 
 
 t|8tova or T|8t(i> 
 
 . Genitive of comparison. - 
 
 - The genitive case follows 
 
 a comparative when r\ tJian is omitted. This is the front 
 use of the genitive. (Similarly in Latin the ablative follows 
 a comparative when quant, "than," is omitted.) 
 
 oivos TovTov ijSiMv winc sweetcr than this. 
 
 356. Akin to the cognate accusative (§ 181) is the accu- 
 sative of the way by which found with a verb of motion : 
 
 080V iropeveaOai to travel a road. 
 
 357. The superlative degree may be sometimes trans- 
 lated by very. Thus tjSktto'; sweetest or very sweet. 
 
 358. VOCABULARY XXXV 
 
 Learn the adjectives in §§ 351, 352. They are not repeated in the 
 following list. 
 
 'ApTairBiTt|s, ov, 6 : Artapaies, a- Pao-CXeios) : kinglike, fit to be 
 
 friend of Cyrus. king; royal. 
 
 pariXiKds, ■/j 6v (cp jJao-iXeus and A<r-6.>(ia (cp. 0,7(0) : lead in. 
 
i6o BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 tm-TXP'Yxa'VCD, im-T(vt,o\ui.i (dep. Sx^oSi "'"> °' crowd, throng; an- 
 
 fut.), lir-^Tuxov: chance upon, noyance, bother, 
 
 happeii upon, find, with dat. <i>s : adv. with sup. to express the 
 
 v^os, a, ov : new, fresh, young. very highest degree. Cp. Lat. 
 
 Comp. veiirepos, sup. veiiroTos. quam with sup. Thus <!>s (to- 
 
 Cp. Lat. novus. Neo-lithic KpdraTos: as long as possible. 
 
 {Hio^ stone) . See also previous Vocabularies 
 
 ofi-,r<o, adv. : not yet, never yet. (XXII,XXIV,XXVI,XXVIII). 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 359. I. I. AdpeCov Kol IlapvcraTtSo? yiyvovTai irai- 
 Ses Suo, Trpecr^vTepo's jjukv 'Apra^epirfs, vecorepo^ 8e 
 Kvpos. 2. ;^a\€7rftjTaTos 8e €-)(6p6<; ^ iariv. 3. nduTe^ 
 ovTOL ol jSoipfiapoL TToXejjiLcoTepoi rjiuv eaovTai tcou irapa 
 ^acyikei ovtcj'j. 4. olvco tovtov rjSiovi, ovirco iTr-eTV)(ov 
 iydi. 5. Toi)s Se la")(ypoTdTOV<; toiv TreXracrrcov e/ceXeue 
 (TKeijjacrdat, tL ein) to kcoXvov. 6. iiropevovTO Se fiaKpo- 
 Tcpof oSov. "J. OVTOL ol dvBp€? aicT^^iou? elcrl tmv tt/jo- 
 (rOev? 8. Set Ty/ia? TTopevecrOai SeKa <TTa,9fx.ov^ «us 
 fiaKpoTaTov?. 9. (pevyeuv aurots ddi^akecrTepov icTTLv rj 
 Tjiuv. 10. ifTevOeu KiJpos Ti^f KiA.icro'ai' eis t'^v KiXt- 
 Ktdv diTO-!T€p,Trei Trjv Ta^iaTqv ohov.^ 11. 6 'Aptaios 
 ^i\o<; icTTl Tot9 KiJjoou i)(di(TT0i<;.* 12. jnera raSra 
 eLcr-rjyov OpovTav ei? 7171^ ' KpTairaTov crKiqvrjv, tov 
 
 TTKTTOTOLTOV TWV KvpoV <f>iXcOl>. I 3. KC/JOS Sc 17817 '^l' 
 
 ySacrtXi/fwrard? re K^at d.p-)(€iv dfiwraros. 14. ttSs Se 
 o^^Xos <^0)8epwraTo?. 
 
 1 The noun, § 323. 
 
 ° Supply men, § 70.- i. 
 
 5 §§ 284, 356- 
 
 * Used as noun : most bitter enemies. 
 
IRREGULAR COMPARISON 
 
 i6i 
 
 II. I. They proceeded home by the quickest way. 2. It 
 is necessary for a soldier to be as faithful as possible if he 
 is about to do guard duty.^ 3. I think that road is safer 
 than this.2 
 
 XXXVI 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES {Continued). IRREGULAR 
 COMPARISON. DOUq;.E QUESTIONS 
 
 360. The following common adjectives show irregulari- 
 ties of comparison : 
 
 rs/ 
 
 
 Positive 
 
 Comparative 
 
 Superlative 
 
 I. 
 
 a7a6iSs, ■i\, 6v, good, etc. 
 
 d|jieCv<t)v, afiCLvov, 
 
 S,pi<rTOs, T], ov 
 
 
 
 braver, better 
 
 • 
 
 
 (morally better) 
 
 PeXTiuv, Pc'XtIov 
 
 P^Xtio-tos, t|, ov 
 
 
 {stronger, better) KpeCTxeov, KpetxTov 
 
 Kpdrio-Tos, % ov 
 
 2. 
 
 KaK6s, <), 6v, bad, cow- 
 
 KaKtlDV, KIXKIOV 
 
 KdKlO-TOS, T), ov 
 
 
 ardly, etc. 
 
 X«£p<ov, xetpov 
 
 X«tptO-TOS, 1], OV 
 
 
 
 ■ilTTCOV, ■qTTOV 
 
 iJKto-To, adv., least of 
 all, by no means 
 
 3- 
 
 KaX6$, 'fj, 6v, beautiful, 
 noble, etc. 
 
 KaXXiuv, KdXXiov 
 
 KdXXio-Tos, T), ov 
 
 4- 
 
 (le'^as, |i€V(iXTi„|j. V, &;f 
 
 (JLEC^UV, lut^ov 
 
 11^710-ros, 1], ov 
 
 5- 
 
 |jitKp6s, a, <5v, small 
 
 |i,tKp6Tepos, a, ov 
 
 liiKpdraros, t|, ov 
 
 p,(Cii>v, (leiov, smaller, fewer (in pi.) 
 
 6. oXtvos, n, ov, little, few «X4TTti»v, eXarTov IX(ixio"TOS, 1, ov 
 (The comparative and superlative may be given with (iiKpiis also.) 
 
 7. iroXvs, iroXX'/j, iroXii, irXeCuv, irXetov and irXeto-TOS, ij, ov 
 
 much, many irX&v 
 
 8. pijCSios, 0, ov, easy pi^v, p^ov p^o-tos, t), ov 
 
 i§§ 156.2, 181. 
 
 beginner's GR. BK. — II 
 
 2 Be careful about the^gender. 
 
i62 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 For the declension of the comparatives in -a>v, -ov, cp. 
 V^tav, § 354. 
 
 361. The following lack the positive : 
 
 irpbrepos, a, ov, former irpwTOs, t), ov, first 
 
 vo-Tcpos, a, ov, later wtotos, i\, ov, latest 
 
 Xii. ea-xaroi, r), ov, last, extreme, is found in the superla- 
 tive only. 
 
 362. A double question, direct or indirect, may be intro- 
 duced by TTOTepov (or iroTepa) . . . rj whether . . . or. In the 
 double indirect question the same rules apply as in single 
 indirect questions (§§ 344, 345). 
 
 TTOrepov oi crTpaTiqyoi fiovXovTai TropeveaOai rj /^cXXetv ; do the generals 
 
 wish to proceed or to delay? 
 rjpiTO TTorepov ot (rTpaTTjyoi /SovXotvro TroptvecrOai ^ /ueXAetv he asked 
 
 whether the generals wished to proceed or to delay. 
 
 The original verb ^ovXovTai might have been retained in 
 the indirect question. 
 
 363. The double indirect question may also be introduced 
 
 by et . . . ■^ whether . . or : 
 
 ^ptTO ti ot a-Tpar-qyol jSovXoivTO irope.ve.aOai rj p-eXXeiv he asked whether 
 
 the generals wished to proceed or to delay. 
 
 364- VOCABULARY XXXVl 
 
 Learn the meanings of all the adjectives in §§ 360, 361 . They are 
 not repeated in the following list. 
 
 hnira, adv. . thereupon, then, next. irpoa--^pxo|jiai (cp. epxofiai) : go to, 
 irJTEpov (iriTepo) ... 4 introduc- come to, come 7ip ; may take 
 
 ing a double question, director dat. of pars, or els and ace. 
 
 indirect : whether . or, irpoPaTov. ou, t6 : cattle, sheep. 
 
IRREGULAR COMPARISON 163 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 365. k. I. ftSare apd Xeyei.v 6 tl tis vofiit,a apurrov 
 eivaL. 2. Set 8e i7|U,as fjcrj KaKious elvaL tcov wpocrdei'} 
 3. KaKlovs etcrt irepl rjfJLa? ^ rjixei's vepl iKeivov<;. 4. e/ce- 
 Xeucre rows Trepi avrbv Ile/atrds tows KpaTLarovs Kdew 
 Tcis ap-aqas. 5. ripero Se ei ot irX-etcrToi twi' iTnrecov elev 
 @/)aKes 17 ov. 6. eru^e -yap vorepo? irpoa-ep'^op.evo';. 
 7. 6 8' '0/30i/rds ypd<l>€L iina-ToXriv irapa fiacrtkia. an 
 rj^ei ixoiv i7777ed? ws TrXetorous. 8. a) dvSpe<; 'EWTji'es, 
 vop,Lt,ciivVp,a^ dpetvov^ koX KpeiTTOv; ttoXXcov ^ap^dpcov 
 etvai, OLO. TOVTO avp.ixd)(ov<; u/xas ayoj. 9. ovTot ol 
 LTTTTOL yLeLov4<s eicTt T(i)v UepcriKatv 'iinroiv. 10. paw 
 icTTi TTopevetrOai rf p^eXXeiv ; 11. Upo^evos S' ow/c 
 rjpeTo TTOTepov /SeXrlov eh} avTW iropeueaOai r} fjueXXeiv. 
 12. dXX' iDjuets, w dvSpe? cTTpaT-qyoi, tovtoi<s Xeyere o 
 Tl KdXXuTTOv re /cat dpiarov e^ere.^ 13. ^crav 8e 
 Td(f)po(,, al p,ev TrpcjTat peydXai, eWetra 8e eXarrous • 
 at 8e ecr^arat '^craf ju,i/cporarat. 14. et ^ovXolo tco^ 
 0t\os eti'at, ft»s p.4yi(TT0^ <j)bXo<; dv €17)1. 15, ^p^ rows 
 <rTpaTL(0Td9 <us eXct^tcrra irpo^ara dpTrdcrai. 
 
 II. I. There were very many* horses in the plain. 
 2. This grain was very abundant^ in the land. 3. If 
 there is any other, better way, speak out.^ 4. He com- 
 manded his generals to enlist as many and as brave men 
 as possible, 
 
 1 Cp. § 359. 1. 7. 2 consider. * § 227. 
 
 * § 357. * Sup. of iroXiis. * Omit out. 
 
1 64 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XXXVII 
 
 FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. IRREGU- 
 LAR ADVERBS. GENITIVE AFTER ADVERBS OF 
 PLACE 
 
 366. The positive degree of an adverb is commonly 
 formed from any adjective in the positive degree by 
 changing final v of the genitive plural neuter to s. The 
 accent of the adjective is retained in the adverb. Thus 
 
 Genitive Plural Neuter Adjective Corresponding Adverb 
 
 SiKaCwv (from SiKaios) SiKatws justly 
 
 l<rx.iipwv (from Icrxvpds) lo-xiipws strongly, exceedingly, 
 
 harshly 
 a<r<t>aXuv (from d(r<t>aX'/i5) dir(|)oXios safely 
 
 ijS^uv (from ij8«s) ijS^cos gladly 
 
 367. Not infrequently the neuter singular accusative 
 (adverbial accusative, § 284) of the adjective in the posi- 
 tive degree is used for the corresponding adverb. Thus 
 Tayy quickly. 
 
 368. The neuter singular accusative of the comparative 
 degree of an adjective is used for the comparative degr6e 
 of the adverb ; and the neuter plural accusative of the 
 superlative degree of an adjective is used for the super- 
 lative degree of the adverb. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 
 
 Positive Comparative Superlative 
 
 SiKaCus justly SiKaiorepov SiKaiorara 
 
 l<rx«p»s strongly, exceedingly, lo-xvpdrcpov t<rxup<STaTa 
 harshly 
 
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 
 
 i6s 
 
 Positive 
 
 Comparative 
 
 Superlative 
 
 <tioPEpAs fearfully 
 
 t^O^EpiiTCpOV 
 
 ((loPEpiiTaTa 
 
 do-(|>a\£$ safely 
 
 d(r()>a\^o-TEpov 
 
 do-i|>a\l(rTaTa 
 
 rax^us 1 swiftly, 
 or irregular rdxa J quickly 
 
 OOTTOV 
 
 rdxurra 
 
 KaKus badly 
 
 KdKiov worse 
 
 KdKio-Ta 
 
 KaX^s beautifully 
 
 KdXXiov 
 
 KdWicrra 
 
 ijS^cDs gladly 
 
 liSiov 
 
 liSio-Ta 
 
 369- 
 
 A LIST OF IRREGULAR ADVERBS 
 
 
 Positive 
 
 Comparative 
 
 Superlative 
 
 I. 
 
 avw up 
 
 dvuT^pu higher 
 
 dvuTdTiD highest 
 
 2. 
 
 477*5 near 
 
 iyyvTipov 
 
 4771PTOT0 
 
 
 
 kyyvripu 
 
 lY-ywrdTiD 
 
 3- 
 
 A well (adv. of 
 dYa66s) 
 
 a|uivov better 
 
 apio-ra best 
 
 
 
 paiTiov 
 
 P^TLCTa 
 
 
 ' 
 
 Kp€lTTOV 
 
 Kpdrio-Ta 
 
 4- 
 
 (iidXa very 
 
 )ta\\ov more 
 
 (idXio-ra most 
 
 370. Adjectives may be compared by using fiaXXov and 
 fidXcffra with the positive degree. Thus fJiaWov <f)i\oi more 
 friendly. 
 
 371. Various other adverbial endings may be best 
 learned with the words themselves, as oUaht homeward. 
 
 372. An adverb of place is followed by the genitive case : 
 
 eyyus rdv yuipvm near the stronghold. 
 Under this head comes also iripav (Vocabulary XXIII). 
 
 373. Note ffl? (or on) ^^.^(laTa (cp. § 358) as quickly as 
 possible ; w? fioKiara as much as possible. 
 
1 66 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 374- 
 
 Learn the adverbs in { 
 in this list. 
 
 VOCABULARY XXXVll 
 
 i 366-369. Except avtt>, they are not repeated 
 
 &v», adv. : up ; up from the sea, 
 inland, into the interior, Cp. 
 dvd. 
 
 a-irapdo-Kevos, ov : unprepared. Cp. 
 irapa-(rKEua^(i>. 
 
 dpET'^, f|s, t) (cp . ap-ioTTOs) : fitness, 
 excellence, bravery ; virtiie, no- 
 ble-mindedness, magnanimity. 
 
 8foi, pres. opt. of Stt : it is neces- 
 sary (Vocabulary XX) . 
 
 KoXdJu (theme K0X08-), KoXdo-ca, 
 CKoXao-a : chastise, punish. 
 
 |i.dxop.ai (cp. p.dxTi), fut. to be 
 learned later, 4|jLax£(rdp,r|v (aor. 
 with lengthened theme) : fight. 
 The enemy is expressed by the 
 dat. or irpis {against) and acc.^ 
 Cp. § 317. 
 
 civo|ia, aros, t6 : name. Syn-onym 
 
 (o-«v-) . 
 oo-os, T), ov, rel. pron. : as great as, 
 
 as much as, as many as, all that; 
 
 how great, how much, how many. 
 oo-a : as many things as, all that. 
 
 oTi, as adv., strengthens a super- 
 lative, like 0)5 (Vocabulary 
 XXXV). Thus OTi dirapa- 
 (TKeDOTaTos : as unprepared as 
 possible. 
 
 oww and oiJTus (cp. oijtos), adv. : 
 thus, in this way (usually with 
 reference to what goes before), 
 so. 
 
 ird\«|jLas, o«, 6 (cp. iroXeiiios) : war. 
 
 itaKv, adv. (cp. iroXus) : much, by 
 far. See § 367. 
 
 irpo8vp.ciis (adv. of irp60vp,os ready, 
 eager) : readily, eagerly, zeal- 
 ously. Comp. irpo6ii)i,6TEpov, 
 sup. irpo6v|i6TaTa. 
 
 TO irpdo-6£v (adv. ace.) : before, for- 
 merly. Cp. Vocabulary XX VL 
 
 a-v|i-iropc<io|iiai : proceed with, ac- 
 company. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 375. I. I. Kupos KoX 01 crvv avTw eTTopevovTO avw. 
 2. kolkIov Se enpa^av? 3. aXXo? Se eiTre^ a-Tpa.rqyov'; 
 eXecrdat ois rd'^uTTa. 4. 01 Se 'EXXTjves, aKoucravres 
 Trjv Kvpov dperyjiT, '^Slov Kal irpodvfioTepov avv- 
 evopevovTo. 5. erpe-^ov yap irokv ddtTov t&v Ittttcov^ 
 
 1 p.dxeo-6ai crvv Tivi, on the other hand, means to figAt with the aid of 
 somebody, who is an ally, not an enemy. 
 
 ■^ did = fared. '§334- * § 355- 
 
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 167 
 
 6. -qoKTra av aKov&dtijJtL ro ovoiJia tovtov roy dvSpo<; Koi 
 ocra eirpagev. 7. ets Tois iyyvraTco^ /cw/xas rjKev e^(ov 
 Tovi TTpcoTovs? 8. 8t/faiws av jjlol ■)(a,pii[,oiTo. 9. K\e- 
 ap^o<; Se eKoKaCev icr^vpa)?} lO. 01 Se ^dp^apoi 
 pAWov (fiiXoL Kvpco ■^crav rj ySacrtXei. 11. 6 Se Kuyoos 
 uoLTTOv itropeueTO, oirtus oti dnapacTKevoTaTov Xdfioi, 
 /SacrtXed. 12. outcds ■JTopevoCfieda av ws dcr<f>a\ecrTaTa, 
 KOi el fjid)(ecr9^i-^ oeoi^ ws KpdrLcrTa av fia)(oip.e0OL, 
 1 3. '^o-aj' yap eyyvs tow 7roTap.ov ovre TroXeis ouTe 
 Ka>p,ai Sia rows 7ro\e]aovs~TOU5 Trpo? rows KapSou^ou?. 
 i 1 4. e^-^Kavvov em ^tous TToXep.Lov? ttdXv ert trpoOv- 
 p-orepov ri to Trpocrdev. i^. Xeyet on KaXXicrra St- 
 eXeyovTo vc^l dpeV^s. ' 
 
 II. I. The king collected his army quickly, in order 
 that he might fight with the enemy while they were^ as 
 unprepared as possible. 2. The enemy ran more swiftly 
 than before. 3. We marched as quickly as possible that 
 we might be first on the other side of the river. 
 
 1 § 70. ^ iAe van. ' Omit while they were. 
 
i68 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XXXVIII 
 
 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 
 THE INDIRECT REFLEXIVE ol ATTRIBUTIVE 
 POSITION OF THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE OF RE- 
 FLEXIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 Review the paradigms of personal pronouns (§ 304) and of airds 
 (§ 122). For eavTov cp. also § 378. 
 
 i 
 
 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 6|iavTov, irtavrov, AND lavroii 
 
 376. The reflexive pronouns are iijade up, in the singu- 
 lar, from the stems of the personal pronouns and the form; 
 of avTO'i in the oblique (§ 123. 3) cases. 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 I Sing. G. €(ia«ToB 0/ myself l|iai)Ti)s 
 
 D . 4)jiavT^ Ifxavrn 
 
 A. cfiavTov c^avT^v 
 Plur. G. Tjiiiuv avTuv of ourselves 
 
 D. ijlitv avTois /ItttiC^-*^**'--**^ '■JH^i" awrats 
 
 A. rjjias airovs tni^Li* iJj^A^ rjlids airds 
 
 2. Sing. G. <rio.-ynav'^ of yourself .ft4^t^^^^^ iTio.-m^% 
 
 D. «a«™ \^^)^v^A/^'r(.a.m^ 
 
 A. o-€0\it6v \ o-Eavriiv 
 
 Plur. G. v(ifflv ajiruv of yourselves '~Cuiu ^^fi/C***^ 
 
 D. «|jitv airots ujitv avrais 
 
 A. vfias avTOvs v|ias avrds ^ 
 
 Masc. , Fem. Neut, 
 
 3. Sing. G. iamov"^ of himself liuA.iii.vt'iii IodtoO 
 
 D. lauT$ ^avr^ lavT$ 
 
 A. {owrdv lavT^iv lowr6 
 
 ^ Or, contracted, o-a«To€, (ravTf|s, etc. 
 ^ Or, contracted, airol, oirfls, o4to8, etc. 
 
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 169 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Plur. G. iaxTuiv^ of themselves IovtSv iavrmv 
 
 D. lavTots lavrais tovTois 
 
 A. lavTovs cavTas cavrd 
 
 Plur. also : G. <r<|>wv aiiT«v of themselves 
 
 D. <r<|>£<riv airols a-4>(crtv avrats. 
 
 A. o-cjias airois o-d>as oirds 
 
 THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUN, one another 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 3'77- Dual G. D. d.XX^\oiv aXXf Aaiv dW^Xoiv 
 
 A. dW'^Xu dXXyjXa dXXijXai 
 
 ' Plur. G. dXX'/jXwv dXX^Xiov dXX'^Xuiv 
 
 E D. dXX^Xois dXX^Xais dXXyjXots. 
 
 * A. dXX^Xovs dXX^Xas iiXXT|Xa 
 
 THE INDIRECT REFLEXIVE OF THE THIRD PERSON 
 
 378. Sing. G. [o^],[o4]2 Plur.N. c+eis 
 
 D. ol, oi, to or for himself G. a-<|>uv 
 
 or herself D. (r4>C<ri(v) 
 
 A. [g, [I] A. <r<|>os 
 
 a. This pronoun is an indirect reflexive in Attic Greek ; 
 that is, used in a subordinate clause, it refers to the subject 
 of the inain clause : 
 
 eKeXevov avTov iri/j.Treiv o-^'crt irXoia they ordered him to send boats 
 to them. 
 
 379. The genitive of the reflexive pronoun, when de- 
 noting possession, has the attributive (§ 67) position : 
 
 crw-e'A.£^£ Toiis avtov (TTpariwra^ he collected his own soldiers. 
 
 ' Or, contracted, avTuv, avruv, auTuv, etc. 
 
 ^ Enclitic forms are [oi], 01, [I]. Bracketed forms are very rare in Attic 
 prose. 
 
I70 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 a. It will be recalled that the possessive genitive of the 
 personal ^xoxiOViXi has the predicate position (§§ 127, 308). 
 
 380. In such expressions as that just described, the noun 
 is often understood (cp. § 70. b) : 
 
 01 eavTov (supply cTT/oaTiSrat) his own soldiers ; rot iavrZv their own 
 affairs or their own possessions.-- 
 
 381. VOCABULARY XXXVIII 
 
 For aXX'^Xoiv, e(i,avToB, o-eavroB and erouToO, lavrov and aiirov, and 
 
 ov see the preceding' paradigms. 
 
 alo-edvoftai (theme olo-6-, pres. otofiai (often ot|j.oi), fiit. ol^o-o- j 
 tense suffix ov%), fut. alo-B'iio-o- |i.ai (with lengthened theme) : 1 
 
 liai (with lengthened theme), think, suppose. 
 
 2 aor. ■n(r8(i|ii]v, subjv. aC(r6(i>|jiat, 2u4vv€o-is, tos (n6n-Attic gen.), 6: 
 
 as (n6n-Attic 
 's, king of Cil 
 
 etc. : perceive. An-aesthetic Syennesis, king of Cilicia. 
 
 (dv- privative). rdgis (ray + <ri + %), eus, t) : order, 
 clo--EXativ(i> (cp. e\a«v<o) : drive in, arrangement; milhciry /ine, col- 
 ride or march in, with els and umn, division. Cp. rdTTu. 
 
 ace. TOTTw (theme ray-, pres. tense suffix 
 
 eKK\i)(rCa, os, ti: assembly. [In a J'%, cp. <|>i'^aTTCD, § 182, Note), 
 
 later age, church.'] Ecclesiastic. raifa, 6Ta|a : arrange, draw up, 
 
 cm-PovX'<i, lis, T): plot (against). marshal \.xoQip^. Tactics, etc. 
 
 Cp. liri-PovXeid). X'^P'S; adv. : apart ; prep, with 
 
 (!toi.(ios, 11, ov, or '^toiixos, ov : ready, gen. . apart from. 
 
 prepared. wSe, adv. (cp. K8«) : thus, as follows. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 382. I, I. vpi^Tov^ yap Kal fieyiaTov^ ol6eS)i' opKOL^ 
 KcakoovcTiv T7ju,as TTok^ixiovi elvaL^ dWi/Xois. 2. axTTt 
 ^ao-iXeus T^f Trpos lavTov eVtjSovA.T^f ovk TjcrddveTO, 
 3. eix^ oe -q KiXttro-a (jyvXaKriv nepl avTiqv. 4. Kvpos 
 
 1 § 284. '^ oaths l/y the gods. ^ hinAer \is from being, kc. 
 
?IG, 21. — Monumentof Dexileos, anAthsnian Knight (lirireis)- 
 
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 171 
 
 oe iirel elcr-TJXaa-ev eis Trjv itoXlv, [leT-eTre/ju^aTo tov 
 '^v4vve(Tiv Trpo<; kcLVTOv. 5. KXeap^os Se (TW-rjyay£u 
 iKKKyja-iav tS)v avrov (TTpaTLoyrav. 6. fiera Se toiSm 
 crvp-ayaycoi' Tovs 6'^ iav^ov o-TpafLard? Koi t(ov akXcov^ 
 TOP ^ovXojxevov,^ ike^ev wSe. 7. avros 8e rows eauroB 
 17S77 era^tv. 8. t^ Se awrjj iqfJi-epq. KXiap^os OLTr-rjKOeu 
 CTTL TTjv eavTov <TKi)vrjv 8_ia TOV Mevwi^os (TTpaTevp,aTO<;. 
 9. OpovTOLS ofj vop.'iard'i €Toip.ov<; elvat avTw tows iTTTreds 
 ypd^ei iina-Tokrjv irapa j3aai.\ed. 10. 6 8' 'O/jovrds 
 ? 'il'pj" I TOV avhpa TTKTTov OL elvaL. 1 1 . rj^ct)^ 8' avTOS 
 CTTt TTjt' ifxavTov dp')(^rju. 12. rdre ep,a.de<; rrjv cravrov 
 Svvafxiyi. 13. wore t^ vcrTepata Kvpo^ilropeveTo 
 oXiyous £»» Tctfet ej^wv Trpo auroG. 14. MeVtui' crvv- 
 eXe^e to aurou aTpdrevfia ^w/jis rwi^ aXXcui'. 
 
 II. I. Cyrus commanded each general to draw up his 
 own men. 2. Clearchus wished his own soldiers to pro- 
 ceed first.* 3. The king!,s wife rode past in her own 
 carriage. 
 
 » For T = re (§ 31). 2 § 179. » § 212. 
 
 * Put ^rsi in pred. position. 
 
172 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XXXIX 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE OF li-VERBS. FIRST AORIST 
 PASSIVE SYSTEM. EUPHONIC LAWS OF MUTES 
 BEFORE MUTES. DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 
 IN -ek. DEPONENT PASSIVES. AGENT EXPRESSED 
 BY Wo AND GENITIVE. CONSTRUCTION AFTER 
 PASSIVE OF XeVft) say 
 
 383. The present, imperfect, perfect, pluperfect, and 
 future perfect passive tenses are the same in form as the 
 corresponding tenses of the middle voice. The perfect 
 tenses will be studied later (§§ 452 ff.). Only the aorist 
 passive and the future passive have forms distinct from 
 the middle. The sign of the iirst aorist passive and of the 
 first future passive is Or) or 6e. This sign is added to the 
 verb theme before the usual sufifixes. 
 
 THE FIRST AORIST PASSIVE 
 
 384. The aorist passive uses the active personal endings 
 throughout. In the aorist indicative, imperative, and infini- 
 tive the endings are added directly to the passive "sign 6r]} 
 In the other moods 6e is the form of the passive sign. The 
 aorist subjunctive, as usual, has the long thematic vowel 
 "A as its mood sign, before which e (of ^e) is absorbed. 
 The aorist optative has the mood sign i-q (after 6e) in the 
 singular, but regularly (in classical Greek) the short mood 
 sign t in the dual and plural. As before noted (§ 252), the 
 sign in the third person plural is le. 
 
 1 fle in 3 pi. imperative. 
 
FIRST AORIST PASSIVE 
 
 173 
 
 385- 
 
 FIRST AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEM OF \^« 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Indie. I 
 
 4-\v-6i]-v I was loosed 
 
 
 4-X«-8n-|Mv 
 
 2 
 
 l-\<i-eri's 
 
 
 4-Xi)-flri-Tov 
 
 e-Xi)-6T|-T« 
 
 3 
 
 i-\«-eTi' 
 
 
 i-\v-^i\-TV(f 
 
 4-Xi)-9t|-<rov 
 
 Subjv. I 
 
 Xv-ea [for Xu-^e-co] 
 
 
 Xv-6w-|uv 
 
 2 
 
 Xv-9tis [for Xv-Bi-yil 
 
 Xv-Bfj-TOV 
 
 Xu-B{)-TC 
 
 3 
 
 X«-6^ [for \v-Bk-rj\ 
 
 Xv-6{j-T0V 
 
 Xv-6&-(rt(v) 
 
 Opt. I 
 
 \«-66Ct]-V 
 
 
 
 X\l-6Et-)UV 
 
 2 
 
 Xw-eeCn-s 
 
 
 Xii-Bei-Tov 
 
 X«-flet-T6 
 
 3 
 
 Xv-eeCT) 
 
 __^,^_ 
 
 Xv-6tC-Ti)v 
 
 Xv-BetE-v 
 
 
 Less 
 
 I. 
 
 
 Xv-6ECr|-|i,Ev 
 
 
 
 common 
 
 2. 
 
 Xv-BcCtj-tov 
 
 Xv-BcCtj-tc 
 
 
 
 
 .3- 
 
 Xu-Bei^-Tifv 
 
 Xii-BeCT|-(rav 
 
 Imv. 2 
 
 X«-9ri-Ti» 
 
 
 Xv-flT)-TOV 
 
 Xv-6t)-te 
 
 3 
 
 \v-6'^-T(l> 
 
 
 Xd-BVj-tojv 
 
 Xll-64-VT<l)V 
 
 Inf 
 
 \u-e<i-voi^ " 
 
 
 
 
 Partic 
 
 Xv-Sels, €to-a, 
 
 ^v 
 
 
 
 
 386. The first aorist passive formation i-Xv-Orjv is typical 
 of all vowel themes. But mute themes suffer euphonic 
 changes before the passive suffix Or) (de).^ 
 
 MUTES BEFORE MUTES 
 
 387. I . A labial mute (tt /8 ^) or a palatal mute (k 7 x) 
 before a lingual mute (t S 6) must be of the same order 
 (§ 28); i.e. smooth before smooth, middle before middle, 
 and rough before rough. The class of the mute remains 
 unchanged : 
 
 ir + fl = <|)9 K + fl = x6 ir + T = irr 
 
 P+9=<|>e 7 + 6 = X9 7 + T = KT 
 
 1 For Xii-9r|-6i : -6i, the imv. suffix, is changed to t (jmootK) to avoid repe- 
 tition of the rough mute 8 at the beginning of successive syllables. 
 
 2 All infinitives in -voi are accented on the penult. 
 
174 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 e-Tre/JLir-Briv ( i aor. pass, of 7re/i7r&)) becomes eTre/itftOrjv. 
 
 i-Xenr-dr)v (XeiTrw) becomes eXeicf)6r]P. 
 
 i-Xrj^-drjv {Xafi/Bdvo}, themes Xa^- and Xrj^-) becomes 
 
 i-j>v-XaK-6r]v (^^vXaTTco, theme <pvXaK-) becomes i<f>v- 
 Xd')(6r}v. 
 
 i-Xey-dr]v (Xeyco say) becomes iXe)(^6r]v. •*• 
 
 i-Trpdy-driv (TrparTco, theme Trpdy-') becomes e'irpa')(d7]v. 
 i-raj-6rjv (^rdrTco, theme ray-) becomes ird^x^ffriv. 
 
 2. A lingual mute (t 8 6) before another Ungual mute is 
 changed to sigma. 
 
 i-Treid-O-qv (i aor-. -pass, of ireCOo)) becomes e-jreia-O'qv. 
 rfpTrah-Orjv {dp-rrd^m, theme dpirah-) becomes rjpirdaSrjv. 
 
 DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES IN -tis, -eto-o, -iv 
 
 XvOcCs (Stem XuBsvt-) having been loosed, i Aor. Pass. Partic. 
 
 OF Xi)(D 
 
 388 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Masc. 
 XvScCs 
 
 XvO^VTOS 
 XvB^VTl 
 
 \v84vTa 
 
 Xt)8^VT€ 
 
 Xv6^VT0lV 
 
 Xv9^VT€S 
 
 Xd9^vto>v 
 Xii86iiri,(v) 
 
 Xv9^VTOS 
 
 Fem. 
 XvSsto-a 
 Xti6e((rT|s 
 XuOeCo-iQ 
 XvOeio-av 
 Xv6€(a-a 
 XvOeCfraiv 
 XvOeto-ai 
 XuSeKrcov 
 XvOeCo-ats 
 XuSeCo-cIs 
 
 Neut. 
 XuB^v 
 XvOevTOs 
 \ XvOevTi 
 XvB^v 
 XvBevTt 
 
 XvG^VTOlV 
 
 XuOevTa. 
 
 XvG^VTCllV 
 
 X«9etcrt(v) 
 XvO^vTa 
 
 a. In the nominative singular masculine and dative plu- 
 ral masculine and neuter, e preceding vr is lengthened to 
 ei in compensation for the loss of vr before o- (cp. § 200). 
 
 389. Certain deponent verbs (§ 316) lack the aorist 
 middle, and have, instead, the aorist passive in the depo- 
 
FIRST AORIST PASSIVE 175 
 
 nent use. For this reason they are commonly called 
 deponent passive verbs. Thus ^ov\o/iai, aor. i/SovXijOrjv 
 I wished ; Sta-\eyoiMai, aor. hi-eKej(6riv I conversed ; olo- 
 jiiat, aor. qnjOrjv I thought ; Tropevo/iai, aor. eTropevOtjv I 
 proceeded. 
 
 Take care never to write the aorist of iropewfiai, as-wk. 
 jMaii^MpR The future is iropevaoiiai, (middle). 
 
 390. The agent, with a passive verb, is expressed by 
 uTTo by with the genitive. 
 
 391. The passive of Xe-yw say is followed by the infini- 
 tive in indirect discourse (cp. § no). This passive has 
 both a personal and an impersonal use : 
 
 ekiyero iXOciv he was said to have come (personal use) ; 
 iKiycTo avrbv iXBeiv it was said that he came (impersonal use) ; 
 eA.e'y£To 8e Kai SvsVvecris ttvat, im Tolv axpoiv and Syennesis, too, was 
 said to be on the heights. 
 
 392. VOCABULARY XXXIX 
 
 av-d7(i> (dvA + a-i<a) : lead up ; irAvu, adv. (cp. iros) : wholly, alto^ 
 lead " up " from the coast. gether, very. 
 
 av-o8os, ov, t) (dvd + 686s) : roacC irsCew, in mid. and pass. : obey 
 up, way up. (be persuaded or convinced by 
 
 t6 'E\Xr)viK6v (cp. 'E\\t]vik6s, Vo- somebody), with dat. Cp. Vo- 
 
 cabulary XXVII) : the Greek cabulary I. 
 
 force (neut. subst.) . mivOdvoiiai (theme ini9-, pres. tense 
 
 Kara-ir^liiriii (cp. irtiiiro)) : send suffix av%, cp. \<uf.^i.va, 1117- 
 
 down, especially to tlie sea. X'^voi, § 218), fut. ■atva-of.a.i (for 
 
 AiiSCo, as, T|; Lydia, a district of wtvO-, a longer form of the 
 
 Western Asia Minor, of which theme, + <roiiai),2aor.s'in)96(it|v: 
 
 Sardis was the chief city. inquire, ask ; learn, perceive. 
 
 v6|ios, ov, 6 : custom, law. Deutero- - ryf.\, iis, t| : honor. 
 
 nomy (Seirepos J^iTOT^^). Toi-7ap-o«v: therefore (a strong 
 
 oKTii, indtd.: eight. Cp. Lai. octo. particle of inference) . 
 
 Situs, rel . adv. : how, in what way iirtipinis, o«, 6 : servant, helper, 
 (cp. Vocabulary XXII). supporter. 
 
176 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 inro (also w before smooth breath- verbs of rest) ; with ACC. under 
 ing, and 4(|>' before rough breath- (with verbs of motion). Hypo- 
 ing) § 3i)> prep.: with gen. dermic (S^piia .f^zVz), etc. 
 from under, by (with pass. x<?^vo%,ov,d: time. Chrono-meter 
 Tcrb), .y-nifrr rf, f" — : with ((i^rpov measure), chrono-logy 
 DAT. under, beneath (with (Xd^os account) . 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 393. Give the meaning of the following passive forms : 
 Xel-ireTai, iXeiirovTO, rdrTOVTai, XvOrjvai, Xeyerai, Xeyonevoi, 
 TjyeTO, dpTrd^eTai, Tre fJ-irofJLevo';, KoXd^ovTai, dpxeo'dai. 
 
 394. I. I. o) avSpe?, idu [JiOL ireLa-drjTe, iv [leyaXri 
 ,TljJi.rj ecreade. 2. ets rrjv 'KpTaTvaTov crKTjvrjv eicr-r;)^^!). 
 
 3. Kvpos 8' ovTTOTe e^-rj^Qr]^ hi(i}K€iv? 4. irdw oXiyoi 
 ^(j)' avTou KaT-eXeCcfydrjcrav. 5. KaT-erri^^dr) viro tov 
 ^ j^urpos craT^TTT]'?^ AuStd?. 6. roiyapovu KpaTicrTot 
 ^V ^TTrjoeTai Kspco iJ^X^^^SF J^viadai.x-' 7. oyT(i<[? ovV' 
 rjdpoicrar] K'dpw 'to 'EXX.'/ji'tfcdi'. 8. Taura iu rfj avoom 
 irrpAxQf]- 9; ixeXevcre 8e tous 'EXXTyi'Cgg,\^a)St"i^/i05j 
 auTOis ^v eis^ fidxTjv, ovtco ra^^^^vai. lO. ivrevdev 
 8' iiropevOiqcrav <TTadixov<; hvo, Trapacydyya<i oktw. 
 II. 6 8e Hevtd? iirvvOdvero otto)? av KaWtora 
 TTopevdetr}. 12. 77/365^ raOra oi fidp^apoi ttoXvv 
 Xpovov^ hia-\e-)(9ivTe<i dX\7]XoL<i dir-yjXdov. 1 3. ot 
 oe (TTpaTTjyol ovtco Xr](j)6evTe'; dv-yj^dyjcrav a)S jSacriXe'd. 
 14. TTopeu^ets Se ra iru/xx ov/c ei^ij* iSeiv. 
 
 1 From 4^-dY(i> in sense of induce. ^ most successfully. 
 
 ° Complementary infinitive. " with reference to. 
 
 ' as satrap, in apposition to the subject, § 53. j, ' § 142. 
 
 ■* for. 8 § 156. I. a. 
 
FIRST FUTURE PASSIVE 
 
 177 
 
 II. I. Cyrus ordered the soldiers to be marshaled for^ 
 battle. 2. The general inquired in what way he should 
 travel,^ in order to reach home safely.^ 3. The very* 
 timbers had been plundered^ from^ the houses by the 
 king's army. 
 
 XL 
 
 THE FIRST FUTURE PASSIVE SYSTEM. PRESENT 
 GENERAL CONDITIONS. CONDITIONAL RELATIVE 
 PROTASIS IN PRESENT TIME. GENITIVE ABSO- 
 LUTE. GENITIVE OF VALUE. DATIVE OF CAUSE 
 
 395. The first future passive indicative is formed from 
 the verb theme as it appears in the first aorist passive, plus 
 the first passive suffix Orj (§ 383), plus the future tense sign 
 a-%, plus the passive personal endings, which are the same 
 as the middle. The optative has its usual mood sign. 
 
 Observe that the first future passive is exactly like the 
 future middle with the insertion of 6-q before the future 
 tense sign. 
 
 396- 
 
 FIRST FUTURE PASSIVE SYSTEM OF \va 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Indie. I 
 
 Xv-6yj-<ro-|i,ai /shall be loosed 
 
 
 Xu-0T]-<r6-|i€6tt 
 
 2 
 
 Xv-O'/j-o-g or -a-fi 
 
 
 
 Xv-O'Ji-o-e-o-Sov 
 
 Xv-fl^-o-e-o-Bt 
 
 3 
 
 XD-flTJ;(r«-Tai 
 
 
 
 Xv-6<j-o-6-o-6ov 
 
 Xu-6^-<ro-vToi 
 
 Opt. I 
 
 \TJ-0T]-(ro£-(JL'!]V 
 
 
 
 
 Xv-Si)-o-oC-|jie6a 
 
 2 
 
 Xv-Bij-o-oi-o 
 
 
 
 Xv-S^-o-oi-o-Sov 
 
 Xu-O^j-o-oi-o-Se 
 
 3 
 
 \l)-6<)-O-0l-TO 
 
 
 
 Xv-6i]-o-oC-(r6r]v 
 
 X\J-6^-0-0l-VTO 
 
 Inf 
 
 Xv-6'^-ir(-(r6ai, 
 
 
 
 
 
 Partlc 
 
 Xv-6T|-cr<i-|UvoS) i\, 
 
 ov 
 
 
 
 
 lets. 
 
 Tp. 
 
 I. 
 
 II. 
 
 ' Say be saved homeward. 
 
 4 Say 
 
 ihe timbers themselves 
 
 ,§ 
 
 123. I. 
 
 5 Use aor. 
 
 pass. ° oird. 
 
17^ BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 397. Like XvOrjo-oixai, are inflected : ■7re//,cp0i^aoiJ,ai 
 {iref/LTrai), TreiaOi]cro/iai (TrelOai), Xei<^6r)<joiJiai {Xeiira)), w)(6r\- 
 aofiai {arfOi), apiraaOriaofiai, {apird^oa) ; Xri^0i](7Ofjiac (Xafi- 
 ^dv(o) ; 'Kpd'^Or\<joyi,ai {irpaTros) ; a<oQriaop,ai (trw^o)). 
 
 For the euphonic changes in the mutes before the 
 passive suffix 6r\ compare the first aorist passive and 
 §387- 
 
 GENERAL CONDITIONS 
 
 398. The conditions studied thus far have been par- 
 ticular ; that is, they have referred to definite and usually 
 single acts. But when the if clause (protasis) refers to 
 a repeated act, or to any one of a number of acts, the 
 condition is called general. 
 
 Thus if he says this, he speaks the truth is a particular 
 condition in present time, for in the protasis a single 
 present act is indicated : el Tavra \eyei, aX^dfj Xeryei (cp. 
 § 106). But tf ever he says anything (or whenever he 
 says anything), he speaks the truth is a general condition 
 in present time, for the protasis and apodosis indicate a 
 repeated act or any one of a number of acts. 
 
 While the Greek makes no distinction between particu- 
 lar and general conditions in future time, so far as form 
 is concerned, it does make a most important distinction 
 between such conditions in present time and in past time. 
 
 399. Present general conditions. — kav (or 7)v or mi) intro- 
 duces the subjunctive in the protasis of a present general 
 condition ; the apodosis has the present indicative or its 
 equivalent to express continued or repeated action in pres- 
 ent .time. This form of condition differs from the more 
 vivid future (§ 241) in the apodosis ojily. 
 
 lay Ti Xe'yi;, aKrfir\ X.iyei if ever he says anything, he speaks the truth- 
 
PRESENT GENERAL CONDITIONS 179 
 
 400. The conditional relative protasis in present time. — 
 In place of idv (or ijv or av) with the sil^junctive the prota- 
 sis of a present general condition is often introduced by a 
 relative or temporal word plus dv, exactly like the protasis 
 of a more vivid future condition (§ 248) : 
 
 orav Ti keyrj, dXijO^ Xc'yet whenever he says anything, he speaks the 
 
 truth ; 
 a Tiva av X.eyr), dXrjd^ A.eya whatever he says, he speaks the truth. 
 
 401. Genitive absolute. — A circumstantial participle 
 (generally present or aorist) and its subject may stand 
 together in the genitive case in a construction grammati- 
 cally independent of the rest of the sentence. This 
 construction corresponds to the Latin ablative absolute. 
 
 ii-T^\avvov rSiv iroXt/j.iwv ov KoiXvovrtov they marched forth without 
 hindrance from the enemy (lit. the enemy not hindering). 
 
 a. The genitive absolute may express any of the rela- 
 tions (time, cause, etc.) of the circumstantial participle. 
 
 b. ft)? sometimes accompanies the participle in the geni- 
 tive absolute. For its force compare § 213. «. 
 
 KCpos (TW-eXeie (TTpaTtviui, o)s CTrt-jSouXevovTos Twrwai^epvous rais tto- 
 Xco-ti/ Cyrus collected an army on the ground that Tissaphernes 
 was plotting against his cities {cause) . 
 
 402. The genitive is used to denote value or price. This 
 construction is regular with a|to9 : 
 
 ^lAos iroWov 5|ios a friend worth much {i.e. valuable). 
 
 403. The instrumental dative may denote cause : 
 
 ivayKy Xafi^dvofiev to. tTrtriySeta from necessity (on account of neces- 
 sity) we take provisions. 
 
i8o BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 404. 
 
 VOCABULARY XL 
 
 aKwv, ouo-o, ov : unwilling. De- oirg, rel. adv. : where, luherever ; 
 
 dined like \vav (cp. § 206. a). how, in what way. Cp. irx)! 
 
 Used like, a partic. in the gen. Vocabulary XVII. 
 
 abs. const. o-TparoireSevo) (o-TpariireSov) and 
 
 KtvSwos, o«, 6 : danger. k(v8w6s mid. dep. (rTpaToir686tio(i,oi, aor. 
 
 l(rTi,(v) : there is danger. Cp. l<rTpoToir«8£u<rd(i.r]v : encamp. 
 
 Kiv8iivev». <|)i.\£a, as, r| (<|>(\o5) : friendship. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 405. I. I. ovTo? (rvX-\ri<j)dy](r€Tai, el TTaCcrei^ Tov (TTpa- 
 TicoT'qv. 2. Kol evofJiicrav crv\-X'r)(f>0rjaecr0aL. 3. ov 
 yap ecTTLv'^ 6(ttl<;^ dvOpcovMi' aoidrjaeTai. 4. Trap-rjp 
 Be 6 (TaTpdiTy)<; ySouXd/xei'os jxadelv rC irpa^Orja-eTai. 
 5. ayaOol Se avhpe^ elaXv ol Tj-pd.TTOVTe's* on ay et" rai? 
 jita^at? yiyvrjTai. 6. 6 8' avr^p ttoWov jxev afios 
 ^tXos icrrlv a av (j)[\o? fj, ^aXeTTwraros S' i)(dpos & 
 av 7roX.ejLitos rj. 7. otroi 8' av ek66vTe<5 ayopav p,r) 
 e)(co[jiev, avdyKYj Xafi^di'oiAev rd eTTLTyjSet,a. ,8. ov 
 KoXacrOijcreTab yvb Kvpov Sta ^iXidv. 9. tovto to irer 
 hloP KaWicTTOv Tpe)(ecv,^ ottov dv ris /SovXyjTai. lO. vvu 
 vpXv e^-ecTTVV iropevecrdai OTrrj dv ekiqcrde. 1 1, ovk dv 
 ^ovXolp/qv drr-eXOelv Kvpov dKOVTO<s. 12. cis ntcri8^S 
 JLvpos i/3ovXeTO arpaTeveaOai, ws Trpdyfjuara ^ irap- 
 e)(6vT(ov t5>v IltcrtSftii' t-q eavTOv )(copa. 13. arpa- 
 TOTTeSevoixeuciJV 8' avrSiv yuyveraL Trj<; vvkto'S )(lo)v 
 ttoXXtj. 14. KivSwos ovv e(ftw, rjp TTopevijcrOe etti' 
 rd entrrjSeia. 
 
 ^ § 242. 2 § 102. ^ there is not who = nobody. 
 
 ^ § 212. "for running, § 333. 
 
 * irp^'YIiara irhp-^xw : cause trouble. ' after. 
 
SECOND AORIST PASSIVE i8i 
 
 II. I. They thought they should be abandoned by the 
 other soldiers. 2. They will be led up to the king. 3. If 
 eM^the barbarians do not provide a market, we take pro- 
 visions ourselves, from necessity. 4. Wherever the Qreeks 
 go, they plunder the land. 
 
 XLI 
 
 THE SECOND AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEM. dAtIVE 
 OF DEGREE OF DIFFERENCE 
 
 406. Some verbs have aorists and futures in the passive 
 voice formed without the letter 6 of the first passive suffix 
 (§ 383)- Otherwise they are like the first aorist and the 
 first future passive, and do not usually differ in meaning. 
 Mute themes naturally suffer no euphonic change before 
 the suffix, which is 77 (or e). Xvm has no second aorist or 
 second future passive. 
 
 THE SECOND AORIST PASSIVE 
 
 407. The second aorist passive adds the second passive 
 sign t] to the theme in the indicative, imperative,^ and in- 
 finitive; and the second passive sign e to the theme in 
 other moods. The inflection is like the first aorist. 
 
 408. SECOND AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEM OF PUttw (THEME 
 
 p\oP-) hurt 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 Indie. I. ir^\6.^i\-v I was hurt 4-p\dp-T|-|iev 
 
 2. i-pXdp-ti-s 4-P\4P-Tl-TOV 4-pXdp-t|-T6 
 
 3. l-p\dp-i) l-pXttP-ij-Tiiv 4-pXdp-Ti-o-av 
 
 1 Except the 3 pi. imv., which has «. 
 
I82 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK. 
 
 Subjv. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Sing. 
 
 P\ttP-M [fOl 
 
 p\ap-fis 
 pXoP-ii 
 
 - |8\a;8-£-<o] 
 
 etc. 
 
 DUAL 
 PXftP-fi-TOV 
 
 pXaP-rj-TOv 
 
 Plur. 
 pXaP-u-|uv 
 
 pxop-<iTi:£ 
 
 PXoP-io-(ri(v) 
 
 Opt. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 - 3- 
 
 pXaP-eCT|-v 
 p\aP-e£i]-s 
 pXaP-((i) 
 
 
 pXop-e^TOv 
 pXaP-€C-'Ti]v 
 
 PXaP-Ei-|iev 
 
 PXaP-Et-T£ 
 
 pXoP-ew-v 
 
 \ 
 
 
 Less 
 common 
 
 Is- 
 
 pXaP-ettj^ov 
 pXaP-Ei'/j-niv 
 
 pXaP-c(T]-|i,ev 
 
 pXaP-6(T]-T6 
 
 pXaP-eCT)-o-av 
 
 Imv. 2. 
 3- 
 
 pxdp-11-ei 
 
 PXoP-^-T<l) 
 
 
 pXip-tj-Tov 
 pXaP-'^-Tuv 
 
 pXdp-T|-Te 
 pXaP-^VTuv 
 
 Inf. 
 
 pXaP-{|-vai 
 
 
 
 
 Partic. 
 
 pXoP-eCs, «t<ro, ^v^ 
 
 
 
 409. Similarly are inflected : 
 
 a-vv-e-\ey-7)-v (o-uX-Xeyo) collect) 
 i-Tpdir-rj-v^ (rpeTra) turn) 
 i-rpdcji-rj-v {rpe^oa nourish) 
 
 i-KOTT-rj-V (^KQTTtQ) CUt^) 
 
 i-ypdcjj-ij-v {pfpd^w write) 
 e-(TTpd<f)-i]-v^ (o-T/oei^o) tt^Ti) 
 
 r 
 
 410. The instrumental dative (§ 141) is used to de- 
 note the degree of diiference (corresponding to the Latin 
 ablative) : 
 
 xei/re 17/j.epais Trporepov earlier by five days, five days before ; 
 TToXXw va-repov much later (///. later by much). 
 
 a. But iroXv (adv. ace, § 284) is more common than the dative 
 iroXXu in this sense. 
 
 1 For the declension cp. Xv6e(s, § 388. 
 
 2 Used commonly in intr. or mid. sense : turned. 
 
 ^ KiiTTw cut is formed by adding t% to the theme KOir- in the pres. 
 system. The t does not appear outside of the pres. system. The fut. is 
 k6i|/(i), aor. SKOi|fa, 2 aor. pass. ^Kdirtiv. 
 
SECOND AORIST PASSIVE 183 
 
 411. VOCABULARY XLI 
 
 dva-o-Tp^<|>u : turn back, turn about Via, adv. : without, outside, some- 
 
 (intr.) ; pass, in mid. sense, times with gen. ol V^o : those 
 
 turn about, face about, roily. without. 
 
 diro-KdiTTu : cut off. See § 409. £()>-oSos, ou, t| (lir£ + iSds) : way 
 
 pXdirrcii (tlieme p\aP-),i fut. to, approach. 
 
 V pXd\|fu, aor. Sp\ai|(a, I aor. KHra-Kdwra: cut down. See §409. 
 
 pass. 4pXi<|>9Tiv, 2 aor. pass. KCVig, ikos, 6: Cilician, a native 
 
 ipxdprjv : hurt, harm. of Cilicia. 
 
 i\,a,-K6'arut: cut through,cut in pieces, orTp^if' (themes <rTp£<|>-, o-rpcuj)-), 
 
 break through. See § 409. <rTp{i|nii, Scrrpii|ia, 2 aor. pass. 
 
 4K-ir\^TT«ii (irX<jTT<i> j^r/.%i?, theme (intr.) 4irTpd<|)i]v : turn; wheel 
 
 ir\Ti7- or irXo-y-, ir^^w, SirXi^^a, about. Cp. rp^iru. 
 
 2 a«r. pass. IttX^jytiv), with 2 aor. rp^ttiu (themes Tpe<i>-, Tpa<|>-, for 
 
 pass. 4J-cirXd7T)v : strike out of 6pE<i>~) etc.), fut. Op^ijni), aor. 
 
 one's wits, terrify utterly, be- c8pEi|(a, 2 aor. pass. lTpd<j>T|v: 
 
 wilder. feed, support, rear. 
 
 evSov, adv. : within, oi ?v8ov : ^ircp, rel. adv. . just as, as, as if, 
 
 those within. like. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 412. I. I. 01 8e (TTpa.TiSyTa.1 cruX-Xeyo/Tes i/3ov\evovTO. 
 2. ol Se TroXejLiiot eTpdirrjo-av ets ^vyrjv. 3. ovk av 
 crcodelfiev, ei Sia-KOTreiij -^fjiav 17 ^d\ay^. 4. e/SXa/Sijre 
 VTTO Tcjv AaKeSaLfJLovuov. 5. Koi ol 'EXXt^i/cs crrpac^ores 
 nap-eaKevd^ovTo ois Se^ofjuevoi fiacrtXed. 6. oi iroWa 
 Se v(TTepov ol r ivSov (Tvv-eXafi^dvovTO koi ol efiw Kar- 
 eKOTrrjaav. 7- ^""^p ya/a t^s Kcofi7)s Xo<^os ^v, e^' o5 
 dveaTpd^crav ol d/jLcfn, ^acriXed. 8. i^-etrkdyq hk 
 /SaortXeus T^ itfjoScp^ tov orpaTevfiaTo^. 9. kcu Xeyci 
 ais aTT-eKOTTTicrav diro ToO \6(f>ov. 10. ^v TaiJrais rais 
 TToXecrii' vjuei? iyiv^ade koX iTpd<f>rjTe. II. dXX' €T/od- 
 
 1 Cp. KbiTTO) (theme Koir-) for the formation of the pres. stem. * § 403. 
 
i84 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 (fyrjaav rots TrpoySarois^ a efc ToJv irokefiuav iXa/Sov. 
 
 12. iirel 8e ovtov €(j)vyov, iTpd'n'qcrav hr) koX ol aWoi. 
 
 13. £(f>acrav tovs crTpaTLCi)Td<s apTrdt^ovrd'i tj. Kara- 
 Koirrjvat vtto twv KlXCkcov. 14. ecrrt 8' ocrns^ /car- 
 e\T](j)di) iv TYj jj'oixij ^crnep vtto tmv tTnreav eK-TrXayeis. 
 
 II. I. The Greeks rallied, and received ^ (the attack of)* 
 the enemy. 2. We admire the cities in which the Greeks 
 were born and reared. 3. The Cilician woman came to 
 these cities five days before ^ Cyrus.® 
 
 XLII 
 
 THE SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE SYSTEM. PAST GEN- 
 ERAL CONDITIONS. CONDITIONAL RELATIVE 
 PROTASIS IN PAST TIME. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE 
 IN PROTASIS OF PAST GENERAL RELATIVE CON- 
 DITION 
 
 413. Verbs that have a second aorist passive, like e/SXti- 
 0r}v, eKOTTrjv, crvv-eKeyrjv, and iypd(f>r]v, usually form a second 
 future passive by adding the future suffix o-% and the (pri- 
 mary) personal endings of the middle voice to the second 
 passive stem, which consists of the theme plus t}. The 
 inflection is like that of the first future passive, and the 
 meanings are identical. 
 
 ^ Dat. of means, § 141. 
 
 ° ikere is who = somebody, 
 
 ' The aor. of S^x°l'^<^i' 's 4SE|d|iY]v. 
 
 * Omit. 
 
 5 Use the feminine irpOT^pS in agreement with the subject. 
 
 ' § 355- 
 
SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE 
 
 i8S 
 
 414. 
 
 Indic. I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Opt. I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Partic, 
 
 SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE SYSTEM OF p\dirT« 
 (THEME p\ap-) hurt 
 
 Sing. 
 pXaP-^-(ro-|jiai I shall be hurt 
 
 Dual 
 
 pXaP-'^-o-fi or -crti 
 pXaP-<j-ire-Tai 
 
 p\aP-r)-(roC-|i.T|v 
 p\aP-^-o-oi-o 
 
 PXoP-'^-O'Ol-TO 
 
 p\aP-^-cr(-a-9ai 
 pXaP-ir|-(riS-|jiEvos, 1), ov 
 
 PXaP-^-o-E-o-flov 
 pXaP-'^-o-E-o-Sov 
 
 PXaP-<)-o-oi-<r6ov 
 pXaP-i]-<roC-(r6i)v 
 
 Plur. 
 pXaP-Ti-a'6-|u6a 
 pXaP-^-o-c-o-ec 
 PXaP-^-<ro-vTOi 
 
 pXaP-i]-o-ot-|icSa 
 
 pXoP-'<j-<roi-<r96 
 
 pXop-yj-(roi-VTO 
 
 415. Similarly are inflected : 
 
 7/oa^-7?-o-o-ytiat, 2 fut. pass, of ypd^o) write. 
 <TvK-'\£'y-r)-ao-fiai, 2 fut. pass, of cyvK-Xe^w collect. 
 
 416. Past general conditions. — d introduces the optative 
 in the protasis of a past general condition ; the apodosis 
 has the imperfect indicative (or an equivalent) to express 
 repeated action in past time. 
 
 This form of condition differs from the less vivid future 
 (§ 267) in the apodosis only : 
 
 £1 Tt A.eyot, akrjBr) iKtycv if he [ever] said anything, he [always] 
 spoke the truth. 
 
 417. The conditional relative protasis in past time. — In 
 
 place of el with the optative, the protasis of a past gen- 
 eral condition is often introduced by a relative pronoun or 
 adverb (cp. § 400) : 
 
 oTTore TL \iyoi, aXrfiyj lAeyer whenever he said anything, he spoke the 
 
 truth ; 
 a Tiva Xeyoi, dXijOrj eXtyev whatever he said [at any time], he spoke 
 
 the truth. 
 
1 86 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 418. Not uncommonly the imperfect indicative intro- 
 duced by a relative is used for the optative in the prota- 
 sis of a past general condition. The following sentence 
 shows both uses combined : 
 
 iiTOpixiofijSa 8ta ravTtyi t^s ;(o)pds ottoi i^ovko/jieOa (where PavXoifuOa 
 might also be used), rjv /tev ^wpav idiXoL/jiev Si-apTrd^ovT£?, rjv 
 8' ideXoifi.€i/ KaovTcs we proceeded through this country whither- 
 soever we would, sacking whatever land we wished, and burn- 
 ing whatever we wished. 
 
 a. The negative of the protasis, as always, is /ti?. 
 
 419. VOCABULARY XLII 
 
 aeC, adv. ; always, continually, in 6t)p£ov, ov, to : wild beast. 
 
 succession. KaT-dYu (cp. a-yw), lead down; 
 
 tti7o-XeCiru (cp. \eCira>) : leave be- bring a ship (especially a cap- 
 
 hind, desert, abandon. tured one) into harbor ; restore 
 
 ■^v^va.tja (theme 7u|iva8-), 7«|ivAo-<o, exiles. 
 
 etc. (like apirAJw) : exercise. oircio-os, 1), ov, indef. rel. pron. and 
 
 Cp. 7D|jiv^s. Gymnastic. indir. interr. : as many as; how 
 
 Seivis, i\, 6v: fearful, terrible, great, (pi.) how many. Cp. 
 
 frightful; skillful, to Seiv6v oo-os. 
 
 (subst.) : danger. oiriTt, rel. adv. ; when, whenever, 
 
 ifiro|iai, (for o-^iro|iai),2i|/o|iai, 2 aor. as often as; since. Cp. OTt. 
 
 «o-ir6|j.T]v, impf. with irreg. aug. irap-epxopiai (cp. cpxo)iai), 2 aor. 
 
 ctirtfpLTiv (cp. etx"") ■ follow, with irop-flXSov : go by, go past. 
 
 dat. of association (§ 317). Cp. iroXXdKis, adv. (iroXvs) : <!/?««. 
 
 Lat. sequor. orirevSu (theme crir««8-), o'ir«ii<r«, 
 
 8T|pcilci>, 6i^pcvo-ii>, etc. : hunt; catch co-ireva-a: urge on, hasten. 
 
 (by hunting). Cp. flripCov. tiKvav,tn,'ei>: child. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 420. I. I. 01 8e (TTpaTLCJTai Trctires (rvX-X^ytjcrovTai, 
 2. iv TavT-jg tt} eirtoroX^ ypacfyija-eraL raSe. 3. 6 St 
 a-Tparrjyo's tco a/j^oi'Ti Trjs fctu^iy? rauTTjs ike^eu on 
 
SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE 187 
 
 oil ^\a^rj(TOiTO. 4. koX ei Seoi yecjjvpav hia-fiaiveiv, 
 icTTTSvSev eKaoTOSj /SouXd/otej'os hia-fiaiveiv tt/owtos. 
 5. Ku/3os 8e idtjpcve drfpCa d^' Ittttov^ OTrore yvfivd- 
 crat ^oviKoiTO iavTov re Kal tov<s Imrov;. 6. Kupos 
 -yap evefiirev oTvov Trpos tous (jtiXovs voWaKt.?, onore 
 irdw -qBiiv XctySSt. 7. (rra^/itous Se Trat-u fiaKpoix; 
 ■fjXavpev, 6tt6t€ rj irpos uScop /3ovXotTo iXdelv rj tt/jos 
 ^iXov. 8. iXdfji^ave Se o ri jSovXolto. 9. ottow Se 
 Tti'tt T<3i' (jyCXwv tSoi, 17/305 eauroi' dei avToi' iXdpL^avev. 
 10. eiret oe Trap-eXOouev ot "EXXT^i/es, ot l3dp/3apoi elirovTo 
 avTots. 1 1. Toiyapovv iroXXol yjOeXov KipSvveveLv, onov 
 Ti? ototTo Ku/ooi' alcrdTJcrecrdaL, 12. to, iiTLTijSeLa iXdp.- 
 ^avov, OTTOV Tts aurois i'm-rvy)(dvoL. 13. onoaa 
 Xap.^dvoi TrXola, KaT-rjyeu eVt to (rTpaToireBov. 
 14. aTT-eXeiTrov roi' crTpaTrjyov irdvTe^ ocroi crvv- 
 €TTopevovTo, ore* e^o)^ to9 Seii'ou yivoivTO. 
 
 II. I. He will be hurt, if he goes* into this danger. 
 
 2. Whenever they had to cross a river, all hastened. 
 
 3. Cyrus used to hunt wild animals on horseback when- 
 ever he went to the mountains. 
 
 ^ from horseback = on horseback, the attention being directed away from 
 the horse while a rtian is hunting. 
 
 2 whenever. ° <?«^ (»^ 
 
 ^ Use the proper form of iropcOoiiai. 
 
BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XLIII 
 
 NUMERALS. DECLENSION OF NUMERALS. ARTICLE 
 WITH "ROUND" NUMBERS. EMPHATIC NEGATIONS 
 
 421. Commit to memory the numerals from i to 21 
 (inclusive); the others are to be memorized as they are 
 needed. Some, as exaTov and )(_fXioi, have already occurred 
 in the special vocabularies. 
 
 I 
 
 eIs, (tCa, ^v 
 
 19 
 
 EvvEaKalSsKa 
 
 2 
 
 Svo 
 
 20 
 
 eCkoo-i (v) 
 
 3 
 
 Tpcts, Tpta 
 
 21 
 
 eIs Kal £lKO<ri(v) or 
 
 4 
 
 T^TTOpeS, T^TTOpO 
 
 
 E<KO(ri (Kal) tX% 
 
 S 
 
 ir^vTe 
 
 30 
 
 TplOKOVTa 
 
 6 
 
 H 
 
 40 
 
 TETTapttKovra 
 
 7 
 
 «rTd 
 
 S° 
 
 ITEVT'iiKOVTO 
 
 8 
 
 OKT.& 
 
 60 
 
 E^^iKOVTa 
 
 9 
 
 Ivv^a 
 
 70 
 
 ipSop.'^KOvTa 
 
 10 
 
 ScKa 
 
 80 
 
 o-ySoTiKovTa 
 
 II 
 
 iSvSEKa 
 
 90 
 
 EVEV^KOVTa 
 
 12 
 
 SuScKa 
 
 100 
 
 EKaT6v 
 
 13 
 
 Tpets (rpCa) Kal S^Ka or 
 
 200 
 
 SiaKoo-ioi, 01, a 
 
 
 Tpio-KaCScKa 
 
 300 
 
 TpiaKbo-ioi,, ai, a 
 
 14 
 
 T^TTapes Kal S^Ka or 
 
 400 
 
 TETpaKOO-lOl, ai, a. 
 
 
 TETTapeo-KaCSEKa 
 
 500 
 
 •nrEVTaK<i<rioi, oi, a 
 
 IS 
 
 ITEVTEKaCSEKa 
 
 600 
 
 E|aK6(rioi, ai, a 
 
 16 
 
 EKKatSEKa 
 
 700 
 
 ETTTOKOO-lOl, ttl, a 
 
 17 
 
 EirraKaCSEKa 
 
 800 
 
 oKTaKio-ioi, ai, a 
 
 18 
 
 OKTUKalSEKa 
 
 900 
 
 4vaK6(rioi, ai, a 
 
 1,000 x.t\ioi, ai, a 
 
 2,000 Sio-xtXioi, ai, a (8ts twice) 
 
 3,000 Tpio-xtXiov, 01, a (rpCs three times) 
 
 4,000 TETpaKio-xtXiot, ai, a (TETpdiKis four times) 
 
 5,000 TTEVTaKio-xtXioi, ai, a (itevtokis five times) 
 
 6,000 l|aKi(rxiXioi, ai, a (e|<1kis six times) 
 
 7,000 EiTTttKio-xtXioi, tti, a (IittAkis seveft times) 
 
422. 
 
 NUMERALS 
 
 8,000 OKTaKicrxtXioi, ai, a (oKrdKis eight times) 
 
 9,000 evaKi(rx.t\ioi, ai, a (IvdKis nine times) 
 
 10,000 (i^pioi, ai, a, or (jivpids (gen. dSos) myriad 
 
 20,000 Sio-|ivpioi, ai, a, or 8vo |ivpidSes (gen- -"v) 
 
 30,000 Tpia-|jivpioi, ai, a, or rpcEs |j.vpid8es 
 etc. 
 
 DECLENSION OF tXs one 
 
 189 
 
 
 MASC. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. 
 
 cls 
 
 |i(a 
 
 'b, 
 
 G. 
 
 lv<Ss 
 
 |i.ids 
 
 Ivis 
 
 D. 
 
 4vC 
 
 ("» 
 
 IvC 
 
 A. 
 
 Hva 
 
 |i.[av 
 
 ilv 
 
 423. Si5o ^z£/(3 sometimes is declined : 
 
 N. A. 8io G. D. Svoiv 
 
 a. Often it is used as indeclinable. 
 
 424. DECLENSION OF rpeis 
 
 three 
 
 425. DECLENSION OF rlrTopts 
 
 four 
 
 Masc. and Fem. Neut. 
 
 Masc. and Fem. Neut. 
 
 N. Tp€tS TpCo 
 
 T^TTOpes T^TTapa 
 
 G. TplMV 
 
 TSTTdpWV 
 
 D. Tpio-£(v) 
 
 T^TTapo-i(v) 
 
 A. Tpets Tp£a 
 
 T^TTOpOS T^TTOpa 
 
 426. 
 
 DECLENSION OF oiSeCs nobody 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 oiSeCs 
 
 oiSE)ii(a 
 
 o48^v nothing 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 ovSeves 
 
 G. 
 
 ovSeviis 
 
 oiSEjiids 
 
 oi8cv(is 
 
 G. 
 
 ov8^vci>v 
 
 D. 
 
 o^Sev( 
 
 OvSE)ltf, 
 
 ov8cvC 
 
 D. 
 
 o48io-i(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 ovSeva 
 
 ovSEp.Cav 
 
 aiiUv 
 
 A. 
 
 ovS^vas 
 
 a. firfiek, firjSefiia, /jLrjSev, nobody, nothing, is simila,rly 
 declined, (ttfi^'i is used wherever m is the appropriate 
 negative. 
 
I90 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 427. 'The article often accompanies " round " numbers. 
 It is not to be translated : 
 
 d/x^t Toiis EKaTov about one hundred. 
 
 428. Emphatic negations. — If a simple or a compound 
 negative is followed by one or several compound negatives 
 in the same clause, the negation is made more emphatic. 
 The negatives must be of the same sort (i.e. all ov and its 
 compounds, or all /^j; and its compounds) : 
 
 oiS' aWos hraBf.v oiSeli oiSev nor did anybody else suffer any injury. 
 
 429. VOCABULARY XLIII 
 
 Numerals are not repeated (from § 421) in this Vocabulary and tlje 
 following Vocabularies. 
 
 Supov, ov, t6 : gtfi. Cp. Lat. o48-«£s, o48«-|iCa, o48-ev (o48^+ slsj: 
 
 donum. nobody, no one, no, nothing. 
 
 (i.H-8e:, and not, nor, not even. IloerCciiv, <ovos, 6 : Pasion. 
 
 Used like n^. Cp. o48l. So<J)oCv«tos, ou, 6 : Sophaenetus . 
 
 piTiS-cls, (iTi8«-|i£o, iM)8-^v : nobody, no <rii(i-'iras, woo-a, irav (o-iv + iras); fl/i 
 
 one, no, nothing. togethhr, all, whole. Cp.ct-iros. 
 
 Y.i[-ri . . . |i^-T€: neither . . . nor. <ruv-4pxonaV (cp. Jpxo|iai), 2 aor. 
 
 Used like ix^j. Cp. oKni . . . <ruv-fiX6oi\- go or come together, 
 
 ofire assemble. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 430. i. I. KoX T]ya.yov avTov? iv Tpta-lv ■^fiepaL<s iirl 
 TTjv daXoTTav. 2. KSyoos S' ovv d.v-e/3aLvev iirl to, opt] 
 ovhevo<; Kw\dovro5. 3- Tjj S' ovv (rrpaTLa totc irap- 
 icrxe^ Ku/dos piicrdov TerTapcov p/qvwv. 4. /cat i^/ce 
 Kkeapxo'S exotv OTrXiras ^rXtou? koX ireXracrTas ®pa.- 
 Kas OKTaKO(TLov<i KOLi To^oTo.'i 8tdKOO"ious. 5. KoX iye- 
 vovTo ^ ol a-ujXTTavTe's ^ OTrXirai * /xev p-Vpioi /cai ^iXtot. 
 
 ^ From irap-^X"' " amounted to. ^ Subj. * Pred. nom. 
 
NUMERALS 
 
 191 
 
 irekracrTai be d[i<f)l tous Stcr^iX.ious. 6. Koi iyivovTo 
 OL <Tvv-e\d6vTe'i a-TpaTTjyol Kal X.o;(dyoi a/i,^i tous 
 eKarov. 7. Kai ovBev joiefrot ouSe K\eap)(ov nadelv 
 ecjiaaav. 8. jUT^Se o"ii Sta-Xeyou ' ^I'qhevi, jxtJTe arpa- 
 T-qya fiTiJTe aXXo) ap-)(ovTi. 9. Trap' ouSei'os oure Soipa 
 ouTe fjLKjdov Se^Ojuai. lO. Hei'tcts ju.ei' 817 rows e/c twv 
 TToXecov Xa^wv Trap-eyevero eis SapSeiSj ottXitcIs et? 
 TerpaKio-^^lXLOv;, Il/jdfevos Se Trap-rjv e^av OTrXirds joiei/ 
 et§ TrevraKocrCov? /cat ^^(iXiovs, yvp.vfJTa's 8e irevTaKo- 
 (Tiovq, 'Zo(f>aCueTo<; 8e oirXErds e^wv ^iXtous, Sw/coaxTjs 
 Se oirXirds ej^wi' ws irevTaKoa-Lov;, IldcrCo)v Se rptd- 
 Kacrtovs ^ei" oTrXtrdSj TpidKocriov? Se TreXracrras e^cui' 
 7rap-ey«'ero. 
 
 II. I. The general arrived with three hundred hoplites 
 and a thousand bowmen. 2. There were two thousand 
 and five hundred peltasts, and about ten thousand light- 
 armed troops of the barbarians. 3. Then the Greeks came 
 to the Harpasus^ river, which was* four plethra wide.* 
 
 ^ § 309' * "Apiroo-os, ov, 4. ^ Say ieittg. * § 279. 
 
192 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XLIV 
 
 THE FIRST PERFECT AND FIRST PLUPERFECT IN THE 
 ACTIVE VOICE. REDUPLICATION. DECLENSION 
 OF THE PERFECT PARTICIPLE. OBJECT CLAUSES 
 AFTER VERBS OF FEARING. SUPPLEMENTARY 
 PARTICIPLE AFTER VERBS OF BEGINNING, ETC.; 
 AFTER VERBS OF PERCEPTION. SUPPLEMENTARY 
 PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 
 431. The perfect active tense stem consists of the redu- 
 plicated theme, to which is added the perfect active tense 
 suffix. 
 
 The first perfect active tense suffix is ica in the perfect 
 indicative (which becomes ice in the third person singular). 
 Its forms in the pluperfect indicative (we) and elsewhere 
 may best be learned by inspection of the paradigms. 
 
 432. Reduplication is a sign of all perfect tenses (in- 
 cluding the pluperfect and future perfect) throughout the 
 moods. 
 
 a. Verbs that begin with a single consonant reduplicate 
 the theme by prefixing its initial consonant followed by e . 
 
 \(r\v-KCL, perfect active of Xtm ; Perfirj-Ko., perfect of )8atVo) (theme 
 ySa- or ;Si;-). 
 
 b. Verbs that begin with a rough mute prefix the smooth 
 mute of the same class (§§ 27, 28) in reduplicating the 
 theme : 
 
 Te-6v-Ka, perfect of 6v<o; re-Ovrj-Ka, perfect of OvrjaKw (cp. § 137). 
 
 c. Verbs that begin with two ,or more consonants or 
 a double consonant (§ 6) or the letter p have syllabic 
 
FIRST PERFECT ACTIVE 193 
 
 augment (§ jj. i) throughout the perfect in place of 
 reduplication : 
 
 e-fTTpdrev-Ka, perfect of (rrpaTtvm. 
 
 d. But verbs that begin with a mute and a liquid (§ 27) 
 generally reduplicate in the regular way : 
 
 TfrQvrfKo., perfect of 6v^<tk(i). 
 
 e. Verbs that begin with a vowel (or diphthong) have 
 the temporal augment (§ "jy. 2) throughout the perfect in 
 place of reduplication : 
 
 r)pwa-Ka, perfect of apTrd^o) (theme d/OTraS-). 
 
 /. A lingual mute (r B 9) at the end of the theme is 
 dropped before the perfect suffix Ka : 
 7jpira-Ka for ij/owaS-Ka ; irorei-Ka for imrtid-Ka (from iradoi). 
 
 g. The accent can never recede back of the reduplica- 
 tion or augment (cp. § 131). Compound verbs are redu- 
 plicated, as they are augmented, after the prefix (§ 1 30) : 
 Bta-fie^r/Ka, perfect of Sm-zSaiVo). 
 
 433. The pluperfect, like the imperfect (§ 234), belongs 
 only to the indicative mood. It has syllabic augment, too, 
 in addition to reduplication, if the theme begins with a 
 consonant : 
 
 i-ke-Xv-K'^, pluperfect active of Xvm. 
 
 434. PERFECT ACTIVE SYSTEM OF X'Sa 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Pf. Indie. I. 
 
 W-X«-KO /^ave loosed 
 
 2. 
 
 \4-Xv-Ka-s you have loosed 
 
 3- 
 
 \i-\y>-Ki{y) he has loosed 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 1. 
 
 \e-\ii-KO-T0v 
 
 3- 
 
 Xe-\i-KO-Tov 
 
 ■jseginner's gr. bk. — 13 
 
194 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1 . X(-\v-Ka-|i£v we have loosed 
 
 2. Xe-Xi-Ka-Tt you have loosed 
 
 3. X6-Xil-Ka-<ri(v) 1 they have loosed 
 Inf. Xe-X«-K«-vtti ^ to have loosed 
 
 Partic. Xe-Xu-K(4s,^ -Kuta, -kos, having loosed 
 Sing. 
 Plup. Indie. I. «-X€-X«-KT| I had loosed 
 
 2. i-\i-\i-Ki\-s you had loosed 
 
 3. i-\i-\<i-K(.\.[y) he had loosed 
 
 Dual 
 
 2. €-Xe-X«-Ke-Tov 
 
 3. «-Xe-Xw-K^-Tr|v 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1 . l-Xe-Xu-Kc-piev we had loosed 
 
 2. I-X6-Xii-K£-T£ you had loosed 
 
 3. - l-Xe-Xxp-Ke-o-av they had loosed 
 
 435. DECLENSION OF THE PERFECT PARTICIPLE 
 
 Neut. 
 XeXvKds 
 XeXvk6tos 
 XcXvk6ti 
 XeXvkAs 
 
 XeXvKOTC 
 
 XgXvkotoiv 
 
 XeXvKdra 
 
 XeXvKdruv 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Plur. N.V. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Masc. 
 XeXvKiis having loosed 
 XeXvKdros 
 XeXvk6ti. 
 XcXvKira 
 XeXvk6t£ 
 XeXvkotoiv 
 XcXvk6t€$ 
 
 XeXuKOTUV 
 
 X«XuKd<ri(v) 
 X«XvK6Tas 
 
 Fem. 
 XEXvKvta 
 XeXuKvCas 
 XcXvKvCci 
 XeXvKviav 
 XcXvKvCa 
 XcXvKuCaiv 
 XcXuKviai 
 
 XcXvKULUV 
 
 XcXvKuCats 
 XcXvKvCas 
 
 XEXvK6iri(v) 
 XeXvKJra 
 
 a. Having loosed, having heard, etc., are more frequently 
 expressed in Greek by the aorist than by the perfect parti- 
 ciple. 
 
 ^ For Xe-Xv-KO-v(ri(v). ^ For accent see § 385, footnote 2. 
 
 ' All perfect active participles, like second aorist active participles, are 
 accented on the ultima. 
 
FIRST PERFECT ACTIVE 
 
 I9S 
 
 436. Periphrastic forms of the perfect subjunctive and 
 optative, made up of the perfect active participle and the 
 proper forms of et'/i^ (subjunctive, § 247; optative, § 265), 
 are more common than the simple forms, which are pur- 
 posely omitted from this lesson. 
 
 Pf. Subjv 
 
 I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Sing. 
 XeXvKciis a 
 XeXvKtiJS QS 
 XeXvkus 'n 
 
 Dual 
 
 XcXvKOTc tJtov 
 XcXvk6t€ tlTOV 
 
 Plur. 
 XcXvKdrcs u|uv 
 XcXuK^TES t[n 
 XcXvk6t£$ wiri(v) 
 
 Pf. Opt 
 
 I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 XcXvKa>s Etrjv 
 XeXukws €^5 
 XcXvKus eti) 
 
 XeXvKiiTe EiIi]Tov 
 
 XtXvKOTCS e(i)|JI(V 
 
 XeXvkotcs (iryre 
 X€Xvk6tcs sItjo-ov 
 
 a. The shorter forms ehov, elfiev, etc., also occur. 
 
 437. The perfect imperative active almost never occurs. 
 
 438. Object clauses after verbs of fearing. — After a verb 
 of fearing in a primary tense (§ 39) /jlt) lest introduces the 
 subjunctive (present or aorist) to express the object of fear 
 (provided this is future). Lest not is expressed by fir) ov : 
 8i8oLKa firj (caKuis Trpa^uxriv I fear lest they do ( ^ fare) ill ; 
 SeSoiKa fi.T] ovK ex.0) (pres. subjv!) iKavovi <^iAoi)s I fear lest I shall 
 
 not have enough friends. 
 
 a. After a secondary tense f^v lest may introduce the 
 optative (or subjunctive, cp. § 268): 
 
 iSeSoLKT) firj KaKuii Trpd^ciav (or Trpd^uxTLv) I feared lest they should 
 fare ill. 
 
 439. The supplementary participle (§ 215) is used in 
 agreement with the subject of verbs meaning begin, con- 
 tinue, cease, be phased, etc. : 
 
 ^Sofjuxi, to KXiapxc, oLKovwv aov SiKatovs Xoyovs I am pleased, Cle- 
 archus, to hear just words from you. 
 
196 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 440. The supplementary participle is used in agreement 
 with the object of verbs of perception {pi the mind or 
 
 senses) : 
 
 etSe KXiapxov eXavvovra he saw Clearchus riding. 
 
 441. Supplementary participle in indirect discourse. — In 
 
 the use of § 440 the participle often represents a finite verb 
 of the main clause of a quotation ; and if so, the participle 
 is said to be in the construction of indirect discourse. The 
 tenses of the participle in indirect discourse are used in ex- 
 actly the same way as the tenses of the infinitive in indirect 
 discourse (§§ no. a, d; 156. i ; 277). That is, the present 
 participle represents the present tense (and imperfect tense) 
 of the finite verb ; the perfect, aorist, and future participles 
 represent respectively the perfect, aorist, and future tenses 
 of the finite verb. If dv accompanied the finite verb {e.£: 
 in the potential optative), it is retained with the equivalent 
 participle in indirect discourse : 
 
 irvvBdverai (or alcrddvcTai) KCpov Trpoa- eXavvovra he learns {or he 
 
 perceives) tliat Cyrus is drawing near ; 
 Direct form : KBpos irpoa-sXavvu Cyrus is drawing near. 
 
 EiSov paSiws^ av to tcixos \rj4>0a' they saw that the wall might be 
 
 easily taken ; 
 Direct form : paSt'ws av to reixos \-i]<i>Odri the wall may be easily 
 
 taken. 
 
 For an example of the perfect pgirticiple, see § 442. a. 
 
 442. Verbs of perception commonly admit the construc- 
 tion with oTi as well : 
 
 jrw^averat (or aicr^dveTat) oTi KCpos TTpoa-^avvfX. he leams {or he 
 perceives) that Cyrus is drawing near. 
 
 1 Adv. of p^Sios, § 360. 8. 
 
FIRST PERFECT ACTIVE 
 
 197 
 
 a. aKovw hear allows either a Sn clause (§ 262) or the 
 infinitive (§ 262. a) or the participle In indirect discourse : 
 r\Kovaa.v KSpov TfBvqKOTo. they heard that Cyrus was dead ; 
 Direct form : K5pos TiOvyjKiv Cyrus is dead. 
 
 Examples of the other tonstructions have already oc- 
 curred (§§ 203. I. 10; 264. I. 6). 
 
 443- 
 
 VOCABULARY XLIV 
 
 S^SoiKa, pf. with pres. meaning 
 
 (from SeCSu) : fear ; i aor. 
 
 cSeiira. Cp. 8civ6s. 
 '^v9a, rel. adv. : where ; dem. : there; 
 
 of time, 6v6a 8ifj : then indeed. 
 cvipCo-Ku, fut. 6ipp'^<r<i), 2 aor. i)vpov, 
 
 pf. act. T]Spr)Ka, pf. mid. to be 
 
 learned later, aor. pass. v^fiZif/ : 
 
 find. Eureka. 
 'qSofiai (theme ■fiS-) : be pleased; 
 
 Tio-B'iiiroiiol : shall be pleased ; 
 
 Tl<r6i[v: was pleased; withsomt- 
 
 thing (dat. § 403) . See § 439. 
 
 Cp. TiSiis. 
 Kaip6s, oil, 6: the right measure, 
 
 right time, right place ; proper 
 
 time; opportunity, crisis. 
 Kpdros, ous, t6 : strength, might. 
 
 ova Kpdros : to the limit of 
 strength, at full speed. 
 
 XavSdvu (themes Xo9-, \i)9-, cp. Xon- 
 Pdvu, TVYxdvci), § 218), fut. X'^o-u, 
 2 aor. cXa6ov (other parts to be 
 learned later) : lie hid, escape 
 notice of; with supplementary 
 partic, in construction like tdy- 
 Xdvui (§ 215) : thus EXaBev Kki&v 
 he went secretly, lit. he escaped 
 notice going. 
 
 |i<i, conj. : lest, after verbs oi fear- 
 ing, lit] oi : lest not. See § 438. 
 
 Mi6paSciTT|s, 01), 6 : Mithradates. 
 
 T^BvTiKa, pf. of 6vn'o-K«a : be dead, be 
 slain. Cp. d'iro-8vT]0-K(o(§ 137). 
 The simple verb is common in 
 the perfect. 
 
 iircpPoX'/i, fls, T| : passingover,pass. 
 Hyperbole. 
 
 xapdSpS, as, t| : ravine. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 444. I. I. Kal Tas criroi'Ssis trapa. tous opKov^ \e\v- 
 
 KaaLv} 2. TToWoiis 8e dvSpa<s Kal TToWa '^pyjfxaTa 
 
 'qpTTO.Kafiev. 3. Kvpos S' eVel ■ycrdi.TO avrovq Sia- 
 
 jSe/S'Tj/foTas, rja-Qy]. 4. Kupos 8e Tjcrdr) top iK^ twv 
 
 1 Cp. § 121. I. 7. 
 
 ^ inspired by. 
 
198 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 '^khjvcau ets tous fiap^dpovs <f)6/3ov IScov. 5. dWct 
 SeSotKa jti^ ovx evpcoixev t'^v ot/caSe oSov. 6. kol eoe- 
 SoiKT] p,ri ovx rjSoLTO T(o Inira} 7. ' A/SpoKOfid? Tj/couo-e 
 Kvpov iv KiXtKio, ovTa. 8. vvv ovv /caipds icrnv (f>v\d- 
 ^atrdai p.r) Xrj^Ocifieu, Iva plrf Kokaadco/Jiev. 9. ovtoi 
 eXeyov on Kvpo<s Te6vr]Kev. lO. ewel 8e 01 EA.X.Tji'es 
 Sia-j8e/8i7 /cores dir-et^oj' t-^s ^apctSpd? oo-ov^ okto) o-ra- 
 Stous, ei'^a S'^ Si-e/Soiive KaV 6 Mt^/aaSdrijs. 1 1. toGto 
 TO crTpdTevjjLa ikdvdave Tpe(l)6fi€vov avTO)* 12. 8ei- 
 (ravT€? fir) dTro-Xr)(j)dei7](rav e<f>ev'yov dva Kpdro^. 
 13. Xeipt<ro^os S' inel elSe tous ttoXc/aioi;? cttI rrj 
 virepfioky, iiravcraTO Tro/oeudjoiefos. 14. 6 8e Hevids 
 7re7rei/ce tovtov 701* dudpairov Xeyetv wSe. 
 
 II. I. We were glad to see the army of Cyrus. 2. We 
 heard that the soldiers had crossed ^ the ravine. 3. A man 
 came riding at full speed and said that Cyrus was dead. 
 4. Our soldiers captured the height unobserved.^ 5. He 
 fears that^ the enemy will come secretly ^ in the night. 
 
 1 § 403. 2 Adv. ace, as far as, about. 
 
 3 also. * § 53. d. 
 
 ^ Use all possible constructions. * Say escaped notice taking, etc. 
 
 ' lest. 8 Say escape notice coming. 
 
SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE 199 
 
 XLV 
 
 THE SECOND PERFECT AND THE SECOND PLUPERFECT 
 ACTIVE. ATTIC REDUPLICATION. REDUPLICATION 
 WITH el: SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE WITH 
 SrjXoi ia-nv, ETC. ^ 
 
 445. There is a second form of the perfect and pluper- 
 fect active made with the sufifix a (also e) instead of icu (kc). 
 It is Uke the first perfect except for the want of the letter 
 K. This second perfect belongs only to certain verbs : 
 some with themes ending in a mute and some with themes 
 ending in a liquid. The theme itself often undergoes 
 modification of its vowel sound ; and a smooth mute (tt, k) 
 or middle mute (/3, 7, cp. § 28) before the suffix a (or e) 
 is usually (but not always) changed to the corresponding 
 rough. 
 
 iri-iroiJLtj>-a {TrefjuTr-oi) I have sent ; 
 
 ire-TTOiO-a {yru6-<j>) I trust ; 
 
 wi-irov6-a (Trao-x*), themes TraO-, Tt.v6-) I have suffered ; 
 
 ■jri-^cvy-a (^eiJy-o)) I have fled ; 
 
 A,e'-Aotjr-a (Xdv-ta) I have left ; 
 
 ^X-o- (ay-'") I have led ; 
 
 yi-yov-a (yiyvofnou, theme yev-) I have been born, become, 
 
 I am; 
 ye-ypa<j)-a (ypd<f)-<i}) I have written. 
 
 a. Some verbs like TreiOco have both perfects, but with 
 different meanings : 
 
 iri-irei-Ka means I have persuaded (mTroiOa, second perfect, 
 I trust). 
 
200 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 446. SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM OF XtCira 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 Pf. Indie. I. Xi-Xoiv-a. I have left Xe-Xo£ir-a-|iev we 
 
 have left 
 
 2. X^XoiTT-OrS you have \£-XoCir-itTov Xe-XoCir-o-rt you 
 
 left have left 
 
 3. X^Xoiir-6 he has left X«-XoCir-oi-Tov X£-XoCir-o<ri(v) they 
 
 have left 
 Subjv. I. X«-Xoiir-ws w (cp. ?436), etc. 
 
 Opt. I. Xe-Xoiir-us Avfi (cp. § 436), etc. 
 
 Imv. Almost never occurs in the perfect active (§ 437) 
 
 Inf. Xs-Xoiir-e-vai to have left 
 
 Partic. Xe Xoiir-cos, -«ta, -6s, having left (Cp. § 435) 
 
 Plup. Indie. I. VKi-'Kaiir^ I had left e-Xe-XoCir-c-jisv we 
 
 had left 
 
 2. 4-X«-Xo£ir-r|-s you had 4-Xe-Xotir-t-Tov l-Xe-Xotir-€-T£ you 
 
 left had left 
 
 3. 4-Xe-XoCir-ei(v) he had i-Xe-XoMr-^Ti)v t-Xe-Xotir-j-o-ov they 
 
 left had left 
 
 447. Attic reduplication. — Some verbs beginning with 
 a short vowel followed by a consonant prefix the first two 
 letters and lengthen the initial vowel of the theme : 
 
 kK-yiKvB-o. [2 pf. from theme IkvB-, of which a shorter form is seen 
 
 in rjXQov (cX^-)] I have come^; 
 iX-T)Kxx.-Ko. [i pf. from theme «Xa- (eXawm)] I have driven or 
 
 marched. 
 
 448. A few verbs have el- prefixed to the theme for 
 reduplication : 
 
 el-X.ri<f>-a (2 pf. of Xa/n/Savw, themes \ril3-, Xa^-) I have taken; 
 (Tvv-it-\o^-a (2 pf. of orvX-Aeyoj, theme Xey-) I have collected ; 
 d-pri-Ka (i pf. from theme pi;-) I have said. 
 
 1 This verb supplies the 2 pf. of lpxo|iai. But r[Kia (§ 137) is commonly 
 used for the sUnple eXriXvOa. 
 
he is evident. 
 
 SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE 201 
 
 449. The supplementary participle in indirect discourse 
 is common in agreement with the subject of BrjXov iari^v) 
 he is evident and similar expressions, such as : 
 
 <j>avep6i e<m(v) 
 and <l>avep6i yeyove(v) 
 87X0S ^v KIpos uTTEiiSoiv iroo-ov r^v 686v Cyrus was clearly hastening 
 {lii. was evident hastening) all the way. 
 
 a. The construction SfjXov {ivTiv) on it is evident that 
 also occurs (§ 270. I. 2). 
 
 450. VOCABULARY XLV 
 
 0.776X0$, ov, i : messenger. Angel. toctovtos, TO(ro<PTn, roo-oflTo (de- 
 
 ElfpT)Ka, pf ^ : / have said, I have < clined like ovtos, § 171), dem. 
 
 mentioned. pron. : so much, so great, so 
 
 oiioi, 01, a : some. many ; often followed by cor- 
 
 Upds, o, o'v : sacred, holy. Hier- relative word like 8o-os as. The 
 
 archy (apxu). neut. is also Too-oirovas well as 
 
 irpo-^pXO|i.ai (cp. epxo|ioi), 2 aor. too-oSto. Cp. Lat. tantus. 
 
 irpo-TjX6ov, 2 pf. irpo-c\^\v6a i|>avEp6s, i£, 6v. visible, clear, evi- 
 
 (§ 447) '• go brfoy^t go forward, dent. 
 
 proceed. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 451. I. I. oiSe a-TpaTrjyol KaKaireTTOvOaariv. 2. ire- 
 7r6fi(j)d(TL 8e ets tyjv 'EWdSa ir/oecr^Seis eV^ dWrjv or/oa- 
 Tidv. 3. d,iTO-Xe\oL7ra.(rLv ijjuas Bs'ias Kal HdaCcov. 
 4. jwu S' im-^ov\.€va)v /j-ol (f>avepb<; yeyovas. 5. odroi 
 iXeyov an 'Apiaios iretftevyo)? etr) fierd tcju dWcov /3ap- 
 jSdpcov. 6. Trj S' ixTTepaCcf, ^k€u ayyeXos Xeytuj/ on 
 XeXotTTws eh} "Zvivvecri^ Ta dxpa. 7. /SacrtXeus Se koX 
 TL(Tcra<f)epvr)is iviov; (Tvv-eiX'q^axriv rjfiav. 8. v/iets 
 TOcrovToi^ ovre^ ocoi* vvv (rvv-e\r)\v6aTe fiiyuTTov 
 
 1 Supplies the pf. act. of Xiya say. 2 /^ fetch, after. 
 
 ^ fo many. * as. 
 
202 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 evere Kaipov. 9. ov ttoXu 8e vpo-e\rfXv06Tcov avTOJv 
 ■Jf/ce TTttXii' 6 Mi,dpa8dTi]<;. lO. Kai KaT-evXrjtftore? <f)v- 
 )\dTTOva-L Ty]v ohov. II. Kai tovtov tov \6(f}0v trap- 
 ekqkvdea-av of'EXKyjve's. 12. crvu-eXyjXvdoTe? S' ■^crav 
 ivravda koX dvSpe<s koI yvvaiKe<; koX Trpo^ara ttoXXo,. 
 
 13. eV TouTw Tft> XP°^V rjXdev 6 Xoxayos Trei^evyws. 
 
 14. Mei/(i)v he BrjXo? ■^v iTTi-^ovXevcou T^ (f)iXco. 1 5. 6 Se 
 (TTpaTrjyo? e)(wv ovs^ eiprjKa e^-rjXdev e/c tou lepov 
 ^wptov. 
 
 II. I. It has become clear that Cyrus is ^ plotting against 
 his brother. 2. You have evidently come together* in 
 order to advise us. 3. They have seized our generals and 
 captains^ 
 
 — XLVI 
 
 THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE AND PASSIVE 
 OF VOWEL THEMES. INFINITIVE WITH fiefivrj/iai 
 remember how, ETC. DATIVE OF AGENT 
 
 452. The middle and passive voices have identical forms 
 in the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses as well 
 as in the present and imperfect (cp. § 383). 
 
 453. The perfect middle (passive) tenses reduplicate the 
 theme in the same way as the perfect active tenses, and 
 have augment for reduplication under similar circumstances 
 (§§ 432, 447> 448). 
 
 1 § 401. 
 
 ' Supply toOtous as antecedent. 
 
 ' Say Cyrus has become clear^. 
 
 * you are evident having come together (cp. I. 12). 
 
PERFECT MIDDLE OF VOWEL THEMES 203 
 
 454- In the perfect middle indicative (and pluperfect), 
 imperative, infinitive, and participle, the endings are added 
 directly to the theme without any connecting vowels. The 
 perfect subjunctive and optative are periphrastic forms, 
 made up of the perfect middle (passive) participle and the 
 proper forms of eiixi (cp. the perfect subjunctive and opta- 
 tive active, § 436). • 
 
 a. There are no second perfect or second pluperfect 
 tenses in the middle and passive voices. 
 
 455. PERFECT MIDDLE OR PASSIVE SYSTEM OF \va 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Pf. Indie. I. 
 
 ... J / ^ave ransomed 
 
 \{T?a.ss. I have been loosed) 
 
 \i-\i-iix9a 
 
 
 2. 
 
 \4-Xv-irai 
 
 X^Xw-o-flov 
 
 X^-Xv-o-Be 
 
 
 3- 
 
 X^-Xv-TOl 
 
 X^Xv-<r6ov 
 
 X^-Xu-VTttl 
 
 
 Imv. 2. 
 
 M-Xv-cro 
 
 X^-Xii-<r9ov 
 
 X^-Xu-o-Be 
 
 
 3- 
 
 \i-\i-iria 
 
 X«-Xv-(r9«v 
 
 Xc-Xv-o-Buv 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 X«-Xv-<r9ai' 
 
 
 
 
 Partic. 
 
 Xe-Xv-fi^vos,^ rj, ov 
 
 
 
 Plup. 
 
 Indie. I. 
 
 r / had ransomed 
 
 1 (Pass. / had been loosed) 
 
 4-X£-Xii-|wflo 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i-\i-\v-a-o 
 
 £-X^X«-(r9ov 
 
 4-X^-Xv-<rB€ 
 
 
 3- 
 
 4-X^Xu-To 
 
 4-Xe-X{i-<r9riv 
 
 4-X^Xu-vTO 
 
 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC FORMS 
 
 
 Pf. 
 
 Subjv. I. 
 
 Xe-Xv-ji^vos w 
 
 
 Xe-Xv-|i.^voi &}l,tV 
 
 
 2. 
 
 X€-Xv-|«'vos ■flS 
 
 Xe-Xu-iievw ■^tov 
 
 Xe-X«-|ilvoi i]T€ 
 
 
 3- 
 
 X«-Xv-(ii«vos 1] 
 
 Xe-XoHjievw ^Tov 
 
 Xe-Xv-ji^voi «tri(v) 
 
 
 Opt. I. 
 
 Xe-Xu-ji^vos iii]v 
 
 
 X€-Xl)-|Jl^VOl C{1)|1.EV 
 
 
 2. 
 
 \f-\v-\i.ivo9 etris 
 
 Xe-XtF-|i4v(a €tT]TOv 
 
 Xe-Xv-(»<voi liiyn 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xe-Xv-)i.^vos €It] 
 
 Xe-Xv-|jl^v<i> «mTiiv 
 
 Xe-Xv-|i,^voi cCi]<rav 
 
 a. 
 
 The shorter forms elrov, el/iev, etc., also occur. 
 
 1 The pf. mid. (pass.) inf. is always accented on the penult. 
 ^ The pf. mid. (pass.) partic. is always accented on the penult. 
 
204 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 456. The perfect middle of <ylr/voiJi,ai, is ye-jev-rj-fiai (cp. 
 the fut. yev-TJ-(ro-/^ai for the lengthened theme). 
 
 The perfect middle of crTpaToireSevo) is i-a-Tparoir^Bev-fiac 
 
 (§ 432. 4 
 
 457. The infinitive is used with verbs of remembenng, 
 learning, etc., when they mean remembej' how, learn how: 
 
 ciOvi TraiSes ovtcs [tavOdvownv ap)(eiv re koL apytaOai Straightway from 
 boyhood they learn how to rule and to be ruled. 
 
 a. Such verbs take a on clause or a participle in indirect 
 discourse in the sense remember that, learn that, as has 
 already been described (§§ 441, 442). 
 
 458. Dative of agent. — The dative case may be .used to 
 express the agent with the perfect and pluperfect passive : 
 ij y€<l)vpa XekvTai, Kvpio the bridge has been destroyed by Cyrus. 
 
 459. VOCABULARY XLVI 
 
 a-8iKos, ov (d- priv. and 8£ki] ; cp. remind, which form is made up 
 
 S(Kq.ios) : unjust. of the reduplication jw- plus the 
 
 tto-o), adv. : within, with gen. theme |ivt|- (long form of jiva-) 
 
 -kXcIu ; shut up, confine, in- plus the pres. sufBx i(rK% ; fut. 
 
 KaTO-l 
 
 close. |iv^a-ii>, I aor. c|ivt)cra. Lat. 
 
 kXcCio, fiit. kXcCo-u, I aor. cKXeicra, memim. Mnemonic. 
 
 I pf. k^kXciku, pf. mid. k^kXci- irfXt), i]s, t): gate. Cp. @Ep)io- 
 
 |iai, I aor. pass. «KX«£<rei]v (o- is iroXoi, lit. " Hot Gates." 
 
 irregularly inserted) : shut. TiTptio-Ku (theme Tp<o-, reduplicated 
 
 Kp^s, KpT|TiS$, 6 : Cretan, a native in pres. Ti-rpw, and with the 
 
 of Crete. pres. suffix <tk%), fut. rpi&o-u, 
 
 Ko>|i,-dpxT|S, o«, 6 (kw)i.i] + iipxo)) : i aor. ETpuo-a, pf. mid. T^rpunoi, 
 
 ruler'ox head man of a village, i aor. pass. IrpciOrgv : wound. 
 
 village chief. rojevw (cp. t6Jov), fut. To|€ii<ro|i.ai, 
 
 |Uii.viip.ai : remember, a pf. with i aor. Irijeuo-o, pf. pass. TtT6|e«- 
 
 pres. meaning; fut. to be (lai, i aor. pass. iTogevBTiv : j^(7o; 
 
 learned later; aor. 4|i.v^<r6i)v with bow and arrow. 
 
 (o- is irregularly inserted). .|/iXds, i\, 6v : bare, unprotected; 
 
 The pres. act. is |jii.-|ivxi-o-ku light-armed. 
 
PERFECT MIDDLE OF VOWEL THEMES 205 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 460. I. 1. oLkovcov Se ov fiifivrfaai. 2. ■^yc 8' avT0V9 
 o Kcoixap)(rj's Xe\u^eVos^ Sta ;j^tovos. 3. kol elire itavra 
 ra yeyevqfjLiva. 4. 6 8e to^otijs i^we ^evywu Tcr/ow/ieVos 
 €is TTjy x^^P"'" 5- '"■oWol yap ■^crai/ 01 reTpcofxevoi. 
 6. ai 8e TTuXai eKe/cXetiTO. 7. <f)7jcrlv ovv nepl ifie 
 doiKos yeyevrjcrdaL. 8. irvyxaue yap 'A/otatos e<^' 
 ct/Aa^TjS TTopevofjievo's otl^ iTCTpcoTO. 9. jotera Taura 
 fier-eirefixpavTo Huraa^ipvriv 01 t6 "EXXr/i'es Kat 6 
 Apiaios, eyyu5 dXXT^Xtuv ioTpaToireSeufiii^oL rniipa<; 
 TrXetous "^ eufftrii'. 10. XeXu/ie'i/Tj? ^ 8e t'^5 yc^O/ods 
 ou^ i^ovcTLV iK€woi TO, iiriTrjhiia. 1 1, eyw, S Ttcrcra- 
 ^epv-q, fJLefivrjfiai -^fuv* opKovs yeyevrjfieuovs.^ 12. ju,e- 
 IxvrjaOco ^x^o; di/'^^p eti'ai.* 1 3. fjiep^vrjadoi otl dya^os 
 di/i^p icTTiv. 14. fxeiwrjcrdoi dyado? avr/p a>v.^ 15. 01 
 yd/) K/o^res ^paxvrepa^ twv Ilepcrciv iroievov Kal dfia 
 \pl\ov ofTC? elcrco twv ottXitwi' KaT-CKCKXeii'To. 
 
 IL I. The barbarians had encamped near the Greeks. 
 2. The village chief has been loosed (from shackles)^ by 
 Cheirisophus. 3. The crowd (of camp followers)® has 
 been shut up within the (ranks of) ® hoplites. 4. Let him 
 remember that Cyrus is a brave man.^" 
 
 I loosed bo'm shackles. ^ § 310. 
 
 ' broken down, destroyed, * § 458. 
 
 5 = kave been made (§§ 440, 441). ° § 457. 
 
 ' When the subject of the participle in indirect discourse (§ 441) is the 
 same as that of the verb on which the participle depends, it agrees in case. — 
 Sentences 13 and 14 mean the same thing. 
 
 ' a shorter distance (§ 351. <^). ^ Omit. 
 
 '" Express in two ways. 
 
2o6 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 XLVII 
 
 PERFECT MIDDLE AND PASSIVE OF MUTE THEMES. 
 EUPHONIC RULES: MUTES BEFORE /U.. SIGMA 
 DROPPED BETWEEN TWO CONSONANTS. 
 
 461. Themes that end in a mute (§§ 27, 28) naturally 
 suffer euphonic changes in the perfect and pluperfect 
 middle before the personal endings, which are added 
 directly to the theme. 
 
 The following rules of euphony therefore must be added 
 to those already learned (§§ 153, 387): • 
 
 MUTES BEFORE /^ 
 
 462. I . A labial mute (tt /S ^) before /i becMies /i : ^ 
 \e-X.€Lfi,-iMi for Xe-A.£i7r-/iat (\n7r0)) . 
 
 2. A palatal mute (« %) before fj- becomes 7 : 
 
 Tre-^vXay-fxai for ■7r€-cj>v\aK-fMiL (<^vXaTTO), theme <j>v\aK-). 
 
 a. 7 Before /x is naturally kept unchanged : 
 
 Te-Tay-fjLai (pf. mid. of TaTrto, theme Toy-). ^ 
 
 3. A^Hngual mute (t B 6) before /.t becomes o- : ^ 
 
 Tri-TreKT-fxai for ire-Trtid- /jail {tkiOio) . ^ * , 
 
 463. Sigma coming between two consonants is dropped : 
 
 Xi-\€i<f>-Oe for Xe-Xeiir-crOe. 
 
 464. The third person plural of the perfect and pluper- 
 fect indicative middle of mute themes is a periphrastic 
 form made up of the perfect participle and ela-i(v) (per- 
 fect) or ^aav (pluperfect). 
 
 a. With a neuter plural subject e(TTC{v) and rjv are used 
 for el<Ti{v) and fjaav respectively ; or the regularly formed 
 third person singular of the verb is used. 
 
PERFECT MIDDLE OF MUTE THEMES 
 
 207 
 
 465. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE OR PASSIVE 
 OF Xtlira (THEME Xeiir-) 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 Pf. Indie. I. X^\«|i-|i.ai ^ (Pass.) I have been left \(.-\(.{,^^^o> 
 
 2. \^\ei<|(ai ^ 
 
 3. \^\ciir-Tai ' 
 
 Subjv. I. \€-\ei|i,-|i,^vosiu 
 
 2. \c-\ei|i,-|j.^vos^ 'ns, etc. 
 
 Opt. I. Xc-Xei)i.-|ji^vos ' etifv 
 
 2. \c-\ci|i.-|ii,^va5 ' €lt|s, etc. 
 
 Imv. 2. \^\mi|/o'^ 
 
 3. X€-\e£<ji-ew^ 
 
 Inf. \e-\ct<f>-eai^ 
 
 Partic. Xe-\£iiA-u,^vos * 
 
 Plup. Indie. I. e-Xe-XtCii-jiTivi 
 
 2. 4-X4-Xen|»o2 
 
 3. I-Xi-Xeiir-To ' 
 
 X^X€i<t>-eoy« 
 Xi^XEi(t>-eov > 
 
 x4-Xci<)>-ec'> 
 
 Xc-Xci|t-)Uvoi 1 Et<r((v) 
 
 Xi-Xci(t>-6ov ^ 
 \c-Xc(<|>-euv'' 
 
 X^X€l<|>-0€* 
 
 Xc-XcC(|>-6(i>v^ 
 
 4-Xc-Xc(|i-|ic9a* 
 l-X^Xci<|>-Sov^ l-X4-XEi.(|>-ec ^ 
 l-Xe-Xeli|>-8r)v ' XE-\Ei|x-|i,^vai ^ TJo-av 
 
 a. All Other labial mute (tt /3 ^) themes are inflected 
 on the model of Xe-Xetfi-fiai: 
 
 yi-ypaix-iJjxL, pf. mid. of ypa^ui (theme ypa<f>-) ; 
 <rvv-eiX,rifi,-imi, pf. mid. of o-vA-Xayn^Sdvio (themes AayS-, Xi?^-). 
 
 ^. But Tre'/UTrcr) (theme irefnr-') forms the pf. mid. or pass. 
 7re-7re/oi/ii-yu,at (§ 462. i); and one /u. of the unpronounceable 
 combination is dropped (Tre-ireiJi-fiaL) : 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 Pf. Indie, r. irl-ir^t-fLai (Pass.) I have been sent ir{-irl|ji,-|i£6o 
 
 2. iri-ir6|i«|>tti ir^-Treiii^-Bov ir^-irE)i.(|>-6E 
 
 3. "iri-irenir-Toi irf-ir€H(|>-6ov ir6-ir€|i-|i^voi, {l<r£(v) 
 
 » § 462. I. 
 
 ' § 153- '• 
 
 » § 387- I. 
 
 * §§ 463; 387- '• 
 
2o8 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 466. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE OR PASSIVE 
 OF T&TTto arrange (THEME ra-j-) 
 
 Sing. Dual 
 
 Pf. Indie. I. T^o-y-fioii (Pass.) I have been 
 arranged or marshaled 
 
 2. T^-Togai^ T^ox-6ov* 
 
 3. T^OK-rai^ T^ox-9ov* 
 
 Subj V. I . T£-Ta7-nivos * S 
 
 2. T(-TOY-(«vos ^ fls, etc. 
 
 Opt. I . Tt-ToyiUvos ' Affl 
 
 2. T€-Ttt7-|i^vos-'«lTis, etc. 
 
 Imv. 2. T^-raJo^ T^Tax-9ov^ 
 
 3. Te-rdx-'"' TC-rdx-flwv* 
 Inf. Tj-rdx-flai* 
 
 Partic. Te-T07-|i^vos,^ i), ov 
 
 Plup. Indie. I . tTe-TAY-(jinv 1 
 
 2. 4-T^TaJo^ 4-T4-TOX-flov* 
 
 3. l-riTOK-TO " 
 
 Plur. 
 t£-tA7-ij.69o^ 
 
 Te-TOX-96 * 
 T€-Ta7-|j.^voi* tl<rt(v) 
 
 T4^ax-8« ^ 
 
 l-T6-TdY-|ji«8a^ 
 e-rirox-fle * 
 
 l-Te-rdx-fllv ' T€-T07-iJievoi^ ti<rov 
 
 a. Like re'rayfiai are inflected all other verbs with themes 
 ending in a palatal mute {icy x)' 
 
 ^y-ixai, pf. mid. of a.y<o (theme ay-) ; 
 
 iK-iri-TrXriy-fMi, pf. mid. of Ik-ttXyittid (theme irXtfy-) ; 
 
 TTt-irpdy-jiuu, pf. mid. of irpaTTw (theme irpdy-'). 
 
 467. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE OR PASSIVE 
 OF irttew (THEME irtiO-) 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 Pf. Indie. I. iti-mur-fLai^ (Fass.) / have deen ire-trtlir-fuBa^ 
 persuaded 
 
 2. ir^€i-<roi' irtirei-irBovS ir^-irci-o-Oe' 
 
 3. ir^eio--Toi' idrTCOrV^av^ ir6-irenr-(iivoi.5ct<rC(v) 
 
 1 § 462. 2. a. 
 
 ♦ §§ 463; 387- '• 
 
 " § 153. 2- 
 » § 462. 3- 
 
 = § 387- I- 
 ^ § 153- 3- 
 
 ' § 387, 2. 
 
PERFECT MIDDLE OF MUTE THEMES 
 
 Sing. Dual Plur. 
 
 Subjv. I. ir€-irei<r-n^vos^ •» 
 
 2. irj-ireiir-iifvos ^ 'DS, etc. 
 Opt. I . ir(-ir«i<r-n^vos ^ iir\v 
 
 2. ire-ireKr-iH'vos ^ ttus, etc. 
 
 2og 
 
 Imv. 2. ir^-irei-o-o ^ 
 
 3. ire-ire£-(r6<i> ^ 
 
 Inf. ir£-iret-o-9ai ^ 
 
 Partic. ire-Trti<r-|ji^vos ^ 
 
 Plup. Indie. I. i-ir6-ire£<r-|i.Tivl 
 
 2. t-iT^ti-cro ^ 
 
 3. Mrl-ir«i<r-TO ' 
 
 ir£-irtC-<r9<ov ^ ire-iref-o-Owv ^ 
 
 4-irc-ire(<r-)iE6a^ 
 i-Tre-ireC-irOiiv ^ ir6^rei<r-|ievoi ^ r\irav 
 
 a. Like Tre-ireKr-iiai are inflected all other verbs with 
 themes ending in a lingual mute (t 8 ^) : 
 
 ■qpTTOLcr-iiuaJ,, pf. mid. of apird^ia (theme dpTraS-) J 
 irap-aTKeiaxr-iw.i, pf. mid. of Trapa-CT/ccua^ai (theme (TKeuaS-). 
 
 468. 
 
 VOCABULARY XLVII 
 
 &X\'[|, adv. (dat. fern, of ci.\\os, 
 with 68m or x'^PI!' understood) : 
 elsewhere, in another place or 
 direction. 
 
 &-irop(a, as, t| (cp. a-iropos, xo- 
 p(iia|iai) : lack of way out, em- 
 barrassment, difficulty. 
 
 Sfi-Trpoo-OEv, adv. (Iv + irp6<r9ev) : 
 in' front, before. It may take 
 the gen. 
 
 Iv-Ticyxdvcii (cp. TvyxAvcii) : chance 
 upon, happen upon, come upon 
 by chance, encounter, with dat. 
 
 liri-TaTTO) (cp. TttTTo)) : enjoin 
 something (ace.) on somebody 
 (dat.), direct, command. 
 
 Kard-Pao-is, cus, t| (Kara-PaCvu) : 
 
 descent, way down a mountain 
 side ; the descent from the 
 interior to the sea. 
 
 fjidvos, T], ov : alone, only. Mon- 
 archy (opx«), mono-gamy (-yd- 
 |ios marriage), etc. 
 
 oirolos, a, ov, indef. rel. pron. and 
 indir. intern : of what sort, 
 what sort of. 
 
 TroT6v, ov, t6 : drink. 
 
 ■jTov, indef adv., enclitic: some- 
 where, anywhere. 
 
 irpo-KaTa-\a|j,polv(i) (cp. Kara-Xa)!- 
 pdvo.. Vocabulary XXXII) : 
 seize or occupy beforehand. 
 
 o-itCov, ov, t6 (diminutive of <rt- 
 Tos) : grain, food. 
 
 1 § 462. 3- ^ § 153- 3- 
 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 14 
 
 * § 387- 2- 
 
210 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 469. I. I. /SacTiXei'S (rvv (TTparevfjiaTi itoWo) irpotr- 
 epx^rat ws ets {Jt-o-XV^ irap-eaKevaa-fievos- 2. ouSeis 
 avro) ip^dxero ovSe tois ep-npocr6ev avTov Teray/Ae/ois. 
 
 3. Koja-kap^dvovcn Se to)v re aXXav XPVH'^'''^'^ '''"' 
 irXela-Ta Si.-7)pira(Tpeva koi ei n^ alriov r) ttotov '^v. 
 
 4. SL-yjpTTacrTo vtto tov /3a<TiXLKov crTpaTevpaTo<; Kat, 
 avTo.^ TO. dno twv oIkmv ^vka.^ 5. koI SrjXou rjv on 
 iyyv<i TTOV /SacriXeus ^v ^ aWos ris w eir-eTeraKTO 
 raCra wpdrTetv. 6. koI iyo) p.6vo? twv Kara Tovi 
 "EXXijfas TerayjJbevtav ovk e(j)vyov. 7. to a-Tparevp^a 
 TTokij rjv, (Scrre tov Hepcnrjv iK-TrenXyj-^aai. 8. Kai 
 OTTotoi? X.o'yot? KXeap^os en-eto-e Ku/jot' aXXi^ yeypa- 
 Trrai." 9. CTrel 8e 01 (TTpaTrjyol (rw-^iKrippei/oi ■^crav, 
 iv TToWfj 8r) diTopia rjcrav 01 '^EXXiji'es. lO. pouoi oe 
 KaTa-XeXeLpuevoL ^crav, ovSe 'nnrid ovSeva^ ayppa^ov 
 expvTes. %l. TTpo-KaT-eCXriTTTaL yap rjptv^ 6 virep ttJs 
 KaTafidaeci)^ Xo^os. 12. Xeiptcro(j&os Se etSe Trpo-Kar- 
 eiXfjppevrjv TTjv aKponoXiv. 13. KaXdi/ ti^ 7r/)os reus 
 iv XoipSeaL ^ap/Sdpov; iireTTpaKTO vplv}" 14. Tropevo- 
 pevoi 8' iv-Tvy)(dvovcri X64>(o vnep r^s 68ov Kar-i.iX'qpp.eva 
 
 VTTO TtOV TToXepCcOV. 
 
 II. I. Cyrus, prepared for battle, advanced against the 
 enemy. 2. Most of the possessions had been plundered 
 by the king's army. 3. These soldiers have been led up 
 to the king. 
 
 1 Cp. § 232. I. 3. 2 even. ^ very, § 123. I ; cp. § 394. II. 3. 
 
 * Subject of 8i'-^pirao-TO. ^ it had beendirected. 
 
 ^ it has been written. ' § 428. 
 
 *§53. (/. ^ a noble deed (^cf.% 2^2.1.10). ^"§458. 
 
FUTURE PERFECT MIDDLE AND PASSIVE 211 
 
 XLVIII 
 
 THE FUTURE PERFECT MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. MEAN- 
 ING OF FUTURE PERFECT. VERBAL ADJECTIVES 
 IN .t6<! and -reo?. DATIVE OF AGENT WITH 
 VERBALS IN -reo? 
 
 470. There is but one form for the future perfect middle 
 and passive (§ 383); the meaning is generally passive; but 
 the form is uncommon in either the middle or passive use. 
 
 471. The future perfect passive (middle) is formed from 
 the reduplicated (perfect) theme, plus the future sufifix o-%, 
 to which the endings of person (indicative) or mood and 
 person (optative) are added. The middle endings are 
 used.v The forms are like the future middle, with redupli- 
 cation of the theme. 
 
 472. 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT PASSIVE (MIDDLE) OF X«« 
 
 Indie. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Sing. .Dual 
 Xc-Xv-o-o-iiai. / s/tall have been loosed 
 Xe-Xv^o-ji, -o-ei X«-X«-<re-<r6ov 
 Xe-Xv-<r£-Toi Xe-Xv-o-s-o-Oov 
 
 Plur. 
 X6-XO-<rd-|ji69a 
 Xe-Xv-o-e-o-Ot 
 Xe-Xu-<ro-VTai 
 
 Opt. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Xe-Xi)-o-ot-|i.t)v 
 
 Xe-Xu-o-oi-o 
 
 Xt-Xv-croi-To 
 
 
 Xt-Xi)-iroi-<r6ov 
 Xe-XU-<rot-<r6i)V 
 
 X«-Xv-o-oJ-(jie9o 
 X€-Xu-(roi-<rB€ 
 
 Xt-Xv-O-Ol-VTO 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Xj-Xw-o-£-<r9ai 
 
 
 
 
 Partic. 
 
 X«-Xii-<r6-|Mvos, 1 
 
 r|, ov 
 
 
 
 473. -Like Xe-\i5-<7o-;ita£ are inflected.: 
 
 \£-\£i\l/o-fmi (XoVctf) I shall have been left ; 
 Ke-Kml/o-fjLM (kotttu)) I shall have been cuf; 
 lu-iurq-ao-iiM {fi,eiji,v7]fw.L) I shall remember (see Vocabulary XL VI) . 
 
212 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 474. The future perfect passive may be used to denote 
 a future act as sure to occur. It is then an emphatic future : 
 
 KaTa-KeK6\j/ovTai they shall be surely cut down ; 
 XeXet'i/reTat he will be left. 
 
 VERBAL ADJECTIVES 
 
 475. Their form. — Verbal adjectives end in -to^, ri, 6v,^ 
 and -reo?, a, ov. These endings are generally added to 
 that form of the verb theme which is used in the first 
 aorist passive (without the augment). If the theme ends 
 in a mute, the necessary euphonic changes must be made 
 (§ 387. I and 2). 
 
 476. Their meaning. — The adjective with the suffix -to? 
 may denote (i) a completed act like the Latin perfect pas- 
 sive participle ; or (2) a possible act, like Latin adjectives 
 in -UNs, English -ad/e : 
 
 Xv-TOi that may be loosed, looseable ; 
 
 a-y8a-Tos that may not be trodden on, impassable (i-^d-6riv, from 
 
 /3atV(i>) j 
 a-SioL-Pa-TOi not to be crossed, impassable (Si-e-jSd-^iyi/) ; 
 a-<j)vXaK-TOi unguarded (i-^vXAx-Grjv). 
 
 477. The adjective with the suffix -reo? denotes a neces- 
 sity, Uke the Latin gerundive : 
 
 StuKTeos (necessary) to be pursued (i-Siio)(-6rjv was pursued) ; 
 8ia-;8aT£os (necessary) to be crossed (Si-e-jSd-^iyi' was crossed) ; 
 TTpaicreos (necessary) to be done {i-7rpax-6rivvfa.s done). 
 
 ' Compound verbals in -tos have recessive accent and two endings : -tos 
 (masc. and fem.), -tov (neut.). But prepositional compounds denoting possi- 
 bility are usually of three endings and accented like simple verbals. Thus 
 Sia-^aTos, TJ, 6v, aHe to be crossed, fordable (of a river). 
 
FUTURE PERFECT MIDDLE AND PASSIVE 2^ 
 
 Such verbal adjectives may be used : 
 
 1 . Personally : TroTa^im Bia-j3aTeo<i earCv a river must be 
 crossed. 
 
 2. Impersonally ^ : ireiaTeov (TreiOofiai obey) earCv it must 
 be obeyed, obedience must be rendered (with dat); Tropevreov 
 (TTopevo/xaL) icrrcv it must be proceeded, one must proceed ; 
 (TKewTeov (a-Ke-TTTO/jbai consider) ia-riv it must be considered. 
 
 karliy) may be omitted (§ 291). 
 
 478. With the verbal in -reo? the agent is regularly ex- 
 pressed by the dative (cp. § 458): 
 
 Ttnira. TrpaKria /*ot this must be done by me. 
 
 479. It must be observed that necessity is far more com- 
 monly expressed by Set and the infinitive (§ 223) with subject 
 accusative, and by similar expressions, than by the verbal 
 adjective in -reo?. 
 
 480. VOCABULARY XLVIII 
 
 PaSis, eta, v : deep. ireio-Tfov (verbal adj. of ir££6o|iOi), 
 
 Sco-iroTiis, o«, 6 : master. Despot. impers. : one must obey, with 
 
 Sia-Par^os, a, ov (verbal adj. of 8ia- dat. 
 
 PaCvci)) : necessary to d.e crossed. iropeurfos, o, ov (verbal adj. of iro- 
 
 Sia-paT6s, -fi, ov (verbal adj. of ptiofiai) : necessary to de passed 
 
 Sia-pa(v(i>) : adte to be crossed, over, to be traversed; neut. 
 
 fordable (of a river). Cp. d- impers.^ 07te must proceed. 
 
 Sid-Paros (§ 108). o-Ktirrfov (verbal adj. of o-KtirTO- 
 
 SiuKT^os, o, ov (verbal adj. of (lai), impers. : it must be con- 
 
 SkGku) ; necessary to be pursued. sidered, one must consider. 
 
 6av|jiao-T6s, ■(\, ov (verbal adj. of rpu-TiSs, ^, 6v (verbal adj. of Tixpi- 
 
 davfid^u) : admirable, wonder- o-ku) : able to be wounded, vul- 
 
 ful, strange. nerable. 
 
 |ieTd-ire|iirTos, ov (verbal adj. of uito-Jipyiov, ov, t6 (JV76V yoke') : 
 
 liera-ir^liiroijiai.) : sent after, someihing under t/te yoke, beast 
 
 summoned. of burden. 
 
 1 The impersonal verbal may even take an object. Thus StuKT^ov Io-tI rd 
 6iipCa one must pursue the wild beasts. 
 
^4 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 481. I. I. av Se eS yevrjTat, tl, ov fxe^vrjaecrdai ai 
 (j)d(TLv. 2. bXTTe (jiiKos rjfjilu ovSeU XeXeii/zerai. 3. vvp 
 8e SiojKTeov iqTLV. 4. isiv yap dXXr/'Xots fia.x€a7](r0e, 
 vofjii^ere ' eV TrjSe Tjj rjfj^epa ifj-e re KaTa-KeKOxliecrdat, koi 
 vfias ov TToXi) iixov ixxTepov. 5. Tropevriou iaTUP ori 
 Ta-viCTTa. 6. 6 Se koxo-jo's e/MaOev otl a<^v\aKTOv etij 
 TO tepov ^copCov. 7. Kol TTua-riov iarl tm SeaTTOTy. 
 8. TTap-rjv 8e Kal^ XeLpLa-0(j)o<s, fJieToi-TTefjiTTTO^ vtto 
 Kvpov. 9. TTopevTeov S' r^pXv tovs Trputrov^ ora- 
 djxov'i^ ft)s fJiaKpoTaTovs. lO. TTOTaixo<; Se ^a6v<s rjfuv 
 icTTi 8ia-y8areos. 11 • ol Se tToXeixLOi TpcuTol eiai 
 IxaXXou rjfiwi'. 12. et Se p^rj dya96<; icTTiv, ouSei'* 
 davp^aarov^ 1 3. crKeirTeov icrTlv 077ws ws TrXeicTTa * 
 v7ro[,vyi,a apTrdacop^ev. 14. Kara yap p,4crov^ t6i» 
 crTa6p,ov TovTOV TroTap.bv rjvpov^ oia^arov. 
 
 II. I. The horses will certainly^ be loosed. 2. We must 
 proceed five days' journey to Celaenae, that large and pros- 
 perous city. 3. If he should not be brave, it would not be 
 at all ^ strange. 4. A messenger reported ^^ that the river 
 was impassable. 
 
 1 Imv. 5! a/so. 8 I ,8i_ 4 i„ no respect (§ 284). 
 
 6 § 291. 6 § 192. ' § 443- ' § 474- 
 
 3 not at all = oiiiv (§ 284). ^ 8<t>ij- 
 
SYNOPSIS OF THE ii-VERB 
 
 "i 
 
 ' XLIX 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE fi-VERB. PRINCIPAL PARTS OF 
 TYPICAL VERBS. SOME COMMON SUFFIXES OF 
 NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 
 
 482. SYNOPSIS OF \6<a loose; THEME i^''' 
 
 ^ . Uv- 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 «• 
 
 
 Indic. 
 
 SUBJV. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Partic. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 \va 
 
 \ia 
 
 Xvoijii 
 
 XOe 
 
 XvElV 
 
 X^»v 
 
 Impf. 
 
 'iKvov 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Xvtro) 
 
 
 Xv(roi,|j.i 
 
 
 Xvo-ElV 
 
 Xijo-uv 
 
 Aor. 
 
 VXiJo-a 
 
 \v<ra 
 
 Xvo-aifii 
 
 Xvcov 
 
 XOa-ai 
 
 Xvo-as 
 
 Pf. 
 
 X^uKa 
 
 §436 
 
 §436 
 
 
 XeXukIvu 
 
 XcXvKcis 
 
 Plup. 
 
 IXcXvKT) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Middle 
 
 
 Indic. 
 
 SuBJV. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Paetic. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Xvo)jiai 
 
 X^(i>p[,ai 
 
 Xvo(fi.r)v 
 
 Xvov 
 
 Xdeo-Sai 
 
 Xudjuvos 
 
 Impf. 
 
 4Xv6)i,T|v 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Xviro|iai 
 
 
 Xi3irof|ji,T)v 
 
 
 Xvo-co-Bai 
 
 Xv(r6|iEvos 
 
 Aor. 
 
 IXvcrdftT)v 
 
 Xi)o*(i}|jiai 
 
 Xv(raC|iT|v 
 
 XCo-ai 
 
 Xvo-ao-Oai 
 
 XurdfiEvos 
 
 pr 
 
 XSlviToi " 
 
 XcXvjii^os u 
 
 XeXvfilvos 
 Etr)v 
 
 X^vo-o 
 
 \i\ia-eai 
 
 X(Xv|ii{vbs 
 
 Plup. 
 
 IXeXiifiTiv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 FutPf. 
 
 XcXva-opLai 
 
 
 XcXv(rot)ii]v 
 
 
 XeXvo-co-Sai 
 
 XEXv(r6)i£vos 
 
2l6 
 
 BEGINNERS GREEK BOOK 
 Passive 
 
 
 Indic. 
 
 SuBJV. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. - 
 
 Parti c 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 
 like the 
 
 Middle 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 XvO'iio-aiJ.ai, 
 
 
 \v6i](roCfjLT]v 
 
 
 XvS^jo-ecrSai 
 
 Xv6t]0'6|J.€VOS 
 
 Aor. 
 
 i\i9T\V 
 
 XvOu 
 
 XvSeC-qv 
 
 XiSllTl 
 
 XvOrivai 
 
 XuBcCs 
 
 Pf. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Plup. 
 
 like the 
 
 Middle 
 
 
 
 
 
 Fut. Pf. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 483. SYNOPSIS OF XeCiroi leave IN THE SECOND AORIST 
 
 AND SECOND PERFECT; THEMES 
 
 Xetir-, Xotir-j Xiir- 
 
 Active 
 
 
 Indic. 
 
 SuBJV. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Partic. 
 
 2 Aor. 
 
 2Pf. 
 
 2 Plup. 
 
 ^iirov 
 
 XeXoiira 
 
 IXcXoCirr] 
 
 Xtiro) 
 §446 
 
 X(iroi|ii 
 §446 
 
 XCire 
 
 Xiiretv 
 XcXoiir^vai 
 
 Xiir(iv 
 XeXoiirus 
 
 Middle 
 
 
 rNDIC. 
 
 SuBJV. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Partic. 
 
 2 Aor. 
 
 cXiir6)ii)v 
 
 XCir<>)p.ai 
 
 Xi.iro(|jii)v 
 
 XlTTOV 
 
 XiiricrSai 
 
 Xiirdjuvos 
 
PRINCIPAL PARTS OF VERBS 
 
 m 
 
 484. SYNOPSIS OF pXAiTTu Auri IN THE SECOND AORIST 
 
 PASSIVE AND SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE; 
 
 THEME pXap- 
 
 Passive 
 
 Indic. 
 
 SUBJV. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Partic. 
 
 2Fut. 
 2 Aor. 
 
 pXaP^o-opiai 
 4p\dpT]v 
 
 pXaPoi 
 
 pX.aPT|(ro[|j.T]v 
 pXaPcCiiv 
 
 pXdprjei 
 
 pXaP'^o'co'Oai 
 pXaPfjvai 
 
 p\apT|(r6|jicvos 
 pXaPeCs 
 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS OF VERBS 
 
 485. The following tense systems have now been studied 
 - all the tense systems of the ordinary Greek verb : 
 I. Present (including imperfect): Active, Middle (Pas- 
 
 sive), 
 2. 
 3- 
 4- 
 5- 
 6. 
 
 7- 
 feet). 
 8. 
 9- 
 
 Future : Active, Middle. 
 
 First Aorist : Active, Middle. 
 
 Second Aorist : Active, Middle. 
 
 First Perfect (including first pluperfect) : Active. 
 
 Second Perfect (including second pluperfect) : Active. 
 
 Perfect Middle (including pluperfect and future per- 
 
 First Passive (first aorist and first future passive). 
 
 Second Passive (second aorist and second future 
 passive). 
 
 a. If one knows the first form in each of these systems 
 (the first person singular of the indicative mood), he can 
 by the rules already mastered produce the complete inflec- 
 tion of the (o-verb. Therefore the first forms in these sys- 
 tems are together known as the principal parts of the verb. 
 
2i8 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 486. It is not usual for a single verb to be inflected in 
 all of the above tense systems. Most verbs are in this 
 sense defective. 
 
 487. The following list (page 219) includes the prin- 
 cipal parts of some typical verbs already studied. Vacant 
 places indicate that the tense system is wanting. For the 
 principal parts of the other verbs that have been intro- 
 duced into the work thus far, consult the general Vocabu- 
 lary at the end of the book. 
 
 488. The second perfect active TreVo/^^a illustrates the 
 tendency to change an e sound in the theme to o in this 
 tense. Cp. also XeXonra (XeiTra). 
 
 489. The second aorist passive eaTpd(j>r}v illustrates the 
 tendency to change an e sound in the theme to a in this 
 tense. Cp. also eTpaTrrjv (TpeTrco). 
 
 490. The verbs arpecj^ai turn, Tpiira turn, and rpecjxo 
 nourish, change e of the theme to a in the perfect middle : 
 ecrrpa/i/jLaL, Terpafifiai, Tedpa/M/Mai. 
 
 SOME COMMON SUFFIXES USED IN FORMING NOUNS AND 
 ADJECTIVES 
 
 Nouns 
 
 491. Indicating the agent : 
 
 -ev- : iinreik (itttto? /torse) horseman, 
 -ra- : ro^oTrji {ro^ov bow) bowman ; 
 
 irikTaaTTfi {ireXTd^m be a peltast) peltast. 
 -Tt)p- : awTrjp (aai^a) save) savior, 
 -rop; nom. -rcop : prjrmp, gen. pijTopo'i {ei-pT)-Ka I 
 have spoken), orator. 
 
PRINCIPAL PARTS OF VERBS 219 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 > 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 f 1 
 
 1 i 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 0* 
 
 illl ^ i 
 
 i P CO. X 5 
 
 1 
 
 i- 
 
 II 
 
 a. 
 ih 
 
 ,6 
 
 3 
 
 < 
 
 'A i 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 .1 1 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 5" ?! c 
 
 > 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ll g 
 
 
 1 
 
 If 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 * 
 
 ;? 
 
 'i 
 
 3 J. 
 
 1 t 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 u 
 s 
 
 
 Ji 
 
 iiil 
 
 
 hi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 il 1 
 1-1:1 a mI 1 
 
 1 
 
 ^J 
 
 1 f 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 1 
 
220 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 492. Indicating quality or an abstract idea : 
 
 -id- : a-wTTjpid {aairrip savior) safety ; 
 
 vTTO-^id {vTT-o-KJrofjbai I shall suspect) sus- 
 picion ; 
 (f)i\id ((^t'Xo? friend) friendship. 
 
 493. Indicating action : 
 
 -en- : KaTd^aai<; {Kara^aivco descend) descent ; 
 Ta^K (TdrTco arrange) arrangement 
 (cp. § 381). 
 
 494. Indicating result of action : 
 
 -/iar- : Trpd'yiia, gen. TrpayfiaTO'; (irpaTTCo do), deed, 
 etc. ; 
 a-rpdTevp.a (crTpaTeva) make an expedition) 
 expedition, army. 
 
 495. Indicating smallness, etc., although the diminu- 
 tive idea is not always preserved : . 
 
 -to- : p(;/3uo-('oi' {xpv(y6<i gold) piece of gold; 
 iraihiov {ttoI'; child) little child ; 
 Xioplov (x&po? place) place, stronghold 
 
 Adjectives 
 
 496. -to- : iro\ep,io<i (7ro'\e/uo? war) hostile ; 
 
 AaKeBai/jLovio^ {AaKeSaifiwv Lacedaemon) 
 
 Lacedaemonian , 
 Si/caio^ (Slkt] justice) just ; 
 ap')(alo<; (apxh beginning) ancient, 
 -mo-: ^aaiXiKo^ (/SairtXeu? king) kinglike ; 
 'FjWrjvtKO'i ("EXXrjv a Greek) Greek ; 
 iroXejj.iKo^ (7ro'\e/.io9 war) warlike. 
 
CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 221 
 
 CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE A-DECLENSION AND OF 
 THE O-DECLENSION. CONTRACT ADJECTIVES. 
 THE INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE USED AS 
 A NOUN 
 
 497. Learn the declension of 71? earth, fiva mina (§ 594) ; 
 vov^ mind (§ 596) ; ^/aucoO?, r\, ovv, golden, ap'^vpov's, a, ovv, 
 silver, aifKov^, rj, ovv, simple (§ 609) ; ei/vow, ovv, well-dis- 
 posed {% 610). 
 
 498. RULES OF CONTRACTION 
 i -{■ o =^ ov 
 
 -\- 0= ov 
 
 Any short vowel before a long vowel (or diphthong) or 
 before a is absorbed. 
 
 But, in the singular of the o-declension, 
 
 e. -V o, = 7] (a after p). 
 
 a. The syllable resulting from contraction is always 
 long, — a long vowel or a diphthong. 
 
 b. Contract nouns and adjectives are regularly cir- 
 cumfiexed on the ultima throughout. But forms of the 
 o-declension have the acute accent {not the circumflex) on 
 the ultima of the nominative, accusative, and vocative dual, 
 when the ultima is accented. 
 
 499. Compounds of j^oC? mind and ttXow voyage keep 
 the accent throughout on the same syllable as in the nomi- 
 native singular. Thus ebvmv, genitive plural (for evvoaiv). 
 Such compounds also do not contract in the neuter plural 
 rominative and accusative. Thus evvoa. 
 
222 BEGINNER'S GREEK B»»K 
 
 500. The infinitive preceileA fey a neuter article (t«', t»v, 
 Tft)) may lie usei as a n«un, in the varieus c»nstructiens ef 
 a n»un : 
 
 TO a-rroBvya-Kiiv (nom. Or acc.) death ; 
 <^d/8os Tov (TTpaTevcrai. fear of taking the field ; 
 cKitiXva-ev aiiTovjs Tov koluv (gen. of separation) ttjv \aip5.v he hindered 
 them from burning the land. 
 
 a. This construction of the infinitive is common after 
 prepositions. Frequent is Sta ro followed by an infinitive : 
 
 hik ro <7Tevr]v thai Trjv oBov on account of the fact that the road was 
 narrow. 
 
 501. VOCABULARY L 
 
 airXovs, f|, oOv : simple, sincere. irXovs, oB, 6 : voyage ; a sailing, 
 dp^Vipiov, ou, t6 : silver, money. sailing weather. Cp. irXotov. 
 
 dp-yxjpoOs, d, oBv : of silver, silver. ttotI, enclitic adv. of time : ever, 
 7*1, Tis, T) : earpi, land. Geo- at any time, at some tim£, once 
 
 metry ([i^Tpov measure). on a time. 
 
 cK-pao-is, €a>s, T| (Ik-PoCvoi) : pas- irpocr-^x^i with tov voSv : direct the 
 
 sage out, mountain pass. mind to, with dat. 
 
 €i!-voi)s, ouv : well-disposed. TCypris, itos, 6 : Tigris, a great 
 (ivd, OS, T) : mina, one sixtieth of a river of western Asia. 
 
 talent; i.e. about $18. toitos, oh, 6: place. Topic, 
 
 vovs, oB, 6 : mind. yjfi<rt>v%, t\, oBv :golden, ofgold,gold. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 502. I. I. iv Tourw 8e tw tottcij riv r\ yrj neSiou airav 
 oicnrep OakaTTa. 2. koX Xeyerai^ ws koXoX ttXci elcnv 
 eis Tr)v 'EWaSa. 3. yjp^av tov ^la^aiueuv tov HiyprjTa 
 ■jTOTajxov. 4. 01 TToKifxioi idavfjiaCov tl ol "'EXkrjve'; iv 
 vai e)(oi€i/? 5. 6 8e (TTpaTrjyo<s rjye Trpos Trjv <f)avepav 
 
 1 Impers. 2 § 245. 
 
CONTRACT NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES 22^ 
 
 €K^a(riv oTTws TavT-fi Ty 6S(^ ot noXefJiLoi, Trpoaexotev tov 
 vovv. 6. i^rjkavvov a»s raxiCTTa 8td 70 dvdyKrjv ehat 
 Xafi^aveiv rd CTrtTifSeia. 7. i/Oj/ u/Ati/ e^ecrTtv iropeve- 
 adat, OTTT} av iXrjcrde,^ koI Kara yrjv koI Kard 0d\aTTav. 
 8. €TT€ix\\i€ Se a-dX-myyd re dpyvpdv koI crKrjvrjv d^idv 
 OGKa ixvcjv.^ g. <^tA,ous Se dirkov? re /cat ewous K5/jos 
 et^o'. 10. ot /faX.01 re /cat dya^ot eSi'ot aurw '^crai'. 
 1 1 . <^o/8ov ySao-tXeus vapeax^ ^ tov crrpaTevcraC ttotc iw' 
 avTov. 1 2. iKOikvae tov<; tTTireds rou StayOTTct^etv t^z/ 
 ^wpdv. 
 
 II. 13. Sui'aTos ^v ^\ov TTapa(TKevdt,^(rdai 8td to 
 TToWous e^^eti* viT'r)p€Td<s. 14. Kat u/tets rrapaa-Kev 
 dt.ea-Qe'^ ws d/xa t^ VH-^P^- dva^ofiei'OL,^ iav ttXov<s y. 
 15. /8ao-tXed 8' €(f)acrav exett' dcopdKa -^pvcrovv /cat 
 dcTTTtSa )(pv(T'^v. 16. 6 8' eT^e Se/ca jitva? dpyvpiovJ' 
 17. 6 Se K(t}p.dpxr]<i Toi? 77uA,ds e/c\eto-e Std to /at) 
 iOikeiv 8e)(^£crdaL tov'? "KWrjva'i. 
 
 III. I. What have you in mind? 2. They had fear'' 
 of marching against the king. 3. All the soldiers were 
 well-disposed to Cyrus. 
 
 1 § 248. I or § 400. 2 § 402. ' caused. * Imv. 
 
 5 dv-d70|iai. sometimes, as here, means put to sea; for the constructirn 
 see §§ 331, 332. 
 
 * 0/gen. (§ 53. /), denoting material. '' Use the noun. 
 
224 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 LI 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. PRESENT SYSTEM OF iroieoi. DIS- 
 SYLLABIC VERBS IN -eo). TWO ACCUSATIVES 
 AFTER VERBS OF MAKING, APPOINTING; ASK- 
 ING, DEPRIVING. CONSTRUCTION OF hoKea 
 
 503. The inflection of contract verbs differs from that 
 of regular co-verbs in the present system only. In all other 
 systems these verbs, if regular, are inflected like the corre- 
 sponding tenses of Xvco. 
 
 504. The syllable resulting from contraction receives an 
 accent if either one of the component syllables, in the un- 
 contracted form, had an accent ; it receives a circumflex, if 
 the first vowel had the acute ; but it receives an acute, 
 if the second vowel had the acute. 
 
 505. Examples of accentuation of contract verbs : 
 
 TT'oieco contracts to ttokS iiroieov contracts to eVoiow 
 
 iroieofiev " " Tj-oiovfiev iiroiee " " eiroia 
 
 earaax; " " ecrTO)? 
 
 PRESENT SYSTEM OF iroi^w 
 
 506. Learn the inflection in the present system of the 
 active and middle (= passive) voices of Troteo) do, make 
 
 (§ 643). 
 
 a. Similarly are inflected aipea take, mid. choose ; a^- 
 iKveo/xai arrive ; r^'^eofiai lead {viit\\ gen. or dat.) or think. 
 
 507. RULES OF CONTRACTION 
 e + 6 = et 
 
 e + o =: ov 
 
 e before a long vowel or diphthong is absorbed. 
 
CONTRACT VERBS IN -EO 225 
 
 508. Verbs in -ew of two syllables, like irXem sail, con- 
 tract only when ei results ; otherwise they are uncontracted : 
 
 irXitii, irXeis, ttXei, ■7rA,£0/A£v, irXeiTe, TrXiovfTi \ 
 8%, subjv. of Set (it is necessary) . 
 
 509. Outside of the present system the final c of the 
 theme is regularly lengthened to y\ : 
 
 TTOiS (-£(!)), TTOiyjata, iiroirjcra, ■treiTOiTjKa, ireTTOtij/mi, iiroirjOriv. 
 
 Exceptions must be learned as they occur.. Thus rjpeOrjv 
 I was chosen, not yprid-qv (from alpeeo). 
 
 510. Verbs of making, appointing, and similar meanings 
 may take two accusatives, one of which stands in a predi- 
 cate relation to the other : 
 
 (TaTpa.Trrji' avrov eTroiijcrev he made him satrap ; 
 evvovv avTov ivofiicrcv he thought him well-disposed. 
 
 511. Verbs of asking and depriving may take two accu- 
 satives, one of \h& person, the other of the thing: 
 
 aiTei avrov fiicrOov he asks him for pay ; 
 
 a.<j>Mpe.i(TOai ToiJs'EA.A.Tjvas t;;v yrjv to deprive the Greeks of their land. 
 
 512. AoKw (-€(0) seem is commonly used personally (cp. 
 § 391) with the infinitive in indirect discourse : 
 
 SoKcl ovx mpa cTvai travea-Oai it Seems not to be an hour for-^-esting 
 
 (///. the hour seems not, etc.) ; 
 iSoKow raxii ttoiuv ravTa they seemed to do this quickly. 
 
 a. There is also a less common but nevertheless fre- 
 quent use of Bo/cet as an impersonal verb, in the meaning 
 it seems good or best. The accompanying iniinitive is the 
 subject of the impersonal verb : 
 
 ihoKu avTm vope 'ecrOai ai/u it seemed best to him to proceed inland. 
 3. AoKw (-ecu) sometimes means I think like vo/jLi^m: 
 
 iSoKei fiacnXid -q^av he thought the king would come. 
 beginner's gk. bk. — 15 . 
 
BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 513- 
 
 VOCABULARY LI 
 
 alp^cD, alpyj<r(D, ctXov, ■^pr[Ka, 'g'pr||iai, 
 Xip^Oiiv : ia^e, capture, seize ; 
 MID. choose. See Vocabularies 
 XXVI, XXXII. Heresy. 
 
 oXtia, at^'tjcru, f|TTi<ra, t!''''!''") 'D'"''!" 
 (loi, tiT'^fltiv : ask a favor, beg, 
 ask for something from some- 
 body (two accusatives) ; mid. 
 ask for oneself. 
 
 oiro-ir\^<i) : sail away. 
 
 d4>-atp€0|jiai (mid. of alp^co) : take 
 away for oneself, deprive, rob 
 somebody of something (two 
 accusatives) . 
 
 d4i-LK-vi-op.ai (theme ik- ; v€- ap- 
 pears only in preS. system), a<|)- 
 C|o|jiai, d<|>-iK6p,i)v, d<|>-t7|j.ai : ar- 
 rive, come. 
 
 SoK^w (theme Sok-, but 8ok€- in 
 pres. system), 8ti|ci>, eSo^o, 84- 
 SoYfiai, I86x9t)v : seem, be re- 
 puted ; seem best; think. 
 Dogma. 
 
 TcyEoiiai, riY^o-opLai, ■fi'Y'n<rd|jiiiv, 1^i\- 
 noi; lead, guide (with gen. or 
 dat.) ; think, believe. Cp. T|7E|uiv. 
 
 64(1), Seiiiroiiiai : run. 
 
 86€v, rel. adv. : whence, from which 
 place, from, what source. 
 
 irXc'o), irXcvo-oixat, CTrXevira, ireir\cvKa, 
 ir^irXcvirij.ai (<r is irregularly in- 
 serted) : sail. Cp. irXotov, 
 ir\o€s. 
 
 iroUd), iroi^(ra>, 4iroCT|o-a, •netmir^Ko,, 
 ireirohinai, ei70i'(i6T]v : do, make; 
 the mid. is translated like the 
 act., but implies in or for one^s 
 own interest. Poet (irott]T'/|s) . 
 
 iroXcpLiKos, TJ, 6v (ird\£p.os) : suited 
 to war, warlike ; hostile. 
 
 irw-iroTs, adv. of time : ever yet, 
 ever. 
 
 irffis, interr. adv. . how f in what 
 way? Cp. oirus. 
 
 cTTpaTcCa, as, ■>] (o-TpaTcvd)) : expe- 
 dition. 
 
 Tpoiros, 01), 6 (rp^irti)) : turn, man- 
 ner, method, character. Tropic. 
 
 <t>oP4Ki (<|>iSPos), <|>oP^ir(>), 4()>6PT|(ra, 
 irE(|>6Pi]p.ai, l(f>oPirj6T|v : frighten ; 
 MID. with dep. aor. pass., be 
 afraid, fear. The mid. forms 
 are common (4iop4o|jLai, i|>op^- 
 o-ofiai, ir«|>6pT)|jLai, l4><>P^9^v) . 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 514- I- I- X^OX T(p aVTO) TpOTTW^ TOVTOV TOV \6(f>0V 
 
 aupovcriv. 2. aipovvraL avTOv ap)(oi'Ta tijs crTpaTeCd^. 
 3. eoofcet oe hrjXov ewai otl aiprjcrovTat avrov (rrpaTrf- 
 ydi'. 4. eis Se eXne ^ Kvpov aiTeiv irXola, ws dvoTrXeoLev. 
 
 § MI. 
 
 ' propcsed (§ 334). 
 
CONTRACT VERBS IN -Efl 227 
 
 5- KXeap)(0'S 817 eSo/fei yevecrOai dvrjp TToXejuiiKos. 6. 6 
 Xo^ayos e/SouXeuero ti ;^/3^ ■n-oieti' Trepl tov dvco a-Tpareve- 
 cruai. 7- Ttdw ^aXcTrov eSo/tet elvat ju,t^ TrXeii' oi/caSe. 
 8. Ktti eiToiovv ovTct)? ovTOL. Q. /Ctti (TT p<xTrjyov<i alpovf- 
 rat eauTWi' Sexa. lo. rous 8' dv9 poinovi rd )(p7jfji,aTa 
 dt^aipovmai. 1 1 . ivTavda dcfuKveiTai. rj '%vevv4cno<s 
 yvvri napd Kvpov. 12. (Twe/SovXeveTo^ ttox; av rrju 
 p,a)(y)v TToioiTO. 13. ovtol S; i<j>o^ovvTO avTov. 14. ov- 
 SeVa 77(U7roT€ T'^^i' -^copdv Kvpo<; dcj^eiXero. 
 
 II. 15. rjyeuTO 8' avrois 6 K(opdp)(r)^ XeXvpevo?^ Bid 
 ■^i6vo<;. 16. »fat^ TTaires 8e ideov. 17. (jio/Sotpyju 8' 
 av rw Tyye/AOf (, eTrea-dat, prj rjfjid^ dydyy oOev * ovk etrrai ^ 
 i^eXOeiv. 18. /cai rjyelcrffai, iKeXevov avrov ottov tov 
 Bpopov'' TTeTTOirjKO)? eh)!' 19. alprjcropai 8' oSi' vpd<;, 
 Kal (jvv vpZv o Ti dv Ser) 77eicrojoiat. 20. rourovs dp^ov- 
 Ta<s iiToiei, tijs ^tupds. 
 
 III. I. We chose him general of the expedition. 2. I 
 should fear to ask * him for pay. 3. Cyrus was reputed to 
 have been ® a kingly man. 
 
 1 Mid. Ae consulted. ^ Cp. § 460. I. 2. ^ ^/j^. 
 
 * To a place y5-o»« which. ^ it will not be possible. * race course. 
 
 ^ The optative is due to implied indirect discourse, the direct form being 
 
 £irov . . . irciroCTiKas. ° Cp. sentence 1 7 above. ' -ycv^irSai. 
 
228 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 LII 
 
 PRESENT SYSTEM OF Tt/Jicia}. IRREGULAR CONTRACT 
 VERBS IN <d.w. INFINITIVE AFTER VERBS OF 
 PROMISING, HOPING, AND SWEARING. CLAUSES 
 INTRODUCED BY CONJUNCTIONS MEANING WHILE, 
 UNTIL, AND BEFORE 
 
 515. Learn the inflection in the present system of the 
 active and middle (= passive) voices of Tlfidco honor {^ 643). 
 
 a. Similarly are inflected ipcoTda) ask, impf . fipwrmv ; earn 
 permit, impf. dav (with irregular augment) ; ireipdoiiai try. 
 
 516. RULES OF CONTRACTION 
 
 a + an e-sound (e, ?;, et, j;) = a (or a), 
 a + an o-sound (0, m, 01, ov) = cb (or «). 
 I in the uncontracted form is subscript in the contracted 
 form. 
 
 517. Some verbs, including xpdop,ai use, and ^d<o live, 
 irregularly have 7) wherever a would naturally occur in the 
 contracted forms ; they likewise have 77 for a : 
 
 XP^crOai (pres. inf.), not -xpaa-dai; 
 
 t,rjv (pres. inf.), not ^av ; 
 
 ^rj (3 sing. pres. indie), not ^a. 
 
 518. Outside of the present system the final a of the 
 theme is regularly lengthened to t] : 
 
 tZ/xS {rlfidoi), TijLMjCTcu, iTtiJ,yjcra, TtTtfjirjKa, TtTC/irj/iai, irlfi'^B'qv. 
 
 a. But after e, t, or p (cp. §§ 1 14, 139) the final a of the 
 theme is retained in its long form, outside of the present 
 system : 
 
CONTRACT VERBS IN -AO 229 
 
 io) (eau)), iaaio, tiaaa^ iiaKa, eid/uu, daQrjv ; 
 TTupaojiai, Tretpatro/xai, etc. 
 
 Xpdoiiai, however, has xRWo/J-o-h etc. 
 
 519. The infinitive (commonly future) is used after verbs 
 oi promising, hoping, and swearing: 
 
 ■KtpX TovTu>v vTria-x^ro fiovXevaca-dai about these matters he promised 
 to take counsel. 
 
 a. The future infinitive used as above represents the 
 future indicative of direct discourse : 
 
 TTtpl TovToiv /SovXtvcrofiai about these matters I will take pounsel. 
 
 01/ 
 d. The negative used with this infinitive is /»^ although 
 
 ov was used in direct discourse (cp. § no. e): 
 
 vTri(r)(tTo pi^ iraxxTtcrdaL he promised Hot to stop {direct: ov ira-i- 
 
 (TO/JUlt) . 
 
 520. The supplementary participle in indirect discourse 
 (§ 441) is especially common after forms of opw (opdm) 
 see : 
 
 6pS> Lvirovs oVras iv T(S cTTpaTeofuiTi I See there are horses in the 
 axvarj {dii-ect : Ittttoi. diyiv) . 
 
 521. Besides the temporal conjunctions meaning when 
 (§§ 168, 202), there are other conjunctions of time mean- 
 ing so long as, while, 2mtil : eare, etu?, /J-expi (lentil); and 
 meaning until or before : irpiv. 
 
 K^ll. fe'aTC, €(os, and |i.€xpi (§ 521) take the same con- 
 structions as eVet' when (§§ 167, 248. 2 and a, 400, 417). 
 That is to say : 
 
 1 The augment is irregular. 
 
230 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 1. When they introduce a definite past act, they take a 
 past tense of the indicative (negative ov) : 
 
 Tt ovK iTTOirjo-ev, etrrc a~!rov8Zv Irv^ev ; what did he not do, until ' he 
 
 obtained a truce? 
 Iws 7rdA,£fios -nv, ■^Soix.rjv SO long as* there was war, I rejoiced. 
 
 2. When they introduce a future or a repeated act, they 
 take the subjunctive (with dv) after a primary tense or the 
 optative after a secondary tense : 
 
 TaSra Troiare lor' av cyu) eA^oj do this until* I Come ; 
 Icrre 8' av TroXe/x^Te, v7nuxvovijt.ai vfjuv rbv jxia-dov and SO long as* you 
 are at war, I promise you your pay. 
 
 523. irpiv un^il when following a negative clause usually 
 
 takes : 
 
 1 . The indicative of a definite past act : 
 
 OVK iiropcvero irplv 2<oKpaT£t (rwi^ovXtwraTo he did not proceed until 
 
 he had consulted Socrates ; 
 OVK iXOeiv rjOeXe, wplv r/ yvvrj avTov eTreto'ei' he did not wish to come, 
 
 until his wife persuaded him. 
 
 2. The subjunctive (with dv) of a future act : 
 
 [jLTj a.Tre\6rjTe Trplv av a.Kov(rrjT£, ktX. do not go away until you hear, 
 etc. 
 
 524. irpiv before depending on an affirmative clause takes 
 the infinitive alone or with subject accusative : 
 
 e4>vyou Trplv ■^ju.a? iXOeiv they fled before we arrived. 
 
 ' The context must determine between w/tiie (w /ong^ as) and unHl as 
 translations of to-re and ?ms. 
 

 525- 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. IN -AO 
 
 VOCABULARY Lll 
 
 231 
 
 Idu, iclo-ai, ctSo-a, ctSKa, dSpiai, tl&- 
 6r)v: permit, allow, let. For 
 impf. ctwv, etc., see §§ 515. a, 
 518. a. 
 
 fari. -6g|j,lii), Eiri-Siiii^ja-a), ^'ir-c6v|j.i)<ra : 
 
 S .^az/« (7«^V ^«ar^ j^/ o«, yearn, 
 desire, with inf. or gen. 
 
 Ipurddi, £p(i)T^<r(i>, T|p(i)TT|a'a, TJpta- 
 Ti)Ka, T|piiTT||iai, TipiDT^Sriv : aj'/fe 
 a question, inquire. To be 
 distinguished from aMu (Vo- 
 cabulary LI). Cp. TJpd)l.T|V 
 
 (Vocabulary XXXIV), which 
 is often used for TJp(irT|o-a. 
 See also §§ 343-34S- 
 
 8<r«, temporal conj. : while, so long 
 as, until. 
 
 8(i)s, temporal conj. : while, so long 
 as, until. 
 
 Jd<i>, Xfyra : live. 
 
 6edo|iai, 6ca(ro|iai, €6£a(rd|i,i)v, tc- 
 6^a|iai: look on, gaze at, see. 
 Theater. 
 
 li^Xpi, temporal conj. : until. 
 
 viKau (vtKi)), viK^<rci), cvtKt|ira, vevi- 
 KT|Ka, VEv{KT||xai, Ivik^jOtiv : con- 
 quer, surpass. 
 
 opdw (impf. eiipwyl), fut. £i|ro|iai, 
 2 aor. ctSov (Vocabulary XIX). 
 icipaKa or IdpSxa, {lipajiai or 
 u|i.|i,ai, £(|)eT)v: j«^, behold. 
 
 irei,pdo|iai, ircipcEcro|j.ai, l'ir€ipa(rdp,T|v, 
 ircireCpaiJiai, and 4ireipa6T|v : try, 
 attempt. Pirate. 
 
 iro\e|i^(i> (riXcjios), iro\«p,<i<r(i>, liro- 
 X4|i.i)(ra, n-CTToX^iJiiiKa, xciroX4|iT|- 
 |iai, 4'iroX€|i,'^6T|v : wage war, 
 make war on, with dat. (§317), 
 or irp6s and ace. 
 
 irpCv, temporal conj. : before, until. 
 irpio-eev (Vocabulary XXVI) 
 . . . irpiv = Lat. prius . . . 
 quam : earlier than, before. 
 
 Tlp,d(D (Ti|»^), Tiff^aro), lTf|jiT|ira, 
 Tcrf|iT|Ka, TETt|jiT||iai, lTi|i'^9i]v : 
 honor. 
 
 vir-io-xv^ofiai (Vo-xw, strong form 
 of i\ia, with pres. sufBx ve-), 
 wiro-<rx<i<ro|jioi., 4ir-«<rx<5(i.ilv, 4ir- 
 ctrxTiiiai : undertake, promise. 
 
 Xpdo)i.ai, xp^o'op.ai, lxp'no'd|ji.i]v, kA- 
 Xpi)|iai, with pass. aor. «xP''i- 
 o-6r|v : use, with dat. of means ; 
 cp. Lat. Utor with abl. 
 
 ' 1 
 ' i ' 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 526. I. I. eo)'?'^ av iraprf TL<;, XP^I^^'' o-^Ta. 2. koI 
 Tavra iiroCovv, fj^^xpi- (Tkoto^ iyeuero. 3. ol Se jBdpfia- 
 poL (f)evyov(n trplv opau toLs Td^€L<; Th<; t&u iroXe/j.Lcov. 
 
 1 This imperfect is irregular in having double augment, both syllabic i- and 
 temporal -w- ; cp. also pf. li&paKa and IcSpafiai. '^ while. 
 
232 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 4. /cat VTTLcrx'^eiTO {jltj KaKo<s ecreo"^ai. 5- T^^'-poLcroiiai •; 
 8e Tois TToikefjutoi'i TToXeixeiv ea-T^ av SoKrj aurois tto- 
 KefJLov^ Ttavcraa-dai. 6. Mivcav SrjKo'; rjv i-mdvii&v 
 TLfiacrdai. 7. ocrrts C'^i' eVt^u^ei, ireipda-Ooi vIkolv. 
 8. Kupos eta roi/ KXiap^ov ex^''^ '''^^^ crTpartojrds. 
 g. TavT/fv rrjv yi(j>vpav iireipcivTO SLa^aivetv ol EWtj- 
 j;es. 10. TO, oVX-g lyoyre? oiofieda av^ Kai rrj dperyj 
 •vpy\<Tda.i. 1 1 . vTrl<T^elTo Se aurw (pCkov avTov K.vpco 
 TTOi'^creLV. 12. et 8e Ti^ia opwij ayadov ovTa, ovhiva. 
 Tr]v ')((t)pav TTCOTTOTe d(^etXero. 13. /cai^* {i//,as opaxnv 
 6vTa.<i /ca/fous, irdvTe'S kolkoX icrovTai. 14. -QpcoTcou o 
 avTov tL -)(py] iroieiv. 
 
 II. 15. ol yajO TToXefjiiOL ov TrpocrOev iTToXefiTfaav 
 irpo? rjixd's irplv tows a-TpaTrjyoix; r)fxS)v crvvdka^ov. 
 16. iSacriXevs S' rJKova-e Tiaira^ipvov^^ on ol EXX.rjve'; 
 vlKmev TO Kad' axnov^.^ 1 7. oi)s ewpd e^eXovra? Kti'SiJ- 
 veveuv, tovtov; dp^ovra'S ttjs \(j)pa.<; inoCei Koi aXXots 
 Swpois irifjud. I'S. Qecoprai ol TraiSes rivas TlfXiOniivov; 
 VTTo /SacriXecDS. IQ- ot "EXXi^ves iviKcav tous Hepads 
 /fai KaToL yi^i/ Kal /caTct OdXarrav. 
 
 III. I. Before they advanced ten stadia, the Greeks 
 tried to cross this river. 2. While there was war, we kept 
 using the provisions of both friends and enemies. 3. We 
 saw that the soldiers were honoring Cyrus. 
 
 ' until. ^ § 201. ^ 
 
 " With the inf. (§ 277). ■> § 30. 
 
 ® Gen. of source (§ 201). ^ the division opposite themselves. 
 
 ' Antecedent of 08s at the beginning : those whom. 
 
CONTRACT VERBS IN -OO . 233 
 
 LIII 
 
 PRESENT SYSTEM OF BrjUco. COMPLEX SENTENCES 
 IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 
 527. Learn the inflection in the present system of the 
 active and middle (= passive) voices of SrjXoco show (§ 643). 
 
 a. Similarly are inflected a^ioa) demand, GKr\v6(o (a par- 
 allel forjn of aKrjvdco) encamp. 
 
 528. RULES OF CONTRACTION 
 
 + e or o or ov = ov. 
 
 o + ?; or (B = ft). 
 
 o + a diphthong containing t (et, 01, 17) = ot. 
 
 , 529. Outside of the present system the final of the 
 theme is regularly lengthened to <o : 
 
 Si^Xu (S)jXd(o), 8rjX.<ti<Tw, eSij^axTa, ScBi^XoyKa, 8t8T^Xo)fMU, i&i^XwOrjV. 
 
 COMPLEX SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 
 530. When a complex sentence, is quoted, whether after 
 a verb that requires on, or after a verb that requires the 
 infinitive or the participle, the verb of the main clause 
 of the quotation comes under the rules already explained 
 (§§ no, 260, 276, 277, 441, 519). 
 
 The only new principle involved concerns the verb of 
 the subordinate clause. This verb is retained in the origi- 
 nal mopd and tense after a primary tense of the introduc- 
 tory verb of saying or thinking ; but it may be changed to 
 the same tense of the optative after a secondary tense of 
 the introductory verb ; except that, even in the secondary 
 
234 . BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 sequence, dependent secondary tenses of the indicative {i.e. 
 imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect) are regularly kept un- 
 changed. 
 
 a. Dependent optative clauses of the direct discourse 
 are of course retained in the indirect discourse after both 
 primary and secondary tenses, av with the optative in 
 direct discourse is retained in indirect discourse. 
 
 b. The verb of a dependent clause can not be changed 
 to the infinitive. 
 
 c. Changes of person are made as the sense requires. 
 
 d. The negative of the direct discourse is, as usual, 
 retained in the indirect. 
 
 Examples 
 
 1. Sentence quoted after primary tense: av Se eS yivifraL -n, oi 
 
 /xeUvrjcrEa-daL cri (fidcriv {direct: ov fji.efjLvrj<Trj) and if any- 
 thing turns out successfully, they say you will not 
 remember. (Here the dependent clause dv . . . yevq- 
 Tat is retained unchanged, since the introductory verb 
 
 is (ftdcTLV.) 
 
 2. Sentence quoted after secondary tense : 
 
 a. Original sentence : ex jx-rj rts TrpoKaraX-QxI/eTai to aKpov, oiiK 
 
 ea-TM Bvvarbv irapeXduv Tinless somebody shall seize the 
 height in advance, it will not be possible to go past. 
 
 b. Quoted sentence : i<l>rj ti /jirj tk TrpoKaraX-^ij/OLTo to aKpov, ovk 
 
 t(Tccr6ai Bvvarov TvapeXOiiv he said that unless somebody 
 should seize the height in advance, it would not be pos- 
 sible to go past. (In the dependent clause, wpoKaTa- 
 X-qxI/tToi might be retained.) 
 
 3. Dependent secondary tenses of indicative retained: ^xev ayyeXos 
 
 Aeyco)/ oTi AeAotjriDs eW) %v(vvt(yt.% to. aKpa cttei yaBtTo . . . 
 Koi oTt yKove, ktA. a messenger came saying that Syen- 
 nesis had left the heights since he had perceived . . . 
 and because he heard, etc. (Here XeXoiirm eirj repre- 
 sents the original \e\onre has left of the messenger's 
 
CONTRACT VERBS IN -Ofl 233 
 
 language ; but neither -ga-dcro nor rJKove could be changed 
 to the optative, since in the direct discourse they were 
 dependent secondary tenses of the indicative. The tense 
 that determines the sequence is seen in ^kev.) 
 
 531. When a subjunctive introduced by kav or Itrav, or 
 oo-Tt? av, or similar words, is changed to the optative after 
 a secondary tense of the introductory verb of saying or 
 thinking, av is omitted ; that is, lav becomes et, kTrav 
 becomes eTret, oaTL<i av becomes ocrrt?, etc. : 
 
 a. Original sentence : oi°EXA.jji/es Sia/Siyo-oi/Tai eav (or ejrar) juijSets 
 
 K(i)A.ucrij the Greeks will cross if {or when) nobody hinders. 
 
 b. Quoted sentence in secondary sequence .■ t^-r) tous 'EWTjcas Sta- 
 
 l3ijo-t(rdai £1 (or €iret) /uiySfts KuAvo-eiev he Said the Greeks 
 would cross if (or when) nobody should hinder. 
 
 Of course the original subjunctive introduced by edv or 
 eirdv might have been retained in the last sentence. 
 
 532. VOCABULARY LI 1 1 
 
 a|i(i(i) (a|ios), d|iiS<r<o, T||((i)cra, T|gt- irXflOos, o«s, t6 : crowd, throng, 
 
 (i>Ka, TJ|t<a)i.ai,, r\if.i>6r\v : deem host, multitude, 
 
 worthy: claim as one''s right, <rKi\v6a (a-K.r\v'f\), (o-K'^vuira, Iotk'/)- 
 
 demaM^ ask. vwKa : stay in a tent, camp. 
 
 8T|\d(D (SriXos), 8r|\(i(r(i), cS^Xoxra, Td\.fMT&,<it (riKt-m^ end) , TtKf.vT\<ra, 
 
 ScS^\(i>Ka, ScS'^Xufiai, £ST]X(i9i]v : £T6\EVTT|(ra, nrcXevTriKa, Itc\ev- 
 
 show, make evident. t'/jOiiv : end, finish, die. 
 
 cpTiiios, T), ov, and «pii|JLos, ov: de- toCvuv, inferential particle, post- 
 
 serted. o-raOiiol epi)|U)i : marches positive : therefore, then, 
 through the desert. Eremite. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 533. I. I. TOMT OVV OVK OL^LOVfieu. 2. TifiaadaL S' 
 
 TJ^iov. 3. (u? opare, aKyjvovp.€v iv rrj rd^ei,} 4. aWoi 
 
 1 in our order. 
 
236 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 8e rn'cs eXefai' ort ei ySacrtXevg ideXoL inl ttjv KiXiKiav 
 (TTparevuv, TTopevouvTo av (tvv avTw} 5. /cat auros eV 
 Tw TreSift) icTKtjvov. 6. /cai ej^wi' ra -^ciipia TreipaTai, 
 (TK-qvovv. 7- ^'""^ ^^ Kuyoos on en-etSai' ra^tcrra^ Trau- 
 arjTai T'l^s (rrpareids/ ev^uc awoTrefixlieL tov a-Tparqyov. 
 8. Kal I'uj' Totvvv inel TToXep.o'; icrTtv, dgcovu Set O/icis 
 aurou? d/JLeivovs tov Tr\rjdov<; * eit-ai. 9. dKovop,eu Vfid? 
 CTKrjvovv iv rais oiKtais. lO. Kat -q^iovv awrous ra 
 /SeXricrTa crv/x/SovXeveiv. 1 1 . etire 8' on owros dpicrTo<s 
 ecroLTO OS o.i' Tr/awro? eV rai irepav tov TTOTap,ov yeurjTai.^ 
 1 2. ei Se 817 TTore Kupo? TropevoiTO, Koi TrkelcrTOi ^ ju,e\- 
 Xotei' oxjjecrOai.,^ fiereireixiTeTo tov? <f>C\ov<;, w? SrjXoCr) ows 
 
 TL[lS,. 
 
 II. 13- fat o'ot orjXtucrfc) o^et* eyo) Treoi crov aKovcat 
 14. Kai ws^ 17 p-oi)(7) iyeveTo Kat ws Kvpos iTeXevrrjaev, 
 iv T^ npocrdeu Xoyo)^ SeSujXcDToCL. 15. ivTcvdev i^eXav- 
 vet <TTa9iJL0v<; eprip.ovi; Sefca • ot 8e arpaTLutTai Ka/cbt; 
 (TKrivov(TLv. 16. StjXol 8e rois (fivXa^i, nevre fiva? dpyv- 
 pLov Kal OcopoLKa ^pvcrovu. ij. eXe^ev on ol a-TpaTum- 
 rat, TOV [jLLcrObv Xd/Soief iirel d(f>iK0VT0 ets 2ap8ets. 
 
 III. I. Cyrus promised 1" to provide ^^ a market as soon 
 as^^he should arrive at Sardis. 2. He kept demanding 
 that these gifts should be sent ^^ to the king. 
 
 ^ Note that Xiyovnv might be used for eXegav without affecting the follow- 
 ing construction (§ 530. a). 
 
 ^ lireiSr) (eireiSiv) Taxwrra = as soon as. ' § 201. * § 355. 
 
 ^ The dependent clause might also read os . . . -y^voiTO (without av). 
 
 '' very many men. '§156.2. "^ how. ^ the previous account. 
 
 '" Always compose complicated indirect discourse in the direct form first. 
 ^^ Cp. § 526. I. n for construction after tiiri<rxv^O|j.ai.. 
 12 Cp. sentence 7 above. " Use ace. with inf. ; these gifts to be sent. 
 
CONTRACT PARTICIPLES 237 
 
 LIV 
 
 DECLENSION OF CONTRACT PARTICIPLES, ottqj? WITH 
 FUTURE INDICATIVE. VARIOUS IDIOMS 
 
 534- Learn the declension of iroiwv, Tlfimv, BtjX&v (§ 622 
 and a). 
 
 a. Similarly are declined %aiv living, vIkmv conquering, 
 opSiv seeing, etc. 
 
 535. Object clauses introduced by Sirws. — Verbs signify- 
 ing to strive for, to care for, or to effect, may be followed by 
 oTTOj? (meaning how) with the future indicative, which is 
 almost always retained even after a secondary tense. The 
 negative is /*»? : 
 
 jSouXeu'tTat oirtos /xtJ^-otc exi ecrrai i-m, t<5 a8e\<l>iS he plans how he 
 shall never again be in the power of his brother. 
 
 a. But such verbs are often followed by ottw? or <»? with 
 the present or aorist subjunctive or (after a secondary 
 tense) optative, like ordinary purpose clauses (§§ 243, 268) : 
 
 SieTTpaiaTo ottms eU to tux°^ eia-eXOoi he contrived how to enter into 
 the fortification (z.f. that he might enter). 
 
 536. Worthy of special attention is the construction of 
 £X<o with an adverb : 
 
 KaA.o)s ex'tv to be handsome or well ; 
 KaKwi exeiv to be bad ; 
 ovTuti Ix"" to be thus or so ; 
 oAAws ex"" to be otherwise. 
 
 537. Also noteworthy are the expressions : kukw iroieiv 
 io do ill to, to injure, with the accusative ; and its passive 
 
238 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 KaKW irda-xeiv vtto tivo'} to be injured by anybody. Other 
 adverbs like eS well may be similarly used with iroiAv 
 and '7rd(7')(ei,v : e3 irda'xecv viro rivo<; = to be treated nindly 
 by anybody. 
 
 tKavcoTaTos tarox. v/iai Kal tv Koi xa/cus iroiiiv he will be most compe- 
 tent both to benefit and to injure you. 
 
 538. Used in a different sense are : 
 
 KaKm TTpaTTuv to fare badly (cp. examples, § 438) ; 
 eS or KoASs TtpaTrav to fare well. 
 
 539- 
 
 VOCABULARY LIV 
 
 iOviila, OS, T) : discouragement, de- 
 spondency. 
 
 oWus (adv. of oWos) : otherwise. 
 
 iir-dYCi) : lead away, lead back. 
 
 -ye, enclitic particle, regularly fol- 
 lowing the emphatic word: 
 certainly, surely, at least. 
 
 €|-airaTdci) (diraToLw deceive, aira- 
 T<iir<i), T)irdTHO"a, T|irdTHKa, T|ird- 
 TT||jiai, TjirttTViOTiv) : utterly de- 
 ceive, cheat. 
 
 ein,-)i.e\^0|j.ai., lT7i-|i«X'f|<ro().oi, liri- 
 |i€|x^\i1|iai, lir-«(i.eX'^6i)v, dep. 
 pass. : take care of, care for, 
 with gen. 
 
 T)TTd0|Jiai (tITTOIv), ■f]TT'ii<rO(tOl, TiTTT)- 
 
 (lai, i|TT^9tiv : be inferior, be con- 
 quered. Used as pass, of viKdw. 
 
 H'^j-iroTe : never ; used like f.i\ not. 
 
 g{vo<|>uv, MVTos, 6: Xenophon. 
 The word is declined like ri- 
 |Ji»v (§ 622) in the masc. sing. 
 
 otos, o, ov, rel. pron. : of what sort,, 
 what sort of, {such) as. otos 
 T« : able ; ot6v t lo-Ttv : it is 
 possible. Lat. qualis. 
 
 owMs, conj.. how, introducing an 
 obj. clause, § 535. Cp. Vo- 
 cabularies XXII, XXXIX. 
 
 iron)T^os, o, ov (verbal adj. of iroUu, 
 with eoTt or «lo-£ expressed or 
 understood) : necessary to be 
 done, must be done. 
 
 ToiovTos, ToiovTt), toioBto (declined 
 like o^Tos, § 171), dem. pron.: 
 of such a sort, such; often 
 understood or expressed as 
 antecedent of otos. toioBtos otos 
 = such as. The neut. is also 
 toioOtov as well as toioCto. 
 Lat. talis. 
 
 (|>uv^, <is, Ti (cp. 4>a-) ^lo"') : voice. 
 Mega-phone. 
 
CONTRACT PARTICIPLES 239 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 540- I- I • ^aa-ikeiis viK(t)v Tvyxoivei. 2. 01 8e o/awires 
 -^aura iOavfiaCop. 3. ot 8e aj/S/aes elalv oi TTOLovvres ' 
 d Tt ai- eV Tais /xax"'? yCyvrjTai. 4. ij/ias, tous Hei'o- 
 (j)wvTO's <^iXous, Ka/ccos TToteiv TTeipaTai. 5. ot 8' aTTif- 
 yayov tov dv8pa 8ta 7175 dyopas jU.aXa fieyakrj Tfj <^oiv^ 
 orfKovvTa ofa^ eira.ax'^v. 6. crKeTTTeov jjlol Sok^I etvac 
 OTTws TO, eirtTifSeta i^ofjiev. 7. ivravda Sr) voW^ dOv- 
 /xid ^i' rots 'EA.X.iyo'tv, opcoan ^ fiku to evpo? tov iroTafiav, 
 opcoai^ 8e rous Sia/SaCveiv Kco\v(rovTa?.* 8. i<f)o/3ovjj,r}v 
 fj^rj Kvpo^ i^aTrarwr) rffids ■ kclL el)(ev ^ oilro)?. 9. et 
 ovv Tts a\Xo fiekrlov opa, aA.X(u? if^era. 10. i^uu' ye 
 oTjoiai irdyrou Troii^Tea* ais fjiyjiroTe iirl rots l3apfidpoi<; 
 yevw/jLedv.. 1 1. KaKa><; yap tcjv rjp.eripmv'^ €)(6vt(j)v 
 vdvTe's ovTOL ov<s opdre ^dp^apoi 77o\e/xtwTe/)ot 17/Ar!' 
 ecrovTai ratv irapd ^aortA-ei ovtwv? I'2. eS iirddofiev 
 
 VTT iKclVOV. 
 
 II. 13. Twi' '77ap' iavTa fiapfidpcav Kvpo<; iireiieXelTo 
 w? TToX.ejU.eti' " i/cavot etrjcrav. 14. 'Sievo(f)OJf S' eXe^ev 
 OTL ovv otov T eliq SucoKetv Tov<i iroXefjcLov;. 15. tmv 
 ydp i/iK(x)VTO)v ^^ IcttI kol rd iavTa>v ^^ cra^LU kol to. twv 
 ■fjTTOiiievoiv Xafifidveiv. 1 6. ot 8' -^pira^ov to (rrpaTo- 
 ireSou w<s ■^^ TTC^ra vlKcauTe?. 1 7. dXXa, 8er irecpda-OaL 
 OTTcos KaXws viKwires croit,difJie0a. 18. otw^^ ouv raura 
 
 1 Cp. § 405. 1. 5. ^ 
 
 2 The antecedent is ToioBra understood : sucA things as, what sort of 
 things. 
 
 ' A participle. * § 212. ' Impers. 6 § 477- 
 
 ''our affairs. * §§ 212, 355. » § 333- 
 
 1" it is the right of, etc., § 229. ^ § 380. w § 228. 
 
240 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 SoKci KaXws ex^'''? Xefarw w? ra^tcrTa. 1 9. tovtqjv Se 
 TOLOVTCDV ovTOiv^ TTOLVTa TTOirjTea oVcus ju,!? ctt' iK€[vco 
 yevT]cr6iJi,e6a. 
 
 III. I. They evidently honor us. 2. They have been 
 treated kindly by us. 3. We planned never, while living, 
 to fall ^ into the power of the enemy. , 
 
 LV 
 
 THE FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID THEMES. SOME 
 OTHER VERBS THAT CONTRACT IN THE FUTURE, 
 INCLUDING VERBS IN -l^co. UNREAL SUPPOSITIONS 
 
 541. Verbs whose themes end in a liquid (§ 27), like 
 (fiaLvm show and jiivw remain, use for the f-u-ture tense suffix 
 (.% and not <t%: As contraction results, the future of these 
 verbs is like the present indicative, optative, infinitive, and 
 participle of verbs in -eaj. Learn the inflection of the 
 future active and middle of cj>aiva) (§ 644), theme <f)av- : 
 <^avm, KJjavoirjv, (j)ave2v, <f>avu>v ; <^avov/*at, i^vOLfi-qv, <f>av€L<r0ai, <j}avov- 
 
 /X,£VOS. 
 
 (f)ava)v is declined like iroi&v (§ 622). 
 
 542. Verbs with liquid themes form the first aorist with 
 the suffix a instead of era. At the same time they lengthen 
 the theme vowel : a becomes r]^; e becomes ei ; t becomes I ; 
 V becomes v : 
 
 <^atva) (theme <^av-), first aorist active (.^Tjva; 
 ixivo) (theme yuev-), first aorist ffntiva. 
 This first aorist is inflected like eXvcra. 
 
 1 Quae cum ita sint. 2 hecome in the power of. 
 
 ' But o becomes a in the first aorist after i or p. 
 
FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID THEMES 241 
 
 Learn the inflection in the first aorist active and middle 
 of </)aiV&) (§ 64s) : 
 
 i<f)r]Va, ^r/v(i), c^^vai^t, (^^i/oc, KJtrjvai, <^iji/ds, -da-a, -av (declined like 
 d/couTas, § 209); icji'qva.fJi.riv, (l>rjv<Dfmi, (f>rjvaifx,riv, <l>rjvai, <\>riv<ujdai, 
 
 543. Verbs in -t'fcB of mor e than two syllables fo rm their 
 futures in -£«B,^£e£«^ etc., with resulting contraction : -lai, 
 -tew, etc. These future forms are contracted like the 
 futures of liquid themes (§ 644) or the presents of verbs in 
 -e'co (§ 643) : 
 
 vofuS), voixLoi-qv, vofuetv, vo/xLwv ; vofitov/juu, vofi,iol.jj,-qv, vo/jLulaOai, vofu- 
 
 oij/uej/os ; futures of vo/jll^ui think. 
 aywviovfji,eda, future of a.ymvLt,oixAu contend. 
 
 544. Some verbs drop a- of the future suffix between 
 two vowels and then contract. Thus the future of icaXem 
 call is koKS) {i.e. KoXeo) for /caXeaco), which is inflected like 
 TTOfw (jroLe(o, § 643). This means that the future indica- 
 tive, optative, infinitive, and participle of KaXeas are like 
 the present of this same verb in the corresponding moods. 
 Similarly the future of fid'^^ofiai, fight is fiaxovjXM (i.e. /jlo- 
 jfeofxai for /u,a')(^eaofx,aL), ixaypCfjLrjv, fia'x,€ia'dai, fia^ovfievo';. 
 
 a. The future of eXaww drive, ride is l\u> (i.e. l\A<a for eXacro)), 
 which is inflected like rlfMo (§ 643). 
 
 545. Unreal (or contrary to fact) suppositions. — el is 
 
 used with the imperfect indicative to express an unreal 
 supposition in present time ; with the aorist indicative tp 
 express an unreal supposition in past time ; the verb 
 of the conclusion (apodosis) may be either the imper- 
 fect indicative with av, representing present time, or the 
 aorist indicative with av, representing past time. 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 16 
 
242 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Therefore these conditions may be distinguished, in 
 form, from simple present and past suppositions by the 
 single fact that av accompanies the conclusion : 
 fl im Tois iroAe/iiois ^crav, Kaxws av irraaxov if they were in the power 
 
 of the enemy, they would be suffering harm ; 
 £1 eirt Tots TToAc/itois iydvovTO, /ca/cSs av liraOov if they had got into 
 
 the power of the enemy, they would have suffered harm ; 
 £1 ju,^ v/i£is ^XBtTi, iTropevoixeOa av i-Trl jSao-tXcd if you had not come, 
 
 we should now be proceeding against the king. 
 
 546. When a supposition contrary to fact occurs in indirect dis- 
 course, neither the verb of the protasis nor that of the apodosis may be 
 changed to the optative, even after a secondary tense. But the verb of 
 the main clause (apodosis) must be changed to the infinitive or parti- 
 ciple if the introductory verb requires the infinitive or participle ; av is 
 always retained : 
 
 fvofua-av el iirl Tots iroXi/xioii iyevovTO, KaKws dv iraOeiv they supposed 
 that if they had got into the power of the enemy, they would have 
 suffered harm. 
 
 547. VOCABULARY LV 
 
 &7Y^XX(ii (for dY'ytX + ya, theme iiro-Kpivoiioi (mid. of airo-Kpfvu, 
 
 d77t\-), a-y-ycXu, iiYYciXa, ij'y- see Kpivw) : give one's decision, 
 
 YcXxa, ij^YcXiiai., TJ77^9iiv : an- answer, reply, with on clause. 
 
 «!?«««, r^^or^, with 8ti or partic. Airo-KTetvu (for ktcv + j/oi, theme 
 
 in indir. disc. Cp. o-yYtXos. ktvi-), -kt«vw, -^ktsivo, -^ktovo: 
 
 d'ywvC^op.ai. (theme d'yoiviB-), A-yu- put to death, slay, kill. The 
 
 viovpiai, T|-y<jvt<r(i|ii)v, Tj'yiivi.crii.ai : pass, is supplied by diroBvu'o-Kii). 
 
 contend as in games, struggle. ^i^viio-Ku (reduplicated pres. from 
 
 Cp. d^iov. Agonize. theme 7V0-, with pres. suffix 
 
 dSiK^d) (cp. aSiKos), dBiK^o-w, T|8t- vkPA), ^viirpjiai, 2 aor. to be 
 
 KT).<ra, T|S[KT]Ka, T|8CKr||iai, TiSiKifi- learned later, ryvuKa, eYvu(r|iat,' 
 
 9t|v : do wrong to, injure, be in iyyixi^r^ '^ : learn, know, with 
 
 the wrong. 8ti or partic. in indir. disc. Cp. 
 
 im-a,Y<i9iXu> : bring back a message, Lat. (g)nSsco, i-gnotus, Eng. 
 
 report. know. 
 
 1 With signia irregularly inserted. 
 
FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID THEMES 243 
 
 «ri-(riTCJo|iai (theme o-inS-), -<ri- irap-aYY^Wio : give directions to, 
 
 TioBnoi, -6<riT«r4|i,r|v : get pro- direct, command, with dat. of 
 
 visions for oneself. Cp. crlros. pers. or ace. of pers. and inf. 
 
 KoX^o), KaXffl (fut.), eKoXeo-a (with <ni7-KaX^« (o-dv + koX^oi) : call to- 
 
 the final short vowel of the gather. 
 
 theme retained before the tense 4>a(v(D (for <|>av +/(», theme <t>av-), 
 
 suffix), K^K^nKo, K^K\.n|iat, «kX^- ijiavu, ?<|>t|vo, ■ai^'xfia. {have 
 
 eTjv : call, summon, invite. Cp. appeared), ir^<|)0(r|iai, i^li.v^v 
 
 lK-KX.i)(rCd. (was shown) and e4>dvi)v (ap- 
 
 Kpfvw (for Kpiv + ya, theme Kpiv-), peared) : bring to light, show ; 
 
 Kpivw, «Kpiva, K^KpiKa, K^Kpifiai, MID. and PASS, usually app^nr. 
 
 tKpCBriv: separate, judge, decide. In mid. and pass, the verb may 
 
 Cp. Lat. cerno. Critic. take a supplementary partic. 
 
 Ii^vtii (themes p,ev-, |«vt)-), |uvu, like StjXis Io-ti (§ 449). Phe- 
 
 «|i,Eiva, |j,«|i^vT|Ka : remain, wait nomenon. 
 for. Cp. Lat. maneo. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 548. L I. IvrcLvda. ifj-CLvev ■^fiepd'S iiiToi. 2. koI 
 ea»s^ fievofiev iv tovtco t(o tottco, aKeTTTeov fjLOi SoKel 
 elvaL . OTTws a»s a.(r(f>a\ecrTaTa fievovfiev. 3. K) ea^ovos 
 rjpeTo TOP Kvpov • Oiet croi fia^^ZcrOai, S> Kvpe, tov 
 do€X(f)6v ; 4. Kal K.vpo<s XeyeTai, diroKTeLvai auros rrj 
 iavTov x^'/"' ^ '"o^ dp^ovTa. 5. 6 8e avWap^dvu 
 Kvpov a)s dnoKTevaJv.^ 6. ravra Sr) dirayyeXovpev. 
 7. naprfyyeiXe rois crTpaT7}yo2<; efcaorots Xap,pdvet,v 
 dvSpa^.* 8. 6 S' dTT€KpivdTo on d/cowot 'A^poKOfidv, 
 iX^pov dvhpa, iwi t&3 Ei(j)pdTri iroTafiqi elvai.. 9. )(prj 
 ovu Vpd<; hia^aiv€iv irpiv SijXov elvai o ti 01 dXXoi 
 EXXrjv€^ dnoKpivovvTai Kvpo). lo. Tore i(f}r)vav ota^ 
 
 1 while, with present indicative of a definite present act. 
 
 ' § 141. ' §§ 331. 332- 
 
 * Cp. § 324. I. 9. ^ The antecedent is roiavra understood. 
 
244 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 TTepl vfiwv iyiyvaa-Kov. II. el 8e ■^yefj.av /liTjSeis rjfuv 
 t^avevrai^ ipcoTtja-oixev avTol lyris r) Tra/DoSo? iariv. 
 12. ovK av iTToirjcrev 6 Xoxoiy6<i ravra, ei [irj iyo) 
 avTov iKeXevcra. 1 3. ojpd^ Se ^ovkeueaOai ottws ois 
 KaXXia-Ta ayoiviovpieda. 1 4. cKaXecre Tts aurw twj/ 
 
 VTTTJpeTci)^ 
 
 II. 15. iireiTa (TvyKaXoviiev^ tous aXXous CTTpartcu- 
 Tcts. 16. 6 Se KXeapxo? cKplue Toi/ MeVwi'os (TTpaTiuy 
 TYjv dSiKetv. 17. dyopai' ouSets TrcoTTOTe vape^ei yjfiu', 
 ov8e odeu^ iTTLcriTLOvfJieOa. 18. fcal ')7)u,ri'* y' av 17860)5 
 raur enoUi, el eaipd yjixas p.eveiv irapacTKevalfip.iuov';. 
 19. K\eapxo<;, eirel icftdvrj ras crTTOvScis Xuwf, exei T'qv 
 Slk'tji'. 20. '^yyeiXei' ovv otl 6 cTTpaTiqyos p-evel. 
 
 III. I. He will call the soldiers together^ if no guides 
 shall appear.^ 2. We should have gone back if the guide 
 had not shown ^ us this road. 
 
 LVI 
 
 THE INFLECTION OF MI-VERBS: "arrjtii, iirpidfMjv, e^r^v, 
 
 uTT-eSpdv 
 
 549. By "/it-verbs" are meant those whose present 
 indicative, first person, singular, ends in -\ii. Thus 'laTqfii 
 I set or place ; tiOtjixl I put ; BiBa>fji.i / g-ive ; and BeiKvvfii 
 I show. 
 
 ^ Cp. § 242. - § 230. ^ Fut. 
 
 ^ A place from which. ^ for us. " Cp. 11. I^. 
 
 ' Cp. I. II. 8 Use ij>a[v(». 
 
MI-VERBS : 'ISTHMI 245 
 
 The essential difference between |ii-verbs and co-verbs is 
 that [Jii-verbs lack the thematic vowel % used by w-verbs 
 before the personal endings in the present and second 
 aorist tense systems. The thematic vowel "/?; is retained 
 in the subjunctive, however. In other tense systems^ |xi- 
 verbs and <o-verbs are inflected alike. 
 
 550. Learn the inflection of io-tt/a" in the present system 
 active and middle ( = passive), in the second aorist active 
 (§ 646), and in the second perfect active (§ 647). No 
 second aorist middle of la-Trj/ii exists ; and in its stead 
 the second aorist iirpidi^rjv (which has no present) / bought 
 should be learned (§ 646). 
 
 551. 'latrifxi is a reduplicated present, built on the theme 
 (TTa- thus : (Ji-aTr]-fii. The initial sigma is dropped, and is 
 represented by the rough breathing. The vowel of the 
 theme is long (t]) in the active voice in the following places : 
 in the singular of the present and imperfect indicative ; in 
 the second person singular of the present imperative ; and 
 throughout the second aorist indicative, imperative (ex- 
 cept the third person plural), and infinitive. In all other 
 active forms of these tenses (present and second aorist), 
 and in all middle forms of these tenses the theme vowel 
 is short (a). 
 
 552. In the subjunctive a contracts with the thematic 
 
 vowel "/r, : ^ 
 
 a + ft) = <a. 
 a + r) =7). 
 
 a + V —V- 
 
 ^ Except a few second perfects and pluperfects of the (ii-form, like So-rarov 
 ikey (two) stand, ^o-rao-av they stood. Mgf 
 
246 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 553- Some co-verbs have second aorists that are inflected 
 Hke those of |j,i-verbs : 
 
 ip-ijv I went (from fiaivw) ; subjv. ^u> ; opt. /Satijv ; imv. /3^0i ; 
 inf. ;8^vai ; partic. j3as, ^aa-a, Pav. 
 
 aw-eSpdv I ran away iy stealth, anrkhpwi, aTriSpa, etc. (from avo- 
 StSpdcTKOj) ; subjv. dTroSpS, dTroSpas, atroBpa, etc. ; opt. airo- 
 hpal-qv ; imv. wanting ; inf. d7ro8/Dai/ot ; partic. d^oS/Das, axra, dv. 
 
 554. Learn, the declension of la-Tdf and trra?, which are 
 declined alike (§ 617). Cp. aKova-d'i (§ 209). Learn the 
 declension of ea-Tox; (§ 624). 
 
 555. MEANINGS OF THE TENSES AND VOICES OF ia-rn^u 
 set OR place OR stand 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Act. 
 
 Mid. 
 
 Pass. 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 i'<rTii|ii /set 
 
 io-Tajjiai I set for 
 
 l!<rTO|i.oi lam set 
 
 I'o-Taixai / take 
 
 
 
 myself 
 
 or placed 
 
 my place 
 
 Fut. 
 
 o-T^jo-w I shall 
 
 o-T^(ro)i,ai I shall 
 
 o-raS^o-oiiai / 
 
 o-T<jo-0|i.ai / 
 
 
 set 
 
 set for myself 
 
 shall be set or 
 placed 
 
 shall take my 
 place 
 
 Aor. 
 
 So-TTi<ra I set 
 
 eo-rno-diiTlv / set 
 
 4<rT(i.6i)v / was 
 
 mtif) I stood 
 
 
 or placed 
 
 or placed for 
 myself 
 
 set or placed 
 
 
 Pf. 
 
 
 
 
 %TtmM. I stand: 
 cl(rT^KT| I stood 
 
 Plup. 
 
 
 
 
 Fut. Pf. 
 
 
 
 
 l<rHj|<i> / shall 
 stand 
 
 a. The transitive and intransitive tenses of compounds 
 of ierrrjfii are similarly distinguished. _1_^ 
 
MI-VERBS : 'ISTHMI 
 
 247 
 
 556. 
 
 VOCABULARY LVI 
 
 avaYKdJu (theme &va7Ka8-, cp. 
 dvd7Kt)), dvaYKdo-u, ^iyK(ura, 
 TJvd'YKaK^ f|vd7Kacr|iai, TjvaYKd- 
 <r9i|vT compel, force. 
 
 &«V, prep, with gen. only : with- 
 out. ^ 
 
 av-la"n]]u:^mclke stand up, start 
 up ; , (intr.) . stand up. For 
 intr. titises see § 555. 
 
 dvT£, prep, with gen. only : in- 
 stead of, for. In comp. : 
 against. Anti-dote, etc. 
 
 diro-SiSpdo'Ku (Si-Spd-crKO), Spdcro- 
 (jiai, cSpav, S^SpaKa) : run away 
 by stealth ; run away from, 
 with ace. 
 
 &p|j,a, aros, rd : chariot for use in 
 battle. See p. 252, Fig. 22. 
 
 Pao-iXeCa, as, {] CpacriXcvu) : king- 
 dom. Do not confuse this 
 word with Pao-(\«a, rd, royal 
 buildings, palace (§ 217). 
 
 Svva)i,ai, Sw^roiiai, Sc8vvT||iai, e8u- 
 v^ieijv (or ■riBuv^fliiv), dep. pass. : 
 
 be able. Cp. Siiva|u$. Dynast, 
 dynamite. 
 
 4irC-(rTa|tai, ln'i<rT'<iiro)i.ai, rjirMrr^- 
 6t|v, dep. pass. : understand. 
 
 iirpid|iT|v (2 aor.) : / bought. No 
 pres. from this verb. 
 
 iiririKos, ^, <v (Sinros) : of horse, of 
 cavalry. 
 
 t<rTT][ii., o-Tyja-o), ^(m)ira and '«rTi)v, 
 8o-TiiKa and ii FT aT ( )V) lo-TdStiv : 
 set, place, make stand, halt ; 
 intr. tenses : stand, stand still, 
 stop. See § 555. Cp. Lat. 
 sto, Eng. stand. 
 
 Ka6-(<ri-T|)ii : set or place down, sta- 
 tion ; intr. tenses : be placed, 
 stationed, or established; station 
 07ieself, take one''s place. For 
 intr. tenses cp. Jo-thhi, § 555. 
 
 Kc<|>aX^, (\s, Ti: head. Cp. Lat. 
 caput. 
 
 AuSios, o, ov (AvSfa) : Lydian. 
 
 Svos, ov, 6 : ass. Lat. asinus. 
 
 #puYCa, OS, t| : Phrygia. 
 
 j g^aCj SES FOR -XR ANS LAT IP N^ 
 
 557. I. I. ivTavOa iar-qcrav oi''EWr)V€i. 2. Kal 01 
 fieTO. 'ApuaCov ^ ovKeri IcrTavTat. 3. Kal avt(TTa(rav touv 
 (TT/oaTiwrds. 4. (f>vXaKa? Se Ka6i(TTa(Tav. 5. KC/3os 
 Se xftiX'^v e-)(mv rffv Ke^oKrjv eis t^v nayiqv KadtaraTo. 
 
 6. 6 Se KGyaos /SovXeverat oirw5 [iijirore ecrrai ivl tw 
 dSeX^w, dX.Xa, ■^v Swiyrai, /Sao-iXeutret dir' iKeiuov. 
 
 7. irreipwvTO S' aTToSpavai,- koX oSro? aTroSpa? ^^ero? 
 
 ^ Ariaeus and his men. 
 
 318 
 
248 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 8. U^VOifiMV S' i<f)0^€'LTO flT] OV SvVdiTO ^ Ik TIJS )(Mpds 
 
 i^eKffeiv tijs jSacnXdcos. 9. Kvpo? 8' ovv dve/3r) iirl to, 
 oprj, ovSefos kcoXvovto^. io. tovtov top TroTCLpiov 8ta- 
 /Sas i^ekavueu Sto. ^pvyid'S. 1 1 . cScrTg iquayKoicrdT) 6 ' 
 'B,evo(jiS)i' dvacrTrjuai Koi einelv raSe. 12. erreiS'^ 8e 
 TTavTas TTapTJXaa-ev, icnr^ae to dpjxa irpo ttJi; (jxiXayyos 
 p.e.cryj'i? 13. koI irpiacrdai tov (tltov ovk yjv^ ei )li'^* iv 
 Trj AuSia dyopa. 14. kol ol ovol, inei tl<s Blcokol,^ im 
 TToXi) ^ SpapovTE^ ig-Taaav. Z^t^ /a-i»-«^«-»-V|i«t-^ 
 
 II. 15. Koi ifxeive ttoXvv -^povov k(7T(xi<i. 16. eiret 8e 
 'Apra^ep^iQi; Karia-Tiq eU rrjv fiaa-iXddv, /Aereirejin/faro 
 K.vpov TOV kavTov d8eX(j}6v. 1 7. iv jnecrw rjfjiwv Koi 
 /SacriXews o TCypr}? 7rora/u,ds iaTiv, ov ovk dv SvvaC- 
 fieOa dvev ttXoCcdv SLa/3rjvai. ^8. ras Se opvlda<; dv ns 
 Ta;)[(;ii dvLCTTrj^ ecrri ^ Xap^^dvuv. 19. e;)(et, 8e Ku/oos 
 hvvafXLv KOL ^e^v koX iTTiri/fw, '^v TrdvTe<; bp5)p.4v re /cat 
 e7ri(TTa/Ae^a. 
 
 III. I. The soldiers cannot cross® this river without 
 boats. 2. Cyrus after halting '^^ his cEariot took his place 
 in the battle. 
 
 ^ § 438. a. ^ § 192. ' jV was not possible. 
 
 * except. ^ § 417. 6 yor « /o«^ distance. 
 
 ' § 399. » § 102. ^ 2 aor. 
 
 10 
 
 having, halted. 
 
MI-VERBS: TIOHMI 249 
 
 LVII 
 
 THE INFLECTION OF MI-VERBS {Continued^ : ridrjui, irjfu. 
 DELIBERATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. ACCUSATIVE ABSO- 
 LUTE 
 
 558. Learn the inflection of TidrjfM in the present system 
 active and middle (= passive), and in the second aorist, 
 active and middle (§ 646). 
 
 559. Tidnjfii is a reduplicated present, built on the theme 
 ^e- (cp. § 551) thus : Ti-Orj-fM. The vowel of the theme is 
 long (t]) in the singular of the present indicative active, 
 and in the first person singular of the imperfect indicative 
 active. The second and third persons singular of the 
 imperfect indicative active are formed Uke the correspond- 
 ing persons of contract verbs in -eco thus : eVt^et?, eridei. 
 Similarly the second person singular of the present impera- 
 tive active is riOei. 
 
 560. The second aorist indicative active of tCOt^iil is 
 wanting in the singular number; its place is supplied by" 
 first aorist forms with the irregular suiifix -Ka, -Ka^, -«e. So 
 the inflection of the aorist indicative active is as follows : 
 
 SeT)Ka 
 
 e6r)Kas 
 
 £eT|Kc(v) 
 
 I Aor. 
 
 cOetov 
 
 '^ecjjiEv 
 
 le^TTIV 
 
 SOco-av 
 
 2 Aor. 
 
 561. Learn the inflection of Trjfu (§ 649), which is 
 nearly like TiOrjfM. This is also a reduplicated present, 
 from the theme e-. The theme when augmented becomes 
 ei-, which is its form in the second aorist (but see the 
 paradigm below, § 562) and perfect tenses. 
 
250 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 562. The second aorist indicative active, like that of ' 
 Tidrffu, is wanting in the singular; and these forms are 
 supplied by an irregular first aorist in -ica, etc., as follows: 
 
 T|Ka 
 ifKas 
 
 TiK«(v) J 
 
 I Aor. 
 
 
 cl|jiev 
 
 ttrov 
 
 €l« 
 
 tiTX\V 
 
 cto-av 
 
 2 Aor. 
 
 563. Learn the declension of TuOek and Oek, which are 
 declined alike (§ 620). Similarly are declined lek and ei?. 
 Cp. 'Kvdek (§ 388). 
 
 564. Deliberative subjunctive. — The subjunctive of the 
 first person may be used in a deliberative question. The 
 negative is (J-r). 
 
 TTOL ff)vy<i> ; whither shall I flee ? 
 
 Tt ixij ij.hu) TO TeXos ; why shall I not wait for the end? 
 
 565. Such a subjunctive, in an indirect question, is 
 retained after a primary tense of the verb of asking ; but 
 the subjunctive may be changed to the same tense pf the 
 optative if the sequence is secondary : 
 
 jipeTO Tov TTolha^ d wcuxraxv avrov he asked the boy whether he 
 should strike him. 
 
 The direct question was iraCao) (aor. subjv.) ahrov ; shall 
 I strike him. f '\ 
 
 566. Accusative absolute. — The'; participles of imper- 
 sonal verbs may be used in the accusative singular neiiter 
 in an absolute construction (cp. the genitive absolute, 
 § 401). The use is generally concessive (althougli): 
 
 i^bv Tois fiappdpoii cj^iKovi etvat, 70115 'EWi/vas alprja-ovTai though it 
 is possible (///. it being possible, cp. If-eo-Tt) for them to be 
 friends to the barbarians, they will choose the Greeks, 
 
/ 
 
 MI-VERBS; Tl©HMI 
 
 567- VOCABULARY LVIl 
 
 «5i 
 
 dvSpdiroSov, ov, t6 (&v^p and iroiis) : \(0os, ou, i : stone. Litho-graphy 
 
 slave taken in war. (yp&^a). 
 
 a(|>-ti]|i.i : lei go away, dismiss. irot; interr. adv. : •whither? where? 
 
 pdWo) (for Pa\ + ya, themes PoX-, <rvv-T(ei)|ii : place or set together ; 
 
 pXt)-), p<tXw, cPaXov, PepXriKa, MID. place oneself in agree- 
 
 P^pXiDiai, 4p\^6T|v : throw, hurl, ment with somebody, agree 
 
 pelt. Often with ace. of pers. with somebody (dat.), jnake a 
 
 and dat. of means. compact. May be followed by 
 
 clp^vT), Tjs, t| : peace. Irene. inf. of indir. disc. 
 
 4iri-T£9i)(jii : put or place upon ; put tC6t||ii, 6^<r<a, e0T)Ka and tOrror, ri- 
 
 or indict punishment (SCkiiv) Btiko, kTi9i\v: put, set. rCfle- 
 
 on somebody (nvC) ; mid. set o-Ooi rd 8irXo : set down one's 
 
 oneself upon, attack, with dat. arms, rest one's arms on the 
 
 I!t||i,i, ijo-a), i^Ka and eItov, clxa, ct|<,ai, ground; therefore (i) take a 
 
 tVii\v : send, hurl (with some- military position, take one's 
 
 thing, in dat.) ; mid. hurl one- post ; (2) halt, 
 self, hasten. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 568. I. I. Tous 8' ottXitoIs dicrdai iicekeva-e ra owXa. 
 2. ol 8' oTrXiTtti idq/TO to. oirXa. 3. kol levraL ttoWoI 
 cicrw Kai vIkSkti tous TToXe/Aious- 4- eirel 8' eT8oi' 
 dXXiyXous, 01 EXXt^vcs lei'TO cTTi Tous av^ptuTTous. 5. KoX 
 a<:f>le<Tav rows 'EXXijvas. 6. rots 8e (rTpaTrjyols tcjv 
 'Ek\7]v(ov iSo^e Trdvra tol dvSpdiroBa iv ry (rrpaTia 
 d^elvai. 7. 6 Se avvTiderai. awois eis TrfV vcrTepaidv ^ 
 trapitrea-dai ^ ej^oji; triTia koX irord. 8. Kupos ei^^; 
 ide\eiv^ imdeivai, Trjv * SCktju 'A/SpoKOfiq.. 9. ou/c ideXco 
 iKOeiv Trpos avrov, 8e8ia»s® jii^ Xaficov pe Slkyju poL 
 inid^. 10. Kai 'Ayoiaios KeXeuei uyuas <f)v\dTT€(rdai 
 
 ^ on the morrow. * In dir. disc, irap^o-ofiai (§ no. a and r)* 
 
 » § no. a ind <r. * Cp. § 281. I. 2, footnote i. 
 
 ^fearing; from S^Sia = S^Soixa, and declined like 'wtit% (§ 624). 
 
2S2 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 IJLT) Vixlv iiTLdcopTai, rrj^ vvKTb<;^ oi /Sdp^apoi. II. Koi 
 ovTe iweOeTO avTois ouSels ovre tt/jos Trjv 'Ye(j)vpav 
 ou8ei5 rj\dev. 12. ttoI ^vyfiifJieu ; 1 3. ou^ igovp-iv 
 orroL ^vycoafiv. 1 4. e^^w eiptjvrjv ex^'^ KXeap^os 
 alpeLTai iroXefxeLV. 
 
 II. 15. cfoi' Sk ■)(pT]fJiaTa e-)(eLV, KXea/oxo? alpelrai, 
 TOVTOi<; ets^ iroKeiiov -^prja-Qai. 16. ot S' "EXXrji'es e^o- 
 fiovvTO p/fj ol TToXepjjjt, imdeivTO ayrol<;. ly. oojfel oe 
 poL dr^LOvu Kvpov d(j)ievaL Tjpa?. 18. TrepTTcopev dvSpas 
 Tivd<; rj TTOLVTas ; 19. i/3ovXevovTo 8e el TTepiroiev dvBpa^ 
 Ti.vd<; rj TTairas- 20. 01 8' em twv a,Kpwv /Soip^apoi, 
 e/SaWov Xi^pts Tous eTri^TiOepevovs. 
 
 III. I. Although it is possible for the general to inflict 
 punishment on the slaves, he wishes to let them go. 2. The 
 soldiers used to hurl their spears^ a long way.* 
 
 1 § 155. ^ /or, i.e. to spend this on. 
 
 ^ §§ 141; 336. 5. * iiaKpav (§ 142) agreeing with 686v understood. 
 
 I'lU. 22. — &p|jLa. 
 
MI-VERBS: AIAOMI 253 
 
 LVIII 
 
 THE INFLECTION OF MI-VERBS {Continued): BiBa/M, 
 eaXwv OR ^Xmv, eyvwv 
 
 569. Learn the inflection of SiBwfii give in the present 
 system active and middle (= passive) and in the second 
 aorist, active and middle (§ 646). 
 
 570. BiBoafii is a reduplicated present, like "(tttjixl and 
 TiOrj/jLi, built on the theme So- thus : Bi-Sa)-fj,i. The vowel 
 of the theme is long («) in the singular of the present 
 indicative active. The singular of the imperfect indica- 
 tive active is formed like the corresponding singular of 
 a contract verb in -oaj thus : iSiBovv, e'SiSov?, eBiBou. Simi- 
 larly the second person singular of the present imperative 
 active is BiBov. 
 
 571. The second aorist indicative active of BiBw/jli is 
 wanting in the singular number ; its place is supplied by 
 first aorist forms with the irregular suffix -xa, -/cay, -xe (cp. 
 edtjKa and ^/ea). So the inflection of the aorist indicative 
 active is as follows : 
 
 cSuKa 
 
 ^'SwKas 
 
 'iSa>Kt(y) 
 
 I Aor. ^8otov «8oTe \ 2 Aor. 
 
 4S(!tt]v cSoo-av 
 
 572. It is convenient to group together four irregular 
 forms of the second aorist active imperative, in the second 
 person singular : 6e<; (riOrifii, § 646), e? (frjfii, § 649), 809 
 (BiBm/jLi, § 646), and o-p^e? (e%a), 2 aor. eV^oi^). The last 
 named resembles the other forms only in using -9 for -di as 
 the personal ending. 
 
254 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 573- As mentioned before (§ 553), some <o-verbs have 
 second aorists inflected like those of |xi-verbs. Here are 
 included the second aorists of aXbcrKo/juai be captured, and 
 r^iryvwaKOi know. Following are the synopses : 
 
 / 
 
 Indie. 
 
 laXuv or 
 
 T]X(I)V 
 
 
 b. S7VIDV 
 
 Subjv. 
 
 ak& 
 
 
 
 7vS 
 
 Opt. 
 
 iXoivfl 
 
 
 
 YVoC-qv 
 
 Imv. 
 
 wanting 
 
 
 
 YvfiOi 
 
 Inf. 
 
 aXwvai 
 
 
 
 "yvuvai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 dXovs, dXovo-a, d\6v 
 
 7voiis, 7vo0<ra, -^viv 
 
 G. 
 
 oXovTOs, 
 
 a\ov<rT]S, 
 etc. 
 
 oXdvTos 
 
 7v6vTos, 7Voi(n]S, 7V<vtos 
 
 ete. 
 
 574- These two verbs (aXiaKoixai and yiyvacrKm), differ- 
 ing- from SiSm/ii, retain a> throughout the second aorist 
 indicative, imperative (except the third person plural), 
 and infinitive (cp., on the contrary, eSoaav, Sorm, etc.): 
 
 SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE OF ViYveJo-Ku 
 
 1 . e7V(i)v 
 
 2. CYVCDS 
 
 3. 'iyva 
 
 2. 7VS61 
 
 3. 7v<6t(i) 
 
 tyvutTov 
 l-yvcoTTjv 
 
 j^j* 4WliPEhA*r"lVE 
 
 t O' 
 
 ^VUTOV 
 
 7V(4t(i)v 
 
 fyVlDTC 
 
 iyvioirav 
 
 yvare 
 7v6vTci>v 
 
 The subjunctive and optative are inflected like fiw and 
 Soirjv. 
 
 575. Learn the declension of SiBov<; and Sovi, which are 
 declined ahke (§ 621). Similarly are declined aXous and 
 yvov<;. 
 
MI-VERBS: AiAIiMl 355 
 
 576- VOCABULARY LVIII 
 
 ci\-l<rKO|ioi (themes a\- and dXo-), 8ia-8t8w|ii : give from hand to 
 
 a\(&(ro|iai, loXwv or tiXuv, I^Xuica hand, distribute. 
 
 or i)\(i)Ka : be taken, be captured. SCSupii, Sao-u, k'SwKa and «8otov, 
 
 Used as pass, of aip^o). SffiwKa, 8^8o|ioi, a6er|v: give; 
 
 iiro-o-co'Sw : jaw />-(7w something ; sometimes offer (in pres. and 
 
 bring safely back. impf.). 8£kt)v 8i86voi: give 
 
 BoppopiK6s, \, 6v (pdpPopos) : for- satisfaction, suffer punish- 
 
 eign,barbarian,not Greek. Bar- ment. Cp. 8ffipov. Lat. do, 
 
 baric. donum. 
 
 8Egi6s, ^, dv: rz^^if, o« the right iK-XcCiroi : /i?az/« 02/;/, abandon; 
 
 hand or jz'i^i?. 8£5id, os, t| (sup- (intr.) /ijaw off, fail. Eclipse. 
 
 ply x«'p) : the right hand, as a XiSvxi, ISj ^l : spear point, spear. 
 
 "Lat. dexter. •iTapa-ZLho\i.i. give over, surrender; 
 
 Sia-pdXX(i>: accuse falsely, slander. pass along {^.'^z.X.tiamoxA: <riiv- 
 
 Diabolic (Sia-Po\iKds). ei)|jia). 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 577* I- !• o oe Kii/305 StSwcrii' aurw e^ \in]vbiv^ /xt,- 
 (t66v. 2. Kat 17 KiXicrcra iXeyero Kupw SoSi'at 8ta 
 ^lXlolv ^/Jij/iara TroXXa. 3. <^iX.os re ifiovXeTO eti'at 
 TOts [JLcyi-crTOv ovvafx.ivoi'i^ Iva ahiKO)v fir] 8180117 Slktjv. 
 4. crvfi/SovXevo) Vfjilv firj irapahovvai ra oirKa. 5. eirei 
 Se Kuyoos ou/f eScoKe TnaToi, Tia-craffiepvrj's StaySaWei 
 auTov TT/jos Toi/ dSeX(j)6i>. 6. eyvcocrav ol aTpaTLayrai. 
 on Kepo? 6 (f}6/3o? etrj. 7. ravryju rr/v ttoKiv i^eXtvov 
 ol avdpwTTOi, KoX ovrcDS idXa. 8. KXeap^os 8' el- 
 7761' on ou Twi' VLKcovTcov^ €17) TO. ovXa TTapaBLSovat,. 
 9. TavTa TO. Scopa rois <^iXois 8ieSt8ou. lO. (f)0^oCiJir}v 
 
 1 § 278. ' 
 
 * /lie most powerful, 
 
 * the fart of, etc.; cp. §§ 229, 232. I. 10, 540. II, 15. 
 
256 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 8' av rw -qyefJLOVL eVecr6'at w^ Kupos 8017;.^ II. eWew- 
 deif 8i8ddo-tv 01 /xev Ilepo-at fiapfiapLKrjV \6yxnv Tois 
 "EXXT^crif, 01 8e 'EWijves iKeivois 'EWrjvLKiji'. 12. eai/ 
 Se /A'i^ 8i8a) raCra ra irXola, riyefxova. aiTOifiev Kvpov. 
 
 II. 13. 'S.vepi'ecTLS eSaKe Kvpco -^ptJiJuaTa TToXXa eis 
 T'Jji' aTpandv. 14. ^ai to) Kcofjudp^rj eSt8ocraj' Xa/x^a- 
 I'etj'* o Ti /SovXotro. 15. raCra Se yi/ous rJTOVfirjv 
 ^acriXed SoBi'at e/xoi aTroo-wcrai * VjU.as eis rij^ EXXa8a. 
 
 16. /cai Tia-(ja(f>epvr)s' /cat 6 717? jSacrtXews ywaiKOS 
 dSeX(^os 8efia? iSoaav rots twv 'EXXifvwi' oTpaTTjyois. 
 
 17. 6 8' di'17/3 ou^ TjXo) eV T^ Katp-r). 18. /cai piauov 
 ovK iSiSov 6 (jarpdirrj^. 19. dvicrTrjcrav 01 "RkXrjve? 
 Kol etwov oTi a>pa.^ cf)vXaKa<; KaduTTavai Kol avuurjpa 
 irapaBiSovaL. 
 
 III. I. Then the generals knew^ that it was not safe 
 to remain. 2. We gave pledges to the captains of the 
 Greeks. 3. I should fear to embark ^ on the boats which 
 Cyrus might give us. 
 
 1 § 285. 
 
 2 This relative clause has the construction of the protasis of a less vivid 
 future condition (§ 267), the conclusion being expressed by <|>oPoC|xt|v av. 
 In this sentence w, attracted from 8v to the case of its antecedent T|'Ye|i6vi, is 
 equivalent to et riva. The less vivid future type of the conditional relative 
 protasis (introduced by os, ore, liret, etc.) is comparatively rare. 
 
 ^ § 244. * Cp. § 568. II. 15. 5 permission to take. 
 
 * permission to bring you safely hack. 
 
 ' § 230. ^ 2 aor. 8 c)i-paCveiv with els and ace 
 
 Fig. 23. — XbYxn. 
 
MI-VERBS: AEIKNYMI 257 
 
 LIX 
 
 IHE INFLECTION OF MI-VERBS {Continued): Bekvvfii, 
 eSvv, KeifJLM. WISHES 
 
 578- Learn the inflection of BeiKvvfu show in the present 
 system active and middle ( = passive), § 648. 
 
 579- The final vowel of the theme is long (U) in the 
 singular of the present and imperfect indicative active, and 
 in the second person singular of the present imperative 
 active. 
 
 580. This verb has a regular first aorist (e8et^a), but no 
 second aorist. A second aorist of the |Jii-form, however, is 
 seen in eSw from hvfn enter, set, sink (used of the sun). 
 Its second aorist synopsis is as follows : 
 
 Indie. eSiJv ; subjv. Svw ; opt. wanting ; imv. SC^t ; inf. SSrai ; partic. 
 ^^•1, hvaa., hiv (gen. Suvtos, Sucijs, hivTiK). 
 
 Learn the inflection of this second aorist (§ 648). 
 
 581. The subjunctive and optative of verbs in -U|ii are 
 formed exactly like the corresponding moods of (o-verbs, 
 without contraction. And even in the other moods the- 
 matic forms {i.e. co-forms) also occur. Thus BetKVvei is 
 found along with SeiKvvai ; iSeiKVve with iSeiKvi ; and Set- 
 Kvvwv as well as SeiKvv';. 
 
 582. Learn the declension of BeiKvvi and Si;?, which are 
 declined alike (§ 619). 
 
 583. Learn the inflection of Kelfiai He, be placed, be situ- 
 ated (§ 654). This verb and its compounds are used as 
 perfect passives of riOrjfii place and its compounds. 
 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 17 
 
258 • BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 584. Possible wishes — Wishes that refer to future time 
 are expressed by the present or aorist optative without av. 
 This optative is sometimes introduced by eWe or ei yap 
 if only, would that. The negative is /u.^ : 
 
 /i^ ot ^£01 ravra Soiev may the gods not grant this. 
 aio^oicrde or eWe a-w^oiaOe may you be saved. 
 
 585. Impossible wishes. — Wishes that cannot be real- 
 ized refer to present or past time. They may be expressed 
 by the imperfect indicative (of present time) or the aorist 
 indicative (of past time) ; these tenses must be introduced 
 by dQe. or et 'idp. The negative is p-r] : 
 
 uQe. ot Qioi TavTa n,r) ihoaav would that the gods had not granted this. 
 
 586. A wish that cannot be realized may also be ex- 
 pressed by a>(j)eXov, e?, e (2 aor. of cx^eiXco owf), I, you, or he 
 ouglit with the present or aorist infinitive : 
 
 (u<^£A.e KCpos tjrjv would that Cyrus were alive {lit. Cyrus ought to be 
 living). 
 
 587. VOCABULARY LIX 
 
 dva-iravo) : make cease ; mid. rest. with gen. of pars, and inf. Cp. 
 
 air-6\Xv|ii (6\\v|i.i for fi\-vii-|ii, 8ti. 
 
 themes oX-, oXe- ; 6\.u, uXco-a, Svu (and Svvu) , Svcrw, cSvo-a 
 
 oXuXeKa [§ 447] and 2 pf. fiXmXo, (trans.), eSCv (intr.), SeSvica, 
 
 uX(S|iT|v) : destroy, lose ; mid. SE'Supiat, eSvOtiv : enter, set (used 
 
 and 2 pf. 3.ct., perish, be lost. of the sun). 
 
 avTov (cp. airos), adv.. in the im-itlnvvf.}, : show, point out ; raiA. 
 
 very place, here, there. in sense of act. and also distin- 
 
 8e£Kvv|ii (and Scikvvu, theme 8eiK-), guish oneself. 
 
 Sttgw, cSei^a, S^Scixa, 8^861711.01, M-Kcifiai : lie upon, attack, with 
 
 c8c(x6t|v : show, point out. dat. 
 
 S^ofiai, Sc^o-oiiiai, 868c'T)|ioi., 486'^6r|v, iJXios, ov, 6 : sun. Helio-trope 
 
 dep. pass. : want, need; desire, (Tp^irm turn). 
 
 ask, beg. Often with gen. or KaTd-Kci.|j.ai : lie down. 
 
MI-VERBS: AEIKNYMI 
 
 259 
 
 K&^a>.,KiWo^ax: lie, lie outstretched certainly, yc^i'/jv: to be sure, 
 
 as the dead on the battlefield. at any rate. 
 
 This verb is used as the pass. vcKpds, ov, 6: dead body, corpse. 
 
 of the pf. tenses of rffltint, in Cp. Lat. need. Necro-logy (\6- 
 
 the meaning be placed, be set. -yos account) . 
 
 With Ta SirXo Kctrai cp. the fi|ji-vv-|ii (and o^-v<m, themes 6(1-, 
 
 act. 6c'<r9ai rd SirXa. °l''<>-)> 0|i.oG)i,ai, co|jio(ra, 0|ji<i|i.oKa 
 
 Koivo^, i\, 6v: common, in common, (§447), a|j,(i)io((r)|i,ai, u(i6- 
 
 general. (cr)9riv: swear, promise with 
 
 MfjSoi, (i)v, 01 : the Medes. an oath, take oath. 
 ^■i\v, postpositive adv. : in truth, 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 588. I. I. 6 8e T-i]v iiTta'ToX'^v Xa^wv Kvpo) BeiKvv- 
 aiv. 2. Tavra ^liroiv iSetKvve ttoWol koI Ka\a XPV' 
 fiara. 3. Tas Se /ce<^aXos rwv veKpcHv iireSeLKuva-av 
 Tols 'EX.Xt^ctii'. 4. ■^v ovv Ti^? wpds ^ fUKphv TTpo SvjTOS 
 ijXiou. 5. Kvpos Se Toi/ OupoLKa iveSv,^ kol dvajShs 
 im Tov Ittttov to, TraXra ets tSs ^et/3a? iXa^ev. 6. ei/- 
 Tavda XeyeraL rj fiatriXico? yvvrj (^vyelv, ore anaWvcrav 
 T^v dp^ijv VTTO IlepcriSi' MrjSoL. y. cip-vvTe 8e i7jari' 
 Toil's avTov<; (f>t\ov?^ /cat ix^pov? vofjueiv.* 8. ets ye 
 jLi'^i' dperrju iTTiheiKwcrdai ifiovkero. \ 9. iic 8e tovtov ^ 
 dXXob dvLCTTavTo i7ri,SeiKvvi>T€<; old etrj ® rj dnopCd. 
 10. jif^ yevoLfieda ^wi^res ctti rots 7roXeju.toi5. 1 1- ot 
 8e TToXe^LOi evdv<i iiriKeivTo avToi?. 12. 'Keipia-o^os 
 y/yolro. it,. troWd p,oi kcu dyaOdyivoiTO. 14. e/ceti'To 
 8e TToXXot ei' TftJ TreSio). 
 
 II. 15. /cat Tcoi' vTTot,vyi(i)v /cat rwi* di'8paTroSa)i' TToXXd 
 
 1 the time was, lit. it 71/as of the hour, part. gen. with the following words. 
 
 ''■put on, lit. entered, 2 aor. of Iv-Svu. 
 
 3 the same men as friends. * § 519- 
 
 ^, and thereupon. ^ § 345. 
 
26o BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 ttTTCuXero. 1 6. r^p^avTO Kara/BaiveLV irpo'S tows aWous 
 evda Ta onXa eKeLTO. 17. kol Xeyerai Serjdrjpai -q 
 KiXicra-a Kvpov iinBel^aL TO (TTpaTevfia avrrj. 18. /ca- 
 TaKeijjieda uanep i^ov^ dvanavecrdaL. 1 9. ecus o av 
 avTov ixeixofjiev, iraires SeofieOa Koivrj^ trwTT/pid? • 770X- 
 Xol yap OLTToXXwrai. 
 
 III. I. We took oaths 2 not^ to be enemies* to one 
 another. 2. Many men lay prostrate on the plain after 
 the battle. 3. They gladly show^ their possessions to 
 Cyrus. 
 
 LX 
 
 IRREGULAR MI-VERBS: elfu, (ftrifii, o2Sa, AND el/ii 
 {Cotnpleted and Reviewed) 
 
 589. Learn the inflection of et/tt / am going, I shall go 
 (§ 651); <f>rj/ii / saj/ (^ 652); and olBa I know (^ 655)- 
 
 Review the inflection of el/jii I am (§ 650). 
 
 590. VOCABULARY LX 
 
 tt-8i)voTos, ov (8vva)i.ai) : impos- ct-)u, impf. ■ga : go, shall go ; pres. 
 
 siile. serving as fut. of epxojxai. Lat. 
 
 cLir-6i|ii (€t|jii) : go away; go back, eo, Ire. 
 
 return. c|-ei|u (€l(ii) : go out, go forth. 
 
 Si-Sa-o-Ko) (theme SiSax-), 8i8d|<i), «ir-ei|ii («Ifj.i) : go or come on, ap- 
 
 ISCSa^a, 8c8(Saxa, SeSlSa-yiiai, ISi- proach. 
 
 84x81" '• teach. Didactic. 66pvPos, ou, 6 : noise. 
 
 ' § 566; this use of the ace. absolute is conditional, as is proved by tio-irtp 
 juit as if. 2 Use impf. 
 
 '§5i9-''- ■'Nom. (§ iicrf). 6 Use 8eCKvv|iv. 
 
IRREGULAR MI-VERBS 261 
 
 Kd|i.-v<ii (theme Kafi,-) , fut. Ka|i,oO|i,ai, oto-u, ijveYica or livc-yKov, Iv^voxa, 
 
 2 aor. iKa)t,ov, pf. KeK|j,T|Ka : lador, hfive<jfi.M, ■fiv^x'l" • i^oift carry ; 
 
 be weary. carry away, receive (as pay) . 
 
 KpavyVj, y\%, ^ : outcry. Cp. Lat. fero. 
 
 ol8a (3 pf. with pres. meaning), (fl-K'' (theme <|>a-), ^■i\<i<a, c<|>T|o-a: 
 
 tl'Si) (2 plup.) or ii'Seiv, ct<ro)i.ai, say, declare. ofi ^^\, (cp. 
 
 (fut.): know. Lat. nego): deny, say . . . not 
 
 4>^p(i> (themes <|)Ep-,ot-,lvcK-,lvc7K-), (§156. !.«). Cp. Lat. _/i2rz. 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION 
 
 591. I. I. oTSa Sefias SeSo/i.o'ds.^ 2. auros S' ovk 
 €<^7) ievau. 3. eSo^ev aurois amo'ai. ^4. dXXa loj/- 
 TctJi', eiSores ori^ *ca/cCous eicri Trept 17/^01? '^ "qiJ^ls Trepl 
 iKeCvov?. 5- '^i' ow 117x6 (Tvu rjfjLiu, SdpeiKov CKacrTo<; 
 vfiZv ouret tov^ ixr]v6<;.* 6. a-Ktitriov fioi SokcI elva-i 
 OTTCDS &>? dtr^aXeicrrara dmfiev /cat oirws to, iiriTrjSeia 
 e^ofiev. 7. eyft) ouv (^ij/i^t 0//,as ^/)'^fat hia^rjvai tov 
 TLv(f)pdT7]v TTorafiov irplv S'^Xov etvat o rt 01 aXXoi 
 EWt^i/cs aTTOKpivovvTai Kvpci). 8. xai tous "EXXtj- 
 I'tts €<f)a(Tav ol^ecrOaL • ottoi Se, ou/c i(f>aa-av ei8ei>ai. 
 9. TO!/ 8' GUI' ^vfftpdrrjv icrfjLev otl dSvparov^ Stafiyjvat 
 KcoXvouTOJv iToXefjiicov. 10. Kpavyrj ttoXX^ iiTMaiv. 
 ^11. OTTws Se etSijre ets olov ep^ecrde dyStva tfid^ etSws 
 SiSdfeu. 12. /cat aurot i^ovXevovTO el avTov fievoiev^ 
 rj dirioiev eVi to (rrpaToneSov. 
 
 II. 13. TaSra Be Xeycov dopvfiov TJKOvcre^ 8td tcov 
 rd^ecDv tdi'Tos. 1 4. oto) Se MeVcuv (f)aLrj^ <f)iXo<s elvat, 
 TovTO) StjXo? eylyveTo iirt/SovXevwv. 1 5 • rows S' dvOpat- 
 irous riptaTcav et rti/a etSetei' dXXTjv oSou rj rrjv (pavepdv. 
 
 1 § 441. 2 § 442. 8 each i § 155. 
 
 5 §§223, 291. «§§ 363. 564. 565- '§193. '§4I7- 
 
262 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 1 6. KXeixp^e Kal Ilpo^eve /cat oi aWoi ol irapovTe? 
 "EWrjves, ovk wrre o rt Troieire. 1 7. eyoj toivvv, w 
 ai'Spes, Koifivo) tjSt/ crucr/ceua^o/Aevos ^ /cai Tpe)(a)v /cai ra 
 OTrXa (j)€pcji)v Kal iv rct^ei iwi^ Kal <f)v\aKas ^ (jivXaTTcou 
 Koi ixa)(6p,evo<i- 18. a/oia 17X1^ Swovrt^ ot EXX.i^i'es 
 i^rjecrav Ik t&v Kcofimv. 
 
 III. I. Clearchus deliberated whether they should send* 
 some men ^ or should all go to the camp. 2. They said 
 they did not know in what direction ^ the barbarians had 
 gone. 
 
 1 § 439. 2 I iSi. s at sunset (cp. § 157). 
 
 *§§ 362, 564, 565. ^ Omit mm, ^ 8irot. 
 
^ ',. . 
 
 
 '\"',i n ' 
 
SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS 
 
 [The following selections are from Xenophon's Anabasis of Cyrus. 
 In places they are somewhat simplified, chiefly by the omission of 
 unessential details.] 
 
 THE SUBJECT OF THE ANABASIS 
 
 Cyrus, a young and ambitious prince of Persia, plotted 
 to wrest the throne from his elder brother Artaxerxes II, 
 the reigning king (401 B.C.). So far as possible, he dis- 
 guised his real purpose. But information of the plot was 
 nevertheless laid before the Great King by his crafty satrap 
 Tissaphemes. 
 
 Cyrus enlisted in his enterprise about thirteen thousand 
 Greek soldiers, who were attracted by the desire to serve 
 under so noble a leader and by the promise of large pay. 
 The larger part of these assembled, under Cyrus's orders, 
 at Sardis ; and from this city they set forth in the spring 
 of 401 B.C. Only after they had marched well into the 
 interior were they informed of the real object of the expe- 
 dition. Cyrus had also a host of Persians, said to have 
 numbered a hundred thousand. They proved utterly un- 
 reliable. The leader of this "barbarian" force was the 
 Persian Ariaeus. 
 
 The young prince was generous ; he had persuasive man- 
 ners and the enthusiasm of youth. He dazzled the common 
 soldiers with his promises, and he commanded the loyalty 
 of his officers by rich presents and favors. So he was 
 able to win to his cause many really noble spirits among 
 
 263 
 
264 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 both Persians and Greeks. Not a few of these, as the 
 sequel showed, were ready to prove their devotion by sac- 
 rificing their Hves. Of his Greek generals the most promi- 
 nent was the Spartan Clearchus, a fearless and exceedingly 
 stern disciplinarian. The other Greek generals were faith- 
 ful and in their way good men, also ; but exception must 
 be made of the Thessalian Menon, who was faithless and 
 unprincipled. 
 
 By the village of Cunaxa, near Babylon, Cyrus met the 
 royal army, which was commanded by the king in person 
 (late in the summer of 401 B.C.). Cyrus's force was out- 
 numbered eight times over, if reliance may be placed on 
 the figures that are mentioned. Yet the issue of the battle 
 might haye^jeen favorable to Cyrus, owing to the valor and 
 success of his Greek mercenaries, if only he had not risked 
 his own life. He was slain. And the Greeks, far from 
 wishing any pretext for staying longer in the Persian em- 
 pire, had only the desire to get back to Greek lands again. 
 
 They accomplished their wearisome and dangerous re- 
 treat during the winter of 401-400 B.C., striking through 
 the country northward over mountains and, for the most 
 part, through wild and hostile tribes. But almost at the 
 beginning of their retreat, before they had passed out 
 of the reach of Persia, they lost the leadership of their 
 generals, including the intrepid Clearchus. These were 
 entrapped and put to death through the agency of 
 Tissaphernes. 
 
 At this point Xenophon, the Athenian, the author of the 
 history, put himself forward as a leader. He had pre- 
 viously accompanied the expedition merely as a gentle- 
 man in search of adventure. He was now elected a 
 general and appointed to the difficult position of com- 
 mander of the rear guard, while Cheirisophus was chosen 
 
SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS 265 
 
 io command the van. And under this leadership the 
 Greeks who have become known in history as " The Ten 
 Thousand " came, with losses, to Trebizond, one of the 
 Greek settlements on the Black Sea. After further adven- 
 tures they arrived finally in Ionia again (Cheirisophus had 
 meantime died). 
 
 Xenophon was the author of several interesting works 
 besides the Anabasis of Cyrus. And in addition to his 
 literary interests he was an ardent sportsman, fond of 
 horses, dogs, and hunting. He has left us a description 
 of his pleasant country-place in Elis, where later in life he 
 settled to enjoy his good fortune, surrounded by his family. 
 Here he engaged in the composition of his books and in 
 the delights of country life. 
 
 I. The Greek soldiers and the inducements to join Cyrus's army 
 
 01 TrXercTTOt T(3iv crrpaTKUTwi' r\<To,v ov (Tiravei ^Cov 
 
 CKTreirXeu/fOTes cTri TavTTjv Trjv iJi,i,a0o(f)opoiv, dWa 
 
 T^v Kvpov dpeTrjv aKovovTC';, 01 fiev koI dvSpa'S 
 
 ayovTes, ol 8e Koi vpocravrjXcaKOTe? ^pi^'/aaTa, Kal 
 
 5 Toijrcav hepoi diroBehpdKOTe'i iraripa^ koX fiyjrepa^, 
 
 1. I. ijo-av iKitfir\tvK6Tis (cK- oi (lev . . . ol84: see § 99; the 
 ttXoo): had sailed off irom their words are appositives to olirXelo-Toi. 
 homes. avSpos oyovtcs : bringing 7nen 
 
 04 o-irdvei ptov: not on account along, i.e. enlisting soldiers with 
 
 of lack of means, not from lack the aid of the money that Cyrus 
 
 of livelihood, (nrdvei. is dative of furnished, 
 cause (§ 403). 4- irpoorovt|Xft)K6T€s : having 
 
 2. Iirl Ta«Ti]V Tiiv |iia-9oi)>opcSv : spent in addition, money of their 
 after this pay, i.e. to earn money own ; see irpoa-avSKia-Kos. 
 
 by service in Cyrus's army. 5- ToiiTaiv : partitive genitive 
 
 3. oKovovT€s: expresses cause -^Vhiri^i others, 
 (§213)- 
 
266 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 ol Se Kot T€Kva KaToXiTTOvTe'i ais xfnjfiaT avroi? 
 KTrjo'd^evov '^^ovts? Trdkiv, aKovovTe.^ kcil tov? aX- 
 Xov<s Tovs Tvapa Kvpco 7roXX.a koL dyada Trpdrreiv. 
 (vi. 4. 8.) 6 8e Kvpos crrjOareujU,aTt akrjdiva ixPV' 
 10 craro. /cat ya/> crrpaTriyoi Kai Xoj^ayoi, 01 -^prjfjiaTOJv 
 iveKa vpo<; eKelvov enXevcrav, eyfaxxav KepoaXecorepov 
 elvai Kvpcp /caXws vtrdp-^eLv rj to Kara, [xrjva KepSo?. 
 (i. 9. 17.) 
 
 II. Cyrus leads his army into the heart of the Persian empire before 
 he meets serious resistance. The king's apparent unwilling- 
 ness to fight throws the invaders off their guard 
 
 r\v Se Trapd tov ^v<f)pdTr]v TrapoSo? cnevr] fiera^v 
 
 Tov TTOTajxov KOL Trj<; Td(f)pov (US eucocri Tro8b)v to 
 
 evpo? • TavTTjv 8e rrjv rd^pov ^acnXevs g rotet dvTl 
 
 ipvp,aTo<;, eTreiSi^ Trvvddverai K.vpov TrpocreXavvovTa. 
 
 S TavTiqv Sij Tr]u ndpoSov Kupds re /cat 17 CTTpaTih 
 
 6. us XP^I'^O''^' a^Tots KTT)(rd|jLE- 12. TO KaTOL |i,{jva K^pSos: 
 vol iilovTcs irdXiv : w?'//; the purpose monthly pay. 
 
 of returning again (§ 332) after II. .1.. ({koo-i. iroSuv : see § 278. 
 
 they had gained wealth for them. to Evpos : see § 279. 
 
 7. Toiis aWovs tov; irapd Kvpu : 3. iroiet: had made. 
 
 = Toiis Trapct Kiipui aXKovi (§§ 67, civtI lpv|j.aTos : for a defense. 
 
 70), subject of irpa.TT€iv. 4. eiTEiSr] ■jruvBdvtTai : when he 
 
 8. iroWa Kal d-YaSd irpaTTtiv learned. The present is fre- 
 (§ no): were making great for- quently used by Xenophon when 
 tunes. a past tense is required by good 
 
 g. dXT]6iv$ : trusty. English style. Troiei and irwdd- 
 iX9'l\<''0''"> '■ had the services of. verai are illustrations of the so- 
 il K€p8a\€t6T6pov€tvai(§ no): called " historical present." 
 it was more profitable. irpoo-eXaivovxa ; see § 441. 
 
SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS 267 
 
 rraprjXde Koi tyivovTO elcrw ttJi Td<j)pov. TavTy jxeu 
 Qvv Trj Tjixepa ovk eua^ejoro^ ySaatXev?, aX\' vno)(a}- 
 poivTOiv cjiavepa '^crav /cat iTiTTOiv koX avd pdiiTOiv i-X^'V 
 TToWd. ivravda Kupos %iXdvov Kokecrds tov 'Apjrpa.- 
 
 10 KLUtrrfv fxavTiv eScoKei' avTco Sd/3eiKous rpicr^iXtous, 
 on ryj ivSeKaTrj oltt' iKeLU7]<; rffiepq, irpodvop^evo? elrrev 
 avTW OTL |8acrtA.ei)9 ou jLia^elrat 8e/ca rjpepav, Kvyoos 
 8' eiTTfv, Ovk dpa. in jtia^eiTai, el iv raurais oi jJiaxei- 
 rat Tats rjfiepaii; ■ iav 8' dXr)0ev(rjj<;, vmcrx^ovfJiaC croi 
 
 15 8e/ca TokavTa. tovto to ^pvaiov totc dneStoKev, eVei 
 TTaprjXOov ai 8e/ca rjpepai. iirel 8' im ry Td<^p(a ovk 
 eKcoXve /SaaiXeu? to Kvpov o-TpdTevjjia Sua/SaCveiv, 
 e8ofe /cat Kvpw /cat rots aXXots dneyvaiKivai tov 
 fid^eaffai • tSare Ty vaTepaua Kvpo? inopeveTO Tjpe- 
 
 20 \y]p.iv(a<; pdWov. Ty 8e TpiTy IttL re tov dppaTo? 
 
 6. ToiTn T'ii Tm^pc}. : see § 180. 13. OiK oLpa kt\. : the direct 
 
 7. iiroxwpoivTwv • retreating, quotation is introduced by a capital 
 agrees with l-mnnv and avOpisiruiv. letter (without quotation marks), 
 
 8. Tio-av : the subject is the § 2. 
 
 neuter plural lyyt]- This devia- el . . . o« ^laxEirai : this appar- 
 
 tion from the rule (§ 71) occurs ently irregular negative (§ 106. h) 
 
 occasionally in the Anabasis and is used because Cyrus quotes the 
 
 in other Greek. exact words of the soothsayer 
 
 9. 'A(j.irpaKi<iTi)v : Ambracian, above (1. 12). 
 
 from the town Ambracia in Epirus. 14- '^^ d.\Ti6«vcrt)s : see § 241 . 
 
 11. T'Q IvSEKdrxi dir' «k£(vt|s 17. IkiSX,v« . . . SiopaCveiv : see 
 T|)i,^pa (§ 180) : on the eleventh § 382. I. I. 
 
 day before, i.e. (in our idiom) ten 18. t8o|« . . . dir-eYvuKivai 
 
 days before. The Greeks, like the (from dTro-ytyvwo-KO)) toB |*dx6- 
 
 Romans, counted in the days at a^a.\.: he seemed to have abandoned 
 
 both ends of the reckoning. With the idea of fighting. 
 
 dir' IkcCviis supply T^s ^/ifp"s- '9- t|(i.6Xti(J.^v<i)S |J.o\\ov: more 
 
 12. 8^Kar||ji6pi5v: see § 155. carelessly. 
 
268 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Kadijixevo? Tr}v nopeidv iiro(.elT9 koL oXiyov? iv rafei 
 i)(0)v 77/30 avTov, TO 8e TToXv avTw avoLTeTapayiieuov 
 iiTopevtTo Kol TUiv 6n\ct)v rots aTpa/nu^Tai^ ttoWo, em 
 a/xa^cov riy€TO KoX vTTO^vyCcDV, (i. 7- ^5~-^^') 
 
 III. The battle of Cunaxa, in which Cyrus encounters the Persian 
 king and is slain 
 
 Kal rjZrj re rjv dfitf)! ayophv irXt^Oovcraiv koX vkr)- 
 criov '^v 6 (TTa6p,o<s ivda, efieXke /caraXtjetv, rjVLKa 
 TlaTrjyvds avrfp Hepayjs tS)v dfji(f>L K.vpoi> tticttSiv 
 TTpo^aiverai iXavvcou dvd Kpa.TO'i iSpovvTi t(o itttto), 
 5 Kat evOvs Trdcriv ols iveruyxavev ifiod kcli fiap/3a- 
 piKb)<i KoX ''EXXtjvikcix; oTi ySacrtXeus (tvv crTpaTev/jiaTi. 
 TToXXw Trpoa-ep^eTai ws eis p-d-x^l^ irapeaKevacrjxivo';. 
 evOa Srj voXv's Tapa^o's iyeuero • Kuyoo's re /caraTnj- 
 Sifcrds OLtro tov a.pp.aTO<i tov dutpdKa iueSv Kal dva- 
 
 21. Ka6^|jiEvos: sitting, partici- station (cp. '(rrrjfu) is the meln- 
 ple of KaOxjiuu, which is inflected ing here. 
 
 in § 653. Kara-Xvciv : to unyoke the pack 
 
 22. t6 8t iroXw : supply tov animals for the rest from the mid- 
 CTTpaTtwfuxTog. day heat. cfjicXXe takes a present 
 
 awT^: for him, dative of dis- infinitive as well as the future 
 
 advantage (§ 53. d). .(§ 156. 2). 
 
 23. The order of the Greek 3. twv d(i,()>l Kupov irio-Tuv: 
 words rearranged for translation partitive genitive. Cyrus had a 
 is : iroWA TWV oirXcov v^vto (were devoted bodyguard. 
 
 carw(??) Tots o-TpoTicSrais (§ 53. rf) 4. iSpovvTi t§ tirirfp: -with his 
 
 lirV afia^uv Kal vTro^vytuv. horse in a sweat, properly a dative 
 
 (rav 
 
 III. I. d|ji(t>l a-yopav irX^Sov- of means (§ 141). 
 about the time of full market, 5. ^ap^apiKuii: in Persian. 
 
 the middle of the forenoon. 7. us . . . irop€<rK«ua(r(i<vos : ap- 
 
 2. (rTa6|i.6s : stopping place ox par ently prepared. 
 
SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS 269 
 
 10 ^h<i cttI 701* Itittov to, irakTa cis ras ^^ipas eXa^e, 
 Tois re aWois Tracri trapriyyfKKei/ i^oirXi^eadaL Kal 
 KadiCTTacrdaL ets ttjv iavTov rd^iv eKacTTov. ivda 
 S17 avv TToXXij o-ttouStj KaOicTTavTO, KXeap^os /u.ei' rci 
 Sel'ia Tou KepdTO<; i-^^oiv irpo<i ra Eixftpdrri TTorafia, 
 
 15 Tipo^evos 8e i^ofievo?, ol 8' aXXot ju,eTa toGtoi', Mevcuv 
 8e TO eidjvvjjLov Kepas eo"Y€ roO 'EXXyjvi/foi). Kupos 
 8e Kal ol iTTn^eis toutou ocroi' k^aKoaioi icTTTjcrav Kara 
 fie(Tov Tov fiap^apiKov, o}it\l(t p,4voi dcjpd^L fieu avrol 
 Kal Trapap,y)piZioi<; Kal Kpaveat iraires ttXtjv K6pov ■ 
 
 20 Kvpo<s 8e xjjlX'^v exov Trjv Ke(f)a\riu eis ttjv p.a.^'qv 
 KadicTTaTo. Kal yjSr) re ■^v p-eaov rffjuepds Kal ovno) 
 KaTa(f)aueL'S rjaav ol Tro\ip.ioi • rfviKa 8e 8etX7j iyi- 
 yucTo, i<j>dvr) KoviopTo<s (acnrep vecjyeXr) XevKT), '^povui 
 8e av^v^ vcrrepov c^crirep fiekavid tis iv t<5 ttcSiw eVi 
 
 25 TToXu. ore Se lyyvrepov iytyvovTo, rd^a 8^ at Xdy 
 ^at Kat ai Tct^eis KaTa<f>aveL^ iyiyvovTO. koX ^aav 
 iTTTreis jLiei' XevKo0c6pdKes eirt rov ev(avvp,ov twv iroXe- 
 fjbicov TL(r(Ta^epv7](; iXeyero TovTOJv dpxeiv ' i)(op.evoL 
 8e yeppo(j)6poi,, i'^op.evoi 8e oirXirai crui' irooTjpecn 
 
 12. ?KO<rTov: sac^, in apposi- helmet. But Cyrus doubtless wore 
 tion to the subject of KaOia-Tacrdai ; the tiara, the usual Persian head- 
 orderedthe}H each to take his place, dress, which was a sort of turban. 
 
 13. TdSeJtATci!K^poTos(§l79); 22. %iSkt\: early afternoon, 
 the right wing. For the declension 23. I(t>dvi): appeared, 2 aor. 
 of K€/oaros see § 602. pass, of ^aiVw. 
 
 14. irp6s: fej/ofe. XP<5''<? (§ 410) <riiyy^ wrcpov: 
 
 15. lxd|icvos: next. a considerable time later. 
 
 17. 8(rov: about. 24. tirl iroXi : over a long dis- 
 
 20. ilfl\t|v ex™" '■'V Ke<|><*^^v : tance. 
 with his head unprotected by a 29. 7eppo(|>6poi : supply ^trav. 
 
270 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 30 fuXti^ais danio-Lv. AlyvnTiot 8' ovToi iXdyovTo euvaL • 
 dXkoL 8' iTTTreis, dXXoL roforai. vavres 8' odroi, Kara 
 
 Fig, 25. — 8p6irovt)<t>i5pov ap|i,a. 
 
 edvT) iiTopevovTo. TTpo 8e avTu>v dpfiara StaXeiVoira 
 (Tvxvov air' dW'qXoiV to. Stj SpeiTavrf(f>6pa KaXavfJieva. 
 oi 8e fidp^apoi iv icrw kol ^paSews vpoa-fja-av. 
 
 35 /cat iv Tovro) Kvpo<; wapeXavvcov avTos <Tvv Y\.Lypy]TL 
 Tcp ipfjiTQveL Koi aWois Tpccrlv rj reTTapcri rw KXeayO^w 
 i^oa. dyeiv to crTpaTeviia Kara, fiecrov to tSiv noXe- 
 p.icov, otl ii<eL /SacriXevs e'iT] • xav tovt', e(j)7], vlKcofitv, 
 Trdvd' rjfilv veTTOi'qTai. aXX' 6 KXeap^os ovk rjdeXev 
 
 40 aTTOcnrdcrai, diro tov Trora/xoO to Sc^lov Kepa?, ^o^ov- 
 
 31. aWoi: besides, lit., other. 
 Observe the omission of a conjunc- 
 tion before the second aAAot ; this 
 is due to a desire for a vivid and 
 concise style at this point. 
 
 KaTo. e6vi) : nation by nation. 
 
 32. opjjiaTa: supply ^v. 
 SiaXcCirovTa (riixvdv : distant a 
 
 considerable space. 
 
 33. TO. . . . Ka\ov|x€va: the so- 
 
 called scythe-bearing chariots. 
 - 34. Iv to-({> : in step. 
 
 37. KUTCl (le'o-OV TO TWV IToXc- 
 
 nCcDv : against the center of the 
 enemy. 
 
 38. ett) : this causal clause in- 
 troduced by oTi because is really a 
 subordinate clause in indirect dis- 
 
SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS 
 
 271 
 
 fievo? jXT) KVKXajQeir) iKaripcodei', tco Be Kvpo) direKpi- 
 vaTO oTi avTw ju,eXot oVw? Ka\co<; e^ot. kol iv toutw 
 Tb) Katpat TO p.ev ^ap^apiKov (rrpdTevjj.a 6p,a\a>^ 
 Trpo-Qei, TO oe '^W'qvLKov en iv tw avTw jxivov crwe- 
 
 45 TaTTeTo ix tcov ert irpocnovTcav. koX 6 Kupos vape- 
 
 Xavvcov ov TTOivv TTpb<s avrw tw 0-7/3 areu/Aanjcare^eaiQ^ 
 
 eKaT€po)cre dtro^keTrcov ets re tov<s iroXe/tious K^at tow; 
 
 (J)l\ov<;. iScap 8e avTOV dnb tov 'KXX-qviKov HevocjiMp 
 
 AOrjvaio?, TreXacrds o)? crvvavTrja-aL rjpeTo ei Ti vapay- 
 
 50 yeXXot. 6 8' iiriCTTrjcrd'; elire kol Xeyetv iKeXeve 
 vdaLU oTt Kttt ra te/)d fcaXa Koi Ta a^dyoa KaXd. 
 ravTa Se Xeycjv 6opv/3ov rJKovcre Std Ta>v rd^emv 
 loj/ro?, /cat TjpeTo tls 6 66pvjio<; etrj. 6 Se e^ei* on 
 <Tvv0y]ixa TTapep)(€Tat, 8evTepov 17817. /cai Kv/)05 e^av- 
 
 course, representing the thought 
 of Cyrus ; therefore the optative 
 dri replaces the indicative 
 
 (§ 53°) ■ 
 
 Kav . . . viKufiEv : protasis of 
 the more vivid future condition ; 
 the apodosis is emphatically ex- 
 pressed as already accomplished, 
 TreTTOLrjTat. irdv6' is for iravra 
 (§§ 29, 31)- For ■iH't" see § 458. 
 
 41. |jiT| KvKX.a>6£(r) : see § 438. a. 
 
 42. OTi avT^ |x^\oL (§ 260^ oirws 
 KoXus 6'x°^ (§ 535- '^) ■ that he was 
 taking care that all should be well ; 
 lit. that it was a care to him how 
 it should be well. 
 
 44. iv T$ avT^ yivav : remain- 
 ing in the same place ; fiivov is a 
 pres. partic. nput. agi.aeing with 
 <TTpd,Tev/jia. 
 
 <riiv-«TdTT€TO : was forming in 
 line. 
 
 46. o4 irdvv irpos : not very 
 near to. 
 
 49. "ircXAo-as MS o-vvavrfjcroi : 
 approaching so as to meet him. 
 
 50. lirKTT'fio-os : supply tov itt- 
 
 TTOV. 
 
 51. TO Upd : the usual or ordi- 
 nary sacrifices ; rd <r<t>^-yi.a : the 
 propitiatory offerings, an extraor- 
 dinary service for the occasion. 
 Supply eiTy (§§ 260, 291) in the 
 predicate. 
 
 52. 6opvPov : object of ^KOv(y^ 
 which sometimes takes the thing 
 heard in the genitive. 
 
 53. €lri: see § 345. 
 
 54. irap^pxerai : might have 
 been changed to what form ? § 260. 
 
2 72 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 55 juacre tis TrapayyiWa koX ijpeTO o ti etr) to crvudrjixa. 
 6 8* direKpivaTO Zeus craTrjp kol viKr]. 6 Se Kvpog 
 d/coucrcts 'A\X,a Sej^ojuat re, e</»7, Kat tovto icrTco. 
 TttOra 8' ecTTcov ets 7171' aurou ^(wpaj^ dTnjXavve. kol 
 ovKeri TpCa rj rerrapa crraSta Stei^en^v tw (fxiXayye 
 
 60 aTJ"' dX.XifXtwi' TjvLKa iTTaLdvLl,6v re oi R\Xr)ve<; kol 
 Tjp'^oi'TO dvTLoi livai rots TToXe/Atois. /cat afx,a i<f)dey- 
 ^avTO TrdvT€? olov tw '^vvaXCio ikeKitflVcri, koX navTe? 
 Se €0eovj Xeyovcru 8e Tl^'es o)? Kal rais dcrirCcrL irpos 
 rd Sopara ihovirr^crav (j)6j3ov Troiovvre'; tois iTTTTOt?. 
 
 65' ■Trpii' 8e TO^evfia, i^LKveio'dai iKKXivovcriv ol /3dp/3apoi, 
 Kal ^evyovcri. Kal ivravda hr) iSicoKov fiev Kara Kpd- 
 709 ol "EWryi'es, e^ocov 8e dXX7]XoL<; firj Oeiv Spofiw, 
 dXX' iv rd^ei e-nea-dai. rd 8' dppara i(j)epovTo to. 
 fiev ol' avTMv tS)v TroXefiCcou, rd 8e Kal 8td tcov 'EXXij- 
 
 70 vcov Kevd ■fjvio'^cav. ol 8' iirel TrpotSoiev, Sdo'TavTO ■ 
 
 56. Zeis <r<i)Tr|p Kal vixt] : Zeus 'EvUaXCu : Enyalius, a name of 
 savior and victory, the "watch- Ares, "god of war. 
 
 word." 63. Tats ao-irCcri : see § 141. 
 
 57. 'AXXd 8lxo|''<*i : Well, I ac- 64. toIs I'lrirois : see § 53. d. 
 cept it. 65. irplv . . e|i,Kvci<r6ai : see 
 
 58. els TTjv awroB x'^p'^v : to his § 524. 
 
 own place. cKKXtvovo-iv : historical present. 
 
 59. o-rdSia : see § 142. See note on p. 266, 1. 4. 
 8i-tix^TTiv : impf. dual 3 pers. 66. Kard Kpdros : cp. avo. Kpd- 
 
 of Si-^xw : were separated. tos, § 443. 
 
 61. TJpxovTo : from apxoimi 6e- 67. Oelv Sp6|jLu (§ 141): to 
 gin. charge on the run. 
 
 avrCoi: to meet; lit. face to 68. rd |i,4v . rd 8^ : §99. 
 
 face; this adjective takes a da- 70. Kevd t)vi6x<ov : empty of 
 
 tive. charioteers. 
 
 62. olov: what sort of shout, iireV uptfCSoiev : whenever they 
 i.e. the cry which. saw them in front (§ 417). 
 
SELECTIONS From The anabasis 
 
 •^n 
 
 can o ooTis Koi KaT€\ij(f)6r) ojo-rrep ev imToSpoiJicp 
 CKirXayeis ■ koI ovSev fievroi, ouSe tovtov iradelv i(f)a- 
 crav, ovo aX.Xo; Se t(ov 'EKXtqvcju iu Tavrji Trj fJ^d-XQ 
 iiradev ouoels ovdef, irXrjv eTTi tw evoivvyiw To^evdrjvaC 
 
 75 Tis ekiyero. Kvpois S' opatv tov<s "EXXrjva'; viKa)VTa<; 
 TO Kad' avTOVS koI Stw/fovTas, i^Soyu.et'os koI vpocrKD- 
 vovp,euo<i rjhrj viro Tciiv dficf)' avTov, ovS' a»s i^ij'^^dr] 
 OKoKCiv, dWa crvvecmeLpa.p.ei'rjv e)((iiv rrjv tS)v criiv 
 iavrS i^aKoaLCDV^lTTTTecov rd^Lv inefieXeiTO 6 tl ttoltj- 
 
 80 (TCI /SacrtXevs. koI /SacriXevs S'^ Tore fiecrou ej^wv t^s 
 auTou (TTpaTid^ o/jlo)^ e^w eydvero tov Kvpov evoivv- 
 fiov KepoLTo^. i-TTel S' ovSei? e/c tov dvTvov avrcZ 
 ep.d^€TO ouSe Tois awTOu TeTayp.4i/oi<; efinpoaOev, ene- 
 KafiTTTev ws ets kukXwo'ii'. «'^a 8^ Kupos Seiacts /xi) 
 
 71. So-Ti 8' oo-Tis : and a man, 
 or <j:«df somebody ; lit. ^/%«/-£ z'j w/^o. 
 
 72. oiScv . . . o48^: only one 
 of these negatives can be trans- 
 lated into English (§ 428) . 
 
 ovS^: noi even. 
 
 73. o«8' . . . 0^8(15 ov8^v : one 
 negative in English (§ 428). 
 
 74. TolEvSfjvai : see § 391- 
 
 75. 6p«v : although he saw 
 (§ 213. c). 
 
 76. T|Sd|ievos Kal irpoo-Kuvoii|U- 
 vos : in the same construction as 
 opSv. 
 
 77. o48' &s: not even so, not 
 even under these circumstances. 
 
 78. SmSksiv: complementary in- 
 finitive. 
 
 o-vv-C(rircipa|i^vT|V : from cru- 
 (Tirapdoijuu. The six hundred 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 18 
 
 horsemen were Cyrus's body- 
 guard. 
 
 79. lir-£|uX£tTo : watched to 
 see. 
 
 80. ^xuv: although he occupied 
 (§ 213. c)\ the concessive force is 
 clearly indicated by the following 
 o/u,o)s nevertheless. 
 
 82. K^paros : for the construc- 
 tion see § 372. 
 
 Ik toB avrCov : from the oppos- 
 ing line. 
 
 o4t§: see § 317. 
 
 83. Tots TeTa7(Uvois : in the 
 same construction as avr<3. 
 
 airov : to be taken with ejuirpo- 
 aBev. 
 
 84. us Ets KiKXcDiriv : appar- 
 ently for encircling the army of 
 Cyrus, i.e. for a flank Tnarch. 
 
2 74 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 85 OTTLcrdev ye'O/Aevos KaTaKo^rj to 'EWtjvlkov iXavvei 
 avTLO'S ■ KoX ifJi^aXcjv crvv rol<; €$aKocrioL<; vIkS. tous 
 Trpo /SacrtXecos Te.Tajji.ivov'; koX ets ^vyrju eTpeijje 
 Tovs e^aKL(T)(lXiov<;, /cat diroKTelvai, XeyeraL avros Trj 
 iavTOv X^'/'' 'Aprayepcr'rjv TOi" ap'^ovra. avTCJV. <us 
 
 90 8' rj TpoTTTf iyevero, SiacnreCpovTai, koI ol Kvpov iga- 
 KocTiOL eis TO BiwKetv opjjLTJcravTe';, TrXrjv Travv okiyoi 
 dfifj)' avTov KaTeXei,(f)0r)crav, crxeBov ol bpoTpd/iretpi 
 KaXovfievoL. crvv tovtoi.<; Se ci)v Kadopa /SacnXed koI 
 TO djx(f Ikeivov (jTli^o? • KoX eti^us ovK Tfvia-^^eTo, 
 
 95 dW eiiTcov Tou dvhpa opSt i€TO iir' avTov Kal ■jraiei 
 Kara to (TTepvov Kal TiTpaxTKei Sia tov dfopaKO?. 
 iraiovTa 8" avTov aKovTilfii ris TraXrw vtto tov 6(f>0aX- 
 [Mov j3i.aL(ii)<s ' Kal ivTavOa ip,d^ovTO /cai /8acri\eus Kal 
 Kw/jos Kal 01 dpij)' avTovi vrrep cKaTepov. Kvpos 8e 
 100 aOTos re drriOave Kal oktco ol apicTToi tS)v wepl avTov 
 CKeLVTO iir' avTtp. (i. 8. 1—27.) 
 
 85. KaTa-Kdi|/T) : see § 438. a. 94. t|v-^o-x«to : restrained him- 
 
 86. ttvTtos: to meet \ivca. Cp. self {ax-k')(m), remarkable for the 
 p. 272, 1. 61. double augment. 
 
 88. TOVS tJaKio-xlXtoDS : the 95. Tov avSpa 6p£ : direct 
 
 king's own body-guard. quotation. 
 
 89. (is : when. iraCei. : supply clvtov, i.e. the 
 
 91. €ls TO SiuKciv 6p)ii'f|(ravTes : king. 
 
 hastening to the pursuit. 97 . wiro tov o^tSaXpidv : the 
 
 92. o-xe86v : chiefly. accusative here follows vtto because 
 
 93. Ka\ov|iLevoi : so-called. the verb aKoi/Ti'^et implies motion. 
 
SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS 275 
 
 IV. Discouragement of the soldiers after their generals had been 
 treacherously removed by Tissaphernes. {Xenophon had 
 not yet been elected general) 
 
 CTret 8e 01 a-TpaT-qyol crvvtikqixiiivoi rjcrav, iv iroWfi 
 St) diropCa •^a-av ol "^kXrjve? • kol yap iwl rais /Satrt- 
 Xews dvpai'i rjaav, kvkXco Se Travrri voWa kol eOvr] 
 Kai 77oA.ets 77o\e)u,tai rjcrav, dyopav 8e ouSets m 
 5 Ttapi^eLv efjicWev, dTTel^ov 8e r^s 'EXXaSos 6u p.eiov 
 7] fjiVpua crraSia, ■qyep.oiv 8' oii8ei5 rij? 68ou ^v, troTa- 
 fxol 8e 8ielpyov dSidfiaTOL iv jxeao) Trj^ oLKaSe oSou, 
 7rpou8e8ct5/fecrai' Se avrous Kai ot cri/v Kvpco dvafiavre? 
 j3dpfiapOL, p,6voi 8e KaTaXeXeififjievoi rjaav ovSe iiTTred 
 10 ovhiva crv/xfjia^ov e^oires, oicrre evSrjXov rjv otl vlkmv- 
 res pev oioeua av KaraKdvocev, r}TTr]0ivTO)v 8e avTwu 
 ou8els aj' XeL<f>9eL'rj ' ravT ivvoovpevoi koX ddvpo)? 
 
 IV. I. <ruv-6i\r]i»,(ji^voi f[a-av: TrpoeScSiaKecrav. Trpo and wept _ 
 
 see <TvXXafij3dv<i>. never suffer elision. 
 
 3. Ovpais : doors, a Persian ot <rvv Kvp(j> dvapdvTEs PapPa- 
 
 expression, somewhat like our poi : the barbarian troops of Cyrus 
 
 court. The meaning here is, under the command of Ariaeus fled 
 
 however, in the heart of the after the battle of Cunaxa and were 
 
 king^s country. no longer allied with the Greeks. 
 
 KvKXip: in a circle, surrounding 10. o-vjifiaxov : appositive to 
 
 them (§ 141). iirir^a. 
 
 S. irop-^Jetv: regular construe- vik«vt€s: conditional participle 
 
 tion with ifixKKt.v (§ 156. 2) was (§ 213. c), if they should conquer . 
 likely. ' II. oiS^va av KaraKdvoiev : see 
 
 Tfjs 'EWASos : genitive of sep- § 266. 
 aration (§ 201). titttiWvtwv oirav : genitive ab- 
 
 7. T<is otKaSe (§ 70) 6806: the solute (§ 401) expressing a condi- 
 homeward way. tion . 
 
 8. irpovSeSwKEo-av : pluperfect 12. ae«(i.<iis exovres : being dis- 
 of TT/ao-Si'Sw/it, contracted from couraged. 
 
276 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 ivovT&i oKiyoi fiev avT<ov eis rrjv icnrepdv crlTov eyev- 
 cravTo, oKiyoi Se irvp aveKctvcrav, iirl Se to. oTrXa 
 
 15 TToWol OVK '^X0OV TaVTTJV TYjV VVKTOL, dveTTOVOVTO §£ 
 
 OTTov ervy^avev eKdcrxoSj ov Svvdfjuevoi, KadevSeLf viro 
 Xottt^s koX TTodov Tj-ar piScov, yoveoiv, ywaiKav, vaCSav, 
 ov? ovTTOT iv6fj,L[,ov cTt oxpecrdat. (iii. I. 2—3.) 
 
 V. Under thd command of Xenophon and Cheirisophus the sur- 
 vivors of the "Ten Thousand" march on, until, from a 
 mountain in northern Armenia, they get a glimpse of the 
 Euxine (^Black) Sea 
 
 iurevdev rj\6ov tt/dos ttoKiv fjL€yd\r]u /cat evoat- 
 [xova Koi olKovfjLei>7)v 7] eKaXetTO Tv/jLVid?. Ik raurijs 
 T'^S ')((opd's 6 ap-^(ov Tol? EWtjctii' Tjyefiova ire-p/nu, 
 OTTWS Sto, T^s TToXepjias X(opd<; dyoi a,vTov<i. iXOcov 
 5 8' iKelvo? Xiya oti afet avTov? TreVre rjfiepojv ei? 
 )((opLOv ode.v or^ovrai ddXarrav. koI d<^i.KvovvTai iirX 
 TO opo^ Ty TrifXTTTri rjp,4pa, • ovojxa 8e tw opet, rjv 
 ©if^Tjs. eiret Se 01 TrpSnoL iyivovro iirl tov 6pov<;, 
 Kpavyrj ttoXXt) iyevero. d/covcrds Se 6 Qevo^av Kal 
 
 13. els TT)v lo-ir^pav: into the 18. 6'<|>ea'6ai : infinitive in indi- 
 
 evening, at evening. rect discourse (§ no. c)\ see 
 
 o-froD: partitive genitive with 6pa(o. 
 
 tyeuo-avTo. V. 4. oirus . . . 0.701 : on the 
 
 15. ToirTt]VTT|vviiKTo: see§ 142. purpose clause see § 268 ; the his- 
 
 16. imo \vin\% : from grief . ' torical present irif-inv is^a sec- 
 
 17. iriBou iraTptSuv kt\. . and ondary tense, because it really 
 from desire of fatherlands, etc. refers to past time. 
 
 irarpCSuv is called an "objective" 5. ir€VT€ Tuicpuv: see § 155. 
 
 genitive, for it represents the ob- 7. rfj ir^iiiri-n Tui^pcj : see § 180. 
 
 ject of the verbal idea contained t§ opei: see § 119. 
 in the noun tto^os desire. 
 
SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS 277 
 
 10 01 OTTtcr^o^uXaKes c^yjOrjcrai' iixirpoadev aWous eVt- 
 Tidicrdai. TToXeiMLOv; • eireiSij S' r) fiorj '^Xetcov re iyi- 
 yvfxo KaX iyyvTepov /cat 01 del iiTLovTe^ edeov S/od/xo) 
 em Tovs del ^o5)VTa<; koX ttoXXw jjiet^cav iyCyvero t) 
 fiorj, eSdfcei S17 fiel^ov tl eli'at tw Uevo^SiVTi, koX 
 
 15 ava^a.<i e^' Ittttov koX Avklov koI tov^ iTTTreds dva- 
 Xaficoi' i^oijdet • kol ra^a 8^ dKovovcn jSocivrcov Ta>v 
 (TTpaTicoTwv ©ctXarra ddXaTTa. evda Si) e^eoi' irai'- 
 res Kai 01 OTncrdo^vXaice';, kol rd vTro^vyua rjXavveTO 
 
 KCLl Ot LTTTTOL. CTTei Oe dl^lKOVTO TTOtlTes ETTl TO aKpoV, 
 
 20 evTavdoL 07) irepiefiaXXov dX.X77X.ous /fat crTpaTrjyoiiis 
 Kai Xo^dyous 8aKpvovTe^. Kal i^avLvrj? ol a-TpaTiS)- 
 Tai (f>epov(TL Xidov? /cat TTOtoBcrt koXcovov fieyav. (iv. 
 
 7- 19-25-) 
 
 VI. ^^ /!^^ Euxine Sea the Greeks rest and celebrate their safe 
 arrival with athletic games 
 
 Kai '^X^oi' e77t OdXarTav el<; Tpaire^ovvTa ttoXlv 
 'EXXfjvtSa olKovfievTjv iv rw Eu^'etvoj ILovto). evTavOa 
 
 10. 01 6iri(r6o<|>{iXaKcs : supply 15. Aixiov : Lycius was the 
 
 aKoucravTEs. commander of the cavalry. 
 
 ciX\ou5 iroXefjiCovs : other ene- 16. oLkovovo-i . . . tuv (rrpanu- 
 
 mies, for they knew from experi- twv : the genitive of the person 
 
 ence that they had enemies in the is common after the verb of hear- 
 
 rear. ing. 
 
 12. dcC: continually, in succes- 17. ©dXarra OdXarro : the very 
 sion. words that were shouted. 
 
 13. iro\X$ (§ 410) )i,eC£(i)v : 20. ircpi-ePaWov : embraced, 
 much louder. On Trepi' see p. 275, 1. 8, irpovSt- 
 
 14. IS6kci S^ |jiEi£6v Tl etvai : it SioKccrav. 
 
 seemed to be something of more VI. 1. Tpairejovvra : modern 
 
 than ordinary importance. Trebizond. 
 
278 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 ifxeLvav rj^iipas dfitjA ras TpiaiKovTa. ayopav oe rrapei- 
 ^ov Tw aTpaTOTTcSo) H paTret,ovvTLOL, koX iSe^avTO re 
 5 Toil? "'EKkrjva'; Koi ^ii>ia eSocrav /3ov<; koL aX,(^iTa kol 
 olvov. fieTO, 8e tovto ttjv dvaidv r)v ev^avTO irape- 
 cr/ceva^oi'TO ■ rj\9op 8' auTots LKavol j36es aTrodvaai 
 TO) All (rcoTijpLa Kal tS 'Hyoa/cXet r]yep,6<Tvva Kal 
 Tois aWois deoLS a ev^avTO. iiroCrjcrav 8e /cai dycova 
 
 10 yvfivLKov ii> Tco opeu evdairep icTKrjvovv. e'iXovTO 8e 
 A-paKOVTCov 'Zirapnanqv Spo/xov r' imjjLeXrjdrjvaL Kal 
 Tov dyS)vo<; irpocrTaTyjaaL. iveiSri 8e 17 Ovcria. iye- 
 vero, TOL oep/xaTa TrapdSocrav tw ApaKovrCci), Kal rjyei- 
 aOai CKeXevov ottov tov Spofjuov ireiroLTjKojis eur]. 6 Se 
 
 15 Sei^ds ovTTep i(rTr)K6Te<; iTvy^avou Ouro? 6 X6(j)0's, 
 ecfyq, KctWicrros Tpe-^eiv ottov dv ns ySouXijrat. IIws 
 GUI', €(j)acrav, SvvrjcrovTaL iraXaUiv iv cTKXyjpw Kat 
 
 3. d|i(|)lTOSTpidK0VTa:see§427. safety; ^i^&xrma.: thank-offerings 
 
 5. I^via: aj^a«j^^z)?j (gifts in /or ^oorf guidance; with both 
 tolcen of hospitality), appositive to words supply Jepa: victims, offer- 
 fSov's, etc. z'rag-j (lit. sacred things). 
 
 6. Ti]v 6v(r(av i^v e«|avTO : the 'HpaKXct: for declension see 
 sac}-ifice which they had vowed. § 603. 
 
 The Greeks had vowed (iii. 2. 9), 11. 4m(j,eXT|8<)voi : expresses 
 
 at the proposal of Xenophon, to purpose after «£\ovto chose (§ 334). 
 
 make sacrifices to Zeus the Savior 13. toL 8^p|j,aTa : these were to 
 
 as soon as they should arrive in a serve as prizes for the victors in 
 
 friendly land ; they had also vowed the contests. Such prizes are 
 
 to sacrifice to the other gods ac- alluded to as early as Homer (//zW 
 
 cording to their ability. XXII. 159). 
 
 7. iKovoV p6€s dxofliJo-ai : ^«t>«^,4 15. la-TtiKdres : see § 215. 
 oxen to sacrifice \n.-pz.ymt.xA{a.TrKy) 16. rp^x"" : limits (cciXAiOTOs : 
 of their vow. fairest for riumiiig (§ 333) . 
 
 8. Alt: dative ofZcu's(§ 606. 2). 17. evo-K\iip4i Kal8a(reioiiTci)s:/» 
 <rci)T<ipia: thank-offerings for a place so rough and thickly wooded. 
 
SELECTIONS FROM THE ANABASIS 
 
 279 
 
 oacret ourws ; 6 8' eiTre, MciWdi' rt avlAcnTai 6 
 KaraTTecrdiv. riyoivit,ovTo Se TraiSes |u,ei' (TTahiov twp 
 20 ai^jLiaXciJTcov ot TrXeicrrot, SoXt^ov 8e K/DTjTes TrXetous 
 •^ e^tjKovTa ideov, TraXifjv 8e Kat TTvyfirfv Koi irayKpa- 
 TLOv rjyo}vCt,ovTo • koX KaXrj ded iyeuero ■ troXXol yap 
 Kari^-qa-av Kai are decjjxiycjv Tciv iraCpcDv ttoWt) 
 (f>L\ovlKLd iyiyveTo. (iv. 8. 22—27.) 
 
 18. MaXXdv Ti ktX. : all the 
 more hurt will be the one that 
 falls down. 
 
 ig. TJYuvt^ovTo . . . crdSiov : 
 the latter word is cognate accusa- 
 tive (§ 181), contended [in'] the 
 stadium, a race of six hundred 
 Greelc feet. 
 
 20. StfXixov : long foot-race, 
 cognate accusative with Wmv. 
 This consisted of covering- the 
 length of the stadium several 
 times (6, 12, 20, or 24). 
 
 21. irdXriv ktX. : cognate accu- 
 satives with r/ymvi^ovTO contended 
 in wrestling and boxing atid the 
 pancratium. The last named was 
 a very severe, rough-and-tumble 
 fight, consisting partly of wres- 
 tling and partly of boxing. 
 
 23. KaTipt]o-av . entered the 
 competition. 
 
 6e(i>|i^v(i>v Twv eraCpuv : genitive 
 absolute ; the cattsal force i.s dis- 
 tinctly marked by the word are., 
 which may be rendered inasmuch 
 as or since. 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 For the use of -v movable see § 32. 
 
 A-DECLENSION, OR FIRST DECLENSION 
 
 592. 
 
 
 FEMININE 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 apxiij, ^> 
 
 x-ipa, ^, 
 
 V^+Spa, i, 
 
 OdXaTTO, Ti, 
 
 
 ride 
 
 country 
 
 bridge 
 
 sea 
 
 G. 
 
 dpxfjs 
 
 X'ipSS 
 
 'YEtf'^pas 
 
 Ba\dTTt)s 
 
 D. 
 
 apxfi 
 
 X<Sp<j 
 
 74up9i 
 
 OaXoTTT) 
 
 A. 
 
 dpx^iv 
 
 X-ipav 
 
 YE()>vpav 
 
 OdXarrav 
 
 V. 
 
 "■PX^ 
 
 X<5pa 
 
 7^<j)Upa 
 
 6d\aTTa 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 apxd 
 
 X<6pa 
 
 7E<j>vpa 
 
 6a\dTTa 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Apxatv 
 
 Xiipaiv 
 
 ■ye<f>vpai.v 
 
 OaXdrraiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 dpxaC 
 
 XSpoi 
 
 'y^<)>vpai 
 
 6d\aTTai 
 
 G. 
 
 dpxfiv 
 
 Xwpwv 
 
 ■^iifv^av 
 
 SaXaTTuv 
 
 D. 
 
 dpxats 
 
 Xrapais 
 
 7E<t>upais 
 
 OaXdrrais 
 
 A. 
 
 dpxas 
 
 X<»pas 
 
 -ye()>vpas 
 
 SaXaTTcts 
 
 593- 
 
 
 MASCULINE 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 <rTpaTiiiTT|S, « 
 
 1, soldier 
 
 V£av(as, 6 
 
 , young man 
 
 G. 
 
 O-TpaTlCOTOU 
 
 
 veavCov 
 
 
 D. 
 
 <rTpOTl<4T{| 
 
 
 vcavCf. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 O-TpOTlcSTTlV 
 
 
 vcSvCSv 
 
 
 V. 
 
 o-TpariuTa 
 
 
 vcavCci 
 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 O-TpOTHiTa 
 
 
 vEcivCa 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 0-TpaTl<iTOlV 
 
 
 vcSvCaiv 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 o-Tpariwrai 
 
 
 vEcivCai 
 
 
 G. 
 
 o-TparicoTcov 
 
 
 vcaviuv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 o-TpaTuSrais 
 
 
 veavCais 
 
 
 A. 
 
 O-TpaTliTOS 
 
 
 vcavCSs 
 
 
 280 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 281 
 
 594- 
 
 CONTRACT 
 
 NOUNS 
 
 
 Sing, n: 
 
 (fivda) [ivo, T|, mina 
 
 
 (ye'd) 7<i, *|, /««rf 
 
 G. 
 
 {fivadi) [jLvas 
 
 
 (yeas) 7fls 
 
 D. 
 
 (jixvaa) (ivq. 
 
 
 (ye?) 7t 
 
 A. 
 
 (jiivaav) |ivav 
 
 
 (ymv) 7f|v 
 
 V. 
 
 (/Arad) |j.va 
 
 
 (ytd) yf\ 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 (jui/ad) |iva 
 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 (/xvaaiv) (ivotv 
 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. (ij.va.ai) |ivat 
 
 G. (jixvaSi') liVMV 
 
 D. (/xvdais) (tvois 
 
 A. (jUvoids) |J.vds 
 
 0-DECLENSION, OR SECOND DECLENSION 
 
 595- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 avSpuiros, 0, 
 
 man 
 
 686s, {,,; 
 
 road 
 
 ir\oiov, t4, boat 
 
 G. 
 
 avSpciirov 
 
 
 
 68OV 
 
 
 irXoCou 
 
 • D. 
 
 &v9p&it<o 
 
 
 
 68$ 
 
 
 ')r\oC<a 
 
 A. 
 
 avBpcairov 
 
 
 
 dS6v 
 
 
 irXoiOv 
 
 V. 
 
 av6puirc 
 
 
 
 684 
 
 
 irXotov 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 dvSpciiru 
 
 
 
 6S<i 
 
 
 irXoCu 
 
 G.D. 
 
 avSpiiiroiv 
 
 
 
 68otv 
 
 
 irXoCoiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 avSpuirot 
 
 
 
 68o( 
 
 
 irXota 
 
 G. 
 
 dvSpliTTOIV 
 
 
 
 68£v 
 
 
 irXoCuv 
 
 D. 
 
 dvSptiirois 
 
 
 
 6Soi$ 
 
 
 irXotois 
 
 A. 
 
 dvOpiiirous 
 
 
 
 68o{is 
 
 
 irXota 
 
 596- 
 
 CONTRACT NOUN 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 " Plural 
 
 N. (voos) voii,o, mmd 
 
 N. 
 
 A.V. 
 
 (vow) 
 
 v& 
 
 N. V. (vdoi) vol 
 
 G. (yoov) vov 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 (vdoiv) 
 
 votv 
 
 G. (vdcov) vflv 
 
 D. (i/dai) v§ 
 
 
 
 
 
 D. iyoovi) vots 
 
 A. (voov) voiiv 
 
 
 
 
 
 A. (vdow) vovs 
 
 V. (vde) vov 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
282 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION, OR THIRD DECLENSION 
 
 597- 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 Kfipvl, 6, 
 
 4.AXaYi,{,, 
 
 StSpvg, Tl, 
 
 kX.6+,6, 
 
 
 herald 
 
 phalanx 
 
 ditch 
 
 thief 
 
 G. 
 
 K^pvKOS 
 
 fj>dXa'Y'YO$ 
 
 8i<ipvxos 
 
 KXuirds 
 
 D. 
 
 K^jpuKl 
 
 <|>d\a'Y7i, 
 
 8i.cipvxi 
 
 KXttiirC 
 
 A. 
 
 K^pVKa 
 
 ((idXa-y^a 
 
 8i.<ipvxa 
 
 xXoiira 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 K'iipVKE 
 
 (jidXa^Ye 
 
 8i(^pvX€ 
 
 icXun-c 
 
 G. D. 
 
 KllpVKOlV 
 
 ()>a\d7'yoiv 
 
 Si(i>pvxoi.v 
 
 icXuiroiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 K'fjpVKES 
 
 (f>d\a'Y7£s 
 
 8i(&pvxcs 
 
 kXuites 
 
 G. 
 
 KTJpVKCOV 
 
 <)>a\d77<i)v 
 
 8iii>pvxci>v 
 
 kXoituv 
 
 D. 
 
 K^ipvjl 
 
 <)>d\a7|i 
 
 8l.(ipv|l 
 
 kXui|/( 
 
 A. 
 
 K^pvKas 
 
 <|>d\a7-yas 
 
 Stupvxas 
 
 icXuiras 
 
 598. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 d<rirCs, Tl, 
 
 irois, 6, 
 
 vv?. i 
 
 Spxuv, 6, 
 
 
 shield 
 
 foot 
 
 night 
 
 ruler 
 
 G. 
 
 do-irCSos 
 
 iro86s 
 
 VUKTds 
 
 opxovTos 
 
 D. 
 
 ao-irtSi 
 
 iro8t 
 
 VDKTt 
 
 cipXovTi 
 
 A. 
 
 do'ir£8a 
 
 ir<i8a 
 
 V«KTa 
 
 apxovra 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 do-irtSe 
 
 •ir<58e 
 
 vOkT€ 
 
 opxovTc 
 
 G.D. 
 
 do-TrCSoiv 
 
 'iro8oiv 
 
 VVKTOIV 
 
 dpxovTOiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 d(rirCSes 
 
 ir68es 
 
 VUKTeS 
 
 OpXOVTtS 
 
 G. 
 
 d<rirC8ii)v 
 
 7ro8wv 
 
 VVKTUV 
 
 dpXOVTMl" 
 
 D. 
 
 d(nr£o"t 
 
 TTOO-C 
 
 wH 
 
 dpxovQ-i 
 
 A. 
 
 do-ir£8as 
 
 iroSas 
 
 vvKxas 
 
 dpxovTas 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 yifi.?^%A, favor 
 
 crTpdTCV|i,a, t<S, 
 
 army 
 
 G. 
 
 XdpiTOS 
 
 
 <rTpaT6v|i,aTos 
 
 
 D. 
 
 XdptTi 
 
 
 (TTpaTcifiaTi 
 
 
 A. 
 
 Xdpiv 
 
 
 o^rpdrevfia 
 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 XdpiT£ 
 
 
 o-TpaT«u(iaTt 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 XapCroiv 
 
 
 (rTpaT€v|idTOiv 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 XdpiTes 
 
 
 <rTpaTe«|jiaTO 
 
 
 * G. 
 
 XapCruv 
 
 
 irTpaTEv|j,dTa>v 
 
 
 D. 
 
 Xdpio-i 
 
 
 crrpaTEVftao'i 
 
 
 A. 
 
 Xdpiras 
 
 
 o-TpaTEvpiaTa 
 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 283 
 
 599- 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 47<Sv, 6, 
 
 ^YCfMiv, 4, 
 
 l*V. *> 
 
 \i|j,<iv, 4, 
 
 
 contest 
 
 guide 
 
 month 
 
 harbor 
 
 G. 
 
 d7ti)vos 
 
 'f|7€|j,6vo5 
 
 [itlvdS 
 
 Xifi^vos 
 
 D. 
 
 d-Yuvi 
 
 <17T,|i,dvi 
 
 imvl 
 
 Xi|i^vi 
 
 A. 
 
 oi^yuva 
 
 T]7€|ji<iva 
 
 Hflva 
 
 \i|Uva 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 i^i&vi 
 
 T|7C|il6v6 
 
 (iflvs 
 
 Xlp.^VE 
 
 G.D. 
 
 &7(ivoiv 
 
 'i)7e|i,6voi,v 
 
 Hr)votv 
 
 Xipivoiv 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 OLY^VCS 
 
 T|7e|idvcs 
 
 Hflvts 
 
 \l|l^VES 
 
 G. 
 
 d^c&vuv 
 
 'f|7E|ji6v(i)v 
 
 (I1[fV(&V 
 
 Xi)i,^vuv 
 
 D. 
 
 a^wo-i 
 
 T|7e|ji6(ri 
 
 (iT|<rt 
 
 \i|U(ri 
 
 A. 
 
 ciYuvas 
 
 T|7C|j,6vas 
 
 |i,{jvas 
 
 Xtpivas 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 7«£t<i)v, 6, i 
 
 neighbor 
 
 KpaT'^p, 6, mixing-bowl 
 
 G. 
 
 YeCtovos 
 
 
 KpaTi]pas 
 
 
 D. 
 
 7€Ctovi 
 
 
 Kparripi 
 
 
 A. 
 
 7ECT0va 
 
 
 Kparfjpa 
 
 
 V. 
 
 7etTov 
 
 
 Kpar^p 
 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 76£tov€ 
 
 
 KpaTTJpe 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 7Mt4voiv 
 
 
 KpciT^poiv 
 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 7€tT0V«S 
 
 
 KpaTTJpES 
 
 
 G. 
 
 76it6v<i)v 
 
 
 KpaT'^puv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 YtCroo-i 
 
 
 KpaT{)p<ri 
 
 
 A. 
 
 76CTOvas 
 
 
 KpOT<ipOS 
 
 
 600. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 irar^p, 6, 
 
 l*<iTTlP, ■{|, 
 
 e«7(iTT|p, T], 
 
 dv^ip, 0, 
 
 
 father 
 
 mother 
 
 daughter 
 
 man 
 
 G. 
 
 irarpds 
 
 liTlTpiiS 
 
 SvyaTpbs 
 
 dvSpiSs 
 
 D. 
 
 irarpt 
 
 RTp£ 
 
 6v7aTpC 
 
 dvSpC 
 
 A. 
 
 iraWpa 
 
 |i,T|T^pa 
 
 6u7aTlpa 
 
 avSpa 
 
 V. 
 
 irdrcp 
 
 Hflrep 
 
 SvYarep 
 
 avep 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 •ao-tiff. 
 
 HH«'p6 
 
 6v7aT4pc 
 
 JivSpe 
 
 G.D. 
 
 iroT^poiv 
 
 |jii)T^paiv 
 
 6D7aT^poiv 
 
 dvSpotv 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 irarlpcs 
 
 (ITlT^ptS 
 
 6v7aT^pcs 
 
 ivvSpcs 
 
 G. 
 
 iroT^puv 
 
 lATlT^pUV 
 
 ivr>fa.Tipav 
 
 dvSpuv 
 
 D. 
 
 irarpdo-i 
 
 ^■<\rp6An 
 
 6u7aTpd(ri, 
 
 dvSpdiri 
 
 A. 
 
 iraT«pas 
 
 (iTiT^pas 
 
 eu7aTcpas 
 
 avSpa$ 
 
284 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 601. 
 
 Sing. N. i'pos,^ t6, mountain 
 
 G. (op£-os) i'pous 
 
 D. (op£-i) Spei 
 A. 6'pos 
 
 V. fipos 
 
 Dual N. A. V. (op£-e) fipei 
 
 G. D. (dpe'-otv) opotv 
 
 Plur. N. V. (op£-a) Spri 
 
 G. (opi-iav) op^cov or opwv 
 D. opto-i 
 
 A. (op£-a) opt) 
 Sing. N. ScoKparris/ o, Socrates 
 
 G. (5fl)KpdT£-Os) SoiKpdTOVS 
 
 D. (Su)KpaT£-l) SwKpttTCl 
 
 A. (2<0Kp(iT£-a) S(OKpd,TT| 
 
 V. 2(iKpaT£S 
 
 602. /ee/Jct?, TO, A^r;«, wing of an army, has two stems 
 Kepaa-- and Kepdr- and a double declension : 
 
 Tpi'^pTjs,'^ 1;, trireme 
 (rpirjpe-os) rpi^jpows 
 (rpi-qpt-'i) Tpi<jp6i 
 (jpiripi-a) i'pvf\fit\ 
 rpiiipES 
 (TpLripe.-t) Tpi<jp6t 
 
 (rpiTJpi-OLv) Tpi'fjpOlV 
 
 (rpiripi-es) rpf^jpeis 
 
 (rpir)pi-tav) rpi^oiv 
 
 rpi^jpEtri 
 
 Tpl'^pElS 
 
 
 Stem Kepar- 
 
 Stem Ktpoo-- 
 
 Sing. N. A. 
 
 
 K^pas,^ t6, horn, wing 
 
 G. 
 
 K^pST-OS 
 
 (K£pa-os) K^pwS 
 
 D. 
 
 K^par-i 
 
 (K£pa-t) K^p«J 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 K^par-c 
 
 (K£pa-£) K^pa 
 
 G.D. 
 
 KCpClT-OlV 
 
 (K£pa-oiv) Kcp^v 
 
 Plur. N. A. 
 
 K^par-a 
 
 (K£pa-a) K^pa 
 
 G. 
 
 K€paT-(l)V 
 
 
 D. 
 
 K^pSori, 
 
 
 603. 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 {''B.pa.KXirfi) 
 
 'HpttKXfls, 6, Heracles 
 
 G. 
 
 ('HpaK\££-os) 
 
 'HpaxXfovs 
 
 D. 
 
 ('HpaKXcVi) 
 
 'HpaK\ct 
 
 A. 
 
 ('HpaKXt'e-a) 
 
 'HpaKX^a 
 
 V. 
 
 (•Hp<£KX£es) 
 
 'Hp<1kXcis 
 
 1 The forms in parenthesis show the stem after o- has been dropped from 
 the fnd {e.g. opc-os is for op£(r-os) and before contraction has taken place. 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 285 
 
 604. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 ir<S\is, T|, 
 
 irfixvs, < 
 
 % 
 
 OO-TU, t6, 
 
 ixeiSs,6, 
 
 
 city 
 
 cubit 
 
 
 town 
 
 fish 
 
 G. 
 
 ir6\eci>s 
 
 ir'fJXSfflS 
 
 
 aO-TCCDS 
 
 txfl«os 
 
 D. 
 
 . (TToXe-i) 
 
 (jrrjX^-C, 
 
 I 
 
 (a(TT£-i) 
 
 ixeii 
 
 
 ir6\ei 
 
 ir^ixei 
 
 
 olo-TEl 
 
 
 A. 
 
 iriSXiv 
 
 irf|x«v 
 
 
 OO-Tll 
 
 txedv 
 
 V. 
 
 ir6Xi 
 
 irrixu 
 
 
 ao-TV 
 
 1x655 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 (ttoXc-e) 
 
 {Trr)Xf--€) 
 
 (acTTe-e) 
 
 txe«£ 
 
 
 TrdXcL 
 
 ir^ixti 
 
 
 oo-rei 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 TTOX^OIV 
 
 iriix&iv 
 
 
 Ao-T^oiv 
 
 Ix^iioiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 (7rdXe-es) 
 
 (7r7?X£-« 
 
 ■) 
 
 (atrT£-a) 
 
 lx9«fs 
 
 
 'irdXcis 
 
 •7r^X"S 
 
 ilo-Tti 
 
 
 G. 
 
 irdXeuv 
 
 ir^twv 
 
 
 ao-Tcuv 
 
 lx6v<ov 
 
 D. 
 
 iroXco-i 
 
 ir^Xeo-i. 
 
 
 ao-TCcri 
 
 ixe«o-i 
 
 A. 
 
 irdXeis 
 
 ir^X^S 
 
 
 (a(rT£-a) 
 
 ixflss 
 
 605. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 PaoriXevs, a 
 
 i, king 
 
 Poiis, i 
 
 >, T), (7jr, f<7W 
 
 VOiis, T|, J'^?^ 
 
 G. 
 
 Pa<riX4<os 
 
 
 Po6s 
 
 
 veiis 
 
 D. 
 
 Pao-iXct 
 
 
 Pot 
 
 
 vrit 
 
 A. 
 
 Pao-iX^a 
 
 
 PoOv* 
 
 
 voijv 
 
 V. 
 
 Pao-iXev 
 
 
 PoS 
 
 
 vaO 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 pa<riX{) 
 
 
 pde 
 
 
 vf)c 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Pao-iX^oiv 
 
 
 Pooiv 
 
 
 vcotv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 {fia<n\i-vi 
 
 ) Pao-iXcfs^ 
 
 P6£S 
 
 
 vfies 
 
 G. 
 
 ^turCKiwi 
 
 
 pouv 
 
 
 vtav 
 
 D. 
 
 Pao-iXEvo-i 
 
 
 Povo-C 
 
 
 vaucrC 
 
 A. 
 
 Paa-iX^as 
 
 
 P0C5 
 
 
 vavs 
 
 
 
 1 Older -fls. 
 
 
 
286 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 606. 
 
 IRREGULAR NOUNS 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 yvvi\, T|, woman 
 
 Zeis, 6, 
 
 ,Zeus 
 
 X«tp, *|, hand 
 
 G. 
 
 7vvaiKds 
 
 
 Aids 
 
 
 X«ip<5s 
 
 D. 
 
 ■yvvaiKt 
 
 
 AiC 
 
 
 X«pC 
 
 A. 
 
 •yuvolKa 
 
 
 ACa 
 
 
 Xttpa 
 
 V. 
 
 ■yOvoi 
 
 
 Zf{> 
 
 
 X«'P 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 -yvvatKE 
 
 
 
 
 Xeipe 
 
 G. D. 
 
 7WO1.K01V 
 
 
 
 
 Xcpotv and xc^potv 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 -yuvatKcs 
 
 
 
 
 Xttpes 
 
 G. 
 
 -yvvaiKuv 
 
 
 
 
 X»puv 
 
 D. 
 
 7VVOi.gt 
 
 
 
 
 Xtpo-C 
 
 A. 
 
 -yuvaiKas 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 X«Ipas 
 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 Sing.N.A.V. 
 
 irSp, T6,^r^ 
 
 v%ap, t6, water 
 
 ■ 86pu, TO, 
 
 spear fom, t6, knee 
 
 G. 
 
 ■rrtipbs 
 
 vSaros 
 
 
 86paTos 
 
 Yovaros 
 
 D. 
 
 irvpt 
 
 VSOTI 
 
 
 S6paTi 
 
 7dvOTi. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 
 
 
 Sdparc 
 
 76voT« 
 
 G.D. 
 
 
 
 
 Sopdroiv 
 
 70vdT0iv 
 
 Plur. N. A. V. 
 
 inipol 
 
 vSara 
 
 
 Sdpara 
 
 7<5vaTa 
 
 
 •watchfirh 
 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 irupwv 
 
 {iSdruv 
 
 
 Sopdruv 
 
 70VOTCl)V 
 
 D. 
 
 irupols 
 
 vSatri 
 
 
 Sdpoo-i 
 
 76va(ri 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS 
 607. THREE ENDINGS 
 
 d7a66s good 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 Sing. N. d7a9<5s d7a9T| d7a66v 
 G. d7a6ov d7a6{is d7a6ov 
 D. d7a6$ d7a6fi d7a8u 
 A. d7a6(Sv d7a6if)v d7a6dv 
 V. d7a6^ d7a6^ d7a6dv 
 
 iroX^liios hostile 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 iroX^fiios iro\E|x(a iroXI|i.i.ov 
 
 iro\E)i.(av n'oXepiCas iroXEfiCov 
 
 iro\e|i,(a> iroXcfita iroXE|t(<}i 
 
 iroX^fiiov iroXE|jiCav iroX^pov 
 
 iroX^IJLiE iroXciiCa oroX^iitov 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 287 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 6,-yaeia 
 
 d7a8d &.ya,9& 
 
 iro\E)i,Cu 
 
 1 iro\E|i(S 
 
 iroXciibi) 
 
 G.D. 
 
 dyaSotv 
 
 ' d-yaeaiv d-ya6oti 
 
 > iro\E|i[oiv iro\(|jL(aiv iraXt|tCoiv 
 
 PIur.N.V. 
 
 dYaOot 
 
 dvaOaC dvaOd 
 
 ira\^|j.ioi iroX^fuai 
 
 iroX^liia 
 
 G. 
 
 a^aOuv 
 
 d'yaOwv d-yaOtov 
 
 7ro\6|j,(ii>v iro\E|i.(<i>v 
 
 iroX€|iU>v 
 
 D. 
 
 d-yaSots 
 
 d-yaSais d-yaOoi; 
 
 iro\e)ii(ois iroXcjiCais 
 
 iro\E|i(oi$ 
 
 A. 
 
 d7a6o<isd7a6^s d-yaSd 
 
 iroXcfiCovs iroXciitas 
 
 TToX^fiia 
 
 608. 
 
 
 TWO ENDINGS 
 
 
 
 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 
 airopos impassable 
 
 iiiropov 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 diropov 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 dirdp(y 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 airopov 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 cliropE 
 
 
 airopov 
 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 
 
 dirdpu 
 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 
 
 dTTopoiv 
 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 
 &iropoi 
 
 
 airopa 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 dirdpuv 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 dirdpois 
 
 
 
 dir6pov5 
 
 airopa 
 
 CONTRACT ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND 
 DECLENSIONS 
 
 609. 
 
 Masc. 
 N. (xpvcrcoi) 
 G. (xpvcriov) 
 D. (xpvaew) 
 A. (xpvo-Eor) 
 
 N. A. (xpva-ioy) 
 
 G. D. ()(pV(T(Olv) 
 
 THREE ENDINGS 
 
 xpvo-ovs golden 
 Singular 
 Fem. 
 Xp«o-ovs (-xpvcrta) 
 Xpvo'ov (^pScreds) 
 Xpvir^ {Xpvdia) 
 Xpuo-ovv (T(pij(r€dv) 
 
 Dual 
 
 XpiicriJ (;(pviT€d) 
 
 Xpuo-<i 
 
 XpB<rfi 
 XpSo-flv 
 
 Xpvo-a 
 
 Xp«<roiv (^^pvcrEati/) XP""''*''' 
 
 Neut. 
 
 (Xpvcreov) XP'""'"''''' 
 
 (Xp^<''^ov) xpviroO 
 
 (Xpuo-Eco) xpw^ 
 
 (j(jOV(7£Ov) XP'"'*'*'' 
 
 (xpvcriui) XP"""*^ 
 
 (XpvaeoLv) XP''<''''tv 
 
288 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOlC 
 
 PiURAL 
 
 N. (x/o£treoi) XP""^"^ (Xpvo-eat) xp"<rat (xP""'^'^^ xpva-S, 
 
 G. (xpvcreuyv) XP""""" (XP^"'^'^'') XP''"""" ()(pv<T€(ov) XP''*''"'' 
 
 D. (xpva-eoi';') XP""""'* (x/oiJcrrats) XP'''''<*^S (xpCcrc'ots) XP""'''^* 
 
 A. (xpuceous) xpi'<''<>''S (xpiJceds) XP"'"'** (XpStrea) XP'o"* 
 
 &PYvpovs silver 
 Singular 
 
 N. (dpyupeos) ap'ywpovs (apyvpia) cLpTvpo (dpyvpeov) dpYvpovv 
 
 G. (dpyupe'ov) apyupoO (^apyvpids) dpYupds (dpyvpeov} dp-yvpov 
 
 D. (apyvpew) dpyvp^ (dpyvpia) dp-yvp?, (apyvp€u>) dp-yupu 
 
 A. (ipyvpcov) dpYDpovv (dpyvpedv} dpyupdv (apyvpiov) dp-yvpoBv 
 
 Dual 
 
 N. A. {apyvpiw) dpyvpti (dpyupea) dpyvpa (dpyupco)) dpyvpcS 
 
 G. D. (dpyvpcotv) dpyvpoiv (^dpyvpeaiv) dpytipaiv (dpyupeo6v) dpywpoiv 
 
 Plural 
 
 N. (dpyvpcot) dpyupoi (apyvpeai) apvupat (^dpyvptoC) dpyvpd 
 
 G. (apyvpimv) dpYupwv (dpyvpecov) dpyupwv (dpyvpimv) dpyiipav 
 
 D. (dpyupcois) dp-yvpois (dpyupaxts) dpyupais (dpyupe'ots) dpyvpois 
 
 A. (dpyupeous) dpyvpovs (dpyupe'ds) dp-yupas (dpyijpea) dpyvpa 
 
 dirXofis sincere 
 Singular 
 N. (dirXdos) dirXofis (dirAed) dirXfj 
 
 G. (aTrXdou) dir\ofi (awXcds) dirXfjs 
 D. (dTrAdcu) ansK^ (dirXca) dirXfj 
 
 A. (aTrXdov) dirXoOv (aTrXedv) dirX<iv 
 
 Dual 
 N. A. (aTrXdft)) dirXii (aTrXcd) dirXa 
 
 G. D. (dirXdoiv) dirXoiv (aTrXeaii') dirXaiv 
 
 Plural 
 
 N. (aTrXdot) dirXot (aTrXcat) dirXot 
 
 G. (dTrXocov) dirXwy (aTrXeoJi') OTrXmv 
 
 D. (oTrXdots) dirXois (dirXe'ais) dirXals 
 
 A. (dtrXdous) dirXoCs (aTrXeds) dirXds 
 
 (dTrXdov) dirXovv 
 
 {atrXocni) OTrXoB 
 
 ( aTrXdo)) dirXu 
 
 (dirXdoi') dirXoSv 
 
 (dwXdo)) dirXc& 
 (oTrXdotv) dirXoIv 
 
 (dn-Xda) dirXd 
 
 (dirXdo)!') dirXtov 
 
 (dirXdots) dirXois 
 
 (dTrXoa) dirXd 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 280 
 
 610. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 Plur. N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 TWO ENDINGS 
 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 ({Svovs •well-disposed 
 
 ifivouv 
 
 cvvov 
 
 
 efivip 
 
 
 eiivovv 
 
 
 cfvoi 
 
 e{!voa 
 
 (jivuv 
 
 
 cvvois 
 
 
 cJivoa 
 
 For uncontracted forms cp. ww, § 596. 
 
 611. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND THIRD 
 
 DECLENSIONS 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Masc. 
 t|8vis sweet 
 t|8e'os 
 
 (ijSc'-'i) TiSet 
 r|8vv 
 
 T|Sv 
 
 (ijSe-e) T|8£i 
 
 T|8loi.V 
 
 (ijSe-es) t|8eis 
 T|8e(i>v 
 T|8€(ri. 
 T|Sets 
 
 Fem. 
 TlSeCas 
 
 T|8ECf 
 
 f|8ctav 
 
 T|8cta 
 
 {18^(3 
 
 'r|8Etai.v 
 
 j]SEtai 
 
 TjSeiuv 
 
 T|Sc(as 
 
 Neut. 
 
 T|8li 
 
 118^05 
 
 (^Se-'i) Tl8€l 
 
 T|8v 
 
 T|8v 
 
 (ijSe-e) t|8£i 
 
 T|S^01V 
 
 r|8^uv 
 T|8^a 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 
 
 612. STEMS IN -e<r 
 
 Masc. and Fem. Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. do-cfioX^is ' Ja/% d(ri|>a\^$ 
 
 G. (dtri^aAe-os) a<r<|>aXoBs 
 
 D. (d(ri^aA,e-i) do-<|)oXet 
 
 A. (dcr<^aXe-a) d(r(|>aXf) a(r(|>aX^S 
 
 V. do-<t>o\es 
 
 1 See footnote on p. 284. 
 begin'Ner's c;r. bk. — 19 
 
3 go 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. 
 
 DualN. A.V. (dcr<^aXc-e) dtri|>aX«I 
 
 G. D. (d(r<^aXe-oiv) d<r4(o\oiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. (d<r<^a\e-£s) 4(r<t)oXets (do-<^aA,€-a) d<r<|>oXfi 
 
 G (aa-fjiaXi-ayv) oo-(|)oXmv 
 
 D d.a-<|>aX^(ri 
 
 A. acr(|>a\cls 
 
 (a.<T<j}aXe-a) aa-^aKf\ 
 
 613. 
 
 STEMS IN -V 
 
 
 MASC. AND FEM. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 €v8aC|iti)v fortuvMte 
 
 ev8ai|i,ov 
 
 G. 
 
 evSaCjiovos 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ci8aC|iovi 
 
 
 A. 
 
 cv8a(|xova 
 
 Ev8ai|jiov 
 
 V. 
 
 cv8ai,|xov 
 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 eiSaC|j,ov€ 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 ei8ai)i,<Svoiv 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 ei8a()i,aves 
 
 cv8aC|jiova 
 
 G. 
 
 ev8ai|j.6v<Dv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ev8aC|jiO(ri 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ciSaCjjiovas 
 
 €vSaC|wva 
 
 614. COMPARATIVES IN -av 
 
 MASC. AND FEM. 
 
 Sing. N. TiStuv sweeter 
 
 G. T|8iovos 
 
 D. 'f]8fovi 
 
 A. tiSiova or T|8i(i> 
 V. ii8iov 
 
 Neut. 
 'i)8u>v 
 
 TJSlOV 
 
 alN.A.V. 
 
 Ti8tove 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 T]8i6voiv 
 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 'f|8iovcs or T|8iovs 
 
 T|8tova or t|8f« 
 
 G. 
 
 T)&i6va>v 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T|8to(ri, 
 
 
 A. 
 
 'f|8fovas or {iSiovs 
 
 T|8fova or {(Siu 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 291 
 
 615. 
 
 
 STEMS IN -VT 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 neut. 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 irds all 
 
 irao-a 
 
 irov 
 
 G. 
 
 irovrts 
 
 irdo-ris 
 
 iravT6s 
 
 D. 
 
 iravT£ 
 
 ir^o-n 
 
 irovrt 
 
 A. 
 
 irdvra 
 
 irao-av 
 
 irov 
 
 Plur. N.V. 
 
 irdvTts 
 
 irao-ai 
 
 irdvTa 
 
 G. 
 
 irAvTMv 
 
 TTOO-WV 
 
 ttAvtuv 
 
 D. 
 
 iroeri 
 
 ir^o-ais 
 
 iram 
 
 A. 
 
 irdvTas 
 
 irlSo-os 
 PARTICIPLES 
 
 irdvra 
 
 616. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 I. Sing. N.V. 
 
 «v being 
 
 ofira 
 
 fiv 
 
 G. 
 
 6'VT05 
 
 o{!iri)s 
 
 SvTOS 
 
 D. 
 
 i'vTi 
 
 oCoTi 
 
 SvTt 
 
 A. 
 
 Svra 
 
 ovirav 
 
 «V 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 fivTt 
 
 ofiora 
 
 £vTC 
 
 G.D. 
 
 SVTOIV 
 
 ofjoraiv 
 
 fivTOlV 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 SVTJS 
 
 oJ!o-ai 
 
 fivra 
 
 G. 
 
 OVTUV 
 
 oio-uv 
 
 Jvruv 
 
 D. 
 
 oSo-i 
 
 oiiorais 
 
 o{ln 
 
 A. 
 
 Svras 
 
 oi!o-as 
 
 fivra 
 
 a. Second aorist active participles are declined like &v, 
 as Xiirm), XiTTova-a, Xnrov, having left. 
 
 MASC. 
 
 2. Sing. N. V. Xuuv loosing 
 
 G. XUOVTOS 
 
 D. Xkovti 
 A. Xuovra 
 
 Dual N. A. V. XvovTt 
 G. D. XBivToiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. XuovTss 
 G. Xij6vT<i)V 
 D. Xvoviri 
 
 A. X«0VTOS 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Xvouo-a 
 
 Xvov 
 
 Xvov<n|S 
 
 X^OVTOS 
 
 Xvoid-^ 
 
 X^OVTl 
 
 Xdouo-av 
 
 Xvov 
 
 Xvoio-S 
 
 XvOVTC 
 
 Xvovo-aiv 
 
 XvdvToiv 
 
 Xvovo-ai 
 
 Xvovra 
 
 Xvoucruv 
 
 Xv6VT«V 
 
 Xvovo-ais 
 
 Xvouiri 
 
 Xvovo-as 
 
 XUOVTO 
 
292 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 a. Participles of more than two syllables, like kcoXikov 
 hindering, are inflected 
 
 KwXijwv, Kii>Kvo\KTa, KinXvov (observe the accent), etc. 
 617. 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G.D. 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 618. 
 
 Masc. 
 lo-Tlas setting 
 
 LcTTdLVTOS 
 
 io'TOtVTl 
 
 ^O'TdvTtt 
 
 io-TOVTe 
 
 LO'TOIVTOIV 
 
 ■(TTcivTes 
 
 LCTTdvTOJV 
 
 lo-TOcri 
 UrrdvTas 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 ^(TTacra 
 
 tcTTacrns 
 
 io-rao-ov 
 
 .o'Tatrai 
 l(rToo"«v 
 ;<rT^<rois 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 lo-rdv 
 
 lITTdvTOS 
 
 lo-rdvTi 
 
 to-rdv 
 
 io-TdvT« 
 
 tcTdvTOlV 
 
 lo-TdvTa 
 
 IcTdvTWV 
 
 iirTd<ri 
 lo-TdvTO 
 
 Sing. N. V. X€<ros having loosed Xucrao-o 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G.D. 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 \v(ravTOS 
 
 Xv<ravTi 
 
 \u(ravTa 
 
 Xvo-avTt 
 XwdvToiv 
 
 XviravTcs 
 Xu<rdvTO)V 
 Xutracri 
 Xuo"avTas 
 
 Xvcro(rt]s 
 
 XCo-ao-ji 
 
 Xv(ra<rav 
 
 Xvo-a(ra 
 Xvo-airaiv 
 
 Xvo-acrai. 
 Xvcrao'uv 
 Xvo-airats 
 Xvcrao-as 
 
 Neut. 
 Xv(rav 
 XvcavTOS 
 Xu(ravTi 
 Xv(rov 
 
 Xuo"ttvTe 
 XTJ(rdvTOtv 
 
 Xuo-avra 
 XiJ<rdvTci>v 
 Xvcracri 
 Xvcravra 
 
 a. Participles of more than two syllables, like aKovaaa 
 having heard, are inflected 
 
 aKowas, (xKovoracra, a.Kov(To.v (observe the accent), etc. 
 619. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Sing. N. V. Seikvvs showing 
 G. BeiKvuvTos 
 
 D. SeiKVUVTl 
 
 A. S«iKvvvTa 
 
 Fem. 
 SEiKvOtra 
 
 SciKVVO-T] 
 
 8eiKvO<rav 
 
 Neut. 
 
 SElKviv 
 
 Seikvvvtos 
 
 BeiKVUVTL 
 SciKVVV 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 293 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 Seikvvvte 
 
 SciKvvo-a 
 
 SciKVVVTC 
 
 G.D. 
 
 SciKVVVTOlV 
 
 8»Kvv(raiv 
 
 SeiKviivToiv 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 SeiKvvvTcs 
 
 8EiKvSa-ai 
 
 SeiKviivTa 
 
 G. 
 
 8ciKvi)vT(ov 
 
 8eiKv\)(r»v 
 
 8ElKV1LivT<l)V 
 
 D. 
 
 SciKvviri 
 
 SeiKvvirais 
 
 8EiKvviri 
 
 A. 
 620. 
 
 SeiKvvvras 
 
 SEiKvvo-as 
 
 SeiKvvvTa 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 
 TiOets placing 
 
 TiOeto-a 
 
 Tie^v 
 
 G. 
 
 TlB^VTOS 
 
 Ti.64(cri)S 
 
 TlS^VTOS 
 
 D. 
 
 TlO^VTl 
 
 Tl8«Co-[) 
 
 TlS^VTl 
 
 A. 
 
 Tie^vTa 
 
 TiOeto-ov 
 
 TlO^V 
 
 Dual-N. A.V. 
 
 Tl9^VT€ 
 
 Tieeto-tt 
 
 TlO^VTe 
 
 G. D." 
 
 TlO^VTOlV 
 
 TiSeCo-ttiv 
 
 TiBe'vTOiv 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 TlfllvT€S 
 
 nOcio-ai 
 
 TiO^vra 
 
 G. 
 
 Tl6^VT<l)V 
 
 Ti0eto-wv 
 
 TlB^VTWV 
 
 D. 
 
 TiBelo-i 
 
 TiSeCo-ais 
 
 Tifleto-i 
 
 A. 
 
 TiB^vras 
 
 Ti6£Co'as 
 
 TiB^vTa 
 
 Similarly are declined aorist passive participles : 
 XvBei'i having been loosed, XvBixfia, Xvdiv, etc. 
 
 Dual N 
 
 621. 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 A.V. 
 G.D. 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 622. 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 Fem. 
 
 8i8oiis giving 
 
 8i8ovo-a 
 
 SlSdVTOS 
 
 
 8i8otio-T)s 
 
 SiS6vn 
 
 
 Si8ov(rxi 
 
 8iSdvTa 
 
 
 8i8ovo-av 
 
 S1S6VTC 
 
 
 8iSov<ra 
 
 8i.8dvT0iv 
 
 
 8iSovo-aiv 
 
 8iS<5vT«s 
 
 
 8iSovirai 
 
 8i86vTci)v 
 
 
 SiSovo-uv 
 
 SiSovo-i 
 
 
 8i,8ov(rai.s 
 
 Si8dvTas 
 
 
 8i8ov(ras 
 
 ^ Masc. 
 
 
 (jiyAani) 
 
 Ti|iuv honoring ( 
 
 (rZ/iaovTos) 
 
 Ti(J.«iJVTOS 
 
 i ( 
 
 (ri;aaoi'Ti) 
 
 Ti|l«OVTl 
 
 ( 
 
 (jl^aavTo) 
 
 Tt|J.WVTO 
 
 ( 
 
 Neut. 
 8i86v 
 Si86vTos 
 8i86vTi 
 8i86v 
 8i8<vT« 
 Si86vToiv 
 
 8iS<SvTa 
 8tSdvT<i>v 
 8i8av(ri 
 8iSiSvTa 
 
 Fem. 
 (ri/Aaowcra) Ti|iuo'a 
 (Ti/xaoucriys) Ti|uS<n)S 
 {rijtaovay^ Tip.iSir'ji 
 (Tt/idouCT'av) Tl)iw(rav 
 
294 
 
 N.V. 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G.D. 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Neut. 
 (riixaov) Tijiflv 
 
 (Tl/iaOI/TOs) rlflMVTOS 
 
 (Tl/taOVTt) TlJlfivTl 
 (^TlfXaOv) TlflMV 
 
 Masc. 
 (rl/iaoi/Tc) TijjimvTe 
 (^rlfJMOVTOlv) TijicivToiv 
 
 Fem. 
 (rl/juxovcra.) rXfi^ira, 
 (ri/iaoijtratv) Ti|Mi(raiv 
 
 N.A.V. 
 G.D. 
 
 Neut. 
 (rl/JLaovTe) ti|i,uvt£ 
 
 (^TlfW-OVTOLv) Tl(«4vT0lV 
 
 , Masc. 
 Plur. N. V. (TijUaovTcs) Tl(jii5vTcs 
 
 G. (^TlflaOVTOlv) TipiCOVTWV 
 
 D. (ri/taoiicrt) tiiiSo-i 
 A. (Ti/iaovTas) Tl(iiflvTOS 
 
 Fem. 
 (rt/xaovo-at) Ti|iuo-ai 
 
 (tI/MIOVO'Gi') Tl(l(l)0-WV 
 
 (Tt//,aou(Tats) Ti|i,ii(rais 
 (rl/juiovcras) rXfi^iras 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N.V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 (TlfmovTa) Ti|j,uvTa 
 
 (jilMOVTiOv) TiluivTWV 
 
 (Tijiiaoutrt) Ti|j.«o<ri 
 (jlitAovTo) Tifiuvra 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Sing. N. V. (ttoicW) iroiuv making 
 
 G. (ttoiiovto?) iroioOvTos 
 
 D. (TTOisovrt) iroioSvTi 
 
 A. {iroiiovTo) iroiovvTa 
 
 Fem. 
 (TTOieoDtra) iroiav(ra 
 (TTOieowtrijs) iroiova"i]s 
 (ttoicou'cttj) iroio{l(r{| 
 (TTOieoutrav) iroioSo-av 
 
 N.V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Neut. 
 (ttoicov) iroiofiv 
 
 (iroteovros) iroioOvros 
 (iroieovTt) iroioOvTi 
 (iroieoi') iroioSv 
 
 Masc. 
 Dual N. A. V. (TTOieovTc) iroioCvrt 
 G. D. (ttoicovtoiv) iroiovvTOiv 
 
 Fem. 
 {Troix.ov(Ta) iroiov<ra 
 (iroieoucraii/) iroiovo-aiv 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 295 
 
 Neut. 
 N. A. V. (TroKwre) iroioOvw 
 
 G. D. (ttouovtoiv) iroioivTOiv 
 
 . Masc. Fem. 
 
 Plur. N. V. (jroi£OVT£s) iroiovvTts (iroiiov(Tai) iroiov(rai 
 
 G. (TroiedvTwv) iroioilvToiv (woiiovcrSyv) iroioutrwv 
 
 D. (troieovcn) iroioBo-i (Troitoutrais) iroioio-ois 
 
 A. (iroteovTas) iroioOvras (ttoieowos) iroioilo-os 
 
 Neut. 
 N. V. (iroteovTa) 'TroioCvra 
 
 G. (7rotedvT0)v) iroioiivTiDV 
 
 D. (iroteovo-i) iroiovcri 
 
 A. (iroteovTa) iroioOvTO 
 
 a. SrjXomv showing, which contracts to 
 is declined like iroiciv, ivoiovaa, ttoiovv. 
 
 623. 
 
 PERFECT ACTIVE PARTICIPLES 
 \e\vKus having loosed (XeXu/tor-) 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 FEM. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing.N.V. 
 
 XcXvKiis 
 
 XeXvKvIa 
 
 XcXvk6s 
 
 G. 
 
 XcXukiStos 
 
 XeXvKvlas 
 
 XcXvk6tos 
 
 D. 
 
 \e\vk6ti 
 
 XcXvKvCq, 
 
 XcXvk6ti, 
 
 A. 
 
 XeXuKdra 
 
 XcXuKuiav 
 
 XcXuKds 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 \c\vk6t€ 
 
 XcXuKvCa 
 
 XeXvkotc 
 
 G.D. 
 
 XcXvKOTOiv 
 
 XcXvKvCaiv 
 
 XcXuKOTOlV 
 
 Plur.N.V. 
 
 XcXvk6tc$ 
 
 XcXvKvIai 
 
 XcXvKora 
 
 G. 
 
 XeXuk^tuv 
 
 XeXvkviuv 
 
 XeXvKdTuv 
 
 D. 
 
 XcXvK6(ri 
 
 XcXvKutais 
 
 XcXvKtSo-i 
 
 A. 
 
 XcXvKdras 
 
 XcXvKvCas 
 
 XcXvKdra 
 
 624. 
 
 io-T(is standing (ixtTwr-') 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing.N.V. 
 
 {(TTcis 
 
 eirrAo-a 
 
 hrtii 
 
 G. 
 
 OTTUTOS 
 
 «rT(4(rr]S 
 
 Io-tAtos 
 
 D. 
 
 lo-TUTl 
 
 eo-TiSoTi 
 
 OrTUTl 
 
 A. 
 
 OTTMTa 
 
 lo-Tuo-av 
 
 «<pt6s 
 
296 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 
 irrarf 
 
 «rT(i(ra 
 
 RTTUTC 
 
 G.D. 
 
 kttiStoiv 
 
 IcTTiSo-aiv 
 
 lo-T(iTOlV 
 
 Plur. N. V. 
 
 KTTWTeS 
 
 co-Tuo-ai, • 
 
 lo-TUTO 
 
 G. 
 
 lo-TlOTOlV 
 
 Eo-Tciicruv 
 
 ia-r&Tiav 
 
 D. 
 
 OTTWO-l 
 
 lo-Tiio-ais 
 
 CTTUO-l 
 
 A. 
 
 €<rTWTas 
 
 lo-TtSo-as 
 
 lo-Tura 
 
 «. eo-Tw? is contracted from eo-ratos ; the neuter earo^ is 
 irregular. 
 
 625. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES 
 
 fUyai great iroXtis much 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. |i^70s nt'ydX.T) (1^70 iroXvis iroXX^i iroXtl 
 
 G. (icYoXou jiE'yiiXTis |iC7d\ou iroXXov iroXXris iroXXov 
 
 D. fjLCY^V H'^Y^TI iMYoXu ^oXX^ ttoXX^ iroXX^ 
 
 A. pi^YOv. |i.€YdXT]v [UYa iroXviv iroXXViv iroXv 
 
 Plur. N. ii.E'ydXoi. (icYaXai, (jicYaXa iroXXoI n-oXXaC iroXXd 
 
 G. (UYdXiiiv (lEYdXuv )UYdXci>v iroXXuv iroXXuv n'oXXuv 
 
 D. |tEYdXois (leYdXais iiE^dXois iroXXois iroXXats iroXXots 
 
 A. (UYoXovs |j.€7dXas |UYdXa iroXXovs iroXXas iroXXd 
 
 626. 
 
 
 NUMERALS 
 
 
 
 «ts one 
 
 
 S4o two 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc, Fem., Neut. 
 
 N. &% 
 
 p.Ca 
 
 U 
 
 N. A. Sio 
 
 G. Ivis 
 
 |tid$ 
 
 Iv6s 
 
 G. D. Suotv 
 
 D. hi 
 
 |ii§, 
 
 IvC 
 
 
 A. i(va 
 
 |jiCav 
 
 •h 
 
 
 
 Tpets three 
 
 
 T^TTopts four 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 MASC. and Fem. Neut. 
 
 N. Tpels 
 
 
 rpCa 
 
 V^TTOpeS T^TTOpO 
 
 G. 
 
 TplUV 
 
 
 T«TTdp<l)V 
 
 D. 
 
 TptO-t 
 
 
 T^rrapo-i 
 
 A. Tpets 
 
 
 TpCa 
 
 

 SUMM. 
 
 \RY OF FORMS 
 
 297 
 
 627. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 oiScCs nobody 
 
 oiS(|j.Ca 
 
 o48^v nothing 
 
 G. 
 
 ovSev6s 
 
 oiSE)ii,ds 
 
 oiSevbs 
 
 D. 
 
 oiSevC 
 
 oiScfii^ 
 
 o{>8»C 
 
 A. 
 
 ovS4va 
 
 oiSeiiCav 
 
 ovS^v 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Plur. N. oiS^vES, G. oiSlvuv, D. ov8^o-i, 
 
 A. ovS^vas 
 
 
 1 
 
 PRONOUNS 
 
 
 628. 
 
 
 PERSONAL 
 
 
 First Person 
 Sing. N. iy& I 
 
 Second Person 
 <r6 /;^(7« 
 
 Third Person 
 Indirect Reflexive 
 
 G. 
 
 €|l,OV, |10V 
 
 <roi), o-ou 
 
 [oi], [oi] 
 
 D. 
 
 4)10 1, (1.01, 
 
 croC, o-oi 
 
 ot, 01, to himself 
 
 A. 
 
 «M. c* 
 
 vt, <Ti 
 
 p], ra 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 V(& 
 
 o-4><i 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 v§v 
 
 •-(f>$v 
 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 T||i,6is we 
 
 vjiets J'0« 
 
 0-<l>6lS 
 
 G. 
 
 T||1UV 
 
 V)1.UV 
 
 o-(|>a>v 
 
 D. 
 
 ^(ttV 
 
 vjitv 
 
 o-<|>Co'i 
 
 A. 
 
 ■fllias 
 
 vjias 
 
 o-<|ias 
 
 629. auTis self, same 
 
 , him (in oblique cases) 
 
 ,etc. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 airos 
 
 a{lT^ 
 
 a4T<5 
 
 G. 
 
 avTOv 
 
 o4T<is 
 
 airov 
 
 D. 
 
 aiiT$ 
 
 airfi 
 
 air^ 
 
 A. 
 
 airdv 
 
 oiT^jv 
 
 avT6 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 avTii 
 
 aire 
 
 aJiTti 
 
 G.D. 
 
 a^TOiv 
 
 airatv 
 
 airotv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 a^Tol 
 
 airaC 
 
 oird 
 
 G. 
 
 oirfflv 
 
 avTuv 
 
 airuv 
 
 D. 
 
 airots 
 
 airais 
 
 airots 
 
 A. 
 
 airoOs 
 
 avrds 
 
 avrd 
 
 aXXo?, aXXi;, aWo, another, other, is declined like auTd9. 
 
298 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 ( 
 
 630. 
 
 REFLEXIVE 
 
 
 
 i)iavToS 0/ mysi 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 MASC. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 G. 
 
 i|iavToS 
 
 {(lavrfis 
 
 D. 
 
 ifLavT^ 
 
 {(■.avrfj 
 
 A. 
 
 ifMvrdv 
 
 i|iavT<iv 
 
 PunsAL 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 Tjfiuv avrtov 
 
 T||iiv avTots {|H'^v avrais 
 
 T||ias avTOvs T||xa$ avTcLs 
 
 o-catiToO of yourself 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 G. <r€Oi)ToS or o-odtoO ircavT{|$ or cravrfis 
 D. ceavT^ or <ravT$ treauT'^j or o-auT^ 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 v)i<av airuv 
 
 v[itv avTats 
 
 v|itv airots 
 
 A. (TcavT^v or <ravT6v <reauT^v or (ravT'^v v|ia$ airois vfias avrds 
 
 lavTov of himself 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 G. 
 
 eauTOv 
 
 cavrf|s 
 
 lavTov 
 
 {auTuv 
 
 cavTuv 
 
 cavTuv 
 
 D. 
 
 €aiiT(^ 
 
 «o«T^ 
 
 cavTtS 
 
 cavTots 
 
 laurals 
 
 lavTois 
 
 A. 
 
 lavTdv 
 
 6a«T<(V 
 
 Iavr6 
 or, 
 
 lauTOJis 
 contracted, 
 
 cavTos 
 
 eavrd 
 
 G. 
 
 a^ov 
 
 afrrj); 
 
 owroO 
 
 a^uv 
 
 avTuv 
 
 a^ruv 
 
 D. 
 
 avT^ 
 
 avPTfi 
 
 auT$ 
 
 avrots 
 
 avrats 
 
 avTots 
 
 A. 
 
 avTiSv 
 
 auT^v 
 
 avTO 
 
 avrovs 
 
 auras 
 
 avrd 
 
 Plural also : a^Sn airuv 
 
 (r(|>(criv avTois, ats 
 (r<|>as airovs, £s 
 
 631. 
 
 RECIPROCAL 
 
 &XX'<j\oiv of one another 
 Dual 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 G. dX\^\oi.v dW'fjXai.v dW^jXoiv 
 D. dXX^Xoiv dXX'^Xaiv dXX^Xoiv 
 A- dXX^Xo) dXX^Xa dXXyjXu 
 
 Plural 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 dXXyjXiov dXXrjXuv dXX^Xuv 
 
 dXXifjXois dXX^Xais dXX'^Xois 
 
 dXX^Xovs dXX^Xas aXXi|Xa 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 299 
 
 632. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Sing. N. A the- 
 
 G. ToO 
 
 D. T§ 
 
 A. t6v 
 
 Dual N. A. T<i 
 
 G. D. Totv 
 
 Plur. N. oi 
 
 G. rfiv 
 
 D. TOts 
 
 A. Tois 
 
 DEFINITE ARTICLE 
 
 Fem. 
 
 <l 
 
 Tf|S 
 TOtv 
 
 al 
 rfflv 
 rats 
 Tas 
 
 Neut. 
 
 T<S 
 
 ToO 
 
 T§ 
 
 t6 
 r& 
 Totv 
 
 tSv 
 TOts 
 Td 
 
 633- 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 UeiAts 
 
 ffii 
 
 t68e 
 
 ouTos Ms 
 
 ofirT) 
 
 toSto 
 
 G. 
 
 ToCSc 
 
 TTJo-Se 
 
 to«Se 
 
 TOVTOU 
 
 TOVTI)S 
 
 TOVTOU 
 
 D. 
 
 r$SE 
 
 t^Be 
 
 t$8e 
 
 TOVTCp 
 
 Tovro 
 
 toOtu 
 
 A. 
 
 TivSe 
 
 T<ivSE 
 
 t6Se 
 
 toBtov 
 
 TOVTT|V 
 
 TOVTO 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 tc&Se 
 
 tiSSe 
 
 T.48E 
 
 TOVTftl 
 
 TO^TCl* 
 
 ToiTID 
 
 G.D. 
 
 TOtvSc 
 
 toivSe 
 
 toIvSe 
 
 TOUTOIV 
 
 TOVTOIV 
 
 TOVTOIV 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 otSe 
 
 aiSE 
 
 rdSE 
 
 OVTOI, 
 
 avrai 
 
 TttOTa 
 
 G. 
 
 TuvSe 
 
 tSvSe 
 
 t»v8e 
 
 TOVTWV 
 
 Toiruv 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 D. 
 
 Toto-Sf 
 
 TOto-SE 
 
 Tot(r8E 
 
 Toirois 
 
 Tavrais 
 
 TOilTplS 
 
 A. 
 
 Tovtrit 
 
 Masc. 
 
 t^o-Se 
 
 rdSE 
 
 Tofirovs 
 
 Fem. 
 
 toOtos 
 
 ToiiTa 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 Iksivos //^^ 
 
 
 IkeCvi] 
 
 
 EKEtVO 
 
 G. 
 
 eK€(vov 
 
 
 
 4keCviis 
 
 
 ekeCvov 
 
 D. 
 
 iKtlvif 
 
 
 
 iKiivXi 
 
 
 iKilvif 
 
 A. 
 
 ^KCtvOV 
 
 
 
 IkeCvtiv 
 
 
 IkeCvo 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 IkcCvu 
 
 
 
 IkeIvu 
 
 
 IkeCvu 
 
 G.D. 
 
 iKctVOlV 
 
 
 
 jkeCvoiv 
 
 
 jkeCvoiv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 ^Kdvoi 
 
 
 
 iKftvai 
 
 
 ixctva 
 
 G. 
 
 IkcCvoiv 
 
 
 
 cKcCvuv 
 
 
 4ke(v(i)V 
 
 D. 
 
 IkcCvois 
 
 
 
 ^Kctvais 
 
 
 IkcIvois 
 
 A. 
 
 IkeIvovs 
 
 
 
 4KE(vas 
 
 
 IxElva 
 
300 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 634. INTERROGATIVE 635. INDEFINITE 
 
 MASC. AND FEM. NEUT. MASC. AND FEM. NeUT. 
 
 Sing. N. Tl%who? -riwhatf •n% anybody - n anything 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 rtvos, ToO 
 
 
 
 Tiv6s, tou 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 tCvi, t$ 
 
 
 
 Tivt, T<j) 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 tCvo 
 
 t£ 
 
 
 TivA 
 
 Tl 
 
 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 
 rive 
 
 
 
 TIV^ 
 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 
 tCvoiv 
 
 
 
 TlVOtV 
 
 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 rtves 
 
 rCva 
 
 
 Tivfe 
 
 Tivd 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 tCvwv 
 
 
 
 TIVWV 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 rCcrt 
 
 
 
 Tiort 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 rCvas 
 
 rCva 
 
 
 Tivds 
 
 Tivd 
 
 
 
 636. 
 
 
 RELATIVE 
 
 
 
 
 
 SiNGULAE 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 
 masc. fem. : 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. 
 
 8s ^; 
 
 •6 
 
 N. A. a 
 
 S> 
 
 & 
 
 N. oJ al' 
 
 & 
 
 G. 
 
 ov I^S 
 
 0^ 
 
 G.D. olv 
 
 olv 
 
 olv 
 
 G. CSV «V 
 
 <Sv 
 
 D. 
 
 4 i 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 D. ots ots 
 
 ots 
 
 A. 
 
 8v {iv 
 
 •6 
 
 
 
 
 A. oSs &9 
 
 & 
 
 637. INDEFINITE RELATIVE 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 OO-TIS 
 
 ^ITIS 
 
 Tl or 0,TI 
 
 G. 
 
 ovTivos, 8tou 
 
 ^0-TlVOS 
 
 ouTivos, 8tou 
 
 D. 
 
 CpTtVl, OTta 
 
 ■DTIVI 
 
 (^TlVl, 8t<[> 
 
 A. 
 
 ovTiva 
 
 TIVTIVO 
 
 Tl or 8,Ti 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 5tIV€ 
 
 &TIVE 
 
 UTIVC 
 
 G.D. 
 
 olVTlVOlV 
 
 olvTlVOlV 
 
 olvTlVOlV 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 oJtiv€s 
 
 aVrivcs 
 
 &Tiva 
 
 G. 
 
 (OVTIVWV, StMV 
 
 uvrivuv- 
 
 cavTivuv, 8t(i>v 
 
 D. 
 
 oto-Tio-i, Stois 
 
 alo'Tio'i 
 
 olo-Tio-i, iiTois 
 
 A. 
 
 ovo-Tivas 
 
 oo-Tivas 
 
 &Tiva 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 301 
 
 638. 
 
 Direct or indirect in- 
 terrogatives : 
 
 Indirect, interroga- 
 tives or indefinite 
 relatives : 
 
 The definite rela- 
 tive, meaning 
 
 
 tCs wko ? 
 
 iio-Tis 
 
 who is 8s ' 
 
 B 
 
 0^ 
 
 { of what sort? 
 iroios -^ , , ^ J,. 
 
 { what sort of? 
 
 oirotos 
 
 of what sort is otos 
 
 irdiros 
 
 ' how great? 
 how ffiuch ? 
 
 6iri5<ros 
 
 as great as 
 
 as much as \ is 8<ros 
 
 
 
 . how many ? 
 
 
 as many as , 
 
 s 
 
 ■ ir6T6 when ? 
 
 oirdre 
 
 when is 8t« 
 
 > 
 
 iroO where ? 
 
 oirov 
 
 where is ou or svSa 
 
 ^ 
 
 irms how ? 
 
 Situs 
 
 how, as, is ws or fio-irep 
 
 639- 
 
 VERBS 
 
 PERSONAL ENDINGS 
 
 Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative 
 
 Middle 
 Primary Tenses Secondary Tenses 
 -lir)V 
 
 Sing. I 
 2 
 3 
 
 Dual 2 
 3 
 
 Plur. I 
 2 
 3 
 
 Sing. 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 Primary Tenses Secondary Tenses 
 
 -m -V 
 
 -s -s 
 
 -(Tl 
 
 -TOV -TOV 
 
 -TOV -TUV 
 
 -|MV -|l«V 
 
 -Tt -T£ 
 
 -V(ri -V, -<rov 
 
 Imperative 
 Active 
 
 Dual Plur. Sing. 
 
 -TOV -T€ -0"0 
 
 -TWV -VTWV -<r0w 
 
 -|jiai 
 
 -o-oi 
 
 ^ai 
 
 -crBov 
 
 -<r8ov 
 
 -|i,e6a 
 
 -o-ec 
 
 -vrai 
 
 Middle 
 
 Dual Plur. 
 -trSov -<r96 
 -o-fiuv -<r6(i)v 
 
 -o-o 
 
 -TO 
 
 -o-Sov 
 -o-9tiv 
 -|u0a 
 
 -0-06 
 -VTO 
 
 INFINITIVE ENDINGS 
 
 ■ - Active 
 
 -tv (contracted with thematic vowel to -eiv) and -voi 
 
 Middle 
 -o-6ai 
 
302 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 64( 
 
 ). 
 
 
 VOWEL STEMS 
 
 : UNCONTRACTED. 
 I. Active 
 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 IMPF. 
 
 FUT. 
 
 Tndic. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Xdas 
 XiSei 
 
 cXvov 
 iiXves 
 cXvc 
 
 Xdo-u 
 
 XvO-€lS 
 X«0-6l 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 XVCTOV 
 
 tXtftTOV 
 
 XvO-€TOV 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XwtTOV 
 
 4Xv^TT)V 
 
 Xvo-eTOv 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Xi5o|j.cv 
 
 XdcTC 
 
 Xvovori 
 
 IXvOfUV 
 
 Kktm 
 fXvov 
 
 Xva-0|uv 
 
 Xvo-€Te 
 
 Xvo-ovTi 
 
 Subjv. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Xd(o 
 X^TIS 
 
 Xl)t]TOV 
 XwT)TOV 
 
 Xv(i>)uv 
 
 X«T)TE 
 
 Xvuo-i. 
 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Xdoiju 
 
 Xdois 
 
 X^oi 
 
 
 Xvo-oi)i,i 
 
 Xvo-ois 
 
 Xvo-oi 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 XVOITOV 
 
 
 Xvo-OITOV 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XvalTi|V 
 
 
 Xvo-oCti)v 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Xvoificv 
 
 XdoiTC 
 XlSoiEV 
 
 
 Xva-oi)icv 
 
 Xvo-oiTC 
 
 Xvo-ouv 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 3- 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 XSc 
 Xvfro) 
 
 XV€T0V 
 
 XiilTciiv 
 
 X^CTC 
 XvdVTUV 
 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 
 Xvctv 
 
 
 XvO-€lV 
 
 Partic 
 
 
 Xvwv, Xvovo-a, 
 Xvov (§ 6l6. 
 
 2) 
 
 Xdo-uv, Xvo-ovra, 
 Xvo-ov(cp.§ 616.2) 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 303 
 
 INFLECTION ( 
 
 OF X«-<o / loose 
 
 
 
 Voice 
 
 
 
 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 I AOR. 
 cXvO-Q. 
 
 cXiiiras 
 eXvorc 
 
 I Pf. 
 X^VKa 
 
 XIXVKOS 
 
 XavKc 
 
 I Plup. 
 
 &<XiKi) 
 
 iXeXvKT|S 
 
 iXcXiiK<i(v) 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 eXwoTOv 
 
 XcXvKarov 
 
 IXeXiIkctov 
 
 
 3- 
 
 IXiio-(iTT|v 
 
 XcXvKarov 
 
 IXcXvK^TT|V 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 eXvo-aiuv 
 IX^o-arc 
 
 \(XvKa|icv 
 XeXvKarc 
 
 4XcXvKC)UV 
 
 IXcXOkete 
 
 
 3- 
 
 cXvo-av 
 
 XcXvKao-i 
 
 4XcXvKC<rav 
 
 Subjv. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Xvo-u 
 XiioTis 
 X€(rT[| 
 
 [XtXiKw (§ 436) 
 
 XeXiKus 
 
 XcXiKD 
 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 Xl<OT|TOV 
 X«0-T)TOV 
 
 XeXvktitov 
 XeX<lKi)Tov 
 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Xuo-ufuv 
 
 XU0-1]T€ 
 
 Xvo-cixri 
 
 XeXvKuiicv 
 
 XeXvKTJTC 
 
 XcXvKtixri] 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Xvo-aifii 
 
 A.uo-ats, Xwsias (§ 254) 
 
 Xvaai, Xvo-ei* 
 
 [XcXvKOl|JLl (§ 436) 
 
 XcXvKOlS 
 
 XcXvKOl 
 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 Xv<raiTov 
 
 XeXvkoitov 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xi)o-a£TT|v 
 
 XcXvKoIniv 
 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 
 XuO'aL|J.€V 
 
 Xv(rai.T€ 
 
 XeXvKoiiiEv 
 XeX{Ikoitc 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Au(rai£v, Xwo-eiov (§ 254) 
 
 XeXvkoiev] 
 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 3- 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 3 S 1 „ ^ 
 
 (§437) 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 
 Xvo-ai 
 
 XcXvK^VM 
 
 
 Partic. 
 
 
 Xvo-as, Xwo-oUro, 
 Xv<rav (§ 618) 
 
 XcXvKfis, XtXvKvta, 
 XtXwK6s (§ 623) 
 
 
304 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. Middle 
 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 IMPF. 
 
 FUT. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Xvofiai 
 
 Xufl, X«6l 
 
 Xvcrai 
 
 iXvii|j.T]v 
 4Xvou 
 
 ^dcTO 
 
 Xv(ro)i.ai 
 Xi^crxi, XiSo-ci 
 Xvcrcrai, 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 Xueo-Bov 
 
 4XvEo-6ov 
 
 Xva-«r0ov 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XvEo-Sov 
 
 cXv^a'0i]v 
 
 Xvo-co-Gov 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 Xv6|jkc6a 
 X^Eo-ec 
 
 cXv6|j.c6a 
 IX^c(r0€ 
 
 Xva-d|XE0a 
 Xvo-€<r6€ 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xvovrai 
 
 IXvOVTO 
 
 Xvo-ovrai, 
 
 Subjv. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Xvci>|i,ai 
 
 Xvi)Tai, 
 
 XvT|o-6ov 
 
 X«n<r0ov 
 
 Xv(i|jiE0a 
 
 Xvi](r0£ 
 
 XiKDvrai 
 
 
 
 opt. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 Xuo£nT|v 
 Xvoio 
 
 
 Xu(ro[|j,T|v 
 Xvo-oto 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XvOlTO 
 
 
 Xvo-oiTO 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 Xvoio-0ov 
 
 
 Xvo-oio-Bov 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XiJo£<r6t]v 
 
 
 X5(roC<r0T|v 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 Xiio(|i€0a 
 Xvoio-0c 
 
 
 Xv(ro(|u0a 
 Xv(roio-0E 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XvOlVTO 
 
 
 Xvo-oivTO 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 3- 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 XuOD 
 
 Xv4o-0(i> 
 
 Xv£(r0ov 
 
 XvE(r0(i>v 
 
 Xve(r0E 
 
 X5e'(r0<i>v 
 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 
 XvctrOaL 
 
 
 X^a-ca-0ai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 
 Xv6|J.€V0S, Xvo|i<vi], 
 X\id|jicvov 
 
 
 Xvo-6|i,cvos, -ii> 
 -ov 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 305 
 
 Voice 
 
 
 
 I AOR. 
 
 Pf. 
 
 
 Plup. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 l\v(rd)i,T)v 
 
 XA.v|iai 
 
 
 iXcXiipiiiv 
 
 
 2. 
 
 (Kiara 
 
 X^virai 
 
 
 IX^vo-o 
 
 
 3- 
 
 ^\va-aTo 
 
 X«X«Tai 
 
 
 iXIXvTO 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 IXv(ra(r8ov 
 
 X^XvcrSov 
 
 
 IX^vo-Bov 
 
 
 3- 
 
 l\iJo-<!ur9T)v 
 
 X^Xvo-Bov 
 
 
 4X«X«<rBTiv 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 cXvo-dfuSa 
 
 XeXiiixeBa 
 
 
 4XcXv)i.€6a 
 
 
 2. 
 
 IXvo-oo-ee 
 
 Xav<r6€ 
 
 
 IXdivo-BE 
 
 
 3- 
 
 IXwavTO 
 
 XAWVTOI 
 
 
 cX^VVTO 
 
 Subjv. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 Xma^ax 
 
 XcXv|i.^vos u 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 \ii(ri] 
 
 XcXvit^vos fls 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 \vo-r|TOi 
 
 XeXv|i^vos 'n 
 
 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 \v<n|o-6ov 
 
 X«Xv|JI.^V(i> tlTOV 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 \«o-t|<r9ov 
 
 XcXu)J.^VO> ■^TOV 
 
 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 XiJa-u|i,e6a 
 
 XcXviJLCVot. co|iev 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 \«(rT|<r6« 
 
 XeXv|j.«voi r(Tt 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xvo-wvTOi 
 
 XeXv^jl^voi (oiri. 
 
 
 
 opt. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 Xv(raC|jii)v 
 
 XeXufilvos th\v 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Xvo-aio 
 
 XeXv|ji^vos «tT)S 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xvo-aiTo 
 
 XeXv|ji^vos eti) 
 
 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 Xvo-aio-Sov 
 
 XeXv|j.Iv(i> ei!T|TOv or 
 
 Afov 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XC(roC(r6T)V 
 
 XcXv|x^v(i> €l<iTiiv or 
 
 Ati\v 
 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 Xvo-aC|j.c6a 
 
 X€Xvp.^VOl €iIl]|JL£V or 
 
 etjiev 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Xvo-aio-Sc 
 
 XcXviiEvoi tii\rt or 1 
 
 =tT£ 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xvo-aivTO 
 
 X£Xv|jicvoi etT)o-av or ettv 
 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 Xvo-ai 
 
 XA.vo-0 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xvo-do-Bu 
 
 XeXio-Bu 
 
 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 Xuo-ao-Bov 
 
 Xe'Xvo-Bov 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xv<rd<r6(i>v 
 
 X(Xv(rB(i)v 
 
 
 
 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 Xvo-ao-Oe 
 
 X^vo-fle 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xv<rdo-0<i)v 
 
 XeXvo-Buv 
 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 
 Xv<ra(r6ai 
 
 XcXvo-Bai 
 
 
 
 Partic, 
 
 
 XiJird)i.£vos, yi), -ov 
 
 XeXvpiivos, -T), -ov 
 
 
 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 20 
 
3o6 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 
 
 3. Passive Voice 
 
 
 
 
 FUT. PF. 
 
 I AOR. 
 
 
 I Put. 
 
 Indic. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 XcXdo-oiiai 
 
 iXiieriv 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 XcX^o-xi, XeXvo-ei 
 
 ^XiOiis 
 
 
 Xv6^<r[|, XvS^TEi 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XcXiSo-crai 
 
 tXver) 
 
 
 XvS^io-eTai 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 XeXvo-eo-Oov 
 
 IX«6t]Tov 
 
 
 XvO'^o-co-Sov 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XcX^o-eo-Sov 
 
 IXwe^jniv 
 
 
 Xue^orto-eov 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 XeXv<r6|iic6a 
 
 cXv6r||uv 
 
 
 Xv6T|(rd|iE6a 
 
 
 2. 
 
 XeXSio-60-ee 
 
 IXiiei)TE 
 
 
 Xve^o-co-ec 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XeXvo-ovrai 
 
 IXv6T|(rav 
 
 
 XvS^o-ovTai 
 
 Subjv. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 
 XvOu 
 XvOfis 
 
 Xvefi 
 
 XvOf^TOV 
 XvSflTOV 
 
 XvOtoiicv 
 
 XuBfiTe 
 
 Xv6<D(ri 
 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 XEXviro[)iT|v 
 
 Xv8«Ciiv 
 
 
 Xv6i)(roC|i,ifv 
 
 
 2. 
 
 XeXvo-oio 
 
 Xv6cCt)s 
 
 
 Xv6^<roio 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XeXvo-oiTo 
 
 XvOcCi] 
 
 
 \yAi\<Tm,TO 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 XcXva-oitrOov 
 
 XvBciTov or XvOeCijTov 
 
 XuBifjo-oicrSov 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XcXviro(<r6i]v 
 
 Xv6cCtt)v or Xu9€i^Triv 
 
 Xv6i](ro((r6i)v 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 XEXUa-ot|i.c6a 
 
 Xu6ct|iEv or Xu6cCt)|i.cv 
 
 Xv6r)(roC|i.e6a 
 
 
 2. 
 
 XcXvo-aio-Sc 
 
 XvOelTc or 
 
 XveeCiiTc 
 
 Xue^jo-oio-ee 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XcXviroivTO 
 
 XvSctcv or 
 
 Xv6c(iio-av 
 
 XvS^O-OlVTO 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 3- 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 
 X«et|Ti 
 
 XvO^TU 
 
 XvBuTov 
 Xv8^Tuv 
 
 AVvtITC 
 
 Xvfl^vTuv 
 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 
 XcXtfo-co-eai 
 
 Xv6f)vai 
 
 
 Xve^jo-ctrOai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 
 XcXv(r6|uvos, 
 
 XvScCs, XvSct<ra, 
 
 Xv6T|ir6|iEvos, 
 
 
 
 -T|, -ov 
 
 Xve4v(§62o.a) 
 
 -r|,-ov 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 307 
 
 641. As examples of the second aorist and second per- 
 fect systems (§§ 83, 445, 485)1 the second aorist (active 
 and middle) and the second perfect and pluperfect of 
 \e/7ra> leave are here given. 
 
 
 
 2 AOR. Act. 
 
 2 AoR. Mid. 
 
 2 Pf. 
 
 2 Plup. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 ^iirov 
 
 IXiir6|ii)v 
 
 X^Xoiira 
 
 ^eXoCiti) 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ^iires 
 
 IXCirov 
 
 X^Xoiiras 
 
 ^EXo(in)s 
 
 
 3- 
 
 8Xiir€ 
 
 ^ClTETO 
 
 X^oiire 
 
 4XEXaCirEi(v) 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 IXCircTOv 
 
 ^XCirco-eov 
 
 X(XoCiraTov 
 
 ^XeXoCitetov 
 
 
 3- 
 
 4\iir^Ti|v 
 
 IXiir^<r6iiv 
 
 XEXoCirarov 
 
 4XEXoi.ir^Ti)v 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 4\Ciro)icv 
 
 4Xiir6|Mea 
 
 XeXoliraiuv 
 
 iXEXo(irE|lEV 
 
 
 2. 
 
 IXtirtTC 
 
 atmo-et 
 
 XcXoiirarc 
 
 IXeXoCitete 
 
 
 3- 
 
 eXiirov 
 
 IXCirovTo 
 
 XEXoCircUri 
 
 EXEXoCiTEirav 
 
 Siibjv. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 XCiru 
 
 XCir(ii)i,ai 
 
 [XeXotira (§ 446) 
 
 
 2. 
 
 XCirns 
 
 X£iqj 
 
 XeXoCitus 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 X£irn 
 
 X£irr|Tai 
 
 XcXoCirg 
 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 X£in)Tov 
 
 X(irt)(r6ov 
 
 XcXoCin|TOv 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 MirnTov 
 
 
 XeXotirrirov 
 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 XCir<»|XEv 
 
 Xiir(i)tE6a 
 
 X«XoCir(D|jiEv 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 \linyn 
 
 X£irT|o-6E 
 
 XeXoCiruTt 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XCircDO-i 
 
 X(7ruvTai 
 
 XeXoCituo-i] 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 XCiroi|i.i 
 
 Xiiro(|iT)v 
 
 [XeXoCitoiijii (§ 446) 
 
 
 2. 
 
 XCirois 
 
 X(iroio 
 
 XeXoCttois 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xtiroi 
 
 XtiroiTO 
 
 XeXoCitoi 
 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 XliroiTOV 
 
 X£iroi(r6ov 
 
 XeXoCitoitov 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XiitoCthv 
 
 Xiiro[<r6i]V 
 
 XEXoiiroCTTiv 
 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 XCiroi)iEv 
 
 XiiroC|iE6a 
 
 XeXoCitoiiiev 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 XCiroiTC 
 
 XCiroi(r6e 
 
 XeXoCitoite 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 XCiroiEV 
 
 XCiroivTO 
 
 XeXoCitoiev] 
 
 
 Imv. 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 XClTE 
 
 XiiroS 
 
 
 
 
 3' 
 
 Xiir^Tca 
 
 Xiir^o-Su 
 
 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 X£ir£TOV 
 
 Xdreo-Bov 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xiir^Tuv 
 
 Xiir^<r6uv 
 
 
 
 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 XflTETt 
 
 XCirco-Oc 
 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Xiir6vToiv 
 
 Xtir4<r6(Dv 
 
 
 
3o8 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 
 2 AOR. Act. 
 
 2 AoR. Mid. 
 
 2PF. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Xiirelv 
 
 Xiir^o-Bai 
 
 XcXoiirlvai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 Xiiriiv, XiiroCo-tt, 
 
 XiirduEvos, 
 
 XeXoiiriis, - 
 
 a) -T), -ov 
 
 §623) 
 
 -uta, -6s (cp. 
 
 642. As an example of the second passive system, the 
 second aorist passive and the second future passive of 
 /SXaTTTw hiLrt are here given. 
 
 
 
 2 AoR. Pass. 
 
 2 FuT. Pass. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 ipXdpiiv 
 cpXdpT)s 
 ipXdpr) 
 
 
 pXaP^o-ofiai. 
 pXop'iio-Ti OE-O 
 pXaP'iio-ETai, 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 4pXdpT)Tov 
 
 
 pXapyjo-EO-eov 
 
 
 3- 
 
 4pXaP<)TTiv 
 
 
 PXaPirjo-EO-eov 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 epXdpTi|j,cv 
 
 lpXdpT]TE 
 
 ipXdpTjo-av 
 
 
 pXaPT)o-6|jiE6a 
 
 pXaP^o-Eo-eE 
 
 PXaP^o-ovrai 
 
 Subjv. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 pXaPco 
 
 pXttPiJs 
 
 pXaPfi 
 
 pXapfiTOv 
 pXaPilTOV 
 
 pXaP&ixEV 
 
 pXaPfiTC 
 
 pXaPuo-i 
 
 
 
 opt. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 pXapcCiiv 
 pXaPtCtis 
 pXaPeCr) 
 
 
 pXaPi)(roC)i.T|v 
 
 pXaP^o-oio 
 
 pXaPi]o-oiTo 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 pXaPciTov or pXaPeCiiTov 
 pXaP£(TT|v or pXap£i,irJTT|v 
 
 pXaP^o-oio-6ov 
 pXapT)(roC(r6T]v 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 pXaPEi|i.T]v or pXap(Cr)|i,Ev 
 pXaPeiTe or pXap6£ir)T€ 
 pXaPeiEv or pXaPECi](rav 
 
 pXapi)<ro(|j.Eea 
 
 pXaP'/joroio-SE 
 
 pXap^Q-oivTO 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 309 
 
 ImV' 
 
 Sing. 
 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 2 AOR. PASS. 
 
 p\dpi]ei 
 
 pXaP^JTu 
 
 
 2 FUT. Pass. 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 p\dPr]Tov 
 p\apf)T<iiv 
 
 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 3. 
 3- 
 
 p\aPevT(i)V 
 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 
 
 P\apf|vat 
 
 
 pXaP^o-Eo-Oai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 
 
 pXa^Eis, pXapElo-a, 
 (§ 620. a) 
 
 . pXa^v 
 
 -ov 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS 
 643. Verbs in -da)^ -ecu, -om are contracted only in the pres- 
 ent and imperfect. For the principles of contraction, see 
 §§ 504, 505, 507, 516, 528. TifJidw (rlixa-^ hono7', Tj-oieai (Troie-) 
 ■make, and BrjXoco (Brj\o-) manifest are inflected as follows in 
 the present and imperfect of the active, middle, and passive. 
 
 
 
 
 Active 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Present Indicative 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 (rt/xdio)) 
 
 Tl|i.U 
 
 (TTOife'u)) iroiw 
 
 (SjjXooj) 
 
 SifXu 
 
 2. 
 
 (riftaas) 
 
 Tl|i.q.S 
 
 (oroteeis) irowts 
 
 (SijXdas) 
 
 St|Xois 
 
 3- 
 
 (rt/xaei) 
 
 Ti(<,^ 
 
 (TTOicet) iroiet 
 
 Dual 
 
 (877X061) 
 
 SriXot 
 
 2. 
 
 (Tt/xaeTOJ') 
 
 Tl(l,dTOV 
 
 (irotcerov) iroielrov 
 
 (SjjXoetov) 
 
 8T|XoiiTOV 
 
 3- 
 
 (jifiAerov) 
 
 TlJiaTOV 
 
 (TTOieerov) iroiciTov 
 
 Plural 
 
 (SijXderoi') 
 
 8t|Xovtov 
 
 I. 
 
 (Tlfmofiev) 
 
 Ti)lA)l£V 
 
 (TTOiiofiev) iroioBiiev 
 
 (SiyXdo/tiev) 
 
 Sl]\0V|t{V 
 
 2. 
 
 (Tl/xdeTi) 
 
 Tt|j,aTe 
 
 (■TTOie'eTc) iroiciTE 
 
 (SrjXdeTc) 
 
 8r|Xo€T€ 
 
 3' 
 
 (rlfmova-i.') 
 
 Ti|i.w(ri 
 
 (TTOteoDCTt) iroioS<ri 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 Singular 
 
 (Sj^Xdoufri) 
 
 ST|Xov(ri. 
 
 I. 
 
 (cn/t^apv) 
 
 Irffiuv 
 
 (cTroikov) lirotouv 
 
 (eSj^Xoov) 
 
 IS^XoDV 
 
 3_ 
 
 (eri/iaes) 
 
 ETifias 
 
 (eTTOjecs) iiroUis 
 
 (eST^Xoes) 
 
 IS^Xovs 
 
 3- 
 
 (eTt/xae) 
 
 «Tt|xa 
 
 (eTTOtce) liroCti 
 
 (eSjfXoE) 
 
 IS4)Xov 
 
310 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Dual 
 
 2. (cTi/ideTov) 4Tl|iaTov (eiroiKTOi/) tirotttrov 
 
 3. (iTLfmeTriv) frl\iATi\v {kirouiT7)v) iirouCriiv 
 
 Plural 
 
 1. (iTliiaoii^v') 4tI(im(«v (eirote'o/xev) «roioS|iev 
 
 2. (iTLfiaiTi) lTl|iOT€ (cTTOtcere) liroieirt 
 
 3. (eTt/xaov) irtiiciiv (tTrouov) lirotouv 
 
 Present Subjunctive 
 Singular 
 
 1. (jiixaut) Ti|i« (TTOieto) iroiw 
 
 2. (tI/miijs) Ti|i*S (iroKjjs) iroifls 
 
 3. (jliiAri) Ti|i,(r (iroioj) . iroi'n 
 
 Dual 
 
 2. (rlfiarfTov) ti(iotov (TTOteijTov) iroiflTov 
 
 3. (tZ/kijjtov) TiiioTOv (iroteijTov) iroiflTOv 
 
 Plural 
 I. (jiixatoixfv) Ti|«o(iev (iroiem/xev) iroiuitev 
 • 2. (TifiaijTe) TtnaTC" (jroieijTe) iroifiTe 
 3. (Ti/toeoo't) Tiiifiori (iroiiiMTi) irotfio-i 
 
 («8)jXo£TOv) 48T)\ofiTOV 
 
 (eSijXoerijv) eStiXovniv 
 
 (cSTjXdo/iev) eSijXoviwv 
 
 (tSj/XdcTc) e8r|XovTt 
 
 (SijXdo)) 
 (SijXdj^s) 
 (&;Xd)j) 
 
 8T|\ots 
 
 ST|\0t 
 
 (8i;XdijTov) StjXilTov 
 
 (SljXojJTOv) 8l]\wT0V 
 
 (SijXdcD/iev) 8T|\M(itv 
 
 (SijXoTp-e) 8n\aT{ 
 
 (SiyXdaxri) 8i]\ffio-i 
 
 Present Optative 
 Singular 
 
 1. (jifjiaoitiv) TiiMjitjv (ttoieomjv) ttoioCtiv 
 
 2. (tI/«iomjs) Tiiupus (ttokomjs) iroioCus 
 
 3. (jiiMoirj) Ti|»(j>i| ^TTOieotrj) iroiott) 
 
 Dual 
 
 2. (jiiuwirfrav) [ti/xohjtov (Troteoir/Tov) [jrototTjTov 
 
 3. (Tl/xaoiijTjjv) Ti/i<u^rj;i'] (TTOieotj^TTjv) ttoiohJtt/v] 
 
 Plural 
 ^ . (rXixaoirifiev) [Ti/nany/i.O' {Troi€oir]jj.ev) [iroiOM;//,£v 
 
 2. (rlfiaoi-ifri) Tiixmyn (iroteotT/re) TTOioCrfT^ 
 
 3. (jlfuaoiria-av) Ti/*<u)7(rav] (Troieoiija-av) iroioiijcrav] 
 
 (SjyXooiijv) 8n\oCnv 
 (8j/Xooojs) 8i|\otTis 
 (SijXoooj) 8t|\oCt) 
 
 (StjXoohjtov) [8r/XotjjTov 
 (SjjXootijTrjv) Sr;XonjTj;v] 
 
 (8r;XooH7/x.£i') [8?jXoi?;/i£i' 
 (8r;Xoot)jTe) 877Xoi7^£ 
 (8)jXooM/(rav) SiyXoojirav] 
 
 or' 
 
 or' 
 
 1 The forms with the mood sign tr) are commonly found in the singular; the 
 forms with the mood sign I (without 1)) , in the dual and plural. 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 3" 
 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 I. 
 
 (Ti/iOOljtu) 
 
 [rl/xm/ii 
 
 (iroieoijUt) [TTOiot/u 
 
 (Si/Xdoiju) 
 
 2. 
 
 (Ti/iaots) 
 
 Ti/lC^S 
 
 (iroteois) TTOwTs 
 
 (SijXdots) 
 
 3- 
 
 (Tijuaot) 
 
 TlfJ.^'] 
 
 (iroieot) iroioT] 
 Dual 
 
 (SijXdoi) 
 
 2. 
 
 (Ti/xaoiroj') 
 
 TIH^TOV 
 
 (jrotEoiToi/) iroiotTov 
 
 (SjjXdoiTov) 
 
 3- 
 
 (rlixaoLTrjv) 
 
 rXfUfTi\v 
 
 [TTO\.(.o!.Tt]v) iroioCTqv 
 
 Plural 
 
 (SiyXootVi;!/) 
 
 I. 
 
 (rlfuioLfi^v) 
 
 Tr)i$|jicv 
 
 (TTOieot/tei') iroiotfuv 
 
 (^Xwiifuev) 
 
 2. 
 
 (rlfidoiTe) 
 
 Tl|l^T€ 
 
 (iroieWe) iroioirc 
 
 (SijXdoiTc) 
 
 3- 
 
 (rlfjuioiev) 
 
 Tl|JL$6V 
 
 (ttokoiev) woiotev 
 
 Present Imperative 
 Singular 
 
 (8j;Xdot£v) 
 
 2. 
 
 (rf/mf) 
 
 •rfpia 
 
 (TTOiee) irotei 
 
 (SiyXoe) 
 
 ■5- 
 
 (rlfjuieTai) 
 
 TlfJl^TU 
 
 (5roie€T<u) irouCrci) 
 Dual 
 
 (SjyAoeTO)) 
 
 2. 
 
 (rlfideTOv) 
 
 TlJldTOV 
 
 (TTOleCTOl') irOMlTOV 
 
 (SjyXdtTov) 
 
 3- 
 
 -{rlimiTav) 
 
 Tijidruv 
 
 (jroteercov) irotetruv 
 Plural 
 
 (8);Xo€TO)i') 
 
 2. 
 
 (Tifmcre) 
 
 TiHOTt 
 
 (iroic'ere) iroietrj 
 
 (SjyXdeTe) 
 
 3- 
 
 (rlfMOVTIiXv) 
 
 Tl(i(4vT«V 
 
 (TTOtcovTO)!/) irotoiivTwv 
 Present Infinitive 
 
 (8ljXodvT(i»') 
 
 
 (rlfjuiav) 
 
 Tt|iOvl 
 
 (iroLeav) iroielv ' 
 
 (SjjXdeiv) 
 
 
 
 Present 
 
 Participle (see § 622 and a) 
 
 
 (tI/wmv) 
 
 Ti|ugv 
 
 (irotemv) iroiSv 
 
 {^k6iav) 
 
 Middle and Passive 
 
 Present Indicative 
 
 Singular 
 
 1. (ri/xao/uu) Ti)i,u|iai (ttoieojouu) iraiov|jiai (8i;\dojuai) 
 
 2. (Tiixdri or TijAq, (ttoUti or iroi^ or (Si^Xdj or 
 
 Tt/taci) TTOiea) irout SiyXdei) 
 
 3. (TijiiaeTai) Tl|i,aTai (n-oiaTOt) iroittTtti (8);Xd£Tot) 
 
 [Si/Xot/i! 
 SijXots 
 8i;Xoi] 
 
 SigXaiToV 
 StiXoCtiiv 
 
 Si)\ot|icv 
 
 8i)XotTc 
 
 SriXotcv 
 
 S^Xov 
 Si)\oiira> 
 
 St|Xovtov 
 St|\o4tuv 
 
 8t|\ovtc . 
 SijXovvTotv 
 
 St|Xovv ' 
 
 Si]\Sv 
 
 ST|\o<i|iai 
 Si|\ot 
 
 Si)\oCTai 
 
 1 As the infinitive ending -eiv is a contraction of the thematic vowel t and ev 
 (cp. § 639), tIjjiov really represents Ti|jio-c-tv; iroulv, itou-c-ev; and SijXoCv, 
 8i)Xo-«-€v. 
 
312 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 TiixatcrOov) Ti|jio<r6ov 
 
 TLfxaecrOov) Tt|iO<r6ov 
 
 Tlijux6fji.(.0a) Tlni4(i.e6tt 
 
 rl/jLaecrOe) Tijido-Be 
 
 Ti/xaoirai) TijifivTai 
 
 €TilXa6lt,7jv) lTi(l.c6|J,T|V 
 
 iTlflAov) «Tl(I.W 
 
 irifiaero) ctIiioto 
 
 iTL(t,a.€<TBov) eTi|j,fi.(r6ov 
 
 iTlfjuiLOfJLeOa) €Ti|ii&|u6a 
 
 iTijuaecrdt) tTl^atrit 
 
 eTlfiuiovTo) Iti|iwvto 
 
 Tiimui/juii) Ti)iiu|j.ai 
 
 Tl/jiarj) Tl(i§, 
 
 TlfxdrjTai) riiiarai 
 
 TiyiArjdOov) Ti|j[.ao-6ov 
 
 TlfidrjirOov} Tj(ia(r9ov 
 
 T(|Ua<Ojueda) Ti|jiu|j.e6a 
 
 rX/Juirja-dt) Ti|jiair6« 
 
 TlfnAonrrai) TijioivTai 
 
 Tlixaoi/j.rji') rlj>,if\i,r\v 
 tI/jloloio) rlfilfo 
 
 Tljxa.oiro) Tiji^TO 
 
 Dual 
 
 
 
 QrroiUcrOov) irowtcrOov 
 
 (SijA.oeo-^oi') 
 
 ST|\ov(r6ov 
 
 (TTOieecrflov) iroielcrBov 
 
 (St^Xmct^ov) 
 
 8i^Xov(r9ov 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 
 (iroted/AcSa) iroioinefla 
 
 (8j;Xod/t£fc) 
 
 Sr|Xav|i,c9a 
 
 {ttolUctOc) iroi€i(r96 
 
 (SiyXdecr^c) 
 
 8t]\ov(r9€ 
 
 (TTOLiOVTai) iroioivToi 
 
 (SijXdovTat) 
 
 ST|XavvTai 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 
 (iTTOico/jiriv) eiroioiimv 
 
 (eSijXod/iiyv) 
 
 ISi]Xov|ii)v 
 
 (cTTOieov) liroioB 
 
 (eSt^Xoou) 
 
 ISt)Xov 
 
 (eirote'cTo) eiroiciTO 
 
 (eSt/Xdero) 
 
 I8t|Xovto 
 
 DUAL 
 
 
 
 (liroLeecrOov) liroieto-Boi^ (iSrjXoeaOov^ l8ii\ov<r8ov 
 
 (eTTOtccV^r/v) liroi6C<r6T]v 
 
 (i8r)\oicr$riv} ISt]\oii(r9Tiv 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 
 (cTTOted/AC^a) liroiovjieBa 
 
 J (i8r)\o6f]i^0a) ihi\\o<nuia 
 
 (cTTOteecr^e) liroiticrOe I 
 
 (iSrjX6ta-6£) 
 
 IST|Xo(i(r9e 
 
 (cTroic'ovTo) e'iroioOvTO\ 
 
 (iSrjKoovTo) 
 
 l8r]XovvTo 
 
 Present Subjunctive 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 
 (iroica);U,at) iroiu|i.ttil 
 
 (8ri\6a>/Mi) 
 
 8T|Xu|iai 
 
 {iTOiirj) iroi^ ( 
 
 (SrjXy) 
 
 8i]Xoi 
 
 (iroier^Tat) iroiiiTOi^ 
 
 (SrjXoT^cu) 
 
 SifXurai 
 
 Dual 
 
 
 
 (7rot€7yo"poi/) 7rotfj(r9oxA 
 
 {8rjXmi(7$ov) 
 
 8T]Xu(r9ov 
 
 (woLerjcrdov) iroifio-Bov J 
 
 (StjXotjo-^ov) 
 
 S-qXcoo-Bov 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 
 (TTOiEaJ/AE^j,) iroi(i|jic6a ' 
 
 (8r]Xoa)fi.e$a) 
 
 8T)Xia|iE9a 
 
 (TTOte'ijcr^eX Troifio-86 v 
 
 (Br/XorjaOe) 
 
 8t|Xuo-B£ 
 
 (TTOtetovrat) iroiaivTaL 
 
 (^SrjXouiVTat) 
 
 8i)\uvTai 
 
 Present Optative 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 
 (Troieot)u,»jv) iroioCniiv 
 
 (SrjXooi/Mjvy 
 
 SiiXoC|iT)v 
 
 (irotcoto) iroioto 
 
 (8r]\6oio) 
 
 St|Xoio 
 
 (TTOteotTo) irotoiTo 
 
 (SrjXooiTo) 
 
 8t|\oito 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 313 
 
 2. (tIimol(t6ov) Tt|i$(r9ov 
 
 3. (jliMioia-Oriv) ri]Uf<r9i\v 
 
 I ■ (ri/zaoijuEda) Ti|j.(^')iE6a 
 
 2. (Tiftaotcr^e) Tip^o-Se 
 
 3. (TtjuaoivTo) Tin^vTO 
 
 2. (ri/iaov) 
 
 3. (jlfuxitrOm) 
 
 2. (riiiAttrOov) 
 
 3. (Tt/Ml£(r0O)l/) 
 
 2. (TllJAi£(T6e) 
 
 3. (rliiafcrdwv) 
 
 TL|LOI 
 
 Ti|i.a(r6(i> 
 
 ri|xd<r6ov 
 Ti|i,ct(r6(i)v 
 
 Ti|xa<r6€ 
 Ti|j,ao-6uv 
 
 Dual 
 (TTOttoKT^oi') iroioiirOov 
 (Troiioi,<7$rjv) iroioCo-Oriv 
 
 Plural 
 (TTOKOifieOa) iroioC|M6a 
 (^woLeourOc) iroioIo-Oc 
 (TTOieoivTo) iroiotvTO 
 
 Present Imperative 
 Singular 
 (iroteov) iroiofi 
 
 (iroieeV^o)) irot«C<r6<» 
 
 Dual 
 (■TTOtaCT^ov) iroMicrOov 
 {■Troieea-dwv) iroieJo-Bwv 
 
 Plural 
 (iroteecr^c) iroiEio-Sc 
 (irotear^ft)!') iroitCirSuv 
 
 (SjjXdoKT^ov) 8t|\oto-6ov 
 
 (SjyXooiV^jji') 8t)\oCo-8i)v 
 
 (Sv^XooijuEda) ST)\o(|u6a 
 
 (ST^Xdoicr^e) SnXourOe 
 
 (SijAdoivTo) BuXoivTo 
 
 (SrjXdou) 8i)\o0 
 
 (SjyXoetr^o)) SnXouo-Bw 
 
 (Sr/Xdec^oi/) 8t)Xofi(r9ov 
 
 (Sr/Xoeo'^o)!') SriXoOcrflwv 
 
 (8i;\deo-0e) 8ii\ofi(r6« 
 
 (STjXoecrflwv) 8iiXoi)<r8<iiv 
 
 Present Infinitive 
 (rXfuiitrOai) Ti|i.a<r6ai (iroUeo'Oai) irowto-Bai (ST^Xdecr^ai) 8ti\ovcr6oi 
 
 Present Participle 
 (rlfiiaofjicvoi^ Ti|ji,<i)nevos (TrotedjUevos) iroioiiievos (8rj\oO|[X£vos) 8i)Xoii|i6VOS 
 
 644. Liquid Verbs : future active and middle of (fiaiva 
 
 show- 
 Indicative 
 
 Sing. I 
 2, 
 3 
 
 Dual 2 
 
 3 
 
 Plur. I 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 Future Active Future Middle 
 
 (^<j>av£<o) <|>ov« ((jxtveo/m,!,) ^avovfi.0.1 
 
 ((^avc'eis) <|>oyets (^aveg or -eei) <j>avfj or -«i 
 
 (<^av£ei) <|>av€t ((^aveerat) iJK^'''''''''''' 
 
 (djavecTOv) <t>avtiTOV (<^av££o-^ov) <|)av6to-8ov 
 
 ((^avEETOi/) <j)av£tTov (^(jtaviicrOov) <|)ttveto-9ov 
 
 (<^av£0/*£v) <(>ovoO|MV ((jtaviOfieOa) <t>avo<i|u0a 
 
 (<^av££r£) <|iav£tT£ (cjiavha-Ot) ^avitaSt 
 
 C<l>av£OVtn) (|)avoS<ri (<^avioVTat) ijiovovvroi 
 
314 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Sing 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 (ifjaveoLriv) 
 (^av£oir;s) 
 ((jjaveoLfj) 
 
 Optative 
 <^avoCi)v 
 4>avo(i)s 
 
 (<t}av€oifiriv) 
 ((^av£0(o) 
 
 (<^aV£OiTO) 
 
 ^aiioC|iT|v 
 
 <)>avoto 
 
 4>avotTO 
 
 Dual 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 (c^avtoiTOv) 
 (_<j)avcoiTr]v) 
 
 c^avotTov 
 4>avoCTT)V 
 
 ((jiaveourdov) 
 
 <|>avoiir6ov 
 <|>avoC<r6T|v 
 
 Plur. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 (<^aV£Ot/i£v) 
 
 ((jtaveoLTc) 
 
 (4>avioiev) 
 
 i|)avoi|uv 
 
 <|>avo{T£ 
 
 <|>avotcv 
 
 {<j)av£OLfi.c6a) 
 
 ((JMueoLO-Oe) 
 
 (^aveoivTo) 
 
 4iavoC|ic6a 
 
 <|>avoiir6c 
 
 4>avotvTO 
 
 Sing. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 or 
 (<l>avioifu) 
 (<^av£ots) 
 
 [i^avot|u 
 <^avois 
 i|>avoi] 
 
 
 
 
 
 (<^av££tv) 
 
 Infinitive 
 <|>avctv 
 
 Participle 
 
 (<^avE£<T6at) 
 
 <|>avcto-8ai 
 
 
 
 ((fmvewv, (JMveovira 
 
 , <|>avuv, <t>avovo-a 
 (j>avavv (cp. 
 
 (<^aVEd/;l£VOS, 
 
 -J7,-oj') 
 
 i|>avov|Uvos, 
 
 -11,-OV 
 
 §622) 
 
 645- Liquid Verbs: first aorist active and middle of 
 (j}a(vw show. 
 
 Indicative 
 I AORIST Active 
 
 c(|>i)va 
 
 Sing. I 
 2 
 3 
 
 Dual 2 
 3 
 
 Plur. I 
 2 
 3 
 
 Sing. 
 
 £<|>r)vas 
 {<!><] va)i(v 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 I Aorist Middle 
 
 Clj>1[)vd|lTfV 
 
 l<j>^vaTO 
 £<^ilivao'6ov 
 
 i<|>^vavTO 
 4>^vu|iai 
 
 <|)^VTlTai 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 315 
 
 
 I AoRiST Active 
 
 
 I AORIST Middle 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 l|>^VT]TaV 
 +<ivT)TOV 
 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 <|>^V(>)|1(V 
 
 
 <^i)V(i|u6a 
 
 2. 
 
 <^<ivTlTf 
 
 
 <|)<ivTia-8t 
 
 3- 
 
 <{>'<) vuo-i 
 
 
 i)>'/|vuvTai 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 <j>^vai|i,i 
 
 Optative 
 
 <)>T|va(|lT|V 
 
 2. 
 
 <^)yrais or ifi^vEias (cp. § 254) 
 
 (ti^jvaio 
 
 3- 
 
 <t>T]vai or (t>^veic 
 
 
 <pTlVClLTO 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 <!>'<) vaiTov 
 
 
 <|>'^vai(r6ov 
 
 3- 
 
 (|>i|vaCTT|v 
 
 
 (|>i)vaCa-6T|v 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 i|>^vai|uv 
 
 
 4>t|va(|i.E6a 
 
 2. 
 
 ({■irjvaiTC 
 
 
 <^^vaio-6c 
 
 3- 
 
 <^i^i/atev or (ji^vfiaii 
 
 (cp. § 254) 
 
 ()>^vaivTO 
 
 Slag. 2. 
 
 <j>f)vov 
 
 Imperative 
 
 <|>{)vai 
 
 3- 
 
 (|>T|vdT<ll 
 
 
 <|>T|vdo-6(i> 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 (|>^vaTov 
 
 
 it>'fjva(r8ov 
 
 3- 
 
 l|>T)vd,T(l>V 
 
 
 (t>T|vdo-6uv 
 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 (|>^VaTE 
 
 
 ^^vao-Se 
 
 3- 
 
 <t>r|vdvT<i)v 
 
 
 (t>r|vdo'6<i>v 
 
 
 (t>{)vai 
 
 Infinitive 
 Participle 
 
 <|>'<ivao-6ai 
 
 
 i|i^vas, -ao-a, ij>{)vav 
 
 (cp.§6i8) 
 
 i|>r)vd|i.(vos, -t], -ov 
 
 CONJUGATION OF MI-VERBS 
 
 646. Root class. — Inflection of rlO-qfjiL place, iffrrjfii set, 
 BiBcofii give, in the present, imperfect, and second aorist 
 tenses ; and of eTrpidiMrjv I bought. 
 
 
 Active 
 
 
 
 Present Indicative 
 
 
 Sing. I. T(-9Ti-(it 
 
 t<rTi|-|iii 
 
 SC-8<a-|it 
 
 2. Tt-flri-s 
 
 i-o-Tn-s 
 
 SC-Su-s 
 
 3. Tt-flTJ-O-l 
 
 Wti]-o-i 
 
 8(-8ai-o-i 
 
3:6 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 Tt-6t-T0V 
 
 t-O-TOrTOV 
 
 8C-S0-TOV 
 
 3- 
 
 tI-6«-tov 
 
 l-OTO-TOV 
 
 8t-8o-TOv 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 T(-6e-|i,6V 
 Tt-Oe-Tt 
 
 
 8(-8o-|iEv 
 8t-8o-Te 
 
 3- 
 
 Ti-S^ao-i 
 
 l-o-Tacri 
 
 Si-86-a<ri 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 6-Tt-6T|-V 
 l^(re€« (§ SS9) 
 
 l-TC-9et 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 t<rTT|-V 
 d-O-TH-S 
 1u-(rTTl 
 
 I-8C-80DV (§ 570) 
 
 4-8C-8otis 
 
 l-SC-Sov 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 l-rt-Oe^ov 
 
 d-CTTO-TOV 
 
 I-8C-80-TOV 
 
 3- 
 
 4-TI-94-TT1V 
 
 t-0-T(i-TTlV 
 
 I-81-86-T11V 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 «-TC-ee-(j.ev 
 e-T£-e€-T£ 
 
 l!-O-T0tT« 
 
 ^£-8o-|Mv 
 4-8£-8o-T« 
 
 3- 
 
 4-Tt-9«-(rav 
 
 J-o-ra-o-av 
 Present Subjunctive 
 
 «-81r8o-<rov 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 Tt-flS 
 
 l-O-TW 
 
 Si-Su 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Ti-9fi-s 
 Ti-Bfi 
 
 i-o-Tfj-s 
 
 Si-8$-s 
 81-8$ 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 Tl-Ofl-TOV 
 
 V-0-Tfi^OV 
 
 8l-8w-TOV 
 
 3- 
 
 Tlr64i-TOV 
 
 l-O-Tlj-TOV 
 
 Sl-Sw-TOV 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 Tl-9u-|UV 
 Tl-9^-T€ 
 
 l-0-T«5-|«V 
 
 Uo-Tfi-Te 
 
 8i-8u-|iEv 
 
 Sl-8u-TC 
 
 3- 
 
 Tl-Offl-O-l 
 
 l-0-TU-O-l 
 
 Present Optative 
 
 8i-8w-(ri 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Ti-9e{T|-v 
 
 Tl-9£Cl)-S 
 
 Ti-9cCn 
 
 i-o-raCrj-v 
 i-o-TaCrj-s 
 i-o-rah] 
 
 8i-8oCi]-v 
 Si-8oCt|-s 
 8i-8o(t] 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 TI-961-TOV 
 
 t-O-TOt-TOV 
 
 81-801-Tov 
 
 3- 
 
 Tl-BdrTVjV 
 
 IHTTat-TT^V 
 
 81-80 C-TT)V 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 Ti-9et-|wv 
 
 Tl-9et-T£ 
 
 i-<rToi-|iev 
 
 l-O-TOt-Tt 
 
 8i-8ot-|uv 
 
 8l-8ot-TE 
 
 3- 
 
 Ti-9stc-v 
 
 l-o-Tatt-v 
 
 8i-8otc-v 
 
 
 or>- 
 
 ori 
 
 ori 
 
 ^ In the dual and plural the forms without rj are commonly found. 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 317 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 [Ti-8e£t|-Tov] 
 [Ti-6ei'<i-Ti)v] 
 
 [l-<rTaCr|-Tov] 
 [t-(rTOiyj-Tt|v] 
 
 [8i-SoCi)-Tov] 
 [8i.-8oi^-Tiiv] 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 [Ti-6etn-(j.ev] 
 
 \Ti-itlr\-Tt] 
 
 [Ti-9etii-o-ov] 
 
 [t-irTa£T|-().ev] 
 
 [t-<rTa£ri-Te] 
 
 [i-<rTa£r|-<rov] 
 
 Present Imperative 
 
 [8t-8o£Tj-|j,£v] 
 
 [81-80 £n-T£] 
 
 [Si-8a£i)-<rav] 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 3- 
 
 Tl-eei (§ 559) 
 ri-6i-Ta> 
 
 «-"»!(§ SSI) 
 
 i-0"TA-TW 
 
 8£-8o« (§ 570) 
 8i,-S6-Tii> 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 tI-96-tov 
 
 t-O-TlSrTOV 
 
 8£-8o^ov 
 
 3- 
 
 Tl-6^-TCllV 
 
 l-<rT(irTCllV 
 
 Si-S6-T(i)v 
 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 TC-St-re 
 
 t-O-TOr^e 
 
 S£-8a-re 
 
 3- 
 
 TI-64-VTUV 
 
 t-crrd-VToiv 
 
 Present Infinitive 
 
 Si-S6-vT<i>v 
 
 
 Tl-0^VOl 
 
 t-a-T(irvai 
 
 Present Participle 
 
 Si-S6-vai 
 
 
 Ti-ee£s, -ttero, -e'v t-o-T^s, -a<ra, -Av 
 
 Si-8oii5, -oiio-tt, -6v 
 
 
 (§620) 
 
 (§617) 
 
 Middle and Passive 
 Present Indicative 
 
 (§621) 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 t£-6c-|Wi 
 rt-ee-o-ai 
 
 i-o-Ta-piai 
 It-o-TO-iroi 
 
 SC-8o-|iai, 
 8£-So-irai 
 
 3- 
 
 rC-Oe-Toi 
 
 lI-<rTa-Tai 
 
 8£-8o^ai 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 TCet-o-eov 
 
 t-O-TOrO-SoV 
 
 S£-8o-ireov 
 
 3- 
 
 TC-e6-<r0ov 
 
 Wra-o-Bov 
 
 8£-8o-a-6ov 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 
 Ti-e^-lieea 
 TCee-o-Be 
 
 i-<rTd^(i.€9a 
 S-o-TO-o-Se 
 
 Si-86-|uea 
 8£-8o-<ree 
 
 3- 
 
 TJ-6«-VTai 
 
 V-O-TO-VTOl 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 8£-8o-vTot 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 4-Tl-6^|illV 
 
 4-T£-ee-?ro 
 e-Tt-6e-To 
 
 t-(rT<5^|jn|v 
 lS-<rTa-o-o 
 
 U-O-TO-TO 
 
 4-8ir8d-|xijv 
 
 t8£-8o-<ro 
 
 l-S£-8o-To 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 i^tr6e-a-9ov 
 
 iJ-cra-crBov 
 
 l-8£-So-(reov 
 
 3- 
 
 i-Ti-e^-o-env 
 
 t-<rT(i-<r9i)v 
 
 t8i-86-<reiiv 
 
3i8 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 l-Ti-ee'-(ie6o 
 
 e-Tt-e«-<re« 
 
 i-rt-fle-vTO 
 
 i-a-Td-|j,c9a 
 i-a-TOrirSf 
 
 ta-TOrVTO 
 
 l-8i-86-|ie9a 
 
 4-8C-8o-<rB€ 
 
 4-8t-8o-vTo 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Ti-6u-)i,ai 
 
 Tl-9fj 
 Tl-6fi-TOl 
 
 Present Subjunctive 
 i-o-TU-|iai 
 
 t-o-Ti)-Tai 
 
 8i-Su-|iai 
 
 8i-S^ 
 
 8i-8co-Tai 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 Ti-8fi-<r6ov 
 ti-Btj-o-Sov 
 
 t-(rTTi-<r9ov 
 
 t-o-TTJ-O-eoV 
 
 8i-8u-(r9ov 
 8i-8u-o-Bov 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Ti-6(i-|i.eSa 
 Ti-eii-o-9€ 
 
 Tl-9w-VTOl 
 
 i-a-T(i-|i€9a 
 
 t-<rTf|-o-9e 
 
 t-<rT»-VTav 
 
 Si-8<&-(iE9a 
 
 8i-8io-o'9€ 
 
 8i-8ffl-vToi 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 TI-6eC-|JIT)V 
 
 Ti-6et-o 
 
 Tl-9tl-T0 
 
 Present Optative 
 i-<rTaC-|M]v 
 
 l-OTOt-O 
 
 t-o-TaC-To 
 
 8i-SaC-|i.'r|v 
 
 8i-8oto 
 
 8i-8o^ro 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 Ti-8et-<r9ov 
 
 Tl-96C-0-9l1V 
 
 i-o-ToI-<r8ov 
 t-o-Tot<r9nv 
 
 8i-8ot-<r9ov 
 8i-8oC-o-9i)v 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 Ti-9«£-|j.«9o 
 Ti-9ei-(r9e 
 
 i-(rTaC-|u9a 
 i-o-Tat-o-Be 
 
 8i-SoC-|u9a 
 8i-8oi-a-9€ 
 
 3- 
 
 Tl-9€t-VT0 
 
 or' 
 
 l-O-TOt-VTO 
 
 81-801-VTo 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Tl-9ot-|l.11V 
 
 TI.-9ot-0 
 
 Tl-9ot-TO 
 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 Ti-8oi-(r9ov 
 Ti-9oC-(r9ifv 
 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 Ti-9o(-|jiE9a 
 Tl-9o^o■9e 
 
 
 
 3- 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 3- 
 
 Tt-BoI-VTO 
 
 TC-9e-o-o 
 Ti-9i-<r9a 
 
 Present Imperative 
 t-o-ra-o-o 
 
 1-0-TA-0-9M 
 
 S(-8a-<ro 
 8i-86-<rBw 
 
 1 Cp. iroiotiinv (§ 643). 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 319 
 
 Dual 2 
 3 
 
 Tt-Bt-o-eov 
 Ti-6^cre<i)v 
 
 V-O-TOrO-flov 
 
 t-o-nJUo-Buv 
 
 SC-So-o-Bov 
 8i-86-irBuv 
 
 Plur. 2 
 3 
 
 Tt-et-o-Be 
 Ti-e^-o-Bwv 
 
 t-o-TO-o-B* 
 i-o-rd-o-Buv 
 
 8(-So-<rB( 
 Si-Sii-o-Buv 
 
 
 Tt-Oe-o-Boi 
 
 Present Infinitive 
 t-o-Ta-o-Boi 
 
 8t-8o-<rBw 
 
 
 Tlr9f-|t€V0S 
 
 Present Participle 
 i-a-rd-fuvos 
 
 8i-S<-|i.cvo« 
 
 
 
 
 Second Aorist 
 
 
 
 Sing. I 
 
 Active 
 tSBipnt) 
 
 Middle 
 
 i-BI|ir)v 
 
 eOou 
 
 ^BC-TO 
 
 Indicative 
 Active Middle 
 
 e-o-TTi-s lirpCtti 
 
 Active 
 (S8aiKa) 
 (SSuKas) 
 (cSuKc) 
 
 Middle 
 4-86-|iT|v 
 
 8-80-To 
 
 Dual 2 
 3 
 
 e-Be-Tov 
 4-6^-Tr|v 
 
 e-6«-<rBov 
 l-B^-irfli,v 
 
 e-<rTr|-Tov ^-irpCcMrBov 
 4-<rT^-TT]v 4-irpi(l-o-6T|v 
 
 *-80-T0V 
 
 4-86-Tnv 
 
 e8o-<reov 
 4-86-<rBnv 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 eBc-o-av 
 
 l-B^|icBa 
 
 ^Be-o-flc 
 
 6-ee-vTO 
 
 ^TT|-(i€v 4-irpid-|ic6a 
 «-crTT|-T6 l-irp(a-ir6< 
 ^o-Tn-o-av 4-irp(a-vTo 
 
 e-80-piEv 
 
 ^8o-« 
 
 eSo-o-av 
 
 4-8(i-|uBa 
 
 ^80-0-66 
 
 ^80-vTO 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Bii-s 
 
 6ra-|iai 
 
 eii 
 
 flrj-Tai 
 
 Subjunctive 
 o-TcS irpl(i>-|iai 
 o-T^-S irptT] 
 o-T'n irpCi)-Tai 
 
 8u 
 8$-s 
 
 8a 
 
 8u-|iai 
 
 8$ 
 
 8u-Tai. 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 Bfj-TOV 
 flfj-TOV 
 
 Btj-o-Bov 
 flfj-o-Bov 
 
 o-Tii-TOv irp(i)-(r6ov 
 o-Tij-Tdv irpCi)-a-6ov 
 
 Su-TOV 
 
 8m-tov 
 
 8u-o-Bov 
 Su-o-Bov 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 6u-|uv 
 
 fl<i-T« 
 
 e«-<ri 
 
 6(i-|icBa 
 Bu-vrai 
 
 o-Tfi-Te irp(T]-ir6c 
 o-Tu-o-i irpC<D-VTai 
 
 Su-|UV 
 8w-T€ 
 
 8(i-(i«6a 
 
 8M-<r9e 
 
 8M-vTai 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Betrj-v 
 B€£r,-s 
 Bc(i) 
 
 fl«t-|J[.TlV 
 
 8e^o 
 ec£-TO» 
 
 Optative 
 <rTo£r|-v irpiaC-|i,i]v 
 o-raCii-s irp(ai-o 
 orratt] irpCai-TO 
 
 8o£t]-v 
 8o£t|s 
 8o£r] 
 
 8o(-)i,i)v 
 801-0 
 
 So^TO 
 
 
 1 rf»«</. 
 
 2 
 
 bought, § 550. » 
 
 Or BoiTO. 
 
 
320 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Dual 2 
 
 3 
 
 Plur. I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 6£t-T0V 
 6ct-TI)V 
 
 8ei-|jiev 
 
 6€i-T€ 
 
 6ete-v 
 or 
 
 6«I-<r9ov 
 6el-<r9r\v 
 
 6ei-vTo 
 
 Dual 2. [6eti)-Tov] 
 
 3. [Oei^-TTiv] 
 
 Plur. I. [9e£T|-|Kv] 9o£|ie9a 
 
 2. [OtCn-Tt] eoto-Be 
 
 3. [9t£T|-<rov] 9oivTV 
 
 Sing. 2 
 3 
 
 Dual 2 
 3 
 
 Plur. 2 
 3 
 
 9^-s 
 9^(1) 
 
 96-TOV 
 
 ii-rav 
 
 60V 
 9^0-9(1) 
 
 9e-<rBov 
 9^(r9<Dv 
 
 9€-Te 9^0-96 
 
 9i-VTav 9^9<Dv 
 
 9ct-vai 
 
 9c[s, 
 9ctcra, 
 6iv^ 
 
 Be-|1,€V0S, 
 
 -r|,-ov 
 
 irpCai-o-9ov 
 irpioC-o-9i)v 
 
 irpiaC-|i,E9a 
 
 irp(ai-o'9E 
 
 irpCai-vTO 
 
 CTTttt-TOV 
 
 (TTat-Triv 
 
 <rTOt-|l,€V 
 
 (TTai-re 
 o-Tai€-v 
 
 or 
 
 [o-TaCri-TOv] 
 ro-Tai.<)-Ti)v] 
 
 [o-ToCri-nev] 
 
 [o-Ta£r]-Te] 
 
 [orTaC7)-<rav] 
 
 Itnperative 
 <rTfi-9i irpCu 
 (TT^-To) irpid-o*9cd 
 
 (rTT]-TOV 
 (TT^-TWV 
 
 ■irpCa-(r9ov 
 ■Trpi.4-<r9<i)v 
 
 0"TT]-T€ 'irpCarO"9€ 
 
 o-Ttt-VTcov 7pid-a'9(i>v 
 
 Infinitive 
 (TTfi-vai irpCa-ir9ai. 
 
 Participle 
 
 CTT^S, irpiil-p,£vos, 
 
 o-Tacra, -r\, -ov 
 
 (TTOV^ 
 
 8ot-TOV 
 8otTI)V 
 
 8ot-|Uv 
 
 8ot-T£ 
 8ot£-V 
 
 or 
 
 [8oCt]-TOv] 
 [Soi^-Tr|v] 
 
 [8ott)-|iev] 
 
 [8oCn-T€3 
 
 [8oCi]-(rov] 
 
 Sot-(r9ov 
 8o(-o-9i)v 
 
 8aC-)i.e9a 
 Soi-(r9E 
 
 SokVTO 
 
 86-s 
 S4-T<i> 
 
 86-Tov 
 8<i-T(i)v 
 
 Sov 
 Si-<r9<i) 
 
 86-<rBov 
 84-<r9(i)v 
 
 86-TE 8d-o-9E 
 
 86-vT<i)v 86-<r9<DV 
 
 8av-vai 86-(r9ai 
 
 80VS, 86-|Uvos, 
 8ov(ra, -1), -ov 
 86v8 
 
 SECOND PERFECT OF MI-VERBS 
 
 647. A few verbs of the )u.t-class have a second perfect 
 and pluperfect. Only the dual and plural occur ; for the 
 singular, the first perfect and pluperfect are used. The 
 second perfect and pluperfect of XarTjfu are inflected as 
 follows : 
 
 1 Cp. § 620. 
 
 ^Cp. §617. 
 
 3 Cp. § 621. 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 3ii 
 
 IMV. (poetic) 
 
 Second Perfect 
 INDIC. SUBjv. Opt. (poetic) 
 
 Sing. I . (!l«rTT|Ka) stand 4-o-tS i-(rTa(T|-v 
 
 {-o-Tfl-s 4-(rTo£ij-s if-o-TO-ei 
 
 ^irrfi 4-o-Ta(T| c-o-Td-riD 
 
 l-CTfl-TOV t-O-TOCll-TOV Or -OITOV ?-<rT(l-TOV 
 
 l-irT<i-Tov l-<rTai^-TT|v or -o(ti|v i-cTA-rav 
 
 e-o-T«-(«v e<rTalT)-|uv or -ai|tcv 
 
 «-(rT<i-Te l-<rToCT|-Te or -aire VtrrorTt 
 
 «-<rTfi-<ri e-<rTatr]-(rov or -oUv t<rTd-VT<i)v 
 
 Participle 4-o-t<S-s, c-o-two-o, {-o-tos (§ 624) 
 
 Second Pluperfect 
 Sing. I. (iXat^Kt^ s^d Dual 2. J-o-tottov Plur. I. H-o-ro-ntv 
 
 2. (tlo-T^JKHs) 3. 4-<rT<i-Ti)v 2. 2-o-Ta-T« 
 
 3. (cto-r^Kci) 3. ^o-TO-o-av 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 (il<rTi]KOs) 
 (ilo-niK«) 
 
 it-O-Ta-TOV 
 
 ^ra-TOv 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 
 /3- 
 
 ?-<rTa-(<,ev 
 
 (S-o-TO-re 
 
 4-o-Tao-i 
 
 Infinitive l-o-rd-voi 
 
 648. 
 
 BeiKvifi 
 
 -vUfti class. — Inflection of the present 
 I show and of second aorist ehvv entered. 
 
 Indicative 
 
 system 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Active 
 
 Present Imperfect 
 SeCk-vv-iii i-8eiK-vv-v 
 SetK-vii-s 6-8e£K-vv-s 
 8e(K-vv o-i €-8«£K-vi) 
 
 Middle and Passive 
 Present Imperfect 
 
 8E£K-V1l-|l,ai l-SciK-V<>-|11)V 
 
 SefK-w-o-oi l-SefK-w-o-a 
 SeCK-vu-rai «-8e£K-w-To 
 
 Active 
 2 Aorist 
 S-8v-v 
 ^8v-s 
 ^8v 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 8«tK-VU-T0V 4-8e£K-Vll-TOV 
 8«£k-VD-T0V 4-86lK-VU-TT|V 
 
 86£K-vu-<r6ov £-8ECK-vu-ir6ov 
 8«£K-v«-<r9ov 4-8ci.K-vv-a-6T|v 
 
 «-8u-T0V 
 
 4-8«-Tnv 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Se£K-w-|uv e86£K-vi)-(i«v 
 Se£K-vii-Tc l-8e£K-w-T6 
 SciK-vv-ao-i 6-8e£K-vv-(rav 
 
 8ciK-vii-|jiE6a l-8ciK-v{l-|ieea 
 SefK-vu-o-Se 4-Se£K-vv-<r9e 
 8€£K-v«-vTai l-8e£K-w-vT0 
 
 ^8v-|uv 
 
 J-SlHTS 
 
 c-8v-orav 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 SciKVVdl 8£iKviiu|iai 
 8€iKvv'gs StiKvii] 
 SeiKviix] 8ciKv<lt|TOi. 
 
 sons 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 SeIKVVT)TOV 
 
 haKviiyrov 
 
 SciKvuT|<r6ov 
 8EiKvvi)(r6ov 
 
 BiriTov 
 SinTov 
 
 beginner's GR. BK. — 21 
 
322 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 . . 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 S(IKVVW|1CV 
 8ElKviT|TC 
 
 8ciKvv(i)(n 
 
 8EiKvu(i|i.c6a 
 8eiKvvi)a-6c 
 
 8EI.KVV(l)VTai 
 
 8V(I>|1EV 
 SOUTE 
 
 Sdoxri 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 8EiKviioi.|i,i 
 
 ZiiKviois 
 
 Seikvvoi 
 
 Optative 
 
 SciKW0([l,1)V 
 
 8eikvvoio 
 
 8ElKv{ioiTO 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 8«IKVV0I.T0V 
 
 8ei.kwoCtt)v 
 
 8EI.KVVOI.|i6V 
 SciKVVOlTE 
 
 8eikvvoiev 
 
 SEiKvvioi(r8ov 
 8eikwo(o-6i)v 
 
 8ElKVU0(|l,ESa 
 
 SEiKvvai<r6E 
 
 SElKviotVTO 
 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 3- 
 
 8«Ck-vS (§ 579) 
 
 8€LK-VV-TCl> 
 
 Imperative 
 
 8ECK-VU-0-0 
 
 Seik-vv-o-Oci) 
 
 80-61 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 SeCk-w-tov 
 
 8€IK-V1P-T<I)V 
 
 8EtK-w-(r9ov 
 8£i.K-vtl-<r9cov 
 
 8u-T0V 
 8S)-TCI)V 
 
 Plur. 2. 
 3- 
 
 8c£K-vu^e 
 
 8EIK-Vi-VT<I>V 
 
 86CK-vv-<r8« 
 Smk-vv-ctBcdv 
 
 8V-TE 
 Si-VTUV 
 
 
 SeiK-vi-vai 
 
 Infinitive 
 8EiK-vu-<r6ai 
 
 8{i-vai 
 
 
 8fiK-v^$, -0<ra, -iv 
 
 Participle 
 
 8EIK-Vii-|I.EV0S, -ij, -ov 
 
 8i)s, 8v<ra, Biv 
 
 (§619) 
 
 (cp. § 619) 
 
 649. fi;/iit (e-, ^-) j^«^ is inflected nearly like riSt]yi,t, 
 (§ 646). The inflection of the present and second aorist 
 systems is as follows : 
 
 AcTrvE 
 Indicative 
 
 Middle 
 
 (PASsrvE) Middle 
 Indicative 
 
 Pres. Impf. 2AOR. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 2 Aor. 
 
 Sing. I. (Ii)|ii ftiv (^Ko.) 
 
 2. tus, t€ts iifits (tikos) 
 
 3. fijo'i. itx (llKt) 
 
 tEiiai 
 {Ecrai 
 fcroi 
 
 U|1T)V e!)1,1)V 
 
 Wo — eIcto 
 
 liETO eItO 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 323 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 fsTOV HcTOV 
 
 ilerov Uti\v 
 
 — elTov 
 
 «tTT|V 
 
 weov 
 tco-eov 
 
 W60V 
 
 — cto-Sov 
 
 — cIo-Stiv 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 
 ct|UV 
 
 — €tT€ 
 
 — cto-av 
 
 tcvrai 
 
 wee 
 
 tevTO 
 
 — ctiMBa 
 
 — elo-Ot 
 
 — ctvTo 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 tts 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 — cS tS|xai 
 -h tfl 
 
 — 'D tf|Tai 
 
 
 — ii|jiai, 
 
 -11 
 
 — rJTOt 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 t^lTOV 
 tflTOV 
 
 — tJtov 
 
 ifTOV 
 
 ifjo-eov 
 i{)(r6ov 
 
 
 — T10-90V 
 
 — ifo-Sov 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 t<a|uv 
 
 tf|T€ 
 
 — &-1 
 
 i<S|j.E6a 
 
 ifjo-eE 
 
 iuvrai 
 
 
 — TJo-e. 
 
 — uvrai. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 ieCriv 
 
 Optative 
 
 — &r^ teto 
 
 — etr) teiTO 
 
 
 — cliiriv 
 
 — do 
 
 — ttro ( — oIto) 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 telTOv or 
 
 Utryrov 
 
 .t«CTr|v or 
 
 — elrov or 
 
 ctl)TOV 
 
 — &Ti^ or 
 
 teio-Oov 
 ttCo-eTiv 
 
 
 — cto-6ov 
 
 — eHo-Stlv 
 
 Plur. I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 ieijjLEv or 
 iE(r]|Mv 
 
 tetre or 
 te£t|T6 
 
 Uttv or 
 ieCTiirav 
 
 — 6t|ji€v or 
 
 €ttl|«V 
 
 — tire or 
 
 — tttv or 
 
 ettjo-av 
 
 ieCiMea 
 
 trivTO 
 
 
 — ct|iE6a 
 
 ( — ot|i.E8a) 
 
 — clo-ec 
 
 (— oio-eo 
 
 CIVTO 
 
 ( OIVTO) 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 3- 
 
 
 Imperative 
 — ti Wo 
 
 
 — o5 
 
 — Mm 
 
 Dual 2. 
 3- 
 
 tcTOV 
 
 ilrav 
 
 — 2tov 
 
 — Ktwv 
 
 fco-Bov 
 
 
 — «aeov 
 
 — ?o-9<i)v 
 
 Plur. 2. 
 3- 
 
 WvT»V 
 
 — %n 
 
 JIVTUV 
 
 
 
 — Jo-Be 
 
 — i(r0a>v 
 
324 
 
 Uvcu 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Infinitive 
 — ctvai £c(r6ai 
 
 -ilo-eai 
 
 Participle 
 tfts, teto-o, — eCs, — elo-o, W|i€vos — (fjievos 
 
 Wv (cp. § 620) — Hv (cp. § 620) 
 
 Future : — i)o-<i) in prose only in composition ; — Ti<ro|*«"" 
 
 First Aorist : riKa in prose usually in composition, — TiKd|niv ; both only 
 
 in the indicative. 
 Perfect Active : — cIku only in composition. 
 Perfect Middle (Passive) : — £t|»oi., — «Viiv (pluperfect) ; — etoreo, 
 
 — clcrSat, — ttn^vos only in composition. 
 Aorist Passive : — tlHtfi, — lOw, — tefjvai, — iiii.% ; only in composition. 
 Future Passive : — eO^o-onai only in composition. 
 Verbal Adjectives : — Iris, — «t^os ; only in composition. 
 
 650. diLi{ea- ; cp. Lat. esse) I am is inflected as follows: 
 
 Present 
 iNDic. SuBjv. Opt. 
 
 U €(l)V 
 
 ■qTov tlriTOv or etrov 
 ^Tov «l^TT]v or elT^v 
 
 u|i£v cttjiuv or et|iEv 
 tire elrjTe or etre 
 ucri Ai\<ra,v or eIcv 
 
 Partic. . oJv, oio-tt, ov, gen. Svtos, oSo-iis, Svtos, etc. 
 
 Future (with middle forms) 
 £<ro|j,ai, 'corn (or ^o'ci), co-rai, eo-EtrSov, ^(rco-6av, E(r6|j.€6a, Iceo-Oe, OTOvrai, 
 opt. e(roC|iT|v, inf. kVto'Sai, partic. lo-ofuvos, -rj, -ov 
 
 a. In the imperative 3 pi. ovtwv and earma-av also occur. 
 
 d. All the forms of the present indicative except el are 
 enclitic. 
 
 c. In composition wv retains its accent, as iraomv, 
 Trapovcra, ■7rap6vTo<i, etc. ; and so earai, as -Trapea-rai. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 Dual 2. 
 
 3' 
 Plur. I. ka-fiiv 
 
 2. eo-TC 
 
 3. da-l 
 
 Inf : etvai. 
 
 eI|xC 
 
 it 
 
 Io-tC 
 
 ktn6v 
 
 tO-TOV 
 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 IMV. 
 
 INDIC. 
 
 ia-Bi 
 
 TJorfiv 
 TJo-Oa 
 
 eo-Tw 
 
 f^v 
 
 eo-TOv 
 
 TJOTOV 
 
 €<rT<«V 
 
 i]0-TT|V 
 
 
 •fiiiev 
 
 "srn 
 
 ■HTc or TJo-TE (rare) 
 
 la-Tiav 
 
 TJO-OV 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 325 
 
 651- etjii (t-, ei-; cp. Lat. i-re) go has only the present 
 system. 
 
 
 
 
 Present 
 
 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 
 INDIC. 
 
 SUBJV. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 
 IMV. 
 
 INDIC. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 Et|U 
 
 to) 
 
 toifjii or 
 
 IoCt|v 
 
 
 ^0. or xi«iv 
 
 2. 
 
 A 
 
 tTIs 
 
 tois 
 
 
 Ml 
 
 Xl'cio-Ba or fjeis 
 
 3- 
 
 «t<ri 
 
 «T1 
 
 {01 
 
 
 (to> 
 
 tl'stv or tjei 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 trov 
 
 It|tov 
 
 toiTOV 
 
 
 Itov 
 
 BTOV 
 
 3- 
 
 Itov 
 
 trjTov 
 
 IoCttiv 
 
 
 Itwv 
 
 ■tlTtlV 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 Ifiev 
 
 tuiicv 
 
 (Ol|l£V 
 
 
 
 nn«v 
 
 2. 
 
 Ui 
 
 (UTt 
 
 tOlTC 
 
 
 tre 
 
 r 
 
 3- 
 
 lao-i 
 
 (uo-i 
 
 toicv 
 
 
 t6vTuv 
 
 ^o-av or 'gcorav 
 
 Inf. 
 
 : Uvai. 
 
 Partic. 
 
 : Uv, lofio-a, I6v, 
 
 gen. WvTOs, 
 
 loOa-T]s, UvTos, etc. 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : 
 
 Iris, Mos 
 
 , W<\ti 
 
 OS. 
 
 
 a. The imperative 3 pi. 'haxrav occurs rarely. 
 
 b. The participle mv is accented like a second aorist. 
 The accent of~the simple form of participle and infinitive is 
 kept in composition, as a-jrmv, ainovaa, atnevai. Other- 
 wise the compounds have recessive accent so far as the 
 rules allow : aireifu, aireiai, but airya, airyfiev. 
 
 652. <f>ri/jLi {<f)a-, <jir}-, cp. Lat. fa-rt) say, say yes, or assent 
 is inflected in the present as follows : 
 
 Present 
 
 INDIC. SuBjv. Opt. 
 
 Sing. I. (t>'ni''' <!>'' i|>aCi)v 
 
 2. <|)tis <|>'ns i|>aCTis 
 
 3. (jlT|0-£ <|)fi <|iotTi 
 
 Dual 2. <j)aT6v <|>fiTov not found 
 
 3. (fiardv (j)<iTOV not found 
 
 Plur. I. <()a(i<v 
 
 2. <^aT^ 
 
 3. <|»ao-C 
 
 <)>&|MV (|>at|iEv or i|iaCT||Uv 
 
 <)>{)TC <|>aCT|T( 
 
 <|>uo'i (|>aicv or i)>aCi)0'av ^kvtav 
 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 IMV. 
 
 INDIC. 
 
 
 '4iv 
 
 <|>a6C or i|>d6i 
 
 '^()>i)o^a or E<|>t)s 
 
 <)>dTa> 
 
 «+n 
 
 ^(utov 
 
 c(|>aTov 
 
 ||)^T(DV 
 
 E<t>d'n|v 
 
 
 jj(|)a|icv 
 
 ^(un 
 
 £(|iaTC 
 
 <|>dvT(l)V 
 
 C(^ao-av 
 
326 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Inf. : <j>Avai. Partic. -. poet. <|)^s, <|)0(ro, <|>dv (Attic prose <|>d<rK<i>v). 
 Verbal Adjectives : ijiaris (poet.), ^ario^l 
 Future : ^■f\a'o, ^fiiriiv, <|)<i<r(i»v. 
 
 First Aorist : 'eij>i)<ra, <|>^(r<i>, 4>^<rai|u, , <)>{|<rai, ^ras. 
 
 Pf. Pass. Imv. : irEcjida-ea) lei it be said. 
 
 a. All the forms of the present indicative except ^j;? 
 are enclitic. 
 
 653. In place of ^/^at sit we find usually Kdd-t\fi,ai in 
 Attic prose and comedy. KaO-qiiai, sometimes is perfect 
 in meaning (/ have sat, I have been seated). The <y of the 
 verb stem does not appear except before -to. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 INDIC. 
 
 lKa6^)ii]v or Ka6^|jit)v 
 €Kii6i)o-o Ka6{|(ro 
 
 KaOfjo-TO ' 
 Ka8f)(r9ov 
 
 Ka6^|u6a 
 
 Ka6fj(r6e 
 
 KaSfivTO 
 
 Present 
 iNDic. SuBjv. Opt. Imv. 
 
 Sing. I. Kd9r)|i.ai Ka6u|iLai Ka6oC)»|v 
 
 2. Kd6i)(rai KaSfj Ka6oto KdOijiro 
 
 3. Kd6i)Tai, KaSfJTai Ka6otTO Ka6^cr6ci> lKd6i]T0 
 
 Dual 2. Kd6i)(r8ov Ka9i)(r6ov KaSoto-Bov Kd6i](r6ov cKdOrjcrOov 
 
 3. Kd6i)(r6av Ka6{)<r6ov Ka9oCo-6i]v KaS'/jo-Ocov lKa6^(r6T]v 
 
 Plur. I. KuBViiJiESa Ka8ti|jiE6a Ka6o(|j.c8a lKa6<i|u6a 
 
 2. Kd6T)(r8c Ka8ii<r8e KaSoto-Sc Kd6i)(r6€ lKd6i)(r8c 
 
 3. Kd6i)VTai KaBuvrai KaSoCvro KaS^o-Owv 4Kd6T|VTO 
 
 Inf. : Ka6f|(r8ai. Partic. -. KaS'/jixcvos. 
 
 a. In the imperfect eKad-qfi-qv is used about as often as 
 Ka6r)iir)V. 
 
 654. KeifiM (/cet-) lie, am laid, regularly used in the 
 present and imperfect instead of the perfect and pluperfect 
 passive of ridritu flace. 
 
 Present Imperfect 
 
 iNDic. SuBjv. Opt. Imv. Indic. 
 
 Sing. I. Kitjiai lKc(|ir|v 
 
 2. Kctrai KeC<ro Skckto 
 
 3. Kcirai K^T|Tai. k^oIto KchrSra ^keito 
 
 ^ Or KaOfjTo. 
 
SUMMARY OF FORMS 
 
 327 
 
 IMV. 
 
 INDIC. 
 
 Ktto-Bov 
 
 SkcutSov 
 
 KtUrtav 
 
 ltuUr8r\v 
 
 
 iKcC|u6a 
 
 Kcto-Sc 
 
 SK«ire« 
 
 KcCo-Suv 
 
 iIkcivto 
 
 iNDic. SuBjv. Opt. 
 
 Dual 2. Kcio-eov 
 3. Kct(r6ov 
 
 Plur. I. KeC|ii(6a 
 
 2. Keio-8e (Sia) K{T|(r6e 
 
 3. KEivTai (Kara) K^uvrai (irpoir) k^oivto kcCitSuv 
 
 Inf. : K6i(r6ai. Fartic. -. KeC|i,6vos. 
 Future : K€(cro)i,ai., kcCo-x) or kcCo-ci, Kebrcrai, etc. 
 
 a. In the subjunctive and optative wet- becomes /ee before 
 a vowel. 
 
 d. Compounds have recessive accent only in present 
 . indicative and imperative : KaraKei/jidi, KaTaKetao, but 
 KaraKetadai. 
 
 655. oiSa (18, elS-e, olS- ; cp. Lat. video) know is a perfect 
 with the meaning of a present, and formed without redu- 
 plication. The second perfect and second pluperfect are 
 inflected as follows : 
 
 
 
 
 2 Perfect 
 
 
 2 Pluperfect 
 
 
 INDIC. 
 
 SUBJV. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 IMV. 
 
 INDIC. 
 
 Sing. I. 
 
 otSa 
 
 ctSu 
 
 elSe(i)v 
 
 
 
 t[8t, 
 
 or ■d'Seiv 
 
 2. 
 
 ot<r9a 
 
 6l8iis 
 
 CISC(7|S 
 
 
 to-ei 
 
 'gSr|(r8a 
 
 ^'Seis 
 
 3- 
 
 otSc 
 
 ttSii 
 
 clS(Ci) 
 
 
 to-TO) 
 
 Ti8"(v) 
 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 to-TOV 
 
 tlSriTOV 
 
 ctSetTov 
 
 
 
 ■no-Tov 
 
 
 3- 
 
 lo-TOV 
 
 clSfJTOV 
 
 cISeCtiiv 
 
 
 to-ruv 
 
 fjo-TTlV 
 
 
 Plur. I. 
 
 to-|JlEV 
 
 ctSco)l£V 
 
 eISeIiicv or c(S«(t|)iev 
 
 
 ^(TflEV 
 
 t|8E|lEV 
 
 2. 
 
 t(rT6 
 
 A%'\Ti 
 
 etSelre 
 
 cISeCtite 
 
 lorTE 
 
 ^O-TE 
 
 ^'8ete 
 
 3- 
 
 lo-ao-i 
 
 elSuo-i 
 
 ctSctcv 
 
 EtSE(T](rav 
 
 HsTTiav 
 
 no-ov 
 
 ^'SEo-av 
 
 Inf. 
 
 elS^vai 
 
 
 
 Partic. . 
 
 ElSiis, EtSvia, clSis. 
 
 
 Verbal Adjective : Io-t^os. Future : Et<ro|iai. 
 
 Compound : o-iivoiSa am conscious of. 
 
SUMMARY OF SYNTAX 
 
 USES OF THE CASES 
 
 656. Nominative : 
 
 1. Subject (§ 53. a). 
 
 2. Predicate nominative (§ 53. k~). 
 
 657. Vocative : 
 
 Person addressed (cp. § 64, brave captain). 
 
 658. Accusative : 
 
 1. Direct object (§ 53. b). 
 
 2. Cognate (§§ 181, 356). 
 
 3. Adverbial (§ 284). 
 
 4. Specification (§ 279). 
 
 5. Extent of time or space (§ 142). 
 
 6. Limit of motion, always with a preposition (cp. 
 
 § 53- e). 
 
 7. Two accusatives after verbs of making and ap- 
 
 pointing; asking and depriving {^^ 51O) S'l)- 
 
 8. Subject of infinitive (§ 53. g). 
 
 9. Absolute (§ 566). 
 
 659. Genitive : 
 ' I. "Of" relations, including 
 
 2. Subjective and Objective (§ 53./). 
 
 3. Possession (§§ 53. /, 72). 
 
 4. Measure (§ 278). 
 
 5. Material (cp. § 502. II. 16). 
 
 6. Value (§ 402). 
 
 7. Partitive (§ 179). 
 
 8. Time within which (§ 155). 
 
 9. After adverbs of place (§ 372). 
 328 
 
 4J 
 
 .>; 
 
 v» 
 'S 
 
 bo 
 
 3 
 u 
 
 H 
 
SUMMARY OF SYNTAX 329 
 
 10. Separation (§ 201). 
 
 11. Comparison (§ 355). 
 
 12. Absolute (§ 401). 
 
 13. With viro to express agent (§ 390). 
 
 14. In the predicate (§ 229). 
 
 660. Dative : 
 
 1. "To" OR "for" relations, including 
 
 2. Indirect object, etc. (§ 53. c). 
 
 3. Interest (advantage or disadvantage) (§ 53. d). 
 
 4. Possession (§ 119). 
 
 5. Agent with perfect passive (§ 458) and verbals 
 in -reo? (§ 478). 
 
 6. Locative : Time wAen (§ 180). 
 Place where {aiier prepositions, iv, etc.). 
 
 7. Instrumental, including 
 
 8. Means and Manner, etc. (§ 141). 
 
 9. Degree of difference (§ 410). 
 ID. Respect (§ 322). 
 
 11. Cause (§ 403). 
 
 12. Association (§ 317). 
 
 •I 
 
 <L> 
 
 13. Dative with adjectives (§ 1 1 1). 
 
 14. After verbs compounded with certain preposi- 
 
 tions (§ 136). 
 
 USES OF THE MOODS 
 
 For constructions that take the negative ju,^ instead of ov see fu} in the 
 general Vocabulary. 
 
 661. Indicative, — in addition to independent statements 
 and ordinary relative clauses, note es- 
 pecially : 
 
330 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 1. iirei and eireihrj when with imperfect or after 
 
 with aorist indicative (§ 167); ore when com- 
 monly with the imperfect, of past time. 
 
 2. €7ret and o-n causal since with various tenses of 
 
 indicative (§ 310). 
 
 3. 60)9, eare., and fJ-expi-, while, so long as, until, 
 
 with present or past indicative (§§ 522. i, 
 548. I. 2). 
 
 4. irpiv until, after a negative clause, with aorist 
 
 indicative (§ 523. i). 
 
 5. et if with various tenses of indicative in real 
 
 conditions (§ 106). 
 
 6. €t if with imperfect or aorist indicative in con- 
 
 trary to fact {unreal^ conditions — much 
 less frequent (§ 545). 
 
 7. et if with future indicative in warning future 
 
 conditions (§ 242). 
 
 8. axne so that with various tenses of indicative 
 
 to express result (§ 147). 
 
 [Cp. So-re with infinitive (§ 147).] 
 
 9. o7r«BS with future indicative after verbs signi- 
 
 fying to strive for, to care for, or to effect 
 (§ 535). 
 662. Subjunctive: 
 
 I. Introduced by lav (dv, ^V) in protasis of more 
 vivid future (§ 241) or present geiieral con- 
 dition (§§ 398, 399). 
 .2,.. Introduced by relative (09, oVtw) or; temporal 
 word {iirei, ore, e(B9, etc.) in protasis (§§248, 
 400, 522. 2, 523. 2). 
 
 Note. — av always accompanies the subjunctive iii 
 protasis. oTe + av = orav ; OTrore. -I- av = onorav ; iirti 
 + av = i-rrav or €in;v ; iwuSij + av = iireSdv. 
 
SUMMARY OF SYNTAX 331 
 
 3. Introduced by ha, o7r«B?, or w?, in order that, after 
 
 primary tenses and sometimes af tef secondary 
 tenses (§§ 243, 535. a). 
 
 4. Introduced by /x?y lest or fir) ov lest not after 
 
 verbs of fearing in primary tenses and some- 
 times in secondary tenses (§ 438). 
 
 5. Hortatory, in first person (§ 244). 
 
 6. Deliberative, in first person (§ 564). 
 
 7. Prohibitory, in second person of aorist tense 
 
 with firi (§ 309. 2). 
 
 663. Optative : 
 
 1. In future wishes (§ 584). 
 
 [Wishes that cannot be realized (in present 
 or past time) are expressed by the imperfect 
 or aorist indicative introduced by eWe or el yap 
 (§ 585); they may also be expressed by using 
 &(f>e\ov I ought, etc., with the infinitive (§ 586).] 
 
 2. In indirect discourse after a secondary tense of 
 
 the verb of saying, representing an indicative 
 or subjunctive of the same tense in the direct 
 discourse (§ 260). 
 
 [But the indicative or the mood of the 
 direct quotation may be retained (§ 260).] 
 
 3. In indirect questions (§§ 345, 565). 
 
 [But the indicative or the mood of the 
 direct question may be retained (§ 345).J 
 
 4. With av in the potential use (§ 266). av can 
 
 never stand first in its clause. 
 
 5. Introduced by et if in protasis of the less vivid 
 
 future condition (§ 267) or past general con- 
 dition {iterative optative), § 416. 
 
 6. Introduced by a relative (0?, oaTi'i) or temporal 
 
33* BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 word {ore, etc.) in protasis of a condition, 
 particularly of the past general {iterative 
 optative), § 417. 
 
 7. Introduced by "va, onrm'i, or w?, in order that, 
 
 after secondary tenses (§§ 268, 535. a). 
 
 8. Introduced by /.u? lest or /tt^ du lest not after 
 
 verbs oi fearing in secondary tenses (§ 438. a). 
 
 664. Imperative : 
 
 1. In commands. 
 
 2. In prohibitions : yur) and the present imperative 
 
 (§ 309- i)- 
 
 [The aorist subjunctive with it-r] is also used 
 
 (§ 309. 2).] 
 
 665. Infinitive : 
 
 1. In indirect discourse after e^r) he said, ivofiure 
 
 he thought, and similar verbs, when the infini- 
 tive represents an indicative or optative of 
 the same tense in the direct discourse (§§ 1 10, 
 156. i); if av was used with the optative (or 
 indicative) of direct discourse, it is retained 
 with the infinitive of indirect discourse (§§ 277, 
 546). 
 
 2. After verbs of promising, hoping, and swearing: 
 
 the future infinitive ; negative, if required, fir\ 
 
 (§ 519). 
 
 3. With SoKet he seems and Xeiyerai he is said in 
 
 the " personal " use (§§ 391, 512). 
 
 4. As subject of verbs meaning is, is possible, etc. ; 
 
 with Set it is necessary^ SoksI it seems best, etc. 
 (§§ 223, 512. «). 
 
 5. With hvd^Kt) it is necessary, &pd it is time, etc. 
 
 (§ 230). 
 
SUMMARY OF SYNTAX 333 
 
 6. With verbs like Bwa/iai be able, KeXevoa com- 
 
 mand, ^ovKofiai wish, ideXco wish (§ 98). 
 
 7. With the article to, tov, rp as a neuter sub- 
 
 stantive in various constructions; especially 
 common is Bi^ to with the infinitive: on 
 account of the fact that, etc. (§ 500). 
 
 8. With SffTe so as indicating a result (§ 147). 
 
 [Cp. wo-Te with the indicative (§ 147).] 
 
 9. With adjectives of ability SiXid fitness, like iKavo^i 
 
 able (§ 333). 
 
 10. With irpiv before after an affirmative clause 
 
 (§ 524). 
 
 [After a negative clause irpiv usually means 
 until and has the construction of other tem- 
 poral words (§ 523).] 
 
 11. Rarely expressing purpose (after verbs signify- 
 
 ing to give or to appoint\ 
 
 The negative with the infinitive is /*»; except 
 in indirect discourse, when oh is regularly used. 
 
 USES OF THE PARTICIPLE 
 
 666. I. As an attributive adjective (§ 3 11). 
 
 2. With or without the article to represent a rela- 
 
 tive clause : ol ^ovKofievoi those that desire 
 (§ 212). 
 
 3. To represent a temporal, causal, concessive, or 
 
 conditional clause (§ 213). 
 
 4. Common is 'ixi^v or \a^a>v with agreeing with 
 
 the subject (§ 213. b). 
 
 5. To indicate purpose : the future participle with 
 
 or without a)? is used (§§ 331, 332). 
 
 6. In the genitive absolute construction (§ 401). 
 
 7. In the accusative absolute construction (§ 566). 
 
334 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 8. With verbs of perception whether of the mind or 
 
 of the senses (§ 440): 6/>w see, aicoxKo hear, 
 etc, 0/3W avTov iovra I see him coming. 
 
 9. In the construction of indirect discourse (§§441, 
 
 449, 520). 
 
 [For such a participle a clause with ^ti may 
 be used (§ 442).] 
 
 10. With Tur^'x^dvco happen, Xavdavca escape notice, 
 
 and olxoii-ai, be gone (cp. §§ 215, 318, 443). 
 
 11. With verbs of beginning, ceasing, etc. (§ 439). 
 
 The negative with the participle is ov ; but 
 the conditional participle takes /ijj. 
 
 667. Purpose is commonly expressed 
 
 1 . By 'iva, o7ro)<;, or w?, in order that, with the sub j unc- 
 
 tive. After a secondary tense the optative is 
 commonly used (§§ 243, 268). Negative : \x.r). 
 
 2. By the future participle (§§ 331, 332). 
 
 668. FORMS OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 
 
 Simple or Real (§ 106) 
 
 Protasis Apodosis 
 
 Present, el with pres. indie. : any form of verb : 
 
 £t TavTa Xeyet, dXiy6^ Xeyet 
 
 if he says this, he speaks the truth. 
 
 Past, el with past tense of indie. : any form of verb : 
 
 if he said this, he spoke the truth. 
 
 Contrary to Fact or Unreal (§545) 
 Present, el with impf. indie. : impf . indie, with av : 
 
 £1 TavTa £\£y£v, OUK h.v aKyfir\ IXeyev 
 
 if he were (now) saying this, he would not be speaking 
 
 the truth. 
 
SUMMARY OF SYNTAX 335 
 
 Past, el with aor. indie. : aor. indie, with av : 
 
 d TavTa iXxiev, ovk y aX-qOrf iXc^iv 
 
 if he had said this (then), he would not have spoken 
 
 the truth. 
 
 General (§§ 399, 416) 
 
 Present, idv with subjv. : pres. indie. : 
 
 edv Ti \eyy (or Xeirj), dX.rj6^ Xtya 
 
 if [ever] he says anything, he speaks the truth. 
 
 Past, el with opt. : impf . indie. : 
 £1 TI, Xeyoi (or Ac^etev) , aXrfdrj eXeytv 
 
 if he [ever] said anything, he spoke the truth. 
 
 More Vivid Future (§241) 
 iav with subjv. : fut. indie, or equiv. : 
 
 lav Tavra Aeygs (or Ac^i;?), aX-qOrj X.e^eis 
 
 if you say {or shall say) this, you will speak the truth. 
 
 less Vivid Future (§ 267) 
 el with opt. : opt. with dv : 
 
 ti Tavra Xeyow (or Xe|eias), aXr]$^ av A.eyots (or Xeieia^) 
 
 if you should say this, you would speak the truth. 
 
 Warning Future (§ 242) 
 el with fut. indie. : fut. indie, or equiv. : 
 
 el Tavra Xe^tts, (ca/cos (jtavei 
 
 if you say this, you will appear base. 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 
 USES OF COMMON VERBS THAT TAKE THE CONSTRUCTION 
 OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 
 669. I. A FINITE MOOD With oTi Of (»? follows Xeyo) 
 (aetive) sajf, ehrov said, diroKptvo/iai reply, and 
 
336 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 often those verbs with which the participle in 
 indirect discourse is also regular. Such verbs 
 are mentioned below in 3. 
 
 2. An infinitive follows /<^i?/Lt/ say, X^erai (pas- 
 
 sive) is said, vofii^oa think, oiofiai think, inri- 
 a')(yeonai promise, aKovw hear, and other verbs 
 meaning to think or to agree. 
 
 3. A PARTICIPLE follows opdm see, alarddvonai per- 
 
 ceive, aKoito hear, olSa know, S^Xd? elyi,i be 
 ■evident, a^i^eWta, announce, and other verbs 
 of similar meaning. But see i above. 
 
 a. Observe that clkovw /?^(2r belongs in all 
 three of the preceding classes. 
 
 b. When elTre means he bade, he com- 
 manded, he proposed, an infinitive not in 
 indirect discourse follows, as after /ceXeuiu 
 command. The other verbs of saying may 
 be similarly used. 
 
 c. .With the infinitive e-iriaTafiat, means 
 know how (instead of know that), fiav6dv<o 
 learn how (instead of learn that). 
 
 USES OF THE ADVERB av 
 670. I. In protases, always with subjunctive : lav {el + 
 av), 89 av, iirethdv (iireiBij + dv), etc. 
 
 2. In apodoses, («) with the optative in less vivid 
 
 future conditions, (b) with the imperfect or 
 aorist indicative in contrary to fact conditions. 
 
 3. With the optative in the potential use (§ 266). 
 
 4. With the infinitive of indirect discourse when 
 
 the infinitive with dv represents an optative 
 with dv, § 277 (or past tense of the indicative 
 with dv, § 546), of the direct discourse. 
 
A FEW IMPORTANT LISTS 
 
 671. SOME VERBS WHOSE MEANING DISTINCTLY 
 CHANGES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE 
 
 Active 
 alpea take 
 eTmlOriiiiput upon 
 e^o) have, hold 
 
 Xvw release 
 
 iravoD stop (another) 
 
 ireiOm persuade (with ace.) 
 
 av/i^ovXevo) advise (with dat.) 
 
 <l>aiva> show 
 
 <j>o^ea) frighten 
 
 (f>v\dTTQ) guard 
 
 Middle 
 choose 
 
 attack (with dat.) 
 come next 
 cling /(? (with gen.) 
 ransom 
 cease (intr.) 
 obey (with dat.) 
 consult (with dat.) 
 appear 
 fear 
 guard against 
 
 672. SOME VERBS WHOSE PASSIVE IS EXPRESSED 
 BY A DIFFERENT VERB 
 
 alpia take 
 
 [but aipiofiai (mid.) choose 
 airoKTeCvm kill 
 vlKaoi conquer 
 reOrjKa have put or placed 
 eb (or KoX&i) Tiva iroiico do 
 somebody a kindness 
 
 aXlcTKOfiai, be taken 
 alpeonai (pass.) be chosen"] 
 dTToOvya-KO) be killed 
 rfTrdonai be conquered 
 KeliMM have been placed 
 eb inro nvov Trda'x^eo be done 
 a kindness by somebody 
 
 beginner's GR. BK. — 22 
 
 337 
 
338 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 673. SOME VERBS WHOSE AORISTS ARE PASSIVE IN 
 FORM, BUT NOT IN MEANING (DEPONENTS PASSIVE) 
 
 AORisT Passive 
 
 ^ovXofiat wisk e^ovkrjOrjv I wished 
 
 heofjLai ask, beg iBe'q0r}V I begged 
 
 hvvaiiai, be able iSwijdrjv I was able 
 
 eirifji.eXeotJLai take care hre\i€Kr]Qr)v I took care 
 
 oio/MM think (hr)6r]v I thought 
 
 TTopeuonai proceed iTropevOrjv I proceeded ^ 
 
 (j)o^eofiai fear icf>o^i^6r]v I feared 
 
 674. SOME VERBS WHOSE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE 
 
 APPEARS IRREGULAR IN AUGMENT 
 
 Present Imperfect 
 
 eao) permit eiav (i.e. e'iaov) 
 
 eTTOixat follow eivofiriv 
 
 e')(ai have e^X°^ 
 
 opdoi see eatprnv {i.e. kmpaov) 
 
 675. Distinguish among 
 
 alTtw ask a. favor of somebody, ask somebody for 
 something (with two accusatives). 
 
 a^ioo) ask as a right, demand (with infinitive). 
 
 Seofjiai want or ask a person (in the genitive) to do 
 
 something (infinitive). 
 
 , , [ ask a question, inquire ; may be fol- 
 
 epwrao) , ^ , , . / 
 
 , , \ lowed by accusative of person 
 2 aor. rjpoLiriv , . •,. . 
 
 { and indirect question. 
 
ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 A. or »cc 
 
 = accusative. 
 
 interr. 
 
 = interrogative. 
 
 abl. 
 
 = ablative. 
 
 intr. 
 
 = intransitive. 
 
 abs. 
 
 = absolute. 
 
 irreg. 
 
 = irregular. 
 
 act. 
 
 = active. 
 
 ktX. 
 
 = KoV rd \oiird = etc. 
 
 adj. 
 
 = adjective. 
 
 Lat. 
 
 = Latin. 
 
 adv. 
 
 = adverb. 
 
 lit. 
 
 = literal, literally. 
 
 aor. 
 
 = aorist. 
 
 masc. 
 
 = masculine. 
 
 art. 
 
 = article. 
 
 mid. 
 
 = middle. 
 
 comp. 
 
 = comparative. 
 
 N. or nom 
 
 . = nominative. 
 
 conj. 
 
 = conjunction. 
 
 neg. 
 
 = negative. 
 
 const. 
 
 = construction. 
 
 neut. 
 
 = neuter. 
 
 cp. 
 
 = compare. 
 
 obj. 
 
 = object. 
 
 D. or dat. 
 
 = dative. 
 
 opt. 
 
 = optative. 
 
 def. 
 
 = definite. 
 
 p., pp. 
 
 = page, pages. 
 
 dem. 
 
 = demonstrative. 
 
 part. gen. 
 
 = partitive genitive. 
 
 dep. 
 
 = deponent. 
 
 partic. 
 
 = participle. 
 
 dim. 
 
 = diminutive. 
 
 pass. 
 
 = passive. 
 
 dir. 
 
 = direct. 
 
 pers. 
 
 = person. 
 
 disc. 
 
 = discourse. 
 
 pf. 
 
 = perfect. 
 
 ^vT- 
 
 = for example. 
 
 pi. or plur. 
 
 = plural. 
 
 Eng. 
 
 = English. 
 
 plup. 
 
 = pluperfect. 
 
 equiv. 
 
 = equivalent. 
 
 poss. gen. 
 
 = possessive genitive. 
 
 etc. 
 
 = and so forth. 
 
 pred. 
 
 = predicate. 
 
 fem. 
 
 = feminine. 
 
 prep. 
 
 = preposition. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 = Figure. 
 
 pres. 
 
 = present. 
 
 fut. 
 
 = future. 
 
 priv. 
 
 = privative. 
 
 G. or gen 
 
 = genitive. 
 
 pron. 
 
 = pronoun. 
 
 i.e. 
 
 = that is. 
 
 rel. 
 
 = relative. 
 
 impers. 
 
 = impersonal. 
 
 sing. 
 
 = singular. 
 
 impf. 
 
 = imperfect. 
 
 subj. 
 
 = subject. 
 
 imv. 
 
 = imperative. 
 
 subjv. 
 
 = subjunctive. 
 
 indecl. 
 
 = indeclinable. 
 
 subst. 
 
 = substantive. - 
 
 indef. 
 
 = indefinite. 
 
 sup. 
 
 = superlative. 
 
 indie. 
 
 = indicative. 
 
 trans. 
 
 = transitive. 
 
 indir. 
 
 = indirect. 
 
 V. or voc. 
 
 = vocative. 
 
 inf. 
 
 = infinitive. 
 
 vocab. 
 
 = vocabulary. 
 
 interj. 
 
 = interjection. 
 
 § 
 
 = section. 
 
 340 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 For numerals not included in the following list see § 421. 
 
 abandon: diroXcCiru, ^kXcCitu, Kara- 
 Xfliria. 
 
 able : Swards, ^, 6v; lKav6s, 'i\, 6v; 
 olds re, ota re, otdv tc. 
 
 able, be : Stivapiai. 
 
 about : cl|i<f>( with ace. (round about, 
 near); irepC with gen. (concern- 
 ing) ; irtpC with dat. (near) ; irept 
 with ace. (around, in relation to). 
 
 about (with numerals) : us. 
 
 about, be : |j.IXX.(d. 
 
 above : virip with gen. 
 
 Abrocomas : ' APpaKd|ias, a, 6. 
 
 accept : S^xo|jiai. 
 
 accompany : o-v|i.iropeva|i.ai. 
 
 accomplish : irpaTTu, SiairpaTTO|jiai, 
 
 according to : Kara with ace. 
 
 accordingly: S{\, o5v. 
 
 accuse falsely : SiapdWu. 
 
 Achaean : 'Axaids, oO, 4. 
 
 across: ir^pav. 
 
 addition to, in : irpds with dat. 
 
 admirable : 6av|iairTds, '/), dv. 
 
 admire : 6av|xd^<ii. 
 
 advise : (rvfiPovXEio. 
 
 afoot : iTE^ds, '<], dv. 
 
 afraid, be : <)>oP^O|iai. 
 
 after {conj.) : 4ir«C, lireiSyj. 
 
 after {prep."): (itrd with ace. 
 
 again : vdXiv, en. 
 
 against: dvrt in composition; lirCwith 
 ace; Kord with ace; irpds with ace. 
 
 agree : (rvvT(0(|iai. 
 
 agreement : <rvvOT)|ia, aros, rd. 
 
 all: &\os, T), ov (entire); irds, irdo-o, 
 
 irdv. 
 all together : &irds, So-a, av; <rv|Mras, 
 
 dcra, av. 
 allow : cd(i>. 
 ally : (rv|i|iaxos, ov, 6. 
 alone : |idvos, i), ov. 
 along : Kard with ace. 
 already : 1)81). 
 also : KaC. 
 altogether: irdvu. 
 always: det. 
 ambassador: irpea-pcvr^js, oO, h; pi, 
 
 irpeo-pcts, CUV, 01. 
 ancient : dp\aios, a, ov. 
 and : KaC. 
 
 and in fact : 7dp ; Kal -^hif. 
 and not : ov8^, |it]8^. 
 announce : d77c\Xa). 
 annoyance : £\Xos, ov, 6. 
 another : dXXos, t), o. 
 another place, in : dXX^. 
 another, one: dXX^Xoiv. 
 answer: diroKptvofiai. 
 any, anybody, anything : tis, ti. 
 anywhere : iri], irov. 
 apart, apart from : X'^P's- 
 apart, be : SUx''- 
 appear: (f>a(vo|i.ai. 
 approach («»««) : c(|>oSos, ov, 'fj. 
 approach (verb) : eirei)i.i. 
 Ariaeus : 'Apiaios, ov, 6. 
 
 341 
 
342 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 arise (take place) : 7CYvo|iai. 
 Aristippus : ' AptoTiiriros, ov, 6. 
 arms (of war): 8irVa, av, to. 
 army: (rrpdreviJia, aros, rd; <rTpaTio, 
 
 as, T). 
 around (see 'about'): irepl with dat.; 
 
 irepC with ace. 
 arrange : farra. 
 arrangement : ti1|iS) «<ds, t|. 
 arrest : (rv\\a|i,pd.v(i). 
 arrive: d<|>iKvca|i,ai. 
 arrow : T6^EU|j.a, aroSi to. 
 Artapates : ' ApTairaTtis, ov, 6. 
 Artaxerxes : 'Apra^^p^s, ov, 6. 
 as, as if : us, wo-irep. 
 as (of comparison) : us, uo-irep. 
 as (with sup.): oti, us. 
 as many as, as much as : Scos, i], ov ; 
 
 oirderos, i), ov. 
 as often as : oirdTe. 
 as ( = such as) : olos, a, ov. 
 ask about : irvv6iivo|xai. 
 asli (a favor): aWia, S^ojxai. 
 v,ask (a question) : IpuTdu, 2 aor. T|p<S- 
 
 (IIJV. 
 
 ask (as a right) : a^i6a>. 
 
 ask for : atr^u. 
 
 ass : ovos, ov, 6. 
 
 assemble : dOpoC^u (trans.), o-vv^pxo- 
 
 p,ai. 
 assembly : eKKXtio-Ca, as, t|. 
 at : eirC with dat. 
 at any rate : (i^v, ovv. 
 Athenian : 'A6i]vaios, o, ov. 
 attack : liriTtflepoi, lirCKEip.ai. 
 attempt : ireLpdop.aL. 
 attend : irdpEtp,!,, 
 avoid : <|>ev'Yu. 
 away, be : dir^u. 
 away from : dird. 
 
 B 
 
 Babylon : Ba|JvX(&v, uvos, t|. 
 back: irdXiv. 
 
 bad : KUKds, ^, 6v. 
 
 badly: kukus. 
 
 barbarian (ae^'.) : ^ap^apiKos, ^j, 6v. 
 
 barbarian (noun): ^dp^apos, ov, o. 
 
 bare : i|<i\ds, ^, dv. 
 
 battle : \i.6.xi\, lys, r\. 
 
 be : 'yC'Yvopiai, elp,(. 
 
 beast, wild : 6i)pCov, ov, Td. 
 
 beast (of burden) : iirojil'yiov, ov, rd. 
 
 bear ; (|>Epu. 
 
 beautiful : xaXds, ''), dv. 
 
 beautifully: Ka\us. 
 
 because of: Sid with ace; vird with 
 
 gen. 
 become : 7f7vap.ai.. 
 before (adv.') : irpdo-flev, irpd(r6cv . . . 
 
 irpCv, TO irpdo-Btv, cp,irpoo-6cv. 
 before (conj.): irptv. 
 before {prep.): irpd. 
 beg: alTCu, 84op.ai.. 
 begin : ap^u, apxop.ai. 
 beginning : dpx'*], f|s, t|. 
 behold : 6Edo|j,ai, dpdu. 
 behooves, it : xpf\. 
 believe : Tj'ycop.ai. 
 beneath : vird with dat. 
 beside : irapd or irpds with dat. 
 besides : «Tt. 
 best (adj.) : apio'Tos, i\, ov ; PA- 
 
 TlO*TOS, 11, ov ; KpdTlCTTOS, T\, OV. 
 
 best (adv.) : apio'Ta, etc. 
 
 better (adj.) : djieCvuv, ov ; PtXTtuv, 
 
 ov ; kp^Cttuv, ov. 
 better (adv.): d|i,£ivov, etc.; (jidXXav. 
 between: neTa|v with gen. ; iv f.io'if. 
 bewilder: eKirXii)TTW. 
 beyond : vir^p with ace. 
 bid : KcXciu. 
 
 big: (i^vas, fie-ydXi), ^ya. 
 bird : £pvis, l6os, 6 and {|. 
 birth : y^vos, ovs, Td. 
 Boeotian : Bok&tios, a, ov. 
 born, be : 7C7V0|jiai. 
 both . . , and: tc . , . KaC; Ka( . . . 
 
 Ka[. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 343 
 
 bother : fix^os> "'"> °- 
 
 bow : t6^v, ov, rd. 
 
 bowman : to£6ti]s, ov, 6. 
 
 boy : irats, irai86s, 6. 
 
 brave : d.Ya6<is, if|, 6v. 
 
 bravery : oLpfrirj, f|s, f|. 
 
 breadth : evpos, ovs, t6. 
 
 break : X6w. 
 
 break through : SiaK6irra>. 
 
 breastplate : 6(Spa|, Skos, o. 
 
 bridge : 'Y^<|>vpa, as, t). 
 
 brilliancy : Xaiwrpdrris, titos, ^. 
 
 bring about : 8iairpaTT0|j,ai. 
 
 bring into harbor : Kar&,ya. 
 
 brother : dS«\(f>6s, oO, o. 
 
 burn : KaCo) or Kau. 
 
 business : irpa7p.a, aros, t6. 
 
 but: dWd, 86 (postpositive). 
 
 buy: d'yopdjo) (^iougAi also ivpi6,[a\v) , 
 
 by: 8id with ace. (by means of); 
 Kard with ace. (as in 'by land'); 
 ipird with gen. (of the agent); irapd 
 with dat. (by the side of). 
 
 by far : voXi. 
 
 by no means : ijKio-Ta. 
 
 call: KaX^cD. 
 
 call together : (tuykoWu. 
 camp (noun) : (rTpaTd'ir€8ov, ov, t6. 
 camp (verb): o-kt]v6<i); see ' encamp.' 
 canal : 8iwpD|, ux°s, tj. 
 captain : \0xB76s, ov, 6. 
 capture : atpcu, (pass.) d\(o-KO|xai. 
 Carduchi : KapSovxot, wv, 01. 
 care for, take care of : liri)i.E\^0|jiaL 
 carriage : &|Jia|a, i]s, t|. 
 carry: (|>^pii>. 
 
 catch (by hunting) : ir[ft.<io, 
 cattle : irpiParov, ov, t6. 
 cavalry : iirircis, 01. 
 cavalry, consisting of : liririiris, i\, 6v. 
 cease (intr.): iravoiiai. 
 cease (=make cease): ■KO.iia, dvo- 
 iravQ), 
 
 Celaenae : KeXaivat, &v, eX. 
 
 certain, a : tw, ti. 
 
 certainly : 76, p.'fjv. 
 
 Chalus : XdXos, ov, 6. 
 
 chance (verb): Tvyxdva. 
 
 chance upon : ^vtvyxovo'. iiriTVYx^va. 
 
 character : rpiiros, ov, 6. 
 
 chariot : &p|J.a, aros, rd. 
 
 chastise : KoXd^u. 
 
 cheat : l^airardu. 
 
 Cheirisophus : X€ip(o-o4)OS, ov, h. 
 
 child : irais, iraiSds, 6 and f| ; Wkvov, 
 
 ov, Td. 
 choose : atpio|j.ai.. 
 Cilicia : KiXikCS, as, t|. 
 Cilician woman : KCXio-o-a, t|s, t|. 
 circumstances : irpd-yiiaTa, mv, rd. 
 citadel : dKpdiroXis, eus, t|. 
 city : irdXis, €<os, T|. 
 claim (as one's right) : d|i.d(i>. 
 clear : Si]Xos, i], ov; <)>av€pds, a, dv. 
 Clearchus : KXeapxos, ov, 6. 
 closely set ( = closely planted) : irvKvds, 
 
 if], dv. t 
 
 collect : dBpoC^o), o'vXX^'yu, a-vv&.-fa. 
 column (military): Td|is, ews, t|. 
 come: i'pxo|iai, d<|>iKv^o)iai; have 
 
 come: 1\K(i>. 
 cornel a^ye (inierj.). 
 come down ( = reach down) : Kaii\K.o, 
 come forth : l|€pxo|JLai. 
 come in : Eta'^pxo|iai. 
 come on : 'ena^K. 
 come to : irapa^C'yvop.a^n'pao'^pxoiiai, 
 
 irpoo"^K(i>. 
 come together : o-vvlpxo|xai. 
 come up: irpoo-^pxofiai. 
 come upon : KaraXaix^dvci). 
 come upon by chance: tvTayyji.va, 
 
 command (=rule): apx<D> 
 command (= order): itnTi/rra, k€- 
 
 XcvcD, irapaYYcXXu (ttirov). 
 commander: &px«)v, ovtos, 6; v[ii(f,itv, 
 
 dvo$, d. 
 
344 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 common : KOivdS) 'f\, 6v. 
 
 compact, make a : <rDVT£6€(ioi. 
 
 company (of soldiers) : \<ixa$, ov, 6. 
 
 compel: dvaYKd^o. 
 
 concerning: wept with gen. ; d(iij>twith 
 
 gen. 
 contine : KaraKXcCu. 
 conquer: viKdu, (pass.) {(TTdofiai. 
 consider: o-K^irTO|iiai. 
 contend : d7(i>v(Jo|i,ai. 
 contest : ay&v, uvos, 6. 
 continually: dcC. 
 contrary to : irapd with ace. 
 converse : SiaXi^opiai. 
 corpse : vcKp6s, ov, 6. 
 country : X'^P^> *s, t|. 
 cow : Poiis, Po6s, t|. 
 cowardly : KaKds, ■(], 6v. 
 Cretan : Kp^s, KpT)T<is, i. 
 crisis : Kaipds, ov, 6. 
 cross : Sia^afvu. 
 crossed, able to be : Sia^ards, V), 6v; 
 
 necessary to be : Sia^aT^os, a, ov. 
 crowd : Sx^"*) '>'"> "> ""XfjOos, ovs, t6. 
 ' cubit : irtixvs, €ft)S, 6. 
 Oustom : v6|i05, ov, 6. 
 cut down : KwraKdirra. 
 cut off : diro\a|jipdv(i), dn'OKdirra). 
 cut through (in pieces) : SiaKtSTrro). 
 Cyrus : Kfipos, ov, 6, 
 
 danger : kCvSvvos, ov, 6. 
 
 danger, incur : klvSuvcvu. 
 
 daric : SapciKos, ov, 6. 
 
 Darius : Aapeios, ov, 6. 
 
 darkness: o-Kiros, ovs, r6, and o-k6- 
 
 Tos, ov, o. 
 daughter : Sv^driip, Ov^aTpds, t|. 
 day : T|p.^pa, as, 'f|. 
 day's journey : <rTa9p,ds, ov, i, 
 death, put to ; diroKTefvu. 
 deceive utterly: l^airardu. 
 decide : Kptvu. 
 declare: <|>'>)|i<C. 
 
 deed: Jpyov, ov,t6; irpayiia, arcs, t6, 
 
 deem worthy : d^idu. 
 
 deep : PaSvs, eta, v. 
 
 delay: (iAVcd. 
 
 deliberate : PovXcvo|iak 
 
 demand : d^idu. 
 
 deny : ov (jiTHii. 
 
 deprive : d(|>aip4o|iiai., 
 
 descend: KaTa^aCvu. 
 
 descent : Kardpao-is, ecds, t|. 
 
 descry : KaSopdu. 
 
 desert (verb) : diroXcCiru. 
 
 deserted : E'pi]p,os, r\, ov, or !lpT|)ios, ov, 
 
 deserts (justice) : 8(ki), tjs, t]. 
 
 desire : 8E'op.at, l6A.(i>, eiri6v|i.^u. See 
 
 ' wish.' 
 despondency : d6v|i,Ca, as, t|. 
 destroy : dir6XXv|i,i, Xvu. 
 devise : PovXtvu. 
 die : duo9vT(o-K<i), reXcvrdu, 
 die off: diroOv^'o-KW. 
 difficult : x*^''"'''*! ^> "S". 
 difficulty: diropCa, as, t|; irpaY)ui, 
 
 aros, t6. 
 direct : lirirdTTu, irapa77^X(i), 
 direct the mind : irpoo-^X'" "'^'^ voOv. 
 discouragement : d8v|xCa, os, »|. 
 dismiss : diroir^)i.ir(i>, d(|>ti)p.i. 
 distant, be : dir^u. 
 distinguish oneself: iiriSeCKWiiai. 
 distribute : Si.a8CS(i)|jii. 
 ditch : Td()>pos, ov, t|. 
 division (military) : rd^is, c(i>Si ^|. 
 do : iroicu, irpaTTu. 
 down along : Kara with ace. 
 down from : Kard with gen. 
 down over : xard with ace. 
 draw near : irpoo-tXavvw. 
 draw up ; rdTTw. 
 drink {noun): irordv, oO, t6. 
 drive: iXa<lvca. 
 drive in : cto'EXavvu. 
 drive out : {^eXavvo. 
 drive past : irapeXavvu. 
 drive up : irpoo-cXavvw. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 345 
 
 E 
 
 each : iKaerros, i), ov, 
 
 eagerly : irpo6v|i<i)s. 
 
 earlier than : irpdo-Scv . . , irpCv. 
 
 earth : 7% yf[s, f|. 
 
 easy : ^<}Sios, a, ov. 
 
 effect : irpdrro), SiairpdTTO|jiai. 
 
 either ... or : ij . . . t]. 
 
 elder : irpE(rPiJTEpas, a, ov. 
 
 elsewhere : a\X^. 
 
 embarrassment : airopCS, as, t). 
 
 empire : dpXTJ, ifs, t|. 
 
 empty : Kev6s, ^, 6v. 
 
 encamp: o-TpaToirEScvai and -0|i.ai.; 
 
 see ' camp.' 
 encounter : kvruyx&va, l'iriTVYXO'''<i). . 
 end (noun) : t^os, ovs, t6. 
 end(wr^): reXevrdu; put an end to: 
 
 iravd). 
 enemy: oiiroX^iiioi; personal enemy : 
 
 ex9pds, oO, 6. 
 enlist * Xa|j.pdv(D. 
 enter : 8vci>, Svvu, elo-^p\0|iai. 
 entire : oXos, t), ov; irds, irSo-o, irav; 
 
 see ' all.' 
 equip : irapao-KEvdJu. 
 escape : diro(|>ei)Y(i). 
 escape notice : XavOdvu. 
 Euphrates : Ei(|>paTt]s, ov, 6. 
 ever : ttot^. 
 ever yet : iruirOTe. 
 
 every: iros, irdo-a, irdv; see 'each.' 
 evident : SijXos, r\, ov; i|>avEpds, d, iv. 
 evident, make : ST|\do>. 
 exceedingly : lo-xiJpffls. 
 excellence : dper^, fls, t|. 
 exercise : ■yuiivdju. 
 exile : <|>vYds, dSos, 6. 
 expedition: o-TdXos, ov, 6; (TTpareta, 
 
 OS, fi. 
 expedition, make an : CTpoTtvci). 
 extend : KaS'fJKu. 
 extensi\ e : iroXvs, iroXX^j, iroXil. 
 extreme : eo-xaros, t], ov. 
 
 F 
 
 face about : &vao-Tpl<|>0|iai. 
 
 fact, and in : -ydp, Kal Y^p- 
 
 fail : ^KXeCiro). 
 
 faithful : irio-ris, i\, 6v. 
 
 family : y^vos, ovs, t6. 
 
 father : irar^p, irarpds, i. 
 
 fatherland : irarpCs, CSos, t|. 
 
 favor : x°^P''S> itos, r|. 
 
 favor, show : x(i'p'£<>l''<ti- 
 
 fear (iiouit): (|>6pos, ov, 6. 
 
 fear {verb'): SiSoiKa, <f>oP^o|jiai. 
 
 fearful : Scivds, 'i\, dv; <j>oPcpds, a, dv. 
 
 fearfully : <f>oPEp<os. 
 
 feed : tfi^a. 
 
 few : oXCyos, t], ov. 
 
 field, take the : o-TpaTEvopiai.; take the 
 
 field with : o'vo'TpaTcvop.ai. 
 fight (noun) : v^\t\, tis, •f]. 
 fight (verb): |i,dxo|Ji<ti. 
 finally : t^Xos. 
 
 find : cvpCo-KiD, KaraXaiipdva). 
 find by chance : IvtvyxAvoi, Iwitvy- 
 
 Xdv(i>. 
 finish : reXevrdu. 
 fire : irvp, irvpds, to. 
 first : irpooTos, t), ov. 
 fish : tx^^S) ^°'^< °- 
 fitness : dpcTii, fis, t|. 
 flee, flee from : f|>EVYu ; flee away : 
 
 diro4>evY'o. 
 flight : <|>vY<i, iis, T). 
 flight, put to : Tpeirci) €ts <j>VY^v. 
 fodder : X''^°S, o", o- 
 follow : i(iro|i,ai. 
 
 following (adj.) : vo-repatos, o, ov. 
 follows, as : iSSe. 
 
 food: o-it£ov, ov, Td; o'itos, ov, 6. 
 foot: irous, woSds, d; on foot: n'ejds, 
 
 idv. 
 for (conj.) : -f6.p. 
 for (prep.): titl. with dat.; irtpC with 
 
 gen. 
 for ( = instead of) : dvTi with gen, 
 
346 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 force (noun) : 8vva|iis, ems, t). 
 
 force (verb): a,va,-<jK6X,a. 
 
 fordable : Sia^ards, <), ov. 
 
 forearm : iriixtis, etos, 6. 
 
 foreign : ^apPapiK^s, ^i 6v. 
 
 foreigner : pdpPapos, ov, a. 
 
 former: irpirtpos, o, ov; irp6ir6cv 
 
 (adv. as adj.) . 
 formerly : to apj^aiov, to irpdo-Oiv. 
 fortress : Tetxos, ov<s, to. 
 fortunate : evSa[|j.ci>v, ov. 
 forward : els to wpdcrOev. 
 fresh : v^os, a, ov. 
 friend : <t>(\aS) ov, 6. 
 friendly : <|>(X.os, ii, ov. 
 friendship : <t>^^'°i> Ss, r\. 
 frighten : ^pia. 
 frightful: Seivds, i\, o'v; <|>oPep6s, d, 
 
 6v. 
 from : dird (away from) ; tK (out 
 
 from) ; irapd .and irpds (from the 
 
 side of); vird (because of), 
 front, in : ejiirpoo-Oev. 
 fugitive: <|>v'Yds, dSos, 6. 
 full: |ieo-Tds, ■(], dv; irXi^ptis, cs. 
 furnish : irap^xu. 
 future, in the : to Xoiirdv. 
 
 G 
 
 games (= contest of games): d^civ, 
 
 tovos, d. 
 garrison : <|>vXaK^, fjs, t|. 
 gate : ■ni\r\, i)s, f|. 
 gather together : dSpot^u, o-vW^-y*'- 
 gathering : d'yiiv, uvos, d. 
 gaze at : 6edop.ai. 
 general {adj.): Koivds, ■f\, dv. 
 general (noun): o'TpaTT|Yd$, ov, d. 
 gift : Swpov, ov, Td. 
 girl : irais, iraiSos, t|. 
 give : SISufj.1. 
 give over : 7rapa8CSufj.i. 
 gladly : T|8e»s. 
 
 go : ctfii,, cpxo|jiai, irop€vo|i.ai. 
 go across : SiapaCvu. 
 
 go avfay (or back) : oLir£i|U, dirlpxo)i,ai, 
 
 goby: irap4pxo|J.ai. 
 
 go down : KaTaPaCvu. 
 
 go forth : ^ci|Jii, l|4pxo|iak 
 
 go forward : irpocpxo|xai. 
 
 go on : eireijjLi.. 
 
 go out : S|ei|jii, 4|^pxo)iai. 
 
 go past : irap^pxofiai. 
 
 go through : 8iipxop,ai. 
 
 go to : irpo(r^pxo)iiai. 
 
 go together : a-vv^pxo|<.au 
 
 go up (inland): dvaPaCvu. 
 
 god : 6€ds, ov, 6. 
 
 goddess : 6eds, ov, t|. 
 
 gold (adj.), golden: xpvo'ovs, f), ovv. 
 
 gold (noun): \puiriov, ov, Td. 
 
 gone, be (or have gone) : oIxo|i^<<.i,. 
 
 good : d-yaSds, '^, dv. 
 
 grace: X0'P''S> itos, t|. 
 
 grain: o-itCov, ov, Td; o-tTOs, ov, d. 
 
 grant (as a favor): x<^p(£op,ai. 
 
 grass : x^^^s, ov, d. 
 
 gratify : x°'P'£op.ai. 
 
 gratitude : x<^P''S> ■'Tos, t|. 
 
 great : |iE7as, |J.€7dXii, [i^-ya. 
 
 great ( = how great, as great as) : oo-o$, 
 
 Y], ov; dirdo'os, t], ov. 
 greave : Kvrjitts, l8os, t|. 
 Greece : 'EXXds, dSos, t|. 
 Greek (adj.) : 'EXXtjviKds, ■f\, dv. 
 Greek (noun) : "EXXijv, t)vos, d. 
 Greek force : 'EXXi^vikov, ov, to. 
 groundless : Kcvds, 'f\, dv. 
 guard (mo«»): (|>vXag, aKOs, d ; (=gar- 
 
 rison) i{>vXaK^, fp, t). 
 guard (verb): (|>vXdTTci>. 
 guest-friend ; |^vos, ov, d. 
 guide (noun): T|Y£|ii(&v, dvos, d, 
 guide (verb): rf^lof.o,<.. 
 
 half (adj.): TJ|i,ia-vs, eia, v. 
 half (noun) : t4 {jfiio'v. 
 halt : TCScjiai. Td oirXa. 
 halting place ; rraOjids, oO, d. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 347 
 
 hanrl : x«tpi X''P*S, V 
 
 hand, be at : irapa7['Yvo|iai, 7rdpci|u, 
 
 handsome : KaXosi i], 6v. 
 
 happen : 'yCYvofjiai, Tvy\6.va. 
 
 happen upon : 4vTU7\dv<o,4iriTU7\(iv«. 
 
 harbor : \i)i,yjv, ^vosj 6, 
 
 hard : x°^<''<'<'Si 'f\> ^^• 
 
 liarm; pXdirroi. 
 
 harsh : x^^^'f^s, •([, 6v. 
 
 harshly: Icxvprns. 
 
 hasten : iiE)iai, <rireita>. 
 
 have: «x<"- 
 
 he (in ' and he,' 'but he '): i U. 
 
 liead : KEcfiaX^, {js, t|. 
 
 hear, hear of: aKovto. 
 
 height : aKpov, ov, t6. 
 
 Hellas : 'EXXds, dSos, i\. 
 
 Hellenic : 'BWtjviKos, '<|, 6v, 
 
 helper: inrqpeTtis, ov, 6. 
 
 herald : Kijpu^, vkos, 6. 
 
 here: airoii (= here on the spot), 
 
 lvTaC6a, IvSdSe. 
 higher {adv.") : Jkvarifia. 
 highest {adv^ : ovwrdToj. 
 highest point of: &Kpos, a, ov. 
 liill: \<i<f>os, ov, o. 
 hiniself: lavrov, 
 hinder : KuXvu. 
 hold: tx"' 
 holy : Upds, £, <iv. 
 home (= homeward): o^KaSc. 
 honor (jioun): Tlf,i\, ■fjs, t]. 
 honor (verb'): rifjida). 
 honorable : KaX6s, ^, iv. 
 honorably : KaXus. 
 hoplite : 6irXfTt)s, ov, 4. 
 horse : Hiriros, ov, 6. 
 horse, consisting of: linriKds, % &v. 
 horseman : iirirtvs, ^<os, o. 
 host : irXfjSos, ovs, t6. 
 hostile; 4x9p*5> ^> "'''J iroX^|Aios, o, ov; 
 
 iroXciiiKos, '^, dv. 
 hour : upS, &s, t|. 
 house : oIkIS., as, t|. 
 how (Jnterr. ) : irfis. 
 
 how (rel.") : Kirois, 8iri]. 
 
 how great, how much (how many) : 
 
 &(ros, T|, ov; oirdo-os, i], ov. 
 however: |i,^vtoi, 
 hundred: ^Kardv. 
 hunt: 6i]pEV(ii. 
 hurl : pdXXu, liffx. 
 hurt : pXdirTO). 
 husband : dv^p, dvSpds, 6. 
 
 I: i-<ii>. 
 
 if: el; Idv or av or y\v with subjv. 
 
 impassable : d^aros, ov; dSid^aTos, 
 
 ov; diropos, ov. 
 impossible : dSvvaros, ov. 
 in : €v. 
 
 in company with : (Mxd with gen. 
 in front of: irp6. 
 in sight of: irpis with gen, 
 inclose : KaraKXcfu. 
 indeed : 8<). 
 infantry : ol tc^oC. 
 inferior, be : T|TTdo|j,di.. 
 inflict (j.g. punishment) : tirvrlivjfx. 
 injure : dSiKeu, ^XdirrcD. 
 inland : dvu. 
 
 inquire: TrvvOdvofiai; see also ' ask.' 
 instead of: dvrt. 
 intend : |j.eXX(i>. 
 interpreter : cp|jii)vcvs, ^tos, 6. 
 into : eEs. 
 
 into the midst of: [lerd with ace. 
 invisible : d<|>av^s, fe. 
 invite : KtiX^o). 
 Ionian: 'luviKds, ^, dv. 
 
 javelin ; iraXTdv, oO, rd. 
 judge : Kptvu. 
 judgment : -yvc&fiTi, i]s, i). 
 just : SlKaios, a, ov. 
 just as : SxriKf. 
 justice : SCkt), iis, t|. 
 justly: SiKaCus. . 
 
348 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 kill: airoKTcCvd/. 
 
 kindle : Ka(u or xia. 
 
 king : ^ao-iXeiis, iai, 6, 
 
 king, be : PatriKtia. 
 
 kingdom : PacriXeta, as, {|, 
 
 Uinglike : Pa<ri.\i.K(Ss, 'f\, 6v, 
 
 kinship : 7^vos, ovs, t6. 
 
 knee : ■ydvu, 76VOTOS, to. 
 
 know : 7i.Yv(aa-K(i>, otSa. 
 
 knowledge, without the knowledge of: 
 
 \d6p91. 
 
 L 
 labor : Kd.|ivo>. 
 
 Lacedaemon : AaKeSa(|i<i>v, ovos, t|. 
 Lacedaemonian : AaxcSaipibvios, a, ov. 
 land: 7% -yTis, t); x''p^> ^S' ■!■ 
 large : |i.^7as, ixcYdXr), |i^7a; xoXiis, 
 
 iroW'fif iroXtf. 
 last : feVxaTos, r\, ov. 
 later (ai^.) : vo-Tcpos, a,ov; virTcpatos, 
 
 a, ov. 
 latest: iSo-totob, 1], ov. 
 law : v6)ios, ov, 6. 
 lead : aya, {(^^oijiai. 
 lead away (or lead back) : dird,7ca. 
 lead down : KaTCLYu, 
 lead in : dcrayia. 
 lead out : k^ayta. 
 lead togither : trvv&ya. 
 lead up : dvd7Ci>. 
 leader : T|7€fiuv, ovos, 6, 
 learn : yiyv^(rKbi, fj.av0dvci>. 
 learn about : iruvOdvoiiai. 
 least, at : 7c. 
 least of all : tikio-to. 
 leave : \(iiria. 
 
 leave behind : diro\e(ira), KaTaXctiru. 
 leave off {or leave out) : CKXcCiru. 
 left, what is : Xoiirds, ^, dv. 
 lest : (»,<i. 
 lest not : |ii) oi. 
 let : cdu. 
 letter : tirioToX^i, ffi, rj. 
 
 libation : o-irovS^, tjs, t|. 
 
 lie (recline) : KcCjiai. 
 
 lie down : KardKciiiai. 
 
 lie upon : lirtKcifiai. 
 
 light (veri) : KaCoi or xia, 
 
 light-armed : «|flXds, ■f\, <Sv. 
 
 light-armed warrior : 7v)i.v^s; flTos, 6. 
 
 like : itta-irep. 
 
 line (military): rd^is, cws, i\< 
 
 listen : dKovu. 
 
 little : 6XC7OS, 1), ov. 
 
 live : Jd<i). 
 
 long : |j.aKp6s, a, ov. 
 
 longer (adv.) : in. 
 
 look ; pXcTTw. 
 
 look down on : Ka6opd«>. 
 
 look on : Sedofiai. 
 
 loose : \va. 
 
 lose : dirdXXviii. 
 
 Lydia : AvS(a, as, t|. 
 
 Lydian : AuSios, a, ov, 
 
 M 
 
 magnanimity : dper^, fls, if. 
 
 make : iroi^co. 
 
 man : dvfjp, dv8p6s, 6 ; av6puiros, ov, 6, 
 
 manage : SiairpaTTOfiai. 
 
 manner : Tpdiros, ov, 6. 
 
 many : iroXis, itoXXtj, iroXv (in pi.). 
 
 many (how many, as many as): 8(ros, 
 
 1], ov; oirdo-os, T^, ov. 
 march : IXavvu. 
 march in ; ElirEXavvci), 
 march out: l^eA^ji'-vw. 
 market, market-piace : &70p£, as, t|. 
 marshal: Tarra. 
 master : Seo-iroTris, ov, 0. 
 matter : irpd7|i,a, aros, t4. 
 means, by no ; iJKio'Ta. 
 Medes : MfjSoi, ov, 01. 
 Menon : M^vuv, uvos, 6. 
 messenger : a.77cXo$, ov, i. 
 method : Tpdiros, ov, 6. 
 middle (middle of): (i^a-os, r\, ov. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 349 
 
 midnight : |ji^(rai v^ktes. 
 
 midst, in the : iv iijo-ij). 
 
 might : Kpdros, ovSi t6. 
 
 mina ; |i.va, as, t|. 
 
 mind : voOs, oi, 6. 
 
 Mithradates: Mi6paSdTT|s, ov, 6. 
 
 mixing bowl : KpdT'/|p, fjpos, 6. 
 
 money: oLpYipiov, ov, rd; XP^K'*^''''^' 
 
 <1>V, T&, 
 
 month : \i,i\v, |i.r|v6S) 6. 
 
 monthly : Kard |if|va. 
 
 more (aa'i!'.): (laWov. 
 
 most {adv.^ : (idXicrTa. 
 
 mother : |i.iJTT]p, |iT|Tp6s, r\. 
 
 mountain : Spos, ous, t6. 
 
 much {adj.'): iroXiis, iroXX.^, Ttoki. 
 
 much {adv.): ttoKi. 
 
 much (how much, as much as) : ocros, 
 
 T], ov; 6^6(ros, t\y ov. 
 multitude : 17X1)605, ous, to. 
 must, one: XP^J see ' necessary.' 
 my : l|i(5s, ■^, iv- 
 myself: IjjiavTov, fjs. 
 
 N 
 name : SvojJia, aros, t6. 
 narrow : orrevis, ■*!, <5v. 
 near: I77US; irpis with dat. ; irepCwith 
 
 ace. 
 necessary {adj.) : liriT'^Seios, a, ov. 
 necessary, it is : Set, xp^i, a.vd7KT) (4o-tC). 
 necessity : dva^KT), t]s, ti. 
 need: S^Ofiai; there is need: Set, 
 
 XP^- 
 neighbor : ^etruv, ovos, 6. 
 neither . . . nor : oiire (|A^Te) . . . o«t€ 
 
 (li^JTe). 
 never : ouirore, |x^iroTC. 
 never yet : oliirtii. . 
 
 new : v^os, H, ov. 
 
 next : vo-T«paIos, S, ov; {adv.), ^ireira. 
 night : vvj, vuKTds, t|. 
 night, by : viverop. 
 noble : KaXos, ■f\, 6v. 
 noble-mindedness : dper^, fjs, t|. 
 
 nobly : KaXus. 
 
 noise : Odpu^os, ov, 6. 
 
 no longer, no more : oiK^Ti. 
 
 no one : oiSeCs, |i.r|SE(s. 
 
 nobody : ovSeCs, |jiT|SeCS' 
 
 nor : oihi, f.rfii. 
 
 not: oi, ^i\. 
 
 not even: ov8^, p,T]S{. 
 
 not yet : oiiirw. 
 
 nothing: ovS^v, |jit|S^v. 
 
 now (inferential): 8'fj. 
 
 now (temporal): tJSti, vOv. 
 
 
 
 O: a. 
 
 oath : opKOS, ov, o. 
 
 oath, take : 6fivv)jii,. 
 
 obey : irEtSop.aL. 
 
 observe : KaSopdu, o'KeirTO(j,ai.. 
 
 occupy: KaTaXap,pdv(d. 
 
 occupy beforehand : irpoKaraXaiiPdvo). 
 
 off : dird. 
 
 offer: 8C8ct)p.i (pres. and impf.). 
 
 offer (= sacrifice): Gdw, 6vojiai. 
 
 often: ivoXXdKis; as often as: oirdre, 
 
 OT€. 
 
 old: apxalos, o, ov; of old {adv.): 
 
 TO dpxotov. 
 older : irpeo-pvTepos, a, ov. 
 on : eiri with gen. or dat. 
 on account of: 8i.d with ace. 
 on behalf of: virc'p with gen. 
 once (upon a time) : iroTt. 
 once, at : ev0vs. 
 one another : dXX'/jXoiv. 
 one, the : 6 f.iv; see Lesson VI. 
 only {adj.): jidvos, y\, ov. 
 opinion : ■^v(S>\>,i\, lys, t|. 
 opportunity : Kuipds, ov, 0. 
 opposite : KaTd with ace. 
 or: TJ. 
 
 order {noun) : Tdjis, €0)S, tj. 
 order {verb): KeXcvco (= command), 
 
 TaTTO) ( = marshal). 
 Orontas: 'OpdvTos, a, 6. 
 
350 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 otlijr : aWos, 1, ov. 
 
 other (others), the; 6 S^, ol 8^; see 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 otherwise : aWios. 
 our : T]|ieTepos, a, ov. 
 out of: £K. 
 
 outcry : Kpav^^, fjs, ^. 
 outside : e'^u. 
 
 over : iirep with gen. or ace. 
 overtake : KaTa\a|iPdv(0. 
 ux : Povs, Po6s, 6. 
 
 pack up ; crvcTKCvd^oi. 
 
 palace : ^ao-CXeia, (dv, rd. 
 
 parasarg : irapa<rd'Y^T)s, ov, 6. 
 
 Pajrysatis : Ilapvo-aTis, iSos, t|. 
 
 Pasion ; Ulatriav, wvos, 6. 
 
 pass : CKpao-is, las, t| ; xdpoSos, ov, t). 
 
 pass (passing over): virEpPoX'^, f|s, i). 
 
 pass along (a watchword): 8ia8CSup,i. 
 
 passable : SiaParos, rj, 6v. 
 
 passage : irdpoSos, ov, t|. 
 
 pay : fi.La-66Si ov, 6. 
 
 peace : €lp^vT|, t]s, r\. 
 
 pelt: pd\Xci>. 
 
 peltast : ireXTao-T^s, ov, 6. 
 
 perceive : ato'9dvo|iai, irvvOdvo^.ai. 
 
 perish : diroOvTiVKCo, diroXXvfiai. 
 
 permit : «d«. 
 
 permitted, it is : 'iifim. 
 
 Persian {adj.): IIcpo-iKos, i\, 6v. 
 
 Pcrsi.Tn {noiin): Il€po'T]S, ov, 6. 
 
 persuade : ireCOu. 
 
 pertain to : irpoo-^Kco. 
 
 phalanx: (jidXa-yl, a^^os, t|. 
 
 Phrygia: ^pvyCa, as, t). 
 
 Pisidians : IIro-£8ai, wv, ot. 
 
 place {nouiL): rdiros, ov, 6; \(opCov, 
 
 ov, TO. 
 
 place, in the same : avrov. 
 place (!/^^^): to-Tt)ni. 
 place, take : Yi-yvoiJiai. 
 place, take one's : Ka6(o-Ta|i.ai.. 
 
 place together : o-vvt(6i)|i,i. 
 
 place upon : 4iriTC6T||i.i,. 
 
 plain {adj.): SfjXos, i), ov; ^avcpos, 
 
 t, 6v. 
 plain {noun) : ircSCov, ov, to. 
 plan {noun): 7vcS(i.i), tis, t|. 
 plan {verb): PovXevofiai. 
 plan with-: o-v|iPov\ev(i>. 
 pleased, be : 'i)8op.ai. 
 pledges: 8E|iaC, tov, at; irio-rd, »v, rd. 
 plethrum : irX46pov, ov, t6. 
 plot {noun) : ciripovX^, fls, t|. 
 plot against : e-iriPovXevo). 
 plunder: dpird^u; plunder utterly: 
 
 Siapird^u. 
 point out : SeCkvvjjli, Scikvva) (and 
 
 liri8££Kvvp.i). 
 possessions : XP'^H'"'''''^! ™''> ™' 
 possible, it is : e|«o-Tiv, to-riv, otdv t^ 
 
 lo-Tiv. 
 post, take one's : TC6«|iai. rd 8irXa. 
 power (in the power of): «ir£ with 
 prepare : Trapo^Kcvd^oi. [dat. 
 
 prepared : STOi.p.os, 1\, ov, or 2toi.|xos, ov, 
 present, be : irapa^i'Yvop.ai, irdp€L(iL. 
 primitive : dp\aios, a, ov. 
 proceed : iropcvop.ai, irpo^pxo|j.ai. 
 proceed with : o-vp,irop€VO|i,ai.. 
 promise : v7ri.a-\v4opLai. 
 proposed : etirov. 
 proposition : 'Yvc&|ji,'r|, tjs, t|. 
 prosperous : Ei8aC|i.(i)v, ov. 
 provide : irap^u. 
 province : dpx^, tjs, t|. 
 provisions : liriT^jSEia, oiv, rd. 
 provisions, get : cin.o-iT[^o|i.ai. 
 Proxenus : IIp6|cvos, ov, 6. 
 punish : KoXd^oi. 
 punishment, inflict ... on: 8(kt|v 
 
 Eiri.T(6T)p,l. 
 
 punishment, suffer; 8(kt|v SCSufii. 
 
 pursue : SiiiKu. 
 
 put : Ttflrnii. 
 
 put together : o-vvti6t]hi. 
 
 put upon : linrC6i]|U. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 351 
 
 quick : raxvSi eta, v. 
 quickly : Ta\iai, TS.\a,, toxv. 
 
 rally : avairTp^<|>0|iai. 
 
 rapidly : see ' quickly.' 
 
 rather : |i.a\\ov. 
 
 ravine : \apd8pa, as, ^l. 
 
 reach down : KaS^JKu. 
 
 reach to : 7rpo(rf|KU. 
 
 readily : irpo6v)i.ciis. 
 
 ready : ^Toifias, 11, ov, or ^toijios, ov. 
 
 ready, make : <rvo-K£vd^<i). 
 
 ready, make oneself: irapaa-Kevd^ofjiai. 
 
 rear : Tp4<)>iD. 
 
 receive : S^x°l^ai, \ap.pdvu; of pay : 
 
 Xa|jLpdv<o, c|>4p(i>. 
 related : irpoo-^Kuv. 
 remain : (i^vci). 
 remaining : Xoiirds, "([, 6v. 
 remember : |j.^|xvT]|j.ai.. 
 remind : |jii|jivxia-Km. 
 reply : diroKptvo^iai. 
 report : ayyeWu), diraYY^^^"' 
 rest : dvairavo)i.ai.. 
 rest of: \oiir6s, ■f\, ov; the rest of: 6 
 
 aWos, etc. 
 restore : Kard-yu. 
 return : jtirei)!!. 
 ride : eXavvu. 
 ride in : ettreXoiivo). 
 ride past : irapEXaivu. 
 ride up : irpoo'tXaiivci). 
 right (hand) : SE^ia, as, ti. 
 right measure, time, place : Kaip6s, 
 
 ov, 6, 
 right (= on the right hand): Se^i6s, 
 
 i, 6v. 
 risk, run a : KivSvveila). 
 river : iroTa|j,6s, ov, 6. 
 road : oScSs, oS, r|. 
 road by : irdpoSos, ov, t|. 
 road up : avoSos, ov, ti. 
 
 rob : d(|)aip^O|i,ai. 
 
 royal; Pao-CXaos, ov; ^ao-iXiKiSs, '^,6v. 
 
 rule (noun): dpx^, ^S, r|. 
 
 rule {verb): apxu; rule as king: po- 
 
 o-iXevu. 
 ruler : itpxwv, ovtos, b. 
 run {noun): 8p6)i,os, ov, 6. 
 run {verb): Tp^X"; 8^*'- 
 run away (by stealth) : diro8iSp£o-K(i>. 
 
 S 
 sack : SiapTrdJu. 
 sacred : Upos, t,, 6v. 
 sacriBce : 6v<o, 6va|j.ai. 
 safe : d(r(|>aX^s, ^s. 
 safely : da-(t>aXus. 
 safety : curripla, as, t|. 
 safety, in : Iv ao-it>aXct. 
 sail: ■r\iu>. 
 sail away : diroirXc'cii. 
 sailing, sailing weather : irXovs, oO, 6. 
 same : 6 avrds. 
 same time, at the : &|ia. 
 Sardis : SdpSeis, euv, at. 
 satisfaction, give : S(Kr)v SfSajjii. 
 satrap : iraTpdin]s, ov, 6. 
 save : o-i^'^u. 
 save from ( = bring safely back) : 
 
 diroo-t^^oj. 
 say : X^7<i), <|>T)|tC. 
 sea : OdXarra, t|s, t|. 
 season : &pa, as, f|, 
 secretly: XdOpi}. 
 secure : d(r<|>aX^s, ds- 
 see : 6edo|j.ai, opdu. 
 seem : Soke'u ; seem best : SoK^u. 
 seize : aipeu, dpirdju, KaraXaiiPdvoi, 
 
 o-vXXa)j.pdv<i>. 
 seize beforehand : irpoKaTaXa|jiPdvo. 
 self: avTds. 
 send : ir^fiiru, iir||xi. 
 send after : |jicTair^)i.')ro|Uii. 
 send ahead : irpoir^fiirca. 
 send away : diroir^inroi. 
 send down : KaTair^|jiir(ii, 
 
352 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 send forward : irpoir^p.irci). 
 
 send off : diroTr^nirci). 
 
 send with ; o-uinrcjiirw. 
 
 sent after : [leTdTreiiirTOs, ov. 
 
 sentinel : <j>v\o|, aKOS, 6. 
 
 separate : Kptvu. 
 
 separated, be : 8i,^\(i>. 
 
 servant: iPirtip€TT]s, ou, 6. 
 
 serve in war: <rTpaT6io|Jioi; serve in 
 
 war with : <rv(rTpaTEvop,ai,. 
 set: l!(rTt)|iii, t£6t]|j.i; of the sun: inia, 
 
 8uvw. 
 severe : XC'^'''''°S) 'f\, 6v, 
 shameful : alo-xpds, cE, iSv. 
 sheep : irpdparov, ov, to. 
 shield : ao-irCs, CSos, t|. 
 shoot : To|€V(i>. 
 short : Ppaxvs, eia, v. 
 show : ScCkvvixi, S€ikvvo> (and ciriSe^- 
 
 Kvu|jLi), 8Y]\6to, ij>aCvb}. 
 shun : (|>ev7u. 
 
 shut (= shut up): KaraKXcfa). 
 side, on the other : ir^pav. 
 sight, out of: d<|>avy|s, 4s. 
 silver (ai/J.) : dp'y vpovs, d, ovv. 
 silver {noun) : apyvpiov, ov, t6. 
 simple : dirXovs, tj, ovv. 
 since : lir€£, (Trfi6i\, oirdre. 
 sincere : dirXotis, % ovv. 
 skillful : Scivds, •!], 6v. 
 slander : Sia^aXXu. 
 slave : dvSpdiroSov, ov, rd. 
 slay : dirOKTeCvu ; (pass.) diroSvQVKu. 
 sling : o*(J>cvS6v'(i, -qs, tj. 
 small : jiiKpiis, a, dv. 
 smite : iraCu. 
 snow : X'''^"" dvos, r\. 
 so as : laa-re. 
 
 so great : too-ovtos, TOo"aiiTT|, tocoBto. 
 so long as : €<rT€, ^tos. 
 so many (much) : too-ovtos, TO(rairii\, 
 
 TO0"OVT0. 
 
 so that : uo'tc. 
 
 Socrates : ScoKpdrY^s, ovs, 6. 
 
 soldier: o-Tparit&TTjs, oj, 6. 
 
 some : oi \iiv. See Lesson VI. 
 
 some, somebody, something: tis, ti. 
 
 somewhere : ttov. 
 
 Sophaenetus : 2o(j>aCvcTOs, ov, 6. 
 
 source : in]YaC, cov, ai. 
 
 Spartan : AaK£Saip,6vios, a, ov. 
 
 spear : 86pv, Siparos, rd ; Xd^X'']' 't^t ^■ 
 
 speech : \d-yos, ov, 6. 
 
 splendor : \.a|j.irp6Tt|s, t)tos, t|. 
 
 spread (of a report) : Si^pxofiai. 
 
 spring : in\yf\, %, t|. 
 
 stadium : o-rdSiov, ov, to. 
 
 stage : (rTa0|xds, ov, 6, 
 
 stand : Jo-tthii (intr. tenses). 
 
 stand up : dvCo'Tafjiai. 
 
 start up : dvCa-TT]|i,i. 
 
 station : Ka6io'Ti]|ti. 
 
 steal : KKiirra. 
 
 steep : opOios, a, ov. 
 
 still : «'Tt. 
 
 stone : \(6os, ov, 6. 
 
 stop, make to : iravu. 
 
 straightway : cvOvs, t\Si]. 
 
 strange : Oavpiao-Tds, i], 6v. 
 
 strength : 8vva|jiis, eus, t| ; KpdTOs, ous, 
 
 t6. 
 strike : iroCw. 
 
 strong: Swards, •ij, dv; (o-xvpds, a, dv, 
 stronghold : x^^P^^f ov, to. 
 strongly : Icrxvpus. 
 struggle : dYuvC^oiiai.. 
 
 such : TOIOVTOS, TOiavTTI, TOIOVTO. 
 
 such as : toiovtos oios. 
 suffer : ird(rx<». 
 sufficient : iKavos, ^, dv. 
 suitable : liriT^Seios, a, ov. 
 summon : Ka\4io, |xeTair4|iiro|jiai. 
 summoned : (lETdirciJiirTos, ov. 
 sun : i^Xios, ov, 6. 
 supplies : €-iriTir|8£ia, <i)v, Td. 
 supply : irape'xw. 
 support : Tp4<j)u. 
 supporter : virr)p«'Tr)s, ov, &. 
 suppose : ol!o)iai. 
 sure, to be : |it|v. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 353 
 
 surely : ■ye. 
 surpass: viKdu. 
 surprised, be : 6av|i,d^(i>. 
 surrender : xapaSCSufi,!,. 
 suspicion : {i7roi|/Ca, as, t|. 
 swear: 6\i,vv\i,i. 
 sweet : t]Svs, eta, v. 
 swift : Tax<is, «ttt, i, 
 swiftly : Ta\iuts, raxi. 
 Syennesis : Sti^vve<ris, los, 6. 
 Syria : SupCa, as, t). 
 
 ta1<e (= seize): aip«'(i>, Xafipdvo). 
 
 take away fur oneself: d<j>aip^o|iai. 
 
 take back : diroXaiiPdvo). 
 
 take off ; diroXap.pdvc>>. 
 
 take together : <rv\Xa|xpdv(i>. 
 
 talent : rdXavrov, ov, t6. 
 
 Tarsus : TapcroC, uv, ot. 
 
 tax : Sao-fjios, oi, 6. 
 
 teach : SiSdcKO). 
 
 tear to pieces : Siapirdju. 
 
 tent : <rKi\v'(\, Tjs, t|. 
 
 terrible : Seiv6s, i], 6v; ({lO^Epds, 
 
 a,6v. 
 terrify utterly : iKirX'/JTru. 
 than : rj. 
 
 thankful, feel : X'^P"'" 'X"- 
 that (con/.'): on; (= in order that) 
 
 Xva, otrciis, lus. 
 that (_ciem. J>ron.): ckcivos, iKeCvt), 
 
 ^KEtvo. 
 that (r«/. pron.) : 8s, r[, 8. 
 the : 6, ti, t6. 
 then (inferential): toCvuv. 
 then (temporal): t6t6, etro, eiTEiTo, 
 
 Ev6a, ivTiv6ev. 
 thence : ivTev9ev. 
 there : IvravOa, evBa, airov. 
 thereafter : to Xoiirdv. 
 therefore : oSv, toCvuv, TOiYOpoOv, 
 
 WO"T€, 
 
 thereupon: etra, eireiTa. 
 
 beginner's GR. BK.-^ 23 
 
 thick : iraxis, «ta, i, 
 
 thickly grown (wooded) : Soo-us, €ta, v. 
 
 thief: k\(&iJ/, KXuirdS) 6. 
 
 think : T|'YE'o)i.ai, vo[iC^a), otojiai, Sok^u. 
 
 this: B8e, rfii, r6ic, ovtos, avrr), 
 
 TOVTO. 
 
 Thracian : 0p$|, Opc}K6$, 6. 
 
 throng: fix^"*! '"'> °'> "f^^iSos, ovs, 
 
 rd. 
 through : 8vd with gen. 
 throw : pdWu. 
 thus : ovTco, ovrus, uSe. 
 Tigris : Tt-ypris, iitos, 6. 
 timbers : |vXa, wv, rd. 
 time : xpi^vos, ou, 6. 
 time, at any, at some : ttot^. 
 time, at that : see ' then.' 
 time (=in the time of): EirC with 
 
 gen. 
 time, fit or proper : wpa, os, 4). 
 time, right, proper : Kaip6s, oO, 6. 
 Tissaphernes : Tio-ira4)^pvr]s, ovs, 6. 
 to : sts ( = into) ; eirC with ace. ; irapd 
 
 with ace. ; irpds with ace. ; is with 
 
 ace. (of persons), 
 together with : d|jia. 
 top of: aKpas, a, ov. 
 toward : irpis with gen. or ace. 
 town : oo-Tv, ews, to. 
 tree : S^vSpov, ov, t6. 
 trench : Siffipuf, vxos, ■!. 
 tribute : Sourfios, ov, 6. 
 trireme : Tpi<jpi]s, ous, t|. 
 trouble : irpo-YiiOTa, lov, Td. 
 truce : o-irov8aC, Sv, oi. 
 true : d\ii6^s, fe- 
 trumpet : o-dXiri'yl, i-y^os, t|. 
 trust: ireiroiOa. 
 truth, in : Si], (i'/jv. 
 try: irEipdojiai. 
 turn (noun) : Tpiiros, ov, 6. 
 turn (verb) : a-rpiifa, rpeirw. 
 turn about or back : dvao'TpE'4>(ii and 
 
 -ojjiai. 
 turn out (= happen) : -yC^voitai, 
 
354 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 under: fm6 with dat. or ace; (from 
 
 under) iiw6 with gen. 
 understand : cirirraiJiai. 
 understanding : yvi>\i,r\, i]s, t|. 
 undertake : viriirxv&iiai. 
 unguarded : d(|>v\aKTOs, ov. 
 unjust : aStKOS, ov. 
 unprepared : dirapdo-KCvos, ov. 
 unprotected : <|fiX6s, i], 6v. 
 until : '(itrri, lus, (i^XPW fp'v. 
 unwilling : cikuv, ovo-a, ov. 
 up {adv.'): avw. 
 up {prep.), up along, up through: 
 
 dvd. 
 upon : eir£ with dat. or ace. 
 urge on: O'lrevSu. 
 urged: iXitov. 
 use : xP<S^O|Jia<'- 
 useful : xp^io-iftos, r\, ov, or xp'^ciftos, 
 
 ov. 
 
 vain : Kev6s, ^, <5v. 
 
 very : (jidXa, irdvu; us with sup. 
 
 victory : vtKr), r\%, ^. 
 
 view: o-k^tttoijioi. 
 
 village : K»|iT], r]S, f|. 
 
 village chief; K(i>|idpxiis, ov, 6. 
 
 virtue : dpeT^i, tjs, t|. 
 
 visible : <|)av£p6s, d, 6v. 
 
 voice : (jxov^, fjs, t|. 
 
 voyage : irXoOs, ov, 6. 
 
 vulnerable : Tpwris, '(\, 6v. 
 
 W 
 
 wage war : iroXe|UiD. 
 wagon ; (i|ia|a, ijs, \. 
 wait for : ^ivia. 
 wall : Tstxos, ovs, t6. 
 want: S£0|j,ai. 
 
 war: ir6XE|j.as, ov, 6; make war on, 
 
 wage war : ttoKtyia. 
 warlike : n'oX£|iiK6s, i\, 6v, 
 watch fires : irvpd, &v, rd. 
 watchword : avvBtjita, aros, r6, 
 water: vSup, uSaros, rd. 
 way : oSds, ov, t|. 
 way down : Kardpao-is, £<ds, i\. 
 way to : «<|>o8os, ov, t|. 
 way up : avoSos, ou, {). 
 way, in what (interr.) : irus. 
 way, in what (rel.): oiru, iiirus. 
 weary, am: Kdfivw. 
 well {adv.): «v. 
 well ! (in address) : dXXd. 
 well-disposed : evvovs, ovv. 
 what sort (of) : otos, a, ov; oiroios, 
 
 a, ov. 
 whatever : 8 ti. 
 wheel about : o-Tp^c|>ii>. 
 when : ot€, lireC, lireiS^ ; (with subjv.) 
 
 8tov, lireiSdv; ( = whenever) oirire, 
 
 ore. 
 whence : evflev, b9«v. 
 where {interr. = whither) : irot. 
 where (rf/.): ev8a; ( = whence) ^vBev; 
 
 (= whither) oiroi. 
 where, wherever : oirj), &irov. 
 whether: A. 
 whether ... or: irdrepov (irorspo) 
 
 ' ' ' \ ,, , , 
 which : os, r\, o; oo"Tis, tJtis, S ti. 
 
 which, the very one : ocrirEp, liirep, oirep. 
 
 while : £o-t6, eus. 
 
 whither {interr^: iroi. 
 
 whither ( = whithersoever) : 8iroi. 
 
 who, which, what {interr.): t£s, t£. 
 
 who (?W.): OS, 1], o; oo-Tis, lixis, 8 ti. 
 
 whoever {or whichever) : bo'Tis, tJtis, 
 
 8 Tl. 
 
 whole : oXos, i), ov; irds, irao-a, irdv; 
 
 fiiras, ao-a, av; o-V|iiras, a<rtt, av 
 wholly: irdw. 
 why {interr.) : tC. 
 width : evpos, ovs, Td. 
 
ENGL1SH-&REEK VOCABULARY 
 
 355 
 
 wife : yvvf\, 7vvaiKds, f|. 
 
 wine : otvosi O"; °' 
 
 wish : |3oi\o|xai, e64X(i). See ' desire.' 
 
 with : (lETil with gen. ; <rvv, 
 
 with the aid of: <riv. 
 
 within : cto-u, evSov. 
 
 without : av6v, (outside) ^|a>. 
 
 woman : yvvi\, ^vvaiKds, t|. 
 
 wonder ( = wonder at) : 6av|id£(i>, 
 
 wonderful : 8av|j.a<rT6Si 'i\, 6v. 
 
 wood : JiiXov, 01), r6; (hewn or split) 
 
 ^i\a, uv, TO.. 
 word : \670s, on, 6. 
 work : 'ipyov, ou, t6. 
 worse (adj.) : Kaictuv, ov; x''p<t>f, ov. 
 worse (adv.') : KdKiov, xttpov. 
 worthy : a|tos, a, ov. 
 wound: TiTpt^o-Ko). 
 write : 7pdi)»a. 
 wrong, do, be in the : dSiK^u. 
 
 Xenias : QevCas, ou, 6. 
 Xenophon : Qcvo4>^v, SvTOS, £• 
 
 yearn: iiri.6v|j,^(ii. 
 
 yet : en (temporal), y.ivTO\. (adversa- 
 tive) . 
 young i vlo%, a, ov. 
 young man ; veavCo-KOS, ou, 6. 
 you : cu. 
 
 your (sing.) : o-bs, o-'/j, o-<Sv. 
 your (pi.) : ufi^npos, o, ov. 
 yourself: o-tourou, fjs. 
 
 zealously; '7rpo6i$|Mi)$, 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 AND INDEX TO THE LESSONS 
 
 The Roman numerals indicate the number of the special vocabulary in which a 
 word occurs. References to sections are made by Arabic numerals. If no refer- 
 ences are placed under a word, it occurs for the first time in the SELECTIONS FROM 
 THE Anabasis (pp. 263-.279). 
 
 For the principal parts of compound verbs see the simple verbs. In the few 
 instances where compounds occur without the simple verbs, the principal parts 
 are given under the compounds. If, in place of an active form, a middle form 
 occurs in the principal parts, the middle form is understood to be used in the 
 active sense. Thus ciKoif oi / hear, dkoio-o^ai / shall hear. 
 
 If a part is omitted from its proper place, the indication is that the part does 
 not occur, at least in Attic Greek. 
 
 A- or 4v- before vowels, a negative pre- 
 fix called alpha privative, equivalent 
 to Lat. in- and Eng. «»-. 
 
 a-Paros, ov (a- priv. and theme ^ci-, 
 cp. 8to-PaCvii>) : not to be trodden on, 
 impassable. Cp. d-Sid-Paros. 
 
 § 476. XXIX. 
 
 ' A^poKifias, a (Doric gen., for ov), 6 : 
 Abrocomas, a satrap of Phoenicia and 
 Syria. XXXI. 
 
 a7a66s, % <5v: good, brave. §§ 64, 
 n6. Comp. dpLcCvuv, PeXTtuv, 
 KpeCTTCov; sup. apurrog, P^tkttos, 
 KpdTUTTOs; § 360. I. III. 
 
 d77^\.Xci> (for d^YcX -|- yu>, theme 
 dYYtX-), d77cXu, ii77«i\o, 'i]77cXKa, 
 'i]77c\|j,ai, T|77A6r)v : announce, re- 
 port, with 8ti or partic. in indir. 
 disc. § 669. 3. Cp. 0.776X05. LV. 
 
 0,776X05, ov, 6 : messenger. XLV. 
 
 a7€, imv. of a7« used as an interjec- 
 tion : come ! 07* (or a7€T€) 8<i : 
 come now ! XXIX. 
 
 d70pa, d5, T| : market-place, market. 
 IX. 
 
 d70pd{(i> (theme d7opaS-), d7opd(r(i>, 
 TJ76pao-a, TJ76paKa, TJ76pao-|ji,ai., 
 TJ7opdo-8T)v : buy. Cp. d7opd. 
 XV. 
 
 a7«, o|w (§ 153), ii7O70v (§§ 87, 239, 
 258), flxa (§ 445). kiV-"-'- (§ 466. a), 
 ■nX^I" (§ 3^7- l) = l^'^'i' bring; 
 
 carry, convey ; 
 marry (§ 324). 
 d7(Sv, Avos, : 
 games. § 220. 
 
 MID. sometimes 
 
 § 487. I. 
 'athering, contest, 
 XX. 
 
 d7ii>vC£o|iai (theme d7c»vi8-), d7Ci)vi- 
 
 ov|xai (§ 543), TJ7<ovio-d|ii)v, v^i>- 
 
 vi(r)jiai : contend as in ' games, 
 
 struggle, Cp. d7(iv. LV. 
 
 357 
 
3S8 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 aSEX<f>6s, ov, 6: brother. The voc. 
 sing, with irreg. accent is aSE\<j>e. 
 VIII. 
 
 d-Sid-Paros, ov (d- priv. and 8io- 
 PaCvu) : not to be crossed, impass- 
 able. § 476. VII. 
 
 dSiK^u (dSiKOs), dSiK'tjo-u, T|SCKr|a-a, 
 T|S(Ki)Ka, T|SfKr]|iai., TiSiK'^jOnv : do 
 wrong to, injure, be in the wrong. 
 LV. 
 
 a-SiKos, ov (d- priv. and SCkt), cp. 8£- 
 Kaios): unjust. XLVI. 
 
 d-8ivaTos, ov (d- priv. and Svva|iai) : 
 impossible. LX. 
 
 dei, adv. : always, continually, in suc- 
 cession. XLII. 
 
 *Afli)vaios, a, ov : Athenian. XXI. 
 
 dfipotjco (theme dBpoiS-), dflpoto-u, 
 TjOpoKra, T]6poiKa, ■ijGpoLcrp.ai, T|6po£- 
 (r6T)v) : gather together, collect, assem- 
 ble (trans.); MID. gather (intr.), 
 muster, with «!s and ace. XXVII, 
 XXX. 
 
 aflUjiCa, as, T] : discouragement, de- 
 spondency. LIV. 
 
 cl6«|jiii)S (adv. of o6ii|Jios out of heart, 
 discouraged^ : dejectedly. d6v|J.a>s 
 exeiv: be discouraged. 
 
 Al-yiiTTios, a, ov (AH'yvTrTos Egypt): 
 Egyptian. 
 
 alp4a>, alp^o'o), clXov, '^pT]Ka, '^'p'q|xai, 
 Tip^Siiv: take, capttire, seize; MID. 
 choose. LI (cp. XXVI and XXXII). 
 
 alo-6dvo|iai. (theme atcrS-, pres. tense 
 sufifix ov%), alo-6T|a-o|i.ai, (with 
 lengthened theme), •na-6d|j,T|v, fi'o-Bii- 
 (lai: perceive. §§ 441, 442, 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 ato-xp6s, a, 6v ; shavieful, disgraceful. 
 Comp. at<r\f(ov, sup. aVcrxio-ros, 
 § 352. b. XXXV. 
 
 o-lriia, atr^o-ci), 'ifTT)o-o, fJTt|Ka, f|'TT|- 
 (J.01, ■(]T'^6t)v: ask a favor, beg, ask 
 for soraeih\ng from somebody (two 
 aces.) ; MID. ask for oneself, LI. 
 
 atx)i-d\ci>Tos, ov (at\|i^ spear-point 
 
 and dX(o-KO|j,ai) : eaptured by the 
 
 spear ; ot alx|i,d\uToi : the captives. 
 dKovTiJu, dKovTiu, etc. : hit with a 
 
 javelin. 
 dKovo-as, I aor. act. partic. of dKovu : 
 
 having heard. Declined in § 209. 
 dKovu, dKov(i-op,ai, ijKovo-a, dK'^Koa 
 
 (§ 447), T|K0t)(r9r)v (o- is irregularly 
 
 inserted) : hear, hear of, listen, with 
 
 object in gen. or ace, or with gen. 
 
 of person and ace. of thing; may 
 
 be followed by on clause (§ 262), 
 
 or by inf. (§ 262. a), or by partic. 
 
 (§ 442. a). XVII. 
 dKpd-iroXis, etos, f| : high part of a 
 
 city, citadel. XXXII. 
 aKpos, a, ov : top of, highest point of; 
 
 TO axpov (subst.): the height. Cp. 
 
 Lat. acus, aciitus, acies. XXXII. 
 aKtov, ouo-a, ov (for declension cp. 
 
 KuXvwv, § 206): unwilling. Used 
 
 like a partic. in the gen. abs. const. 
 
 XL. 
 dXT]6eil<a (dX7)8<is), dXriflrio-u, t|\^- 
 
 6eva-a: speak the truth. 
 dXriB'^S, & : true. Comp. dXi]6^o-TEpos, 
 
 sup. d\T]8^o-TOTos, § 351. rf. XXXIV. 
 ttXT)6ivds, ■i\, 6v (d\T]8yis) : true, worthy 
 
 of the name, trttsty. 
 dX-Co-Koixai (themes &\- and d\o-), 
 
 d\(6o-0|xai, eaXcov or i]\(ov, caXtoKa 
 
 or ijXuKa: be taken, be captured. 
 
 Used as pass, of atp^u. §§ 573. a, 
 _ 574. 575- LVIIL 
 dXXd (aXXos), conj. : otherwise, but; 
 
 sometimes in an address, ■well! V. 
 aXX^i, adv. (dat. fern, of iiXXos, with 6S(^ 
 
 or X'^P?' understood) : elsewhere, in 
 
 another place or direction. XLVU. 
 dXX^Xoiv, aiv, otv, reciprocal pron. : 
 
 of one another. § 377. XXXVIII. 
 dXXos, T], o : other, another ; besides ; 
 
 preceded by article, the other, the 
 
 rest of. § 124. X. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 3S9 
 
 aWois (adv. of oXXos): otherwise. 
 8,\\(i)$ ^xeiv: see «x«. LIV. 
 
 a\c|iiTa, (iiv, rd : barley meal. 
 
 ji|jia, adv. : at the same time, together 
 with, with dat. &|j.a rfj T||J.^pi} : at 
 the same time with the day, at day- 
 break. &)iia T|\[(i> SvvovTi : at sunset 
 
 ^ (§ 591). XIII. 
 
 &|i,aga, T|S, T) : carriage, wagon, § 140, 
 XI. 
 
 a^uCvuv : comp. of aYa66s. 
 
 'A)<,irpaKU&Ti)s, o«, 6 : an Ambracian, 
 a. citizen of Ambracia in Epirus. 
 
 d)i(|>C, prep, i with gen. concerning, 
 about (but in prose wept is gener- 
 ally used in this sense) ; with ACC. 
 about, ol d|j;,({>l Kvpov : Cyrus and 
 his men (lit. those [the men] about 
 Cyrus), ol d|jii|>* avTov : those about 
 him. XVII. 
 
 ov: modal adv. See §§ 249, 266. a, 
 
 __ 267, 276, 277, 530. a, 531, 545, 546. 
 
 av («l + iiv) = Mv : if, conj. with subjv. 
 §§241,249,399. XXII. 
 
 AvA, prep, with ace. only : up, up along, 
 up through. (In composition also 
 back. ) avd Kpdros : to the limit of 
 strength, at full speed. XXVI. 
 
 dva-PaCv(i) : go up ; go inland (' up ' 
 from the coast) ; m.ount one's horse. 
 XXVI. 
 
 dva7Kd£(i) (theme dvavKaS-, cp. 
 dydyKi)), dvo7Kd(r(i», T|vd7Kacro, 
 TivdyKaKa, T|vd7Koo-(iiai, Tivo^Kd- 
 crOnv : compel, force. LVI. 
 
 dvaYKif, i\%, T| : necessity ; with or 
 without 60-t£(v): it is necessary 
 (§230). XXI. 
 
 dv-dYu (dvd + 0.7(1)) : lead up ; lead 
 'up' from the coast; mid. put to 
 sea (§ 502). XXXIX. 
 
 dva-K^u : light, kindle. 
 
 dva-Xa|i.pdv(a : take up, take along. 
 
 dva-Traiu : make cease ; MID. rest. 
 LIX. 
 
 dvo-<rTp^(|)(D : turn back, turn about 
 
 (intr.) ; PASS, in mid. sense, turn 
 
 about, face about, rally. XLI. 
 dva-TapdTT(D : stir up; pf. pass, partic. 
 
 dva-TETapa7|j.^vov : confused. 
 dvSpdiroSov, ov, T<i (dv^p and iroiis) : 
 
 slave taken in war. LVII. 
 ove«, prep, with gen. only: without. 
 
 LVI. 
 dv-^X"> impf. TJv'^X'"' ^"d 2 aor. TJv- 
 
 ^o^ov with double augment ; hold 
 
 up ; MID. hold oneself up, endure ; 
 
 restrain oneself. 
 dv^p, dvSpds, 6: man; husband. 
 
 a avSpcs o-TpoTtmroi (or "EWt]- 
 
 v«s) : fellow soldiers (or Greeks') . 
 
 Cp. Lat. vir. § 321. XXXI. 
 av6p(i>iros, ov, 6 ; man. ' Cp. Lat. 
 
 homo. § 56. III. 
 dvidu, dviao-u, TivCScra, T|Vid6T|v : t)ex; 
 
 fut. mid. as pass. dviaa-0|jiai. : shall 
 
 be grieved or hurt. 
 dv-to-Ti^ni : make stand up, start up ; 
 
 (intr.) stand up. For intr. tenses 
 ^^ see § 555. _ LVI. 
 dv-o8os, ov, T| (dvd + 6865) : road up, 
 
 way up. XXXIX. 
 dvrC, prep, with gen. only: instead 
 
 of, for ; in comp. : against. 
 
 LVI. 
 dvrCos, a, ov : face to face, opposite, 
 
 against, with dat. €K Tov dvrCov : 
 
 from the opposite side, from the 
 
 opposing line. 
 dvo), adv. (cp. dvd) : up ; up from the 
 
 sea, inland, into the interior. Comp. 
 
 dvuTEpo) {higher), sup. dvcoTdTw 
 
 {highest), § 369. I. XXXVII. 
 d|i.os, a, ov: worthy, worth. With 
 
 gen., § 402. Comp. d£i(6T€p05, sup. 
 
 d|i<JTaTos, § 35i.i5. XXXV. 
 d^Locii (d^LOs), d|uia-u, T||(a)o-a, TJ|(uKa, 
 
 TJ|£ci)noi, Ti^imfliiv: deem worthy; 
 
 claim as one's right, demand, ask. 
 
 LIII. 
 
360 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 dir-a'Y'YAXii) ; bring back a message, 
 
 report. LV. 
 dir-OYw : lead away, lead back. LIV. 
 d-irapci<rKe«os, ov (d- priv. and iropa- 
 
 o-Kevd^u): unprepared. XXXVII. 
 fi-Tras, ao-a, Sv (irds) : all together, 
 
 all. The prefix d- signifies to- 
 gether; cp. a|j.a. XXVIII. 
 air-eifiL (cIjil): go away ; go back, re- 
 
 ttirn. LX. 
 dir-eXaiivu : drive off, ride off. 
 dir-epxo|j.ai, fut. supplied by air-Ei|ii, 
 
 dir-'qXflov, dir-ATiXTjOa : go away, go 
 
 back. Cp. Vocab. XIX. 
 dir-exto : be distant, be away, with gen. 
 
 of person or place and ace. of extent 
 
 of space. XVIII. 
 dir-fjXSov : J or they went away ; see 
 
 d'ir-ep\op.ai. XIX. 
 dirXovSf % oOv ; simple, sincere. § 609. 
 
 L. 
 diri, prep, with gen. only : off, from, 
 
 away from. Cp. Lat. ab. X. 
 diTO-|3\^ir(>> : look away or off. 
 dTro-^iYViJo-KU : abandon the idea of, 
 
 with gen. 
 diro-SiSpao'KW (Si-Spo-o-Koi, Spao-ofiai, 
 
 eSpav, SeSpaKa) : run away by 
 
 stealth; run away from (with 
 _ ace). § 553. LVI. 
 diro-S(Sii>|ii : give back, pay. 
 diro-0vi}(rKw (6vT]0*Ka) die, OavoOjxai, 
 
 £6avov, T^6vi)Ka be dead) : die off, 
 
 die, perish, be slain, be killed. X. 
 d7ro-6iiw: sacrifice what is due on 
 
 account of a vow. 
 diro-KOTTTw : cut off. XLI. 
 diro-Kptvo)jiai (mid. of diro-Kptvci, see 
 
 Kptvu) : give one's decision, answer, 
 
 reply. With 8ti clause, § 669, I. 
 
 LV. 
 diro-KTetvii) (ktcCvo) for Ktiv-ya, theme 
 
 KT6V-, kill, KTEVU, EKT€lVa, tKTOVtt) : 
 
 put to death, slay, kill. The pass, is 
 supplied by diro-Bvu'o-Ku. LV. 
 
 dira-Xap,pdv<i> : take or receive back ; 
 take off, cut off (§ 444. I. 12). 
 XXXIII. 
 
 diro-XcCTru : leave behind, desert, aban- 
 don. XLII. 
 
 dir-dXXv|i.i (5XXi)(i.i for fiX-vS-(ii, themes 
 6\-, 6\€-, destroy, oka, oKara, 6\u- 
 \€Ka [§ 447] and 2 pf. oXuXa, a\6- 
 |jiir)v) : destroy utterly, lose ; mid. 
 and 2 pf. 3.c\.., perish, be lost. LIX. 
 
 d'iro-ir^|ji.'ir<i) : send off or away, dis- 
 miss. X. 
 
 dTro-irX^w : sail off or away. LI. 
 
 diropCa, as, t| (cp. ii-iropos, iro- 
 pEvofiai.) : lack of way out, embar- 
 rassment, difficulty, XLVII. 
 
 airopos, ov: impassable; needy, with- 
 out resources (§ 232). § 118. 
 IIL 
 
 diro-<nrd(D, -o-irdo-o), -^<nra<ro, 
 -co-iraKa, -^crira(r|J.ai, -EO-irdcOTjv ; 
 draw away. 
 
 diro-o-w^o) ; save from something, bring 
 safely back. LVIII. 
 
 d7ro-4>ei7<i> : flee away, escape. XII. 
 
 dpa, post-positive particle : then (in- 
 ferential) . 
 
 dp-yvpiov, ov, TO : silver, money. 
 L. 
 
 dp-yvpofis, a, ovv (cp. dpYvpiov): of 
 silver, silver. § 609. L. 
 
 dpETirj, fis, T| (cp. ap-io-TOs): fit- 
 ness, excellence, bravery; virtue, 
 noble-mindedness, magnanimity, 
 XXXVII. 
 
 'Apiatos, ov, 6: Ariaeus, a Persian 
 nobleman. 01 p-erd'ApiaCov; Ari- 
 aeus and his men (§ 557). XXV. 
 
 'ApCo-Tiiriros, ov, 6: Aristippus, a 
 Thessalian general of mercenary 
 soldiers. XIX. 
 
 dpio-Tos : see dYuSiSs. 
 
 ap)jia, aros, t6 : chariot for use in 
 battle. See p. 252, Fig. 22. 
 LVI. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 361 
 
 6L(m&t,a (theme cipiraS-), dpirduru 
 (§ 153) and 6.pird<ro|ioi, (dep.), 
 ijpiracra (§ 164), ijpiraKa (§ 432. 
 e, /), i^pira(r|iai. (§ 467. a), t|pir(l- 
 o-6iiv (§ 387. 2): seize, make booty 
 of, plunder. § 487. I. 
 
 'ApT07ep<ni|s, ou, 6 ; Artagerses, com- 
 mander of the Persian king's body- 
 guard of six thousand. 
 
 'ApTa|6p|T]s, 01), 6; Artaxerxes ; in 
 this book, Artaxerxes II, king ■ of 
 Persia is meant, the son of Darius 
 and Parysatis, and brother of Cyrus. 
 XIV. 
 
 'ApTairoTTis, o«, 6: Artapates, a 
 friend of Cyrus. XXXV. 
 
 dpxatos, o, ov (apx.Vi) : primitive, of 
 old, old, ancient, to dpxaiov (adv. 
 ace.) : of old, form.erly. XXVII. 
 
 apx^, fis, T) : beginning, rule, province, 
 empire. § 93. VI. 
 
 apxw (cp. apx^), dpgu, ^p|a (§ 164), 
 'qpYp.ai, TipxS'Hv : begin, rule, com- 
 mand, with gen.; mid. begin, with 
 gen. or inf. VIII, XXXIV. 
 
 ci,px<iiv, ovTos, o : ruler, commander. 
 Really the pres. masc. partic. of 
 opxo>. §§ 195. 199. 200. XVIII. 
 
 do-irfe, £Sos, T) : shield. See p. 97, 
 Fig. 10. §§ 195, 196. XVIII. 
 
 oo-Tu, eus, T<S : town. §282. XXVII. 
 
 do-ifiaX'fis, ^s: secure, safe (§ 275). 
 hi do-(|>aXEt : in safety. Comp. 
 da-<f>a\^o'T€pos, sup. do-<(>aX60"TaTOS, 
 §3Si.</. XXVI, XXXV. 
 
 do-<t>a\us, adv. (tto-(|)aX^s) : securely, 
 safely. Comp. do-<|>aX^o-Tepov, sup. 
 do-<|)aXeo-TOTa, §§ 366, 368. 
 XXXVII. 
 
 Sts, adv. (neut. pi. of ocr-re): as, 
 since, accompanying causal partic. 
 
 avTi)S : see airov. 
 
 airds, % 6, as intensive pron. : self, 
 very; when preceded by article, 
 same; in gen., dat., and ace, used 
 
 as pron. of third pers. : him, her, it, 
 them. §§ 122, 123, 127, 307, 308. 
 X. 
 
 avTov (cp. airds), adv. ; in the very 
 place, here, there. LIX. 
 
 avToO, f\s, ov (contracted from eov- 
 Tov), reflexive pron. of third pers.: 
 of himself, herself, etc. §§ 376. 3, 
 379. XXXVIII. 
 
 d<|>-ai.pio|j,ai (mid, of aip^u): take 
 away for oneself, deprive, rob 
 somebody i?/" something (two aces.). 
 LI. 
 
 dij>av'^S, ^s : invisible, out of sight. 
 XXVI. 
 
 d(f>-fr||ii, : let go away, dismiss. LVII. 
 
 d(f>-iK-vE-0|ji.ai. (theme ik-; ve- appears 
 only in pres. system), d4>-C|o|jiai, 
 d4>-lKi|jiT|V, d<|>-i'Y|j.ai, dep. mid. : 
 arrive, come. LI. 
 
 d-4>i>XaKTos, ov (d- priv. and <|)v- 
 XdrTw), unguarded ; off one' s guard. 
 
 _ § 476. IV. 
 
 'Axo.i.<is, oB, 6 : an Achaean, inhabit- 
 ant of Achaea. XXVI. 
 
 B 
 
 BaPuX(6v, uvos, T] : Babylon. XXXII. 
 
 Paflis, eio, il : deep. XLVIII. 
 
 ^aCvu (themes Pa- or Pt]-, Pav-), 
 P^o-o(j,oi, 6Pt]v (§ 553), P^Ptiko 
 (§ 432. a): go. See dva-palvii>, 
 Si.a-Pa(v(i>, etc. 
 
 pdXXu (for PaX -f yia, themes PaX-, 
 PXr)-), PaXu, (PaXov, PepXT|Ka, Pc- 
 pXr||j.ai., £pX<i6T]v: throw, hurl, pelt. 
 Often with ace. of pers. and dat. of 
 means. LVII. 
 
 PapPapiKds, <i, dv (Pdppapos): for- 
 eign, barbarian, not Greek, to 
 PapPapiKdv: the barbarian force. 
 LVIII. 
 
 PappapiKus : in a foreign tongue, in 
 the Persian language. 
 
362 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 pdppapoS} 01), 6 : foreigner ^ barbarian. 
 VIII. 
 
 pa(ri\cCa, as, t| (Pao-i\««a)): kingddm. 
 LVI. 
 
 |3o(rCXeios, o'v (pa<riX{vs): of a king, 
 royal. rd Pao-tXtio (neut. pi. 
 subst.): the royal buildings, the 
 palace, XIX. 
 
 Paa-iXeiis, ^»S, 6, king. §§ 290, 292. 
 XXVIII. 
 
 Pa<rL\£vii) (Pao-iXcvs), Pao-iXcii<r(i>, 
 iPao-fXcvo-a : be king, rule as king. 
 XIX. 
 
 Pao-iXiKds, if), 6v (Pao-i\eis, PacrC- 
 Xuas): kinglike, fit to be king; 
 royal. XXXV. 
 
 P^Xtio-tos : see a-ya66s. 
 
 PcXrtuv, lov : see d^aOds. 
 
 Piatcos, adv. : with might, violetitly. 
 
 ptos, ov, 6 : living, subsistence, liveli- 
 hood. Bio-logy (X.6-yos). 
 
 pXdirTu (theme pXaP-), pXdt|/u, 
 £p\a<|(a, plpXa<|>a, pE'p\a|ji|iai, 
 ip\d4>6Tiv, 2 aor. pass. ipXdpr^v: 
 hurt, harm. §§ 408, 414, 484, 487, 
 642. XLI. 
 
 p\4ir(D, pXE<|/0|iai, cp\£i|ia: look. 
 XXIX. 
 
 Podu, Po^(ro|i,ai, 4pdT)o-a: cry out, 
 shout. 
 
 Po^, fjs, T] : outcry, shouting. 
 
 Poi]-6€<D, PoT]9TJ(r<o, ipo^Brio-a, PcPoyj- 
 6nKa, PEPo^6T)fi.ai : run to the rescue 
 at an outcry, run to assist, assist. 
 
 BoiioTios, a, ov : Boeotian, an inhabit- 
 ant of Boeotia. XIV. 
 
 PovXevo), pov\ev<ro>, ipoifXevcra, pePov- 
 X.cuKa, PEPovXeufjLai, €povXcvOT]v : 
 plan, devise; the simple verb is 
 commonly dep. mid. povXcvoiiai: 
 take counsel with oneself, plan, 
 deliberate. Cp. liri-PovXcvu and 
 o-v)i,-Pou\evu. XXXII. 
 
 Pov\o|i,ai, PovXifjo-Oftai (with length- 
 ened theme), PePov\i])i,ai, ipovX^- 
 
 flr|v (§ 3S9), dep. pass. : wish. 
 
 XXX. 
 PoSs, poos, 6, Ti : ox, cow. Cp. Lat. 
 
 bos. § 290. XXVIII. 
 PpaSicDS : slowly. 
 Ppaxvs, eto, i : short. Comp. Ppaxv- 
 
 Tcpos, sup. PpaxtiTaTOs, § 351. <. 
 
 PpaxvTcpa: a shorter distance 
 
 (§460). XXXV. 
 
 ■ydp, postpositive conj. ; for, and in 
 fact; sometimes K'/iy .' VIII. 
 
 74, enclitic particle, regularly following 
 the emphatic word : certainly, surely, 
 at least, etc. LIV. 
 
 ■yeCrov, ovos, 6 : neighbor. § 220. XX. 
 
 7^vos, ous, TO : kinship, family, birth. 
 I-.2A. genus, gejis. XXXI. 
 
 7cppo-(j>6pos, OV, 6 (^eppov wicker 
 shield and (j>Epu): one who car- 
 ries a wicker shield, wicker-shield 
 bearer. 
 
 7«-ucD, ■yevo-a, EYCvra, ■y^'y€\)(ioi : give a 
 taste of; MID. taste, with gen. 
 
 ^(ijiiipa, as, t) : bridge. § 140. XI. 
 
 V*i) iis> h '■ earth, land. § 594. L. 
 
 YC^yvofiai (for ■yi-'Ytv-o-nai, redupli- 
 cated pres. from theme 7£v-), -yev^j- 
 o-0|jiai (theme -yev-t)-), I7ev6|ii|v, 
 ■y^-yova (§ 445), y€y£vii|j.ai (§ 456): 
 become, be born, be, get; happen, 
 arise, take place, turn out. XXXII. 
 
 •yiyviio-Koj (redu]''Ucated pres. from 
 theme ■yvo-, with pres. suffix o-k%), 
 7V(6a'op.aL, tyvtav, cyvtoKa, c-yvb)(r|Jiat, 
 lyv<Jo-9'nv : learn, know, jttdge, with 
 8ti or partic. or inf. in indir. disc. 
 Cp. I. at. (g)nosco, l-gnotus. §§ 573. 
 b, 574, 575- LV. 
 
 ^vcGfiT), i^s, T) ("yiw-vai) : opinion, juc^ 
 9nent ; plan, proposition; under- 
 standing. XXIX. 
 
 ■yoveiis, e'ws, 6 ^yi-yvoiiai.): parent. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 363 
 
 Y<5vv, ^ovaros, rrf : knee. Lat. genii. 
 
 §336.6. xxxm. 
 
 7pd(|>u, 7pd\|/(o, 27pat|;a, 'Y^7pa<|>a, y^- 
 
 7pa|i.[iai (§ 465. a) , iypi,^T\v : write. 
 
 §§409,415. XXIV. 
 7U|ivd£(i) (theme 7V|iva8-), 7V|i,vii<r(o, 
 
 l7u|i,va(ra,7e7i)ivaKa,7e7v|iva(r|i,ai, 
 
 47V|ivd<r6i)v : exercise, Cp. 7u|i,v^s. 
 
 XLII. 
 7U|Jiv^S, f^TOs, 6 : light-armed warrior, 
 
 javelin Hurler, bowman, or slinger. 
 
 XXI. 
 rv|xvi.ds, dSos, t| : Gymnias, a city in 
 
 Armenia. 
 7V|i,vik6s, ^, 6v : gymnastic, athletic. 
 7uv^, 7vvaiK6s, '{|: woman, wife. 
 
 § 336. I. XXXIII. 
 
 SaKpvu, SaKpuo-ci), ISdKpvira: weep. 
 8apciK6s, ov, 6 : daric, a Persian gold 
 
 coin, worth about ^5.40. XXII. 
 ASpetos, ov, 6 : Darius. The person 
 
 indicated in this book is Darius II, 
 
 king of Persia, father of Artaxerxes 
 
 II and Cyrus the Younger. XVIII. 
 8a<r)i,ds, ov, 6: tribute, tax. XXVII. 
 Sao-vs, «io, V : thickly grown, thickly 
 
 wooded, with dat. (instrumental). 
 
 Cp. Lat. densus. XXVIII. 
 W, postpositive conj. : and, but, weaker 
 
 than dX\d. V. 
 S^Sia, 2 pf. of [ii-formation, same in 
 
 meaning as S^SoiKa: fear; partic. 
 
 SeSiiis: fearing {% 568). 
 S^SoiKa, pf. with. pres. meaning (from 
 
 SeCSu): fear; i aor. cSdo-a. Cp. 
 
 8etv(Ss. XLIV. 
 6^1), subjv. of Stt, impers. verb : it is 
 
 necessary. XXIII. 
 Sci (contracted from S&i), fut. Sf/jo-ci., 
 
 aor. l8^T|o-e, impers. verb : it is neces- 
 sary. §§ 223, 479. XX. 
 SeCSci) (pres. not found in prose), aor. 
 
 cStio-a, 2 pf. 8^8oiKa and ((ii-form) 
 8^810 : fear ; the pf. forms have pres. 
 meaning. See 8('SoiKa. 
 
 8eCk-vv|u (and 8EiK-vii«i>, theme 8«i.k-), 
 Sc[|(D, c8Ei|a, 848eix<>|'> 8^8ci,7|jiat, I8ct- 
 yi^v : show, point out. §§579,580, 
 581, 619, 648. LIX. 
 
 Seikv^s, pres. act. partic. of 8eCkvv|jii.- 
 showing. Declined in § 619. 
 
 8c(\i), 1)5, \\ : afternoon, early or 
 late. 
 
 8civ6s, i\, 6v : fearful, terrible, fright- 
 ful ; skillful. tA 8av6v (subst.): 
 danger. XLII. 
 
 8€Co'ds : see 8€C8co, 
 
 S^KO, indecl. : ten. Lat. decern. XI. 
 
 S«v8pov, ov, t6 : tree. Dat. pi. 8^v8pois 
 and SIvSpco'i (from nom. t6 8^v8pos) . 
 XXVIII. 
 
 8€|i<is, o, 6v : right, on the right hand 
 or side. 8c|i.a, as, T| (supply x^'p) '• 
 the right hand, as a pledge, ra 
 %i\\,h, ToO K^paros: the right (of 
 the') wing. Lat. dexter, LVIII. 
 
 8foi, opt. of 8Et : it is necessary ( Vocab. 
 XX). XXXVII. 
 
 8^a|i.ai,^c'^<ro|jiai, S«8^i)|jiai,, I8e^6i)v 
 (cp. § 389), dep. pass. : want, need; 
 desire, ask, beg. Often with gen. or 
 with gen. of pers. and inf. Cp. 8«i. 
 LIX. 
 
 8lp|i.a, aros, rd : hide, skin. Dermato- 
 logy, epi-dermis. 
 
 8«<riniTtis, ov, 6 : master. Voc. 8i- 
 o-TTOTa. XLVIII. 
 
 SeiiTCpos, a, ov: second, (ri) Sevte- 
 pov : for the second time. 
 
 8^X0|iai, S4|o)j.ai, ESE|d|iir|v, 8^8E7|tai, 
 IS^X^'T' '■ ''eceive, accept. XXXII. 
 
 8^ : postpositive particle, emphasizing 
 the preceding word. %i\ is difficult 
 to render adequately, but is some- ^ 
 times translated by now, then, w 
 accordingly, very, in truth, indeed, 
 XXI. 
 
364 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 8{|\os, T), ov : plain, clear, evident. 
 
 See § 449 and a. XV. 
 St)X6cd (Sfi\os)> 8T|\ii(r(i>, IS'^Xucra, 
 
 SeS^XuKa, 8cS^\(i>|i,ai, ISt)Xi&6t|v : 
 
 show, make evident, §§ 529, 622. 
 a, 643. LIII. 
 
 8t|Xuv, pres. act. partic. of 8r|X6ii> ; 
 showing. Declined in § 622. a. 
 
 8i(i, prep. : with gen. through ; with 
 ACC. on account of, by means of. XI. 
 
 8ia-PaCvu : go across, cross. XI. 
 
 8ia-Pd\\<i) : accuse falsely, slander. 
 LVIII. 
 
 Sio-Par^os, a, ov (verbal adj. of 8ia- 
 ^aCvu, theme Pa-) : necessary to be 
 crossed. § 477. i. XLVIII. 
 
 8ia-PaTds, <), 6v (verbal adj. of 810- 
 PaCvu, theme Po-): able to be 
 crossed, fordable {pi a river). Cp. 
 d-8id-PaTos. § 475. XLVIII. 
 
 8ia-pyj(ro|iai : fut.of8ia-Po£v<i)(Vocab. 
 XI). XXXII. 
 
 Sia-8C8<i>)i,i : give from hand to hand, 
 distribute. LVIII. 
 
 8io-K<itrT<i) : cut through, cut in pieces, 
 break through. XLI. 
 
 8taK6<ri,oi, ai, o: two hundred: § 421. 
 
 8ia-X^Y0|xai (cp. Xe-yai say), 8ia- 
 X^|o)i.ai, irreg. pf. 8i-E(XE'Y)i,ai, 
 8i-«Xex6lv (§ 389), dep. pass.: 
 converse, with dat. (§ 317). XXX. 
 
 8iar-XeCir(d : leave an interval, be dis- 
 tant. 
 
 8ia-irpdTT0|iai (cp. irpaTTco), 8to- 
 ^pa^op,ai, 8i-e'irpa|dp,T)v, 8ia- 
 ir4irpa-y|jioi : carry through to the 
 end, bring about, accomplish, effect 
 (for oneself); manage that, with 
 ace. and inf. or Sirois clause (§ 535. 
 a). XXXIV. 
 
 Si-apird£<i> : tear in pieces, plunder 
 utterly or thoroughly, sack. XIV. 
 
 Sia-o-ircCpco (circCpco sow, (rircpu, 
 co-ircipa, e'o-irap|jiai, eo-irdpiiv) : scat- 
 ter ; MID. (of soldiers) scatter. 
 
 SiSd-o-Ku (theme SiSax-), 8i.8d$<i>, ^SC- 
 
 8a£a, 8ES(8axa, 8c8C8aY)iai, {8i.8d- 
 
 X^iv : teach. LX. 
 SiSovs. pres. act. partic. of SC8o)|jli: 
 
 giving. Declined in § 621. 
 8£8(op.i, 8c&(r(i>, £8(dKa and eSorov, 8^ 
 
 SuKa, 8E'8op.ai, eSoSriv : give, some- 
 times offer (in pres. and impf). 
 
 8Ckt]v SiSdvai : give satisfaction, 
 
 suffer punishment. Cp. Supov. 
 
 Lat. do, donum. §§ 570, 571, 572, 
 
 621, 646. LVIII. 
 Si-cCpY(D (etpyw shut out, elp^u, etp^a, 
 
 etpYjiai, 6tpx9t|v): separate, shut off. 
 8i-e'pxo|xai : go through, travel, spread 
 
 with Xo-yos (report) as subj. See 
 
 81-11X60V. 
 8i.-ex'» : is apart, be separated. XVII. 
 Si-f|X6ov, 2 aor. : /or they went through, 
 
 traveled; spread with Xd^os {word 
 
 or report) as subject. See Si-Epxop.ai.. 
 
 XXIV. 
 AiC: see Zevs. 
 8i-£(rT'r)|jii : set apart ; intr. tenses, 
 
 stand apart, open ranks. 
 SCKaios, a, ov (SCkt]) : just. Conip. Si- 
 
 KaioTspos, sup. SiKaidraros, § 35 1. a:. 
 
 XXV, XXXV. 
 8iKaC<i)s, adv. (8CKaios) : justly. Comp. 
 
 SiKaioTEpov, sup. SiKaioTara, §§ 366, 
 
 368. XXV, XXXVII. 
 8£ki], Tis, T) : justice, deserts. %iKt\v 
 
 eiri-TiBe'vai : inflict punishment on 
 
 somebody (dat.). Siki]v SiSdvai: 
 
 give satisfaction, suffer punishment 
 
 (§576). IX. 
 Sior-xtXioi,ai, a: twothousand. § 421. 
 8i.iaKTeos, a, ov (verbal adj. of SiciKu): 
 
 necessary to be pursued. § 477. 2. 
 
 XLVIII. 
 SiciKo), Siu|ci> or SiiS|o|xai,, l8C<i)^a, Sc- 
 
 SCuxci, SeSC<i>7|Jiai,48iux6'nv : pursue. 
 
 XVII. 
 8iupv|, vxos, T] : trench, canal. §187, 
 
 XVII. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 365 
 
 SoKcti) (theme 80K-, but SoKt- in pres. 
 system), S6^(i), cSo^a, 8^8071101, 486- 
 X0riv : seem, be reputed ; seem, best; 
 think. § 512. LI. 
 
 SiXix^S) ""> ° ■ long foot-race, from six 
 to twenty-four times the length of 
 the stadium. SdXixov 6«iv : run the 
 long race. 
 
 8dpv, 86paTOS, ri : spear of a Greek 
 hoplite. See p. 152, Fig. 19. 
 § 336. s. XXXIII. 
 
 SouTT^d), ISovirijo-a : strike heavily, 
 clash, with dat. (of instrument) and 
 irpis with ace. 
 
 ApaKovTios, o«, 6 : Dracontias, a sol- 
 dier from Sparta. 
 
 8pEiravT|-4>6pos, ov : scythe-bearing, epi- 
 thet of two-wheeled Asiatic chariots, 
 which carried, for use on the battle 
 field, scythes fixed to the axles and 
 pointed obliquely downward. See 
 p. 270, Fig. 25. 
 
 8p6|j,os, ov, 6 (cp. S8pafiov): a run; 
 race course (^^ ^14.). 8p6|i<j>: on the 
 run. Btiv 8p6|ji,<f>: run with speed, 
 run fast, charge on the run. See 
 p. 79, Fig. 6. XII. 
 
 8iva-p.ai, 8vv^a-op.ai, 8c8vv'q(jLaL, cSu- 
 VT|6t]v (or 'ii8w^8i]v), dep. pass. : be 
 able. Cp. 8vva|j.is. LVI. 
 
 %vva,f,\%,iwi,\: force, strength. XXVII. 
 
 Suvards, ifj, dv (Sivajiai) : able, strong; 
 possible. Cp. § 333. XXXIV. 
 
 Sdi/Qi : see 8v(i). 
 
 8«o, gen. and dat. Svolv, but generally 
 used indeclinably : two. Lat. duo. 
 §423. XV. 
 
 8vM (and 8?»v<i)), Sdru, c8u(ra (trans.), 
 eSuv (intr.), 8^8vKa, 848u)iai, l8i8T|v : 
 enter, set (used of the sun). §§ 580, 
 582, 648. LIX. 
 
 Si&-8EKa (8iio -f 8^Ka), indecl. : twelve. 
 XXXI. 
 
 Supov, ou, t6: gift. Cp. Lat. donum. 
 XLIII. 
 
 E 
 Idv = cl -f av, conj. with subjv. : if, 
 
 _ §§241,399. xxu. 
 
 lavTov, ijs, o€, reflexive pron. of third 
 pers. : ofhimselfherselfttc. §§376. 
 
 3, 3J9. xxxvm. 
 
 Id<i>, iatra, cCSo-a, El'aKa, E)!a)iai, El£6t)v : 
 permit, allow, let. The augment is 
 irreg. §§ 515.3, 518. a. LII. 
 
 I^Y^vs, adv. : near, with gen. Comp. 
 I'yyuTepov or e-y^wripw, sup. ky^- 
 Tara or l^yyuTaTd), § 369. 2. 
 XXXVII. 
 
 €710, l|iov or [lOD : /. Lat. ego. §§ 304, 
 306,308. XXIX. 
 
 E8ci.o-a: see SiSoiKa. 
 
 ESpap.ov : see rpex". XI. 
 
 I6c'\(i), l6cX<^<r<ii (with lengthened 
 theme), T|6E'XT|(ra, T|6«XT|Ka: wish, 
 desire. VI. 
 
 ^'6vos, ovs, t6 : nation, tribe. Ethno- 
 logy. 
 
 el, proclitic conj. : if. cl (ifj : if not, 
 except (§557)' el Ti: whatsoever 
 (§ 232). §§ 106, 242, 267, 416, 
 545. After an interr. verb or 
 equivalent ; whether, introducing an 
 indirect question. §§ 343. a, 363. 
 VII, XXXIV. 
 
 el 7dp: used in wishes; see §§ 584, 
 
 585- 
 
 etSov, 2 aor. : / or they saw. Subjv. 
 (8(1), opt. ISoipLi, imv. 184 (§ 301. a'), 
 inf. ISeiv, partic. I8<&v. See opdu. 
 XIX. 
 
 elSu, el8(&$ : see ot8a. 
 
 el9e : used in wishes; see §§ 584, 585. 
 
 etKOo-i(v), indecl. : twenty. XXVI, 
 
 et\T)(|>a : see Xafipdvco. 
 
 ei\6)iT|v, 2 aor. mid. of etXov : / took 
 for myself, I chose. Subjv. il\ii)|iai, 
 opt. e\o(|ir|v, imv. IXov, inf. {\l- 
 <r6ai, partic. e\d|jievo$. See atp^u, 
 XXXII. 
 
366 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 elXov, 2 aor. : / or they took, seized. 
 Subjv, KXu, opl. e\oi|», imv. S\€, 
 inf. IXetv, partic. (\uv. See atp«u. 
 XXVI. 
 
 cl-|i,i, impf. Tja: go, shall go ; pres. 
 serving as ful. of Epxcjiai. § 651. 
 LX. 
 
 et|j,C, impf. T) or ^v, fut. eiro|xai : am, 
 be. §§ loi, 102, etc., 650. VII. 
 
 ttvai : see el|xC. VII. 
 
 etirov, 2 aor. : T or they said. Subjv. 
 etirio, opt. eitiroi|jii, imv. etir^ (§ 301. a), 
 inf. AtciXv, partic. stiruv. With oti. 
 that and finite verb, § 262. In the 
 sense of commanded, proposed, urged, 
 elirov is followed by the inf.; cp. § 98. 
 XXIV, XXXII. 
 
 c1!pT]Ka, pf. ; / have said, I have men- 
 tioned. § 448. Supplies missing 
 pf. act. of X^Yu say. XLV. 
 
 «tp<jvT|, us, T] : peace. LVII. 
 
 els, )i.Ca, ^v, gen. Ivos, (iids, evds : one. 
 § 422. XLIII. 
 
 els, proclitic prep, with ace. only ; into, 
 to ; for ; with numerals, to the num- 
 ber of, about (§ 219). els tt^v eo-ire- 
 pav: into the evening, at evening. V. 
 
 «l<r-tt7co: lead in. XXXV. 
 
 etcr-eXavvu : drive in, ride or march 
 in, with els and ace. XXXVIII. 
 
 elo--ii\flov, 2 aor. of el(r-epxo)i,ai : /or 
 they came in, entered. XXI. 
 
 el'o-u, adv. : within, with gen. XLVI. 
 
 elra, adv. : then, thereupon. X. 
 
 elxov (§ 80): see ex.<i). 
 
 Ik, before a vowel l|, proclitic prep, 
 with gen. only : out from, from, V. 
 
 ilKacTTos, r), ov : each ; used in predi- 
 cate position to modify a noun with 
 the article; used also without the 
 article. XXIl. 
 
 iKdrepos, a, ov : each. 
 
 iKar^pwSev: from both sides, on both 
 sides. 
 
 eKaWpuTC : in both directions. 
 
 eKardv, indecl. : hundred. XV. 
 ^K-Pao-iS) ecos, T| (eK-Palvci>); passage 
 
 out, mountain pass. L. 
 iKei, adv.': there. 
 eKeivos, i\, : that, that one, that man ; 
 
 he, him, etc. §§ 174, 175. a, 176, 
 
 307. _xv. 
 
 lKKXT)o-(a, as, T| (eK-Ka\e'ci> summon 
 forth): assembly. XXXVIIl. 
 
 iK-KXtvu (KXtvu bend, kXivu, eKXlva, 
 KCKXipiai, eKXl6T)v and ckXIvtiv): 
 bend out of line, turn in flight. 
 
 eK-Xeliro) : leave out, abandon ; (intr.) 
 leave off, fail LVIII. 
 
 iK-irXew: sail forth, sail off. 
 
 eK-irX'fiTToi (irX-^iTTto, theme ttXiiy- 
 or irXaY", strike, irX^lo), eirXT||a, 
 ireirXTiya, ir^irX-q'yp.ai, eirX^Y^v, but 
 in comp. -eirXd-yTiv) : strike out of 
 one's wits, terrify utterly, bewilder. 
 § 466. a. XLI. 
 
 eXavvu (theme IXa-; the pres. is for 
 eXo-vu-<i)), IXu (§ 544. a), liXao-o 
 (§ 165), eX^XaKa (§ 447), IX^jXa- 
 |tai, TJXd8T|v: drive, ride, march. 
 XV. 
 
 IXdxio-TOs : see oXCyos. 
 
 eXeXt^m, T|Xe'Xi|a (eXeXev a war cry): 
 shout eXeXeO, raise the war cry, cry 
 out. 
 
 eX^XaKa : see IXavvto. 
 
 IX'ijXvSa : see epxo|i.ai. 
 
 eX9e' : imv. of ^XBov (Spxo|i.ai), § 301, «. 
 
 eX6(i): subjv. of ^X6ov (8pxo|i.ai). 
 XXII. 
 
 'EXXds, d8os, r\ : Hellas, the name 
 given by the Hellenes to their own 
 country. From the Romans they re- 
 ceived the appellation Greeks (Lat. 
 Graect), and their land was called 
 Greece (Lat. Graecia). XVIII. 
 
 "EXXriv, iivos, 6 : a Greek. XX. 
 
 'EXXt]vik6s, ■(\, 6v ("EXXijv): Hellenic, 
 Greek. to'EXXtjvikov (neut.subst.): 
 the Greek force. XXVII, XXXIX. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 Z(>1 
 
 'EXX'qviKfis, adv.: in the Greek 
 
 tongue, in Greek. 
 'E\\r|vCs, C8os ("EWiiv), fem. adj.: 
 
 Greek. 
 ifiavToi, fls, reflexive pron. of first 
 
 pers. : of myself, etc. §§ 376. I, 
 
 379. XXXVIII. 
 i)i^Pd\\<i>: attack. 
 Ijids, ■fj, 6v (cp. ejioS, gen. of hi&i) : 
 
 my, mine. § 126. X. 
 S|iMrpoo-6Ev, adv. (Iv + irpdo-Bcv) : in 
 
 front, before, sometimes with gen. 
 
 XLVII. 
 hi, prochtic prep, with dat. only ; in ; 
 
 among. II. 
 cvS^Karos, T|, ov (Sv-ScKa eleven') : 
 
 eleventh. 
 SvSov, adv. : within. 01 cvSov : those 
 
 within. XLI. 
 ev-Svu : pat on. § 588. 
 ifvEKa, prep, with gen. only : for the 
 
 sake of. Usually after its noun. 
 cv6a, rel. adv. : where ; dem. : there ; 
 
 of time, ?v6o S^j : then indeed. 
 
 XLIV. 
 Sv6a-^£p (strengthened 'evBa): just 
 
 where, where ; the word very may 
 
 be used with the antecedent to 
 
 translate -ircp. 
 ?v06v, rel. adv. : whence, from which, 
 
 where. XXIV. 
 cvioi, 01, a (from tvi \i.e. tv-€<rTi] + 
 
 ol): some. XLV. 
 ev-vo^<i> : have in mind. 
 lvTav6a, adv. : there, thither. VI. 
 IvrefiOev, adv. : thence ; of time, then. 
 
 XI. 
 &-TV7xAvc»: chance upon, happen 
 
 upon, come upon by chance, en- 
 counter, with dat. XLVII. 
 'EvvdXios, ov, 6: Enyalius, a name 
 
 of Ares, the Greek god of war. 
 ij: indecl. ; six. 'LaX. sex. §421. 
 i| : see Ik. 
 It-A-yo) : lead out, induce (§ 394) . X. 
 
 l^aKicr-xtXioi., 01, o: six thousand. 
 
 _ §421. 
 
 l|aK6o-ioi, ai, a (^): six hundred. 
 
 §421. 
 I|-airard(i) (Airardu deceive, &ira- 
 
 T'/jo-u, TjirdTTio-a, t|irdTTiKO, Tjird- 
 
 t-t|)i,ai, fjiroTfiOiiv) : utterly deceive, 
 
 cheat. LIV. 
 {JoirXvrjs, adv. : suddenly. 
 4-ei(i.i, (elui) : go out, go forth. LX. 
 l$-cXavv(i): drive out; march out or 
 
 forth. XI. 
 e^-^pXoP'Oi. fut. I^-Eiiii («I|»i), 2 aor. 
 
 l|-fi\6ov, 2 pf. €|-c\^\v6a : go forth. 
 
 Cp. XXV. 
 €|-€(rTi(v), 3 sing, of e|-eini (el|iC) : it 
 
 is possible or permitted (§ 223). 
 
 IJhSv: it being possible {^ s^^)- XX. 
 II^KOvra (8|), indecl. ^ j«/)/. § 421. 
 l^-fiXOov, 2 aor. ; / or they went forth. 
 
 XXV. 
 IJ-'^X^I '■ see 4|-ii7ci>. 
 l^-i.KvEO|j.ai (cp. d<|>-iKvlo|i,ai) : reach, 
 
 reach the mark. 
 e|-6v: see €|e<rTt(v). 
 l|-air\C£(i> : arm fully ; UU>. fully arm 
 
 oneself. 
 e|<i), adv. : without, outside, sometimes 
 
 with gen. 01 «|<i) : those without. 
 
 XLI. 
 J^ci): see €Xo>. 
 Iirov (liret + ov), conj. with subjv. ^ 
 
 when (§ 248. 2. a) ; whenever 
 
 (§ 400). 
 frirtC, temporal conj. : when, after 
 
 (§ 167); whenever (§ 417); causal 
 
 conj. : since (§ 310). XIV, XXIX. 
 lirciSdv (4ir«iS<i + ov), conj. with subjv. ; 
 
 when, after (§ 248. 2. a); when- 
 ever (§ 400). l^ciSdv ToxnTTa: 
 
 as soon as (§ 533). XXIII. 
 iirciS^ (eiret and 8<i), temporal tunj. : 
 
 when, after (§ 167); causal conj.; 
 
 «'k« (§,310). ilir6i.8t| rdxuTTO : oj 
 
 soon as. XIV,' 
 
368 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 cir-eiftt (etiii): go or come on, approach. 
 LX. 
 
 lireC-irsp (strengthened lirei), causal 
 cori].: since indeed {% yd). XXIX. 
 
 eireiTO, adv. : thereupon, then, next. 
 XXXVI. 
 
 liT'^v (lireC + ov), conj. with subjv. : 
 when (§ 248. ^. rt); whenever 
 (§ 400). 
 
 tirJ, prep. : with gen. on, in the time 
 of; with DAT. on, upon, at, in the 
 power of, for ; with ACC. against 
 (often with idea of hostility), to, 
 upon; after, i.e. to get (§§ 405, 
 451). eirl ToiiTois : upon this, 
 thereupon (§ 347). eirl iroXv : for 
 a long distance (§ 557). VIII. 
 
 iTri-pOTjXeuo) : plot against, with dat. 
 X. 
 
 iiri-povX^, 9\'s, T) : plot (against). Cp. 
 4iri-Po«\.€iai. XXXVIII. 
 
 €iri-8£CKvi)(ii : show, point out ; mid. in 
 sense of act., and also distinguish 
 oneself. LIX. 
 
 Iiri-Svii.^u, liri.-65|Ji<icrci), «ir-«6u;Ji.Ti(ra : 
 have one's heart set on, yearn, de- 
 sire, with inf. or gen. LII. 
 
 liri-KCtiiirTU (KO|iirT<i) bend, Kd)ii|/ci>, 
 cKa|ji\|/a, K^Ka)i)iai, lKd|i,(|>6T|v) : bend 
 to, wheel. 
 
 eirt-KEiiJ.ai : lie upon, attack, with dat. 
 LIX. 
 
 liri~p.E\4o|iai, €iri-|i€Xifjo-o)xai, €7ri- 
 |i,e)i.€\T]|ji,ai, «Tr-6|X6\T|9t)v, dep. pass. : 
 take care of, care for, with gen. or 
 object clause; give heed, observe, 
 wiUch to see. LIV. 
 
 Itt-iovtes : s?e cir-eifjii (€lp,i). 
 
 ^iri-triTCJoftat (theme o-ItiS-), -o-itioB- 
 Utti, -:crtTi(rd(imv : get provisions for 
 ones. If Cp. eriTOS. LV. 
 
 4ir£-<rTa|jiai , eTn,crTifj(ro|Jioi, Tiirio-T^BTiv ; 
 understand. I, VI. 
 
 eiri-o'T'^o-as : see l<|)-i(rTT|iu, 
 
 (TTio-ToX^i, fjs, T| : IcUcr. VIII. 
 
 liri-ToiTTCi) : enjoin something (acc.j 
 on somebody (dat.), direct, com- 
 mand XLVII. 
 
 Iitit^Seios, 5, ov : suitable, necessary. 
 rd liruT^^SEia (neut. pi. subst.): 
 provisions, supplies. XIII. 
 
 ^iri.-T£6T](i.i : put or place upon ; put or 
 inflict punishment (8£kt]v) on some- 
 body (tiv£) ; MID. set oneself upon, 
 attack, with dat. LVII. 
 
 liri-TwyxdvcD : chance upon, happen 
 upon, find, with dat. XXXV. 
 
 SiroiJiai (for ir^iro[iai.), y<|/o|j.ai, 2 aor, 
 «rirdni)v, impf. with irreg. augment 
 £iird|iT]v: follow, with dat. (§ 317). 
 Cp. Lat. sequor. XLII. 
 
 eirpi.d|j.i]v, 2 aor. : / bought. No pres. 
 from this verb. §§ 550, 646. 
 LVI. 
 
 Iirrd, indecl. ; seven. Lat. septem. 
 
 epYOv, o«, to: work, deed, under- 
 taking. § 49. II. 
 
 €pr]|j.os, 1), ov, or cpT)|j.os, ov : deserted. 
 o-Ta9(i.ol cpr])i.oi: marches through 
 the desert. LIII. 
 
 lp|XT|v(vs, i<i)s, 6 : interpreter. XXX. 
 
 Epv|j.a, arcs, to : defense, protection. 
 
 €pxo|j.ai, fut. supplied by £j|jii (§ 651), 
 2 aor. TiX.eov (Vocab. XVIII), 2 pf, 
 I\^\v6a (§ 447): come, go. For 
 the simple IX'fjXvSa, tiku is com- 
 monly used. XXX. 
 
 IpiDTdd), 4pti>T^o'a>, T|piiTr)a'a, r\fitTi\iio., 
 T|p(iTi^|jiai., TipiaTVjSTiv : ask a ques- 
 tion, inquire. Cp. TJp6[j,i]v (§ 346), 
 which is often used for T|p!6TT]<ra. 
 LII. 
 
 (o-E(r6ai: see ca-o|j.ai, fut. of eI)j.C. 
 
 S<ro|xai : see ct|x.(. 
 
 lorir^pa, as, i) : evening. Lat. vesper, 
 
 e<rT«, temporal conj. : while, so long as, 
 until. §§ 521, 522. LII. 
 
 fcVTi,(v): it is possible. See el|i.C. 
 § 102. VII. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 369 
 
 'itrria : 3 sing. imv. of eI|jl(. 
 
 Jo-Tcis, pf. act. partic. of 1£o-tt]|ii : stand- 
 ing. Declined in § 624. 
 
 'eirxaTOs, T), ov : last, extreme. §361. a. 
 XXXVI. 
 
 'iirffiv (§ 88) : see X^a. 
 
 eralpos, ov, 6 : companion. 
 
 Ircpos, a, ov: the other; pi. subst. 
 others. Hetero-dox (86ga opin- 
 ion) . 
 
 ^Ti, adv. : still, yet, besides, longer, 
 again. XX. 
 
 isToifLoc, 1], OV, or ^Toifios, ov: ready, 
 prepared. XXXVI 11. 
 
 A (adv. of a-ya8<is): well. Comp. 
 a|j.Eivov, etc., sup. dpicTa, etc., 
 § 3159. 3. '<S ird.o-x«iv: be treated 
 kindly (§ 537). XXXVII. 
 
 ci-8aC|i(i>v, ov (8af|ji(i>v divinity') : hav- 
 ing a good divinity, fortunate, 
 prosperous. § 222. Comp. cvSaL- 
 lioviO'Tepos, sup. eiSaijiovecrTaTos, 
 § 35'- ^- XX. 
 
 cv-St)\os, ov: perfectly clear, very 
 clear. 
 
 evSvs, adv. : straightway, at once. 
 XIII. 
 
 Eij-vovs, o«v: well disposed. §§ 499, 
 . 610. L. 
 
 eii-Jeivos, ov (|eivos stranger): hos- 
 pitable. 6 Efi^eivos IldvTos : the 
 Euxine or Black Sea. 
 
 cupCo-KU, ivpi[<ra, T)«pov, T)vpr|Ka, t\vfit\- 
 |iai, t]vp«9tiv : find. For 2 aor. act. 
 imv. eipe see § 301. a. XLIV. 
 
 eSpos, ODS, T<S : breadth, width. XXVI. 
 
 EA<|)paTT)s, ov, 6 : Euphrates, a great 
 river in western Asia. XV. 
 
 eiiXOf'"'''; ivi,oy.<x.\., «4|d|iT|v or tivJAjiriv, 
 eu7p.ai or i){S-y|jiai : pray, vow. 
 
 iv-&m\u>%, ov {ii and ovo|jia) : of good 
 name or omen; left as opposed to 
 right. The Greeks avoided the use 
 of the regular word for left, apio-re- 
 pos, because in their regard the left 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 24 
 
 was the side of evil omens; and they 
 regularly referred to the left by the 
 euphemistic word eiiivii|J.05. iirl 
 ToO eici>viLi|j.ov and lirl T(^ c^oivvp.^^ : 
 on the left wing. 
 
 c(|>a(rav: they said ; see <|>r||i.C. VIII. 
 
 8(|>Ti: he said ; s^e (t>i]|i.i. ' VIII. 
 
 e<f>-Co"n]|j.i : halt, rein in one's horse. ■ 
 
 £(|>oSos, o«, T] (eirC + 686s) : way to, 
 approach. XLI. 
 
 4x6p6s, ^, iv : hostile. Ix^P^S (subst.) , 
 ov, 6 : personal enemy. To be dis- 
 tinguished from iroXciiios and ot 
 •iroX4|j.ioi the ciwiny in war. Comp. 
 jj^efuv, sup. exflio'TOS, § 352. b. 
 XXXI. 
 
 ex", ^|w (§ 153) Of <T\i\Tii> (§ 154). 
 eo-xov (§ 88), eo-xilKa, ^crXTlp.ai, 
 impf etxov (§ So): have, hold, oc- 
 cupy; restrain (§ 335); consider 
 (§ 365); be able, with inf.; mid. 
 be next, come next, with gen. a6v- 
 |iws ^x^i-v : be discouraged ; oXXus 
 cxcLv : be otherwise ; KaKus *iy^y.v : 
 be bad; KaXoo; ex^''": be good, be 
 well; ovTus ex^i-v: be thus or so 
 (§ 536); 6X"*': with (§ 213. b). 
 §487. I. 
 
 ?(i)S, temporal conj. : -while, so long as, 
 until. §§ 521, 522. LII. 
 
 yua, Wa-a: live. In contract forms 
 Jdw has r) for (§ 517). UI. 
 
 Zeiis, Aids, 6 : Zeus, the most exalted 
 - of the gods, and honored by 
 all Greeks. For declension see 
 § 606. 2. 
 
 H 
 
 T], conj. -. or ; than (after comparative 
 idea); 1\ . . . ^■. either . . . or. 
 XXVIII. 
 
370 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 ■f), fem. art., proclitic in nom. sing, and 
 num. pi. at (§ 2o): the; see 6. 
 T) 8^: and she, but she, indicating 
 a change of subject from the pre- 
 ceding sentence. t| may mean she, 
 but only with (i€v and Be. §§ 93, 
 632. VI. 
 
 r\, fem. rel. pron. : who, which ; see 
 bs. 
 
 ij^a'yov (§ 87): see 070). 
 
 ij'yeH.icrDva, mv, rd (T|7e(imv), adj. with 
 tepa understood : thank- offerings for 
 good guidance. 
 
 T)'Y€|JL(6v, ovos, 6 (T|"y£'o|iat) ; leader, 
 guide, commander. § 220. XX. 
 
 Ti^coiJiai, Tj*Yifio-op,ai, T]'YT]crd[j,T]v, '»i'YT|- 
 [lai, dep. mid. : /(?(7(/, guide, with 
 gen. or dat. ; think, believe. LI. 
 
 tj'yov-(§ 82): see ii'Ym. 
 
 r|Se(i>s, adv. (riSiis) : gladly. Comp. 
 ■ilSiov, sup. TiStcrTa, §§ 366, 368. 
 XXXVII. 
 
 iiSg,_adv. : now, already, straightway. 
 XXXIII. 
 
 ijSoiiai. (theme t]S-) : be pleased ; T|0-fl'^- 
 o-o|j.ai (fut. pass.): shall be pleased ; 
 ij(r6T)v (aor. pass.) : was pleased ; 
 with supplementary partic. (§ 439) 
 or dat. of cause (§ 403). Cp. t|8vs. 
 XLIV. 
 
 7)8vs, €ia, V : sweet. § 288. Comp. 
 Ti8tuv (§ 354), sup. riSio-TOs 
 (§ 352. a). Cp. Lat. sudvis. 
 XXVIII. 
 
 ■flKio-Td, adv. (sup. of KaK6s, tittmv) : 
 least of all, by no means (§ 360. 2). 
 XXXVI. 
 
 •qKo), lifo) : come, have come ; pres. with 
 pf. meaning. X. 
 
 TJXOov, 2 aor. of Ep\o|iaL : / or they 
 came or went. XVIII. 
 
 ■fiXiof , ov, 6 : sun. LIX. 
 
 j||j.Eis, T|(»uv: we ; see 6710 / (§ 304). 
 
 T||j,cXT|fji^v(o;, adv. -. carelessly. 
 
 T||Ji^pa, as, T) : day. XIII. 
 
 T||ji^T6pos, o, ov (Tiiieis) : our, ours. 
 § 126. X. 
 
 'i]|jiio-vs, 6ia, V : half, to ijixio-v (with 
 o'TpaT€v|iaTOs) : the half. T]|j.ionis 
 takes the gender and the number 
 of its part. gen. Cp. Lat. semi-, 
 Eng. hemi-. XXVIII. 
 
 ■ijv (et + av) = cav: if, conj. with 
 subjv. §§ 241, 399. XXII. 
 
 rfi, 3 sing. impf. of etfii : he {she or it) 
 was; it was possible. Ill, VII. 
 
 tgvtKa, temporal conj. : ivhen. 
 
 Tivi-o\os, OV, 6 (t|vio reins and €X")'- 
 one who holds the reins, charioteer. 
 
 'HpaKXijs, t'oDS, 6 : Heracles, son 
 of Zeus and Alcmene, famed for 
 his deeds of might. He was 
 invoked as a guide of travelers. 
 
 _ § 603. 
 
 T|p6)i.r)v, 2 aor. : / asked (a question) 
 or inquired ; subjv. epufiai, opt. 
 Ipotii-qv, imv. Ipoi, inf. IpeVSai, 
 partic. <p(S|j,Evos. The pres. and 
 other tenses are supplied by tpoi- 
 TttM, which see. XXXIV. 
 
 ■^o-av, 3 pi. impf. of el)i.C : they were. 
 III. 
 
 T)TTdo(J.oi. (iiTTav), riTT^o-oiioi, iiTn)- 
 p,ai, TiTTyjOnv: be inferior, be con- 
 quered; used as pass, of viKdu. 
 LIV. 
 
 iJTTWv ; comp. of KaKos. § 360. 2. 
 
 
 
 9' : see t6. 
 
 9dXaTTa, i]s, T] : sea. § 140. XI. 
 
 6av)i,d£a> (theme 6av(jia8-), 6avp,da-o- 
 ixai, E6av|xa(ra, TE6air|iaKa, I6au)id- 
 o-6iiv : wonder, be surprised ; wonder 
 at, admire, with ace. XIV. 
 
 6av|iaa-T<is, ■^, 6v (verbal adj. of 
 6au(idJ<i)): admirable, wonderful, 
 strange. XLVIII. 
 
 iia,, OS, T) : sight, spectacle. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 371 
 
 Oedofiai (6(0), 9caa-0|iai, l9Eaa-(SL|iir|v, 
 TE6^a|i.ai ; ioai on, gaze at, see. LII. 
 
 6<ds, oO, 6 : god; t| : goddess. The 
 voc. case is the same as the nom. 
 VII. 
 
 6^ci>, 6eii<ro|iai : run. See also Sp6|ios. 
 LI. 
 
 SripcAu, 6r]pEii(r(D, IGfjpcvira, Te6^pEVKa, 
 Te6i^pEu|iai, e6i]pEvST)v: hunt, catch 
 (by hunting). Cp. SripCov. XLII. 
 
 6i]pCov, ou, TO : wild beast. XLII. 
 
 ©^X'HS' °^> ° ■ Theches, the mountain 
 south of Trapezus from which the 
 survivors of the Ten Thousand first 
 savir the Euxine Sea. 
 
 6v|](rKii> : see airo-6vi]VK(i>. The pf. 
 TtflvTjKO (§ 432. b, d) be dead, be 
 slain, commonly occurs without a 
 prefix. 
 
 SdpuPos, ov, 6 ; noise. LX. 
 
 @p$|, Opt^LKds, 6 : a Thracian, Thra- 
 cian. XVII. 
 
 6uYdTT]p, TpAs, T] : daughter. § 321. 
 XXXI. 
 
 6vpa, as, T| : door. 
 
 OvcrCa, as, t] (6iici)) : a sacrifice. 
 
 6vu, 6vir<i), e6u(ra, T^SuKa (§ 432. b), 
 T^6u|jiai., eTiBTjv (§ 487): sacrifice, 
 offer to a god; MID. sacrifice, offer 
 for oneself or from one's own re- 
 sources. XXIII, XXXIV. 
 
 6(Spa|, aKos, 6 : breastplate. See 
 p. 86, Fig. 7. XVII. 
 
 (8^ (§ 301. a), tSetv, tSoi|ii: see cISov 
 and 6pd<i>. 
 
 l8p<S(i>, {Spuo-a : sweat. 
 
 (Sai, tS(&v : sec etSov and opdu. 
 
 Uvai : pres. inf. of €t|ii. 
 
 Upis, 6, 6v; sacred, holy, rd tepd; 
 *5« victims, then i'.^s omens from the 
 victims sacrificed (the usual or ordi- 
 nary offering). XLV. 
 
 {t])!!,, tJctu, i]Ka and ctrov, eiKa, cljiai, 
 Et6T|v: iifwi/, A«r/ (with something, 
 in dat.) ; MID. hurl oneself, hasten. 
 
 _ §§561,562,563,649. LVIL 
 
 iKavds, ^, <Sv : sufficient, enough, able. 
 §333. XXXII. 
 
 Jva, conj. expressing purpose : in order 
 that, that. § 243. XXII. 
 
 l6vTos : see liSv and ct|xi.. 
 
 lirirevs, ^cos, 6 (Wiros) : horseman ; pi. 
 cavalry. XXVIII. 
 
 tiririKds, ■^, <5v ('iinros) : fl/" horse, of 
 cavalry. LVI. 
 
 iTrTr6Spo^os, ov, 6 (Wiros and Spa- 
 |jietv) : race track. Hippodrome. 
 
 i'lriros, ov, 6 : horse. § 48. 4<^* Wirou : 
 o« horseback, with verb meaning 
 Wa"* (§ 232). d<t>' tirirov : on horse- 
 back, with verb meaning .4«»/ 
 
 (§420). n. 
 
 to-juv : see olSa. 
 
 to-QS, ■>!, ov : equal, hi to-co : in even 
 step, in step. Iso-thermal (Bepjids 
 hot). 
 
 to-Tos, pres. act. partic. of 2a-n)p.i. ; set- 
 ting. Declined in § 617. 
 
 Ho-re : see otSa. 
 
 I<rTT||ii, CTT^cro), ecTTno-a and otttiv, 
 2o-TT|Ka and ^o-Tarov, eo-rdBriv : set, 
 place, make stand, halt; intr. tenses : 
 stand, stand still, stop (see § 555). 
 Cp. Lat. sto. §§ 551, 552, 617, 624, 
 646, 647. LVI. 
 
 lo-xvpos, d, 6v : strong. Comp. lrx«- 
 p6TEpos, sup. lorx«p<iTaTos, § 351. 3. 
 XXXV. 
 
 (rxvpus, adv. (lo-x5p6s) : strongly, ex- 
 ceedingly, harshly. Comp. lo-xCpd- 
 Tcpov, sup. £(rxiJp<5TaTa, §§ 366, 
 368. XXXVII. 
 
 IxOvs, wos, 6 : fish. § 283. XXVII. 
 
 tX""*! ovs, Ti : track, footprint. 
 
 l(Sv : pres. partic. of eIjii. 
 
 'Iii>vik6s, i\, ov ('IdivCo): of Ionia, 
 Ionian. XXVII. 
 
372 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Ka9-6v8ti), KoBevSTJo-ci), impf. iKoBeuSov 
 and Ka0T]vSov : sleep. 
 
 Ka6--fJK<o ; come down, reach down, ex- 
 tend. XXVI. 
 
 K(i9-T)|j.ai : sit; pres. partic. KaS^inevos : 
 seated. § 653. 
 
 Ka6-i(rTr]|ii : set o-i place down, station ; 
 inlr. ttnses: be placed, stationed, or 
 established ; station oneself, take one^s 
 place. For intr. tenses cp. io-Tijiii, 
 §555. LVI. 
 
 KaO-opdu : look down on, descry, ob- 
 serve. Cp. 2 aor. KaT-eiSov. 
 
 Kai, conj. : and, also, even. KaC . , . 
 KaC: both . . . and. KttC ... 8^: 
 and also, ' also ' being represented 
 by KaC. Kal ^dp : and in fact; or 
 for also, for even; sometimes may 
 be rendered yes, for. Ill, XV. 
 
 Kaipds, ov, 6 : the right measure, right 
 time, right place; proper time; 
 opportunity, crisis. XLIV. 
 
 KaCo> : see Kao}. 
 
 KaKioiv: comp. of KaK6s (§ 360. 2). 
 
 KaKos, ^, 6v : bad, cowardly. Comp. 
 KaKIuv, xetpwv, tJttwv; sup. kukl- 
 (TTOS, xctpKTTOs, iiKi<rTa (adv.) ; 
 § 360. 2. VI, XXXVI. 
 
 KaKus, adv. (KttKds) : badly, ill. Comp. 
 KdKiov, etc., worse, sup. KdKio-Ta, 
 etc., § 368. Cp. the adj. KaKds, 
 § 360. 2. KaKus 'e%i\.v: see ex<i). 
 KaKus iroieiv : see iroieoi. XXXVII. 
 
 Ka\e'u, KaXu (fut. for KaX((ru, § 544), 
 £Kd\E(ra, K^K\i]Ka, K^KXT|p.ai, IkX^j- 
 Oi^v: call, summon, invite; call, 
 name. LV. 
 
 Ka\6s, i\, 6v : beautiftil, handsome, 
 noble, honorable{^ 232. I. 14), fair, 
 favorable. Comp. KaWtuv, sup. 
 KdWio-Tos, § 360. 3. VI, XXXVI. 
 
 KaXtos, adv. (KaXos) : beautifully, 
 nobly, honorably. Comp. koX- 
 
 Xlov, sup. KdXXurra (§ 368) most 
 successfully (§ 394). KoXus ^X'^"' 
 see Jx«- X-^^II. XXXVII. 
 
 Kd|i-v(D (theme Kap.-), Kap.a€p.ai, ixa,- 
 p.ov (2 aor.), KCKpLt^Ka : labor, be 
 weary. LX. 
 
 Kov: by crasis (§ 30) for KaV Sv 
 ( = Kal lav) . 
 
 KapSovxoi, <ov, 01 : the Carduchi, 
 a mountain people on the left bank 
 of the Tigris. XXIV. 
 
 Kard, prep. : with GEN. down from ; 
 with ACC. down over, down along, 
 along, opposite, against, by in a local 
 sense; according to, by in a distribu- 
 tive sense, as Kara |ifjva: by the 
 month, monthly ; Kara eflvT) : by 
 nations, nation by nation. Kara 
 6dXaTTav : by sea. Kard p.E(rov : 
 along or opposite the middle, at the 
 middle. Kara to (rrcpvov : on the 
 breast, to ko8' airois : the division 
 opposite themselves. KaTo. Kpdros : 
 with might and 7nain. XX. 
 
 KaTa-Pa(v« : go doivn, descend ; enter 
 games. Cp. dva-(3aCv(i). XXXIV. 
 
 KaTd-(3a(rts, ecos, tj (KaTa-Pa£va>): de- 
 scent, way down a mountain side; 
 the descent from the interior to the 
 sea. XLVII. 
 
 KaT-d-yto : lead down ; bring a ship 
 (especially a captured one) into 
 harbor ; restore exiles. XLII. 
 
 KaTa-8Edop,ai : gaze doivn, survey. 
 
 KaTa-KaCva> (KaLvco kill, Kavw, €Kavov, 
 K^KOva) : kill. 
 
 KaTd-K€i^ai : lie doiun. LIX, 
 
 KaTa-KX€((i> : shut tip, confine, inclose. 
 XLVI. 
 
 Kara-KdiTTo) : cut down. XLI. 
 
 KaTa-Xa|ipdv(i> : seize, occupy, overtake, 
 come upon, find, v?ith ace. XXXII. 
 
 KaT(b-XE(ir<i> : leave behind, leave, abanr 
 don. XXVI. 
 
 KaTa-XcXcip.p,^voi : see KaTO-XeCirw. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 373 
 
 Kara-Xvu: unloose; unyoke, halt 
 
 (inlr.). 
 Karo-ire'iiiru : send down, especially to 
 
 the sea. XXXIX. 
 KaTa-in)8ii(U (iri)8<i(a leap, in]S:f)a-0|i.ai, 
 
 cir^ST|a-a, ireTr/jSuKa) : jump down. 
 Kara-TrtiTTw (irtTrrw fall, -ir€a-ovp.ai, 
 
 eir£0-ov, ir^iTTtoKa) : fall down. 
 KaTa-<|>av'/is, e's (<|>aCv<i)): in sight, 
 
 visible. 
 Kar-ciSov, 2 aor. : / or they looked 
 
 down on, descried, observed. Cp. 
 
 Koe-opdu. XXIV. 
 Kau or KaCu, Kavo-u, «KOD0-a, KeKauKa, 
 
 K£Kau|j.ai, lKai)6T]v: burn, light, 
 
 kindle. XXI. 
 Kct|i.ai, KECo-0|iai: lie; lie outstretched, 
 
 as the dead on the battlefield. This 
 
 verb is used as the pass, of the pf. 
 
 tenses of T(6i)|ti, in the meaning be 
 
 placed, be set. With rd oirXa Kcirai 
 
 cp. the act. Oe'crSai toI SirXa. § 654. 
 
 LIX. 
 EcXaivaC, S>v, ai : Celaenae, a city in 
 
 Phrygia. XXXIII. 
 keXcvo), KiKtitria, eKcXevo-a, Kck^XcvKa, 
 
 KeK^Xevo-jjiai, ekeXevo-Stiv (o- is irregu- 
 larly inserted in the last two parts): 
 
 command, bid, order. VI, 
 KEvds, '^, 6v: empty; vain, groundless. 
 
 XXV. 
 K^pas, K^paTOs or KEpus, to : horn ; 
 
 wing of an army. See § 602 for 
 
 declension. 
 KEpSaXEOs, a, ov (K^pSos): profitable, 
 
 Comp. KEpSaX£(&TEpos. 
 K^pSos, ODS, Td : gain, profit, pay. 
 KEij>aX'fi, fis, T) : head. Cp. I.at. caput. 
 
 LVI. 
 Ki\fnsi,,vK.o'i,o: herald. §187. XVII. 
 KiXiKfa, OS, Tl : Cilicia. XI. 
 KCXi|, iKOs, d: Cilician, a native of 
 
 Cilicia. XLI. 
 KiXio-o-a, lis, r\ : Cilician woman. 
 
 XI. 
 
 KlvSuVEVQ), KlvSvvEVO-CD, EKI.vSvVEU(ra, 
 KEKlvSvVEVKa, KEKlvSuVEVfiai, IkIvSv- 
 
 v£66t]v; incur danger, run a risk. 
 
 XIX. 
 KtvSuvos, OV, d: danger. xCvSvvds 
 
 4(rTi.(v): there is danger. Cp. kiv- 
 
 SiivEva). XL. 
 KXs'apxos, ou, d : Clearchus, a Lace- 
 daemonian general in the service of 
 
 Cyrus. V. 
 kXeCo), kXeCo-u, ^'kXeio-u, k^kXeiko, k^- 
 
 kXeijiui, ekXeCo-Stiv (o- is irregularly 
 
 inserted): shut. XLVI. 
 kX^tttci) (themes kXett-, KXair-, kXow-), 
 
 kXeiIiw, EKXEl|fa, K^KXo(|>a, KE'KXE|l.|l,ai, 
 
 iK\6,in\v: steal Cp. KX<ii|(. XVIII. 
 KKi!>^,K\ant6i,6: thief. §187. XVII. 
 Kvtinis, t8os, T) : greave. See p. loi, 
 
 Fig. II. XVIII. 
 KOivds, i\, 6v : common, in common, 
 
 general. LIX. 
 KoXd^d) (theme KoXaS-), KoXdo-u, 
 
 EKdXao-a, K£KdXaa-|iai,, 4KoXda-6i)v: 
 
 chastise, punish. XXXVII. 
 KoXuvds, ov, d : hill, mound ai stones. 
 
 Cp. Lat. culmen, collis. 
 Kovioprds, ov, d (kovis dust, and dpvv|M 
 
 rouse) : a rising of dust. 
 KoirTio (theme Koir-), k6i|/(i>, EK0i|ia, 
 
 KEKO<f>a, KE'K0|i)jiai, lK6irT|v: cut. 
 
 §§409,473- XLL 
 Kpdvos,. ovs, TO : helmet. See p. 156, 
 
 Fig. 20. Cranium. 
 KpaT^p, i]pos, d : mixing bowl. Lat. 
 
 crdtera. See p. 109, Fig. 12. 
 
 § 220. XXl 
 KpdTio-TOS, T), ov : best; sup. of 
 
 dYaOds. 
 Kpdros, ovs, Td : strength, might; avd 
 
 Kpdros : to the limit of strength, at 
 
 full speed ; ' Kara KpdTos : with 
 
 might and main. XLIV. 
 Kpav7^, fjs, T) : outcry. LX. 
 Kp^s, Kpr|T6s, d : Cretan, a native of 
 
 Crete. XLVI. 
 
374 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Kpfvo) (for Kpiv + /<■>, theme Kpiv-), 
 Kpivm, (Kpiva, K^KpiKa, K^Kpi|iai, 
 lKp(6i]v: separate, judge, decide. 
 Cp. Lat. cerno. LV. 
 
 KTaofjiai, KT^cro|iai, 4KTi]crd|JiT]v, K^- 
 KTTi|j.ai, lKT<i9T)v: acquire; in pf. 
 possess, gain. 
 
 kvkXos, ov, 6 : circle ; KVK\cp : in a 
 circle, around. Cycle. 
 
 KVKXdu, KVKXlio-CO, lKVK\(l>(ra, KCKV- 
 
 KX<*>|jLai, €kvkXc&8hv : encircle, sur- 
 round. 
 
 kvk\(oo-i5, €«s, t] (kvk\6cii) : an encir- 
 cling, Jlank inarch. 
 
 Kipos, 01), 6 : Cyrus. The person 
 indicated by the name in this book 
 is Cyrus the Younger, son of Darius 
 and Parysatis. IV. 
 
 kuXvjj, KuX.v<rii>, iKiiXvo-a, KEKuXvKa, 
 KeKiiXv)i.ai, IkwXwOtiv : hinder. 
 § 2o6. VII. 
 
 KmXuuv, pres. act. partic. of kuXvoi : 
 hinaering. Declined in § 206. 
 
 K(i>|j.-d,pxi]S, ov, 6 (Kca)i.i] and apx<') ' 
 ruler or head man of a village, 
 village chief. XLVI. 
 
 K(i|Jir], T]s, T\ : village. § 96. VI. 
 
 XaP^: 2 aor. act. imv. of Xapipdvio. 
 § 301. u.. 
 
 Xd^u : see Xa)i,pdv<i>. 
 
 Xd6p(}, adv. : secretly ; with gen. : with- 
 out the knowledge of. XXVIII. 
 
 AaKESaiiiovios, a, ov (AaKESa(|jiuv) : 
 Lacedaemonian, Spartan. XVIII. 
 
 AaKESaC)i.uv, ovos, y\ : Lacedaemon or 
 Lacedaemonia. XXVII. 
 
 Xap.pdvu (themes Xa^-, Xi]P-, § 2i8), 
 X^i|>0|jiai, eXaPov, «tXT]<|)a (§ 448), 
 (\:Xi))i.)iai (§ 465. a), IX'fj^eifv 
 (§ Z^l' i) • take, receive, enlist 
 (soldiers, § 324); Xa^iiv: with 
 (§ 213. V). § 487. V. 
 
 XafiirpoTTis, ilTos, 'H : splendor, bril- 
 liancy. XIX. 
 
 XavSdvd) (themes Xa6-, Xr]fl-, cp. § 218), 
 XT|(ru, eXa6ov, X«XT]8a, XcXtio-iiai : 
 lie hid, escape notice of; with sup- 
 plementary partic. in const, like 
 ■nryxavti) (§ 215); thus iXaBev IX- 
 B(&v : he went secretly, lit. he escaped 
 notice going. XLIV. 
 
 X^Y") ^'i") '^Xs^a, pf. act. supplied by 
 eJpT)KO, XeXeYH^at (but 8i-e£-X6Y|ioi), 
 eXe'xBtiv ; say, followed by Srt or ws 
 that and a finite verb (§§ 260, 261). 
 In pass, followed by inf., § 391. 
 XXIV. 
 
 XcCirci) (themes Xeiir-, Xoiir-, Xiir-), 
 XeCi|;<o (§ 153), gXiTTOv (§ 85), Xe- 
 Xoiiro (§ 445), XfX6i|i|ioi (§§ 462. 1, 
 465), EXeC4>^'n>' (§ 387. i) •• leave. 
 §§ 85, etc., 483. 4S7, 641. I. 
 
 XcXvKus, pf. act. partic. of Xua: hav- 
 ing loosed. Declined in § 435. 
 
 X6T)K0-9wpa|, Skos, 6, adj. ; with white 
 corslet. 
 
 Xevkos, ■^i 6v : white, 
 
 X4ii|/0|i,ai (theme Xt)P-) : fut. of Xo|ji- 
 Pdvo. (Vocab. V). XXXII. 
 
 XC60S, o«, 6 : stone. LVII. 
 
 Xi|i^v, €vos, 6 : harbor. § 220. XX. 
 
 Xiirtiv, 2 aor. act. partic. of XeCitu ; 
 having left. Declined in § 208. 
 
 XoYos, ou, 6 : word, speech, report 
 (§ 263), account (§ 533). VIII. . 
 
 XoYX'Hi 'HS, T| : spear point, spear. 
 See p. 30, Fig. 2; p. 256, Fig. 23. 
 LVIII. 
 
 Xoiwiis, i\, ov (Xe£ir-<i)) : left, rest of, 
 remaining ; to Xoiirov (adv. ace. 
 § 284) : thereafter, in the future. 
 XXVII. 
 
 X6<t)os, o«, 6 : hill, XI. 
 
 Xoxoy6s, oO, 6 (X6xos and oyw) : cap- 
 tain. IV. 
 
 X6XOS, ou, 6 : company of soldiers. 
 II. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 375 
 
 AiiSCS, as, r\: Lydia, a district of 
 
 western Asia Minor, of which Sardis 
 
 was the chief city. XXXIX. 
 AtSSios, o, ov (AiiSCa) : Lydian. 
 
 LVI. 
 \v6£(s, aor. pass, partic. of XSiu: 
 
 having been loosed. Declined in 
 
 §388. 
 AOkios, ov, 6 : Lycius, commander of 
 
 the cavalry organized by the Ten 
 
 Thousand during their retreat. 
 Xvin), 1)8, t) : grief. 
 Xvo-as, I aor. act. partic. of \vii>: 
 
 having loosed. For declension cp. 
 
 § 209. b. 
 Xucruv, fut. act. partic. of \vu : about 
 
 to loose. For declension cp. § 207. 
 Xvu, \v(ro>, cXvo-a, X^XvKa, \l\u)i,ai, 
 
 IXii6T|v : loose, break, destroy ; MID. 
 
 ransom. §§ 45, etc., 4S2, 487, 
 
 640. I. 
 Xvuv, pres. act. partic. of \va : loosing. 
 
 For declension cp. §§ 206. a, 616. 2. 
 
 M 
 
 fi,aKp65, £, 6v: long. Comp. (jiaKpo- 
 T6pos, sup. iiaKpdraTos, § 351. a. 
 XXXV. 
 
 (idXa, adv. -. very. Comp. pdWov 
 more, sup. (xaXio-ra most. §§ 369. 4, 
 370. XXXVII. 
 
 |ia\\ov, comp. adv. : more, better, 
 rather. See |idXa. § 370. XXII. 
 
 |jiav6dv<i) (themes |Jia6-, |<.aBi)-, cp. 
 TV7\dvu, § 218), |j,a6yjo-ofiai, 
 £|*a6ov, |i,E|j,d6i)Ka : learn. May be 
 followed by 8ti clause (§ 262), or 
 in sense of learn how by inf. 
 (§ 457). See also § 457. u. XXIV. 
 
 |ji.dvTis, 6WS, 6 : soothsayer. 
 
 (lAxi. IS, *! : battle, fight. § 93. VI. 
 
 |idj(0)<.ai (cp. (i^xi)' (lox""'!'''" Cof 
 JM|ij4o-o|ioi, § 544), «noxecrd|j,Yiv 
 (w!{h lengthened theme), |JiE|i,dxi1- 
 
 )i.ai: fight, with dat. (§ 317), or 
 irpbs against and ace. XXXVII. 
 
 ji^Vas, |iC7d\r), n^-ya: great, large, 
 loud (of a noise), Comp. |i«CJ(i)v, 
 sup. li^YMTTOs (§ 360: 4). § 337. I. 
 XXXIII. 
 
 H^Yio-TOs, n, ov : see fie^as. 
 
 (ul^uv, lut^ov : see )U-yas. 
 
 (lEtov, adv. (cp. (ilKpds) : less. 
 
 (IeCuv, ov : smaller, fewer (in pi.) ; 
 comp. of (liKpds. 
 
 |Jie\avCa, os, t| ((J^Xas black) : black- 
 ness. 
 
 (i^Xei, (uX'fja-Ei., l|ii^Xi)o-c, |i.£|i^XT|K£, im- 
 pers. : it is a care, with dat. of per- 
 son and iJTrus clause. 
 
 |i,^X(i>, (uXX^o-d), 4p,^Xr)o-a : be about, 
 intend, with fut., pres., or aor. inf.; 
 delay. § 156. 2. XIII. 
 
 |X^|j,VT||ji.ai (pf. with pres. meaning), 
 |iE|ivyj(rop.ai (§ 473), l(iiv^o-9nv : re- 
 member. For const, see § 457 and 
 a. May take obj. in gen. The pres. 
 act. is |M|ivD'a-K<D remind, which form 
 is made up of the reduplication |it- 
 plus the theme (ivr)- (long form of 
 (iva-) plus the pres. suffix io-k%; 
 fut. |jiv^o-(i>, I aor. c)<.vi)o-a. XLVI. 
 
 (i^v, postpositive particle, used with a 
 word or clause that is contrasted 
 with a following word (in another 
 clause) or a second clause. The 
 second word or clause often has %i, 
 which is sometimes replaced by 
 another conjunction. |i,^v sometimes 
 means on the one hand; but more 
 often it is to be omitted in transla- 
 tion. 6 [ilv ...68^: the one . . , 
 the other; ot \Uv . . . ot 8^: some 
 . . . others. See 84. VI. 
 
 |i.4vT0i, postpositive particle : however, 
 yet. XV. 
 
 |ji4v(i) (themes |iev-, )ievT|-), (icvS, 
 IfUiva, |Jie|jivT|Ka : remain, wait for. 
 Cp. Lat. maneo. §§ 541, 542. LV. 
 
376 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Mtvoiv, tovos, o ; Menon, a Thessalian 
 general in the service of Cyrus. 
 XXV. 
 
 (i^cros, t\, ov; middle, middle of 
 (§ 192); (to) [ie'o-ov: the middle, 
 the midst (§ 219); Iv |i.«'o-a>: in the 
 midst, between, with gen.; |j,Ecrov 
 T||Ji^pas : midday. XVII. 
 
 IxcoTTiSS) T|, <5v : full, with ^eti. VI. 
 
 )i.£Td, prep. : with gen. with, in com- 
 pany with; with ACC. into the midst 
 of, after. XV. 
 
 |j,ETa^v, adv. ; between, with gen. IX. 
 
 IXETa-ir^liTroixai (mid. of p-CTa-irtiiiro) 
 send for), -Trc|Jii|/o|jiai, -e7r€fiL\|/d[XT|v, 
 -ire'irennai : send after to come to 
 oneself; summon. XXX. 
 
 |j.6Td-Tre(iirTOS, ov (verbal adj. of litxa- 
 TTcixiroijiai.) : sent after, summoned. 
 XLVIII. 
 
 (i.^XP''' temporal conj. : until. §§ 521, 
 522. LII. 
 
 |iifj, (i) neg. adv. : not ; with inf. 
 (§§ 98, 5 '9- b), in protases (§§ 106. 
 i5, 216, etc.), purpose clauses (§§ 243, 
 268), object clauses (§ 535), pro- 
 hibitions (§ 309), wishes (§§ 584, 
 585), with hortatory subjv. (§ 244), 
 and deliberative subjv. (§ 564). 
 (2) conj. : lest, after verbs of fear- 
 ing; (IT) o4 : lest not (§ 438) . VI, 
 XLIV. 
 
 |jir)-S6 : and not, nor, not even. Used 
 like [iTJ. Cp. oiSe. XLIII. 
 
 |jir]S-Els, |j,i)8E-|x(a, |JiT|8-€v ((JiilS^ + els) : 
 nobody, no one, no, nothing. Used 
 like lit). § 426. a. XLIII. 
 
 MfiSoi, wv, 01 : the .d/ii/w. LIX. 
 
 jx^v, )jiT)v6s, 6 : mo7ith. Lat. mensis. 
 § 220. XX. 
 
 (lyjv, postpositive adv. : in truth, cer- 
 tainly ; yi H^'^v : to be sure, at any 
 rate. LIX. 
 
 (i.^-'iroTt: never. Used like li^j not. 
 LIV. 
 
 |ji^-T6 . , . iiTJ-TC : neither - . . nor. 
 
 Used like (i^. Cp. ofirt . . . oCtj. 
 
 XLIII. 
 (i^TTip, |iT)Tp6s, T] : mother. Lat. mater. 
 
 § 321. XXXI. 
 Mi9pa8dTT|s, ov, 6 : Mithraddtes. 
 
 XLIV, 
 |j,rKp(Ss, o, 6v : small. Comp. |j,iKp6TE- 
 
 pos, sup. ixlKpdraTOs, § 360. 5. 
 
 Comp. also (xeCcov, p,£tov: fewer (in 
 
 pL). XXXVI. 
 |j,io-66s, oB, 6 : pay. XX. 
 p.i<r6o<j>opa, as, t| (piio-Ods and (|>^p(a) : 
 
 receipt of wages, pay. 
 |ivo, ds, 1) : mina, one sixtieth of a 
 
 talent, i.e. about ^18. § 594. L. 
 fiovos, 1], ov : alone, only. XLVII. 
 p.vpioi, ai, a : ten thousand. §421, 
 
 N 
 
 vavs, V6<4s, T] : ship. § 605. 
 v€avCas, ou, 6 : young man. § 593. 
 vcavCo-Kos, ov, 6 : young man. XXI. 
 v€Kp6s, ov, 6 : dead body, corpse. Cp. 
 
 Lat. need. LIX. 
 vc'os, a, ov : new, fresh, young. Comp. 
 
 V€<GTCpOS, sup. V€MTttTOS. Cp. Lat. 
 
 novus. XXXV. 
 
 v€<|)€Xt], 1)5, T] : cloud. 
 
 viKaco (vtKT]), viK'fjo-b), IvtKTja-d, V€vt- 
 KT]Ka, vEvtKi]|xai., «vTK<i6T]v: con- 
 quer, surpass. The pass, is often 
 expressed by 'f)TTdo|jLai. LII. 
 
 vfKT], t]s, T) : victory. XI. 
 
 vo|iC^<i> (theme vofiiS-), vopiiu (§543), 
 Iv6{&i<ra, v£v6)XiKa, V€v6|xi(r)xai, \va- 
 p.(a-6i)v : think, consider. With inf. 
 § no. VIII. 
 
 v(S|jios, ov, 6 : custom, law. XXXIX. 
 
 voOs, ov, 6 : mind. § 596. L. 
 
 vvKTcop, adv. (cp. vv|) : by night, 
 XXXIII. 
 
 vvv, adv. : Kdz*/ (of time). Lat. »««r. 
 XX. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 377 
 
 vij, vvkt6s, t| : night ; ii^o-at vviktcs : 
 
 midnight (middle watches of the 
 night). Lat. nox. §§ 195, 196, 
 198. XVIII. 
 
 ^evCas, ov, 6 : Xenias, an Arcadian 
 general in the service of Cyrus. 
 XII. 
 
 I^vios, a, ov (|€vos) : hospitable, relat- 
 ing to hospitality ; %iv\.a,, neut. pi. 
 subst. : gifts in token of hospitality, 
 guest-gifts. 
 
 |evos, ov, 6 : guest-friend. XIX. 
 
 ^evo(j>uv, wvTOs, 6 : Xenophon, the au- 
 thor of the Anabasis. See pp. 264, 
 265. LIV. 
 
 |v\ivos, 11, ov (|v\ov) : made of wood, 
 wooden. 
 
 |u\ov, ov, t6 : wood; pi. of hewn or 
 split wood; timbers. XXIV. 
 
 O 
 
 6, T|, T(S, gen, Tov, Tf|s, Tov, def. art. : 
 the. The forms of the definite arti- 
 cle are often used for possessive 
 pronouns of the first, second, or 
 third person, either singular or 
 plural, as suggested by the context, 
 i.e. my, your, his, her, our, their. 
 In this Vocabulary, placed after a 
 noun, 6, t|, and to indicate its gen- 
 der. 6 8€ : and he, but he ; T] hi: 
 and she, but she, indicating a change 
 of subject from the preceding sen- 
 tence. 6 may mean he, and t) she, 
 but only with |i4v (which see) and 
 S^. §§ 48, 49. 67-70, 89, 93, 143, 
 281 (footnote l), 307, 427, 632. 
 II, VI. 
 
 o8«, TiSe, r6%i, dem. pron. : this, often 
 with reference to what is to follow; 
 tASe : these things as follows 
 (§ 175)- §§ 173. 176. 307. XV. 
 
 ASds, ov, T| : way, road. § 115. IX. 
 
 866V, rel. adv. : whence, from which 
 place, from what source. LI. 
 
 olStt (2 pf. with pres. meaning), ■n8Ti 
 (2 plup.) or 'ii'Seiv, ECco^iiai (fut.) : 
 know. § 655. With partic. or 8ti 
 clause, § 669. LX. 
 
 oHKaSc, adv. (cp. otxla) : homeward, 
 home. XXII. 
 
 oIk^o) (cp. olK(a), oIk^o'u), cf>Ki]<ra, 
 uKr]Ka, caKr)|iai., ipK^6T|v : dwell, in- 
 habit ; iroXis olKOV|Ji«vt) ; an inhab- 
 ited city. The pass, partic. may 
 sometimes be translated be situated. 
 
 otKCa, as, T| : house. XIII. 
 
 ot|iai : see oto|j.ai. 
 
 otvos, ov, 6 : wine, § 60. III. 
 
 oVofjLai (often ot|iaL), ol^o-0|xai (with 
 lengthened theme), ip'^Sriv (§ 389), \l 
 dep. pass. -. think, suppose. 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 otos, a, ov, rel. pron. : of what sort, 
 what sort of, {such") as; otos « : 
 able ; otov t Io-t£v : it is possible. 
 Lat. qudlis. LIV. 
 
 oto-co : see c)>^p(i>. 
 
 o£xo|''«'''> olx<io-o|i.ai (with lengthened 
 theme) ; be gone, have gone (pres. 
 with pf. meaning). Often with sup- 
 plementary partic; cp. § 215. 
 XXX. 
 
 OKTa-Koo'c.oi, ai, a: eight hundred. 
 
 _ §421- 
 
 OKTiJ, indecl. ; eight. Lat. odd. 
 
 XXXIX. 
 oXIyos, t), ov: little, few. Comp. 
 
 IXoiTTiov, sup. IXdxio-Tos, § 360. 6. 
 
 XXXVI. 
 8\os, H, ov : whole, entire, all. XVII. 
 6)j.a\As : evenly, with even step. 
 fi|i-vv-|Jii (and o|i,-viici>, themes 6|i-, a)io-) , 
 
 6|iov(j,at, u|i,oa-a, 0)ic6)j.0Ka (§ 447), 
 
 6(i.i6|i.o(o-)(ioi, «|i6(o-)6i)v : swear, 
 
 promise with an oath, take oath. 
 
 LIX. 
 
37^ 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 6|jLo-Tpclirc£os, ov: sitting at the same 
 table. As subst. masc. table com- 
 panion, 
 
 <i|uis, adv. ; nevertheless., 
 
 £vo)i,a, aros, rd : name. XXXVII. 
 
 ovos, ou, 6 : .ass. Lat. asinus, LVI. 
 
 oir^l, rel. adv. : where, wherever ; how, 
 in what way. Cp. tt^. XL. 
 
 oirio-Btv, adv. : behind. 
 
 0Tri(r6o-<j>iiXa|, aKos, 6 : one who 
 guards the rear ; oi OTrio-OocjjvXaKCS : 
 the rear guard. 
 
 oirXl^u, fiirXttra, uirXicriiai, o>Tr\£or6T|v 
 (oirXov) : arm ; MID. arm oneself. 
 
 pTr\tTr]s, ov, 6 (oirXov) : a heavy- 
 armed soldier, hoplite. See p. 139, 
 Fig. 18. XII. 
 
 ftirXov, ov, t6 : implement ; commonly 
 pi. oirXa, TCt: arms of war. See 
 
 ^ p. 28, Fig. i; p. 139, Fig. 18. II. 
 
 fiiroL, rel. adv. ; whithersoever, whither, 
 where. § 343. XXIII. 
 
 OTTOios, a, ov, indef. rel. pron. and 
 indir. interr. : of what sort, what 
 sort of XLVII. 
 
 oirdo-os, t\, ov, indef. rel. pron. and 
 indir. interr. : as many as, how great, 
 (pi.) hoT.u many. Cp. i>o-os. XLII. 
 
 6ir6T€, rel. adv. : when, whenever, as 
 often as ; since. Gp. Sre. XLII. 
 
 Birov, rel. adv. : wherever, where. 
 
 __ § 343- XXIII. 
 
 Sttws, (i) conj. : in order that, that, 
 with purpose clause (§§ 243, 268); 
 how, with object clause (§ 535). 
 (2) rel. adv. : how, in what way. 
 XXII, XXXIX, LIV. 
 
 opdd) (impf. Ii&puv), oi|/0|j.ai, cISov, 
 cc&paKO, or c6paKa, lupafiai or 
 w[ji,|jioi, d)((>6T]v: see, behold. With 
 ace. and partic. (rarely with 8ti 
 clause). §§ 440, 441, 520. LII. 
 
 fipSios, a, ov : steep, IX. 
 
 opKOS, ov, 6 : oath. IX. 
 
 opjidcu, 6p|X'iia-<i>, up|j.7)0'a, up|i,i)Ka, 
 
 rap|jir)|j.ai, iS>p|ji'^6r]V : start, hasteitl 
 MID. set out. 
 
 Spvis, iBos, 6 and t| : bird. Ace. sing. 
 both opviV (§ 197) and fipviOa. 
 XVIII. 
 
 'Op6vTas, a (Doric gen., for od), o! 
 Orontas, a Persian. XXXI. 
 
 Spoi, ovi,T6: mountain, §272. XXVI. 
 
 OS, 11, 8, rel. pron. : who, which, that. 
 §§ 125, 135, 285. X. 
 
 ocros, 1, ov, rel. pron. . as great as, as 
 much as, as many as, all that, as 
 {many^ ; how great, how much, how 
 many; oo-ov, adv. ace. ; as far 
 as ; with numerals, about (§ 444). 
 XXXVII. 
 
 So'-'ircp, TJ-irep, o-irep (strengthened 
 8s) : the very one which, the very 
 thing which. XXIX. 
 
 8o-Tis, iJTis, 8 Ti (or 8,Ti) : indef rel. 
 pron. : whoever or whichever, what- 
 ever ; who, which, what ; often with 
 conditional force, if anybody (=£! 
 Tis), if anything (=«II ti); Jcttiv 
 8o-Tis: there is who, somebody. 
 §§228,343. XXL 
 
 Srav = ore + av (§ 248. 2. «), conj. 
 with subjv. : when, luhenever (§ 400) . 
 XXIX. 
 
 8t£, rel. adv. : when, at the time when, 
 commonly with impf. indie; when- 
 ever, with opt. (§417). XVIII. 
 
 8ti, conj. : that, introducing a quota- 
 tion (§ 260); because, since (§310). 
 As adv., like ws, strengthens a 
 superlative. Thus 8ti. oLirapaerKevo- 
 TaTos : as unprepared as possible. 
 XXIV, XXXVII. 
 
 8 Ti or 8,Ti. : neut. of 8o-tis. 
 
 brov : see 8o-tis. 
 
 8t<j>: see 8o-tis. 
 
 ov, dat. ol, pi. o-<|>cis, indirect reflexive 
 of the third person : of himself, 
 to himself, etc. § 378 and a, 
 XXXVIII. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 379 
 
 ov, proclitic neg. adv. : noi; before 
 a vowel with smooth breathing, 
 w^ritten o4k; before a rough breath- 
 ing, ov\. At the end of a sen- 
 tence, oC. VI. oi, ovK, o^x, used 
 in interrogative sentence : noi; ex- 
 pects the answer jyes. Cp. Lat. 
 nonne. VII. 
 
 ovii (oi -\- 8^) : nor, not even; Lat. 
 ne . . . quidem. § 428. VIII. 
 
 ov8-eCs, oi8E-(i.£o, ov8-^v (oiSI + ets) : 
 nobody, no one, no, nothing, § 426. 
 ovSe'v : in no respect, not at all 
 (cp. § 284). XLIII. 
 
 o4k-€ti, adv.: no longer, no more. XVII. 
 
 oSv, postpositive particle : therefore, 
 accordingly, at any rate, XIV. 
 
 ov-irep (strengthened ou) : just where, 
 the very place where. 
 
 oii-iroTe, adv. . never. XXV. 
 
 oiJ-irw, adv. : not yet, never yet, XXXV. 
 
 oiJtc . . . ouT€ (ov -\- T€) ; neither , . , 
 nor. VIII. 
 
 ovTOS, avTi), toSto, dem. pron. : this, 
 this man, he, etc.; TOVTa: these 
 things, this (§ 177); Ik tovtod; 
 thereupon (§ 588). §§ 171, 172, 
 _i75. 176, 307-^ XV. 
 
 oiJto>(s), adv. (oijTos) : thus, in this 
 way (usually with reference to what 
 goes before), JO/ outus ex"'"' ^^^ 
 e'Xu. XXXVII. 
 
 6(|>6a\|ji<Ss, oO, 6 : eye. Ophthalmia. 
 
 ox^os, 01), 6 : crowd, throng; annoy- 
 ance, bother. XXXV. 
 
 c>i|/co'6ai : see opdu. 
 
 n 
 
 •ira7-KpiiTiov, ov, t6 (irets and KpAros) : 
 
 the pancratium, an athletic contest 
 
 composed of both boxing and 
 
 wrestling. 
 ird6(i> : 2 aor. subjv. of irdo-xw. 
 iraiovCJu, liraiovio-a : sing the paean 
 
 or war song. 
 
 irots, iraiSds, 6 and t| : child, boy, 
 girl; Ik iraCSuv: from boyhood 
 (§ 203). The gen. (and dat.) dual 
 is exceptionally accented nalSoiv, 
 and the gen. pi. 7ra(8(i>v. The voc. 
 sing, is irot. XVIII. 
 
 ')ra((i>, iraCo-(i>, {'iraicra, Tr^iraiKa, l'^'0^ 
 o-6i)v (o- is irregularly inserted) : 
 strike, smite, XII. 
 
 iraXaI(i>('R'dXT|),4'ird\aio-a, eira\a[(r6i)v 
 (o- is irregularly inserted) : wrestle, 
 
 irdXT], T|s, *n : wrestling, 
 
 TrdXiv, adv. -. back, again, X. 
 
 iroXriv, ov, t6 : javelin, used by bar- 
 barians; the Greek hoplite's spear 
 was called S6pv. V. 
 
 irdvT'fi, adv. (cp. iros) : on all sides. 
 
 irdvv, adv. (cp. irds) : wholly, alto- 
 gether, very. XXXIX. 
 
 irapd, prep. : with GEN. from the side 
 of; with DAT. by the side of, after 
 verbs of rest; with ACC. to the side 
 of, after verbs of motion; along; 
 contrary to. IX. 
 
 irap-a'Y'y^XXo) : give directions to, direct, 
 command, with dat. of pers. or ace. 
 of pers. and inf LV. 
 
 '7rapo-'YC7vonai : come {to"), be at hand, 
 be present. Cp. irdp-ci|U. XXXII. 
 
 irapa-81S(D|i.i : give over, surrender ; 
 pass along (a watch word: o-iiv- 
 eriHia). LVIII. 
 
 -irapatxi^p^Siov, ov, t6 : protection for 
 the thigh ; pi. thigh pieces, cuisses. 
 
 TTopao-dYYTis, ov, 6 : parasang, a Per- 
 sian measure of distance, about 3.3 
 English miles. Cp. our league (3 
 miles). XV. 
 
 irttpo-o-Kevd^o) (o-K£vd^oi, theme 
 o'KEva8-, prepare, a-KEvdcru, lo-Kev- 
 acra, C(rK£vao-)iai, lo-KEvdo'Siiv) : 
 
 . prepare, equip ; mid. make oneself 
 ready, prepare oneself; also prepare 
 for oneself. §§ 315. I, II, 467. a. 
 XXX. 
 
380 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 irdp-Ei|ii. («l|iO : l>e h'' ^^ "^ hand, be 
 present; attend, with dat. X. 
 
 irap-EXaiivai : drive past, drive by, 
 march past, ride past, XI. 
 
 7rap-^PX0|Jiai, 2 aor. irap-'fiXflov : go by, 
 go past. XLII. 
 
 irap-^Xio ; hold beside, furnish, provide, 
 supply : cause (§§ 405, 502). XIII. 
 
 irdpoSos, ou, Tj (irapd + 686s) : road 
 by or past, passage, pass. IX. 
 
 Hapvo-aTLs, 180s, T] : Parysatis, wife 
 of Darius II, king of Persia, and 
 mother of Artaxerxes II and Cyrus 
 the Younger. XXXI. 
 
 was, Trao-a, irdv: every (in sing.), all, 
 ■whole. §§ 289, 293. XXVIII. 
 
 Hclo-icov, uvos, 6 : Pasion, a Greek 
 general (from Megara) employed 
 by Cyrus. XLIII. 
 
 irio-X" (themes iraO-, irevO-, irovB-), 
 irc£o'0{j.ai (for irevO-coiiai), e-iraOov, 
 ireirovSa (§ 445) : suffer ; irA(rx<* 
 Ti (§ 181); suffer something, eu- 
 phemism for be hurt or be killed; 
 KaKus irdo-xeiv: to be injured; «{r 
 irdo-xeiv: to be treated kindly 
 (§ 537_)- _XXII. 
 
 IIoTTj'Yvas, a (Doric gen., for Attic ou), 
 6 : Pategyas, a Persian companion 
 of Cyrus. 
 
 iraTirip, iraTpSs, 6 : father, Lat. pater. 
 § 321. XXXI. 
 
 irarpfs, CSos, t] (cp. irar^jp) : father- 
 land. XXIX. 
 
 iraiu, iravcru, eiravo-o, •ir^iraDKO, ir^ 
 iravfiai,, eiravSrjv : make to stop, 
 stop (trans.), put an end to; mid. 
 stop oneself, cease, § 439. XXVI, 
 XXXII. 
 
 iraxis, €ia, i: thick in diameter. 
 XXVIII. 
 
 TreStov, ov, t6 : plain. § 49. II. 
 
 ire£6s, <), <iv: afoot, on foot ; 01 irc^oC: 
 the infantry. VII. 
 
 irtCBo.', TreCcrw, e-rrcKra (§ 164), ir^ireiKa 
 
 (§ 432./) and ir^TTOiOa (§ 445 and a), 
 ir^ireto-iitti, (§ 467), Iire£<r9r|v (§ 387. 
 2) : persuade ; MID. and PASS, ofojc, 
 with dat. § 487. I, XXXIX. 
 
 irEipdo|j.ai, ir£ipci(ro|j.ai, eirEipa(rdp,T]V| 
 irETreCpaiJLai, and 'eKi\,fAir\v : try, at- 
 tempt. § 518. a. LII. , 
 
 ireCo-op.ai : either (i) fut. of Trdo-x»> 
 suffer (Vocab. XXII) or (2) fut. 
 mid. of ireiBo) (Vocab. I) in mid. 
 meaning obey (with dat.). XXXII. 
 
 ireio-T&v (verbal adj. of ireCBoptai), 
 impers. : one must obey, with dat. 
 § 477. 2. XLVIII. 
 
 ircVd^u, ireXdiru and ireXw, lir^Xao-a, 
 eir€Xdo-6T]v : approach. 
 
 irtXTacTT^s, oB, 6 : a light-armed sol- 
 dier, peltast. See. p. 67, Fig. 4; 
 p. 117, Fig. 14. § 146. XII. 
 
 ir^jiiTTOs, i\, ov (irlvTe) : fifth, 
 
 •ni^ita (themes irep.ir-, iroiiir-) , •niy.i/in 
 (§ 153). «ir6H.+o (§ 164), ■ireirop.4)0 
 (§§ 445, 488), ir^irciiiiai (§ 465. ^), 
 lir^|j,^OT]v (§ 387. i) : send. § 487. I. 
 
 ircvTaKdo-ioi, ai, a (ir^vre) : ^w hun- 
 dred. XIX. 
 
 ir^vTe, indecl. : five. XIII. 
 
 ir€VT£-KoC-86Ka, indecl. ; five and ten, 
 fifteen, XXVII. 
 
 ir^pav, adv. : across, on the other side, 
 with gen. ; Iv tu irepav : on the other 
 side or bank. XXIII. 
 
 irepC (like irpd, never suffers elision 
 of the final vowel), prep. : with 
 GEN. about, concerning, for, as a 
 prize; with DAT. (not "common in 
 prose) around, about; with ACC. 
 around, about, near, in relation to. 
 XL 
 
 irepi-PdXXd) : throw around, throw 
 one's arms around, embrace. 
 
 ropo-r)s, 01), 6 : a Persian, Voc. 
 n^po-o. XXIV. 
 
 IIcpo-iKds, ■i\, 6v (ropo-tjs) ; Persian. 
 XXIV. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 381 
 
 irji, enclitic adv. : anywhere. XVII. 
 
 'irT)'Y<i, {)s, T| : spring of water; gener- 
 ally pi.: source. XXXII. 
 
 irijxvs, «<os, 6 : forearm, cubit, i \ 
 Greek feet. § 282. XXVII. 
 
 nC7pT]s, tlTos, 6: I'igres, interpreter 
 of Cyrus. 
 
 irtiTTu (themes ttst-, tft-, and irTiii-), 
 7re(raS)iai (for ir€Tfo|<ioi), Jireo-ov 
 (for «ir€Tov), ir^irTWKa : fall. See 
 KaTa-irfirTW. 
 
 IIio-CSoi, S>v, o\ : Pisidians, natives 
 of Pisidia. XII. 
 
 "irHTTiSs, ■(], iv (cp. ire(6ii>) : trust- 
 worthy, faithful ; iria-ra, fflv, tA, 
 neut. pi. subst. : fledges. Comp. 
 irio-TdTEpos, sup. irwrTdraTOs, § 35 1 . 
 a. VIII. 
 
 irX^Opov, ov, TO : plethrum, 100 Greek 
 feet. XXVII. 
 
 irXeto-TOs : see iroXi&s. 
 
 irXeCiav : see iroXiis. 
 
 irX^ci), irXsio-oiioi (also irXcucroiinoi, 
 contracted from "irXeD-cre-o-iiai), 
 ^'irX€ti(ra, Tr^irXEUKa, ir€'TrX€va'[J.ai 
 (<r is irregularly inserted) : sail. 
 §508. LI. 
 
 irXriSos, o«s, Td : crowd, throng, host, 
 multitude. LIII. 
 
 irXyjOti) (cp. irXfiflos) : be full; d|J.(|)l 
 d^opav irX'^floucrav : about the time 
 of full market, i.e. the middle of 
 the forenoon. 
 
 ■n-Xriv, adv. and conj. \ except, except 
 that ; prep, with gen. : except. 
 
 irX^pris, «s : full. Cp. Lat. ple-nus. 
 XXVII. 
 
 •rrXi](r£ov, adv. : near. 
 
 wXotov, ov, t6 (ttX^w) : boat. See 
 p. 36, Fig. 3. § 60. III. 
 
 irXoBs, ov, 6 (cp. irX^u) : voyage; a 
 sailing, sailing weather. L. 
 
 ir6S-^pt]S, €S : reaching to the feet. 
 
 irdOos, ov, 6 : desire, w itii gen. 
 
 iroi, interr. adv. : whi!her,-where? LVII. 
 
 TTOi^d), iroi<io-(D, liro(T)(ra, irETo(r|Ka, 
 irEiroCi]|j,ai, liroi^6r)v : do, make. 
 The mid. is translated like the act., 
 but implies in or for one's own in- 
 terest ; KaKus TTOieiv: do harm to, 
 injure, with ace. (§ 537). §§ 509, 
 622, 643. LI. 
 
 iroiT]T&s, o, ov (verbal adj. of iroi^u, 
 with k<ni orcIo-C expressed or under- 
 stood) : necessary to be done, must be 
 done. LIV. 
 
 TTOioov, pres. act. partic. of iroUa>: 
 making. Declined in § 622. 
 
 iroXepi^u (irdXcuos), ttoKi^i\<Tisi, eitoKi- 
 |iT|(ra, iTEiroX^iiTiKa, itenoKi^t[y.o.\., 
 l7roX6|i<i9T|v : wage war, make war 
 on, with dat. (§ 317), or irpds and 
 ace. LII. 
 
 ^aXEp,iKds, TJ, dv (irdXc|jios) : suited to 
 war, warlike ; hostile. LI. 
 
 iroX^liios, a, ov (irdXcuos) : of war, 
 hostile; oi iroX^fjiioi. (subst. adj.): 
 the enemy. Comp. iroXEfj.KiTEpos 
 (§540. L II). §117. IX. 
 
 irdXE|jios, ov, 6 : war. XXXVII. 
 
 irdXts, 6WS, T) : city. § 282. XXVII. 
 
 iroXXdKis, adv. (iroXils) : often. XLII. 
 
 iroXu, adv. (cp. iroXvs) : much, by 
 far. § 410. a. XXXVII. 
 
 iroXvs, iroXXifj, iroXv : much, many; 
 extensive, large; loud (of noise), 
 § 337- 2 ; 01 iroXXot: the many, the 
 most; TO iroXii tov 0'TpaTci)|jLaT0& : 
 the most of the army ; eirl iroXu : 
 over or for a long distance. Comp. 
 TrXeCwv or ttXcwv, sup. irXeto-Tos, 
 § 360. 7. irXeto-Toi: very many 
 (§ 533) ; 0^ irXeto-TOi : the most. 
 XXXIII, XXXVL 
 
 irdvTos, ov, 6: sea; h Ev|civo5 Hdv- 
 Tos : the Euxine or Black Sea. 
 
 irop£(a, OS, T| : journey. 
 
 n'opEvo|jiai, iropEio'0|iai, •nen6ftvy.a,\, 
 liropevflrjv (§ 389), dep. pass. : go, 
 proceed, travel. Cp. airopos, XXX. 
 
382 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 TTOpeur&s, a, ov (verbal adj. of iropeiio- 
 jiat) : necessary to be passed ove7; to 
 be traversed ; neut. impers. one must 
 proceed. § 477. ^. XLVIII. 
 
 iroTa|i6s, oB, 6 : river. § 56. III. 
 
 tiOTt, enclitic adv. of time : ever, at any 
 time, at some time, once on a time. 
 L. 
 
 irdTEpov (ir6TEpa) . . . tj, introducing 
 a double question, direct or in- 
 direct : whether . . . or. § 362. 
 XXXVI. 
 
 iroTov, ov, tit : drink. XLVII. 
 
 irou, indef. adv., enclitic : somewhere, 
 anywhere. XLVII. 
 
 iroiis, iroSds, 6 : foot. Also the Greek 
 unit of length. Lat. pes. §§ 195, 
 196, 198. XVIII. 
 
 irpd'Yiia, arcs, to (irpoTTw) ; some- 
 thing done, business, deed, matter, 
 difficulty; pi. sometimes circum- 
 stances, often trouble. XXII. 
 
 irp^TTO) (theme irpa'y-, § 218), "npai/a, 
 Eirpa^a, ir^irpa^a and ireirpaxa, 
 ir^-irpci'Yp.ai (§ 466. «), lirpoxO'Hv 
 (§ 3^7- i) ■ accomplish, effect, do; 
 farem^^S,p?,). XIX. 
 
 irp^trpELs, €0)v, 01 : ambassadors. The 
 nom. sing, is irpeo-pevT'ijs, oS, 6. 
 XXVII. 
 
 [irp^o-pus, poetic], comp. irpecrPiTepos 
 older, sup. irpeo-piraTos oldest, 
 § 351. c. Cp. pi. irp^o-peis. XXXV. 
 
 irpCacrSai: see eirpidp.T)v. 
 
 ■irpiv, temporal conj. : before, until ; 
 irpdo-Otv (Vocab. XXVI) . . . irpiv 
 = Lat. prius . . . quam : earlier 
 than, before. §§ 523, 524. LII. 
 
 irpd (like irepC, never suffers elision of 
 the final vowel), prep, vrith gen. 
 only ; before, in front of. Lat. pro. 
 XVII. 
 
 irp^Parov, ov, t<5: cattle, sheep. 
 XXXVL 
 
 CTpo-8(8uiu: betray. 
 
 irp6-»p.i («t|ii) : go forward, ad- 
 vance. 
 
 irpo-Epxo)<.ai, 2 aor. irpo-{]\6ov, 2 pf 
 irpo-<\^\v6a (§ 447) : go before, go 
 forward, proceed. XLV. 
 
 irpoGviJius (adv. of irpd6v)iios ready, 
 eager') : readily, eagerly, zealously. 
 Comp. irpo6vp,6TEpov, sup. irpoOu- 
 H.6TaTa. XXXVII. 
 
 irpo-6ija: sacrifice before; mid. offer 
 a preliminary sacrifice to ascer- 
 tain something for one's own in- 
 terest. 
 
 irpo-CSoiEv ; 2 aor. opt. of irpo-opdoi. 
 
 irpo-KaTa-Xa|ipdv<D : seize or occupy 
 beforehand. XLVII. 
 
 IIpdlEvcs, CD, 6 : Proxenus, a Theban 
 
 • general employed by Cyrus. XIV. 
 
 irpo-opdw, 2 aor. irpo-eiSov : see in 
 front of oneself, see approach- 
 ing. 
 
 irpo-ir^liiru : send forward or ahead. 
 XXX. 
 
 irp65, prep. : with GEN. froni the side 
 of, from, toward; irpos (twv) Oemv: 
 before the gods, in the sight of the 
 gods ; \\ith DAT. near, beside, in ad- 
 dition to; with ACC. to, toward, 
 against; with reference to (§ 335). 
 II, XXIX. 
 
 irpo(r-ava\C(rK(ii (dvaXCo-KU spend, 
 dva\<&o-<d, dv^Xwo'a, dv^XuKa, dv^- 
 Xcoixai, dvi^XtiBnv) : spend besides, 
 spend in addition. 
 
 'n'p6o--Ei,p,i (Et)i.i) : come on, advance. 
 
 irpoir-EXavvu : drive up, ride up, draw 
 near. XX. 
 
 'Trpoo--^p\op,ai : go to, come to, come up, 
 sometimes with dat. of pars, or with 
 Els and ace. XXXVI. 
 
 ■irpocr-^X"> with tov voiiv : direct the 
 mind to, with dat, L. 
 
 irpoir-'f|K<o : come to, reach to, pertain 
 to; pres. partic. related, with dat, 
 XXXI. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 383 
 
 lrp<Sir6ev, adv. (cp. irpcSs) : forward 
 (of space) : before, former (of 
 time); t) irpio-Oev (§ 70) vvlj: the 
 night before ; 6 irpdo-flev Xd^os : the 
 previous account (§ 533). XXVI. 
 TO irpdcrOtv (adv. ace.) : before, 
 formerly; els tA irpbcrBev: to the 
 front (§ 319). XXXVII. 
 
 irposr-Kuveai, irpocr-KiPv^aro), irpo<r-£Ki- 
 vT|<rtt : do homage to, salute. 
 
 irpo-OTTaT^o), irpo-e<rTATii<ra : stand 
 before, manage, with gen. 
 
 7rp6Tcpos, 0, ov : former, earlier 
 (§361). XXXVI. 
 
 TrpODSeBAKCo-ttv : contracted from irpo- 
 c8c8iiKE(rav, plup. of Trpo-SCSioiJii. 
 
 irpo-()>a[v(D : show forth; MiD. appear. 
 
 irpuTOS, 1], ov: first (§361); ol irpu- 
 TOi : the van (§ 375) ; adv. irpflrov ; 
 first (§ 284). XXIII. 
 
 iro'YH'^, fjs, T) : boxing. 
 
 Tn)Kv6s, 'i\, <iv : closely set, closely stand- 
 ing, closely planted. XXVIII. 
 
 iriiXr], t)s, T] : gate. XLVI. 
 
 irvvOdvo^ai (themes irevO-, in)8-, 
 cp. § 218), ■Kiv<TOy.a.\., liru66|jiT)v, 
 ir^Truo'p.at : inquire, ask ; learn, 
 perceive. §§ 44:, 442. XXXIX. 
 
 irOp, irupds, t6 : fire ; nvpd, rd : 
 watch fires. § 336. 3. XXXIII. 
 
 ■ir<4-iroT6, adv. of time : ever yet, ever. 
 LI. 
 
 irus, interr. adv. : how, in what way ? 
 LI. 
 
 P 
 
 pi^Sios, 3, ov: easy. Comp. ^dluv, 
 sup. p(^ToSi § 360. 8. XXXII. 
 
 s 
 
 o-dXiri'YS, 7709, T|: trumpet. See 
 
 p. 90, Fig. 8. XVII. 
 ZdpSeiS) euv, at: Sardis, a, city in 
 
 •Lydia. XXVII. 
 (raTpdinjSf ov, 6 : satrap, Persian 
 
 name for a provincial governor ap- 
 pointed by the king. XXIV. 
 o'auToO, fjs (contracted from o'cavToS, 
 
 f)s)i reflexive pron. of second person : 
 
 of yourself, etc. §§ 376. 2, 379. 
 
 XXXVIII. 
 o-eauTOV, f|s, reflexive pron. of second 
 
 person : of yourself, etc. §§ 376. 2, 
 
 379. XXXVIII. 
 SiXSvos, ov, 6 : Silanus, a soothsayer. 
 o-Xt£ov, ov, t<S (dim. of o-tros) : grain, 
 
 'food. XLVII. 
 o-Itos, ov, 6 : grain, food; in the pi. 
 
 the declension irregularly changes 
 
 to neut. o-iTtt, rd. IV. 
 tryeenriav (verbal adj. of o-K^irTo^iai), 
 
 impers. : it must be considered, one 
 
 must consider, with birciis clause 
 
 (§535)- §477- 2- XLVIII. 
 o-K^TO|iai., o-K^il/ojiai, 4o-Ke\|/d|iii|v, 
 
 eo-KE|ji|jiai, dep. mid. ; view, observe, 
 
 consider. The pres. and impf. are 
 
 rare in Attic. XXXIV. 
 o-KTiv^, fls, T) : tent. VI. 
 o'KT)vd(i> (o-K'nvi)), lo'K'^vwo'a, (Kar-) 
 
 eo-K^vuKa: stay in a tent, camp. 
 
 IJII. 
 o-KXT)pds, i., <5v : hard, rough ; 4v 
 
 o-kXtip^ : in a rough place. 
 o-k6tos, ovs, to: darkness. Also 6 
 
 o-K<STas, gen. ov. XXVIII. 
 <r6s, <ri\, <r6v (cp. o-ov, gen. of o"v) : 
 
 thy, your (sing."), yours. § 126. X. 
 So()>aCvETOs, ov, 0: Sophaenetus, a 
 
 Greek general, from Stymphalus 
 
 in Arcadia, employed by Cyrus. 
 
 XLIII. 
 o-irdvis, €(iis, ^ : scarcity, want, with 
 
 gen. 
 SirapTidngs, ov, i (SirdpTi) Sparta) : 
 
 a Spartan. 
 o'irEvSd) (theme (rirevS-), o"ir64o-«, 
 
 lo'irevo'a : urge on, hasten. XLII. 
 o-irovS^i, fjs, T| : libation; pi. truce, IX. 
 o-irovSf), fjs, T| (o-irevSu) : haste. 
 
•384 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 <rr6,S\,ov,ov,f6 : stadium (racecourse) : 
 then a measure of distance, stade, 600 
 Greek feet. PI. both o-rdSioi, 01, 
 and o-rASia, rd. See p. 95, Fig. 9. 
 XVII. 
 
 crTa6)i.6s, ov, 6 : dafs journey, stage ; 
 halting place (first meaning, but 
 less common). XI. 
 
 (TTevds, i\, 6v : narrow. IX. 
 
 (TTcpvov, ou, t6 ; breast, 
 
 crrlcjios, ovs, to : crowd. 
 
 o-TdXos, 01), 6 : expedition. IX. 
 
 CTpaTcCa, as, t| (o-TpaT€v(o) : expedi- 
 tion. LI. 
 
 OTTpdreuiio, aros, to (cp. o-TpaTio) : 
 army. §§ 195, 199. XVIII. 
 
 OTpaTtvo), o-TpaTeio-w, lo-TpdT6u<ra, 
 EfTTpaTEVKa (§ 432. f), €o-TpdT£V|iai : 
 make an expedition ; dep. MID. take 
 the field, serve in war. Cp. o-Tpd- 
 T6v-(jia, etc. XXXI. 
 
 CTTpaTT^^os, pv, 6 ; general. _III. 
 
 o-TpaTio, ds, T| : army. § 1 14. IX. 
 
 o-TpaTniTt)s, ou, 6 (o-TpaTid, etc.) : 
 soldier. § 146. XII. 
 
 iTTpaTOTrcSEvii) (o-TpaTbireSov) and 
 dep. mid. o'TpaToire8€iio|j.ai., eo-Tpa- 
 TOircSEV(rd|JiT]v, OTTpaToircSEVixai 
 (§ 456) : encamp. XL. -^ 
 
 CTpaTd-ireSov, ov, Td : camp. Cp. 
 (rTpdT6u(j,a. XXIX. 
 
 iTTfk^a (themes o-Tpe<|>-, o-Tpa<}>-), 
 0'Tp^i{/(i), €0-TpE\|/a, €a'Tpa|X)iai 
 (§ 490), £o-Tpd<t)Hv (§ 489) : ^Mrw ; 
 wheel about. §§ 409, 487. XLI. 
 
 crfi, o-ov : you (sing.), §§ 304, 306, 308. 
 XXIX. 
 
 (TVY-KaX^u (o-iv + Ko\4<i)) : call to- 
 gether. LV. 
 
 Sv^vvEcris, los (non-Attic gen.), 6: 
 Syennesis, king of Cilicia. 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 o^\-Xap,pdv<i) : take together, seize, ar- 
 rest. Cp. Lat. comprehends. § 465. 
 a. X. 
 
 o-uX-X^7<i), o-uX-X^fci), o-uv-^t|aj o-uv- 
 elXoxa (§ 448), o-DV-6(Xe7|iai., u-vv 
 iKi\9r\v and o-vv-6XeYT)v (§ 409) : 
 gather together, collect. This -\i^a 
 is a different verb from X^'yoi say. 
 §§415,487. XIV. 
 
 o-v|ii-|3ovX€iio> (o-tlv + povXetu) : plan 
 with, advise, with dat.; mid. con 
 suit (§ 514), with dat. XIV. 
 
 o-v|i-naxos, ov, o (((.dxT]) : fellow- 
 fighter, ally. XXVIII. 
 
 o-ijj.-'jras, ao-a, av (ffiiv + irds) : all 
 together, all, whole. XLIII. 
 
 o-Dji-ireiJiiro) (o-vv + Tti^ira) : send a 
 person (in ace.) with a person (in 
 dat.). X. 
 
 o-vp.-iropcvop.ai : proceed with, accom- 
 pany. XXXVII. 
 
 o-vlv, prep, with dat. only : with, with 
 the aid of. III. 
 
 o'uv-d'YQj : lead together, collect. XII. 
 
 (TDV-avTdo), o"vv'^vTir]0*a : meet. 
 
 o-vv-€lXi]p-H'^vos : see (rvX-Xa}iPdv(i). 
 
 o-uv-eCXoxo. : see o-«X-X^7<i>. 
 
 o-vv-EXa^ov: see o-uX-Xa)i.pdv<<>. 
 
 o-uv-6pxo|iai, 2 aor. o-uv-ilXflov : go or 
 come together, assemble. XLIII. 
 
 o-vv6T)|j.a, aTOS, t6 (o-vv-tC6ii||ii): agree- 
 ment; watchword. XXIX. 
 
 o-vv-TdTT«: draw up together, form in 
 line; uio.foz-m in line (intr.). 
 
 o-vv-tC9ii|11 : place or set together ; MIli. 
 place oneself in agreement with 
 somebody, agree with somebody 
 (dat.), make a compact. May be 
 followed by inf. of indir. disc, 
 LVII. 
 
 SupCa, OS, r) : Syria. XIX. 
 
 cu-CTKevd^w (o-vv + cKEvd^co, theme 
 o-K6iia8-, prepare, o-Kcvdo-oi, 
 lo-Ktvao-a, eo-KEvao'p.ai,, Icrxevd- 
 tr6T|v): viake ready (by getting things 
 together, o-w-), pack up, with 
 ace; MID. pack tip one's own bag- 
 gage, pack up. XXXIV. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 385 
 
 <rv-(rir{ipdo|iai, o-uv-Eo-ircCpaiiai, otjv- 
 co"ircipa8i)v : be coiled up together, be 
 drawn up in close array. 
 
 trv-o-TpaTcvu (o-vlv + trrpaTE^o)), usu- 
 ally dep. MID. <rv-o-TpaTEuo|i.ai : 
 take Ihe field with, serve in war 
 with, w ith dat. XXXI. 
 
 <ruxv6s, ■^, 6v : considerable, much. 
 
 o'(f>d-yiov, 01), Td : victim for a propi- 
 tiatory sacrifice; tA (r({><S.7ia: the 
 omens from the propitiatory sacri- 
 fices (a special offering). 
 
 o-tjicySbvi), 1)8, T): sling. See p. 112, 
 Fig. 13. XXI. 
 
 o-xeSiv, adv. : nearly; chiefly. 
 
 <r({i'£(i) (themes o-cp8- and o-w-), o-iSo-cn, 
 Jo-uo-a, o-^o-UKa, <r^(rii)(o-)(i,oi, eo-cS- 
 ^v : save ; MID. save oneself. XXX. 
 
 S(i)KpdTT|$, ovs, 6: Socrates, (i) the 
 Achaean, a general employed by 
 Cyrus; to be distinguished from 
 (2) the famous philosopher of 
 Athens. § 273. XXVI. 
 
 o-<iiT<)p, fjpos, 6 (tri^t/a) : savior. 
 
 o-UTTipta, as, i\ (o-MTfjp) : safety. 
 XX. 
 
 cuT'^pios, o, ov ((rcoT'iip) : bringing 
 safety, salutary. Neut. pi. o-uT^pta 
 
 ' (supply Upd) : thank-offerings for 
 safety. 
 
 T : see re. 
 
 rd p.^v . . . rd Si (cp. o, ti, T(i) ; some 
 
 . . , others. 
 
 rdXavTOv, ov, t6 : talent, an amount 
 of money = about $\o?a. XXIII. 
 
 Td|is, «<os, »! (rdTTw) : order, ar- 
 rangement; military line, column, 
 division ; iv toip, : in line. 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 rdpaxos, od, 6 (rapdrTd) stir up) : 
 disturbance, confusion. 
 
 'Sapa-ol, &i, ol : 'J'arsus, the chief city 
 of Cilicia. XXXIII. 
 
 beginner's gr. bk. — 25 
 
 rdTTCD (theme ro-y-, cp. § 182, note), 
 Td|(i), Srala, t^oxo, r^a^iiai 
 (§ 466). IrdxAriv: arrange, draw 
 up, marshal troops. XXXVIII. 
 
 ToiiTO : neut. pi. of ovrog. 
 
 Td(|>pos, oil, t) : ditch. IX. 
 
 rdxo or Tax^&iS, adv. : swiftly, quickly, 
 rapidly = rax*. Comp. OdxTov, 
 sup. Tdxio-TO, § 368. as (or »ti) 
 rdxto-To: as quickly as possible. 
 (§ 373); imi^ (or 4mi8dv) rd- 
 Xto-Ta: as soon as (§ 533). XXV. 
 
 rdxio-Tos : see toxvs. 
 
 Taxv, adv. : quickly, § 367. XXII. 
 
 Tox^s, eta, v: swift, quick. Comp. 
 S^TTiDv, sup. rdxiiTTOs, § 352. a. 
 Ttjv Tttxto-TTiv [686v] : by the quick- 
 est way {% -^^6). XXXV. 
 
 «, enclitic conj. : and; re . . . KaC: 
 both . , . and, VII. 
 
 T^OvTiKa (§ 432. b, d) : see Bvrfo-Kw 
 and diro-6vg'a-K(D, XLIV. 
 
 Teixos, o«s, t6: wall; fortress. 
 XXVI. 
 
 T^Kvov, o«, t6 : ^;^z7(/. XLII. 
 
 TeXeurdio (j0^vTi\ end), tcXcvt^o-oi, 
 eT«\eiiTt]o-o, TereXeuTiiKa, hn\iVTi\- 
 6t\v: end, finish, die. LIII. 
 
 T^Xos, ous, t6 : *«(/. As adv. ace. i 
 /««//)/ (§ 284). XXVII. 
 
 TcrpaKio-xtXioi,, 01, a : four thousand, 
 
 §421. 
 
 rtrTOLpt^, a: four, §§421,425. 
 
 Ttypris, TITOS, 6 : Tigris, a great river 
 of western Asia. L. 
 
 tiOeCs, pres. act. fartic. of tC6t|p,i,: 
 placing. Declined in § 620. 
 
 T£9r](j.i, 6^o-(i), ^6i)Ka and eSerov, t^ 
 6i]Ka, lTe'6t)v: /«/, Jif/. The pf. 
 pass, is supplied by KEifiai. t(6e- 
 o-6ai rd oirXa : set down one's arms, 
 rest on^s arms on the ground; 
 therefore (i) take a military posi- 
 tion, take one's post; (2) hall. 
 §§ 559. 560.. 620, 646. LVII. 
 
386 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Ti|i,(i(i> (Tt(i^), Ti|i^(r<o, lT{|j.r]<ra, xerf- 
 )i,T]Ka, rertii.r\\i.a.i, lTl(ji<)9r|v : honor. 
 §§ 518, 622, 643. LII. 
 
 Ti(i,<], <)s, T) : honor. XXXIX. 
 
 Ti(jiSv, pres. act. partic. of Ti)i.d(D: 
 honoring. Declined in § 622. 
 
 Tis, Ti, interr. pron. : who ? which ? 
 what? t£: what? often as adv: 
 why? (§ 284). §§ 226, 343. XXI. 
 
 Tis, Ti, enclitic indef. pron. : any, some, 
 anybody, somebody, anything, so-me- 
 thing ; a certain. § 227. XXI. 
 
 Ttco-af^epvTis, ODS, 6 ; Tissaphernes, a 
 Persian satrap. § 273. b. XXVI. 
 
 TiTp(i(rK<i> (theme rpw-, reduplicated 
 in pres. xL-rpw, and with the pres. 
 suffix (rK%), rpdia-a, ETpaxra, Tirpu- 
 |xai, eTp(S6T)v : wound. XLVI. 
 
 t6 : see 6; to Ka0' a{)TOvs: the divi- 
 sion opposite themselves (§ 526). 
 11. 
 
 TOi--yap-ovv, strong particle of infer- 
 ence : therefore. XXXIX. 
 
 Totvuv, inferential particle, post-posi- 
 tive : therefore, then. LIII. 
 
 TOiovTOs, TOiavrT], ToiovTO (declined 
 like 01JTOS, § 171), dem. pron.: of 
 such a sort, such, often understood 
 or expressed as antecedent of olos. 
 toioStos otos : such as. The neut. 
 is also toioBtov as well as toioBto. 
 Cp. Lat. talis. LIV. 
 
 T6|Ev|j,a, OTOS, t4 (Tojeici)) : arrow. 
 XVIII. 
 
 •to\<Aii>, To^iiTop.a,\,, 4Td|€V(ra, retiifxi- 
 |jiai, €To|€i?6nv : shoot with bow (t6- 
 Jov) and arrow. XLVI. 
 
 Tijov, 01), T<S : bow. XXXIII. 
 
 Tojirns, ov, 6 (t6|ov) : bowman. 
 See p. 68, Fig. 5. § 146. XII. 
 
 riiros, o«, 6 : place. L. 
 
 too"o€tos, Too"aiiT7|, TOtroOro (de- 
 clined like 01JTOS, § 171), dem. 
 pron. : so much, so great, so many ; 
 often followed by correlative word 
 
 like 8o-os as. The neut. is also 
 Too-ovTov as well as too-oBto. Cp. 
 Lat. iantus. XLV. 
 
 t6«, adv. of time : then, at that time, 
 XXIV. 
 
 TpaireJoivTios, o, ov (TpatreJoBs) : 
 Trapezuiitian. Subst. nom. pi. the 
 Trapezuntians. 
 
 Tpairc^oBs, oBvtos, t] : Trapezus, a 
 Greek city on the Euxine Sea, 
 modern Trebizond. 
 
 Tpeis, Tp£a: three, §§421,424. Cp. 
 Lat. tres. 
 
 Tpiira (themes rpoir-, rpeir-, rpoir-), 
 Tpi^a, ETpEi|/a and CTpoirov, t^ 
 Tpo(j>a and T^Tpa<|>a, T^pa|i)iai 
 (§ 490), lTp£<j>9t]v and Irpairriv 
 (§§ 4°9) 489): turn; Tpt'iru «ls 
 ^yf\v: put to flight. There are 
 two aorists in the mid. voice also : 
 IrpEilfciiiTiv and eTpairdiinv. XIV. 
 
 Tp^4>a> (themes Tpo<|)-, Tp6(J>-, Tpa<)>-, 
 for 6po4>-, etc.), 6p^\|/ci), e6p£i|/a, ri- 
 Tpo<4>a, T(Bpa)i,)i.ai (§ 490), lTpd4>T|v 
 (§ 4°9) '• fi^'^i support, rear. XLI. 
 
 TpE'xd), fut. Spap,oBp.ai, 2 aor. ESpajiov 
 (XI), pf. Se8pdp.i]Ka, mid. SeSpdiii]- 
 |j.ai: run. XXIII. 
 
 TpiaKovra, indecl. (rpels) : thirty. 
 §421. 
 
 rpiaKoo-ioi, ai, a: three hundred. 
 § 421. 
 
 Tpi^pT)s, ovs, T) : trireme. Seep. 125, 
 Fig- 15; P- 132. Fig- '6. §274. 
 XXVI. 
 
 Tpio--xt\ioi, ai, a: three thousand. 
 §421. 
 
 TpCros, 11, ov (Tpets) : third ; t^ 
 TptT'd [iiiiipij.] : on the third day, 
 
 Tpoir^, Tjs, T) (rp^iro)) : rout. 
 
 Tpiiros, ov, 6 (rp^irci)) : turn, manner, 
 method, character. LI. 
 
 Tpw-Tiis, % ov (verbal adj. of Tirpei- 
 o-K<o) : able to be woundfd, vulner- 
 able. XLVIII. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 387 
 
 rvy\&va (themes t6«x-) '"'X-t '"'X1"» 
 § 2i8),T«<i|o(»,oi, 6TVXOV, TerixnKo: 
 Ai(, with gen.; happen, chance, with 
 supplementary partic. XIX. 
 
 vSup, vSaros, t6 : water; rain. § 336, 
 4. XXXIII. 
 
 5(1615 : you (pi.), see <r4, § 304. 
 
 vpi^TEpos, a, ov (v|i€ls) : your (pi.), 
 yours. § 126. X. 
 
 iir-dpxo): begin, j«/*/o?-^,i«?-w, with dat. 
 
 vite'p, prep.: with GEN. over, above; 
 on behalf of ; with ACC. over, beyond. 
 XXIX. 
 
 {iiTEppoX^, fis, T) (uTrep-PaWo) hurl over, 
 pass over) : passing ov&x,pass. XLI V. 
 
 i-mipeTT]?, ov, 6 : servant, helper, sup- 
 porter. XXXIX. 
 
 inr-iirxvfo|j[,ai (i<r\a, strong form of 
 «X<i), with pres. suffix v€-), -uiro- 
 o-x^<ro|iai, \nr-i<ryijaf,T\v, inr-tcrxi- 
 p,ai: undertake, promise, with inf. 
 
 §519. LII. 
 
 4ir6, prep. ; with GEN. from under, 
 by (with pass, verb, § 390) ; because 
 of, from ; with DAT. under, beneath 
 (with verbs of rest); with ACC. »«afe?- 
 (with verbs of motion). XXXIX. 
 
 inro-JvYiov, od, to (Ju'ydv yoke") : some- 
 thing under the yoke, beast of bur- 
 den. XLVIII. 
 
 viro-X'i>p^i' (x^P^™ S^'"^ place, with- 
 draw, x<i>P''i'''*>, «X<4p'|0'a, KtX"*- 
 pr|Ka, Kcxtipniiai, 4x'*P'i8l'') = ''^- 
 treat. 
 
 {iiroi|<Ca, OS, T| : suspicion. XXIV. 
 
 4(rT€paios, a, ov: later, following; 
 rfi va-T£pat(;i (supply Tl|i^p^) : on the 
 following day (§ 180) ; ets tiiv 6<rT€- 
 paCav (tin^pav) : on the morrow, on 
 the following day {^'^i^'). XV. 
 
 vo-Tcpos, a, ov: later (§ 361); -iio-Te- 
 pov, adv. ace. : later. XXXVI. 
 
 * 
 
 4>aCv(i> (for <t>av-|-yo), theme <|)ov-), 
 i|>avfi, eij"!"'*) '"■^'fr'nva (Jiave ap- 
 peared"), ire<|>a<r|iai, I(|>dv6r|v {was 
 shown) and l<|>dvr|v (appeared) : 
 bring to light, show; mid. and 
 PASS, usually appear. In mid. and 
 pass, the verb may take a supple- 
 mentary partic. like 8riX.6s Io-ti(v) 
 (§ 449)- §§ 541, 542. 644, 645. 
 LV. 
 
 (fiiiXa'Y^, a-y^os, t| : line of battle, 
 phalanx. § 187. XVII. 
 
 <{>av(pds, d, <5v : visible, clear, evident. 
 _§449. XLV. 
 
 4>oo'C(v) : they say: see <|>t||xC. VIII. 
 
 <|>ep(i> (themes <t>tp-, 0I-, Iv€k-, Ive^K-), 
 o\!o-fo, -qvc-yKa or Tive-yKov, ev^voxo-, 
 i\ifiif\l^<u,, T|V€'xflT]v: bear, carry; 
 carry away, receive (as pay). Cp. 
 Lat. fero. LX. 
 
 (|>cvY(o (themes <|>««Y-, <|>i'7-), <t>evSo- 
 p,ai or (t>ev|ovp.ai (for 4>£v^£0|xai), 
 J(j)i)Yov, vi^fMr^a. (§ 445) : flee, flee 
 from, avoid, shun. \ja!i. fugio. V. 
 
 (|iT]-p.C (theme <|>a-), ^i^ia, Ei|>i]0'a: 
 say, declare ; oii ^'^{y.^ : deny, say 
 . . . not (§ 156. I. a). With inf. 
 §§ no, 652. Cp. Lat. fdri. LX. 
 
 <|)T|o-£(v) : he says; see iJ>il|J.C. VIII. 
 
 (t>6E770|i.ai., (|>6E7^o|i.ai, l(|>6£7|dp,r|v, . 
 c<j>6£YH'<>'>' : shout. 
 
 <)>iXCa, OS, T) (<|)(Xos) : friendship. 
 XL. 
 
 cf>i\o-viKCa, OS, T) (<t>C\o5 and viKi]) : 
 striving for victory, rivalry. 
 
 (filXos, T|, ov : friendly. Subst. <|>C\os, 
 ov, 6 : friend. § 48. II, VIII. 
 
 c|>oPcpi5s, 0, 6v (<j)6pos) : fearful, ter- 
 rible. Comp. <)>oPEp(iT£pOS, sup. l|>0- 
 
 P«piliTOTOs, § 351. b. XXXV. 
 (fioPEpus, adv. (4>op6p6s) ; fearfully. 
 Comp. ({>oPcp(6T«pov, sup. ijioPcpii- 
 TOTO, § 368. XXXVII. 
 
388 
 
 BEGINNER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 <}>o^u (<|>6Po5)j ^Pi\<r(i>, i^Px]<ra, 
 irc<j)6pT||iai, l<t>op^9i]v : frighten ; 
 MID. with dep. aor. pass. : be afraid, 
 fear. The mid. forms are common 
 (<|>oPEO|i,ai, ^o^i\iro^ax, irc(|)6Pi]|iai, 
 e(J)oPTJflT)v) . LI. 
 
 <|)6Pos, ov, 6 ; fear. VII. 
 
 4>pD7Co, as, T) : Phrygia. LVI, 
 
 <|>u7a.s, A8os, 6 ((jiei^w) : fugitive, 
 exile. XVIII. 
 
 (|>v'Y'^, %, r| ((|>EV7(i>) : flight; (tniYfi '■ 
 in flight. XII. 
 
 ct>v\aKTi, fjs, T| ((jjuXdrTtt)) : guard, 
 garrison ; (t>vXaKas •('^^•'■''"'■eiv : to 
 do guard duty (§ i8i). VI. 
 
 (|>vXa|, aKOs, 6 ({t»)\«iTTCi>) : guard, 
 sentinel. XVII. 
 
 <{>vXaTT(i> (theme <|>v\aK-, § 182, note), 
 <|>vXd|<o, l((>v\a|a, ttt^vKti.yjk, t:i^v- 
 Xa^jjiai (§ 462. 2), £(|>uX<lx9^v : 
 guard; MID. guard oneself, be on 
 one's guard {against, with ace.). 
 XV, XXX. 
 
 ijxDvfj, f[%, T| (cp. <j)0-, <|>i||Ji.C) : voice. 
 LIV. 
 
 X<i\€iris, 'f\, <Sv : hard., difficult, harsh, 
 severe. Comp. X'*^'''''''''''P''S, sup. 
 Xo\tir(iTOTOs, § 351. (^. XXXV. 
 
 XdXos, 01), 6 : Chains, a river in 
 Syiia. XXVII. 
 
 Xa-. ''pa, OS, T) : ravine. XLIV. 
 
 XapC£o|ji,ai (theme xa.pi8-), x'^p^'Ovfiai 
 (§ 543), exapi(rd|ii)v, Kexdpi<rH.ai, 
 dep. mid. : show a favor to some- 
 body (dat.), gratify, grant some- 
 thing (ace.) to somebody (dat.) as 
 a favor. Cp. X^P^S. XXXIV. 
 
 Xdpis, iTos, r\ : grace, favor, gratitude ; 
 Xdpiv ^6iv : to feel thankful, with 
 dat. §§195,197- XVIII. 
 
 XeCp, x^^P'is* '1 ■ hand. § 336. 2. 
 XXXIIT. 
 
 X(tp(a'0(t>os, ov, 6 : Cheirisophus, 
 
 a Spartan general. See pp. 264> 
 
 265. XII. 
 XtXioi, ai, a : thousand. XVII. 
 XiXos, ov, 6 : grass, green fodder, 
 
 XXI. 
 XiiSv, dvos, T| : snow. XXXIV. 
 Xpdofxai, xP'^o'op'ai, 4xp^o'd|i,r)v, k4- 
 
 Xpiip.ai., with pass, aor. exP^O'^T': 
 
 use, have the service of, «ith dat. of 
 
 means; cp. Lat. iitor with abl. 
 
 In contract forms xpdofiai has i] for 
 
 s(§5i7)- §5i8-«- LII. 
 
 XP^ (ott£ is understood, but never ex- 
 pressed) : there is need, it be- 
 hooves, it is necessary; one must. 
 Inf. xP'ivai. § 223. XX. 
 
 Xpfjiio, arcs, Td (xpdojioi) : a thing 
 of use; commonly pi., possessions, 
 money, wealth. XIX. 
 
 XP'^o'ip.os, T], ov or xp^o-ijios, ov 
 (xpdopiai) : useful. XXI. 
 
 Xpdvos, ov, 6 : time. XXXIX. 
 
 Xpvo-£ov, ov, TO : gold. XIV. 
 
 Xpvo-ovs, % ovv: golden, of gold, gold. 
 § 609. L. 
 
 X<ipa, as, ■f) : country, place, post, 
 land. § 115. IX. 
 
 XupCov, ov, TO : place, stronghold. IV. 
 
 Xup£s, adv.; apart; prep, with gen.: 
 apart from. XXXVIII. 
 
 ■9 
 
 i|/l\ds, % ov : bare, unprotected; light- 
 armed. XLVI. 
 
 n 
 
 w, interj. ; 0, often preceding the 
 
 vuc. case. IV. 
 loSe, adv. (cp. oSe) : thus, as follows. 
 
 XXXVIII. 
 <i!^6i]y : see o(o|j.ai. 
 div, ovo-a, &v, pics, partic. of etpiC: 
 
 being. Declined in § 205. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 
 
 389 
 
 fipS, OS, r\ : season, hour; fit ox proper 
 time ; Stfia, (ItrrCv) : it is the proper 
 time, it is high time, with inf. 
 (§ 230). L.at. hora. XXI. 
 
 ds, (l) rel. adv. (cp. iis) : introducing 
 a comparison, as; with causal partic, 
 as, as if (§§ 213. a, 401. b'); with 
 partic. of purpose, as if, apparently 
 (§332); with numerals, afoa/; of 
 degree, how, in what way (§§ 312, 
 533) > with sup. to express the very 
 highest degree, cp. Lat. quam with 
 sup.; thus (!)s (laKpdTaTos : as long 
 as possible (§ 358) ; ais tAxktto : 
 as quickly as possible ; us (idXicTTO : 
 as much as possible (§ 373). 
 (2) Conj. : of time, as, when; intro- 
 
 ducing a quotation, that (§ 260) ; 
 introducing a purpose clause, in or- 
 der that, that (§§ 243, 268); intro- 
 ducing the inf. like 'iam, so as. 
 (3) As prep, with ace. : to, used 
 only with names of persons and 
 Pao-i\eis, king of Persia. XXII, 
 XXIV, XXVI, XXVIII, XXXV. 
 
 us = OTjTus. 0^8* cis : not even thus, 
 i.e. not even under the?e circum- 
 stances. 
 
 ucrirep, rel. adv. -. just as, as, as if, like. 
 XLI. 
 
 uo-T€, conJ. : so that, so as, therefore, 
 with indie, or inf. § 147. XII. 
 
 u(|>€\ov: /o;^/^/, used in wishes; see 
 §586. 
 
ENGLISH INDEX 
 
 Supplementary to the Table of Contents, pp. 11-15, 
 References are to sections. 
 
 (Vccent, 12-19 > °f a-stems, 94, 95 ; of 
 o-stems, 57-59, 61 ; of monosyllables 
 of the consonant declension, 189 ; 
 of verbs, 44 ; of contracted syllables, 
 271.*, 504,505. 
 
 Accusative case, summary of uses of, 
 658. 
 
 Agent, with pass, verb, 390, 458 ; 
 vfith verbal in -t&s, 478. 
 
 Agreement, rules of, 53. h, i,j, k, 71, 
 
 135. 285- 
 
 Aorist indie, and inf., meaning of, 84. 
 
 Article, uses of, 54,89, 143, 281 (foot- 
 note l), 292, 427. See also Attribu- 
 tive position and Predicate position. 
 
 Asking, verbs of, 675. 
 
 Aspiration, 31. 
 
 Attraction of the rel. pron., 285. 
 
 Attributive phrases, 70. 
 
 Attributive position, 67, 69 ; of poss. 
 adj., 126 ; of poss. gen., 72 ; of poss. 
 gen. of reflexive pron., 379 ; of name 
 of river, 178. 
 
 Augment, 77-79 ; verbs with irreg., 
 674. 
 
 Breathings, 3, 19. 
 
 Compound verbs, 138-132. 
 
 Conditional rel. protases, 248, 400, 
 417,418. 
 
 Conditions, summary of forms of, 668. 
 
 Contraction, principles of, 271. a, 
 353. a, 498, 504, 507, 508, 516, 517, 
 5*8, SS2- 
 
 Correlative pronouns and adverbs, 
 
 638. 
 Crasis, 30. 
 
 Dative case, summary of uses of, 660. 
 Deponent verbs, 316. 
 Deponent pass, verbs, 389 ; list of, 673. 
 Diaeresis, mark of, 19. a. 
 Double questions, 362, 363. 
 Elision, 29. 
 
 Enclitics, 21, 103-105, 305. 
 Euphonic rules : see Rules of euphony. 
 Genitive case, summary of uses of, 659. 
 Imperative mood, summary of uses of, 
 
 664 ; meaning of tenses of, 303. 
 Indicative mood in dependent clauses, 
 
 summary of uses of, 661. 
 Indirect disc, no, 156. i, 260-262, 
 
 276, 277, 391, 441, 442, 449, 512, 
 
 519. a, 520, 530, 531, 546; summary 
 
 of constructions of, 669, 
 Indirect questions, 343-345. 
 Infinitive, summary of uses of, 665 ; 
 
 tenses of, 84, no. a, 156. I. 
 Liquids, 27. 
 Middle voice, 315 ; some verbs whose 
 
 meanings change in the, 671. 
 Mutes, classes of, 27, 28. 
 Negations, emphatic, 428. 
 Negative with inf., 98, no. e, 223. c ; 
 
 for neg. with other constructions, 
 
 see (j.^ and ov in Greek-£ng. 
 
 Vocab. 
 Numerals, 421 
 
 391 
 
392 
 
 BEGINI<JER'S GREEK BOOK 
 
 Object clenses, after verbs of fearing, 
 
 438 ; after verbs of striving, 535 
 
 and a. 
 Optative mood, summary of uses of, 
 
 663 ; meaning of tenses of, 259. 
 Participles, summary of uses of, 666 ; 
 
 meaning of tenses of, 214, 441. 
 Passive voice expressed by a change 
 
 of verb, 672. 
 Personal endings ofj^erbs, 639. 
 Personal use of X^'yeroi, 391 ; of Sok^u, 
 
 512. 
 Predicate position, 68, 69; of dem. 
 
 pron., 176; of |j.4<ros, 192; of ircls, 
 
 293; of poss. gen. of personal pron., 
 
 308. 
 Predicate subst. veithout the art., 
 
 107. 
 Principal parts of verbs, 485-487. 
 Proclitics, 20, 105. 
 Prohibitions, 309. 
 Purpose, how expressed, 667. 
 
 Questions: see Double questions. In- 
 direct questions, o4 in Greek-Eng. 
 Vocab., and 33. 
 
 Recessive accent, 44. 
 
 Reduplication, 432, 447, 448- 
 
 Result clauses, 147. 
 
 Rules of euphony : v before other con- 
 sonants, 133 ; mutes before c-, 153 ; 
 mutes before mutes, 387; mutes 
 before |i, 462 ; cr dropped between 
 two consonants, 463. 
 
 Subjunctive mood, summary of uses 
 of, 662 ; meaning of tenses of, 240. 
 
 Suffixes used in forming nouns and 
 adjectives, 491-496. 
 
 Syllables, division of, 8, 9, 132. 
 
 Synopsis of the co-verb, 482-484. 
 
 Tenses, primary and secondary, 39. 
 
 Thematic vowel, 41. 
 
 Theme of verb, 40. 
 
 Vowel changes in themes, 488-490. 
 
 Wishes, 584-586. 
 
2, -a-vfc&rt/^^w-^ - 
 
 »ST^ 
 
 
 
All books are subject to recall after two weeks. 
 OUNUBRARY- CIRCULATION 
 DATE DUE 
 
 
 
 
 
 ml iiidiii 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pHASt 
 
 :0 . 
 
 .a^^t 
 
 
 r 
 
 ^eB\of 
 
 iAr\0N 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 
 
 
 i- 
 
 KAiilLt 
 
 DOES H\ 
 
 }i 
 
 
 ClPxC 
 
 J LATE 
 
 
 « n 
 
 SiQOC 
 
 
 
 ^'^^nnr'"" 
 
 
 
 
 
 1^68^- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 GAYLORD 
 
 
 
 PRINTED IN U.S.A. 
 
 
 "T! 
 
 
 :3D 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 - a? 
 
 - 
 
 r- 
 
 o 
 
 TO.' 
 
 r- 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 PHASED Qommtkvmiim